Contents

Chapter 1: Getting Started ..............................................................................................1

Welcome ..............................................................................................................................................................................................1
About this Guide................................................................................................................................................................................1
System Requirements ........................................................................................................................................................................1
Uninstalling a Previous Version ......................................................................................................................................................2
Installing the Program.......................................................................................................................................................................3
Starting the Program .........................................................................................................................................................................3
Registering Your Product .................................................................................................................................................................3
Starting a New Project.......................................................................................................................................................................4
Starting New Projects from a Specific Template ...........................................................................................................................4
Starting New Projects Without Using Templates .........................................................................................................................4
Enabling Template Selection at Project Startup.............................................................................................................................5
Viewing Sample Projects...................................................................................................................................................................5
Selecting a Unit of Measure..............................................................................................................................................................5
Suppressing Trailing Zeros in Measurements...............................................................................................................................6
Adjusting Your Display Settings .....................................................................................................................................................6
Suppressing Metric Units in Dialogs ..............................................................................................................................................6
Online Help.........................................................................................................................................................................................7
Context-sensitive Help ......................................................................................................................................................................7
Tutor.....................................................................................................................................................................................................7
Glossary of Terms ..............................................................................................................................................................................8
Technical Support ..............................................................................................................................................................................8
Using Keyboard Shortcuts................................................................................................................................................................8

Chapter 2: Touring the Workspace ................................................................................9

Menus ..................................................................................................................................................................................................9
Toolbars and Toolbar Tabs .............................................................................................................................................................10
Building Toolbar ..............................................................................................................................................................................10
Interiors Toolbar...............................................................................................................................................................................10
Landscape Toolbar...........................................................................................................................................................................10
Terrain Toolbar.................................................................................................................................................................................10
View Control Toolbar......................................................................................................................................................................11
Zoom and Navigate Toolbar ..........................................................................................................................................................11
Navigator ..........................................................................................................................................................................................11
Scroll Bars..........................................................................................................................................................................................11
Catalog Panel ....................................................................................................................................................................................11
Status Bar...........................................................................................................................................................................................13
Auto Scroll ........................................................................................................................................................................................13
Searching the Catalog......................................................................................................................................................................13

Chapter 3: Drawing & Editing Basics...........................................................................15

Inserting Elements ...........................................................................................................................................................................15
Selecting an Insertion Method for Line-Drawn Elements..........................................................................................................15

iii
 Contents

Selecting an Insertion Method for Single-Click Elements..........................................................................................................16

Repeating the Insertion of a Line-Drawn Element......................................................................................................................16
Using Space as Enter .......................................................................................................................................................................16
Going into Selection Mode for Editing .........................................................................................................................................16
Enabling/Disabling Screen Tips....................................................................................................................................................16
Selecting Elements for Editing .......................................................................................................................................................17
Deselecting Elements.......................................................................................................................................................................17
Making Elements on All Locations Selectable in 2D ..................................................................................................................18
Accessing Edit Tools........................................................................................................................................................................18

Chapter 4: Building Locations...................................................................................... 19

Defining Building Locations...........................................................................................................................................................19
Adding a Building Location ...........................................................................................................................................................20
Making a Building Location Current ............................................................................................................................................21
Allowing a Different Current Location Per View Window.......................................................................................................21
Location Dimming ...........................................................................................................................................................................21

Chapter 5: House Builder Wizard................................................................................... 1

Using the House Builder Wizard.....................................................................................................................................................1
Launching the House Builder Wizard Automatically at Startup ...............................................................................................4
Creating a Custom House Builder Wizard Configuration ..........................................................................................................4

Chapter 6: Walls............................................................................................................... 7
Drawing Walls....................................................................................................................................................................................7
Drawing Walls....................................................................................................................................................................................7
Drawing Walls from an Offset Baseline .........................................................................................................................................8
Adding a Story ...................................................................................................................................................................................8
Using the Floor and Foundation Builder Wizard .........................................................................................................................9
Solid Filling Walls and Other Elements........................................................................................................................................11
Editing Solid Fill Colors ..................................................................................................................................................................12
Disabling Solid Fill for Individual Elements................................................................................................................................12
Editing Walls ....................................................................................................................................................................................12
Resizing a Wall Layout ...................................................................................................................................................................13
Lengthening and Shortening Walls...............................................................................................................................................13
Editing the Width of a Wall............................................................................................................................................................14
Editing the Height of a Wall...........................................................................................................................................................14
Raising or Lowering a Wall ............................................................................................................................................................15
Sloping a Wall...................................................................................................................................................................................15
Stepping a Wall ................................................................................................................................................................................15
Extending Walls to the Roof...........................................................................................................................................................16
Making Walls Level .........................................................................................................................................................................16
Moving Walls....................................................................................................................................................................................16
Rotating a Wall .................................................................................................................................................................................17
Curving a Wall .................................................................................................................................................................................17
Offsetting a Wall ..............................................................................................................................................................................17
Breaking a Wall ................................................................................................................................................................................18
Breaking a Wall into Specific Lengths ..........................................................................................................................................18
Moving Wall Breaks ........................................................................................................................................................................18

iv
 Contents

Deleting a Wall .................................................................................................................................................................................19

Paint & Trim .....................................................................................................................................................................................19
Applying Different Materials to Walls .........................................................................................................................................19
Adding Paint and Wallpaper .........................................................................................................................................................20
Adding Trim to Walls......................................................................................................................................................................20
Applying a Profile to Trim .............................................................................................................................................................21
Corner Details...................................................................................................................................................................................21
Adding Corner Details to Walls ....................................................................................................................................................21
Editing Corner Details.....................................................................................................................................................................21
Deleting Corner Details...................................................................................................................................................................22
Chapter 7: Footings & Columns ...................................................................................23
Strip Footings....................................................................................................................................................................................23
Attaching Strip Footings to Walls..................................................................................................................................................23
Editing the Shape of a Strip Footing .............................................................................................................................................23
Editing the Size of Strip Footings ..................................................................................................................................................24
Moving/Stretching Strip Footings ................................................................................................................................................24
Lengthening and Shortening Strip Footings................................................................................................................................24
Breaking Strip Footings...................................................................................................................................................................24
Curving Strip Footings....................................................................................................................................................................24
Deleting Strip Footings....................................................................................................................................................................25
Mono Footings..................................................................................................................................................................................25
Attaching Mono Footings to Columns..........................................................................................................................................25
Editing the Mono Footing Type.....................................................................................................................................................25
Editing the Size of Mono Footings ................................................................................................................................................26
Moving Mono Footings...................................................................................................................................................................26
Rotating Mono Footings..................................................................................................................................................................26
Deleting Mono Footings..................................................................................................................................................................26
Columns ............................................................................................................................................................................................26
Inserting Columns ...........................................................................................................................................................................26
Editing the Shape of a Column ......................................................................................................................................................27
Editing the Dimensions of a Column............................................................................................................................................27
Editing the Elevation of a Column ................................................................................................................................................27
Moving a Column ............................................................................................................................................................................27
Deleting a Column ...........................................................................................................................................................................28

Chapter 8: Doors, Windows & Openings.....................................................................29

Doors..................................................................................................................................................................................................29
Inserting Doors.................................................................................................................................................................................29
Inserting Doors, Windows and Openings to Center ..................................................................................................................29
Inserting Doors, Windows and Openings to Edge .....................................................................................................................30
Moving a Door .................................................................................................................................................................................30
Flipping a Door ................................................................................................................................................................................30
Flipping a Door Swing ....................................................................................................................................................................30
Editing Door Swing Properties ......................................................................................................................................................30
Raising or Lowering a Door ...........................................................................................................................................................31
Editing Door Types..........................................................................................................................................................................31
Editing the Size of a Door ...............................................................................................................................................................31

v
 Contents

Editing the Shape of a Door............................................................................................................................................................32

Displaying a Highlite or Sidelites on a Door ...............................................................................................................................32
Editing a Door’s Sidelites and Highlites.......................................................................................................................................32
Editing a Door’s Leaf.......................................................................................................................................................................33
Editing Door Details ........................................................................................................................................................................33
Removing Trim from a Door Opening .........................................................................................................................................33
Deleting a Door ................................................................................................................................................................................34
Windows ...........................................................................................................................................................................................34
Inserting Windows ..........................................................................................................................................................................34
Inserting Doors, Windows and Openings to Center ..................................................................................................................34
Inserting Doors, Windows and Openings to Edge .....................................................................................................................35
Moving a Window ...........................................................................................................................................................................35
Flipping a Window ..........................................................................................................................................................................35
Raising or Lowering a Window.....................................................................................................................................................35
Editing Window Types ...................................................................................................................................................................36
Editing a Window’s Size Properties..............................................................................................................................................36
Displaying a Highlite, Lowlite or Sidelites on a Window .........................................................................................................36
Editing a Window’s Sidelites, Highlites and Lowlites ...............................................................................................................37
Editing Window Details..................................................................................................................................................................37
Removing Trim from a Window Opening...................................................................................................................................38
Deleting a Window ..........................................................................................................................................................................38
Controlling the Display of Window Opening Symbols .............................................................................................................38
Openings ...........................................................................................................................................................................................38
Inserting Wall Openings .................................................................................................................................................................39
Inserting Doors, Windows and Openings to Center ..................................................................................................................39
Inserting Doors, Windows and Openings to Edge .....................................................................................................................39
Creating a Niche...............................................................................................................................................................................40
Flipping a Niche...............................................................................................................................................................................40
Editing the Appearance of a Niche ...............................................................................................................................................40
Moving a Wall Opening..................................................................................................................................................................40
Raising or Lowering a Wall Opening ...........................................................................................................................................41
Editing the Size of a Wall Opening ...............................................................................................................................................41
Editing the Shape of a Wall Opening............................................................................................................................................41
Removing Trim from a Wall Opening ..........................................................................................................................................41
Editing the Appearance of a Wall Opening in 2D Plan View ...................................................................................................41
Deleting a Wall Opening.................................................................................................................................................................42
Shutters..............................................................................................................................................................................................42
Inserting Shutters .............................................................................................................................................................................42
Editing Shutters................................................................................................................................................................................42
Deleting Shutters..............................................................................................................................................................................43

Chapter 9: Floors & Ceilings ........................................................................................ 45

Floors .................................................................................................................................................................................................45
Automatic Floors..............................................................................................................................................................................45
Moving Defined Floor Edges .........................................................................................................................................................46
Disabling or Enabling Automatic Floor Insertion.......................................................................................................................46
Inserting a Floor Throughout a Building Location .....................................................................................................................46

vi
 Contents

Inserting a Floor in a Room ............................................................................................................................................................46

Inserting a Floor by Picking Points ...............................................................................................................................................46
Moving a Floor .................................................................................................................................................................................47
Resizing or Reshaping a Floor .......................................................................................................................................................47
Dividing a Room ..............................................................................................................................................................................47
Curving a Floor Edge ......................................................................................................................................................................48
Raising or Lowering a Floor ...........................................................................................................................................................48
Editing the Thickness of a Floor ....................................................................................................................................................48
Applying Different Materials to Floors ........................................................................................................................................49
Deleting a Floor ................................................................................................................................................................................49
Floor Openings .................................................................................................................................................................................49
Cutting an Opening in an Automatic Floor .................................................................................................................................49
Cutting an Opening in a Manually Inserted Floor......................................................................................................................50
Resizing or Reshaping a Floor Opening .......................................................................................................................................50
Curving a Floor Opening................................................................................................................................................................50
Removing an Opening from an Automatically Inserted Floor .................................................................................................50
Removing an Opening from a Manually Inserted Floor............................................................................................................51
Ceilings ..............................................................................................................................................................................................51
How Ceilings are Created...............................................................................................................................................................51
Inserting a Ceiling Throughout a Building Location..................................................................................................................51
Inserting a Ceiling in a Room.........................................................................................................................................................51
Inserting a Ceiling By Picking Points............................................................................................................................................52
Creating a Tray Ceiling ...................................................................................................................................................................52
Creating a Cathedral Ceiling..........................................................................................................................................................53
Moving a Ceiling..............................................................................................................................................................................53
Resizing or Reshaping a Ceiling ....................................................................................................................................................53
Curving a Ceiling Edge...................................................................................................................................................................54
Raising or Lowering a Ceiling .......................................................................................................................................................54
Applying Different Colors and Materials to Ceilings ................................................................................................................54
Deleting a Ceiling.............................................................................................................................................................................55
Ceiling Openings .............................................................................................................................................................................55
Cutting Openings in Ceilings.........................................................................................................................................................55
Resizing or Reshaping Ceiling Openings.....................................................................................................................................55
Curving a Ceiling Opening ............................................................................................................................................................55
Removing an Opening from a Ceiling ..........................................................................................................................................56

Chapter 10: Stairs, Ramps & Railings..........................................................................57

Stairs...................................................................................................................................................................................................57
Inserting Stairs and Ramps.............................................................................................................................................................57
Moving a Staircase or Ramp...........................................................................................................................................................57
Rotating a Staircase or Ramp .........................................................................................................................................................57
Parts of a Staircase ...........................................................................................................................................................................58
Editing Stair Size Properties ...........................................................................................................................................................58
Editing a Staircase Layout ..............................................................................................................................................................58
Editing Stair Details .........................................................................................................................................................................59
Editing the Appearance of a Stair Cut Line .................................................................................................................................60
Deleting a Staircase or Ramp .........................................................................................................................................................60

vii
 Contents

Railings ..............................................................................................................................................................................................60
Inserting Railings on Both Sides of a Staircase or Ramp............................................................................................................61
Inserting a Railing on the Left Side of a Staircase or Ramp.......................................................................................................61
Inserting a Railing on the Right Side of a Staircase or Ramp ....................................................................................................61
Inserting a Railing Along the Center of a Staircase or Ramp ....................................................................................................61
Inserting a Horizontal Railing........................................................................................................................................................62
Parts of a Railing ..............................................................................................................................................................................62
Editing Railing Properties...............................................................................................................................................................62
Changing the Length of a Railing..................................................................................................................................................64
Stretching a Railing..........................................................................................................................................................................64
Rotating a Railing.............................................................................................................................................................................64
Deleting a Railing.............................................................................................................................................................................64

Chapter 11: Roofs.......................................................................................................... 65

Roofs ..................................................................................................................................................................................................65
Inserting an Automatic Roof Over Perimeter Walls...................................................................................................................65
Inserting a Roof By Picking Points ................................................................................................................................................65
Selecting a Roof for Editing ............................................................................................................................................................66
Changing the Way a Lower-Story Roof is Created.....................................................................................................................66
Converting a Hip Roof to a Gable Roof........................................................................................................................................66
Extending Walls to the Roof...........................................................................................................................................................67
Defining the Material at Gable Ends .............................................................................................................................................68
Displaying Walls Beneath Gable Ends..........................................................................................................................................68
Moving a Roof ..................................................................................................................................................................................69
Rotating a Roof .................................................................................................................................................................................69
Stretching a Roof ..............................................................................................................................................................................69
Reshaping a Roof .............................................................................................................................................................................70
Breaking a Roof Surface ..................................................................................................................................................................70
Creating Gables Mid-Fascia............................................................................................................................................................70
Editing the Basic Properties of a Roof Surface.............................................................................................................................71
Editing the Height of a Roof Surface.............................................................................................................................................72
Editing a Roof’s Frame Details.......................................................................................................................................................72
Applying a Different Roofing Material ........................................................................................................................................73
Converting a Roof to Surfaces........................................................................................................................................................73
Deleting a Roof .................................................................................................................................................................................73
Inserting an Opening in a Roof ......................................................................................................................................................73
Removing a Roof Opening .............................................................................................................................................................74
Dormers .............................................................................................................................................................................................74
Creating Dormers.............................................................................................................................................................................74
Moving a Dormer Roof ...................................................................................................................................................................75
Stretching a Dormer Roof ...............................................................................................................................................................75
Deleting a Dormer ...........................................................................................................................................................................75
Roof Accessories...............................................................................................................................................................................76
Inserting Roof Accessories..............................................................................................................................................................76
Moving a Roof Accessory ...............................................................................................................................................................76
Rotating a Roof Accessory ..............................................................................................................................................................76
Editing the Angle of a Roof Accessory .........................................................................................................................................77

viii
 Contents

Deleting a Roof Accessory ..............................................................................................................................................................77

Chapter 12: Interiors......................................................................................................79

Kitchen Builder Wizard ..................................................................................................................................................................79
Creating a Kitchen with the Kitchen Builder Wizard.................................................................................................................79
Creating a Custom Kitchen Wizard Configuration ....................................................................................................................82
Launching the Kitchen Builder Wizard Automatically at Startup ...........................................................................................83
Bathroom Builder Wizard...............................................................................................................................................................83
Creating a Bathroom with the Bathroom Builder Wizard .........................................................................................................83
Creating a Custom Bathroom Wizard Configuration ................................................................................................................85
Launching the Bathroom Builder Wizard Automatically at Startup .......................................................................................86
Cabinets .............................................................................................................................................................................................86
Inserting Cabinets ............................................................................................................................................................................86
Moving a Cabinet.............................................................................................................................................................................87
Rotating a Cabinet............................................................................................................................................................................87
Raising or Lowering a Cabinet.......................................................................................................................................................87
Editing Cabinet Properties .............................................................................................................................................................87
Applying Different Finishes to Cabinets ......................................................................................................................................88
Inserting a Sink.................................................................................................................................................................................89
Deleting a Cabinet............................................................................................................................................................................89
Appliances.........................................................................................................................................................................................89
Inserting Appliances........................................................................................................................................................................89
Moving Appliances..........................................................................................................................................................................90
Rotating Appliances ........................................................................................................................................................................90
Raising or Lowering Appliances ...................................................................................................................................................90
Editing Appliance Size Properties.................................................................................................................................................90
Applying Colors and Materials to Appliances ............................................................................................................................91
Deleting an Appliance.....................................................................................................................................................................91
Furniture, Electronics & Accessories.............................................................................................................................................91
Inserting Interior Furniture ............................................................................................................................................................91
Inserting Electronics ........................................................................................................................................................................91
Inserting Interior Accessories.........................................................................................................................................................91
Moving Furnishing Elements.........................................................................................................................................................92
Rotating Furnishing Elements........................................................................................................................................................92
Raising or Lowering Furnishing Elements...................................................................................................................................92
Editing the Size of Furnishing Elements ......................................................................................................................................92
Applying Different Colors, Fabrics and Finishes to Furnishing Elements..............................................................................93
Deleting Furnishing Elements........................................................................................................................................................93
Equipment.........................................................................................................................................................................................93
Inserting Equipment........................................................................................................................................................................93
Moving Equipment..........................................................................................................................................................................93
Rotating Equipment.........................................................................................................................................................................93
Raising or Lowering Equipment....................................................................................................................................................94
Editing the Size of Equipment .......................................................................................................................................................94
Applying Different Colors or Materials to Equipment ..............................................................................................................94
Deleting Equipment.........................................................................................................................................................................94
Interior Lighting ...............................................................................................................................................................................95

ix
 Contents

Inserting Interior Lighting ..............................................................................................................................................................95

Changing the Way a Light Snaps Upon Insertion ......................................................................................................................95
Moving a Light Fixture ...................................................................................................................................................................95
Rotating a Light Fixture ..................................................................................................................................................................96
Raising or Lowering a Light Fixture .............................................................................................................................................96
Editing the Size of a Light Fixture .................................................................................................................................................96
Editing a Light Fixture’s Light Source ..........................................................................................................................................96
Turning a Light On or Off ..............................................................................................................................................................97
Changing the Way a Light Fixture Looks ....................................................................................................................................97
Deleting a Light Fixture ..................................................................................................................................................................97
Electrical ............................................................................................................................................................................................98
Electrical Elements ...........................................................................................................................................................................98
Inserting Electrical Elements ..........................................................................................................................................................98
Inserting Outlets Throughout a Room Automatically ...............................................................................................................98
Moving an Electrical Element ........................................................................................................................................................98
Raising or Lowering an Electrical Element ..................................................................................................................................99
Editing the Size of an Electrical Element ......................................................................................................................................99
Different Color or Material to an Electrical Element .................................................................................................................99
Deleting an Electrical Element .......................................................................................................................................................99
Electrical Wiring.............................................................................................................................................................................100
Inserting Electrical Wiring............................................................................................................................................................100
Stretching and Reshaping Wiring ...............................................................................................................................................100
Editing the Line Style of Wiring ..................................................................................................................................................100
Deleting Wiring..............................................................................................................................................................................100
Plumbing .........................................................................................................................................................................................101
Inserting Plumbing Fixtures.........................................................................................................................................................101
Moving Plumbing Fixtures...........................................................................................................................................................101
Rotating Plumbing Fixtures .........................................................................................................................................................101
Raising or Lowering Plumbing Fixtures ....................................................................................................................................101
Editing the Size of a Plumbing Fixture .......................................................................................................................................102
Applying a Different Color or Finish to a Plumbing Fixture ..................................................................................................102
Deleting Plumbing Fixtures..........................................................................................................................................................102
HVAC ..............................................................................................................................................................................................102
Inserting HVAC Elements ............................................................................................................................................................102
Moving HVAC Elements ..............................................................................................................................................................102
Rotating HVAC Elements.............................................................................................................................................................103
Raising or Lowering HVAC Elements........................................................................................................................................103
Editing the Size of HVAC Elements............................................................................................................................................103
Deleting HVAC Elements .............................................................................................................................................................103
Chapter 13: Framing.................................................................................................... 105
Framing Display.............................................................................................................................................................................105
Displaying Framing .......................................................................................................................................................................105
Returning to a Non-Framed View...............................................................................................................................................106
Wall Framing ..................................................................................................................................................................................106
Selecting a Framing Member for Walls ......................................................................................................................................106
Defining Wall Framing Options for Building Locations..........................................................................................................106

x
 Contents

Floor Framing .................................................................................................................................................................................107

Specifying Floor Framing Options ..............................................................................................................................................107
Ceiling Framing..............................................................................................................................................................................108
Specifying Ceiling Framing Options...........................................................................................................................................108
Roof Framing ..................................................................................................................................................................................109
Specifying Roof Framing Options ...............................................................................................................................................109

Chapter 14: Terrain ......................................................................................................111

Terrain Modeling ...........................................................................................................................................................................111
Terrain Settings ..............................................................................................................................................................................111
Cutting the Terrain Around the Building ..................................................................................................................................111
Defining the Size of the Terrain ...................................................................................................................................................111
Defining the Base Level of the Terrain........................................................................................................................................112
Defining the Terrain Mesh Spacing.............................................................................................................................................112
Controlling the Display of Terrain Contours.............................................................................................................................112
Selecting a Material for the Terrain .............................................................................................................................................112
Displaying/Hiding the Terrain Boundary Line........................................................................................................................113
Turning the Terrain On and Off ..................................................................................................................................................113
Hills & Valleys................................................................................................................................................................................113
Creating Hills and Valleys............................................................................................................................................................113
Moving a Hill..................................................................................................................................................................................114
Editing the Height or Shape of a Hill..........................................................................................................................................114
Deleting a Hill.................................................................................................................................................................................114
Berms and Trenches.......................................................................................................................................................................114
Creating Berms and Trenches ......................................................................................................................................................114
Moving a Berm ...............................................................................................................................................................................115
Rotating a Berm..............................................................................................................................................................................115
Stretching a Berm ...........................................................................................................................................................................115
Editing the Height or Shape of a Berm .......................................................................................................................................115
Deleting a Berm ..............................................................................................................................................................................115
Plateaus............................................................................................................................................................................................115
Creating Plateaus ...........................................................................................................................................................................115
Moving a Plateau ...........................................................................................................................................................................116
Stretching a Plateau .......................................................................................................................................................................116
Reshaping a Plateau.......................................................................................................................................................................116
Editing the Height or Peak Shape of a Plateau..........................................................................................................................116
Deleting a Plateau ..........................................................................................................................................................................117
Slopes ...............................................................................................................................................................................................117
Creating Slopes...............................................................................................................................................................................117
Moving a Slope...............................................................................................................................................................................118
Stretching a Slope...........................................................................................................................................................................118
Editing the Height of a Slope .......................................................................................................................................................118
Editing the Angle of a Slope.........................................................................................................................................................118
Deleting a Slope..............................................................................................................................................................................118
Paths & Driveways ........................................................................................................................................................................118
Creating Paths, Sidewalks and Driveways ................................................................................................................................118
Moving a Path Element.................................................................................................................................................................119

xi
 Contents

Stretching a Path Element.............................................................................................................................................................119

Curving a Path Element ................................................................................................................................................................120
Editing the Thickness or Width of a Path Element ...................................................................................................................120
Applying Different Materials to Path Elements ........................................................................................................................120
Deleting a Path Element................................................................................................................................................................120
Pads ..................................................................................................................................................................................................120
Creating a Pad ................................................................................................................................................................................121
Disabling the Hug Terrain Option ..............................................................................................................................................121
Moving a Pad..................................................................................................................................................................................121
Rotating a Pad ................................................................................................................................................................................121
Resizing a Pad ................................................................................................................................................................................121
Reshaping a Pad .............................................................................................................................................................................122
Curving a Pad.................................................................................................................................................................................122
Editing the Thickness of a Pad .....................................................................................................................................................122
Applying a Different Material to a Pad ......................................................................................................................................122
Deleting a Pad.................................................................................................................................................................................123
Retaining Walls ..............................................................................................................................................................................123
Drawing Retaining Walls..............................................................................................................................................................123
Property Lines ................................................................................................................................................................................123
Creating a Site Boundary Using the Reference Angle Method...............................................................................................124
Creating a Site Boundary Using the Angle Bearing Method...................................................................................................125
Moving a Site Boundary ...............................................................................................................................................................126
Stretching a Site Boundary ...........................................................................................................................................................126
Editing the Length or Direction of Site Boundary Edges.........................................................................................................126
Defining Setback Distances ..........................................................................................................................................................126
Clipping the Terrain to the Site Boundary .................................................................................................................................127
Curving a Site Boundary Edge.....................................................................................................................................................127
Editing a Site Boundary’s Line, Text and Peg Styles ................................................................................................................128
Selecting a Method of Measurement When Drawing a Site Boundary .................................................................................128
Deleting a Site Boundary ..............................................................................................................................................................129
Chapter 15: Landscaping............................................................................................ 131
Plants................................................................................................................................................................................................131
Inserting Plants...............................................................................................................................................................................131
Moving a Plant ...............................................................................................................................................................................131
Editing the Elevation of a Plant ...................................................................................................................................................131
Editing the Appearance of a Plant in 2D View..........................................................................................................................132
Changing the Age of a Plant.........................................................................................................................................................132
Deleting a Plant ..............................................................................................................................................................................132
Seeing Plant Growth Over Time..................................................................................................................................................132
Applying Seasonal Changes to Plants ........................................................................................................................................133
Inserting Plants from the Encyclopedia......................................................................................................................................133
Adding Plants to the Catalog from the Encyclopedia ..............................................................................................................133
Plant Encyclopedia ........................................................................................................................................................................134
Using the Plant Encyclopedia ......................................................................................................................................................134
Encyclopedia Main Page...............................................................................................................................................................134
Selecting a Plant to View...............................................................................................................................................................135

xii
 Contents

Viewing Plant Information ...........................................................................................................................................................135

Plant Care Calendar.......................................................................................................................................................................136
World Map Page ............................................................................................................................................................................137
Notebook Page ...............................................................................................................................................................................137
Picture Page ....................................................................................................................................................................................138
Diseases Page..................................................................................................................................................................................138
Filtering the Plant List ...................................................................................................................................................................139
Inserting Plants from the Encyclopedia......................................................................................................................................140
Adding Plants to the Catalog from the Encyclopedia ..............................................................................................................140
Garden Beds, Ponds & Fills ..........................................................................................................................................................141
Creating Fills...................................................................................................................................................................................141
Moving a Filled Area.....................................................................................................................................................................141
Rotating a Filled Area....................................................................................................................................................................141
Resizing a Filled Area....................................................................................................................................................................141
Reshaping a Filled Area ................................................................................................................................................................142
Curving a Filled Area ....................................................................................................................................................................142
Changing the Fill Material............................................................................................................................................................142
Deleting a Filled Area....................................................................................................................................................................143
Edging..............................................................................................................................................................................................143
Inserting Edging.............................................................................................................................................................................143
Cleaning Up the Corners of Edging ............................................................................................................................................143
Moving Edging...............................................................................................................................................................................144
Rotating Edging .............................................................................................................................................................................144
Changing the Length of Edging...................................................................................................................................................144
Breaking Edging.............................................................................................................................................................................144
Curving Edging..............................................................................................................................................................................144
Editing the Height and Width of Edging ...................................................................................................................................145
Changing the Edging Material.....................................................................................................................................................145
Deleting Edging..............................................................................................................................................................................145
Fences & Gates................................................................................................................................................................................145
Inserting a Fence ............................................................................................................................................................................145
Stretching a Fence Layout.............................................................................................................................................................146
Changing the Length of a Fence ..................................................................................................................................................146
Creating a Break in a Fence ..........................................................................................................................................................146
Parts of a Fence...............................................................................................................................................................................146
Editing the Properties of a Fence .................................................................................................................................................146
Applying Different Materials to a Fence ....................................................................................................................................147
Deleting a Fence .............................................................................................................................................................................147
Inserting a Gate ..............................................................................................................................................................................148
Moving a Gate ................................................................................................................................................................................148
Flipping a Gate ...............................................................................................................................................................................148
Flipping a Gate’s Swing ................................................................................................................................................................148
Editing the Properties of a Gate ...................................................................................................................................................149
Deleting a Gate ...............................................................................................................................................................................149
Sheds ................................................................................................................................................................................................149
Building a Shed with the Shed Builder Wizard.........................................................................................................................149

xiii
 Contents

Moving a Shed................................................................................................................................................................................152
Rotating a Shed...............................................................................................................................................................................152
Editing a Shed.................................................................................................................................................................................152
Launching the Shed Builder Wizard Automatically at Startup ..............................................................................................152
Creating a Custom Shed Builder Wizard Configuration .........................................................................................................153
Decks................................................................................................................................................................................................153
Decks................................................................................................................................................................................................153
Building a Deck with the Deck Builder Wizard ........................................................................................................................154
Building a Deck with the Deck Tool ...........................................................................................................................................156
Launching the Deck Builder Wizard Automatically at Startup..............................................................................................157
Moving a Deck................................................................................................................................................................................157
Rotating a Deck ..............................................................................................................................................................................157
Changing the Direction of Deck Boards .....................................................................................................................................158
Stretching a Deck ...........................................................................................................................................................................158
Reshaping a Deck...........................................................................................................................................................................158
Curving a Deck Edge.....................................................................................................................................................................158
Changing the Height of a Deck....................................................................................................................................................158
Editing Deck Post Properties........................................................................................................................................................159
Editing Deck Footings ...................................................................................................................................................................159
Editing the Deck Frame.................................................................................................................................................................159
Controlling the Display of Deck Railings...................................................................................................................................160
Changing the Style of a Deck Railing..........................................................................................................................................160
Controlling the Display of Deck Skirting ...................................................................................................................................160
Changing the Skirting Material on a Deck .................................................................................................................................160
Deleting a Deck ..............................................................................................................................................................................161
Deck Openings ...............................................................................................................................................................................161
Inserting an Opening in a Deck ...................................................................................................................................................161
Resizing a Deck Opening..............................................................................................................................................................161
Reshaping a Deck Opening ..........................................................................................................................................................161
Curving a Deck Opening Edge ....................................................................................................................................................162
Removing Deck Openings ............................................................................................................................................................162
Deck Stairs.......................................................................................................................................................................................162
Adding Stairs to a Deck ................................................................................................................................................................162
Moving Deck Stairs........................................................................................................................................................................163
Editing the Size of Deck Stairs .....................................................................................................................................................163
Controlling the Display of Railings on Deck Stairs ..................................................................................................................163
Editing Stringers, Treads and Risers on Deck Stairs.................................................................................................................164
Deleting Deck Stairs.......................................................................................................................................................................164
Irrigation..........................................................................................................................................................................................164
Inserting Irrigation.........................................................................................................................................................................165
Moving a Sprinkler ........................................................................................................................................................................165
Rotating a Sprinkler.......................................................................................................................................................................165
Editing the Height of a Sprinkler.................................................................................................................................................165
Editing a Sprinkler’s Spray Properties........................................................................................................................................165
Deleting a Sprinkler .......................................................................................................................................................................166
Exterior Structures .........................................................................................................................................................................166

xiv
 Contents

Inserting Exterior Structures ........................................................................................................................................................166

Inserting a House Template .........................................................................................................................................................166
Moving Exterior Structures ..........................................................................................................................................................167
Rotating Exterior Structures .........................................................................................................................................................167
Editing the Size of an Exterior Structure ....................................................................................................................................167
Applying Different Colors or Materials to Exterior Structures...............................................................................................167
Deleting an Exterior Structure .....................................................................................................................................................168
Exterior Furniture & Accessories.................................................................................................................................................168
Inserting Exterior Furniture .........................................................................................................................................................168
Inserting Exterior Accessories......................................................................................................................................................168
Moving Furnishing Elements.......................................................................................................................................................168
Rotating Furnishing Elements......................................................................................................................................................169
Raising or Lowering Furnishing Elements.................................................................................................................................169
Editing the Size of Furnishing Elements ....................................................................................................................................169
Applying Different Colors, Fabrics and Finishes to Furnishing Elements............................................................................169
Deleting Furnishing Elements......................................................................................................................................................170
Exterior Lighting ............................................................................................................................................................................170
Inserting Exterior Lighting ...........................................................................................................................................................170
Editing Exterior Light Fixtures ....................................................................................................................................................170

Chapter 16: Editing Elements .....................................................................................171

Accessing Edit Tools......................................................................................................................................................................171
Undoing the Previous Action.......................................................................................................................................................171
Redoing an Undo ...........................................................................................................................................................................171
Moving Elements ...........................................................................................................................................................................171
Nudging Elements .........................................................................................................................................................................172
Editing Nudge Distances ..............................................................................................................................................................172
Raising and Lowering Elements ..................................................................................................................................................172
Rotating Elements ..........................................................................................................................................................................173
Curving Elements ..........................................................................................................................................................................174
Changing an Element’s Orientation ............................................................................................................................................175
Copying Elements on the Same Location.................................................................................................................................175
Copying Objects to Other Locations ...........................................................................................................................................175
Arraying Elements .........................................................................................................................................................................176
Mirroring Elements........................................................................................................................................................................176
Replacing Elements........................................................................................................................................................................177
Editing the Size and Composition of an Element .....................................................................................................................177
Applying Colors and Materials with the Materials Paintbrush..............................................................................................177
Undoing a Material Application..................................................................................................................................................178
Sampling Materials with the Eyedropper ..................................................................................................................................178
Viewing Recently Used Materials ...............................................................................................................................................179
Setting the Maximum Size for the Material History List .........................................................................................................179
Editing an Element’s Material Settings.......................................................................................................................................179
Editing an Element’s Pattern Settings.........................................................................................................................................180
Deleting Elements ..........................................................................................................................................................................180

Chapter 17: 2D and 3D Viewing ..................................................................................181

2D Viewing .....................................................................................................................................................................................181

xv
 Contents

Viewing the 2D Plan ......................................................................................................................................................................181

Viewing a 2D Designer’s Plan......................................................................................................................................................181
3D Viewing .....................................................................................................................................................................................182
Quick 3D Viewing..........................................................................................................................................................................182
Displaying 3D Camera Views ......................................................................................................................................................182
Creating a New 3D Camera View ...............................................................................................................................................183
Creating Dynamic Cutaway Views .............................................................................................................................................183
Changing a 3D Camera View.......................................................................................................................................................184
Displaying the Camera Properties Panel....................................................................................................................................184
Zooming and Panning in the Camera Properties Panel...........................................................................................................184
Closing the Camera Properties Panel .........................................................................................................................................185
Turning Cameras On and Off ......................................................................................................................................................185
Changing Your Viewpoint............................................................................................................................................................186
Changing the Camera Height ......................................................................................................................................................186
Changing the Target of a 3D Camera View ...............................................................................................................................186
Changing the Target Height in a 3D Camera View ..................................................................................................................187
Changing the Viewing Field Angle.............................................................................................................................................187
Viewing in Presentation/Virtual Reality Mode ........................................................................................................................188
Stereoscopic VR Viewing..............................................................................................................................................................188
Scene Properties .............................................................................................................................................................................188
Specifying the Properties of a 3D Scene .....................................................................................................................................189
Using Physically Accurate Lighting in a Scene .........................................................................................................................189
Defining the Time of Day in a Scene ...........................................................................................................................................189
Selecting a Background for a Scene.............................................................................................................................................190
Changing the Sun and Sky Settings in a Scene..........................................................................................................................190
Enabling Reflections and Shadows in a Scene...........................................................................................................................190
Specifying the Exposure in a Scene .............................................................................................................................................191
Navigating in 3D ............................................................................................................................................................................191
Walking Around in a 3D Camera View......................................................................................................................................191
Flying Around Your 3D Model....................................................................................................................................................192
Looking Around in a 3D Camera View ......................................................................................................................................192
Resetting the Camera.....................................................................................................................................................................193
Zooming and Panning...................................................................................................................................................................193
Zooming In......................................................................................................................................................................................193
Zooming Out ..................................................................................................................................................................................193
Zooming in Realtime .....................................................................................................................................................................193
Zooming With a Scroll Wheel Mouse .........................................................................................................................................194
Zooming a Selected Area (Zoom Window) ...............................................................................................................................194
Zooming to Fit the Drawing Area ...............................................................................................................................................194
Panning............................................................................................................................................................................................194
Zooming Back to the Previous View...........................................................................................................................................195
Zoom & Navigation Settings........................................................................................................................................................195
Zooming and Navigating with the Mouse.................................................................................................................................195
Assigning a Navigation Action to the Middle Mouse Button.................................................................................................196
Inverting the Orbit when Navigating in 3D...............................................................................................................................196
Using Arrow Keys to Pan and Navigate ....................................................................................................................................196

xvi
 Contents

Adjusting Zoom and Navigation Speed.....................................................................................................................................197

Setting the Zoom and Navigation Motion Response................................................................................................................197
Elevations ........................................................................................................................................................................................197
Viewing Elevations ........................................................................................................................................................................197
Creating a Custom Elevation .......................................................................................................................................................198
Displaying the Elevation Properties Panel.................................................................................................................................198
Zooming and Panning in the Elevation Properties Panel........................................................................................................198
Closing the Elevation Properties Panel.......................................................................................................................................199
Turning Elevation Marks On and Off.........................................................................................................................................199
Moving Elevation Marks ..............................................................................................................................................................200
Changing the Target of an Elevation ..........................................................................................................................................200
Editing Elevation Properties ........................................................................................................................................................200
Deleting an Elevation ....................................................................................................................................................................201
Sections ............................................................................................................................................................................................201
Creating a Section ..........................................................................................................................................................................201
Viewing Sections ............................................................................................................................................................................202
Displaying the Section Properties Panel.....................................................................................................................................202
Zooming and Panning in the Section Properties Panel............................................................................................................202
Closing the Section Properties Panel...........................................................................................................................................203
Turning Section Marks On and Off.............................................................................................................................................203
Changing Your Viewpoint in a Section ......................................................................................................................................203
Changing the Depth of a Section .................................................................................................................................................204
Editing Section Properties ............................................................................................................................................................204
Deleting a Section...........................................................................................................................................................................205
Changing the Display Mode ........................................................................................................................................................205
Displaying a Wireframe View......................................................................................................................................................206
Displaying a Hidden Line View ..................................................................................................................................................207
Displaying a Rendered View .......................................................................................................................................................207
Displaying a Rendered Outline View .........................................................................................................................................207
Displaying a Patterned View .......................................................................................................................................................208
Displaying a Realistic View..........................................................................................................................................................208

Chapter 18: View Filters ..............................................................................................209

Display Filter ..................................................................................................................................................................................209
Filtering the Display ......................................................................................................................................................................209
Displaying/Hiding Elements on Locations ...............................................................................................................................210
Displaying/Hiding Building Locations......................................................................................................................................210
Displaying/Hiding Elements on the Terrain.............................................................................................................................211
Displaying/Hiding Notation Objects .........................................................................................................................................211
Displaying/Hiding Text ...............................................................................................................................................................211
Displaying/Hiding Dimensions..................................................................................................................................................212
Displaying/Hiding Drafting Objects ..........................................................................................................................................212
Displaying/Hiding Electrical Wiring .........................................................................................................................................212
Displaying/Hiding Project Trace Images ..................................................................................................................................212
Selection Filter ................................................................................................................................................................................213
Selection Filtering...........................................................................................................................................................................213
Making Elements on Locations Selectable or Non-Selectable .................................................................................................214

xvii
 Contents

Making Building Locations Selectable or Non-Selectable .......................................................................................................214

Making Elements on the Terrain Selectable or Non-Selectable...............................................................................................214
Making Notation Objects Selectable or Non-Selectable ...........................................................................................................215
Making Text Selectable or Non-Selectable .................................................................................................................................215
Making Dimensions Selectable or Non-Selectable....................................................................................................................215
Making Drafting Objects Selectable or Non-Selectable............................................................................................................215
Making Electrical Wiring Selectable or Non-Selectable ...........................................................................................................216
Making Project Trace Images Selectable or Non-Selectable ....................................................................................................216
Point-and-Click Filters ..................................................................................................................................................................216
Hiding Items by Picking in Your Drawing ................................................................................................................................216
Hiding All Except What Is Picked...............................................................................................................................................217
Making Items Non-Selectable by Picking in Your Drawing....................................................................................................217
Making All Non-Selectable Except What Is Picked ..................................................................................................................217
View Filter Templates ...................................................................................................................................................................217
Creating a View Filter Template..................................................................................................................................................218
Applying a View Filter Template ................................................................................................................................................218
Editing a View Filter Template ....................................................................................................................................................218
Deleting a View Filter Template ..................................................................................................................................................218

Chapter 19: Drafting .................................................................................................... 219

Text...................................................................................................................................................................................................219
Text tool ...........................................................................................................................................................................................219
Adding Text ....................................................................................................................................................................................219
Customizing the Labels Library ..................................................................................................................................................220
Moving Text....................................................................................................................................................................................220
Rotating Text...................................................................................................................................................................................221
Editing Text Content .....................................................................................................................................................................221
Changing the Style of Text............................................................................................................................................................221
Updating a Text Style Globally ....................................................................................................................................................221
Customizing the Text Styles Library...........................................................................................................................................221
Changing the Justification of Multi-line Text ............................................................................................................................222
Finding and Replacing Text .........................................................................................................................................................222
Deleting Text...................................................................................................................................................................................223
Text with Leader tool ....................................................................................................................................................................223
Adding Text with a Leader...........................................................................................................................................................223
Moving and Stretching a Leader .................................................................................................................................................223
Changing the Style of Text with a Leader ..................................................................................................................................224
Updating the Style of Text with a Leader Globally ..................................................................................................................224
Moving Leader Text.......................................................................................................................................................................224
Editing Leader Text .......................................................................................................................................................................224
Deleting Text with a Leader .........................................................................................................................................................224
Dimensions .....................................................................................................................................................................................225
Setting the Current Dimension Style...........................................................................................................................................225
Creating Automatic Exterior Dimensions ..................................................................................................................................225
Specifying Exterior Dimension Settings .....................................................................................................................................225
Creating Automatic Interior Dimensions...................................................................................................................................227
Specifying Interior Dimension Settings ......................................................................................................................................228

xviii
 Contents

Creating Linear Dimensions.........................................................................................................................................................229

Creating Aligned Dimensions......................................................................................................................................................229
Creating Continuous Dimensions ...............................................................................................................................................230
Creating Baseline Dimensions .....................................................................................................................................................230
Creating Overall Dimensions.......................................................................................................................................................231
Creating Room Dimensions .........................................................................................................................................................232
Moving a Dimension Line ............................................................................................................................................................233
Stretching Dimensions ..................................................................................................................................................................233
Changing the Style of a Dimension.............................................................................................................................................233
Updating a Dimension Style Globally ........................................................................................................................................233
Dimension Style Properties ..........................................................................................................................................................234
Deleting a Dimension ....................................................................................................................................................................235
Lines & Shapes ...............................................................................................................................................................................236
Lines .................................................................................................................................................................................................236
Drawing Lines ................................................................................................................................................................................236
Moving a Line.................................................................................................................................................................................236
Rotating a Line ...............................................................................................................................................................................236
Stretching a Line.............................................................................................................................................................................237
Extending a Line to Another Object............................................................................................................................................237
Trimming a Line to Another Object ............................................................................................................................................237
Breaking a Line...............................................................................................................................................................................238
Offsetting a Line.............................................................................................................................................................................238
Editing the Style of a Line.............................................................................................................................................................238
Deleting a Line................................................................................................................................................................................239
Arcs ..................................................................................................................................................................................................239
Drawing Arcs..................................................................................................................................................................................239
Moving an Arc................................................................................................................................................................................240
Rotating an Arc ..............................................................................................................................................................................240
Stretching an Arc............................................................................................................................................................................241
Editing the Curve of an Arc..........................................................................................................................................................241
Extending an Arc to Another Object ...........................................................................................................................................241
Trimming an Arc to Another Object (Model View)..................................................................................................................241
Offsetting an Arc ............................................................................................................................................................................242
Editing the Line Style of an Arc ...................................................................................................................................................242
Deleting an Arc...............................................................................................................................................................................242
Circles ..............................................................................................................................................................................................242
Drawing Circles..............................................................................................................................................................................242
Moving a Circle ..............................................................................................................................................................................243
Rotating a Circle.............................................................................................................................................................................243
Stretching a Circle ..........................................................................................................................................................................244
Editing the Line Style of a Circle .................................................................................................................................................244
Deleting a Circle .............................................................................................................................................................................244
Ellipses.............................................................................................................................................................................................244
Creating Ellipses in Model View .................................................................................................................................................244
Creating Elliptical Arcs in Model View ......................................................................................................................................245
Moving an Elliptical Object in Model View...............................................................................................................................246

xix
 Contents

Rotating an Elliptical Object in Model View..............................................................................................................................246

Stretching an Elliptical Object in Model View...........................................................................................................................247
Editing the Line Style of an Elliptical Object .............................................................................................................................247
Deleting an Elliptical Object in Model View..............................................................................................................................247
Rectangles .......................................................................................................................................................................................247
Drawing Rectangles.......................................................................................................................................................................247
Moving a Rectangle .......................................................................................................................................................................248
Rotating a Rectangle ......................................................................................................................................................................248
Stretching a Rectangle ...................................................................................................................................................................248
Editing the Line Style of a Rectangle ..........................................................................................................................................248
Deleting a Rectangle ......................................................................................................................................................................248
Polygon Hatch ................................................................................................................................................................................249
Drawing Hatched Polygons .........................................................................................................................................................249
Moving a Polygon..........................................................................................................................................................................249
Rotating a Polygon.........................................................................................................................................................................249
Stretching a Polygon......................................................................................................................................................................249
Editing the Style of a Polygon’s Boundary Line........................................................................................................................249
Editing a Polygon’s Hatch Pattern ..............................................................................................................................................250
Deleting a Polygon.........................................................................................................................................................................250
Converting 2D to 3D......................................................................................................................................................................250
Converting 2D Lines and Shapes to 3D Building Elements ....................................................................................................250
Chapter 20: Estimating and Calculating .................................................................... 251
Area & Perimeter ...........................................................................................................................................................................251
Calculating Area and Perimeter ..................................................................................................................................................251
Project Estimate ..............................................................................................................................................................................252
Quantity Report..............................................................................................................................................................................252
Viewing a Quantity Report...........................................................................................................................................................252
Hiding Grid Lines in the Report Window .................................................................................................................................253
Selecting a Report Template.........................................................................................................................................................253
Filtering Locations from an Estimate ..........................................................................................................................................254
Printing a Quantity Report ...........................................................................................................................................................254
Saving a Quantity Report .............................................................................................................................................................254
Opening a Quantity Report in its Associated Editor ................................................................................................................255
Closing the Generate Project Estimate Dialog ...........................................................................................................................255
Editing Material Pricing................................................................................................................................................................255
Excluding Elements from a Quantity Report.............................................................................................................................256
Cut List ............................................................................................................................................................................................256
Viewing a Cut List .........................................................................................................................................................................256
Printing a Cut List..........................................................................................................................................................................256
Schedules.........................................................................................................................................................................................257
Generating a Door Schedule.........................................................................................................................................................257
Generating a Window Schedule ..................................................................................................................................................257
Moving a Schedule ........................................................................................................................................................................257
Rotating a Schedule .......................................................................................................................................................................258
Printing a Schedule........................................................................................................................................................................258
Defining the Field Layout of a Schedule ....................................................................................................................................258

xx
 Contents

Defining the Text Styles in a Schedule........................................................................................................................................258

Defining the Line Styles in a Schedule........................................................................................................................................259
Defining Schedule Marks..............................................................................................................................................................259
Removing Schedule Marks...........................................................................................................................................................259
Deleting a Schedule .......................................................................................................................................................................260

Chapter 21: Rendering & Animation ..........................................................................261

3D RealViewTM Rendering..........................................................................................................................................................261
How Rendering Works .................................................................................................................................................................261
Setting the Viewpoint for a Rendering .......................................................................................................................................262
Setting the Lighting for a Rendering...........................................................................................................................................262
Defining Your Location.................................................................................................................................................................262
Calculating True North from Magnetic North ..........................................................................................................................263
Setting the Season ..........................................................................................................................................................................263

Creating a 3D RealViewTM Rendering.......................................................................................................................................264

Rendering a Panoramic View for VR Viewing ..........................................................................................................................265
Setting the Rendering Quality......................................................................................................................................................267
Using Antialiasing in Rendering .................................................................................................................................................267
Adjusting the Noise Reduction Level When Rendering ..........................................................................................................268
Controlling the Intensity of Trees and Billboards .....................................................................................................................268
Setting the Global Illumination Sample Density.......................................................................................................................269
Adjusting the Light Coming from Light Fixtures .....................................................................................................................269
Editing the Surface Properties of Materials ...............................................................................................................................269

Troubleshooting a 3D RealViewTM Rendering..........................................................................................................................270

Animations......................................................................................................................................................................................270
Drawing an Animation Path ........................................................................................................................................................270
Drawing Separate Camera and Target Paths.............................................................................................................................272
Previewing an Animation.............................................................................................................................................................273
Repeating an Animation During the Preview ...........................................................................................................................274
Changing the Path Order in an Animation................................................................................................................................274
Choosing the Paths to Include in an Animation .......................................................................................................................274
Moving an Animation Path’s Control Points.............................................................................................................................274
Adding Control Points to an Animation Path ...........................................................................................................................274
Removing a Control Point from an Animation Path ................................................................................................................275
Editing the Elevation of a Control Point.....................................................................................................................................275
Editing the Elevation of the Target in an Animation................................................................................................................275
Adding Sounds to an Animation.................................................................................................................................................275
Removing Sounds from an Animation .......................................................................................................................................276
Saving an Animation to a File ......................................................................................................................................................276
Editing the Default Name or Save Location of Animation Files.............................................................................................277
Saving Individual Animation Frames.........................................................................................................................................278
Changing the Speed of an Animation.........................................................................................................................................278
Compressing Animation Files......................................................................................................................................................278
Specifying an Output Size for Animation Files .........................................................................................................................279
Specifying a Frame Rate for Animations....................................................................................................................................279
Ray Tracing an Animation............................................................................................................................................................279

xxi
 Contents

Pausing to Review the Image When Ray Tracing an Animation ...........................................................................................280

Turning Animation Paths On and Off ........................................................................................................................................280
Deleting an Animation Path.........................................................................................................................................................280
Sounds .............................................................................................................................................................................................280
Attaching Sounds to Elements in Your Drawing ......................................................................................................................280
Attaching Sounds to Elements in the Catalog ...........................................................................................................................281
Playing Sounds...............................................................................................................................................................................281
Removing Sounds from Elements in Your Drawing ................................................................................................................281
Removing Sounds from Elements in the Catalog .....................................................................................................................282
Selecting a Default Sounds Directory .........................................................................................................................................282
Chapter 22: Drawing Aids ........................................................................................... 283
Drawing Aids .................................................................................................................................................................................283
Setting Up a Drawing Grid...........................................................................................................................................................283
Turning the Drawing Grid On and Off ......................................................................................................................................284
Using the Grid Snap ......................................................................................................................................................................284
Turning the Grid Snap On and Off .............................................................................................................................................284
Using Object Snaps ........................................................................................................................................................................284
Using Angle Snap ..........................................................................................................................................................................285
Object Snap Tracking.....................................................................................................................................................................285
Using Ortho ....................................................................................................................................................................................286
Collision Control ............................................................................................................................................................................286
Commander ....................................................................................................................................................................................286
Using the Commander ..................................................................................................................................................................286
Turning the Commander On or Off ............................................................................................................................................287
Displaying the Coordinate Icon ...................................................................................................................................................287
Specifying the Insertion Height of an Element Before Inserting It.........................................................................................287
Selecting a Reference Point When Inserting and Editing Elements .......................................................................................288
Entering Values in the Commander............................................................................................................................................288
Specifying Distance and Direction in the Commander ............................................................................................................288
Defining X, Y and Z Coordinates.................................................................................................................................................288
Direction and Angle of Rotation..................................................................................................................................................289
Rotating Elements Using the Commander.................................................................................................................................289
Curving Elements Using the Commander .................................................................................................................................289
Measure ...........................................................................................................................................................................................289
Measuring Distance .......................................................................................................................................................................289

Chapter 23: Project Management............................................................................... 291

Opening and Saving ......................................................................................................................................................................291
Opening a Saved Project ...............................................................................................................................................................291
Changing the Number of Files on the Recently Used File List ...............................................................................................291
Saving Projects................................................................................................................................................................................292
Setting the Automatic Save...........................................................................................................................................................292
Setting the Number of Backups ...................................................................................................................................................292
Specifying a Default Save Location for Projects ........................................................................................................................293
Saving a Project as a Template.....................................................................................................................................................293
Setting the Path to the Templates Directory ..............................................................................................................................294
Selecting a Directory for Temporary Files..................................................................................................................................295

xxii
 Contents

Closing Projects ..............................................................................................................................................................................295

Printing ............................................................................................................................................................................................295
Defining a View’s Print Properties..............................................................................................................................................295
Printing Drawings..........................................................................................................................................................................297
Printing Across Multiple Sheets of Paper...................................................................................................................................299
Editing the Print Scale of a View .................................................................................................................................................299
Printing to a File .............................................................................................................................................................................299
Creating a PDF File ........................................................................................................................................................................300
Importing ........................................................................................................................................................................................300
Importing an Image to Trace........................................................................................................................................................300
Resizing a Project Trace Image ....................................................................................................................................................302
Tracing the Imported Floor Plan .................................................................................................................................................302
Displaying/Hiding Project Trace Images ..................................................................................................................................303
Deleting a Project Trace Image.....................................................................................................................................................303
Importing a Photo Board ..............................................................................................................................................................303
Saving Imported Photo Boards to the Catalog ..........................................................................................................................305
Inserting a Photo Board from the Catalog..................................................................................................................................305
Moving a Photo Board ..................................................................................................................................................................305
Rotating a Photo Board in 2D.......................................................................................................................................................306
Changing the Elevation of a Photo Board ..................................................................................................................................306
Changing a Photo Board from Stationary to Rotating and Vice Versa ..................................................................................306
Editing the Size of a Photo Board ................................................................................................................................................306
Deleting a Photo Board .................................................................................................................................................................306
Creating Transparency in Photo Board Images.........................................................................................................................307
Importing Custom Objects into Your Drawing .........................................................................................................................307
Importing Custom Objects into Your Catalog ...........................................................................................................................308
Importing BIM Files.......................................................................................................................................................................309
Importing Catalog Content from a BIM File..............................................................................................................................310
Exporting.........................................................................................................................................................................................310
Exporting the Current View to a 2D Image File........................................................................................................................311
Exporting the 2D Drawing to a 2D AutoCAD File ...................................................................................................................311
Exporting the 3D Model................................................................................................................................................................311
Exporting Catalog Content to a BIM File ...................................................................................................................................312
Exporting Project Content to a BIM File .....................................................................................................................................314
Exporting to Sketchfab ..................................................................................................................................................................315
Customization ................................................................................................................................................................................315
Chapter 24: Catalogs ...................................................................................................317
Adding a Group or Subgroup to a Catalog................................................................................................................................317
Moving a Subgroup to the Root...................................................................................................................................................317
Renaming a Group in a Catalog ..................................................................................................................................................318
Changing the Order of Groups in a Catalog..............................................................................................................................318
Deleting a Group from a Catalog ................................................................................................................................................318
Saving Edited Elements in Your Drawing to a Catalog ...........................................................................................................318
Creating a New Catalog................................................................................................................................................................319
Locking a Catalog ..........................................................................................................................................................................319
Unlocking a Catalog ......................................................................................................................................................................320

xxiii
 Contents

Exporting Catalog Content to a BIM File ...................................................................................................................................320

Importing Catalog Content from a BIM File..............................................................................................................................322
Downloading Manufacturer Content .........................................................................................................................................322
Opening a Catalog .........................................................................................................................................................................323
Selecting a Default Catalog Directory.........................................................................................................................................323
Viewing Catalog Properties..........................................................................................................................................................323
Saving a Catalog.............................................................................................................................................................................323
Creating a Copy of a Catalog .......................................................................................................................................................323

Chapter 25: Elements .................................................................................................. 325

Using the Element Manager .........................................................................................................................................................325
Viewing Element Properties.........................................................................................................................................................326
Adding Elements to a Catalog .....................................................................................................................................................326
Editing Elements in a Catalog ......................................................................................................................................................327
Deleting Elements from a Catalog...............................................................................................................................................327
Working with Property Pages......................................................................................................................................................327
Editing the Size and Composition of an Element .....................................................................................................................327
Changing an Element’s Orientation ............................................................................................................................................328
Editing an Element’s Pattern Settings.........................................................................................................................................328
Editing an Element’s Material Settings.......................................................................................................................................328
Editing an Element’s Layer Assignments...................................................................................................................................329
Controlling What Parts of an Element are Displayed ..............................................................................................................330
Simplifying an Element.................................................................................................................................................................330
Editing an Element’s Insertion Point ..........................................................................................................................................330
Editing an Element’s Snap Edge..................................................................................................................................................330
Editing an Element’s Insertion Height........................................................................................................................................331
Using Automatic Name Generation............................................................................................................................................331
Modifying the Name Generation Formula ................................................................................................................................331
Adding Notes to an Element’s Properties ..................................................................................................................................332
Adding a Hyperlink to an Element’s Properties .......................................................................................................................332
Opening an Element’s Hyperlink ................................................................................................................................................332
Making a Hyperlink Current .......................................................................................................................................................333

Chapter 26: Libraries................................................................................................... 335

Using the Library Manager ..........................................................................................................................................................335
Materials Library............................................................................................................................................................................336
Customizing the Materials Library .............................................................................................................................................336
Editing Material Properties ..........................................................................................................................................................337
Using Textures from Outside Sources ........................................................................................................................................339
Specifying the Location of the Textures Directory....................................................................................................................339
Material Usages Library................................................................................................................................................................339
Enforcing Material Usages............................................................................................................................................................339
Customizing the Material Usages Library .................................................................................................................................340
Material Filters Library .................................................................................................................................................................340
Filtering the Materials Library .....................................................................................................................................................341
Customizing the Material Filters Library ...................................................................................................................................341
Patterns Library..............................................................................................................................................................................341
Customizing the Patterns Library ...............................................................................................................................................341

xxiv
 Contents

Editing a Pattern.............................................................................................................................................................................342
Manufacturers Library ..................................................................................................................................................................343
Setting Up the Manufacturers Library........................................................................................................................................343
Attaching Manufacturer Information to an Element................................................................................................................344
Attaching Manufacturer Information to a Material..................................................................................................................344
Displaying Manufacturer Logos in the Catalog and Property Pages ....................................................................................344
Text Styles Library .........................................................................................................................................................................344
Customizing the Text Styles Library...........................................................................................................................................344
Dimension Styles Library .............................................................................................................................................................345
Customizing the Dimension Styles Library ...............................................................................................................................345
Dimension Style Properties ..........................................................................................................................................................346
Line Styles Library .........................................................................................................................................................................347
Customizing the Line Styles Library...........................................................................................................................................347
Line Types Library.........................................................................................................................................................................349
Customizing the Line Types Library ..........................................................................................................................................349
Line Weights Library.....................................................................................................................................................................349
Customizing the Line Weights Library ......................................................................................................................................349
Enabling/Disabling Line Weights...............................................................................................................................................350
Layers Library ................................................................................................................................................................................350
Customizing the Layers Library ..................................................................................................................................................350
Light Source Library......................................................................................................................................................................351
Customizing the Light Source Library .......................................................................................................................................351
Specifying the Location of the Light Source Directory.............................................................................................................353
Profiles Library...............................................................................................................................................................................353
Customizing the Profiles Library ................................................................................................................................................353
Creating Custom Profiles..............................................................................................................................................................354
Editing a Custom Profile...............................................................................................................................................................355
Door Leafs Library.........................................................................................................................................................................355
Customizing the Door Leafs Library ..........................................................................................................................................355
Importing a Custom Door Leaf....................................................................................................................................................356
Editing Door Leaf Properties........................................................................................................................................................357
Assembly Library...........................................................................................................................................................................357
Customizing the Assemblies Library..........................................................................................................................................357
Defining an Assembly ...................................................................................................................................................................358
Specifying Formulas ......................................................................................................................................................................359
Usages Library................................................................................................................................................................................362
Customizing the Usages Library .................................................................................................................................................363
Phases Library ................................................................................................................................................................................363
Customizing the Phases Library..................................................................................................................................................364
Categories Library .........................................................................................................................................................................365
Customizing the Categories Library ...........................................................................................................................................365
Units of Measure Library..............................................................................................................................................................366
Customizing the Units of Measure Library ...............................................................................................................................366
Wizard Configurations..................................................................................................................................................................367
Creating a Custom House Builder Wizard Configuration ......................................................................................................367
Creating a Custom Kitchen Wizard Configuration ..................................................................................................................368

xxv
 Contents

Creating a Custom Shed Builder Wizard Configuration .........................................................................................................369

Creating a Custom Bathroom Wizard Configuration ..............................................................................................................369

Chapter 27: Workspace Settings................................................................................ 371

Interface Settings ............................................................................................................................................................................371
Displaying/Hiding Toolbars .......................................................................................................................................................371
Displaying Toolbars in a Tabbed Format ...................................................................................................................................371
Displaying Toolbars in a Non-Tabbed Format..........................................................................................................................371
Changing the Color of Toolbar Areas .........................................................................................................................................372
Customizing Toolbar Colors and Effects....................................................................................................................................372
Saving a Toolbar Color Theme.....................................................................................................................................................373
Loading a Toolbar Color Theme..................................................................................................................................................373
Moving Toolbars ............................................................................................................................................................................373
Displaying/Hiding the Information Panel ................................................................................................................................373
Resizing the Information Panel....................................................................................................................................................374
Moving the Information Panel.....................................................................................................................................................374
Displaying/Hiding the Status Bar...............................................................................................................................................374
Changing the Color of the Drawing Area ..................................................................................................................................375
Displaying/Hiding the Scroll Bars..............................................................................................................................................375
Controlling the Launch of the Startup Screen ...........................................................................................................................375
Graphics ..........................................................................................................................................................................................375
Improving Graphics Display........................................................................................................................................................376
Changing the Quality Level of Interactive Lighting.................................................................................................................376
Disabling Interactive Lighting .....................................................................................................................................................376
Glossary...........................................................................................................................................................................................377
Index ................................................................................................................................................................................................391

xxvi
Chapter 1: Getting Started

Welcome
Welcome to Virtual Architect — an innovative suite of products that help you design rooms or entire homes, plan
remodeling projects, design landscapes, and much more. You can start with sample plans or build designs from scratch
using a number of easy-to-use wizards.
With Virtual Architect home design software you can:
• Create and edit designs
• “Build” and “furnish” your dream home or “design” and “plant” your garden
• View your work in 2D or 3D
• Estimate costs and manage the project
• Bring your ideas to life
Whether you are trying different design ideas or preparing drawings for a building or landscaping professional, Virtual
Architect home design software makes it fun and easy.

About this Guide

The Virtual Architect home design software User’s Guide covers basic concepts and procedures for the following products:
• Express
• Virtual Architect
• Virtual Architect Kitchen and Bath
• Virtual Architect Professional
• Virtual Architect Ultimate
• Virtual Architect Professional
The User’s Guide provides a general overview of all the features in Virtual Architect home design software. It does not cover
every possible topic. However, you can find detailed information on just about anything in the online help (press F1, or
select Help > Program Help).
Since the guide is designed for use with more than one product, some topics may not apply to your particular product. In
the case where a topic applies to a specific product only, it will be clearly noted within the topic.
Take a few minutes now to familiarize yourself with the guide’s content and layout so that you can find the information you
need when you are working on your project.

System Requirements
Your user account should be set to Computer Administrator (not Limited) to install the program. Prior to installing, make
sure your system meets the requirements listed below. Note that Virtual Architect home design software is compatible with
touch-screen devices.

For Microsoft Windows

• Microsoft® Windows® 10, 8, 7, Vista*
• 64-bit operating system (32-bit also available)
• 2.0 GHz or faster processor
• 6 GB RAM (4 GB minimum)**
• 10 GB minimum available hard disk space
• DVD-ROM drive or internet connection for install
• 1024 x 768 display

-1-
Chapter 1: Getting Started

• 2 GB dedicated video card (1 GB minimum)**

• Windows-compatible mouse
• An Internet browser to view the online help
• Internet connection for online features***

VR System Requirements
HTC Vive
• Graphics Card: GeForce GTX 970 or AMD Radeon R9 290 or better
• CPU: Intel Core i5 4590 or AMD FX 8350 or greater
• RAM: 4GB or more
• Video port: HDMI 1.4, DisplayPort 1.2, or better
• USB port: 1 USB 2.0 or faster port
• Windows 7 SP1 or newer
For current recommendations and performance testing tools, go to [Link]
Oculus Rift
• Graphics Card: GeForce GTX 970 or AMD Radeon R9 290 or better
• CPU: Intel Core i5 4590 or greater
• RAM: 8GB or more
• Video port: HDMI 1.3
• USB port: 2 USB 3.0 ports
• Windows 7 SP1 or newer
For current system requirements and a compatibility testing tool, go to [Link]

For Apple Macintosh

Boot Camp Option (recommended)
• Mac Book Pro or Mac Pro running Leopard OS X or newer with Microsoft® Windows® 10, 8, 7, Vista (SP2)
• Same system requirements as Windows
Virtual Machine Option
• VMware Fusion or Parallels (separate purchase of either required)
Note: Fusion is recommended as it provides better rendering performance. However, both options will experience a
decrease in performance compared to Boot Camp.
• Minimum system requirements for Fusion or Parallels
• Minimum requirements for the virtual machine (i.e. Windows) will be exactly the same as the Boot Camp Option re-
quirements above

* Windows® XP is no longer supported by Microsoft®

**Additional system and video memory will improve speed and 3D RealView™ rendering capabilities.
***User is responsible for all Internet access fees and phone charges.

Uninstalling a Previous Version

If you currently have an older version of Virtual Architect home design software installed on your system, it is
recommended that you uninstall your current version before installing the new version.
Note that the uninstallation will not remove your Projects folder. If, however, you have saved projects within the main
Virtual Architect home design software program folder, make sure you move them out of the program folder before
uninstalling.

-2-
 Installing the Program

To uninstall a previous version:

1. At your Windows® desktop, select Start > Control Panel.
2. In the Control Panel window, double-click Add/Remove Programs.
3. In the Add/Remove Programs window, select the program to be deleted.
4. Click the Remove button.
5. When prompted, click Yes to remove the selected application and all its features.
6. To remove the entire program folder including all files related to catalogs, libraries and materials, click Yes when
prompted. Otherwise, if you want to keep existing catalogs and libraries on your system, click No. If you have created
custom catalogs, libraries or materials, it is recommended that you leave them on your system.
7. The uninstallation begins. Follow any remaining instructions.
Note: The Projects folder remains on your system even if you chose to remove the entire program folder. By default, the
Projects folder can be found in the following location:
In Windows 10, 8, 7 and Vista:
C:\Users\*username*\Documents\Virtual Architect\Projects
In Windows XP:
C:\Documents and Settings\<Current User>\My Documents\Virtual Architect\Projects

Installing the Program

Make sure you exit all other programs, applications and screensavers before installing.
To install the program:
1. Begin at the Windows® desktop.
2. Insert the installation CD into your CD-ROM drive. The InstallShield Wizard screen appears and loads the setup. If it
doesn’t appear automatically, see the instructions after step 3.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation.
To run the launch screen if it does not begin automatically:
1. Make sure the installation CD is in your CD-ROM drive.
2. At the Windows® desktop, click the Start button, then select Run.
3. Type D:\[Link] in the Open edit box. The letter D represents your CD-ROM drive. If you are installing from a dif-
ferent drive, substitute the correct letter for the letter D.
4. Click OK.

Starting the Program

You can start your program by selecting Start > All Programs > Nova Development > Virtual Architect, or by double-
clicking the Virtual Architect icon on your desktop.

Registering Your Product

Before you start your first project, please take a moment to register. After you do, you’ll be entitled to:
• Free Technical Support: We’re committed to making Virtual Architect home design software home design
software work for you. If you have any questions, please contact our support staff.
• Immediate Notification of Upgrades: You’ll hear about new versions of Virtual Architect home design
software home design software as soon as they’re available.
• Registered User Discounts: As a registered user, you’re eligible for special prices on many new prod-
ucts and bonus offers on our other best-selling software products.

-3-
Chapter 1: Getting Started

Starting a New Project

Every time you start the program, the Startup screen appears. You can start a new project directly from this screen by
clicking New in the Projects pane. When the program is running, you can also start a new project using the New tool on the
File menu.
By default, the New dialog box is displayed when you select the New tool, allowing you to select a drawing template on
which to base your new project. Templates contain settings such as Building Location definitions, view window
configurations, and program preferences such as units of measure and precision. The program ships with a variety of pre-
defined templates for your convenience. You can edit these templates to suit your needs, or create new ones.
To start a new project from the Startup screen:
1. On the Startup screen, click New in the Projects pane.
2. In the New dialog, select the template on which you want to base your new project, then click Create. A new project is
opened.

To start a new project if the program is already running:

1. Select File > New or click on the Standard toolbar.

2. In the New dialog, select the template on which you want to base your new project, then click Create. A new project is
opened.
If the Launch Wizard when Starting New Project option is enabled in your program settings, the Wizard that is selected
in your program settings (e.g. House Builder Wizard) launches automatically when you start a new project.

Tip: You can change your startup settings so that the New tool launches new projects based on a specific template every
time, or no template at all. Selecting either of these options prevents the New dialog box from appearing and starts new
projects right away.

Tip: You can create your own template by simply setting up a drawing with the desired settings and saving it in your
Templates folder.

Starting New Projects from a Specific Template

By default, every time you select the New tool, the New dialog box appears, allowing you to select the template that you
want to use for your new project. If you tend to use the same template all the time, you can change your startup settings so
that new projects are automatically based on that specific template. This prevents the New dialog box from appearing and
starts your new project right away when you select the New tool.
To start new projects from a specific template every time:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. On the General page, click the top drop box in the Startup area and select Use Specific Template.

3. Click next to the edit box that is below the Use Specific Template option. In the Open dialog, locate and select the
template that you want to use when starting new projects, then click Open. The template name is displayed in the edit
box.
4. Click OK.

Tip: You can create your own template by simply setting up a drawing with the desired settings and saving it in your
Templates folder.

Starting New Projects Without Using Templates

By default, every time you select the New tool, the New dialog box appears, allowing you to select the template that you
want to use for your new project. If you do not want to use a template when starting new projects, you can change your
startup settings so that new projects have no pre-defined settings. This prevents the New dialog box from appearing and
starts your new project right away when you select the New tool.

-4-
 Enabling Template Selection at Project Startup

To start new projects without using templates:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. On the General page, click the top drop box in the Startup area and select Use No Template.
3. Click OK.

Enabling Template Selection at Project Startup

If you want to be able to select any template you want when starting a new project, you must enable the Prompt for Template
option in your startup settings. When you enable this option, the New dialog box appears every time that you select the New
tool, allowing you to select a template to use for your new project.
To enable template selection at project startup:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. On the General page, click the top drop box in the Startup area and select Prompt for Template.
3. Click OK.

Tip: If you use the same template all the time, you can start new projects that are automatically based on that template. See
Starting New Projects from a Specific Template on page 4.

Viewing Sample Projects

To give you an idea of the things you can do with Virtual Architect home design software, you may want to view some
sample projects. These projects are located in the program’s Samples directory.
To view sample projects:

1. Select File > Open Samples, or click on the Standard toolbar.

2. In the Open dialog, select the project you would like to view, then click Open.

Selecting a Unit of Measure

Units of measure determine how length, area and volume measurements are specified when you are creating your project,
and how dimensions are displayed on the screen. You can select the units of measure that you want to use in your Program
Settings, and select the level of precision that you want to use for each one.
To set the units of measure for the current project:

1. Select Settings > Document Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Document Settings dialog, click Units of Measure in the left column.
3. Select either Imperial or Metric units.
4. To select a unit for distance measurement, make a selection from the Units drop box. Choices for Imperial units are
Feet-Inches, Inches, Feet, and Feet-Inches-Sixteenths. Choices for Metric units are Millimeters, Centimeters and Meters. Note
that this setting does not apply to site boundary measurements.
If using Imperial measurement, it is important to understand the difference between the available options and how to
enter measurements correctly.
Feet-Inches. Displays measurements in feet and inches. When entering a measurement, you must include the feet
symbol (’) after a value that you want to be in feet. Otherwise, it will be taken as inches. For inch values, you do not
need to enter the inches symbol (") because inches are already assumed. For example, to enter a value of 6 feet 6 inches,
you would type 6’6. When entering values in inches, you can use decimals or fractions to specify the value if you want.
For example, 6 feet 6 inches could be entered as 6.5’ or 6’ 1/2. Regardless of the method you use, the displayed result
will be the same: 6’-6".
Inches. Displays measurements in inches. When entering measurements you do not need to include the inches symbol
(") because inches are already assumed. You can still enter values in feet and inches when specifying measurements
(e.g. 6’ instead of 72"), but the displayed result will always be in inches. You can use decimals and fractions when
specifying values. For example, to enter 4 and a half inches you would type either 4.5 or 4 1/2.

-5-
Chapter 1: Getting Started

Feet. Displays measurements in feet. When entering measurements you do not need to include the feet symbol (’)
because feet are already assumed. For example, typing 6 would mean 6 feet. You can use decimals and fractions when
entering measurements. For example, to enter the value 6 feet 6 inches, you would type 6.5 or 6 1/2. The decimal or
fraction applies to ’feet value’, and will appear in the displayed result if the level of precision permits it.
Feet-Inches-Sixteenths. Displays measurements in feet, inches, and sixteenths of an inch (e.g. 20-06-04). The two
rightmost digits represent sixteenths of an inch. The two digits to the left of that represent whole inches. All digits to
the left of the first four represent feet. So, for example, entering 201108 or 20-11-08 would specify a measurement of
twenty feet eleven and one half inches.
5. To select a unit for area measurements, make a selection from the Area drop box. Area measurements appear in the
Area/Perimeter Calculator. Imperial choices are Square Feet and Square Yards. In Metric, area is measured in Square
Meters.
6. To select a unit for volume measurements, make a selection from the Volume drop box. Imperial choices are Cubic Feet
and Cubic Yards. In Metric, volume is measured in Cubic Meters.
7. Select a level of precision for each unit of measure by making a selection from the appropriate Precision drop box. For
example, selecting a unit precision of #’-# #/16” sets the level of precision to 1/16th of an inch when measuring distances
in feet and inches.
8. To remove zeros from measurements that end in zero, enable the Suppress trailing zeros check box. For example, a
measurement of 12’-0" would be displayed as simply 12’.
9. If you are working in Metric units and would like to hide the units for length/distance, volume, and area measurements
shown in dimensions and dialogs, enable the Suppress display of metric units check box. For example, 1200 mm
would appear as simply 1200.
10. To change the level of precision for angle measurements, which are displayed in decimal degrees, make a selection from
the Precision drop box in the Angles area. The selection you make determines the number of decimal places used.
11. Once you’ve set your units of measure, click OK.

Note: The units of measure selected in your Program Settings are used for drawing and creating dimensions. They are not
the units used for calculating and reporting material quantities in the project estimate. Each element has a unit of measure
setting on its Quantity property page that determines how the element is quantified and reported in the estimate.

Suppressing Trailing Zeros in Measurements

You can specify that you want to suppress trailing zeros in measurements by editing your program settings. For example,
12’-0" would be displayed as simply 12’ in both onscreen and inserted dimensions. This setting applies to both Metric and
Imperial units of measure.
To suppress trailing zeros in the current project:

1. Select Settings > Document Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Document Settings dialog, click Units of Measure in the left column.
3. Enable the Suppress trailing zeros check box.
4. Click OK.

Adjusting Your Display Settings

To ensure proper performance you should set your screen resolution to at least 1024 x 768 pixels. Consult the documentation
for your Windows operating system for information on changing your screen resolution.

Suppressing Metric Units in Dialogs

If you have chosen to work in Metric units, you can choose to suppress units for length/distance, volume, and area
measurements shown in dialogs. For example, 1200 mm would appear as simply 1200.
To suppress units in the current project:

1. Select Settings > Document Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Document Settings dialog, click Units of Measure in the left column.

-6-
 Online Help

3. With Metric Units selected, enable the Suppress display of metric units check box.
4. Click OK.

Online Help
The comprehensive online help system includes information about every feature in Virtual Architect home design software.
The system includes Index and Keyword Search features so that you can quickly find what you’re looking for.
To access the online help file:
• Select Help > Program Help, or
• Press F1, or

• Click on the Standard toolbar or Help toolbar

Context-sensitive Help
Context-sensitive help is help for a specific dialog or element in your drawing.
To get help for a specific part of your drawing:
1. Select the element you want help with.
2. Right-click and select the Tool Help option for that element (e.g. Walls Help). A list of topics related to the element is
displayed — just click the topic you want to learn more about. You can also access the Tool Help from the Edit > Modify
Elements menu.
To get help in a dialog:

1. Click in the dialog. A window is displayed that describes the content of the dialog.

Tutor
The Tutor is a context-sensitive help feature that displays "how-to" information about a tool when you select it. For example,
if you select the Walls tool, the Tutor window displays a video and information on how to draw walls, handy tips and tricks,
and links to other topics that may be of interest.

You can turn the Tutor on and off as needed. If the Tutor is currently displayed you can turn it off by enabling the Don’t
show the Tutor again check box at the bottom of the Tutor window.
To turn the Tutor on or off:

1. Select Help > Tutor or click on the Help toolbar.

-7-
Chapter 1: Getting Started

Glossary of Terms
You can instantly access a glossary of technical and construction terms from the Help menu.
To view the Glossary of Terms:

1. Select Help > Glossary of Terms, or click on the Help toolbar.

Technical Support
If you have question about the software, our trained technical support staff is ready to help.
For answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs), troubleshooting tips, and information about your technical support
options, go to the support section of our web site:
[Link]

Using Keyboard Shortcuts

Keyboard shortcuts let you access tools quickly without having to make selections from menus or toolbars. A keyboard
shortcut can be a single button on your keyboard (such as the F1 key), or a sequence of buttons that you press to invoke a
command.

Menu Shortcuts
In the interface, each menu name and item has one underlined letter. For example, the "F" is underlined in the File menu
name (File). These underlined letters are the ones you use for keyboard shortcuts. You can toggle the underlining on an off
in the menu bar by pressing the Alt key on your keyboard.
To launch a command using the keyboard, type the underlined letter in the menu name, then type the underlined letter in
the menu item name. If the menu item has a cascading menu, you need to type an additional letter. For example, to select
the Walls tool you would type I (for theInsert menu) and then W (for theWalls sub-menu) and then W (for theWalls tool).
You can also use the arrow keys on your keyboard to move through menu items and press ENTER to select one. You can
use the ESC key to back out of the menu items one level at a time.

Function Keys
There is a row of F-keys at the top of your keyboard. These keys have the following functions:
Key Function
F1 Online Help
F4 Grid Snap
F5 Object Snap
F6 Angle Snap
F7 Grid
F8 Ortho
F9 Collision Control

-8-
Chapter 2: Touring the Workspace

The Virtual Architect home design software interface contains a variety of user-friendly features that make it easy to create
complete home designs.

Menus
The menu bar is located directly below the title bar. You can select menu items using either the mouse or keyboard.

To select items with your mouse:

Click a menu name, then select an item from the menu that pops down. Menu items that have an arrow to the right display
cascading menus when you place your pointer over them. When you highlight a menu item, a brief description is displayed
on the status bar.
To select items using keyboard shortcuts:
Type the underlined letter in the menu name, then type the underlined letter in the menu item name. If the menu item has
a cascading menu, you need to type an additional letter. For example, to select the Walls tool you would type I (for Insert)
and then W (for Walls) on your keyboard.
You can also use a number of standard Windows shortcuts, such as CTRL+P for Print. These are noted throughout the User’s
Guide for your convenience.
Here is a quick list of standard shortcuts:
CTRL+S = Save
CTRL+P = Print
CTRL+C = Copy

-9-
Chapter 2: Touring the Workspace

CTRL+V = Paste
CTRL+X = Cut
CTRL+Z = Undo
CTRL+Y = Redo
You can also use the arrow keys on your keyboard to move through menu items and press ENTER to select one. You can
use the ESC key to back out of the menu items one level at a time.

Toolbars and Toolbar Tabs

Four tabs are located just beneath the menu bar: Building, Interiors, Landscape and Terrain.
The view in the drawing window does not change when you switch to a different toolbar tab. The tabs simply provide you
with instant access to the specific toolbars you need, when you need them. In addition to the four toolbar tabs, there are two
floating toolbars displayed just below the drawing area: View Control and Zoom and Navigate. Floating toolbars can be
moved around on the screen.
There are more toolbars available for display in your program settings. Each one can be displayed in tabbed or non-tabbed
format — the choice is yours. Note that you still have access to a complete set of Insert features on the Insert menu regardless
of what toolbar tab you are on.
Some toolbar buttons have a down arrow next to them. When you click this down arrow, a list of tools is displayed. For
example, if you click the down arrow next to the Walls button , two options are displayed: Walls and Walls by Baseline.
Just select the one you want to use. Most toolbar buttons with drop lists display the button of the last tool used from the list.
This can come in handy when you have a specific tool that you like to use repeatedly.

Building Toolbar
The Building toolbar contains the tools you need to build a home or any architectural structure. It includes tools such as
Walls, Doors, Windows, and Roofs.

Interiors Toolbar
The Interiors toolbar contains the tools you need to furnish, decorate and equip the interior of your home. It contains tools
such as Cabinets, Appliances, Furniture, Lighting and Plumbing Fixtures.

Landscape Toolbar
The Landscape toolbar contains all the tools you need to create a complete landscape plan for the exterior of your home.
Tools include Plants, Fences/Gates, Decks, and Irrigation.

Terrain Toolbar
The Terrain toolbar contains tools that you can use to design a realistic terrain for your model, which is especially important
in 3D views. Tools include Hills/Valleys, Slopes, Paths, Retaining Walls, and Site Boundary.

- 10 -
 View Control Toolbar

View Control Toolbar

The View Control toolbar contains several essential view-related tools. The toolbar’s building location drop box displays
the current building location, which is important when inserting elements in your drawing. The toolbar also lets you quickly
switch between 2D view and 3D view, and view and create elevations and sections. A display mode button lets you choose
the current display type for the view (wireframe, hidden line, etc.). The View Control toolbar also provides instant access to
the View Manager, where you can create new view windows if you want.

Zoom and Navigate Toolbar

Zoom tools on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar include Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom Realtime, Zoom Window, and Pan. The
navigation features on the toolbar (Walk Around, Fly Around, Look Around, Reset Camera) are only active when you are
in a 3D view. These tools let you change the view in real time using your mouse.

Navigator
The Navigator contains the most common viewing and navigation tools. Resembling a video game controller, it lets you
switch between 2D and 3D, zoom and pan, and navigate in 3D. Motion is controlled by clicking and dragging the central
trackball.

Scroll Bars
There are scroll bars on the right side and bottom of the drawing area. They let you scroll back and forth and up and down
in the drawing area.

Catalog Panel
The catalog panel, located on the right side of the screen, displays the elements contained in the program’s Master Catalog,
or whatever catalog is currently open. This is where you select elements to insert into your drawing. The content of the cat-
alog panel changes depending on which Insert tool is currently selected, or was last selected. For example, if you select the
Doors tool, you will see doors displayed in the catalog panel.

- 11 -
Chapter 2: Touring the Workspace

The top pane of the catalog panel displays a list of groups specific to the currently selected tool. For example, if Doors is the
current tool, you will see groups such as Hinged, Entry and Bi-Fold. Listed under each group are all the element types and
sizes available in the currently selected group. For example, if the Hinged door group is currently selected, you will see a
long list of hinged door sizes. You can expand or collapse a group by double-clicking it.
The lower pane of the catalog panel displays a 3D rendered preview of the currently selected element. You can rotate the
image around by clicking and dragging with your mouse. Note, however, that the preview is for viewing purposes only
within the catalog panel. The orientation of the element in the preview window has no effect on the orientation of the
element when you insert it in your plan.
You can also right-click in the preview window and select a different display mode for the image, such as wireframe, or
switch the preview to a 2D plan view.

- 12 -
 Status Bar

The catalog panel has two tabs: an element tab (such as Walls), which lists the catalog content, and a Search tab. You can use
the Search feature to quickly find a specific element in the catalog.

Status Bar
The Status bar is located at the bottom of the screen. It displays helpful prompts while you are working on your design
project. For example, if you are inserting a wall, it may display “Pick first insertion point”. The Status bar also includes a
selection of drawing aid buttons such as ORTHO and OBJSNAP.

Auto Scroll
When an insertion tool is active in, the Auto Scroll feature will automatically scroll the drawing when you hover your cursor
near the edge of the drawing area. When the Auto Scroll feature is active, your cursor changes to a multi-directional arrow
at drawing area edges. The drawing will scroll in the direction in which you move your cursor.
Auto Scroll is particularly useful when you are drawing an element such as a wall and discover that you need to scroll the
drawing area to be able to continue drawing it. Auto Scroll permits uninterrupted drawing and is an excellent alternative
to using scroll bars.
Auto Scroll settings are defined in your program settings. You can choose to have it active all the time, or active only when
you press the CTRL key on your keyboard. You can also adjust the scrolling speed so that it is slower or faster. You can also
disable Auto Scroll completely if you want.

Note: By default, the Active with CTRL key option is enabled in your program settings. This means that you must press
and hold the CTRL key on your keyboard to activate and use Auto Scroll while inserting elements. If you disable this option
in your program settings and simply have the Enable option selected, it will be active all the time and you do not have to
press any other keys to activate it.

To adjust Auto Scroll settings:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Program Settings dialog, click Drawing Aids in the left column.
3. To turn Auto Scroll on or off, check or uncheck the Enable check box in the Auto Scroll area.
4. If you would like Auto Scroll to be active only when you choose to use it (instead of all the time), enable the Active with
CTRL key check box. If this option is enabled, Auto Scroll will only be active if you press and hold the CTRL key while
inserting an element. This gives you precise control over its use and prevents unwanted scrolling.
5. To adjust scrolling speed, click and drag the Speed slider in the Auto Scroll area. To decrease the speed, slide left. To
increase the speed, slide right.
6. Click OK.
To use Auto Scroll when inserting an element:
• To scroll up, hover your cursor near the top edge of the drawing area.
• To scroll down, hover your cursor near the bottom edge of the drawing area.
• To scroll left, hover your cursor near the left edge of the drawing area.
• To scroll right, hover your cursor near the right edge of the drawing area.

Searching the Catalog

The catalog panel includes a Search feature that you can use to quickly find a specific element in the catalog. You can search
by keyword or by part number. If you do a keyword search, the feature will look at element names. If you do a part number
search, it will look at the Part No. values assigned to elements on their Quantity property page. Search terms are saved for
your convenience so that you can activate them again in the future.
To search the catalog:
1. At the top of the catalog panel, click the drop box in the Search area and select either Description to search by key-
word, or Part No. to search by part number. An edit box appears next to the drop box.

- 13 -
Chapter 2: Touring the Workspace

2. In the edit box, enter the keyword(s) or part number to search for, then press Enter or click . If you enter one or
more keywords, the search function will search all element names throughout the catalog for the specified text string.
The search is not specific to any one type of element, and will display any match that contains the specified text string,
even if the string is part of a word. For example, if you enter "wood" in the search field, you may see results such as
Wood Siding, Wood Rail Edging, Solid Wood Door, Hardwood Floor, and Japanese Dogwood.
Note that if you enter two or more keywords, the keywords must appear consecutively in an element’s name in order
for the element to appear in the search results. For example, if you enter the keywords "wood edging", an element
named Wood Rail Edging would not appear in the search results.
Once search results are obtained they are displayed in the main window of the catalog panel.
3. To return the catalog to its default state, where all elements are displayed, select Show All from the Search drop box.
4. Search terms that you have used are saved in the Search window. To activate a search that you performed previously,
select the desired search term from the search drop box.

- 14 -
Chapter 3: Drawing & Editing Basics

There are three types of elements that you can insert — single-click elements, line-drawn elements, and area-drawn
elements. Before starting a design, it may be helpful to familiarize yourself with the methods of inserting each of these
element types.
By default, when you insert a single-click element, such as a door, you remain in Insertion mode until you right-click and
select Finish. You then go into Selection mode, which means you can select elements for editing. If you prefer you can select
the Single Insertion Only option in your program settings so that you automatically go into Selection mode after inserting
an element, eliminating the need to right-click and Finish.
By default, when you insert line-drawn elements such as walls, you simply pick points to define the element’s end points.
If you are more familiar with "clicking and dragging", you can select the Pick and drag option in your program settings.
If you want to edit an element that you have inserted, you need to select the element. When an element is selected it is
highlighted. For many elements, editing grips are also displayed that let you move, rotate or stretch the element. Right-
clicking your mouse when an element is selected displays a menu that contains editing commands specific to that element.
You can also view this menu by selecting Edit > Modify Elements when an element is selected.

Inserting Elements
When you select a tool from the Insert menu or one of the insertion toolbars, you are in Insertion mode. To insert an element,
you select it in the catalog panel, then click in your drawing area.
Many elements can be inserted with a single mouse click. Single-click elements include doors, windows and stairs, and objects
such as cabinets and furniture. Line-drawn elements such as walls and railings require that you select two points to define the
element’s start point and end point. The points you pick determine the element’s length and angle. Area-drawn elements, such
as manually inserted floors and ceilings, and fills and plateaus, are drawn by picking a series of points to define their outline.
In many cases, on-screen dimensions are displayed as you draw, making it easy to create line-drawn and area-drawn
elements at the correct length or size, and insert elements like doors and windows precisely where you want them in a wall.
Once you insert an element in your drawing area, you can:
• Continue inserting the same element
• Select a different element in the catalog to insert
• Right-click and select Finish to end the command and return to Selection mode

Tip: When an Insert tool is active, double-clicking inserts the element and finishes the command at the same time. Note,
however, that double-clicking after you’ve already inserted an element will, in most cases, insert another element.

Tip: If you are in Selection mode, you can insert any element currently accessible in the catalog by simply selecting the
element in the catalog, then moving your pointer into the drawing area.

Selecting an Insertion Method for Line-Drawn Elements

Line-drawn elements, such as walls, are elements that are drawn by picking two or more points. By default, line-drawn
elements use the Pick Points insertion method. With this method you do not have to keep your mouse button depressed to
draw the element (i.e. you do not have to click and drag the mouse). Once you’ve selected the first point, you can simply
move your mouse in the direction you want the element to run, then click to select the next point.
If you are more comfortable with the “click-and-drag” method, you can select the Pick and drag insertion method. With
this method, you keep the mouse button depressed after clicking the first point, drag the mouse to draw the element, then
release your mouse button to select the next point.
To select an insertion method for line-drawn elements:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Program Settings dialog, click Drawing Aids in the left column.

- 15 -
Chapter 3: Drawing & Editing Basics

3. In the Model View Insertion Method area, select either Pick Points or Pick and drag.
4. Click OK.

Selecting an Insertion Method for Single-Click Elements

Single-click elements are things like doors, windows and staircases. By default, Insertion mode remains active after inserting
a single-click element. This means you can keep inserting elements without having to re-select an Insert tool or element in
the catalog. You can disable this behavior if you want to. If you do choose the Single Insertion Only option, you do not need
to select Finish after inserting a single-click element. You will go directly into Selection mode.
To select an insertion method for single-click elements:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Program Settings dialog, click Drawing Aids in the left column.
3. In the Model View Insertion Method area, select either Single Insertion Only or Repeat Insertion.
4. Click OK.

Repeating the Insertion of a Line-Drawn Element

When drawing elements such as walls, new segments are continually added as you pick more points. You can use the Repeat
tool to finish drawing the current line-drawn element and start a new one if you want, without having to restart the tool.
To repeat the insertion of a line-drawn element:
1. When you are ready to finish the current element and start a new one, right-click and select Repeat, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Repeat. The current element is finished.
2. Pick a start point for the new element and continue drawing.

Note: The Repeat tool is available for line-drawn elements only.

Using Space as Enter

You can specify that you want the spacebar on your keyboard to act like the Enter key. This can speed up the way you work.
To specify that you want to use the spacebar as Enter:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Program Settings dialog, click Drawing Aids in the left column.
3. In the Model View Insertion Method area, enable the Use Space as Enter check box.
4. Click OK.

Going into Selection Mode for Editing

When you have finished using an insertion tool, either by double-clicking or selecting Finish from the right-click menu, you
automatically go into Selection mode. When in Selection mode, you can select elements in your drawing area and edit them.

You can also go into Selection mode by clicking on any insertion toolbar, or by selecting Select/Edit from the Edit menu.

Enabling/Disabling Screen Tips

By default, screen tips are displayed when you hover over elements telling you what the elements are. In 3D view, the
element’s building location is also displayed. This can help you when selecting elements, as it lets you know what you are
about to select. On some systems, disabling screen tips can help improve program speed.
To enable or disable screen tips:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Program Settings dialog, click Workspace in the left column.
3. In the Visual Aids area, check or uncheck the Enable Screen Tips in Model Views check box.

- 16 -
 Selecting Elements for Editing

4. Click OK.

Selecting Elements for Editing

When in Selection mode, you can select elements for editing. You can select individual elements, a group of elements, or all
elements.
When an element is selected, it is highlighted in a different color (usually light green). One or more grips are also displayed
on the element.
When you are in 3D view, all elements on all locations are selectable. When you are in 2D plan view, only elements on the
current building location are selectable. However, you can change this if you want.
If multiple elements share the same edge, such as floors and ceilings, you can cycle through the different elements that share
that edge so that you can accurately pick the one that you want to edit. To do this, select one of the element edges, and then
hold down the Shift key while using the scroll wheel on your mouse.
If you are having trouble selecting the element you want, you may want to use the View Filter to make other elements non-
selectable. This makes selection of the element much easier.

Note: Automatic floors cannot be selected in 2D Plan view unless the display mode is set to Rendered or Rendered Outline.
They can be selected in 2D Designer’s View, or in 3D view.

To select a single element:

1. Click on the element.
To select multiple elements by clicking:
1. Click the first element you want to select.
2. Hold down the Shift key and click on the rest of the elements you want to select. The most recent selection is green and
prior selections are blue.
To select a group of elements by creating a selection window:
1. Going from either left to right, or right to left, drag a selection window around the elements you want to select. Any
elements touching the selection window will be selected (they do not need to be totally enclosed).
To select all instances of a specific element:
1. Select one instance of the element in your project.
2. Right-click and select Select All Similar. All elements in the project that have the same definition as the chosen element
become selected.
To select all elements on the current location:
1. Select Edit > Select All.
To re-select the elements you last selected:
1. Select Edit > Select Previous.

Deselecting Elements
When you select elements, you can remove individual elements from your selection set. You can also deselect everything
that is currently selected.
To deselect individual elements:
1. Hold down your Shift key.
2. Click the element you want to deselect.
To deselect everything in your selection set:
1. Select Edit > Deselect All, or right-click in the drawing area and select Deselect All, or simply click in a blank spot
somewhere else in the drawing area.

- 17 -
Chapter 3: Drawing & Editing Basics

Making Elements on All Locations Selectable in 2D

By default, only elements on the current building location can be selected in 2D plan view, even if elements on other
locations are visible. If you want to make elements on all locations selectable, you need to change one of your program
settings.
To make elements on all locations selectable in 2D plan view:

1. Select Settings > Document Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Document Settings dialog, click Building Aids in the left column.
3. In the Drawing Assistance area, uncheck the Select elements on current location only while in plan view check box.
4. Click OK.

Accessing Edit Tools

Most elements can be moved once they are selected by simply clicking and dragging them. Some can also be stretched or
rotated. You can access a full menu of edit tools by right-clicking in the drawing area, or by selecting Edit > Modify
Elements.
Menus vary depending on the element selected. Typical tools are Properties, Move, Rotate, Duplicate, and Delete. If two
types of elements are selected (such as a floor and a wall), only tools that are common to both element types are available.

- 18 -
Chapter 4: Building Locations

When you insert an element in your drawing, it is inserted on the current building location. It is important to define your
building locations before inserting elements, since building locations are the key to organizing elements and inserting them
at the correct height in your model.
If you are drawing from scratch, the program’s default drawing templates have a few pre-defined building locations. You
can change the settings for existing building locations as well as add and delete locations.
If you use the House Builder Wizard to start your project, your main building locations are set up for you when you run the
House Builder Wizard.
This chapter describes how to define your building locations, and identify the current building location when adding
elements to your design.

Defining Building Locations

When you insert an element in your drawing, it is inserted on the current building location. It is important to define your
building locations before inserting elements, since building locations are the key to organizing elements and inserting them
at the correct height in your model.
The program’s default drawing templates have a few pre-defined building locations. You can change the settings for
existing building locations as well as add and delete locations.
When you define building locations, you are basically doing two things:
• setting the wall height for each floor (level) in your model
• specifying where each floor is positioned relative to grade or another location
To define building locations:

1. Select Settings > Building Locations, or click on the View Control toolbar.

Below is a brief description of each building location property.

Number. A reference number for the location.
Name. The location’s name (e.g. Ground Floor).
Floor Level. The level of the new location’s floor relative to grade, and the level at which the wall bottoms will sit.
Head Height. Height of tops of windows and wall openings relative to the floor level.
Ceiling Height. Height of underside of ceiling surface relative to the floor level.
Wall Height. Physical height of the walls on the location.

- 19 -
Chapter 4: Building Locations

Framing Options. Determines how the walls on the location are framed.
Floor levels are relative to the ground. As an example, if the Foundation location has a Floor Level of -8’ (or -2440 mm), the
base of the foundation is positioned 8’ (2440 mm) below ground level. (In other words, it is a full basement.) In this case, if
the Wall Height of the Foundation location is 8’ (2440 mm), the top of the foundation wall will be situated at ground level.
To change the properties of a building location:
1. In the Building Locations dialog, click on the property you want to change. You can change location names or any of
the numerical settings.
2. Type the value you want.
3. Press Enter.
To add a new building location:
1. In the Building Locations dialog, click the Add Location button, then follow the steps in Adding a Building Location
on page 20.
To delete a building location:
1. In the Building Locations dialog, click on one of the location’s fields to make it the current location.
2. Click Delete Location.
Note: You cannot delete a location if it contains any elements. Also, you cannot delete a location if it is the only one in the list.

Adding a Building Location

You can set up all building locations before starting a drawing, or you can add locations as needed.
To add a building location:

1. Select Settings > Building Locations, or click on the on the View Control toolbar.
2. In the Building Locations dialog, click the Add Location button.
3. In the New Location dialog, specify where you want to calculate the new location from by selecting either Calculate
from existing location or Calculate from grade. Typically, the foundation and ground- or first-level locations are cal-
culated from grade, while upper floors are calculated from existing locations.
4. If you selected Calculate from existing location, specify the following settings in the Location Calculator (From Ex-
isting) dialog:
Location Name. The name of the location as it will appear in the Building Locations dialog and drop box.
Top of Wall from Grade. This value is calculated automatically based on the values you specify for the walls and floor,
and the levels defined for the existing building location. It indicates the level at which the new location’s wall tops will
sit relative to grade.
Wall Height. How tall you want the walls to be on the new location.
Ceiling Height. Height of the underside of the ceiling surface relative to the floor.
Head Height. Height of tops of windows and wall openings relative to the floor.
Sheathing. The thickness of the floor sheathing.
Structural. The height of the floor’s structural material (e.g. joists).
Sill Plate. The thickness of the sill plate.
Floor Level. The level of the new location’s floor relative to grade. The new location’s wall bottoms will sit at this level.
This value is calculated automatically by adding the total thickness of the new location’s floor structure (sill plate +
joists + sheathing) to the existing location’s Top of Wall from Grade height value.
Top of Wall from Grade. The level at which the existing location’s wall tops currently sit relative to grade.
Calculate from Location. The existing building location from which the new one will be calculated. Typically this is
the location on which the new location will sit.

- 20 -
 Making a Building Location Current

5. If you selected Calculate from grade, specify the Wall Height, Ceiling Height and Head Height in the Location Cal-
culator (From Grade) dialog as described in the previous step. Additionally, specify the location’s Floor Level from
Grade to determine where the top of the floor (and base of the walls) will sit relative to grade.
The Top of Wall from Grade will be automatically calculated based on the specified wall height and floor level.
6. Click OK to add the location to the list. To determine how walls on the location are framed, see Defining Wall Framing
Options for Building Locations on page 106.
Note: When you add a location to your list, it does not become the current location unless you select it in the list or edit
its properties.

Making a Building Location Current

Before inserting an element in your drawing you should make sure that the building location you want to insert the element
on is the current building location.
To make a building location current:
• Click on the building locations drop box on the View Control toolbar and select the desired location.

OR
• In the Building Locations dialog, click in the far left field of the location you want to make current. A check mark in-
dicates the location is now current.

Allowing a Different Current Location Per View Window

By default, the location you select in one view window will be the one displayed when you switch to other view windows.
By changing your program settings you can allow a different location to be current in each view window.
To allow a different current location per view window:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Program Settings dialog, click Workspace in the left column.
3. In the Model View Behavior area, disable the Maintain Current Location Per View check box.
4. Click OK.

Location Dimming
When a particular location is current, elements on all other visible locations are dimmed. This makes it easier to insert and
edit elements on the current location because it is more obvious which elements are part of the current location.
By default, elements on other locations are dimmed by 90%. You can adjust the dimming so that it is lighter or darker
according to your preference.
To change the dimming percentage:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Program Settings dialog, click Workspace in the left column.
3. Type the desired dimming percentage in the Dimming Percentage edit box, or use the arrows to scroll up or down
through a list of values.
4. Click OK.

- 21 -
Chapter 4: Building Locations

- 22 -
Chapter 5: House Builder Wizard

The first question many people ask when they sit down with a new piece of software is, “Where do I start”? The House
Builder Wizard is the perfect way to start a project, because it builds a house for you instantly! All you need to do is specify
how many stories you want to create, select a general house shape, define the building dimensions, then select the general
style for the walls, roof, floors and foundation. In a few mouse clicks, you’ll have a basic structure that you can edit and add
to.
Once your basic model is built you can add things like interior walls, doors, windows and stairs. If you would prefer to start
your project from scratch, you may want to start by drawing walls. (See Drawing Walls on page 7.)

Using the House Builder Wizard

The House Builder Wizard is the perfect way to start a project, because it builds a house for you instantly! All you need to
do is specify how many stories you want to create, select a general house shape, define the building dimensions, then select
the general style for the walls, roof, floors and foundation. The resulting house includes exterior walls, footings and
foundation walls (or concrete slab), a roof, and a floor. In a few mouse clicks, you’ll have a basic structure that you can edit
in every way to suit your needs.
To use the House Builder Wizard:

1. Select Insert > Design Wizards > House Builder, or click on the Building toolbar.

Note: Running the House Builder Wizard will delete all existing building elements in the current project. It will not,
however, remove the terrain or any landscaping elements you have inserted.
2. Click Yes in the warning dialog to proceed.

3. On the House Builder screen, click Next.

-1-
Chapter 5: House Builder Wizard

4. From the Number of Floors drop box, select the number of floors you would like the house to have (not including the
basement level).
5. In the Floor to Ceiling Height edit box, type the desired wall height for each floor level.
6. In the Foundation Type area, select the type of foundation you want to create. Choose from Concrete Slab, Full Basement,
or Foundation Walls w/ Crawl Space.
7. If you selected the Full Basement or Foundation Walls w/Crawl Space, specify the elevation of the ground floor relative
to the ground in the Ground Floor Height above Terrain edit box.
8. Click Next.

9. Select the general house shape by clicking one of the graphics in the House Shape pane.
10. Once you’ve selected a house shape, make a selection in the Garage Position pane to specify where you want to put the
garage. If you don’t want a garage, select the first option.
11. Click Next.

-2-
 Using the House Builder Wizard

12. In the Building Size area, specify the desired dimensions for the house by entering values in the edit boxes. The edit box
labels correspond to the labels on the image in the left pane.
13. In the Garage area, select either Single, Double or Triple from the Type drop box. Then, using the dimensioned graphic
as an aid, specify the desired offset of the garage from the exterior wall corner.
14. Click Next.

15. From the Building Configuration drop box, select the general style for your home (contemporary, country or tradi-
tional). The pre-set material selections for the elements in your house are displayed in the lower pane. You can select
different materials if you want — just click the button of the element you want to change and make a selection from the
catalog.
16. Click Next.

-3-
Chapter 5: House Builder Wizard

17. Click Finish to build the house.

Launching the House Builder Wizard Automatically at Startup

If you want you can choose to launch the House Builder Wizard automatically every time you start a new project, instead
of opening a blank drawing.
To launch the House Builder Wizard automatically at startup:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Program Settings dialog, select General in the left column.
3. In the Startup area, check the Launch wizard when starting new project check box.
4. Select House Builder from the drop box.
5. Click OK.

Creating a Custom House Builder Wizard Configuration

A House Builder Wizard configuration determines what elements are used for exterior walls, roofs, floors, ceilings,
foundation walls and footings. You are asked to select a configuration for your house when you run the House Builder
Wizard.
You can edit any of the existing configurations that are available in the House Builder Wizard, or create your own.
Customized configurations are saved automatically and will be available when you run the House Builder Wizard in the
current project, or any other project.
To access the building configuration library:

1. Select File > Catalogs > Library Manager, or click the down arrow next to the Catalogs button on the Standard
toolbar and select Library Manager.
2. In the Library Manager dialog, select Libraries > Building Configuration.
To add a new configuration to the list:
1. Select Edit > Add Configuration, or right-click in the Building Configurations window and select Add Configuration.
An entry named ‘New Configuration’ is added to the list.
2. Select the new configuration in the list. If you want to rename it, select Edit > Rename Configuration, or right-click
and select Rename Configuration. Then, type the new name and press ENTER.

-4-
 Creating a Custom House Builder Wizard Configuration

To edit a building configuration:

1. Select the configuration in the list. The element selections for the configuration are listed in the center pane.
2. In the center pane, select an element type you want to specify a style for (e.g. Main Wall).
3. Click the Select button.
4. In the Catalog Access dialog, select the specific style you want to apply to the selected element type, then click OK.
5. Continue selecting styles for the remaining element types.
To delete a configuration from the list:
1. Select the configuration in the list.
2. Select Edit > Delete Configuration, or right-click and select Delete Configuration, or simply press the Delete key on
your keyboard.

-5-
Chapter 5: House Builder Wizard

-6-
Chapter 6: Walls

In most cases you will probably want to start your design by drawing the exterior walls, and then adding interior walls.
Drawing walls is easy — just point and click!
Drawing walls is easy — just point and click. Virtual Architect home design software automatically displays dimensions as
you draw, and connects corners for you. If the Object Snap is turned on, interior walls snap to other existing walls and create
clean intersections with them.
Once inserted, any wall can be moved, rotated, lengthened, shortened, elevated, lowered, curved, deleted, and more. This
lets you create the exact wall layout that you want.
There are two different tools available for drawing walls: the Walls tool, and the Walls by Baseline tool. The Walls tool draws
walls on center. The Walls by Baseline tool lets you draw walls on any baseline, such as the exterior or interior wall line.
The catalog contains exterior, interior and foundation wall types. Once your walls are drawn, you can add paint, wallpaper,
baseboards and other types of trim for a truly customized look. Walls also have a framing configuration in their properties
which you can customize if you want.

Drawing Walls
Drawing walls with the Walls tool is easy — just click to select a start point, move your pointer away from the start point in
the desired direction, and then click to define the wall’s end point. You can use the on-screen dimensions or the Commander
to define the wall’s length while drawing the wall. Walls drawn with the Walls tool are drawn on center, which means they
are drawn along each wall’s center line. You can choose to draw them on a different wall line using the Walls by Baseline
tool.
By drawing walls on different building locations, you can create a design with multiple stories.
Floor plans often display walls with a solid fill. You can do this too by turning solid fill on in your program settings.
If you would like to have two different floor finishes in the same room, you can divide the room into two separate areas
(without inserting a wall).

Drawing Walls
You can draw walls by simply pointing and clicking with your mouse.
Perimeter walls drawn with the Walls tool are drawn on center. If you want to draw walls with a different offset (such as on
the outer face of the veneer), use the Walls by Baseline tool instead.
If automatic floors are turned on in your program settings, a floor is automatically inserted when you create a closed wall
layout. You can change the floor properties after it has been inserted if you want.
Once you’ve created your exterior walls, you can start drawing interior walls. Walls snap to other walls automatically,
creating clean corners and intersections.
To draw walls:
1. Make sure the current location is the location that you want to insert walls on.

2. Select Insert > Walls > Walls, or click the down arrow next to the Walls button on the Building toolbar and select
Walls.
3. In the catalog, select the wall type that you want to insert.
4. Select a start point for the first wall.

Note: When selecting a start point for an interior wall, the on-screen dimensions measure from the inside face of the
exterior walls to the adjacent face of the interior wall you are drawing.

-7-
Chapter 6: Walls

5. Without dragging, move your cursor in the direction you want your wall to run. Its length is shown as you draw the
wall.

Note: By default, drawing is constrained to 15º angles. To release this constraint, turn off Angle Snap.

6. When the wall is the length you want, click to set its endpoint.
7. To add another wall to the one you have just drawn, move the mouse in the direction you want the new wall to run.
When it is the right length, click to set its endpoint.
8. When you are finished drawing walls, right-click and select Finish.

Drawing Walls from an Offset Baseline

If you use the Walls tool to draw perimeter walls, the walls are drawn on center, which means they are drawn on a center
baseline. You may prefer to draw your walls on a different baseline. For example, you may want your baseline to represent
the inner or outer edge of the wall core. You can then offset the walls from that baseline in either direction by a specified
distance, or have no offset at all.
You can draw walls from an offset baseline using the Walls by Baseline tool. Once you’ve drawn the perimeter baseline you
can specify how you want to offset the walls from that baseline.
To draw walls from an offset baseline:

1. Select Insert > Walls > Walls by Baseline, or click the down arrow next to the Walls button on the Building toolbar
and select Walls by Baseline.
2. In the catalog, select the wall type you want to insert.
3. Pick points to draw the outline of your exterior wall layout, then right-click and select Finish. When considering your
measurements, keep in mind that the walls will be offset from this outline.
If you make a mistake while drawing the outline you can undo the last segment drawn by right-clicking and selecting
Step Back.
4. In the Walls by Baseline dialog, select the wall face that you would like to serve as the offset baseline. You can choose
either Outer Face of Veneer, Outer Face of Wall Core or Stud, or Inner Face of Wall Core or Stud.
5. In the Offset area, specify an offset distance in the Distance edit box, if desired.
6. If you have specified an offset distance, select the direction in which you want to offset the walls from the baseline, ei-
ther Towards outside or Towards inside.
7. Click OK. The walls are created.

Note: When drawing the layout, do not select the start point again to create the last segment. The last point picked is
continually connected to the start point.

Adding a Story
Once you have created one level, such as the Ground Floor level, adding more levels to your design is easy. You can create
a new story in one of the following ways:
• Use the Floor and Foundation Builder Wizard to automatically create perimeter walls on another location (see page 9)
• Use the Duplicate to Locations tool to copy the walls from an existing location to a new location (see page 175)

-8-
 Using the Floor and Foundation Builder Wizard

• Use the Walls tool to draw walls on a new building location using the walls on the previous location as a tracing foot-
print (see page 7)

Using the Floor and Foundation Builder Wizard

Once you have created a perimeter wall layout for one level in your design, you can use the Floor and Foundation Builder
Wizard to automatically create a foundation level or additional stories. When stepping through the Wizard you define the
element configuration and materials you want to use, and the relative position of elements. The Wizard then builds the new
level for you automatically using the existing layout on another location as a tracing footprint.
To create a new level with the Floor and Foundation Builder:
1. Make sure you have drawn a perimeter wall layout for one building location in your model. The Wizard will use these
walls as a tracing footprint for the new level.
2. Select Insert > Design Wizards > Floor and Foundation Builder, or click the down arrow next to the Design Wizards

button on the Building toolbar and select Floor and Foundation Builder.

3. On the Welcome screen, click Next.

-9-
Chapter 6: Walls

4. Select the type of level you want to create. To create a new story (comprising walls and a floor), enable the Floor Level
radio button, then select a building location for the new level from the location drop box (e.g. Second Floor). To create
a foundation level (which can include footings, or can be just a slab), enable the Foundation Level radio button, then
select a building location for the foundation elements (e.g. Foundation). The building location you select determines
the height of the new level’s walls as well as the floor level.
5. Click Next.

6. In the Type area, select the type of element configuration you want to create. For a floor level, this determines how the
floor intersects with the walls. For a foundation level, this dictates what type of foundation will be created and what it
will include.

Floor Level Options

Foundation Level Options

7. If you selected a configuration that includes walls, click the Walls button, then select the type of wall you want created
on the new level in the Catalog Access dialog.
8. If the configuration you selected includes a floor, click the Floors button, then select the type of floor you want the new
level to have.
9. If you are creating a Slab on Grade or Monolithic foundation level but already have a floor slab in the drawing, you will
probably want to enable the I already have a floor slab, do not include another check box. This prevents the creation
of an additional floor slab.
10. If you are creating a foundation level, click the Footings button, then select the type of footing you want to use.
11. Click Next.

- 10 -
 Solid Filling Walls and Other Elements

12. The Adjust Position of Elements screen lets you move the walls, floor or footing toward the inside or toward the out-
side of the layout. If you want to adjust any of these elements, select the element to adjust from the Adjust Element
drop box, then enter the distance you want to move the element in the Distance edit box. Then, specify the direction
in which you want to move the element by enabling either the Towards Inside or Towards Outside radio button.
The point from which the move distance is measured depends on the type of element you are adjusting and the floor
style or foundation type you have selected. For more detailed information on adjusting elements, click the help button
on the Adjust Position of Elements screen.
13. Once you adjusted your elements, click Next.

14. Click Finish. The new level is created automatically.

Note: The Floor and Foundation Builder will not launch if there is not a closed wall layout present in the drawing.

Solid Filling Walls and Other Elements

You can instantly apply solid fill to the walls or other elements in your 2D plan by enabling solid fill in your Program
Settings. Any element that has solid fill enabled on its Appearance property page will be solid filled. These include walls,
floors, surfaces, members, cabinets, paths, pads, and fills.

- 11 -
Chapter 6: Walls

To enable solid filling:

1. Select Settings > Document Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Document Settings dialog, select Building Aids in the left column.
3. In the Drawing Assistance area, enable the Enable Solid Filling check box.
4. Click OK.

Note: Solid filling will only appear on elements that have solid fill colors assigned to them and have solid fill turned on in
their Appearance properties.

Editing Solid Fill Colors

Certain elements have a solid fill color assigned to them in their Appearance properties. These include walls, floors, surfaces,
members, cabinets, paths, pads, and fills. You can edit the color assignment for these elements in your catalog or in your
drawing.
To edit solid fill colors:
1. Select the element whose solid fill color you want to change, either in the catalog, or in your drawing. Note that editing
solid fill in the catalog will affect only future insertions of that element type.
2. Access the element’s properties.
3. In the properties dialog, select the Appearance tab.
4. In the Components list, select the component you want to change. For example, if the element is a wall you may want to
select 2D Core or Airspace
5. In the Solid Fill area, make sure the Enable check box is checked.
6. Click the color swatch.
7. In the Color dialog, select the desired solid fill color, then click OK.
8. Click OK in the properties dialog.

Disabling Solid Fill for Individual Elements

If you have enabled solid filling in your program settings, you can turn solid fill off for individual elements in your drawing
by editing the element’s Appearance properties.
To disable solid fill for an individual element:
1. Select the element whose solid fill you want to turn off.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the properties dialog, select the Appearance tab.
4. In the Components list, select the component whose solid fill you want to disable. For example, if the element is a wall,
you may want to select 2D Core.
5. In the Solid Fill area, uncheck the Enable check box.
6. Click OK.

Note: To turn off all solid filling in your drawing you need to disable solid filling in your program settings.

Editing Walls
Walls can be edited in a number of different ways. To display a menu of wall editing commands, simply select a wall and
then right-click your mouse. Selecting Walls Help at the bottom of the menu displays a list of help topics relating to walls.
These include the following:
Resize a wall layout
Lengthen or shorten a wall
Move a wall
Rotate a wall

- 12 -
 Resizing a Wall Layout

Curve a wall
Break a wall
Edit the width of a wall
Edit the height of wall
Drop the exterior face of a wall
Raise or lower a wall
Slope the top or bottom of a wall
Step the top of bottom of a wall
Extend wall tops beneath gable ends
Delete a wall

Resizing a Wall Layout

You can resize an exterior wall layout by moving a wall, or by editing its dynamic dimensions. All adjoining walls
automatically stretch along with the wall you are moving or editing.
To resize a wall layout by moving a wall:
1. Select the exterior wall you want to move. All attached walls will stretch along with it when you move it.

2. Hover your pointer over the center grip to display the Move cursor.
3. Click and drag the wall to resize the wall layout, then release your mouse button.
To resize a wall layout by editing its dimensions:
1. Select one of the walls. If you want to stretch the layout left or right, select a vertical wall. If you want to stretch the
layout up or down, select a horizontal wall. Dynamic dimensions are displayed on the wall layout.
2. Click the dimension you want to edit. The Edit Dimension dialog appears.

3. Enter the new value in the Enter Distance edit box.

4. Specify the direction in which you want to move the walls by clicking one of the arrows to the right of the Enter Dis-
tance edit box.
5. Press Enter or click OK. The walls update automatically.

Note: If you select an interior wall and edit its dynamic length dimension, this will also resize the wall layout.

Lengthening and Shortening Walls

You can lengthen or shorten a wall by clicking and dragging one of the wall’s ends, or by editing the dynamic dimension
that appears along its length. If you choose to lengthen or shorten a wall by clicking and dragging, and that wall is attached
to other walls, the attached walls will not move or change. However, if you choose to lengthen or shorten a wall by editing
dynamic dimensions, and that wall is attached to other walls, the attached walls will move along with it.

- 13 -
Chapter 6: Walls

To lengthen or shorten a wall by clicking and dragging:

1. Select the wall. A grip is displayed at each wall end.
2. Hover your pointer over the wall end you want to stretch. The Lengthen cursor is displayed .
3. Click and drag the wall end until it has reached the desired length.
4. Release your mouse button.
To lengthen or shorten a wall by editing dynamic dimensions:
1. Select the wall.
2. Click on the dimension that appears along the wall’s length.

3. In the Edit Dimension dialog, specify the desired length for the wall, then specify which end of the wall you want to
stretch or retract by clicking one of the arrow buttons next to the length edit box.

4. Click OK.

Editing the Width of a Wall

You can edit the width or thickness of a wall by making changes on the wall’s Basic property page.
To edit the width of a wall:
1. Select the wall. You can select multiple walls using Shift+click if you want.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Walls dialog, select the Basic tab.
4. Enter the desired thickness in the Width edit box in the Core area.
5. Click OK.

Editing the Height of a Wall

You can edit a wall’s height on the wall’s Top and Bottom property page.
To edit the height of a wall:
1. Select the wall. You can select multiple walls using Shift+click if you want.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

- 14 -
 Raising or Lowering a Wall

3. In the Walls dialog, select the Top and Bottom tab.

4. In the Wall Top area, select the Level option.
5. In the Wall Height edit box, type the desired wall height.
6. Click OK.

Raising or Lowering a Wall

You can raise or lower a wall using the Elevate tool on the wall’s right-click menu.
To edit the elevation of a wall:
1. Select the wall whose elevation you want to edit.
2. Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Elevate. The value shown in the Elevate dialog is
the current elevation of the wall.
3. In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired elevation of the bottom of the wall above the floor.
4. If you are in a 3D or elevation view and would like to see what the wall looks like at the new elevation, click Apply.
The Elevate tool remains active while the change is applied to the wall in your model.
5. To apply the change and close the dialog, click OK.

Sloping a Wall
You can slope a wall by setting different heights for each end of the wall.
To slope a wall:
1. Select the wall.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Walls dialog, select the Top and Bottom tab.
4. To slope the top of the wall, select the Slope option in the Wall Top area. To slope the bottom of the wall, select the Slope
option in the Wall Bottom area.
5. In the Start Point edit box, type the distance from the floor to the start point of the slope. Note that the green wall end
marker on the diagram corresponds to the green wall end marker on the wall in your drawing. This way you know
which end is which.
6. In the Stop Point edit box, type the distance from the floor to the end point of the slope. Note that you do not need to
enter a negative value to slope a wall bottom below floor level.
7. Click OK.

Stepping a Wall
You can step the top or bottom of a wall by simply editing the wall’s properties. For example, you may want to create a
stepped foundation to accommodate a sloped building lot.
To step a wall:
1. Select the wall.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Walls dialog, select the Top and Bottom tab.
4. To step the top of the wall, select the Step option in the Wall Top area. To step the bottom of the wall, select the Step
option in the Wall Bottom area.
5. In the Start Point edit box, type the distance from the floor to the start point of the step. Note that the green wall end
marker on the diagram corresponds to the green wall end marker on the wall in your drawing. This way you know
which end is which.
6. In the Stop Point edit box, type the distance from the floor to the end point of the slope. Note that you do not need to
enter a negative value to step a wall bottom below floor level.
7. Click OK.

- 15 -
Chapter 6: Walls

Note: If you apply strip footings to stepped wall bottoms, the footings will automatically step also.

Extending Walls to the Roof

By default, the tops of most walls in the catalog are set to be level (regardless of the roof type), and their height is determined
by the Wall Height setting of the building location on which they reside. You can specify that you want a wall to
automatically extend to the roof, regardless of the Wall Height setting in your building locations. This is particularly useful
for filling in the pitched areas at gable ends.
To extend walls to the roof:
1. Select the wall that you want to auto-extend to the roof. You can select additional walls using Shift+click.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Walls dialog, select the Top and Bottom tab.
4. In the Wall Top area, enable the Auto Extend option.
5. To rake the external side of the wall, check the Exterior Wall Tops to Roof check box. If you want to offset the wall a
specific distance from the roof surface, enter a value in the Offset below roof surface edit box.
6. To rake the internal side of the wall, check the Interior Wall Tops to Roof check box. If you want to offset the wall a
specific distance from the roof surface, enter a value in the Offset below roof surface edit box.
7. Click OK. The walls are adjusted.

Tip: If you want to use a different wall material within the pitched area of a gable end, set the wall shape to ’Level’ in its
properties and change the roof edge properties instead. In a roof’s properties you can choose to display a separate wall in
the pitched area by enabling the Display Gable option on the roof’s Basic property page and selecting the desired gable Wall
Type. This wall can then be selected independently of the main wall so that you can control its properties and framing
separately.

Making Walls Level

By default, most walls in the catalog are set to have level tops and bottoms, regardless of the construction above or below
them. If a wall in your drawing has been stepped, sloped or extended to the roof, you can specify that you want it to be level
instead. As an example, you would do this if the wall were at a gable end and you wanted to display a separate material or
wall within the pitched area of the gable end.
To make a wall level:
1. Select the wall that you want to edit, either in the catalog or in your drawing.
2. Right-click and select Properties.
3. In the Walls dialog, select the Top and Bottom tab.
4. Enable the Level radio button in either the Wall Top or Wall Bottom area depending on which part you want to level.
5. If you are leveling the top of the wall you can specify the desired height for the wall in the Wall Height edit box.
6. Click OK.

Moving Walls
You can move one or more walls by clicking and dragging them, or by editing the dynamic dimensions that appear on and
near walls when you select a wall in your plan. When you move a wall, any walls attached to that wall move with it for a
stretching effect.
To move walls by clicking and dragging:
1. Click on the wall that you want to move. To move multiple walls, use Shift+click to select the remaining walls.

2. Hover your pointer over the center grip on the currently selected wall to display the Move cursor.
3. Click and drag the wall to move it.
4. Release your mouse button.

- 16 -
 Rotating a Wall

To move walls by editing dynamic dimensions:

1. Click on the wall that you want to move. Dimensions appear on any walls that are attached to the selected wall, indi-
cating the wall’s distance from adjacent walls.
2. Click on the dimension that you want to change.
3. In the Edit Dimension dialog, type the desired value for the dimension, then click OK. The dimension updates, and
the wall is moved.

Rotating a Wall
You can use the Rotate tool to rotate a wall about a selected point.
To rotate a wall:
1. Select the wall.
2. Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Rotate.
3. Position your pointer over the point you want to rotate the wall around.
4. Click and drag to rotate the wall, then release your mouse button.

Curving a Wall
You can curve a wall using the Curve tool. Once the tool is active, you can click and drag the wall to curve it, or select a point
to curve to.
To curve a wall by clicking and dragging:
1. Click the wall to select it.
2. Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve.
3. Click and drag the wall to the desired curve.
4. Release your mouse button.
To curve a wall to a selected point:
1. Click the wall to select it.
2. Right-click in and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve.
3. Select the point you want to curve to. The wall automatically curves to the point.
4. Click to finish.

Offsetting a Wall
You can use the Offset tool to make multiple copies a wall in a set direction.
To offset a wall:
1. Select the wall.

- 17 -
Chapter 6: Walls

2. Right-click and select Offset, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Offset.
3. In the Offset dialog, type the distance you want to offset the wall in the Offset Distance edit box.
4. In the Number of Copies edit box, type the number of copies you want to create, or use the arrow keys to increase or
decrease the number.
5. Click OK.
6. Click on the side you want to offset to. The wall is offset.

Breaking a Wall
You can break a wall into two or more segments using the Break tool. The segments can then be edited individually.
To break a wall:
1. Click the wall to select it.
2. Right-click in the drawing area and select Break, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Break.
3. Click the point where you want to break the wall. This divides the wall into two segments that can be moved, stretched
or manipulated individually.

Note: If the wall is a composite wall (framed wall + veneer), only the framed wall is broken.

Tip: To break a wall into specific lengths, use the Auto Break tool.

Tip: You can move a wall break by editing the wall’s onscreen dimensions.

Breaking a Wall into Specific Lengths

You can use the Auto Break tool on a wall’s editing menu to break the wall into lengths of your choice. This is particularly
useful if you are using panelized construction because it provides precise control over the length of your panels. By breaking
down long walls you can also avoid exceeding your maximum panel length.
To break a wall into specific lengths:
1. Select the wall that you want to break, then right-click and select Auto Break.
2. In the Enter Break Distance dialog, type the length that you want your wall sections to be, then press Enter or click
OK.

The wall is broken into sections. The end at which breaking starts depends on the type of wall you are breaking. If you
are breaking a framed wall, breaking begins according to the Framing Rule applied to that wall. In other words, the
break direction coincides with the framing direction. If you are breaking a non-framed wall, breaking begins at the
wall’s start point. (When you select a wall in plan view, the end with the green grip is the start point.)
If the wall cannot be broken equally into the lengths you specified (due to its overall length), the last wall section will
be shorter.

Note: If the wall is a composite wall (framed wall + veneer), only the framed wall is broken.

Tip: To break a wall anywhere by picking a break point, use the Break tool instead.

Tip: You can move a wall break by editing the wall’s onscreen dimensions. This changes the length of the wall panels on
either side of the break.

Moving Wall Breaks

If you have broken a wall using the Break or Auto Break tool, you can move a wall break by editing the wall’s onscreen
dimensions. Moving a break changes the length of wall panels on either side of the break.

- 18 -
 Deleting a Wall

To move a wall break:

1. Click on the wall segment whose length you want to edit. A dimension appears along the length of the wall segment.
2. Click on the onscreen dimension.
3. In the Edit Dimension dialog, type the length that you want to the wall segment to have, then click one of the arrows
next to the edit box to specify which end you want to move. In the example below, if we wanted to make the selected
panel 6 feet long, we would type 6’ in the edit box, and then click the left arrow button to move the left wall break to
the left. The panel would then be resized to 6’.

4. Click OK. The wall break is moved according to the settings you defined.

Deleting a Wall
You can delete a wall in a couple of easy steps.
To delete a wall:
1. Select the wall to delete. You can select multiple walls using Shift+click.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Note: If your model contains an automatic floor, the floor will be deleted if the wall you are deleting opens up the wall
layout.

Paint & Trim

You can use the Materials Paintbrush to apply different materials to walls (wood, stucco, brick, etc.), or apply paint or
wallpaper.
You can apply trim to either side of a wall by making trim selections on the wall’s Trim property page. You can select
materials of your choice for baseboards, crown molding, chair rails, door/window trim, sills, cove molding, wainscoting and
decorative wallpaper borders. To enhance your design you can apply a profile to trim if you like.

Applying Different Materials to Walls

You can apply different finishes to your walls using the handy Materials Paintbrush. The materials catalog contains an
excellent selection of brick, concrete, wood and stone finishes.
To apply a material to a wall:
1. Display your model in 3D, and make sure the wall face you want to apply the material to is visible in the view.

- 19 -
Chapter 6: Walls

2. Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click on any tabbed toolbar.

3. In the catalog panel, select the material you want to apply.
4. Click on the wall face that you want to apply the material to. The material is immediately applied.
5. Right-click and select Finish.

Adding Paint and Wallpaper

You can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly apply custom paint, wallpaper or wood paneling to a wall.
To apply paint or wallpaper to walls:
1. Display your model in 3D, and make sure the wall face you want to apply the paint or wallpaper to is visible in the
view.

2. Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click on any tabbed toolbar.

3. In the catalog panel, select the material you want to apply. You can filter the material list to display only wall finishes
by selecting Paint or Wall Material - Interior from the Filter drop box.
4. Click on the wall face that you want to apply the paint or wallpaper to. The material is immediately applied. You can
continue applying the material to other walls if you want.
5. Right-click and select Finish.

Adding Trim to Walls

Trim types include baseboards, crown molding, chair rails, door/window trim, sills, cove molding, wainscoting and
decorative wallpaper borders. You can add as many types of trim to a wall as you want, and even add different materials
to either side of the wall.
Trim selections are made on a wall’s Trim property page.
To add trim to walls:
1. Select the wall you want to add trim to.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Walls dialog, select the Trim tab.
4. From the Application drop box, select the wall side you want to add trim to. Choices are Exterior Side, Left Interior
Side, and Right Interior Side.
The Exterior Side is the exterior side of an exterior wall.
The Left Interior Side or Right Interior Side of a wall depends on the direction in which the wall is drawn. If you click
on a wall in your drawing, you will see one end marked with a green marker, and the other end marked with a red
marker. The green marker indicates the start point of the wall, or the point you started drawing from. The red marker
indicates the end point. To determine the left or right side of the wall, picture yourself standing at the wall’s start point
(green marker) and looking toward the end point (red marker). Turning your head left or right while in this position
determines which side is left, and which side is right. For example, if a wall was drawn from left to right, the left interior
side would be the side closest to the top of the screen.
5. In the list of trim types, select the trim you would like to select a member for (Crown, Chair Rail, Baseboard, etc.).
6. Click Select.
7. In the Catalog Access dialog, select the trim you want to use, then click OK. The trim list displays the member you
selected.
8. To delete the member from the trim list, select it, then click Delete.
9. In the Apply to area, specify how you would like the trim applied to the wall. Different variables are available depend-
ing on the trim type.
Gap. For trim around door and window openings, this is the offset of the trim from the opening. For crown moldings,
baseboards and chair rails, this is the offset of the trim from the wall face.

- 20 -
 Applying a Profile to Trim

Offset. For crown moldings, this is the offset of the molding from the top of the wall. For baseboards and chair rails,
this is the offset of the member from the bottom of the wall.
Offset from wall. If creating custom trim, this determines where the member is offset from when an offset is specified.
Choose from Wall Bottom, Wall Top, Ceiling or Floor.
Trim basepoint. If creating custom trim, this determines which edge of the trim is used to measure the offset. Choose
either Top of Trim or Bottom of Trim.
10. Once you’ve selected your trim, click OK. The walls are updated automatically.

Note: You cannot add sills to hexagon or octagon windows.

Applying a Profile to Trim

By default, trim members in the catalog have a flat profile. To add interesting detail to your design, you can apply profiles
to trim members by editing trim properties. You can select a pre-defined profile from the profiles library, or create your own.
To apply a profile to trim:
1. Select the wall containing the trim that you want to edit, then right-click and select Properties.
If the trim does not exist yet in your drawing, select File > Catalogs > Element Manager, then select the trim that you
want to edit. Go to step 5.
2. In the Walls dialog, select the Trim tab.
3. In the Trim list, select the trim type (Crown, Chair Rail, etc.) that you would like to apply a profile to, then click Select.
4. In the Catalog Access dialog, select the specific member that you would like to use, then right-click and select Edit
Element.
5. On the trim’s Basic property page, click on the Custom option in the Type area.
6. Click the Select Profile button.
7. In the Profiles dialog, select the profile that you would like to use. You can also create a custom profile if you want.
8. Click OK in the Profiles dialog.
9. Click OK in any remaining dialogs. The wall’s trim is updated to display the selected profile.

Corner Details
Professional only
You can use the Corner Details tool to add quoins or boards to exterior wall corners. This is a great way to add architectural
detail to your design.
Once inserted you can edit the properties of corner details, such as the dimensions of the quoins or boards.

Adding Corner Details to Walls

Professional only
For architectural detail you can use the Corner Details tool to add quoins or boards to exterior wall corners. Just click on a
wall to apply.
To add corner details to walls:

1. Select Insert > Detailing > Corner Details, or click on the Building toolbar.
2. In the catalog panel, select the corner detail you would like to add. For quoins you can choose a staggered, mirrored or
uniform pattern.
3. Click on the exterior wall corner you would like to apply the detail to.
4. Right-click and select Finish.

Editing Corner Details

For quoins and corner boards, you can control properties such as base height, total height, offset, and number of courses to
achieve the exact result you want.

- 21 -
Chapter 6: Walls

To edit corner detail properties:

1. Click on the corner detail to select it. This may be easier to do in 3D view. For quoins, clicking on one quoin selects the
whole set.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. Edit the properties as desired. Each type has different settings.
Corner Boards
Width. The width of one board.
Thickness. The thickness of the board material.
Overall Height. The overall height of the board.
Base Height. The offset of the board from the bottom of the wall.
Staggered/Mirrored Quoins
Length. The length of the long quoin in the pattern.
Width. The length of the short quoin in the pattern.
Offset. The thickness of the quoin material.
Height. The height of one quoin.
Gap. The distance between quoins.
Base Height. The offset of the quoining from the bottom of the wall.
Number of Courses. The number of quoins running up each wall.
Overall Height. The overall height of the quoining according to your settings. This value cannot be edited.
Reverse Starter Course. Reverses how the quoining starts at the bottom of the wall. For example, if the starter course
is a staggered long/short combination, it will be flipped to a short/long combination.
Uniform Quoins
Length. The length of a quoin.
Offset. The thickness of the quoin material.
Height. The height of one quoin.
Gap. The distance between quoins.
Base Height. The offset of the quoining from the bottom of the wall.
Number of Courses. The number of quoins running up each wall.
Overall Height. The overall height of the quoining according to your settings. This value cannot be edited.

Deleting Corner Details

You can remove corner details from a wall in a couple of easy steps.
To delete corner details:
1. Click on the detail to select it. This may be easier in 3D view. For quoining, selecting one quoin selects the whole set.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

- 22 -
Chapter 7: Footings & Columns

A structure’s support system is an extremely important consideration during all phases of a design project. Support
elements carry the load of walls, floors and other bearing elements in your model, and can also be a factor in the interior
design of your home.
Virtual Architect home design software provides the tools to accurately place footings and columns in your design.
You can automatically attach strip footings to selected walls. You can also automatically insert mono (pad) footings beneath
columns.
Columns come in a variety of shapes and sizes, and are inserted with point-and-click simplicity. You can customize them
on the fly to achieve the precise result you want.

Strip Footings
Using the Strip Footings Attached to Walls tool you can just click on a wall and a footing of your choice is automatically
inserted underneath the wall. Footings automatically shape themselves to the bottom of walls, so if your wall bottoms are
curved or stepped, your footings will be curved or stepped also.
Once inserted you can move, stretch, lengthen/shorten, break or curve a strip footing, as well as edit its type or size.

Attaching Strip Footings to Walls

Ultimate | Professional
Since foundation walls bear the weight of exterior walls above them, you need to insert footings beneath the foundation
walls to transfer support for the vertical load.
Strip footings are easy to insert — just click on a wall and a footing is automatically inserted underneath the wall. Footings
automatically shape themselves to the bottom of walls, so if your wall bottoms are curved or stepped, your footings will be
curved or stepped also.
To insert strip footings under walls:

1. Select Insert > Footings > Strip Footings Attached to Walls, or click the down arrow next to the Footings button
on the Building toolbar and select Strip Footings Attached to Walls.
2. In the catalog panel, select the footing you want to insert. Typically you would choose one that is wider than the wall
you are attaching it to.
3. Click on the wall you want to attach the footing to. The footing is inserted automatically. In plan view, strip footings
are usually shown using a dashed line.
4. Continue inserting footings underneath each exterior foundation wall.
5. Right-click and select Finish.

Editing the Shape of a Strip Footing

Strip footing shapes include rectangular, tapered and filleted. You can also apply a custom profile to a footing.
To edit the footing shape:
1. Select the footing whose properties you want to change. You can select multiple footings using Shift+click if you want.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. Select the Basic tab, then click on the appropriate graphic in the Type area. There are several profiles to choose from.
Each profile has a unique set of variables in the Properties pane that you can customize. If you would like to select or
create a custom profile, scroll over and select Custom, then click the Select Profile button.
4. Click OK.

- 23 -
Chapter 7: Footings & Columns

Editing the Size of Strip Footings

You can edit the dimensions of a footing on the footing’s Size property page.
To change the footing size:
1. Select the footing.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Strip Footing dialog, select the Basic tab.
4. Edit the dimensions of the footing.
5. Click OK.

Moving/Stretching Strip Footings

When you move a strip footing, all footings attached to it move with it for a stretching effect. You can move strip footings
by just clicking and dragging.
To move/stretch strip footings:
1. Select the footing to move. You may need to make walls non-selectable to be able to select the footing.

2. Position your pointer over the center grip to display the Move cursor.
3. Click and drag the footing to move it.
4. Release your mouse button.

Note: When you move a strip footing, it becomes detached from the wall. Therefore, if you move or stretch the wall, the
footing will not go with it. If you want to re-attach a footing to a wall, you will need to delete the footing, then insert a new
one.

Lengthening and Shortening Strip Footings

You can lengthen or shorten an individual footing by clicking and dragging one of the footing’s ends.
To lengthen or shorten a footing:
1. Select the footing. A grip is displayed at each end.
2. Hover your pointer over the end you want to stretch. The Lengthen cursor is displayed .
3. Click and drag the footing end until it has reached the desired length.
4. Release your mouse button.

Breaking Strip Footings

You can break a footing into two or more segments using the Break tool. The segments can then be edited individually.
To break a footing:
1. Click the footing to select it.
2. Right-click in the drawing area and select Break, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Break.
3. Double-click the point where you want to break the footing.

Curving Strip Footings

If your strip footings are attached to walls, the footings will curve automatically if you curve the walls they are attached to.
You can also curve footings independently if necessary using the Curve tool.
To curve a footing by clicking and dragging:
1. Click the section of footing that you want to curve.
2. Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve.
3. Click and drag the footing to the desired curve.
4. Release your mouse button.

- 24 -
 Deleting Strip Footings

To curve a footing to a selected point:

1. Click the section of footing that you want to curve.
2. Right-click in and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve.
3. Select the point you want to curve to. The footing automatically curves to the point.
4. Click to finish.

Deleting Strip Footings

You can delete a strip footing in a couple of easy steps.
To delete strip footings:
1. Select the footing to delete. You can select multiple footings using Shift+click.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Mono Footings
Mono footings (short for monolithic footings), are sections of poured concrete used to support load-bearing columns or piers.
You can use the Mono Footings Attached to Columns tool to automatically insert a footing of your choice beneath a column
in your design.
Once inserted you can move or rotate a footing, or edit its type or size.

Attaching Mono Footings to Columns

Ultimate | Professional
Since support columns in your basement bear loads at a concentrated point, the load should be transferred to a proper
footing.
Using the Mono Footings Attached to Columns tool you can insert a single mono footing beneath a selected column. All you
have to do is select the column.
If you have multiple columns that require the same footing, you can automatically attach footings to all columns of the same
type in one easy step.
To insert footings under columns:
1. Select Insert > Footings > Mono Footings Attached to Columns, or click the down arrow next to the Footings button

on the Building toolbar and select Mono Footings Attached to Columns.

2. In the catalog panel, select the footing you want to insert. Typically you would choose one that is wider than the column
you are attaching it to.
3. If you want to simultaneously insert the footing under multiple columns of the same type, right-click and select Attach
to all similar.
4. Click on a column to which you want to attach a footing. The footing is inserted automatically. If you selected Attach
to all similar in the previous step, a footing will be automatically inserted under each similar column found on the cur-
rent location.
5. Right-click and select Finish.

Editing the Mono Footing Type

Mono footing types include rectangular, tapered, cylinder and cylinder tapered. The footing type determines the footing’s
general appearance.
To edit the footing type:
1. Select the footing whose properties you want to change. You can select multiple footings using Shift+click if you want.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. Select the Basic tab, then click on the appropriate graphic in the Type area.
4. Click OK.

- 25 -
Chapter 7: Footings & Columns

Editing the Size of Mono Footings

You can edit the dimensions of a footing on the footing’s Size property page.
To change the footing size:
1. Select the footing.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Mono Footing dialog, select the Basic tab.
4. Edit the dimensions of the footing.
5. Click OK.

Moving Mono Footings

You can move a mono footing by clicking and dragging it.
To move a mono footing by clicking and dragging:
1. Select the footing to move.

2. Position your pointer over the center grip to display the Move cursor.
3. Click and drag the footing to move it.
4. Release your mouse button.

Note: When you move a mono footing, it becomes detached from the column. Therefore, if you move the column, the
footing will not go with it. If you want to re-attach a footing to a column, you will need to delete the footing, then insert a
new one.

Rotating Mono Footings

You can rotate a mono footing by simply clicking and dragging it.
To rotate a mono footing:
1. Select the footing.

2. Hover your pointer over the triangular grip to display the Rotate cursor. You may need to zoom in on the footing
to be able to see the grips clearly.
3. Click and drag to rotate the footing.
4. When the footing is at the desired rotation, release your mouse button.

Deleting Mono Footings

You can delete a mono footing in a couple of easy steps.
To delete mono footings:
1. Select the footing to remove. You can select multiple footings using Shift+click.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Columns
You can insert columns of various materials, shapes and sizes using the Columns tool. For example, if you have inserted an
I-beam in the basement, you will need some posts beneath it to support it.
You can move a column by clicking and dragging it. Also, you can edit its shape, size or elevation to suit your design needs.

Inserting Columns
Ultimate | Professional
You can use the Columns tool to insert a variety of wood, concrete, steel, brick and gypsum columns in various shapes and
sizes. You may, for example, want to insert steel posts in the basement to support an I-beam, or add decorative columns to
a room to create a sense of elegance.

- 26 -
 Editing the Shape of a Column

To insert a column:

1. Select Insert > Columns, or click on the Building toolbar.

2. In the catalog panel, select the column you want to insert.
3. Position the column where you want it, then click to insert it.
4. Right-click and select Finish.

Tip: You can apply different profiles to columns in their properties, and even create and apply your own custom profiles.

Editing the Shape of a Column

You can choose from a wide variety of column profiles, such as circular, rectangular, W-shape and C-shape, or create your
own.
To edit the column type:
1. Select the column whose properties you want to change. You can select multiple columns using Shift+click if you want.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. Select the Basic tab, then click on the appropriate graphic in the Type area. There are several profiles to choose from.
Each profile has a unique set of variables in the Properties pane that you can customize. If you would like to select or
create a custom profile, scroll over and select Custom, then click the Select Profile button.
4. Click OK.

Editing the Dimensions of a Column

You can edit the dimensions of a column (e.g. height, width and depth) to suit your needs.
To edit the size of a column:
1. Click on the column to select it.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. Edit the properties as desired. Different column shapes will have different dimension variables. Examples are dy1, dx1
and Height.
4. Click OK.

Editing the Elevation of a Column

You can edit the elevation of a column by editing the Base Offset setting in its properties.
To edit the elevation of a column:
1. Click on the column to select it.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. Edit the value in the Base Offset edit box. This is the offset of the base of the column from the floor.
4. Click OK.

Moving a Column
You can move a column by simply clicking and dragging it.
To move a column:
1. Click on the column to select it.

2. Hover your pointer over the center grip to display the Move cursor.
3. Click and drag the column to move it.
4. Release your mouse button.

Note: If you have a mono footing attached to the column, the footing will remain attached to the column and move with it.

- 27 -
Chapter 7: Footings & Columns

Deleting a Column
You can remove a column in a couple of quick steps.
To delete a column:
1. Click on the column to select it.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

- 28 -
Chapter 8: Doors, Windows &
Openings

Once you’ve drawn walls, you can insert a variety of doors, windows and openings in them to create the exact design you
want. Like all elements in Virtual Architect home design software, doors, windows and openings are intelligent. They know
that they can only be inserted in walls. As soon as your pointer gets close to a wall, they snap into place. All you have to do
is position it where you want it along the wall, then click to insert it.
Dimensions are displayed as you are positioning the element so you can get the precise placement you want. Even though
doors, windows and openings automatically become associated with the walls they are inserted in, you can edit them
independently if you want.

Doors
There are various types of doors in the catalog that you can insert in your drawing, including hinged, bi-fold, pocket, sliding
glass and garage doors. To insert a door with the Doors tool, just position the door with your pointer, and then click to insert
it. You can use the on-screen dimensions to position the door in the wall, center the door automatically (right-click and select
Center on Wall), or define a specific offset distance (right-click and select Enter insertion offset).
By default, the on-screen dimensions that appear when inserting a door measure from the edges of the door. If you prefer
you can specify that you want the dimensions to measure to the center of the door by editing your program settings.
Doors can be edited in a number of different ways, independently of the walls that contain them. To display a menu of door
editing commands, simply select a door and then right-click your mouse. Selecting Doors Help at the bottom of the menu
displays a list of help topics relating to doors.

Inserting Doors
The catalog contains a wide variety of doors for you to insert, including hinged, bi-fold, pocket, sliding glass and garage
doors. You can point and click to insert a door anywhere inside a wall, automatically center the door in the wall, or offset
the door a specific distance from the end of the wall.
Doors are inserted at floor level. You can raise or lower a door after you have inserted it if you need to.
To insert a door:
1. Make sure the location you want to insert doors on is the current location in the building locations drop box.

2. Select Insert > Doors, or click on the Building toolbar.

3. In the catalog, select the door you want to insert.
4. If you want the door to be automatically centered on the wall, right-click and select Center on wall. Go to step 6.
5. If you want to offset the door a specific distance from the end of the wall, right-click and select Enter insertion offset.
Enter the offset distance in the Enter insertion offset dialog, then click OK.
6. Position the door in the receiving wall. If you are using an insertion offset, position the door close to the end you want
to offset it from. The door will snap inside the wall. Dimensions are displayed that show you the distance on either side
of the door.
7. With your door positioned where you want it, click to insert it.
8. Right-click and select Finish.

Inserting Doors, Windows and Openings to Center

By default, the on-screen dimensions that appear when inserting doors, windows and openings measure from the edges of
the opening object. The same applies when you insert openings using an offset. If you prefer you can measure to center when
inserting openings.

- 29 -
Chapter 8: Doors, Windows & Openings

To insert doors, windows and openings to center:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Program Settings dialog, select Building Aids in the left column.
3. In the Opening Placement area, select Dimension to Center.
4. Click OK.

Inserting Doors, Windows and Openings to Edge

If you have changed your program settings so that door, window and wall openings insert to center, you can switch it back
to the default method where openings are measured from the edges of the opening.
To insert doors, windows and openings to the edge of the opening:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Program Settings dialog, select Building Aids in the left column.
3. In the Opening Placement area, select Dimension to Edge.
4. Click OK.

Moving a Door
You can move a door by clicking and dragging it inside the wall, or by editing the dynamic dimensions on either side of the
door. You can move a door in both 2D and 3D.
To move a door by clicking and dragging:
1. Click on the door to select it.
2. Click and drag the door to move it, then release your mouse button. If you are moving a door in 3D, make sure that you
select the center grip.
To move a door by editing dimensions:
1. Click on the door. Dynamic dimensions appear on either side of the door.
2. Click on the dimension you want to edit.
3. In the Edit Dimension dialog, enter the new value, then press Enter or click OK. The door position updates automat-
ically.

Flipping a Door
You can use the Flip Opening tool to flip an entire door around. If the door originally opened out, it now opens in; if it was
hinged on the left, it is now hinged on the right (and vice versa).
To flip a door:
1. Click the door to select it.
2. Right-click in the drawing area and select Flip Opening, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Flip Opening.

Flipping a Door Swing

Use the Flip Swing tool to flip only the swing of a door. The door will be hinged on the opposite side, but it will still open
in the same direction, either in or out.
To flip a door swing:
1. Click the door to select it.
2. Right-click in the drawing area and select Flip Swing, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Flip Swing.

Editing Door Swing Properties

You can specify the direction of a door swing as well as the extent of the swing in 2D and 3D.

- 30 -
 Raising or Lowering a Door

To edit door swing properties:

1. Select the door whose swing properties you want to change.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Doors dialog, edit the settings in the Swing area of the Basic page.
Swing Type. Choose from Left, Right or Double. A door with a left door swing will have its hinges on the right.
3D % Open. How much the door is shown swung open in 3D view. By default, doors are shown closed in 3D view.
2D % Open. How much the door is swung open in 2D plan view.
4. Click OK.

Tip: You can quickly flip a door swing using the Flip Swing tool on the right-click menu.

Tip: To specify how door swing direction is represented in your region, see Specifying the Definition of a Righthand vs
Lefthand Door.

Raising or Lowering a Door

You can raise or lower a door in a wall using the Elevate tool on the door’s right-click menu. You may, for example, want to
lower your garage door if your ground floor sits above the ground.
To raise or lower a door:
1. Select the door whose elevation you want to edit.
2. Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Elevate. The value currently shown in the Elevate
dialog is the current elevation of the door above or below the floor level.
3. In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired elevation of the door base above the floor. You can enter a negative value to
move the door down.
4. If you are in a 3D or elevation view and would like to see what the door looks like at the new elevation, click Apply.
The Elevate tool remains active while the change is applied to the door in your model.
5. To apply the change and close the dialog, click OK.

Editing Door Types

Door types include hinged, bi-fold, pocket, face slider, track slider, fold-up, tilt, roller, and pivot. You can edit a door’s type
on the door’s Basic property page.
To edit a door type:
1. Select the door whose properties you want to change.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Doors dialog, select the Basic tab.
4. In the Type area, click on the desired door type to select it.
5. Click OK.

Editing the Size of a Door

You can edit the height or width of a door.
To edit the size of a door:
1. Select the door whose size you want to change.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Doors dialog, enter the desired values in the Height and Width edit boxes on the Basic page.
4. Click OK.
Tip: You can also stretch a door opening dynamically by clicking and dragging its side grips if displayed. See Stretching
Doors, Windows and Openings for more information.

- 31 -
Chapter 8: Doors, Windows & Openings

Editing the Shape of a Door

A door can be rectangular, arched or apexed. Note that you can only change the shape of a hinged door type.
To edit the shape of a door:
1. Select the door whose shape you want to change.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Doors dialog, select either Rectangular, Arched or Apexed from the Shape drop box.
4. Edit the door’s size properties if needed.
5. Click OK.

Displaying a Highlite or Sidelites on a Door

A sidelite is a glass panel set on one or both sides of a door (usually an entry door). A highlite is a glass panel above a door.
You can choose which lites which you want to display.
To display lites on a door:
1. Select the door.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Doors dialog, select the Basic tab.
4. To display a highlite over the door, enable the Display Highlite check box.
5. To display a sidelite on the left side of the door, enable the Display Left Sidelite check box.
6. To display a sidelite on the right side of the door, enable the Display Right Sidelite check box.
7. Click OK.

Editing a Door’s Sidelites and Highlites

A sidelite is a glass panel set on one or both sides of a door (usually an entry door). A highlite is a glass panel above a door.
You can create a custom configuration of sidelites and/or highlights for a door.
To edit sidelites and highlites:
1. Select the door whose properties you want to change.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Doors dialog, select the Lites tab.
4. In the Type window, select the lite you want to specify settings for. Note that the lite must be enabled on the Basic page
before you can edit it.
5. To select a specific window type for the currently selected lite, click on the appropriate graphic in the Type area.
6. Edit the dimensions of the lite in the Properties area if desired. Clicking a dimension marked with an alphabetical char-
acter (a, b, c, etc.) highlights the corresponding dimension in the sidelite/highlite graphic, and vice versa.
Shape. Choose from Rectangle, Arched or Trapezoid.
(highlite) Adjust Width. Selecting Opening adjusts the width of the highlite to match the width of the opening
(including any sidelites). Selecting Door adjusts the width of the highlite to match the width of the door (excluding any
sidelites). Selecting User Defined lets you specify a precise width for the highlite in the Width edit box.
Width. The total width of the lite.
(sidelites) Adjust Height to Door. Automatically adjusts the height of a sidelite to match the height of the door.
Height. The overall height of the lite.
# of Horizontal Panels. The number of panels across the lite. If you specify more than one panel, vertical dividers are
added inside the lite’s frame.
# of Vertical Panels. The number of panels running vertically along the lite. If you specify more than one panel,
horizontal dividers are added inside the lite’s frame.
# of Horizontal Panes. The number of panes of glass across each panel.

- 32 -
 Editing a Door’s Leaf

# of Vertical Panes. The number of panes of glass running vertically along each panel.

Editing a Door’s Leaf

You can choose from a variety of door leaf types and change the thickness of the leaf.
To edit a door’s leaf:
1. Select the door whose properties you want to change.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Doors dialog, select the Leaf tab.
4. In the Type area, click on the leaf type you want. If you would like to use a custom door leaf that has been imported into
the Door Leafs library, select the Custom type, then select the desired leaf from the library.
5. If you want to change the thickness of the leaf, enter the thickness in the Leaf Depth edit box.
6. Each door leaf type has its own set of dimensions that you can define. These dimensions vary according to how many
panels the leaf has. Clicking a dimension marked with an alphabetical character (a, b, c, etc.) highlights the correspond-
ing dimension in the door leaf graphic, and vice versa.
7. Click OK.

Editing Door Details

You can specify precise dimensions and offsets for the door frame, sash, mullions and transoms.
To edit door details:
1. Select the door whose properties you want to change.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Doors dialog, select the Details tab.
4. Edit the dimensions as desired.
Frame
Depth. The depth of the frame members as seen from an overhead view.
Width. The width of the frame members as seen from an overhead view.
Offset. The offset of the door frame from the wall face.
Sash
Depth. The depth of sash members (sidelite/highlite frame) as seen from an overhead view.
Width. The width of sash members as seen from an overhead view.
Offset. The offset of the sash from the front of the door frame, i.e. how far back it sits in the door frame.
Mullion
Vertical Separation. If a lite has two or more panels running across it, this adds vertical dividers between the panels.
Horizontal Separation. If a lite has two or more stacked panels, this adds horizontal dividers between them.
Depth. The front-to-back thickness of the mullion as seen from an overhead view.
Width. The width (left-to-right distance) of the mullion as seen from an overhead view.
Transom
Depth. The front-to-back thickness of the transom member as seen from an overhead view. The transom is the member
between the door and the sidelite or highlite frame.
Width. The width of the transom as seen from an overhead view.
5. Click OK.

Removing Trim from a Door Opening

By default, door openings include trim around them if a trim member is specified for openings in the wall’s Trim properties.
You can turn opening trim on or off for individual door openings.

- 33 -
Chapter 8: Doors, Windows & Openings

To remove trim from a door opening:

1. Select the opening, then right-click and select Properties.
2. In the Doors dialog, disable the Include Opening Trim check box.
3. Click OK.

Deleting a Door
You can delete a door with a couple of mouse clicks.
To delete a door:
1. Select the door to delete. To select multiple doors, use Shift+click.
2. Click the Delete button on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Windows
The catalog contains a variety of windows that you can insert in your drawing, including fixed, casement, double casement,
hopper, awning, sliding, double-hung, single-hung, bay, bow and louvered windows. To insert a window with the
Windows tool, just position the window with your pointer, and then click to insert it. You can use the on-screen dimensions
to position the window in the wall, center the window automatically (right-click and select Center on Wall), or define a
specific offset distance (right-click and select Enter insertion offset).
By default, the on-screen dimensions that appear when inserting a window measure from the edges of the window. If you
prefer you can specify that you want the dimensions to measure to the center of the window by editing your program
settings.
Windows can be edited in a number of different ways, independently of the walls that contain them. To display a menu of
window editing commands, simply select a window and then right-click your mouse. Selecting Windows Help at the
bottom of the menu displays a list of help topics relating to windows.

Inserting Windows
The catalog contains a wide variety of windows for you to insert, including fixed, casement, double casement, hopper,
awning, sliding, double-hung, single-hung, bay, bow and louvered windows.
You can point and click to insert a window anywhere in a wall, automatically center the window on the wall, or offset the
window a specific distance from the end of the wall.
Windows are inserted at the Head Height defined for the building location you insert the window on. You can raise or lower
a window after you have inserted it if you need to.
To insert a window:
1. Make sure the location you want to insert windows on is the current location in the building locations drop box.

2. Select Insert > Windows, or click on the Building toolbar.

3. In the catalog, select the window you want to insert.
4. If you want the window to be automatically centered on the wall, right-click and select Center on wall. Go to step 6.
5. If you want to offset the window a specific distance from the end of the wall, right-click and select Enter insertion off-
set. Enter the offset distance in the Enter insertion offset dialog, then click OK.
6. Position the window in the receiving wall. If you are using an insertion offset, position the window close to the end you
want to offset it from. The window will snap inside the wall. Dimensions are displayed that show you the distance on
either side of the window.
7. With your window positioned where you want it, click to insert it.
8. Right-click and select Finish.

Inserting Doors, Windows and Openings to Center

By default, the on-screen dimensions that appear when inserting doors, windows and openings measure from the edges of
the opening object. The same applies when you insert openings using an offset. If you prefer you can measure to center when
inserting openings.

- 34 -
 Inserting Doors, Windows and Openings to Edge

To insert doors, windows and openings to center:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Program Settings dialog, select Building Aids in the left column.
3. In the Opening Placement area, select Dimension to Center.
4. Click OK.

Inserting Doors, Windows and Openings to Edge

If you have changed your program settings so that door, window and wall openings insert to center, you can switch it back
to the default method where openings are measured from the edges of the opening.
To insert doors, windows and openings to the edge of the opening:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Program Settings dialog, select Building Aids in the left column.
3. In the Opening Placement area, select Dimension to Edge.
4. Click OK.

Moving a Window
You can move a window by clicking and dragging it inside the wall, or by editing the dynamic dimensions on either side of
the window. You can move a window in both 2D and 3D.
To move a window by clicking and dragging:
1. Click on the window to select it.
2. Click and drag the window to move it, then release your mouse button. If you are moving a window in 3D, make sure
that you select the center grip.
To move a window by editing dimensions:
1. Click on the window. Dynamic dimensions appear on either side of the window.
2. Click on the dimension you want to edit.
3. In the Edit Dimension dialog, enter the new value, then press Enter or click OK. The window position updates auto-
matically.

Flipping a Window
You can use the Flip Opening tool to instantly flip a window around in the wall. If the window has a swing, the swing is
also flipped.
To flip a window:
1. Select the window.
2. Right-click in the drawing area and select Flip Opening, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Flip Opening.

Raising or Lowering a Window

You can raise or lower a window in a wall using the Elevate tool on the window’s right-click menu.
To raise or lower a window:
1. Select the window whose elevation you want to edit.
2. Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Elevate. The value currently shown in the Elevate
dialog is the current elevation of the window top above the floor level.
3. In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired elevation of the top of the window above the floor.
4. If you are in a 3D or elevation view and would like to see what the window looks like at the new elevation, click Apply.
The Elevate tool remains active while the change is applied to the window in your model.

- 35 -
Chapter 8: Doors, Windows & Openings

5. To apply the change and close the dialog, click OK.

Editing Window Types

Window types include fixed, casement, hung, sliding, awning, hopper, vent, bay, bow and louver. You can edit a window’s
type on the window’s Basic property page.
To edit a window type:
1. Select the window whose properties you want to change.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Windows dialog, select the Basic tab.
4. In the Type area, click on the desired window type to select it.
5. Click OK.

Editing a Window’s Size Properties

You can edit the height and width of a window. You can also control the number of horizontal and vertical panes in the
window. Some window types have additional properties that define their geometry.
To edit the size of a window:
1. Select the window whose properties you want to change.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Windows dialog, select the Basic tab.
4. Edit the dimensions as desired. Clicking a dimension marked with an alphabetical character (a, b, c, etc.) highlights the
corresponding dimension in the window graphic, and vice versa.
Most windows have the common dimensions listed below. Some have additional settings to define their geometry.
Window Width. The width of the window, not including the frame.
Window Height. The height of the window.
# of Horizontal Panels. The number of window panels running horizontally across the window frame. If you specify
more than one panel, vertical dividers are added inside the window frame.
# of Vertical Panels. The number of window panels running vertically along the window frame. If you specify more
than one panel, horizontal dividers are added inside the window frame.
# of Horizontal Panes. The number of panes of glass across each window panel.
# of Vertical Panes. The number of panes of glass running vertically along each window panel.
5. Click OK

Tip: You can also stretch a window opening dynamically by clicking and dragging its side grips if displayed. See Stretching
Doors, Windows and Openings for more information.

Displaying a Highlite, Lowlite or Sidelites on a Window

A sidelite is a glass panel set on one or both sides of a window. A highlite is a glass panel above a window. A lowlite is a
glass panel below a window. You can choose which lites which you want to display.
To display lites on a window:
1. Select the window.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Windows dialog, select the Basic tab.
4. To display a highlite over the window, enable the Display Highlite check box.
5. To display a lowlite under the window, enable the Display Lowlite check box.
6. To display a sidelite on the left side of the window, enable the Display Left Sidelite check box.
7. To display a sidelite on the right side of the window, enable the Display Right Sidelite check box.

- 36 -
 Editing a Window’s Sidelites, Highlites and Lowlites

8. Click OK.

Editing a Window’s Sidelites, Highlites and Lowlites

A sidelite is a glass panel set on one or both sides of a window. A highlite is a glass panel above a window. A lowlite is a
glass panel below a window. You can create a custom configuration of sidelites, highlites and lowlites for a window.
To edit a window’s lites:
1. Select the window whose properties you want to change.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Windows dialog, select the Lites tab.
4. In the Type area select the lite you want to specify settings for. Note that the lite must be enabled on the Basic page before
you can edit it.
5. To select a specific window type for the currently selected lite, click on the appropriate graphic in the Type area.
6. Edit the dimensions of the lite in the Properties area if desired. Clicking a dimension marked with an alphabetical char-
acter (a, b, c, etc.) highlights the corresponding dimension in the sidelite/highlite graphic, and vice versa.
Shape. Choose from Rectangle, Arched or Trapezoid.
(highlite/lowlite) Adjust Width. Selecting Opening adjusts the width of the highlite to match the width of the opening
(including any sidelites). Selecting Window adjusts the width of the highlite to match the width of the window
(excluding any sidelites). Selecting User Defined lets you specify a precise width for the highlite in the Width edit box.
Width. The total width of the lite.
(sidelites) Adjust Height to Window. Automatically adjusts the height of a sidelite to match the height of the window.
Height. The overall height of the lite.
# of Horizontal Panels. The number of panels across the lite. If you specify more than one panel, vertical dividers are
added inside the lite’s frame.
# of Vertical Panels. The number of panels running vertically along the lite. If you specify more than one panel,
horizontal dividers are added inside the lite’s frame.
# of Horizontal Panes. The number of panes of glass across each panel.
# of Vertical Panes. The number of panes of glass running vertically along each panel.
7. Click OK.

Editing Window Details

You can specify precise dimensions and offsets for the window frame, sash, mullions and transoms.
To edit window details:
1. Select the window whose properties you want to change.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Windows dialog, select the Details tab.
4. Edit the dimensions as desired.
Frame
Depth. The depth of the frame members as seen from an overhead view.
Width. The width of the frame members as seen from an overhead view.
Offset. The offset of the window frame from the wall face.
Sash
Depth. The depth of sash members (sidelite/highlite/lowlite frame) as seen from an overhead view.
Width. The width of sash members as seen from an overhead view.
Offset. The offset of the sash from the front of the window frame, i.e. how far back it sits in the window frame.
Post (for Bays and Bows)

- 37 -
Chapter 8: Doors, Windows & Openings

Depth: The thickness of posts in bay and bow windows.

Width: The width of posts in bay and bow windows.
Mullion
Vertical Separation. If a lite has two or more panels running across it, this adds vertical dividers between the panels.
Horizontal Separation. If a lite has two or more stacked panels, this adds horizontal dividers between them.
Depth. The front-to-back thickness of the mullion as seen from an overhead view.
Width. The width (left-to-right distance) of the mullion as seen from an overhead view.
Transom (for Lites)
Depth. The front-to-back thickness of the transom member as seen from an overhead view. The transom is the member
between the window and the sidelite, highlite or lowlite frame.
Width. The width of the transom as seen from an overhead view.
5. Click OK.

Removing Trim from a Window Opening

By default, window openings include trim around them if a trim member is specified for openings in the wall’s Trim
properties. You can turn opening trim on or off for individual window openings.
To remove trim from a window opening:
1. Select the opening, then right-click and select Properties.
2. In the Windows dialog, disable the Include Opening Trim check box.
3. Click OK.

Deleting a Window
You can delete a window with a couple of mouse clicks.
To delete a window:
1. Select the window to delete. To select multiple windows, use Shift+click.
2. Click the Delete button on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Controlling the Display of Window Opening Symbols

By default, swing-type windows display symbols that indicate the swing direction. These symbols are visible in 3D and
elevation views. You can choose between two methods of displaying the symbols depending on your region, or disable the
symbols altogether.
To control the display of window opening symbols:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Program Settings dialog, select Building Aids in the left column.
3. In the Window Opening Symbols area, select either Type 1 or Type 2. If you want to disable window opening symbols,
select None.
4. Click OK.

Openings
An opening is a cutout in a wall of a specific shape, width and height. Openings can be rectangular, round, arched, octagonal
or trapezoidal. To insert an opening with the Openings tool, just position the opening with your pointer, and then click to
insert it. You can use the on-screen dimensions to position the opening in the wall, center the opening automatically (right-
click and select Center on Wall), or define a specific offset distance (right-click and select Enter insertion offset).
By default, the on-screen dimensions that appear when inserting an opening measure from the edges of the opening. If you
prefer you can specify that you want the dimensions to measure to the center of the opening by editing your program
settings.

- 38 -
 Inserting Wall Openings

Openings can be edited in a number of different ways, independently of the walls that contain them. To display a menu of
editing commands relating to openings, simply select an opening and then right-click your mouse. Selecting Openings Help
at the bottom of the menu displays a list of help topics relating to openings.

Inserting Wall Openings

An opening is a cutout in a wall of a specific shape, width and height. Openings can be rectangular, round, arched, octagonal
or trapezoidal.
You can point and click to insert an opening anywhere in a wall, automatically center the opening on the wall, or offset the
opening a specific distance from the end of the wall.
To insert an opening:
1. Make sure the location you want to insert openings on is the current location in the building locations drop box.

2. Select Insert > Openings, or click on the Building toolbar.

3. In the catalog, select the opening you want to insert.
4. If you want the opening to be automatically centered on the wall, right-click and select Center on wall. Go to step 6.
5. If you want to offset the opening a specific distance from the end of the wall, right-click and select Enter insertion off-
set. Enter the offset distance in the Enter insertion offset dialog, then click OK.
6. Position the opening in the receiving wall. If you are using an insertion offset, position the opening close to the end you
want to offset it from. The opening will snap inside the wall. Dimensions are displayed that show you the distance on
either side of the opening.
7. With your opening positioned where you want it, click to insert it.
8. Right-click and select Finish.
Openings are inserted at the Head Height defined for the building location you insert the opening on. You can resize, raise
or lower an opening after you have inserted it if you need to.

Inserting Doors, Windows and Openings to Center

By default, the on-screen dimensions that appear when inserting doors, windows and openings measure from the edges of
the opening object. The same applies when you insert openings using an offset. If you prefer you can measure to center when
inserting openings.
To insert doors, windows and openings to center:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Program Settings dialog, select Building Aids in the left column.
3. In the Opening Placement area, select Dimension to Center.
4. Click OK.

Inserting Doors, Windows and Openings to Edge

If you have changed your program settings so that door, window and wall openings insert to center, you can switch it back
to the default method where openings are measured from the edges of the opening.
To insert doors, windows and openings to the edge of the opening:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Program Settings dialog, select Building Aids in the left column.
3. In the Opening Placement area, select Dimension to Edge.
4. Click OK.

- 39 -
Chapter 8: Doors, Windows & Openings

Creating a Niche
A niche is a recess in a wall. There are a number of rectangular, circular and arched niches in the catalog that you can insert
easily using the Openings tool. You can create a custom niche by inserting an opening in a wall, and then specifying a niche
depth in the opening’s properties.
To create a custom niche:
1. Insert an opening in the wall using the Openings tool.
2. Click on the opening to select it, and then right-click and select Properties.
3. In the Openings dialog, click on the drop box next to the Specify Niche Depth item.
4. Select either Distance or Percentage as your method of specifying the niche depth. The Distance option lets you enter
a specific value for the depth, while the Percentage option lets you specify the depth as a percentage of the wall depth.
5. If you selected the Depth option, type the desired depth for the niche in the Depth edit box. If you selected Percentage,
type the desired depth percentage in the Depth edit box. Note that you can specify a distance or percentage that is great-
er than the wall depth if needed. The niche would then protrude through the wall.
6. If you do not want any trim around the niche opening, disable the Include Opening Trim check box.
7. Click OK.

Tip: To flip a niche to the other side of the wall, use the Flip Opening tool on the right-click menu.

Flipping a Niche
If you have created a niche in a wall and it appears to be on the wrong side of the wall, you can flip it instantly using the
Flip Opening tool.
To flip a niche to the other side of the wall:
1. Select the opening.
2. Right-click and select Flip Opening.

Editing the Appearance of a Niche

You can edit the appearance of a niche in 3D by applying different materials to the recessed face.
To edit the appearance of a niche:
1. Select the opening, then right-click and select Properties.
2. In the Openings dialog, select the Appearance tab.
3. Select the component whose appearance you would like to change.
Inside Niche Back. The interior face of the niche back.
Niche Back Side. The exterior face of the niche back. This would only be visible in 3D if the niche depth is greater than
the wall depth, causing the niche to protrude from the wall.
4. Click the Select button in the Material area, then select a material to apply to the component from the Materials library.
5. Click OK.

Moving a Wall Opening

You can move a wall opening by clicking and dragging it inside the wall, or by editing the dynamic dimensions on either
side of the opening. You can move an opening in both 2D and 3D.
To move an opening by clicking and dragging:
1. Click on the opening to select it.
2. Click and drag the opening to move it. If you are moving an opening in 3D, make sure that you select the center grip.
3. Release your mouse button.
To move an opening by editing dimensions:
1. Click on the opening. Dynamic dimensions appear on either side of the opening.

- 40 -
 Raising or Lowering a Wall Opening

2. Click on the dimension you want to edit.

3. In the Edit Dimension dialog, enter the new value, then press Enter or click OK. The opening position updates auto-
matically.

Raising or Lowering a Wall Opening

You can raise or lower an opening in a wall using the Elevate tool on the opening’s right-click menu.
To raise or lower a wall opening:
1. Select the opening whose elevation you want to edit.
2. Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Elevate. The value currently shown in the Elevate
dialog is the current elevation of the opening top above the floor level.
3. In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired elevation of the top of the opening above the floor.
4. Click OK.

Editing the Size of a Wall Opening

You can edit the dimensions of a wall opening by changing the properties on the opening’s Size property page.
To edit the size of a wall opening:
1. Select the opening whose properties you want to change.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Properties area, edit the dimensions of the opening. Dimensions vary according to the shape of the opening.
4. Click OK.

Tip: If you want the bottom of your opening to be level with the floor, change the height of opening to match the Head
Height of the building location it is inserted on. Alternatively you can lower the opening using the Elevate tool.

Tip: You can also stretch an opening dynamically by clicking and dragging its side grips if displayed. See Stretching Doors,
Windows and Openings for more information.

Editing the Shape of a Wall Opening

Openings can be rectangular, round, arched, octagonal or trapezoidal.
To change the shape a wall opening:
1. Select the opening whose properties you want to change.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Type area, click on the shape you want.
4. Click OK.

Removing Trim from a Wall Opening

By default, wall openings include trim around them if a trim member is specified for openings in the wall’s Trim properties.
You can turn opening trim on or off for individual openings.
To remove trim from a wall opening:
1. Select the opening, then right-click and select Properties.
2. In the Openings dialog, disable the Include Opening Trim check box.
3. Click OK.

Editing the Appearance of a Wall Opening in 2D Plan View

You can change the appearance of an opening in 2D plan view by editing its line style properties. This allows you to apply
different colors, patterns or weights to different openings if you wish.

- 41 -
Chapter 8: Doors, Windows & Openings

To edit the appearance of an opening in 2D plan view:

1. Select the opening, then right-click and select Properties.
2. In the Openings dialog, select the Appearance tab.
3. In the Components list, select Header.
4. Click the Select button in the Linestyle area.
5. Select the desired line style from the Line Styles dialog, then click OK.
6. Click OK in the Openings dialog.

Deleting a Wall Opening

You can delete a wall opening with a couple of mouse clicks.
To delete an opening:
1. Select the opening to delete. To select multiple openings, use Shift+click.
2. Click the Delete button on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Shutters
You can instantly apply shutters to one or both sides of a window or opening using the Shutters tool. Choose a flat, paneled,
or board-and-batten style, or create your own style.
To display a menu of editing commands relating to shutters, simply select the shutter and then right-click your mouse.
Selecting Shutters Help at the bottom of the menu displays a list of help topics relating to shutters.

Inserting Shutters
Using the Shutters tool you can instantly apply shutters to the wall on one or both sides of a window or opening. Choose a
flat, paneled, or board-and-batten style, or create your own style. Shutters can be inserted on the exterior side or interior side
of the wall, or both sides.
To insert shutters:

1. Select Insert > Detailing > Shutters, or click the down arrow next to the Detailing button on the Building toolbar
and select Shutters.
2. In the catalog, select the type of shutter you would like to insert.
3. In the Attach Shutters dialog, select the side of the wall on which you want to insert the shutters by enabling or dis-
abling the Exterior Side and/or Interior Side check box. Under each option you can then specify whether you would
like to apply a shutter to the left side, right side or both sides of the window or opening.

4. Click OK.
5. Click on the window or opening that you want to apply shutters to. The shutters are inserted.

Editing Shutters
You can edit the style and dimensions of shutters by editing their properties.
To edit shutters:
1. Click on a shutter to select it. If you are editing a pair of shutters, clicking on one shutter selects them both.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. Edit the properties as desired. Each shutter type has different settings. Below is a brief description of each setting.

- 42 -
 Deleting Shutters

Adjust Size. If By Opening is selected, the height of the shutter automatically adjusts to the height of the window or
opening it is applied to. If Specify is selected, you can define a specific shutter height in the Height edit box.
Width. The overall width of the shutter.
Height. The overall height of the shutter. This value is not adjustable if By Opening is selected in the Adjust Size drop
box. It can only be edited if Specify is selected in the Adjust Size drop box.
Thickness. The depth of the shutter.
Additional Settings for Panel Style
Panel Width. The width of the panel(s).
Top Rail Height. The height of the top rail.
Bottom Rail Height. The height of the bottom rail.
Number of Panels. The number of panels in the shutter.
Panel Type. Choose either Flat, Bevel or Louver. If there are two or more panels, you can select different types for
individual panels.
Panel Height. The height of a panel. If there are two or more panels, you can set different heights for individual panels.
Mid Rail Height. The height of the dividing rail. If there are more than two panels, you can set different rail heights
between panels.
Additional Settings for Board-and-Batten Style
Board Spacing. The distance between boards.
Batten Thickness. The height of a batten.
Batten Edge Offset. The distance from the bottom of a board to the edge of the batten.
Number of Boards. The number of boards across the shutter.
Number of Battens. The total number of battens on the shutter.

Deleting Shutters
You can delete shutters in a couple of easy steps.
To delete shutters:
1. Click on a shutter to select it. If you are editing a pair of shutters, clicking on one shutter selects them both.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

- 43 -
Chapter 8: Doors, Windows & Openings

- 44 -
Chapter 9: Floors & Ceilings

If you have automatic floors enabled in your Program Settings, a floor will be automatically inserted when you connect three
or more walls to create a closed wall layout. When you insert interior walls, the floor is split as new rooms are created. You
can also manually split automatic floors using the Room Division tool.
There are three tools available on the Insert menu for inserting floors manually: Floor by Room, Floor by Perimeter, and
Floor by Picking Points.
If you want different flooring types in different rooms, you can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly apply different types
of carpet, tiles, wood flooring, vinyl flooring, linoleum, or concrete to individual floors.
You can point and click to insert ceilings using one of the handy Ceiling tools: Ceiling by Room, Ceiling by Perimeter, or
Ceiling by Picking Points. Any ceiling surface can easily be made into a tray or cathedral ceiling by simply editing the
ceiling’s properties.
You can create openings in floors and ceilings if you need to.

Floors
If you have automatic floors enabled in your Program Settings, a floor will be automatically inserted when you connect three
or more walls to create a closed wall layout. When you insert interior walls, the floor is split as new rooms are created. You
can also manually split automatic floors using the Room Division tool.
There are three tools available on the Insert menu for inserting floors manually: Floor by Room, Floor by Perimeter, and
Floor by Picking Points.
You can insert openings in both automatic and manually inserted floors (to accommodate a staircase, for example).
Automatic floors and floors inserted with the Floor by Perimeter and Floor by Room tools are directly associated with the
walls that contain them. If you stretch your wall layout, the floor stretches with it. If you open up your wall layout by
deleting a wall, the floor will be deleted.
Floors inserted with the Floor by Picking Points tool are independent and have no connectivity to walls, so they will remain
the same if you move or delete walls.
Automatic floors can only be selected in 3D view. Floors created with one of the floor tools are selectable in both 2D and 3D.
You can edit floors in many ways, independently of the walls that surround them. To display a menu of floor editing
commands, select a floor and then right-click your mouse. Selecting Floors Help at the bottom of the menu displays a list
of help topics relating to floors.
Floor categories in the catalog include Framing and Surface, Framing Only, Surface Only, and Slabs. If you prefer to insert
structural components separately, or need more flexibility with your floor framing, use a Structural Floor tool instead.

Automatic Floors
If you have automatic floor insertion enabled in your Program Settings, a floor is automatically inserted throughout your
model when you connect three or more walls to create a closed exterior wall layout. You can disable or enable automatic
floor insertion at any time.
By default, hardwood flooring is applied when an automatic floor is created. If you use the House Builder Wizard, the floor
type depends on the house style selected when using the Wizard. If you want you can apply a different material to the floor
using the Materials Paintbrush.
When you draw interior walls, the floor is split into individual floors as new rooms are created provided the room’s walls
are all connected. You can also manually split automatic floors using the Room Division tool.
Automatic floors cannot be selected in 2D plan view. They can only be selected in 3D view. The only exception are floor
edges that have been defined using the Room Division tool. Such edges are marked with a dashed line in 2D view, and can
be stretched if necessary.
Automatic floors are directly associated with the walls that contain them. If you stretch your wall layout, the floor stretches
with it. If you open up your wall layout by deleting a wall, the floor will be deleted.

- 45 -
Chapter 9: Floors & Ceilings

Tip: For projects in which you plan to use the House Builder Wizard, you can change the default floor type by editing the
House Builder Wizard element configuration before running the Wizard. You can also select the floor type you want while
running the Wizard.

Moving Defined Floor Edges

If you have used the Room Division tool to define a custom floor area in your model, you can move the defined floor edge
in 2D view to increase or decrease the size of the defined floor area.
To move a defined floor edge:
1. Click on the dashed floor edge in 2D plan view. Blue grips are displayed along the line.
2. Hover your pointer over the center grip, then click and drag to move the line.
3. Release your mouse button.

Disabling or Enabling Automatic Floor Insertion

An option in your Program Settings determines whether or not a floor is automatically inserted throughout your model
when you form a closed wall layout. You can disable or enable this option at any time.
To disable or enable automatic floor insertion:

1. Select Settings > Document Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Document Settings dialog, select Building Aids in the left column.
3. In the Building Aids area, disable or enable the Automatically Insert Floors check box.
4. Click OK.

Inserting a Floor Throughout a Building Location

The Floor by Perimeter tool detects the perimeter walls on the current building location and inserts a floor of your choice
throughout the entire location. This option is ideal if you have deleted your automatic floor and would like to create floors
as quickly as possible throughout your model. It is also the perfect choice if you do not need different floors in each room.
To insert a floor throughout a building location:
1. Make sure the building location that you want to insert the floor on is the current location.

2. Select Insert > Floors > Floor by Perimeter, or click the down arrow next to the Floors button on the Building
toolbar and select Floor by Perimeter.
3. In the catalog, select the floor type you want to insert.
4. Click anywhere inside the model. The floor is automatically inserted.

Note: The Floor by Perimeter tool does not take interior walls into account. Only one large floor surface is created. If you
would prefer individual floors in each room, use the Floor by Room tool.

Inserting a Floor in a Room

Using the Floor by Room tool you can just click inside a room to automatically insert a floor of your choice in that room.
To insert a floor in a room:

1. Select Insert > Floors > Floor by Room, or click on the Building toolbar.
2. In the catalog, select the floor type you want to insert.
3. Mouse over the room to which you want to add a floor (it will highlight), then click inside the room. The floor is auto-
matically inserted.

Inserting a Floor by Picking Points

The Floor by Picking Points tool provides the freedom to create a floor of any size or shape anywhere in your drawing. Just
pick points to form a closed shape and the floor is instantly created.

- 46 -
 Moving a Floor

To insert a floor by picking points:

1. Select Insert > Floors > Floor by Picking Points, or click the down arrow next to the Floors button on the Building
toolbar and select Floor by Picking Points.
2. In the catalog, select the floor type you want to insert.
3. Select a start point for the surface, then continue selecting points to define the size and shape of the floor. Note that you
do not have to select the start point again to finish the floor — the last point picked is always connected to the start
point.
4. Right-click and select Finish.

Moving a Floor
You can move a manually inserted floor using the Move tool.

Note: You cannot move a floor that was created automatically with your wall layout. You can only move floors that were
created with a Floor tool.

To move a floor:
1. Select the floor by clicking on one of its edges.
2. Right-click and select Move, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Move.
3. Click and drag the floor to move it, then release your mouse button.

Resizing or Reshaping a Floor

You can resize or reshape a floor by clicking and dragging its edges and corners.

Note: You cannot stretch a floor that was created automatically with your wall layout. You can only stretch floors that were
created with a Floor tool.

To resize or reshape a floor:

1. Select the floor by clicking on one of its edges. If you want to resize the floor, click on the edge that you want to adjust.
A solid blue grip appears on the edge you selected, and hollow blue grips appear at each corner of the floor surface.
2. To resize the floor, hover your pointer over the solid blue grip, then click and drag the floor edge to adjust the floor
size. Alternatively you can select the Move Edge tool on the right-click menu.
3. To reshape the floor, hover your pointer over one of the corner grips, then click and drag the corner to adjust the floor
shape. Alternatively you can select the Stretch tool on the right-click menu.
If you would like to stretch only a portion of a floor edge, you can accomplish this by adding a node to the floor edge. See
Adding a Node to a Floor.

Dividing a Room
If a room contains an automatic floor, you can use the Room Division tool to split the room into two separate areas. This
enables you to have two different floor types/finishes in the same room. You can also use the Room Division tool to define
an opening in a floor.

Note: You cannot divide a room that contains a floor that was created with a Floor tool.

To divide a room:

1. Select Insert > Floors > Room Division, or click the down arrow next to the Walls button on the Building toolbar
and select Room Division.
2. Select points to define the division line. If you are dividing a room into two segments, the end points of the line must
be on the floor edge, although intermediate points are permitted anywhere on the floor surface.

- 47 -
Chapter 9: Floors & Ceilings

If you are creating a floor within a floor, the split line must form a closed shape.
3. Right-click and select Finish.
To move a division line:
1. Click on the dashed division line in 2D plan view. Blue grips are displayed along the line.
2. Hover your pointer over the center grip, then click and drag to move the line.
3. Release your mouse button.

Note: When you divide a floor, the division lines are also created on the ceiling above.

Curving a Floor Edge

You can curve a floor edge using the Curve tool. Once the tool is active, you can click and drag the edge to curve it, or select
a point to curve to.

Note: You cannot curve a floor that was created automatically with your wall layout. You can only curve floors that were
created with a Floor tool.

To curve a floor edge by clicking and dragging:

1. Click on the edge you want to curve.
2. Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve.
3. Click and drag the floor edge to the desired curve.
4. Release your mouse button.
To curve a floor edge to a selected point:
1. Click on the floor edge you want to curve.
2. Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve.
3. Select the point you want to curve to. The floor edge automatically curves to the point.
4. Click to finish.

Raising or Lowering a Floor

You can raise or lower a floor using the Elevate tool.
To raise or lower a floor:
1. Select the floor. If the floor was created automatically with your wall layout, you need to select the floor in 3D.
2. Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Elevate.
3. In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired elevation of the floor above the floor level defined for the current building
location.
4. If you are in a 3D or elevation view and would like to see what the floor looks like at the new elevation, click Apply.
The Elevate tool remains active while the change is applied to the floor in your model.
5. To apply the change and close the dialog, click OK.

Editing the Thickness of a Floor

You can edit the thickness of a floor on its Basic property page.

- 48 -
 Applying Different Materials to Floors

To edit the thickness of a floor:

1. Select the floor. If the floor was created automatically with your wall layout, you need to select the floor in 3D.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. Edit the value in the Thickness edit box on the Basic page.
4. Click OK.

Applying Different Materials to Floors

You can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly apply different types of materials to floors, such as different colors or
patterns of carpet, tile or linoleum.
To apply a material to a floor:
1. Display your model in 2D Designer’s View or 3D view and make sure the floor is visible in the view. You may need to
hide the roof and ceilings.

2. Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click on any tabbed toolbar.

3. In the catalog panel, select the material you want to apply. You may want to select Flooring from the Filter drop box to
display flooring materials.
4. Click on the floor surface you want to apply the material to. The material is immediately applied. You can continue
applying the material to other floor surfaces, or select another material in the catalog.
5. Right-click and select Finish.

Deleting a Floor
You can delete a floor in a couple of easy steps.
To delete a floor:
1. Select the floor. If the floor was inserted automatically when you created your walls, you can only select the floor in 3D.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Floor Openings
You may need to cut an opening in your floor to accommodate a staircase or some other feature in your design. The method
for creating an opening in an automatic floor is different from the method for creating an opening in a manually inserted
floor.
To cut an opening in an automatic floor, you need to define the opening’s outline with the Room Division tool, and then
delete the outline to create the opening.
To cut an opening in a manually inserted floor (i.e. a floor created with one of the Floor tools), you can use the Cut Opening
tool.
Once inserted, you can curve an opening if desired.

Cutting an Opening in an Automatic Floor

You can insert an opening of any shape and size in an automatic floor by defining the area to be cut out, then deleting it.
You may need to do this to accommodate a staircase.

Note: If you want to insert an opening in a floor that was created with a Floor tool, see Cutting an Opening in a Manually
Inserted Floor on page 50.

To insert an opening in an automatic floor:

1. Select Insert > Walls > Room Division, or click the down arrow next to the Walls button on the Building toolbar
and select Room Division.
2. Select points to define the outline of the opening, ensuring the outline forms a closed shape.

- 49 -
Chapter 9: Floors & Ceilings

3. Right-click and select Finish. An outline is created on the floor surface. You can stretch, move and curve the outline if
necessary to get the exact size and shape you want.
4. Go into 3D view and make sure the floor is visible and accessible.
5. Click in the center of the outline you drew to select the outline.
6. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Cutting an Opening in a Manually Inserted Floor

If you have used the Floor by Room, Floor by Perimeter or Floor by Picking Points tool to create a floor, you can use the Cut
Opening tool on the floor’s right-click menu to create an opening in it of any shape or size.
To create an opening in a manually inserted floor:
1. Select the floor surface.
2. Right-click and select Cut Opening.
3. Select a start point for the opening, then continue selecting points to define the size and shape of the opening. Note that
you do not have to select the start point again to finish the outline — the last point picked is always connected to the
start point.
4. Right-click and select Finish.

Resizing or Reshaping a Floor Opening

If you have created an opening in a floor, you can resize or reshape the opening by clicking and dragging its edges or corners.
To resize or reshape a floor opening:
1. Click on the edge of the opening.
2. To resize the opening, hover your pointer over the center blue grip of the edge that you want to move, then click and
drag the edge to adjust the opening size.
3. If the opening is located in a manually inserted floor, you can reshape the opening by clicking and dragging a corner
grip.

Curving a Floor Opening

You can curve the edge of a floor opening using the Curve tool. Once the tool is active, you can click and drag the opening
edge to curve it, or select a point to curve to.
To curve an opening edge by clicking and dragging:
1. In 2D plan view, click on the opening edge you want to curve.
2. Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve.
3. Click and drag the opening edge to the desired curve.
4. Release your mouse button.
To curve an opening edge to a selected point:
1. In 2D plan view, click on the opening edge you want to curve.
2. Right-click in and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve.
3. Select the point you want to curve to. The opening edge automatically curves to the point.
4. Click to finish.

Removing an Opening from an Automatically Inserted Floor

If you have inserted an opening in an automatic floor, you can remove it by deleting all of the opening edges.
To remove an opening from an automatic floor:
1. In 2D plan view, click on one of the opening’s edges, then Shift+click to select the remaining edges.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

- 50 -
 Removing an Opening from a Manually Inserted Floor

Removing an Opening from a Manually Inserted Floor

You can remove an opening from a manually inserted floor using the Remove Opening tool. A manually inserted floor is
one that was inserted with either the Floor by Room, Floor by Perimeter or Floor by Picking Points tool.

Note: You cannot remove an opening from a manually inserted floor using Delete.

To remove an opening from a manually inserted floor:

1. Click on the edge of the floor or opening to select the floor.
2. Right-click and select Remove Opening, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Remove Opening.
3. Click on the edge of the opening. The opening is removed.

Ceilings
There are thee tools available for inserting ceilings. Use the Ceiling by Perimeter tool to instantly insert a ceiling throughout
a building location. You can easily insert ceilings in rooms using the Ceiling by Room tool. To manually create a ceiling that
is a custom shape or size, use the Ceiling by Picking Points tool.
Once you have inserted a ceiling you can convert it to a tray or cathedral ceiling provided your roof system is compatible
with this type of design.
You can cut an opening in a ceiling to accommodate a staircase or other feature in your design.
Ceilings can be edited in a number of different ways. To display a menu of ceiling editing commands, select a ceiling and
then right-click your mouse. Selecting Ceilings Help at the bottom of the menu displays a list of help topics relating to
ceilings.

How Ceilings are Created

You can insert ceilings using any of the handy Ceiling tools — Ceiling by Room, Ceiling by Perimeter, or Ceiling by Picking
Points.
You can edit the thickness and appearance of any ceiling as well as lower it to create a suspended ceiling, regardless of how
you created it. You can also use the Materials Paintbrush to apply different colors or materials to individual ceilings. As well,
any ceiling can be converted into a tray or cathedral ceiling by simply editing the ceiling’s properties.

Tip: The underside of an upper-story floor can also serve as a ceiling. Similarly, the top side of a lower-story ceiling can serve
as a floor.

Inserting a Ceiling Throughout a Building Location

The Ceiling by Perimeter tool detects the perimeter walls on the current building location and inserts a ceiling of your choice
throughout the entire location. This option is ideal if you would like to create ceilings as quickly as possible throughout your
model and do not have a need for different ceilings in each room.
To instantly add a ceiling to the entire perimeter of a location:
1. Make sure the location you want to insert the ceiling on is the current location in the building locations drop box.

2. Select Insert > Ceilings > Ceiling by Perimeter, or click the down arrow next to the Ceilings button on the Build-
ing toolbar and select Ceiling by Perimeter.
3. In the catalog, select the ceiling type you want to insert.
4. Click anywhere inside the perimeter of the model. The ceiling is added automatically.
5. Right-click and select Finish.

Note: The Ceiling by Perimeter tool does not take interior walls into account. Only one large ceiling surface is created. If you
would prefer individual ceilings in each room, use the Ceiling by Room tool.

Inserting a Ceiling in a Room

The Ceiling by Room option inserts a ceiling inside the perimeter of a room provided all the walls are connected. Adding
ceilings by room allows you to have different ceiling types in different rooms.

- 51 -
Chapter 9: Floors & Ceilings

To insert a ceiling inside a room:

1. Make sure the location you want to insert the ceiling on is the current location in the building locations drop box.

2. Select Insert > Ceilings > Ceiling by Room, or click on the Building toolbar.
3. In the catalog, select the ceiling type you want to insert.
4. Mouse over the room to which you want to add a ceiling (it will highlight), then click inside the room. The ceiling is
added automatically. (If you want, you can continue adding ceilings to other rooms.)
5. Right-click and select Finish from the shortcut menu.

Inserting a Ceiling By Picking Points

Professional only
Using the Ceiling by Picking Points tool you can insert a ceiling by picking points to define the ceiling’s outline. This lets
you create a ceiling of any shape and size, anywhere in the drawing area.
To create a ceiling by picking points:
1. Make sure the location you want to insert the ceiling on is the current location in the building locations drop box.

2. Select Insert > Ceilings > Ceiling by Picking Points, or click the down arrow next to the Ceilings button on the
Building toolbar and select Ceiling by Picking Points.
3. In the catalog, select the ceiling type you want to insert.
4. Select a start point for the ceiling outline.
5. Continue selecting points until the outline is defined. (You do not have to select the start point again because the last
point you pick is always closed back to the start point.)
6. Right-click and select Finish.

Creating a Tray Ceiling

A tray ceiling slopes upward with one or more steps prior to reaching a flat portion. This decorative ceiling treatment is
often used to add volume or height to a room.
You can create a tray ceiling by changing a ceiling’s type to Tray in its properties, then defining the tray height, skirt width
and slope angle.
To create a tray ceiling:
1. Create a regular flat ceiling in the room that you want to have a tray ceiling.
2. Select the ceiling.
3. Right-click and select Properties.
4. In the Ceilings dialog, click the Tray option in the Type area.
5. In the Properties area, click the Tray Height option, then type the desired distance from the base of the ceiling to the
raised flat portion. This defines the height of the tray.
6. Click the Skirt Width option, then specify the desired distance from the outer edge of the ceiling to the edge of the tray.
7. Click the Edge Shape option, then select either Straight, Gable or Arched.
Straight. Creates straight tray edges that can be angled.
Gable. Creates straight tray edges and leaves one side open on the tray so that the tray can fit up against a wall.
Arched. Creates curved tray edges.
8. If you selected the Straight edge shape, specify the desired angle for the tray’s edges in the Slope Value edit box. To
specify the method that you would like to use to specify the slope value, choose either Degrees, ? in 12, 1 in ?, or Percent
from the Slope Type drop box.
9. If you selected the Arched edge shape, specify the following values:

- 52 -
 Creating a Cathedral Ceiling

Start Angle. The angle of the start of the curve, measured from the base of the ceiling to the center of the starting curve.
Choose a value from 1º to 90º.
End Angle. The angle of the upper portion of the curve, measured from the center of the ending curve to the top of the
tray.
Radius. The distance from the base of the ceiling to the center of the curved edge.
10. Click OK.

Creating a Cathedral Ceiling

A cathedral ceiling is a high, vaulted, open ceiling that can be arched or slant upward to a point.
You can create a cathedral ceiling by changing a ceiling’s type to Cathedral in its properties, then defining the ceiling’s edge
conditions.
To create a cathedral ceiling:
1. Create a regular flat ceiling in the room that you want to have a cathedral ceiling.
2. Select the ceiling.
3. Right-click and select Properties.
4. In the Ceilings dialog, click the Cathedral option in the Type area.
5. Click the Skirt Width option, then specify the distance from the edge of the ceiling at which you want the ceiling to start
sloping upward. If you want the ceiling to start sloping directly from the outer edges, specify a value of 0.
6. Click the Edge Shape option, then select either Straight, Gable or Arched to define the shape of the ceiling’s sloping
edges.
Straight. Creates straight edges that can be angled.
Gable. Creates straight edges and leaves one side open so that the ceiling can fit up against a wall.
Arched. Creates curved edges.
7. If you selected the Straight edge shape, specify the desired angle for the sloping edges in the Slope Value edit box. To
specify the method that you would like to use to specify the slope value, choose either Degrees, ? in 12, 1 in ?, or Percent
from the Slope Type drop box.
8. If you selected the Arched edge shape, specify the following values:
Start Angle. The angle of the start of the curve, measured from the base of the ceiling to the center of the starting curve.
Choose a value from 1º to 90º.
End Angle. The angle of the upper portion of the curve, measured from the center of the ending curve to the top of the
ceiling’s peak.
Radius. The distance from the base of the ceiling to the center of the curved edge.
Vert. Distance. The distance from the base of the ceiling to the peak.
9. Click OK.

Note: If you are creating a cathedral ceiling, you need to make sure your roof is steep enough to accommodate the ceiling.
Otherwise, the ceiling will go through the roof.

Moving a Ceiling
You can move a ceiling using the Move tool.
To move a ceiling:
1. Select the ceiling by clicking on one of its edges.
2. Right-click and select Move, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Move.
3. Click and drag the ceiling to the desired location in your drawing, then release your mouse button.

Resizing or Reshaping a Ceiling

You can resize or reshape a ceiling by clicking and dragging its edges and corners.

- 53 -
Chapter 9: Floors & Ceilings

To resize or reshape a ceiling:

1. Select the ceiling by clicking on one of its edges. If you want to resize the ceiling, click on the edge that you want to
adjust. A solid blue grip appears on the edge you selected, and hollow blue grips appear at each corner of the ceiling
surface.
2. To resize the ceiling, hover your pointer over the solid blue grip, then click and drag the ceiling edge to adjust the ceil-
ing size. Alternatively you can select the Move Edge tool on the right-click menu.
3. To reshape the ceiling, hover your pointer over one of the corner grips, then click and drag the corner to adjust the ceil-
ing shape. Alternatively you can select the Stretch tool on the right-click menu.
If you would like to stretch only a portion of a ceiling edge, you can accomplish this by adding a node to the ceiling edge.
For example, you may want to stretch a portion of a ceiling into the foyer or closet. See Adding a Node to a Ceiling.

Curving a Ceiling Edge

You can curve a ceiling edge using the Curve tool. Once the tool is active, you can click and drag the edge to curve it, or
select a point to curve to.
To curve a ceiling edge by clicking and dragging:
1. Click on the edge you want to curve.
2. Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve.
3. Click and drag the ceiling edge to the desired curve.
4. Release your mouse button.
To curve a ceiling edge to a selected point:
1. Click on the ceiling edge you want to curve.
2. Right-click in and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve.
3. Select the point you want to curve to. The ceiling edge automatically curves to the point.
4. Click to finish.

Raising or Lowering a Ceiling

You can lower or raise a ceiling using the Elevate tool.
To raise or lower a ceiling:
1. Select the ceiling by clicking on the edge of it.
2. Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Elevate. The current value in the Elevate dialog is
the current elevation of the ceiling above the floor level.
3. In the Elevate dialog, specify the height you want the ceiling to sit at above the floor.
4. If you are in a 3D or elevation view and would like to see what the ceiling looks like at the new elevation, click Apply.
The Elevate tool remains active while the change is applied to the ceiling in your model.
5. To apply the change and close the dialog, click OK.

Applying Different Colors and Materials to Ceilings

You can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly apply different colors or materials to ceilings.
To apply a material to a ceiling:
1. Display your model in 3D view and make sure the ceiling is visible in the view. You may need to hide the roof.

2. Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click on any tabbed toolbar.

3. In the catalog panel, select the material you want to apply. You may want to select Ceiling Material from the Filter drop
box to display only ceiling materials.
4. Click on the ceiling you want to apply the material to. You can continue applying the material to other ceiling surfaces,
or select another material in the catalog.

- 54 -
 Deleting a Ceiling

5. Right-click and select Finish.

Deleting a Ceiling
You can delete a ceiling in a couple of easy steps.
To delete a ceiling:
1. Select the ceiling.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Ceiling Openings
You can create an opening in a ceiling using the Cut Opening tool. You create the opening by picking points to define its
size and shape.
Once inserted you can resize, reshape, or curve the opening.

Cutting Openings in Ceilings

You can create an opening in a ceiling using the Cut Opening tool. You create the opening by picking points to define its
size and shape.
To cut an opening in a ceiling:
1. Select the ceiling by clicking on one of its edges.
2. Right-click and select Cut Opening, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Cut Opening.
3. Select a start point for the opening.
4. Continue selecting points to define the opening. As you select points, the opening is created. The last point picked is
always connected back to the start point to form a closed shape, so you don’t have to select the start point again.
5. Right-click and select Finish.

Resizing or Reshaping Ceiling Openings

If you have created an opening in a ceiling, you can resize or reshape the opening by clicking and dragging its edges or
corners.
To resize or reshape a ceiling opening:
1. In 2D plan view, click on the opening edge you want to move.
2. To resize the opening, hover your pointer over the center blue grip of the edge that you want to move, then click and
drag the edge to adjust the opening size.
3. To reshape the opening, click and drag a corner grip.

Curving a Ceiling Opening

You can curve the edge of a ceiling opening using the Curve tool. Once the tool is active, you can click and drag the opening
edge to curve it, or select a point to curve to.
To curve an opening edge by clicking and dragging:
1. In 2D plan view, click on the opening edge you want to curve.
2. Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve.
3. Click and drag the opening edge to the desired curve.
4. Release your mouse button.
To curve an opening edge to a selected point:
1. In 2D plan view, click on the opening edge you want to curve.
2. Right-click in and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve.
3. Select the point you want to curve to. The opening edge automatically curves to the point.
4. Click to finish.

- 55 -
Chapter 9: Floors & Ceilings

Removing an Opening from a Ceiling

You can remove an opening from a manually inserted ceiling using the Remove Opening tool. A manually inserted ceiling
is one that was inserted with either the Ceiling by Room, Ceiling by Perimeter or Ceiling by Picking Points tool.

Note: You cannot remove an opening from a manually inserted ceiling using Delete.

To remove an opening from a manually inserted ceiling:

1. Click on the edge of the ceiling or opening to select the ceiling.
2. Right-click and select Remove Opening, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Remove Opening.
3. Click on the edge of the opening. The opening is removed.

- 56 -
Chapter 10: Stairs, Ramps & Railings

If your design has more than one floor, you’ll want to insert a staircase. The catalog contains a variety of stair and ramp
styles, including straight, spiral, fold-back, L-shaped and L-winder. There are even stairs specifically for decks and porches.
You can edit the composition and dimensions of each component in your staircase to create the exact look you want. Stairs
and ramps are inserted as solid objects with point-and-click simplicity. Just select the staircase or ramp you want to insert
in the catalog, then click to insert it in your model.
The catalog also contains an excellent selection of railing types. A railing can be just a handrail, or a balustrade with posts,
top/bottom rails and newels. You can insert railings on a staircase automatically. You can choose to put it on both sides, the
left side, the right side, or the center. You can also draw a horizontal railing by picking points.

Stairs
You can use the Stairs/Ramps tool to insert a staircase in your drawing with one click. The catalog contains a variety of stair
styles, including straight, spiral, fold-back, L-shaped and L-winder.
Stairs are completely customizable so you can achieve the exact configuration you want. To display a menu of stair editing
commands, select a staircase and then right-click your mouse. Selecting Stairs Help at the bottom of the menu displays a
list of help topics relating to stairs.

Inserting Stairs and Ramps

Platinum | Ultimate | Professional
You can insert a staircase or ramp with a single mouse click. If you place the staircase near a wall, the staircase will
automatically snap to the wall. Once you have inserted a staircase, you can edit its size, style and geometry.
To insert a staircase or ramp:
1. In the building locations drop box, select the location where you want to insert the base of the staircase.

2. Select Insert > Stairs/Ramps, or click on the Building toolbar.

3. In the catalog, select the staircase or ramp you want to insert.
4. Position the staircase and click to insert it.
5. Right-click and select Finish.

Moving a Staircase or Ramp

You can move a staircase or ramp by clicking and dragging it.
To move a staircase or ramp:
1. Click on the staircase or ramp to select it.

2. Hover your pointer over the center grip to display the Move cursor.
3. Click and drag the staircase/ramp to move it.
4. Release your mouse button.

Rotating a Staircase or Ramp

You can rotate a staircase or ramp by simply clicking and dragging it.
To rotate a staircase or ramp:
1. Select the staircase or ramp.

2. Hover your pointer over the triangular grip to display the Rotate cursor.
3. Click and drag to rotate the staircase or ramp.

- 57 -
Chapter 10: Stairs, Ramps & Railings

4. When the staircase or ramp is at the desired rotation, release your mouse button.

Parts of a Staircase

Editing Stair Size Properties

You can edit the general dimensions of a staircase, such as height, width, and number of steps.
To edit stair size properties:
1. Select the staircase whose stair properties you want to edit.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Stairs/Ramps dialog, edit the dimensions in the Properties window.
Overall Height. The vertical distance from the base of the staircase to the top of the staircase. Generally this is the
distance from one floor to the next.
Total Steps. The total number of steps in the staircase including all treads and landings. This value is controlled by the
Overall Height and Riser Maximum, so you can only go so high or so low when specifying the total number of steps.
Riser Height. The distance from the top of one tread to the top of the next tread. The riser height adjusts if you edit the
Overall Height or Total Steps, making this a read-only value.
Tread Run. The width of a step from the nose of the step to the riser of the next step.
Riser Maximum. The maximum height allowed for risers. The riser height adjusts when you change the Overall Height
or Total Steps variables.
Show Riser. Inserts vertical boards under the treads. If turned off, the stairs are open under the treads.
4. Click OK.

Editing a Staircase Layout

You can choose from a multitude of preset staircase layouts and edit the dimensions of individual segments to suit your
needs.
To edit a staircase layout:
1. Select the staircase whose stair properties you want to edit.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Stairs/Ramps dialog, select the Layout tab.
4. To change the layout of the staircase, make a selection from the Preset Layouts drop box, or click the graphic to display
the available layouts and select the one you want.
5. To edit the dimensions of a particular segment, select the segment in the Layout Segments window. For example, an L-
shaped staircase will have three segments: Stair 1, Landing 2 and Stair 3. The Stair 1 segment is the lower flight of stairs,
Landing 2 is the central landing between the two flights, and Stair 3 is the upper flight of stairs.

- 58 -
 Editing Stair Details

Different layouts will have different parameters. Clicking a dimension marked with an alphabetical character (a, b, c,
etc.) highlights the corresponding dimension in the stair graphic, and vice versa.
Stair Segments
Number of Steps. The number of steps in the flight.
Position Offset. Shifts the base of the staircase left or right from the center line. A positive value shifts it right, a
negative value shifts it left. If the Upper Offset is set to 0, the entire staircase is moved.
Lower Width. The width of the bottom step.
Upper Width. The width of the top step.
Upper Offset. Shifts the top of the stair segment left or right to create an angled flight. A positive value shifts it right,
a negative value shifts it left.
Landing Connection. Choose from Front, Bottom or Under to determine how the stairs attach to the landing.
Adjust Width. If the staircase has multiple segments, this adjusts the width of attached landings and stair flights to
match the width settings of the current segment.
Adjust Height. When editing the number of risers or height of a segment in a multi-segmented staircase, this
determines which other segments (or all others) are to be adjusted to make up the overall height of all segments.
Landing Segments (vary per style)
Position Offset. Shifts the landing left or right. A positive value moves the landing right. A negative value moves it left.
Width. The width of the landing along the lower flight of stairs. By default this matches the Upper Width setting of the
lower stair flight.
Depth 1. The width of the landing along the upper flight of stairs. By default this matches the Lower Width setting of
the upper stair flight.
Depth 2. The width of the exposed side of the landing.
Adjust Width. Adjusts the width of attached stair flights to match the width of the landing.
6. To add a flight or landing to your staircase, click Add in the Layout Segments area. Select the segment you want to add
in the Add/Edit Segment dialog.
7. The segment is added to your list of segments in the Layout Segments window. Proceed with defining the parameters
for the new segment in the Parameters window.
8. To change an existing segment to another type, select the segment in the Layout Segments window, then click Edit. Select
the new segment type in the Add/Edit Segment dialog.
9. To delete a segment from the staircase, select the segment in the Layout Segments window, then click Delete.
10. Once you are satisfied with your layout settings, click OK.

Editing Stair Details

Editing stair details lets you precisely control the size and position of treads, risers, stringers and landing platforms.
To edit stair details:
1. Select the staircase whose stair properties you want to edit.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. To change the stringer style or create a solid stair, click the appropriate graphic in the Type area.
4. To edit tread, riser, stringer and landing details, select the Details tab. Clicking a dimension marked with an alphabet-
ical character (a, b, c, etc.) highlights the corresponding dimension in the stair graphic, and vice versa.
5. Edit the properties in the Properties area.
Tread Thickness. The thickness of each step.
Nosing Depth. The distance the step extends past the riser.
Riser Angle. The tilt of the riser board. A value of 0 means the board is perpendicular to the step (straight up and
down). A value above 0 tilts the riser down toward the back of the staircase. The maximum angle allowed is 20º.

- 59 -
Chapter 10: Stairs, Ramps & Railings

Stringer Side Offset. The distance the side stringers are offset from the ends of the treads.
Stringer Width. The distance from the bottom of the stringer to the underside of the tread/riser intersection. Setting the
stringer width to match the height of your staircase creates a stringer that runs from the staircase right to the floor.

Stringer Thickness. The thickness of the stringer member.

Max Stringer Spacing. The maximum distance allowed between stringers. If you increase the width of the staircase,
additional stringers will be inserted if this spacing is exceeded.
Landing Thickness. The thickness of the landing platform.
6. Click OK.

Editing the Appearance of a Stair Cut Line

When viewing a staircase in 2D plan view you can see a cut line through the staircase. The cut line is a standard drafting
symbol for stairs.
You can change the cut line’s position, size, angle and style. You can also hide it from view if you want.
To edit the appearance of the cut line:
1. Select the staircase.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Stairs/Ramps dialog, select the Details tab.
4. Edit the settings in the Cut Line area.
Show Cut Lines. Shows or hides the cut lines in 2D plan view.
Extension. The distance the cut line extends past the edge of the staircase in 2D plan view.
Angle. The angle of the cut line in 2D plan view.
Spacing. If using the Double or Double Arch style, this is the distance between the lines.
Elevation. How high up the staircase the cut line sits.
Style. Choose from Single, Single Architectural, Double and Double Architectural. The default is Double Architectural.
5. Once you’ve defined your cut line, click OK.

Deleting a Staircase or Ramp

You can delete a staircase or ramp in a couple of easy steps.
To delete a staircase or ramp:
1. Select the staircase or ramp.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Railings
The catalog contains an excellent selection of railing types. A railing can be just a handrail, or a balustrade with posts, top/
bottom rails and newels.

- 60 -
 Inserting Railings on Both Sides of a Staircase or Ramp

You can insert railings on a staircase automatically. You can choose to put it on both sides, the left side, the right side, or the
center. You can also draw a horizontal railing by picking points.
There are many ways to edit a railing. To display a menu of railing editing commands, select a railing and then right-click
your mouse. Selecting Railings Help at the bottom of the menu displays a list of help topics relating to railings.

Inserting Railings on Both Sides of a Staircase or Ramp

Platinum | Ultimate | Professional
You can insert railings on both sides of a staircase automatically. A railing can be just a handrail, or a balustrade with posts,
top/bottom rails and newels.
To insert railings on both sides of a staircase automatically:

1. Select Insert > Railings > Railings on Stairs Automatically, or click the down arrow next to the Railings button
on the Building toolbar and select Railings on Stairs Automatically.
2. In the catalog, select the railing type you want to insert.
3. Click on the staircase. The railings are inserted automatically on both sides.
4. Right-click and select Finish.

Inserting a Railing on the Left Side of a Staircase or Ramp

Platinum | Ultimate | Professional
A railing can be just a handrail, or a balustrade with posts, top/bottom rails and newels. Using the Railing on Stair Left tool
you can insert a railing on the left side of a staircase easily by just clicking two points on the stair.
To insert a railing on the left side of a staircase:

1. Select Insert > Railings > Railing on Stair Left, or click the down arrow next to the Railings button on the Building
toolbar and select Railing on Stair Left.
2. In the catalog, select the railing type you want to insert.
3. Select a point anywhere along the bottom of the staircase (or along the tread where you want the bottom of the railing
to sit) to define the level of the railing’s bottom post. Your cursor will snap to the left side of the staircase as you start
to draw the railing.
4. Select a point anywhere along the top of the staircase (or along the tread where you want the top of the railing to sit) to
define the level of the railing’s top post.
5. Right-click and select Finish.

Inserting a Railing on the Right Side of a Staircase or Ramp

Platinum | Ultimate | Professional
A railing can be just a handrail, or a balustrade with posts, top/bottom rails and newels. Using the Railing on Stair Right tool
you can insert a railing on the right side of a staircase easily by just clicking two points on the stair.

1. Select Insert > Railings > Railing on Stair Right, or click the down arrow next to the Railings button on the Build-
ing toolbar and select Railing on Stair Right.
2. In the catalog, select the railing type you want to insert.
3. Select a point anywhere along the bottom of the staircase (or along the tread where you want the bottom of the railing
to sit) to define the level of the railing’s bottom post. Your cursor will snap to the right side of the staircase as you start
to draw the railing.
4. Select a point anywhere along the top of the staircase (or along the tread where you want the top of the railing to sit) to
define the level of the railing’s top post.
5. Right-click and select Finish.

Inserting a Railing Along the Center of a Staircase or Ramp

Platinum | Ultimate | Professional

- 61 -
Chapter 10: Stairs, Ramps & Railings

A railing can be just a handrail, or a balustrade with posts, top/bottom rails and newels. Using the Railing on Stair Center
tool you can insert a railing along the center of a staircase easily by just clicking two points on the stair.
To insert a railing along the center of a staircase:

1. Select Insert > Railings > Railing on Stair Center, or click the down arrow next to the Railings button on the
Building toolbar and select Railing on Stair Center.
2. In the catalog, select the railing type you want to insert.
3. Select a point anywhere along the bottom of the staircase (or along the tread where you want the bottom of the railing
to sit) to define the level of the railing’s bottom post. Your cursor will snap to the center of the staircase as you start to
draw the railing.
4. Select a point anywhere along the top of the staircase (or along the tread where you want the top of the railing to sit) to
define the level of the railing’s top post.
5. Right-click and select Finish.

Inserting a Horizontal Railing

Platinum | Ultimate | Professional
You can use the Railing by Picking Points tool to create a horizontal railing anywhere in your model. You may, for example,
want to create a railing around a stairwell, or insert a railing to separate two rooms in your house. You create the railing by
picking the start point and end point of the railing. Each point you pick serves as a main post point.
To insert a railing along a floor:
1. Make sure the building location that you want to insert the railing on is current.

2. Select Insert > Railings > Railings by Picking Points, or click on the Building toolbar.
3. In the catalog, select the railing type you want to insert.
4. Select the start point for the railing.
5. Select an end point for the railing. You can continue adding sections to the railing if you want.
6. Right-click and select Finish.

Parts of a Railing

Editing Railing Properties

When editing a railing, you can choose a different railing type as well as control the dimensions and settings of posts, rails
and newels.
To edit railing properties:
1. Select the railing. If the railing has multiple segments, use Shift+click to select the remaining segments.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

- 62 -
 Editing Railing Properties

3. In the Railings dialog, select the Basic tab.

4. To change the railing type, click on the type you want in the Type area.
5. To edit the settings of individual railing components, make your changes in parameters window. The available param-
eters vary depending on the railing type. Clicking a dimension marked with an alphabetical character (a, b, c, etc.) high-
lights the corresponding dimension in the railing graphic, and vice versa.
Posts
Include Posts. Inserts a post at the railing’s start point and endpoint, and at points in between defined by the Post
Spacing.
Include First Post. If disabled, eliminates the post at the start point of the railing.
Include Last Post. If disabled, eliminates the post at the end point of the railing.
Post Spacing. The distance between intermediate posts in your railing.
Post Position. Choosing From Start measures the intermediate posts from the start point of the railing. Choosing
Centered inserts an intermediate post at the center of the railing and measures other intermediate posts from there.
Post Height. This value is determined by the handrail and bottom rail heights.
Post Style. Choose either Rectangle or Round for the post shape.
Post Width. The width of the post.
Post Depth. The depth of the post.
Post Rotation. Determines the rotation of the connecting post where two railings connect. Choosing Half Way rotates
the connecting post half way between the angle. Choosing None leaves the connecting post aligned to the first railing.
Handrail
Handrail Height. The height of the handrail above the insertion surface.
Make Continuous. Makes the handrail cut through all posts, creating a continuous, solid member.
Handrail Style. Choose either a Rectangle or Round shape.
Handrail Width. The width of the handrail (as seen in 2D plan view).
Handrail Depth. The depth (thickness) of the handrail.
Bottom Rail
Bottom Rail Height. The height of the bottom rail from the insertion surface.
Bottom Rail Style. Choose either a Rectangle or Round shape for the rail.
Bottom Rail Width. The width of the bottom (as seen in 2D plan view).
Bottom Rail Depth. The depth (thickness) of the bottom rail.
Balusters
Baluster Spacing. The horizontal distance between balusters.
Baluster Style. Choose either Rectangle or Round for the baluster shape.
Baluster Width. The width of the baluster.
Baluster Depth. The depth (thickness) of the baluster.
Stair Insertion
Post Offset. The horizontal offset of the first post from the bottom of the staircase. Only a positive value can be
specified, which moves the post further back along the stairs.
Side Offset. Offset of railing from the sides of the treads.
Connection. Determines how railings are connected to the staircase. Connection 2 maintains the distance from the
nosing to the railing at all times. Connection 1 breaks this rule to create a nicer-looking railing.
6. Click OK.

- 63 -
Chapter 10: Stairs, Ramps & Railings

Changing the Length of a Railing

You can lengthen or shorten a railing by clicking and dragging one of its end points.
To stretch a railing:
1. Select the railing. A grip is displayed at each railing end.
2. Hover your pointer over the railing end you want to stretch. The Lengthen cursor is displayed.
3. Click and drag to lengthen or shorten the railing, then release your mouse button.

Stretching a Railing
You can use the Stretch tool to lengthen or shorten a railing and re-position it at the same time.
To stretch a railing:
1. Select the railing.
2. Right-click and select Stretch.
3. Click and drag the railing end you want to adjust, then release the mouse button.

Rotating a Railing
You can rotate a railing using the Rotate tool.
To rotate a railing:
1. Select the railing.
2. Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Rotate.
3. Click on the point you want to rotate around, then move your mouse to rotate the railing around the selected point.
4. When the railing is at the desired rotation, click to finish.

Deleting a Railing
You can delete a railing in a few easy steps.
To delete a railing:
1. Select the railing. If the railing has multiple segments, you can drag a selection window around it to select it, or select
one segment then Shift+click to select the remaining segments.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

- 64 -
Chapter 11: Roofs

To complete your structural model, you want to insert a roof over it. The design of your roof can be a major factor in the
overall look and feel of your home. Inserting a roof in Virtual Architect home design software is incredibly simple. Just click
inside your model and the roof is inserted.
Roofs are inserted by location. Therefore, if you have a two-story house, each story may require its own roof if the levels are
split. The great thing about roofs in Virtual Architect home design software is that you can edit each roof edge individually
to achieve the precise geometry, dimensions and appearance you want. This means that virtually any roof configuration is
possible, including multiple pitch, multiple plate height roofs. And with a wide selection of roof styles to choose from,
including hip, gable, mansard and arched, you can be as creative as you want.
You can add a custom dormer to your roof system, as well as roof accessories.

Roofs
There are two ways to insert a roof. The quickest, easiest way is to use the Roof by Perimeter tool to automatically insert a
roof over the perimeter walls on a selected location. To create secondary roofs, such as porch roofs, you can use the Roof by
Picking Points tool. To insert an opening in a roof, use the Cut Opening tool on the right-click menu.
Regardless of how a roof is created, practically every aspect of a roof can be edited and customized to create the precise
configuration you want. For example, you can convert a hip to gable, or edit the slope or plate height of individual sections.
To display a menu of roof editing commands, select the roof and then right-click your mouse. Selecting Roofs Help at the
bottom of the menu displays a list of help topics relating to roofs.

Inserting an Automatic Roof Over Perimeter Walls

Platinum | Ultimate | Professional
You can use the Roof by Perimeter tool to automatically insert a roof over the perimeter wall layout of a selected building
location. If you have a two-story home where the ground floor wall layout is different than the upper story wall layout, and
you want each story to have its own roof, you will need to insert a roof on each location.
By default, the roof is inserted directly on top of the walls of the current building location. You can edit the support height
as well as change the roof’s style and dimensions.
To insert a roof over an entire wall layout:
1. Make sure the current location is the location containing the walls you want to insert the roof over.

2. Select Insert > Roofs > Roof by Perimeter, or click on the Building toolbar.
3. In the catalog, select the roof type you want to insert. Note that the catalog does not contain gable roofs. If you want to
create a gable roof, insert a hip roof first, then convert it to a gable.
4. Click inside the wall perimeter. The roof is inserted automatically.

Note: If a roof already exists on the current location, it will be deleted.

Inserting a Roof By Picking Points

Platinum | Ultimate | Professional
You can use the Roof by Picking Points tool to create a roof of a custom size and shape by drawing the basic outline of the
roof. This option is ideal when you want the roof to cover only a specific area, such as a porch.
To create a roof by picking points:
1. Make sure the current location is the location containing the walls that you want to insert the roof over.

2. Select Insert > Roofs > Roof by Picking Points, or click the down arrow next to the Roofs button on the Building
toolbar and select Roof by Picking Points.

- 65 -
Chapter 11: Roofs

3. In the catalog, select the roof type you want to insert. Note that the catalog does not contain gable roofs. If you want to
create a gable roof, insert a hip roof first, then convert it to a gable.
4.
Select a start point for the roof boundary. Typically you would select an exterior wall corner. Continue selecting points
until the boundary is defined. (You do not have to select the start point again because the last point you pick is always
closed back to the start point.)

5. Right-click and select Finish.

Note: If the roof you are inserting runs up against any upper-story walls, the roof will cut around the walls. You can adjust
the roof to avoid saddle situations, or to ignore the walls. See Changing the Way a Lower-Story Roof is Created on page 66.

Selecting a Roof for Editing

You can select a roof by clicking on one of its edges. When you select a roof, the entire roof is selected, and a number of
different grips and markers appear on the roof.
General editing tools like Move and Rotate will affect the roof as a whole. By clicking and dragging the solid blue grips at
the center of each edge you can move an edge to effectively stretch the roof. By clicking and dragging the hollow blue grips
at the corners, you can stretch the corners of the roof to reshape it.

The red and green arrows are surface markers. The green arrow indicates the currently selected surface (roof segment).
Changes to most properties, such as the roof type, slope, and overhang distance, affect only the currently selected surface
(which is marked by the green arrow). You can make additional surfaces current by simply clicking on the red arrows to
change them to green. This lets you apply changes to multiple surfaces simultaneously.

Changing the Way a Lower-Story Roof is Created

By default, a lower-story roof cuts around upper-story walls where it runs up against upper-story walls. You can adjust the
roof to avoid saddle situations if you want. A saddle situation is one where rain or snow runs down the roof slope and
collects in areas where the roof meets a wall. You can also have the roof ignore the upper-story walls completely.
To change the way a lower-story roof is created:
1. Select the roof, then right-click and select Properties.
2. In the Roofs dialog, click the Solution Type button.
3. In the Solution Type dialog, click on the solution you want.
4. Click OK in the Roofs dialog.

Converting a Hip Roof to a Gable Roof

To convert a hip roof to a gable roof, you need to select two hip ends, then select the gable roof type in the roof properties.

- 66 -
 Extending Walls to the Roof

To convert a hip roof to a gable roof:

1. Click on the roof edge of one of the ends you want to convert. The roof is selected, and arrows appear on each roof
surface edge. The arrow on the roof edge you selected should be green to indicate that it is the currently selected roof
surface.
2. Click on the arrow on the opposite roof edge. That arrow turns green also. Both hip ends are now selected.

3. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
4. In the Roofs dialog, click the Hip button in the Roof Shape area of the Basic page.
5. In the Roof Shape dialog, click the Gable graphic.
6. Click OK in the Roofs dialog. The roof is converted.

Note: By default, gable ends on a roof do not display a wall or material within the pitched area of the roof. To extend the
wall beneath a gable end to the pitched edges of the roof, see Extending Walls to the Roof on page 16. To display a separate
wall in the pitched area, see Displaying Walls Beneath Gable Ends on page 68. To display a material in the pitched area
rather than an actual wall, see Defining the Material at Gable Ends on page 68.

Extending Walls to the Roof

By default, the tops of most walls in the catalog are set to be level (regardless of the roof type), and their height is determined
by the Wall Height setting of the building location on which they reside. You can specify that you want a wall to
automatically extend to the roof, regardless of the Wall Height setting in your building locations. This is particularly useful
for filling in the pitched areas at gable ends.
To extend walls to the roof:
1. Select the wall that you want to auto-extend to the roof. You can select additional walls using Shift+click.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Walls dialog, select the Top and Bottom tab.
4. In the Wall Top area, enable the Auto Extend option.
5. To rake the external side of the wall, check the Exterior Wall Tops to Roof check box. If you want to offset the wall a
specific distance from the roof surface, enter a value in the Offset below roof surface edit box.
6. To rake the internal side of the wall, check the Interior Wall Tops to Roof check box. If you want to offset the wall a
specific distance from the roof surface, enter a value in the Offset below roof surface edit box.
7. Click OK. The walls are adjusted.

Tip: If you want to use a different wall material within the pitched area of a gable end, set the wall shape to ’Level’ in its
properties and change the roof edge properties instead. In a roof’s properties you can choose to display a separate wall in
the pitched area by enabling the Display Gable option on the roof’s Basic property page and selecting the desired gable Wall
Type. This wall can then be selected independently of the main wall so that you can control its properties and framing
separately.

- 67 -
Chapter 11: Roofs

Defining the Material at Gable Ends

If you have converted hip roof ends to gable roof ends, you can choose to display a material such as siding within the gabled
areas by enabling the Display Gable option in the roof’s properties and selecting a material for the roof’s Gable End
component. You can also choose to display no material at all at gable ends, or choose to display an actual wall. Note that the
Gable End material setting does not apply if you have chosen to display an actual wall beneath gable ends in the roof’s
properties. Also, should you choose to display a material instead of a wall, the material will have no framing associated with
it.
To change the appearance of raked surfaces under gable ends:
1. Click on a roof edge to select the roof.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. If you want to display a material within the pitched areas of the roof’s gable ends, enable the Display Gable check box
on the Basic property page. If you do not want to display a material at all, disable this check box. (If you would like to
display an actual wall instead of just a material, click in the Wall Type field below the Display Gable check box and
select a wall from the catalog. See Displaying Walls Beneath Gable Ends on page 68.)
4. If you are displaying a material (rather than a wall) at gable ends, select the Appearance tab.
5. In the Components list, select Gable End.
6. In the Material area, click the Select button.
7. In the Materials dialog, select the material you would like to use, then click OK.
8. Click OK in the Roofs dialog.

Note: If the Display Gable option is enabled and you do not select a wall type to display, the material specified for the Gable
End component on the Appearance page will automatically be displayed at the selected gable end. If you want to display
an actual wall instead of just a material at gabled ends, see Displaying Walls Beneath Gable Ends on page 68.

Displaying Walls Beneath Gable Ends

If you have converted hip roof ends to gable roof ends, you can choose to display a wall within the gabled areas of the roof
(above the main wall). This can be any wall type in your catalog and can be different from the main wall type below it. When
you choose to display a wall at a gable end, the wall can be selected and edited independently of the main wall that supports
it. If you choose a framed wall, you can view and edit its framing properties just like any other wall in your model. Note
that you can specify different wall display settings for each individual gable end in your roof, as making this change applies
to selected roof edges only.
To display walls beneath gable ends:
1. Click on the roof edge where the gable end is located. The roof is selected, and the arrow on the selected roof edge is
displayed in green. If you want to apply the same change to other gabled ends, click on their arrows to turn them green
as well. Make sure all other arrows are red.
2. Right-click and select Properties.
3. In the Roofs dialog, enable the Display Gable check box on the Basic property page.

4. Click in the Wall Type field below the Display Gable option, then click to display the Catalog Access dialog.
5. Select the wall type that you would like to display in the gabled area, then click OK. The selected wall type is displayed
in the Wall Type field.
6. Click OK in the Roofs dialog.
7. Look at the gabled ends in 3D. If the wrong material appears to be displayed on the exterior side, you will need to flip
the wall. See Forcing Wall Sides to be Exterior.

Note: Make sure that the tops of the main walls beneath the gabled ends of the roof are set to ’Level’ instead of ’Auto
Extend’, ’Slope’ or ’Step’ in their properties. Otherwise, the main wall will extend up and over the gable end wall, resulting
in extraneous wall surfaces in the gabled area.

Note: If you would prefer to display a simple material in the gabled areas instead of an actual wall, do not select a wall type
in the Wall Type field. Instead, go to the Appearance property page and select the desired material for the Gable End
component. See Defining the Material at Gable Ends on page 68.

- 68 -
 Moving a Roof

Moving a Roof
You can move an entire roof using the Move tool. Note that if you move your exterior wall layout, the roof will go with it,
eliminating the need to move it separately.
To move an entire roof:
1. Click on one of the roof’s edges to select the roof.
2. Right-click and select Move, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Move.
3. Click and drag to move the roof, then release your mouse button.

Rotating a Roof
You can rotate an entire roof about a selected point using the Rotate tool.
To rotate a roof:
1. Click on one of the roof’s edges to select the roof.
2. Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Rotate.
3. Hover your pointer over the point you want to rotate around.
4. Click and drag to rotate the roof, then release your mouse button.

Stretching a Roof
You can stretch a roof by clicking and dragging its grips or by using the Stretch or Move Edge tools on the roof’s right-click
menu. Each method has different options and results.
When grip editing, clicking and dragging the center grip on a roof edge moves the edge uniformly in the direction you drag.
Clicking and dragging a corner grip stretches only that corner, allowing you to reshape the roof surface if desired. Using the
click-and-drag method maintains the support height of the roof surface.
The Stretch tool allows you to stretch the corners of a roof edge, allowing for reshaping if desired. When using the Stretch
tool, the Commander becomes active allowing you to specify a precise stretch distance and direction. Also, the support
height of the roof surface is maintained.
The Move Edge tool moves the edge of a roof surface in the direction you specify. There are two options when stretching a
roof edge using the Move Edge tool. You can either maintain the support height of the stretched portion or allow the support
height to adjust. When using the Move Edge tool the Commander is active so that you can specify a precise move distance
and direction if desired.
To stretch a roof by clicking and dragging:
1. Click on a roof edge to select the roof.
2. To uniformly stretch the edge of a roof surface, hover your pointer over the solid blue grip at the center of the roof edge
you want to move. The Move cursor is displayed.
3. To stretch the corner of a roof surface, hover your pointer over the hollow blue grip at the corner you want to stretch.
The Stretch cursor is displayed.
4. Click and drag to stretch the roof, then release your mouse button.
To stretch or reshape a roof with the Stretch tool:
1. Click on a roof edge to select the roof.

2. Right-click and select Stretch. Your pointer becomes the Stretch cursor.
3. Click and drag the corner of the roof surface that you want to move, then release your mouse button. Or, select a start
point for the move, then enter the desired move distance and direction in the Commander.
To move a roof edge and maintain its support height:
1. Click on a roof edge to select the roof.

- 69 -
Chapter 11: Roofs

2. Hover your pointer over the solid blue grip at the center of the roof edge you want to move. The Move cursor is dis-
played. . Or, right-click and select Move Edge > Maintain Support Height. Selecting the Move Edge tool activates
the Commander so that you can see or specify the precise stretch distance.
3. Click and drag to stretch the roof, then release your mouse button. If you selected the Move Edge tool you can also pick
a start point for the move, then type a stretch distance in the Commander and press Enter to complete the stretch.

To move a roof edge and allow its support height to adjust:

1. Click on a roof edge to select the roof.
2. Right-click and select Move Edge > Adjust Support Height.
3. Click and drag to stretch the roof, then release your mouse button. Or, pick a start point for the move, then type a stretch
distance in the Commander and press Enter.

Note: When using the Move Edge - Adjust Support Height tool, you cannot stretch a roof so that it extends below the floor
level of the building location on which the roof resides.

Note: If your roof was inserted automatically and you stretch your exterior wall layout, the roof stretches with it, eliminating
the need to stretch the roof separately.

Reshaping a Roof
You can stretch the corners of a roof to change the shape of its perimeter.
To reshape a roof:
1. Click on a roof edge to select the roof.
2. Click and drag the hollow blue grips at the corners of the roof, then release your mouse button. Alternatively you can
use the Stretch tool on the right-click menu.

Breaking a Roof Surface

You can use the Break tool to insert a break on a roof surface edge. This splits the surface into two surfaces that can be edited
individually.
To break a roof surface:
1. Select the roof.
2. Right-click and select Break, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Break.
3. Click on the edge of the surface you want to break at the point where you want to break it. A new grip appears at the
break point.

Creating Gables Mid-Fascia

You can create a gable on any fascia edge by inserting two break points to create a new surface, then changing the shape of
the new surface to a gable.
To create a gable mid-fascia:
1. Select the roof.
2. Right-click and select Break, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Break.
3. Insert a break point on the fascia to define the start of the gable segment.
4. Select the Break tool again and insert another break point on the fascia to define the other end of the gable segment. A
new surface is created between the two break points.

- 70 -
 Editing the Basic Properties of a Roof Surface

5. Click on the new surface’s arrow to change it to green. If any other arrows are green, click them to change them to red.
6. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
7. Click the graphical button in the Roof Shape area.
8. In the Roof Shape dialog, click on the Gable option.
9. Click OK. The mid-fascia segment is converted to a gable.

Editing the Basic Properties of a Roof Surface

Basic roof properties include Shape, Slope, Overhang Distance, Fascia Distance, etc. Changes are applied to the currently
selected roof surface. You can edit multiple roof surfaces simultaneously if you want. Each surface in a roof can have
different settings.
To edit the basic properties of a roof surface:
1. Click on the edge of the surface whose properties you want to edit. The arrow marker on that edge should be green. To
select additional surfaces to edit, simply click their arrows to change them from red to green. All surfaces with green
arrows will receive the changes.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. To convert the currently selected segments to a different roof type, click the graphical button in the Roof Shape area, then
select a roof type in the Roof Shape dialog.
4. To edit the general dimensions and geometry of the roof, edit the values on the Basic page. Note that a gable roof will
have fewer properties.
Thickness. The combined thickness of all roofing materials, such as shingles and sheathing.
Slope Type. The method used to measure the pitch of the roof. Choose from Degrees, ? in 12, 1 in ?, or Percent.
Slope Value. The pitch of the roof measured using the Slope Type method selected above.
Overhang. The distance from the side wall to the fascia.
Overhang Drop. The distance measured vertically from the support point to the underside of the fascia.
Horiz. Distance. The maximum horizontal distance allowed from the support point the uppermost point of the
underside of the rafter. This is a calculated result from the Slope Value and Vert. Distance variables.
Vert. Distance. The maximum vertical distance allowed from the support point to the uppermost point of the
underside of the rafter.

- 71 -
Chapter 11: Roofs

Fascia Distance. The distance from the ground to the top edge of the fascia board.
Display Gable (gables only). If the currently selected roof edge is a gable, you can choose what you want to display
beneath the pitched edges of the roof (None, Surface or Wall).
The None option displays no material.
The Surface option displays a material such as siding, but no framing. The gable end material is defined on the
Appearance tab.
The Wall option displays an actual wall from the catalog.

Note: If using the Surface or Wall option, make sure that the Wall Top of the main wall that supports the roof is set to
Level and not Auto Extend, Slope or Step.

5. Click OK.

Editing the Height of a Roof Surface

You can raise or lower a roof surface by editing its Support Height variable.
To edit the height of a roof surface:
1. Click on the edge of the surface whose height you want to adjust. The surface’s arrow should be green. To select addi-
tional surfaces to adjust, simply click their red arrows to change them to green arrows. The change applies to those sur-
faces marked with a green arrow, not the whole roof.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Roofs dialog, select the Support and Details tab.
4. Edit the value in the Support Height edit box.
5. Click OK.

Editing a Roof’s Frame Details

You can choose to frame with rafters or trusses. You can also select the members you want to use and edit the precise
dimensions of your roof’s framing configuration.
To edit a roof’s framing details:
1. Click on a roof edge to select the roof.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. To select a member type for each component in the roof frame (rafters, opening headers, fascia board, ridge board, gable
board, hip board, valley board), click the Specify Framing button on the Basic page. Specify the properties in the Roof
Framing dialog. See Specifying Roof Framing Options on page 109.
4. In the Roofs dialog, select the Support and Details tab.
5. Edit the parameters as desired.
Support Type. Choose Truss or Rafter.
Raised Heel. The portion of the rafter that rests on the wall plate.
Birds Mouth. The notch cut in the lower end of a rafter to fit it to the top plate of a wall.
Seat. The horizontal cut that is made when cutting a bird’s mouth in a rafter.
Fascia
Depth. The thickness of the fascia board.
Plumb. The ends of the rafters are cut vertically resulting in a 90º fascia board.
Raked. The ends of the rafters have an angled cut.
Soffit
Plumb. Creates a flat soffit that is parallel with the ground.
Raked. Creates a soffit that is angled to match the roof slope.

- 72 -
 Applying a Different Roofing Material

Gable
Type. Choose either Plain, Squared, Full Hip or Half Hip for the gable return.
Horizontal. The horizontal distance of the return when looking at the gable end face on.
Depth. The depth of the return.
6. Once you have set your properties, click OK.

Applying a Different Roofing Material

You can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly apply different shingles or tiles to a roof.
To apply a different material to a roof:
1. Display your model in 3D view and make sure the roof is visible in the view.

2. Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click on any tabbed toolbar.

3. In the catalog panel, select the material you want to apply. You may want to select Roofing from the Filter drop box to
display only roofing materials.
4. Click anywhere on the roof surface. The material is immediately applied to the entire roof.
5. Right-click and select Finish.

Converting a Roof to Surfaces

If you have created a roof using one of the Roofs tools, you can explode the roof into individual surfaces. This allows for
more in-depth editing and customization.
To convert a roof to surfaces:
1. Click on a roof edge to select the roof.
2. Right-click and select Convert Roof to Surfaces, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Convert Roof to Surfaces.
3. In the Catalog Access dialog, select the desired surface material for the roof.
4. Click OK. The roof is converted.
Note that the framing on adjoining surfaces will adjust intelligently so that only one member is present along each adjoining
edge instead of two.
To ensure that roof elements are correctly represented in 3D, and quantified correctly in the project estimate, you can use
the Roof Edge Type Editor on the Surfaces menu to verify and specify properties for each roof edge.

Deleting a Roof
You can delete a roof in a couple of easy steps.
To delete a roof:
1. Click on one of the roof’s edges to select the roof.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Inserting an Opening in a Roof

Once you have created a roof, you can insert a custom opening in it of virtually any shape and size using the Cut Opening
tool. You create the opening by picking points to define its outline.
To insert an opening in a roof:
1. Select the roof by clicking on one of its edges.
2. Right-click and select Cut Opening, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Cut Opening.
3. Select a start point for the opening.
4. Continue selecting points to define the opening. As you select points, the opening is created. The last point picked is
always connected back to the start point to form a closed shape, so you don’t have to select the start point again.
5. When you have selected your final point, right-click and select Finish.

- 73 -
Chapter 11: Roofs

Removing a Roof Opening

You can remove an opening that you have created in your roof using the Remove Opening tool.
To remove a roof opening:
1. Select the roof.
2. Right-click and select Remove Opening, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Remove Opening.
3. Click on one of the roof opening’s corner grips. The opening is removed.

Note: You cannot use Delete to remove a roof opening.

Dormers
A dormer is a small structure that projects from a roof slope. Dormers are often used to extend the usable floor area of a
second story that is under a moderate to steeply pitched roof. They can be quite effective in opening up cramped rooms
under the roof. A typical dormer consists of a roof and three walls. The most common type of dormer is the gable dormer,
characterized by the front gable in the roof.

You can also create a dormer without walls. In this case the dormer roof sits on top of the main roof. Its purpose is usually
to add character to an otherwise plain roof or to make your roof design more complex. For example, you can insert a dormer
roof on your main roof and stretch it to create a porch roof or gable extension.
You can create a dormer easily with the Dormer Roof tool. Just specify the dormer’s settings, and then click to insert it.
Once inserted you can move or stretch the dormer if necessary.

Creating Dormers
Platinum | Ultimate | Professional
A dormer is a small structure that projects from a roof slope. Dormers are often used to extend the usable floor area of a
second story that is under a moderate to steeply pitched roof. They can be quite effective in opening up cramped rooms
under the roof. A typical dormer consists of a roof and three walls. The most common type of dormer is the gable dormer,
characterized by the front gable in the roof.

You can also create a dormer without walls. In this case the dormer roof sits on top of the main roof. Its purpose is usually
to add character to an otherwise plain roof or to make your roof design more complex. For example, you can insert a dormer
roof on your main roof and stretch it to create a porch roof or gable extension.

- 74 -
 Moving a Dormer Roof

Dormers are easy to insert - just point and click. You can control the dormer’s width, roof type, wall type, and wall height.
You can also specify whether or not you want the dormer to have walls.
To create a dormer:
1. In the building locations drop box, select the location containing the roof you want to add the dormer to.

2. Select Insert > Roofs > Dormer Roof, or click the down arrow next to the Roofs button on the Building toolbar
and select Dormer Roof.
3. In the Dormers dialog, specify the desired width for the dormer in the Dormer Width edit box.
4. Click the Dormer Roof button, then select the desired roof type for the dormer. By default, the roof will have a gable
front, regardless of the roof type. If you do not want it to have a gable front, uncheck the Gable Front check box.
5. If you want your dormer to have walls, check the Include Walls check box. Then, click the Dormer Wall button and
select the desired wall type from the catalog. If you do not want your dormer to have walls, disable the Include Walls
check box.
Note that dormer walls extend only to the surface of the main roof. As well, an opening is cut in the main roof surface
to open the dormer up to the space below.
6. In the Support height above main roof edit box, type the height of the dormer’s front wall, not including the raked
portion between the two roof slopes. You can use this option even if you are not inserting walls to control the position
of the bottom of the dormer roof.
7. Click OK. The dormer’s wall footprint is attached to your cursor.
8. Position the dormer where you want it, then click to insert it. In most cases you would place the front dormer wall di-
rectly on top of the exterior wall.
9. Right-click and select Finish.

Note: If you can’t seem to insert the dormer, it means that the dormer is too large for the surface you are inserting it on. You
may want to try decreasing the wall height before inserting it.

Moving a Dormer Roof

You can use the Move tool to move a dormer roof to another spot on your roof.
To move a dormer roof:
1. Click on the edge of the dormer roof to select it.
2. Right-click and select Move, or select Edit > Modify Element > Move.
3. Click anywhere on the screen, then drag to move the dormer roof.
4. When the dormer roof is where you want it, release your mouse button.

Note: If the dormer has walls, you need to move the walls separately. To move the dormer walls, click on one wall,
Shift+click to select the remaining walls, right-click and select Move, then click and drag the walls into place.

Stretching a Dormer Roof

You can stretch the front or sides a dormer roof by clicking and dragging the appropriate roof edge.
To stretch a dormer roof:
1. Select the dormer roof.

2. Position your pointer over the center blue grip of the edge you want to move. This displays the Move cursor. Alter-
natively you can select the Move Edge tool on the right-click menu.
3. Click and drag to stretch the roof, then release your mouse button.

Note: If your dormer has walls, the dormer roof will not adjust if you stretch the dormer walls.

Deleting a Dormer
You can delete a dormer in a couple of easy steps. If the dormer has walls, they need to be deleted separately. If you delete
a dormer and see a hole left behind in the main roof, you can use the Update Roof tool to remove that hole.

- 75 -
Chapter 11: Roofs

To delete a dormer:
1. Click on the edge of the dormer roof to select it.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Element > Delete.
3. If the dormer has walls, select one of the walls, then Shift+click to select the remaining walls. Use the Delete tool to
delete the selected walls.
4. If a hole is left behind in the main roof, select the main roof and then right-click and select Update Roof. This removes
the hole. Delete the remaining dashed line if present.

Roof Accessories
Roof accessories include elements such as roof vents and solar panels.
When you use the Roof Accessories tool, the element inserts directly on the roof surface and lies at the same angle as the
surface.

Inserting Roof Accessories

Professional only
You can add elements such as solar panels and roof vents to your roof using the Roof Accessories tool. When you insert a
roof accessory on a roof, it inserts directly on the roof surface at the same angle as the roof surface.
To insert a roof accessory:

1. Select Insert > Roofs > Roof Accessories, or click the down arrow next to the Roofs button on the Building tool-
bar and select Roof Accessories.
2. In the catalog, select the roof accessory that you would like to insert.
3. Click on the roof surface on which you want to insert the accessory. If you are in 2D plan view, click on the edge of the
roof surface. If you are in 3D view you can click anywhere on the surface. The element is attached to your cursor.
4. Position the element where you want it, then click to insert it.
5. Right-click and select Finish.

Moving a Roof Accessory

You can move a roof accessory by clicking and dragging it.
To move a roof accessory:
1. Click on the roof accessory to select it.

2. Hover your pointer over the center grip to display the Move cursor.
3. Click and drag the element to move it.
4. Release your mouse button.

Note: If you move a roof accessory, its angle will remain the same regardless of where you move it. You can edit the angle
of a roof accessory by editing the orientation settings in its properties.

Rotating a Roof Accessory

You can rotate a roof accessory clockwise or counterclockwise on the surface where it resides by editing the Z Axis setting
in its properties. Using this method instead of clicking and dragging the element or using the Rotate tool keeps the element
lying at the same angle as the surface regardless of how it is rotated.
To rotate a roof accessory:
1. Click on the roof accessory to select it.
2. Right-click and select Properties.
3. In the Roof Accessories dialog, click in the Z Axis field, then click the up or down arrow next to the angle value to
edit the angle. Clicking the up arrow moves the element in a counterclockwise direction.
4. Click OK. The element is rotated.

- 76 -
 Editing the Angle of a Roof Accessory

Editing the Angle of a Roof Accessory

You edit the angle at which a roof accessory lies by editing the orientation settings in its properties.
To edit the angle of a roof accessory:
1. Click on the roof accessory to select it.
2. Right-click and select Properties.
3. In the Roof Accessories dialog, edit the angle values in the X Axis and Y Axis fields. The X Axis value controls the
front-to-back tilt. The Y Axis value controls the left-to-right tilt.
4. Click OK. The element’s angle is updated.

Deleting a Roof Accessory

You can delete a roof accessory in a couple of easy steps.
To delete a roof accessory:
1. Select the roof accessory.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

- 77 -
Chapter 11: Roofs

- 78 -
Chapter 12: Interiors

The Interiors menu contains just about everything you would ever need to furnish and equip the interior of your home.
You may want to start with the handy Kitchen Builder Wizard to automatically create a kitchen design comprising cabinets
and appliances. Just choose the shape, layout and materials you want, and then click to position and size the configuration
to your exact specifications. If you prefer you can insert cabinets and appliances individually.
The Bathroom Builder Wizard works in much the same way — just step through the screens to select the layout and
components you want, then watch as your bathroom is instantly created.
There are also a number of tools available for laying out utilities and equipment. These include Plumbing, Electrical,
Equipment and HVAC.

Kitchen Builder Wizard

The Kitchen Builder Wizard creates a kitchen for you in a few easy steps. All you have to do is select the general shape and
layout you want. Then, just point and click to insert all of your cupboards and appliances in one shot. It couldn’t be easier!
Once you’ve inserted the kitchen you can move things around and edit individual elements to create a look that’s
customized to your taste and needs.
Get Started

Creating a Kitchen with the Kitchen Builder Wizard

Using the Kitchen Builder Wizard you can quickly create a kitchen layout that includes upper and lower cabinets, a sink,
refrigerator and stove. There are a number of layouts and styles to choose from.
To create a kitchen with the Kitchen Builder Wizard:

1. Select Insert > Design Wizards > Kitchen Builder, or click the down arrow next to the Design Wizards button on
the Building toolbar and select Kitchen Builder.

2. Click Next.

- 79 -
Chapter 12: Interiors

3. Click on the general style of kitchen you want — L-Shape, Galley or U-Shape.
4. Click Next.

5. Select the layout that most closely resembles the layout you want. Remember that you can move and edit things later.
6. Click Next.

- 80 -
 Creating a Kitchen with the Kitchen Builder Wizard

7. Select a general style for your kitchen. The selection you make mainly determines the materials and colors used for the
cupboards and countertops.
8. Click Next.

9. Select the desired rotation for the kitchen layout by clicking the appropriate graphic.
10. Click Next.

- 81 -
Chapter 12: Interiors

11. Click Finish. The kitchen configuration is attached to your cursor.

12. Position the kitchen layout in your kitchen area. It will automatically snap to the walls when you get close to them. Click
to anchor the kitchen elements. Dynamic dimensions are displayed to show you the size of the layout.
13. If you want you can stretch the layout by simply moving your pointer in the direction you want to stretch.
14. Once the dimensions are correct, click to finish the insertion.

15. Click Yes to finish the task. If you click No you can reposition or resize the kitchen.

Creating a Custom Kitchen Wizard Configuration

A Kitchen Builder Wizard configuration determines what types of cabinets and appliances are used in your kitchen. You
are asked to select a configuration for your kitchen when you run the Kitchen Builder Wizard.
You can edit any of the existing configurations that are available in the Kitchen Builder Wizard, or create your own.
Customized configurations are saved automatically and will be available when you run the Kitchen Builder Wizard in the
current project, or any other project.
To access the kitchen configuration library:

1. Select File > Catalogs > Library Manager, or click the down arrow next to the Catalogs button on the Standard
toolbar and select Library Manager.
2. In the Library Manager dialog, select Libraries > Kitchen Configuration.
To add a new configuration to the list:
1. Select Edit > Add Configuration, or right-click in the Kitchen Configurations window and select Add Configuration.
An entry named ‘New Configuration’ is added to the list.
2. Select the new configuration in the list. If you want to rename it, select Edit > Rename Configuration, or right-click
and select Rename Configuration. Then, type the new name and press ENTER.
To edit a kitchen configuration:
1. Select the configuration in the list. The element selections for the configuration are listed in the center pane.
2. In the center pane, select an element type you want to specify a style for (e.g. Refrigerator).

- 82 -
 Launching the Kitchen Builder Wizard Automatically at Startup

3. Click the Select button.

4. In the Catalog Access dialog, select the specific style you want to apply to the selected element type, then click OK.
5. Continue selecting styles for the remaining element types.
To delete a configuration from the list:
1. Select the configuration in the list.
2. Select Edit > Delete Configuration, or right-click and select Delete Configuration, or simply press the Delete key on
your keyboard.

Launching the Kitchen Builder Wizard Automatically at Startup

If you want you can choose to launch the Kitchen Builder Wizard automatically every time you start the program or a new
project, instead of opening a blank drawing.
To launch the Kitchen Builder Wizard automatically at startup:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Program Settings dialog, select General in the left column.
3. In the Startup area, check the Launch wizard when starting new project check box.
4. Select Kitchen Builder from the drop box.
5. Click OK.

Bathroom Builder Wizard

The Bathroom Builder Wizard creates a complete bathroom for you in a few easy steps. All you have to do is select the
general style, layout and rotation for the bathroom, then just point and click to automatically insert all of your cabinets and
fixtures. It couldn’t be easier!
Once the bathroom has been built you can move things around and edit individual elements to create a look that’s
customized to your taste and needs.
Get Started

Creating a Bathroom with the Bathroom Builder Wizard

Using the Bathroom Builder Wizard you can quickly and easily create a bathroom layout that includes a cabinet, sink, toilet,
tub and shower. There are a number of layouts and styles to choose from.
To create a bathroom with the Bathroom Builder Wizard:

1. Select Insert > Design Wizards > Bathroom Builder, or click the down arrow next to the Design Wizards button
on the Building toolbar and select Bathroom Builder.

2. Click Next.

- 83 -
Chapter 12: Interiors

3. Select the image that contains the elements you want to include in your bathroom.
4. Click Next.

5. Click on the layout you want the bathroom elements to have.

6. Click Next.

7. Select a style for your bathroom elements. Each style dictates which cabinet, countertop, sink, toilet, tub and shower
will be used. Remember that you can edit the properties of individual elements later.
8. Click Next.

- 84 -
 Creating a Custom Bathroom Wizard Configuration

9. Click on the desired rotation for your bathroom configuration. This is how the configuration will be oriented when you
are inserting it in your plan.
10. Click Next.

11. Click Finish.

12. Position the bathroom layout in your bathroom area. It will automatically snap to the walls when you get close to them.
Click to anchor the bathroom elements. Dynamic dimensions are displayed to show you the size of the layout.
13. Move your cursor to stretch the layout to the desired size, then click again to finish.

14. If you are satisfied with the bathroom placement, click Yes to finish the task. If you click No you can reposition or resize
the layout.

Creating a Custom Bathroom Wizard Configuration

A Bathroom Builder Wizard configuration determines what types of cabinets and plumbing fixtures are used in your
bathroom. You are asked to select a configuration for your bathroom when you run the Bathroom Builder Wizard.
You can edit any of the existing configurations that are available in the Bathroom Builder Wizard, or create your own.
Customized configurations are saved automatically and will be available when you run the Bathroom Builder Wizard in the
current project, or any other project.

- 85 -
Chapter 12: Interiors

To access the bathroom configuration library:

1. Select File > Catalogs > Library Manager, or click the down arrow next to the Catalogs button on the Standard
toolbar and select Library Manager.
2. In the Library Manager dialog, select Libraries > Bathroom Configuration.
To add a new configuration to the list:
1. Select Edit > Add Configuration, or right-click in the Bathroom Configurations window and select Add Configura-
tion. An entry named ‘New Configuration’ is added to the list.
2. Select the new configuration in the list. If you want to rename it, select Edit > Rename Configuration, or right-click
and select Rename Configuration. Then, type the new name and press ENTER.
To edit a bathroom configuration:
1. Select the configuration in the list. The element selections for the configuration are listed in the center pane.
2. In the center pane, select an element type you want to specify a style for (e.g. Vanity).
3. Click the Select button.
4. In the Catalog Access dialog, select the specific style you want to apply to the selected element type, then click OK.
5. Continue selecting styles for the remaining element types.
To delete a configuration from the list:
1. Select the configuration in the list.
2. Select Edit > Delete Configuration, or right-click and select Delete Configuration, or simply press the Delete key on
your keyboard.

Launching the Bathroom Builder Wizard Automatically at Startup

If you want you can choose to launch the Bathroom Builder Wizard automatically every time you start the program or a new
project, instead of opening a blank drawing.
To launch the Bathroom Builder Wizard automatically at startup:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Program Settings dialog, select General in the left column.
3. In the Startup area, check the Launch wizard when starting new project check box.
4. Select Bathroom Builder from the drop box.
5. Click OK.

Cabinets
Cabinets are essential for storage and can also contribute to the overall look and feel of a room. The catalog contains a huge
selection of cabinet types, styles and sizes, all customizable to suit your taste and needs. Cabinet types include base cabinets,
corner cabinets, upper cabinets, islands, pantry cabinets and bathroom vanities.
You can insert cabinets in any room in your house with just a click of your mouse. Cabinets are designed to snap to walls
and other cabinets, making insertion even easier.

Inserting Cabinets
Cabinets are essential for storage and can also contribute to the overall look and feel of a room. The catalog contains a huge
selection of cabinet types, styles and sizes, all customizable to suit your taste and needs.
Cabinet types include base cabinets, corner cabinets, upper cabinets, islands, pantry cabinets and bathroom vanities.
You can insert cabinets in your design by simply pointing and clicking with your mouse. Cabinets automatically snap to
walls and other elements when you get close to them provided Collision Control is turned on.

- 86 -
 Moving a Cabinet

Note that most cabinets in the catalog have a countertop displayed. If you plan to insert a custom countertop over inserted
cabinets with the Countertop tool, you may first want to turn off the Show Counter property for those cabinets. See Editing
Cabinet Properties on page 87.
To insert a cabinet:

1. Select Insert > Interiors > Cabinets, or click on the Interiors toolbar.
2. In the catalog, select the cabinet you want to insert.
3. Position the cabinet where you want it, then click to insert it.
4. Right-click and select Finish.

Moving a Cabinet
You can move individual or multiple cabinets by clicking and dragging them.
To move a cabinet:
1. Select the cabinet you want to move. If you want to move multiple cabinets, use Shift+click to select the additional cab-
inets.

2. Hover your pointer over the cabinet’s center grip to display the Move cursor.
3. Click and drag to move the cabinet.
4. When the cabinet is where you want it, release your mouse button.

Rotating a Cabinet
You can rotate cabinets by clicking and dragging them.
To rotate a cabinet:
1. Select the cabinet you want to rotate.

2. Hover your pointer over the triangular grip to display the Rotate cursor.
Tip: If the triangular grip is in close proximity to the square grab handle, you may want to zoom in on the cabinet to
distinguish between the two grips.
3. Click and drag to rotate the cabinet.
4. When the cabinet is at the desired rotation, release your mouse button.

Raising or Lowering a Cabinet

You can raise or lower a cabinet using the Elevate tool on the cabinet’s right-click menu.
To edit a cabinet’s elevation:
1. Select the cabinet whose elevation you want to edit.
2. Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Elevate. The value in the Elevate dialog is the cur-
rent elevation of the cabinet.
3. In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired elevation of the bottom of the cabinet above the floor.
4. If you are in a 3D or elevation view and would like to see what the cabinet looks like at the new elevation, click Apply.
The Elevate tool remains active while the change is applied to the cabinet in your model.
5. To apply the change and close the dialog, click OK.

Tip: You can also change a cabinet’s elevation by changing the Distance above current location or terrain variable on the
cabinet’s Behavior property page.

Editing Cabinet Properties

Cabinet properties include cabinet type, size, and leaf style, as well as settings for the counter, shelves, toe space and
hardware.

- 87 -
Chapter 12: Interiors

To edit cabinet properties:

1. Select the cabinet whose properties you want to edit.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. To change the cabinet type, dimensions or 2D representation, select the Basic tab.
To specify the cabinet type, click the Type drop box and select either Base, Upper and Pantry. You can then select a
style for the cabinet. Cabinet styles and size properties will vary depending on the cabinet type selected. Note that there
is a Spacer style for filler cabinets.
Use the graphics as guides when determining the cabinet’s properties. Clicking a dimension marked with an
alphabetical character (a, b, c, etc.) highlights the corresponding dimension in the cabinet graphic, and vice versa. Note
that if you change the dimensions of a cabinet that has a patterned door leaf, the leaf material will remap itself
automatically to match the new cabinet size.
In the 2D Representation area you can specify whether or not the left and right edges of the cabinet are displayed in
2D.
4. To change the cabinet’s leaf style, select the Leaf tab.
5. To select a leaf style for the door, select Door from the Apply to drop box, then make your selections. To select a leaf
style for the drawers, if applicable, select Drawer from the Apply to drop box. Leaf properties vary depending on the
leaf style selected. Use the graphics as guides when setting these properties. If you would like to use a custom door leaf
that has been imported into the Door Leafs library, select the Custom type, then select the desired leaf from the library.
6. To edit the counter, shelving, toe space or hardware details, select the Details tab.
Show Counter. Displays a counter on the cabinet.
Thickness. The thickness of the counter material.
Show Backsplash. Displays a backsplash on the cabinet. The backsplash is a vertical surface designed to protect the
wall behind a countertop.
Thickness. The thickness of the backsplash material.
Height. The distance from the countertop to the top of the backsplash.
Show Nosing. Displays nosing (moulded projection) on the front edge of the counter.
Thickness. The depth of the nosing.
Height. The height of the nosing.
Radius. The radius of the curve.
Show Shelves. Displays shelves inside the cabinet. The shelves would be visible if the cabinet door is glass.
Number of Shelves. The number of shelves you would like to display inside the cabinet.
Show Toe Space. Causes the bottom of the cabinet to recess so you can stand close to the cabinet without contacting
it with your toes.
Toe Depth. The depth of the recess.
Toe Height. The height of the recess.
Show Handle. Displays handles on the cabinet door and drawers, if present.
Handle Style. Choose from Box, Circle or Cylinder. A box style creates a rectangular handle. A circle style creates a
round knob. The cylinder style creates a cylindrical handle.
Distance a. For pantry cabinets, this is the distance from the bottom of the upper cabinet portion to the top of the door
handle.
Distance b. The distance from the bottom of the cabinet to the top of the door handle.
7. When you’re finished editing properties, click OK.

Applying Different Finishes to Cabinets

You can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly apply a different finish to a cabinet, such as a different type of wood, or
another type of material altogether.

- 88 -
 Inserting a Sink

To apply a different finish to a cabinet:

1. Display your model in 3D, and make sure the cabinet is visible in the view.

2. Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click on any tabbed toolbar.

3. In the catalog panel, select the material you want to apply. You may want to select Cabinets from the Filter drop box
to display only cabinet materials.
4. Click on the cabinet component you want to apply the material to. Materials are applied separately to the individual
parts of the cabinet (frame, door, counter, handles, etc.).
5. When you are finished applying materials, right-click and select Finish.

Inserting a Sink
You can insert a kitchen or bathroom sink into a cabinet that you have inserted in your drawing by simply pointing and
clicking. The sink automatically snaps itself into place at the center of the cabinet top.
If you are inserting the sink into a countertop that you have created with the Countertop tool, you can insert the sink at any
position.
To insert a sink into a cabinet:

1. Select Insert > Interiors > Plumbing Fixtures, or click on the Interiors toolbar.
2. In the catalog, select the Sinks category, then select the sink to insert.
3. Position the fixture inside the cabinet, then click to insert it.
4. Right-click and select Finish.

Deleting a Cabinet
You can delete a cabinet in a couple of easy steps.
To delete a cabinet:
1. Select the cabinet.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Appliances
Most home plans usually show the location of appliances in the kitchen and laundry room. Inserting appliances in your
project can obviously enhance the design of a room, and can also help identify where electrical outlets are needed.
The catalog offers an excellent selection of kitchen and laundry appliances, including refrigerators, dishwashers, ovens,
ranges, washers, dryers — even toasters. And of course, just like everything else, you can customize appliances to create the
exact look you want.
Inserting appliances is easy — just point and click. Most major appliances are set to snap to walls and other elements when
you get close to them.

Inserting Appliances
You can insert a wide variety of kitchen and laundry appliances in your design by simply pointing and clicking with your
mouse. Appliances automatically snap to walls and other elements when you get close to them provided Collision Control
is turned on.
To insert an appliance:

1. Select Insert > Interiors > Appliances, or click on the Interiors toolbar.
2. In the catalog, select the appliance you want to insert.
3. Position the appliance where you want it, then click to insert it.
4. Right-click and select Finish.

- 89 -
Chapter 12: Interiors

Note: If you are inserting a built-in oven, just position it where you want it in the wall and it will snap into place correctly
with only the oven door and controls protruding from the wall.

Moving Appliances
You can move individual appliances by clicking and dragging them.
To move an appliance:
1. Select the appliance you want to move.

2. Hover your pointer over the appliance’s center grip to display the Move cursor.
3. Click and drag to move the appliance.
4. When the appliance is where you want it, release your mouse button.

Rotating Appliances
You can rotate appliances by clicking and dragging them.
To rotate an appliance:
1. Select the appliance you want to rotate.

2. Hover your pointer over the triangular grip to display the Rotate cursor.
Tip: If the triangular grip is in close proximity to the square grab handle, you may want to zoom in on the appliance to
distinguish between the two grips.
3. Click and drag to rotate the appliance.
4. When the appliance is at the desired rotation, release your mouse button.

Raising or Lowering Appliances

You can raise or lower an appliance using the Elevate tool on the element’s right-click menu. For example, you might want
to place a microwave on the kitchen counter.
To raise or lower an appliance:
1. Select the appliance whose elevation you want to edit.
2. Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Elevate. The value shown in the Elevate dialog is
the current elevation of the appliance.
3. In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired elevation of the bottom of the appliance above the floor.
4. If you are in a 3D or elevation view and would like to see what the appliance looks like at the new elevation, click Apply.
The Elevate tool remains active while the change is applied to the appliance in your model.
5. To apply the change and close the dialog, click OK.

Tip: You can also change an appliance’s elevation by changing the Distance above current location or terrain variable on
the appliance’s Behavior property page.

Editing Appliance Size Properties

You can edit the height, width and depth of most appliances. Some appliances have additional properties that define their
size and style.
To edit appliance properties:
1. Select the appliance whose properties you want to edit.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. To change the size or style of the appliance, select the Basic tab. Appliance styles and size properties will vary depend-
ing on the appliance. Use the graphics as guides when determining the appliance’s properties. Clicking a dimension
marked with an alphabetical character (a, b, c, etc.) highlights the corresponding dimension in the appliance graphic,
and vice versa.
4. Once you’ve specified the properties, click OK.

- 90 -
 Applying Colors and Materials to Appliances

Applying Colors and Materials to Appliances

You can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly change the color or finish of an appliance.
To apply a color or finish to an appliance:
1. Display your model in 3D, and make sure the appliance is visible in the view.

2. Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click on any tabbed toolbar.

3. In the catalog panel, select the color or finish you want to apply.
4. Click on the appliance component you want to apply the material to. Materials are applied separately to the individual
parts of the appliance. For example, you can select a different color just for a knob or handle.
5. When you are finished applying materials, right-click and select Finish.

Deleting an Appliance
You can delete an appliance in a couple of easy steps.
To delete an appliance:
1. Select the appliance.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Furniture, Electronics & Accessories

Once you’ve got your cabinets and appliances in place, you can start with furnishing and decorating your home. The catalog
contains so many different types of furniture, electronics and decorative accessories, the possibilities are endless. And with
easy, point-and-click insertion, you can play around with different design ideas and quickly decorate every room of your
home, just the way you want it.

Inserting Interior Furniture

The catalog contains a variety of furnishings for every room in your home — everything from beds to CD stands.
Furnishings automatically snap to walls and other elements when you get close to them provided Collision Control is turned
on.
To insert furniture:

1. Select Insert > Interiors > Interior Furniture, or click on the Interiors toolbar.
2. In the catalog, select the element you want to insert.
3. Position the element where you want it, then click to insert it.
4. Right-click and select Finish.

Inserting Electronics
Electronics include televisions, computers, clocks and telephones.
To insert electronics:

1. Select Insert > Interiors > Electronics, or click on the Interiors toolbar.
2. In the catalog, select the element you want to insert.
3. Position the element where you want it, then click to insert it.
4. Right-click and select Finish.

Inserting Interior Accessories

Accessories are those small, personal touches that really pull a room together. They are things like curtains, blinds, towel
racks, shower curtains, medicine cabinets, plates, bowls, cups, mirrors and pictures.

- 91 -
Chapter 12: Interiors

To insert accessories:

1. Select Insert > Interiors > Interior Accessories, or click on the Interiors toolbar.
2. In the catalog, select the element you want to insert.
3. Position the element where you want it, then click to insert it.
4. Right-click and select Finish.

Moving Furnishing Elements

You can move furniture, electronics and accessories by clicking and dragging them.
To move an element:
1. Select the element you want to move.

2. Hover your pointer over the element’s center grip to display the Move cursor.
3. Click and drag to move the element.
4. When the element is where you want it, release your mouse button.

Rotating Furnishing Elements

You can rotate furniture, electronics and accessories by clicking and dragging them.
To rotate an element:
1. Select the element you want to rotate.

2. Hover your pointer over the triangular grip to display the Rotate cursor.
Tip: If the triangular grip is in close proximity to the square grab handle, you may want to zoom in on the element to
distinguish between the two grips.
3. Click and drag to rotate the element.
4. When the element is at the desired rotation, release your mouse button.

Raising or Lowering Furnishing Elements

You can raise or lower furniture, electronics and accessories using the Elevate tool on the element’s right-click menu. For
example, you might want to adjust the height of a picture on the wall.
To edit the elevation of a furnishing element:
1. Select the element whose elevation you want to edit.
2. Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Elevate. The value shown in the Elevate dialog is
the current elevation of the element.
3. In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired elevation of the bottom of the element above the floor.
4. If you are in a 3D or elevation view and would like to see what the element looks like at the new elevation, click Apply.
The Elevate tool remains active while the change is applied to the element in your model.
5. To apply the change and close the dialog, click OK.

Tip: You can also change a furnishing element’s elevation by changing the Distance above current location or terrain
variable on the element’s Behavior property page.

Editing the Size of Furnishing Elements

You can edit the height, width and depth of most furnishing elements. Some elements have additional properties that define
their size and style.
To edit the size of furnishing elements:
1. Select the element whose properties you want to edit.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

- 92 -
 Applying Different Colors, Fabrics and Finishes to Furnishing Elements

3. To change the dimensions of the element, select the Basic tab. Size properties will vary depending on the element.
4. Once you’ve specified the properties, click OK.

Applying Different Colors, Fabrics and Finishes to Furnishing Elements

You can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly apply a color, fabric or finish to any furnishing element.
To apply a material to a furnishing element:
1. Display your model in 3D, and make sure the furnishing element is visible in the view.

2. Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click on any tabbed toolbar.

3. In the catalog panel, select the color or material you want to apply. You may want to select Furniture from the Filter
drop box to display only furniture materials.
4. Click on the component you want to apply the material to. Materials are applied separately to the individual parts of
the element. For example, you can apply a specific fabric to the bedspread on a bed.
5. When you are finished applying materials, right-click and select Finish.

Deleting Furnishing Elements

You can delete furniture, electronics or accessories in a couple of easy steps.
To delete a furnishing element:
1. Select the element.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Equipment
Virtual Architect home design software offers a variety of equipment elements that can make your home more functional
and enjoyable, such as exercise equipment, satellite dishes, and garbage disposal equipment. All can be inserted with a
simple mouse click.

Inserting Equipment
The catalog contains a wide range of functional equipment, including exercise equipment, central vac units, utility boxes
and meters, satellite dishes, and garbage disposal units.
To insert equipment:

1. Select Insert > Interiors > Equipment, or click on the Interiors toolbar.
2. In the catalog, select the element you want to insert.
3. Position the element where you want it, then click to insert it.
4. Right-click and select Finish.

Moving Equipment
You can move equipment by clicking and dragging it.
To move equipment:
1. Select the element you want to move.

2. Hover your pointer over the element’s center grip to display the Move cursor.
3. Click and drag to move the element.
4. When the element is where you want it, release your mouse button.

Rotating Equipment
You can rotate equipment by clicking and dragging it while in rotation mode.

- 93 -
Chapter 12: Interiors

To rotate an element:
1. Select the element you want to rotate.

2. Hover your pointer over the triangular grip to display the Rotate cursor.
3. Click and drag to rotate the element.
4. When the element is at the desired rotation, release your mouse button.

Raising or Lowering Equipment

You can edit the elevation of an element to suit your needs.
To edit the elevation of an element:
1. Select the element whose elevation you want to edit.
2. Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Elevate. The value shown in the Elevate dialog is
the current elevation of the element.
3. In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired elevation of the bottom of the element above the floor.
4. If you are in a 3D or elevation view and would like to see what the element looks like at the new elevation, click Apply.
The Elevate tool remains active while the change is applied to the element in your model.
5. To apply the change and close the dialog, click OK.

Tip: You can also change an equipment element’s elevation by changing the Distance above current location or terrain
variable on the element’s Behavior property page.

Editing the Size of Equipment

You can edit the height, width and depth of most equipment elements.
To edit the size of equipment elements:
1. Select the element whose properties you want to edit.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. To change the dimensions of the element, select the Basic tab.
4. Once you’ve specified the properties, click OK.

Applying Different Colors or Materials to Equipment

You can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly apply a different color or finish to any element.
To apply a material to an element:
1. Display your model in 3D, and make sure the element is visible in the view.

2. Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click on any tabbed toolbar.

3. In the catalog panel, select the color or material you want to apply.
4. Click on the component you want to apply the material to. Materials are applied separately to the individual parts of
the element.
5. When you are finished applying materials, right-click and select Finish.

Deleting Equipment
You can delete an equipment element in a couple of easy steps.
To delete an element:
1. Select the element.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

- 94 -
 Interior Lighting

Interior Lighting
Interior lighting can drastically change the look and atmosphere of a room. Light fixtures also play an important part when
you create interior 3D RealView™ renderings.
The catalog provides an excellent selection of ceiling lights, wall lights, track lights, recessed lights and lamps for you to
insert. You can even turn them on and off! Lights are inserted at a logical height in your plan depending on their type,
making accurate placement easy. Also, ceiling lights snap to ceilings, and wall lights snap to walls. Just point and click!
If working in Rendered or Rendered Outline display mode, real-time lighting effects are displayed as you insert light
fixtures in your design, allowing you to see how much light will be produced.

Inserting Interior Lighting

The catalog offers an excellent selection of lighting fixtures for the interior of your home. Interior light fixtures include
ceiling lights, wall lights, track lighting, recessed lights, and lamps.
Each lighting fixture has a light source in its property definition, such as an incandescent light bulb. Lights are particularly
important if you plan to create a 3D RealView™ of your model, since the program uses light to calculate and create the
rendered view.
With the exception of lamps, light fixtures are set to snap to either ceilings or walls depending on what kind of fixture they
are.
To insert a light fixture:

1. Select Insert > Interiors > Interior Lighting, or click on the Interiors toolbar.
2. In the catalog, select the light fixture you want to insert.
3. Position the light where you want it, then click to insert it.
4. Right-click and select Finish.

Tip: If you switch to Rendered or Rendered Outline display mode, you can see instant lighting effects as you position and
insert light fixtures.

Note: If you want to insert exterior light fixtures, use the Exterior Lighting tool.

Changing the Way a Light Snaps Upon Insertion

By default, ceiling lights are set to snap to ceilings, and wall lights are set to snap to walls. Lamps have no snap setting so
that you can place them anywhere in a room. You can change a light fixture’s snap setting on the fixture’s Behavior property
page. Note that this applies to interior light fixtures only.
To change the way a light snaps on insertion:
1. In the catalog, select the light fixture whose snap setting you want to change.
2. Right-click and select Edit Element.
3. In properties dialog, select the Behavior tab.
4. From the Align Light to drop box, select either Ceiling, Wall or None.
6. Click OK in the Lights dialog.

Moving a Light Fixture

You can move light fixtures by clicking and dragging them.
To move a light fixture:
1. Select the light fixture you want to move.

2. Hover your pointer over the fixture’s center grip to display the Move cursor.
3. Click and drag to move the light fixture.
4. When the light fixture is where you want it, release your mouse button.

- 95 -
Chapter 12: Interiors

Rotating a Light Fixture

You can rotate light fixtures by clicking and dragging them.
To rotate a light fixture:
1. Select the light fixture you want to rotate.

2. Hover your pointer over the triangular grip to display the Rotate cursor.
Tip: If the triangular grip is in close proximity to the square grab handle, you may want to zoom in on the fixture to
distinguish between the two grips.
3. Click and drag to rotate the light fixture.
4. When the light fixture is at the desired rotation, release your mouse button.

Raising or Lowering a Light Fixture

You can raise or lower a light fixture using the Elevate tool on the fixture’s right-click menu.
To raise or lower a light fixture:
1. Select the fixture whose elevation you want to edit.
2. Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Elevate. The value shown in the Elevate dialog is
the current elevation of the light fixture.
3. In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired elevation of the fixture above the floor (or the terrain if it is an outdoor light
fixture).
4. If you are in a 3D or elevation view and would like to see what the light fixture looks like at the new elevation, click
Apply. The Elevate tool remains active while the change is applied to the fixture in your model.
5. To apply the change and close the dialog, click OK.

Tip: You can also change a light fixture’s elevation by changing the Distance above current location or terrain variable
on the fixture’s Behavior property page.

Editing the Size of a Light Fixture

You can edit the dimensions of a light fixture on its Basic property page.
To edit the size of a light fixture:
1. Select the light fixture whose properties you want to edit.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. Select the Basic tab. Size properties will vary depending on the type of fixture. Use the diagram as a guide when deter-
mining the fixture’s properties. Clicking a dimension marked with an alphabetical character (a, b, c, etc.) highlights the
corresponding dimension in the light fixture diagram, and vice versa.
4. Click OK.

Editing a Light Fixture’s Light Source

A light source is usually a type of light bulb. You can edit a light fixture’s light source to achieve a different lighting effect.
To edit a light fixture’s light source:
1. Select the light fixture whose properties you want to edit.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. Select the Lights tab.
4. To replace the currently selected light source with another type, click Edit, then select a light source from the Light
Sources dialog.
5. To add a light source to the fixture, click Add, then select a light source from the Light Sources dialog.
6. To delete a light source from the light fixture, click Delete.

- 96 -
 Turning a Light On or Off

7. To edit the position of the light source in relation to the light fixture, specify the X, Y and Z coordinates in the Light
Position area.
Coordinates are measured from the bottom center of the fixture. The small red box in the preview window indicates
the current position of the light source. Changing the X value moves the light source left or right. Selecting Middle
positions the light in the center of the fixture, and selecting Minimum or Maximum positions it on the left or right side.
If you select Custom you can enter a specific value in the adjacent edit box which is relative to the center position. For
example, entering -3 moves the light source 3” left from the center. Changing the Y value moves the light source
forward or backward. Selecting Minimum brings the light source all the way forward, and selecting Maximum moves
it to the back of the fixture. Changing the Z value moves the light source up or down. Selecting Minimum positions the
light source at the bottom of the fixture, while selecting Maximum positions it at the top of the fixture.
8. To edit the orientation of the light source, edit the Tilt up/down and Tilt left/right values. You may want to do this if your
light fixture is angled a certain way. For example, if you have adjustable track lighting, and each fixture is angled at 45
degrees, you will probably want to change the tilt of the light source to 45 degrees as well, so that the light shines at a
45-degree angle instead of straight down.
Tilt up/down. The angle of the light beam relative to the floor. A 0-degree tilt means that the light shines straight down.
Tilt left/right. The rotation of the light source left or right.
9. Once you’ve specified the properties, click OK.

Turning a Light On or Off

By default, lights are on when you insert them. You can virtually turn lights on and off in one of two ways:
Turn the light on/off directly:
1. Select the light fixture in your drawing.
2. Right-click and select Light On or Light Off.
Edit the light’s properties:
1. Select the light fixture.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. Select the Lights tab.
4. To turn the light on or off, click the eye icon next to the light source name.
Light is turned on

Light is turned off

5. Click OK.

Changing the Way a Light Fixture Looks

You can use the Materials Paintbrush to apply different colors or materials to different parts of a light fixture. For example,
you may want to change the color of a lamp shade.
To change the look of a light fixture:
1. Display your model in 3D, and make sure the light fixture is visible in the view.

2. Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click on any tabbed toolbar.

3. In the catalog panel, select the material you want to apply.
4. Click on the component you want to apply the material to. Materials are applied separately to the individual parts of
the light fixture.
5. When you are finished applying materials, right-click and select Finish.

Deleting a Light Fixture

You can delete a light fixture in a couple of easy steps.

- 97 -
Chapter 12: Interiors

To delete a light fixture:

1. Select the fixture.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Electrical
It is so easy to insert electrical elements such as outlets, switches, thermostats and smoke detectors in your plan — just point
and click. Electrical elements automatically snap to walls and are inserted at a logical height depending on their type,
making it easy to place them accurately.
Once you’ve inserted electrical elements you may want to draw wiring in your 2D plan. All it takes is a few clicks of the
mouse.

Electrical Elements
Electrical elements include items such as outlets, switches, thermostats and smoke detectors. Electrical elements
automatically snap to walls and are inserted at a logical height depending on their type, making it easy to place them
accurately.

Inserting Electrical Elements

You can insert electrical elements such as outlets, light switches, thermostats and smoke detectors with a single mouse click.
The backs of these elements automatically snap to walls and are inserted at a logical height on the wall, making accurate
placement effortless. You can move, raise and lower these elements after you have inserted them.
To insert electrical elements:

1. Select Insert > Interiors > Electrical > Electrical Elements, or click on the Interiors toolbar.
2. In the catalog, select the element you want to insert.
3. Position the element where you want it, then click to insert it.
4. Right-click and select Finish.

Note: You can insert outlets throughout a room automatically using the Auto Place Outlets tool.

Inserting Outlets Throughout a Room Automatically

You can use the Auto Place Outlets feature to have automatically insert outlets throughout selected rooms in your model.
You can move, raise and lower outlets after they have been inserted.
To insert outlets automatically:

1. Select Insert > Interiors > Electrical > Auto Place Outlets, or click on the Interiors toolbar.
2. If you are using the Auto Place Outlets tool for the fist time, you will be prompted to specify the following settings:
Outlet Element. Click Select to choose the outlet that you would like to be inserted.
Min. wall length. The minimum length that a wall must be to eligible for an outlet.
Max. distance from outlet. The maximum distance between one outlet and the next.
Max. distance from opening. The maximum distance that an outlet can be from a wall opening.
The values you specify will be saved as the default values going forward. You can change the default values at any time
by selecting Settings > Document Settings.
3. Position your cursor inside the room in which you want to place outlets (it will highlight).
4. Click inside the room. Outlets are inserted throughout the room according to the settings you specified.

Note: You can insert outlets individually using the Electrical Elements tool.

Moving an Electrical Element

You can move outlets, switches, thermostats and smoke detectors in plan view by simply clicking and dragging them.

- 98 -
 Raising or Lowering an Electrical Element

To move an element:
1. Select the element you want to move.

2. Hover your pointer over the element’s center grip to display the Move cursor.
3. Click and drag to move the element.
4. When the element is where you want it, release your mouse button.

Raising or Lowering an Electrical Element

You can raise or lower an outlet, switch, thermostat or smoke detector using the Elevate tool.
To raise or lower an electrical element:
1. Select the element whose elevation you want to edit.
2. Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Elevate. The value shown in the Elevate dialog is
the current elevation of the element.
3. In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired elevation of the bottom of the element above the floor.
4. If you are in a 3D or elevation view and would like to see what the element looks like at the new elevation, click Apply.
The Elevate tool remains active while the change is applied to the element in your model.
5. To apply the change and close the dialog, click OK.

Tip: You can also change an element’s elevation by changing the Distance above current location or terrain variable on
the element’s Behavior property page.

Editing the Size of an Electrical Element

You can edit the height, width and depth of most electrical elements. Some elements have additional dimensions for
individual components in the element.
To edit the size of an electrical element:
1. Select the element whose size you want to edit.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. Edit the properties as desired.
4. Click OK.

Different Color or Material to an Electrical Element

You can use the Materials Paintbrush to apply a different color or material to an electrical element.
To apply a color or material to an electrical element:
1. Display your model in 3D, and make sure the electrical element is visible in the view.

2. Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click on any tabbed toolbar.

3. In the catalog panel, select the color or material you want to apply.
4. Click on the electrical element. The color or material is applied immediately.
5. Right-click and select Finish.

Deleting an Electrical Element

You can delete an outlet, switch, thermostat or smoke detector in a couple of easy steps.
To delete an electrical element:
1. Select the element.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

- 99 -
Chapter 12: Interiors

Electrical Wiring
Once you’ve inserted electrical elements such as outlets and switches, you may want to add wiring to your 2D plan. Just
point and click to draw wiring lines.

Inserting Electrical Wiring

Professional only
Once you’ve inserted electrical elements, you can use the Wiring tool to indicate the location of electrical wiring in your 2D
plan. By default, wiring lines have arched segments and use a dashed linestyle. You can stretch and reshape individual
segments after you’ve inserted the line. You can also edit the linestyle. Wiring is only visible in 2D plan view.
To add electrical wiring:

1. Select Insert > Interiors > Electrical > Wiring, or click the down arrow next to the Electrical button on the Interiors
toolbar and select Wiring.
2. Select a start point for the wiring line.
3. Select the next point for the wiring line. An arched line segment is created between the two points. Continue selecting
points to add more segments.

4. Right-click and select Finish.

Note: You can change the line style of individual wires if you want. You can also mark your wiring lines with text.

Stretching and Reshaping Wiring

You can stretch individual segments in a wiring line by clicking and dragging their grips. Stretching wiring segments can
change their length or shape.
To stretch a wiring segment:
1. Select the segment you want to stretch. Grips are displayed along the segment.
2. Hover your pointer over the grip that you want to grab and stretch.
3. Click and drag to stretch the line, then release your mouse button.

Editing the Line Style of Wiring

By default, electrical wiring is displayed using the Electrical Power Distribution line style, which is a brown, dashed line.
You can select a different line style for selected wiring segments if you want. For example, you may want to select the
Telephone line style for your telephone lines.
To edit the line style of wiring:
1. Select one of the line segments you want to change. Use Shift+click to select the remaining segments in the line.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Line Styles dialog, select the line style you want to use.
4. Click OK. The line style is updated in your drawing.

Deleting Wiring
You can delete individual wiring segments or an entire wire in a couple of easy steps.
To delete wiring:
1. Select the wiring segment you want to delete. To select an entire wire, drag a selection window around it.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

- 100 -
 Plumbing

Plumbing
The catalog offers a complete selection of sinks, faucets, tubs, showers, toilets and bidets to help you properly equip your
home. Plumbing fixtures are inserted with a single mouse click and will automatically snap to walls if Collision Control is
turned on. You can control which edge of a fixture snaps to the wall, as well as edit the fixture’s size, style and elevation.

Inserting Plumbing Fixtures

Placing plumbing fixtures in your plan is easy — just select what you want to insert, then point and click. With Collision
Control turned on, fixtures will automatically snap to walls when you get close to them. Also, fixtures will insert at a logical
height. For example, a toilet will insert on the floor, while a sink may insert 3’ off the floor. You can edit a fixture’s size and
elevation, as well as move and rotate it.
To insert plumbing fixtures:

1. Select Insert > Interiors > Plumbing Fixtures, or click on the Interiors toolbar.
2. In the catalog, select the fixture you want to insert.
3. Position the fixture where you want it, then click to insert it.
4. Right-click and select Finish.

Note: Certain sinks can only be inserted into a cabinet. If you are inserting such a sink, the cabinet must be large enough to
house the sink.

Moving Plumbing Fixtures

You can move plumbing fixtures by clicking and dragging them.
To move a plumbing fixture:
1. Select the plumbing fixture you want to move.

2. Hover your pointer over the fixture’s center grip to display the Move cursor.
3. Click and drag to move the fixture.
4. When the fixture is where you want it, release your mouse button.

Rotating Plumbing Fixtures

You can rotate plumbing fixtures by clicking and dragging them.
To rotate a plumbing fixture:
1. Select the fixture you want to rotate.

2. Hover your pointer over the triangular grip to display the Rotate cursor.
Tip: If the triangular grip is in close proximity to the square grab handle, you may want to zoom in on the element to
distinguish between the two grips.
3. Click and drag to rotate the fixture.
4. When the fixture is at the desired rotation, release your mouse button.

Raising or Lowering Plumbing Fixtures

You can raise or lower a plumbing fixture using the Elevate tool on the fixture’s right-click menu.
To edit a plumbing fixture’s elevation:
1. Select the fixture whose elevation you want to edit.
2. Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Elevate. The value shown in the Elevate dialog is
the current elevation of the element.
3. In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired elevation of the bottom of the fixture above the floor.
4. If you are in a 3D or elevation view and would like to see what the element looks like at the new elevation, click Apply.
The Elevate tool remains active while the change is applied to the element in your model.

- 101 -
Chapter 12: Interiors

5. To apply the change and close the dialog, click OK.

Tip: You can also change a plumbing fixture’s elevation by changing the Distance above current location or terrain
variable on the fixture’s Behavior property page.

Editing the Size of a Plumbing Fixture

You can edit the height, width and depth of a plumbing fixture.
To edit the properties of a plumbing fixture:
1. Select the plumbing fixture whose properties you want to edit.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. Edit the properties as desired.
4. Click OK.

Applying a Different Color or Finish to a Plumbing Fixture

You can use the Materials Paintbrush to apply different colors or finishes to different parts of a plumbing fixture.
To apply a color or finish to a plumbing fixture:
1. Display your model in 3D, and make sure the fixture is visible in the view.

2. Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click on any tabbed toolbar.

3. In the catalog panel, select the color or finish you want to apply.
4. Click on the component you want to apply the material to. Materials are applied separately to the individual parts of
the plumbing fixture. For example, you can select a different color just for a tap or handle.
5. When you are finished applying materials, right-click and select Finish.

Deleting Plumbing Fixtures

You can delete a light fixture in a couple of easy steps.
To delete a light fixture:
1. Select the fixture.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

HVAC
The correct placement of heating and ventilation elements is an important part of the home design process. Laying out
HVAC elements is quick and easy - just point and click. The catalog contains just about anything you’d need — furnaces,
fireplaces, wood stoves, chimneys, central air units, water heaters, floor registers and cold air returns. Of course, just like
anything else, you can move, rotate and edit these elements if you change your mind.

Inserting HVAC Elements

You can insert HVAC elements such as fireplaces, furnaces, water heaters, central air units, floor registers and vents with a
click of your mouse.
To insert an HVAC element:

1. Select Insert > Interiors > HVAC Elements, or click on the Interiors toolbar.
2. In the catalog, select the element that you want to insert.
3. Position the element where you want it, then click to insert it.
4. Right-click and select Finish.

Moving HVAC Elements

You can move HVAC elements by clicking and dragging them.

- 102 -
 Rotating HVAC Elements

To move an HVAC element:

1. Select the HVAC element you want to move.

2. Hover your pointer over the element’s center grip to display the Move cursor.
3. Click and drag to move the element.
4. When the element is where you want it, release your mouse button.

Rotating HVAC Elements

You can rotate HVAC elements by clicking and dragging them.
To rotate an HVAC element:
1. Select the element you want to rotate.

2. Hover your pointer over the triangular grip to display the Rotate cursor.
Tip: If the triangular grip is in close proximity to the square grab handle, you may want to zoom in on the element to
distinguish between the two grips.
3. Click and drag to rotate the element.
4. When the element is at the desired rotation, release your mouse button.

Raising or Lowering HVAC Elements

You can raise or lower an HVAC element using the Elevate tool on the element’s right-click menu.
To edit an HVAC element’s elevation:
1. Select the element whose elevation you want to edit.
2. Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Elevate. The value shown in the Elevate dialog is
the current elevation of the element.
3. In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired elevation of the bottom of the element above the floor.
4. If you are in a 3D or elevation view and would like to see what the element looks like at the new elevation, click Apply.
The Elevate tool remains active while the change is applied to the element in your model.
5. To apply the change and close the dialog, click OK.

Tip: You can also change an HVAC element’s elevation by changing the Distance above current location or terrain
variable on the element’s Behavior property page.

Editing the Size of HVAC Elements

You can edit the dimensions of an HVAC element. The more complex an element is, the more variables it will have. A
chimney, for example, has separate variables for the base, cap and flue, so you can create the exact look and size you want.
To edit the size of an HVAC element:
1. Select the HVAC element whose properties you want to edit.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. Edit the properties as desired.
4. Click OK.

Deleting HVAC Elements

You can delete an HVAC element in a couple of easy steps.
To delete an HVAC element:
1. Select the element.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

- 103 -
Chapter 12: Interiors

- 104 -
Chapter 13: Framing

Walls, floors, ceilings, roofs and surfaces have framing configurations assigned to them in their properties. You can choose
which framing members you would like to use and edit their spacing by editing an element’s framing properties.
Walls, floors, ceilings and roofs have framing configurations assigned to them in their properties. You can choose which
framing members you would like to use and edit their spacing by editing an element’s framing properties.
Each building location in your project has a set of Framing Options assigned to it. These options determine how walls are
framed on each location. They include a wall opening span table, intersection reference table, and an infill configuration.
By default, framing is not visible, but you can use the Display Framing tool to view it instantly.

Framing Display
By default, framing is not visible, but you can use the Display Framing tool to view it instantly. You can then switch back to
a non-framed view by selecting the Display All But Framing tool.
When framing is displayed, individual framing members in floors, ceilings and roofs cannot be selected for editing.
However, wall framing can be edited by editing a wall’s framing properties, as well as editing the Framing Options in the
Building Locations dialog.

Displaying Framing
Walls, floors, ceilings and roofs have a framing configuration assigned to them in their properties. You can instantly view
just your house frame using the Display Framing tool, then return to a regular view of your model at any time.

To display framing:

1. Select View > Framing > Display Framingor click on the View Control toolbar.
To return to a non-framed view:

1. Select View > Framing > Display All But Framing or click the down arrow next to on the View Control toolbar
and select Display All But Framing.

Note: You can also use the View Filter to display framing. However, the framing will not be displayed on its own unless
you turn everything else off.

Note: Framing cannot be selected for editing in framing display mode. It is available for viewing purposes only. You can,
however, change the framing options for walls, floors, ceilings and roofs.

Note: When in framing display mode, any members inserted with the Members tool are not visible. Floor, ceiling and roof
framing that has been converted to members is not visible in this mode.

- 105 -
Chapter 13: Framing

Returning to a Non-Framed View

If you have used the Display Framing tool to view your house frame, you can instantly return to a non-framed view using
the Display All But Framing tool.
To return to a non-framed view:

1. Select View > Framing > Display All But Framing or click the down arrow next to the Display Framing button on
the View Control toolbar and select Display All But Framing.

Wall Framing
Every building location in your project has a number of framing options assigned to it that determine how walls on that
location will be framed. These options include:
• Span table (determines how openings should be framed)
• Infill (stud/top plate/bottom plate configuration)
• Intersection lookup table (determines how intersections are framed)
You can select the framing member that you want to use for your walls. You can also specify whether or not selected walls
are framed as load-bearing walls, and customize the framing settings for each building location in your project.
The catalog ships with pre-defined libraries of head/sill/jamb tables, wall opening span tables, and infill configurations.

Selecting a Framing Member for Walls

Every wall has a setting in its properties that determines what type of member (e.g. 2 x 4) will be used to frame the wall. In
other words, this is the member that will be used for the studs, top plate and bottom plate as well as the members used to
frame openings (except the header).
You can edit the member selection for individual walls in your model, or for walls in the catalog.
To edit the framing options for an individual wall or wall type:
1. To edit a wall in your drawing, double-click it, or select the wall then right-click and select Properties, or select Edit >
Modify Elements > Properties.
To edit a wall in the catalog, select the wall in the catalog, then right-click and select Edit Element.
2. In the Walls dialog, click the Framing member button.
3. Select the desired member from the Catalog Access dialog.
4. Click OK.

Note: By default, walls are framed using the framing options specified in your building location settings (see page 106).
These options include an infill configuration that determines settings for the studs, top plate, bottom plate, and very top
plate. By default, each of these components is set to use a framing member from the Member Library rather than the framing
member selected in each wall’s properties.

Note: Stud spacing is determined by the infill configuration assigned to the building location on which a wall resides.

Defining Wall Framing Options for Building Locations

Each location in the Building Locations dialog has a set of framing options that determine how walls, openings and
intersections on that location will be framed.
Location framing options include a span table selection, an infill configuration, and intersection reference table.
The framing options you choose will determine what you see when framing is displayed (with the Display Framing tool),
as well as the members reported in your Project Estimate. For example, if a wall has an infill configuration with studs 12"
apart, the wall will have more studs than if it were to have an infill configuration with studs 16" apart.
To define framing options for a building location:

1. Select Settings > Building Locations, or click on the View Control toolbar.
2. In the Building Locations dialog, click in the location’s Framing Options field.

- 106 -
 Floor Framing

3. Make the desired selections in the Location Framing Options dialog. The options are described below.
Span table. The wall span table that determines the head/sill/jamb configuration to be used for openings of different
sizes in walls.
Intersection lookup table. The reference table containing rules for framing different types of intersections.
Infill configuration. The precise layout of studs, top plate, very top plate and bottom plate that fill the volume of the
wall.
4. Click OK.

Floor Framing
Every floor that was inserted with a Floor tool has a floor framing configuration assigned to it in its properties. These settings
determine what the floor frame looks like when you display framing, as well as what members and quantities are reported
in your project estimate. You can select the type of members you want to use for the joists, rim joists, and opening headers
in a floor frame, and choose whether or not you want each component to be displayed and quantified. You can also control
the joist spacing and direction, and specify a Phase and Usage for each component.
You can view floor framing by displaying your model in framed view.
If you have inserted a Structural Floor, you can edit the individual members in the floor system if needed, and even add or
remove members. You can control the visibility of structural floor framing using the View Filter.

Specifying Floor Framing Options

Floors have a framing configuration assigned to them which you see when you display framing. You can specify a custom
framing configuration if you want. There are settings for the joist, rim joist, and opening header, and you can control the
joist spacing and direction.
Framing can be displayed using the Display Framing tool, and is included in the project estimate. Settings in the framing
configuration let you specify whether or not you want each component in the floor frame to be displayed and quantified,
providing the ultimate in versatility and control. You can also assign a Phase and Usage to each member in the configuration
so that they are sorted appropriately in the project estimate.
To specify framing options for floors:
1. In a non-framed view, select the floor. If the floor was created automatically, you need to select it in 3D view. You can
also specify framing members for floors in the catalog.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. On the Basic property page, click the Specify Framing button. The Floor Framing dialog appears.

4. To select a joist member, click on the Member field in the Joist area, then click the browse button in that field to
display the member catalog. Select the desired member in the Catalog Access dialog, then click OK.
5. To define the joist spacing, edit the value in the a. Spacing field.

- 107 -
Chapter 13: Framing

6. To define the joist direction, edit the angle in the Direction field.

7. To select a rim joist member, click on the Member field in the Rim Joist area, then click the browse button in that
field to display the member catalog. Select the desired member in the Catalog Access dialog, then click OK.
8. To select an opening header member, click on the Member field in the Opening Header area, then click the browse button

in that field to display the member catalog. Select the desired member in the Catalog Access dialog, then click OK.
9. By default, the joists, rim joists and opening headers are set to be displayed in the framing and quantified in the project
estimate. If you do not want one of those components to be displayed and quantified, click in the Include in Framing
field in that component’s settings and select No.
10. You can assign a unique Usage and Phase to the joist, rim joist and opening header members. Usages help to identify
what materials are used for, or could be used for on the construction site. Phase refers to the construction phase in
which a material is used. Phase and Usage can be used as sort keys in your report template. Sort keys determine how
materials are sorted in your project estimate.

To assign a Usage to a member, click in the member’s Usage field and then click the browse button in that field
and make a selection from the Usages library. To assign a Phase to a member, click in the member’s Phase field and

then click the browse button in that field and make selection from the Phase library.
11. Click OK.

Ceiling Framing
Every ceiling surface in your model has a ceiling framing configuration assigned to it in its properties. These settings
determine what the ceiling frame looks like when you display framing, as well as what members and quantities are reported
in your project estimate. You can select the type of members you want to use for the joists, rim joists, and opening headers
in a ceiling frame, and choose whether or not you want each component to be displayed and quantified. You can also control
the joist spacing and direction, and specify a Phase and Usage for each component.
You can view ceiling framing by displaying your model in framed view.

Specifying Ceiling Framing Options

Ceilings have a framing configuration assigned to them which you see when you display framing. You can specify a custom
framing configuration if you want. There are settings for the joist, rim joist, and opening header, and you can control the
joist spacing and direction.
Framing can be displayed using the Display Framing tool, and is included in the project estimate. Settings in the framing
configuration let you specify whether or not you want each component in the ceiling frame to be displayed and quantified,
providing the ultimate in versatility and control. You can also assign a Usage and Phase to each member in the
configuration.
To specify framing options for ceilings:
1. In non-framed view, select the ceiling you want to change. You can also specify framing members for ceilings in the
catalog.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. On the Basic property page, click the Specify Framing button. The Ceiling Framing dialog appears.

4. To select a joist member, click on the Member field in the Joist area, then click the browse button in that field to
display the member catalog. Select the desired member in the Catalog Access dialog, then click OK.

- 108 -
 Roof Framing

5. To define the joist spacing, edit the value in the a. Spacing field.
6. To define the joist direction, edit the angle in the Direction field.

7. To select a rim joist member, click on the Member field in the Rim Joist area, then click the browse button in that
field to display the member catalog. Select the desired member in the Catalog Access dialog, then click OK.
8. To select an opening header member, click on the Member field in the Opening Header area, then click the browse button

in that field to display the member catalog. Select the desired member in the Catalog Access dialog, then click OK.
9. By default, the joists, rim joists and opening headers are set to be displayed in the framing and quantified in the project
estimate. If you do not want one of those components to be displayed and quantified, click in the Include in Framing
field in that component’s settings and select No.
10. You can assign a unique Usage and Phase to the joist, rim joist and opening header members. Usages help to identify
what materials are used for, or could be used for on the construction site. Phase refers to the construction phase in
which a material is used. Phase and Usage can be used as sort keys in your report template. Sort keys determine how
materials are sorted in your project estimate.

To assign a Usage to a member, click in the member’s Usage field and then click the browse button in that field
and make a selection from the Usages library. To assign a Phase to a member, click in the member’s Phase field and

then click the browse button in that field and make selection from the Phase library.
11. Click OK.

Roof Framing
Every roof in your model has a framing configuration assigned to it in its properties. The configuration determines what
member is used for the rafters, and the spacing between rafters. You can specify a custom roof framing configuration for
individual roofs in your model.
Additional frame settings can be found on a roof’s Support and Details property page. These include settings such as
Support Type (rafter or truss) and Support Height, Raised Heel, Birds Mouth, and Seat.
You can view roof framing by displaying your model in framed view.

Specifying Roof Framing Options

Roofs have a framing configuration assigned to them that you see when you display framing. Framing can be displayed
using the Display Framing tool, and is included in the project estimate. Settings in the framing configuration let you specify
whether or not you want each component in the roof frame to be displayed and quantified. You can assign a member type,
Usage and Phase to each member in the configuration.
To specify framing members for roofs:
1. In non-framed view, select the roof you want to change. You can also specify framing members for roofs in the catalog.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. On the Basic property page, click the Specify Framing button. The Roof Framing dialog appears.

- 109 -
Chapter 13: Framing

4. Specify the desired options in the Rafter, Opening Header, Hip, Valley, Gable, and Gable Ladder sections.
• To control whether or not each component in the frame is displayed in the framing and included in the project
estimate, click in the component’s Include in Framing field and select either Yes or No.
• To select the member that you would like to use for a framing component, click on the Member field, then click

the browse button in that field to display the member catalog. Select the desired member in the Catalog Ac-
cess dialog, then click OK.
• You can assign a unique Usage and Phase to the rafter and opening header members. Usages help to identify what
materials are used for, or could be used for on the construction site. Phase refers to the construction phase in which
a material is used. Phase and Usage can be used as sort keys in your report template. Sort keys determine how
materials are sorted in your project estimate.

To assign a Usage to a member, click in the member’s Usage field and then click the browse button in that
field and make a selection from the Usages library. To assign a Phase to a member, click in the member’s Phase

field and then click the browse button in that field and make selection from the Phase library.
• If you are including Rafters or a Gable Ladder, you can specify the spacing between members in the Spacing field.
5. Click OK.

Note: Additional frame details can be found on a roof’s Support and Details property page.

- 110 -
Chapter 14: Terrain

By default, a basic 160’ x 160’ grass terrain is displayed in the drawing area. You can edit the terrain’s size, base level, mesh
spacing and contour display. You can also select a different material to apply to the terrain when viewing in Rendered and
Rendered Outline display mode.
To recreate the topography of your lot, you can add Hills, Valleys, Berms, Trenches, Plateaus or Slopes to the existing terrain.
Once you’ve modeled the terrain, you can create sidewalks and driveways using the Paths tool, or create a patio with the
Pads tool. To help control sloped areas, you may want to insert a Retaining Wall.
If you would like your property lines and building setbacks to be represented in your plan, just use the Site Boundary tool
to define the outline of your lot.

Terrain Modeling
Using different Terrain tools you can recreate the topography of the lot your home will be built on. By default, a basic 160’
x 160’ grass terrain is displayed in the drawing area. You can edit the terrain’s size, base level, and mesh spacing. In 2D view,
only the boundary of the terrain is shown (you may need to zoom out to see it). In 3D view, the terrain is displayed as a 3D
object. You can choose whether or not you want to display the terrain boundary.
You add hills, berms, plateaus, and slopes to your terrain to create a realistic-looking building site. When you add these
features to the terrain, contour lines appear on the terrain in 2D view, and the terrain updates in 3D view to reflect the
changes that you have made to it.

Terrain Settings
By default, a basic 160’ x 160’ grass terrain is displayed in the drawing area. By default, the terrain is set to cut around the
building. You can control how the terrain cuts around the building. You can edit the terrain’s size, base level, and mesh
spacing. In 2D view, only the boundary of the terrain is shown (you may need to zoom out to see it). In 3D view, a grass
material is applied to the terrain for a realistic effect. You can choose whether or not you want to display the terrain
boundary, and choose a different material to apply to the terrain in Rendered display mode.
If you add features such as hills and slopes to the terrain, contour lines appear on the terrain in 2D view. You can control
the interval at which contour lines appear, or disable contours if preferred.
You can turn the terrain off at any time if necessary.

Cutting the Terrain Around the Building

By default, the standard terrain in every new project is set to cut around the building instead of through it. You can specify
the building location that you want the terrain to cut around, or force the terrain to cut through the building if you prefer.
To define how the terrain cuts around the building:

1. Select Settings > Document Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Document Settings dialog, click Terrain in the left pane.
3. To force the terrain to cut around the building, enable the Auto-cut terrain around building check box. If you want
the terrain to cut through the building, disable this check box.
4. To specify the building location that you want the terrain to cut around, click the Select Building Location to Cut
Around drop box, then select the desired location.
5. Click OK.

Defining the Size of the Terrain

By default, a 160’ x 160’ terrain is displayed in the drawing area. You can edit the length and width of the terrain to suit your
needs.

- 111 -
Chapter 14: Terrain

To define the size of the terrain:

1. Select Settings > Document Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Document Settings dialog, click Terrain in the left pane.
3. To change the overall size of the terrain, enter the desired values in the Length and Width edit boxes.
4. Click OK.

Defining the Base Level of the Terrain

You can define the elevation at which the base of the terrain sits by editing the terrain’s base level in your program settings.
This effectively raises or lowers the terrain when viewing in 3D. The base level is also the reference point from which
topographical features like hills and berms are measured.
To define the base level of the terrain:

1. Select Settings > Document Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Document Settings dialog, click Terrain in the left pane.
3. To change the level at which the base of the terrain sits, type the desired value in the Base Level edit box. This value
is measured from 0.
4. Click OK.

Defining the Terrain Mesh Spacing

When viewing the terrain in Hidden Line or Rendered Outline display mode in 2D Plan view, or in any display mode other
than Rendered mode in 3D view, a mesh is displayed on the surface of the terrain to help you visualize the contours of the
terrain in these display modes. You can edit the spacing between terrain mesh lines.
To define the terrain mesh spacing:

1. Select Settings > Document Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Document Settings dialog, click Terrain in the left pane.
3. Type the desired spacing between mesh lines in the Mesh Spacing edit box. A smaller mesh spacing will show a higher
level of detail than a larger mesh spacing.
4. Click OK.

Controlling the Display of Terrain Contours

If you add features such as hills and slopes to the terrain, contour lines appear on the terrain in 2D view. You can control
the interval at which contour lines appear, specify the elevation of the first contour, or disable contours if preferred.
To control the display of terrain contours:

1. Select Settings > Document Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Document Settings dialog, click Terrain in the left pane.
3. To display contours on your terrain, enable the Show Contours check box. If you do not want to display contours,
disable this check box.
4. In the Start edit box, enter the elevation of the first contour.
5. In the Interval check box, enter the desired spacing between contours.
6. Click OK.

Selecting a Material for the Terrain

By default, a grass texture is applied to the terrain in Rendered and Rendered Outline display mode. You can apply a
different material to the terrain if you want. For example, you may want to display a sandy, snowy or concrete terrain.

- 112 -
 Displaying/Hiding the Terrain Boundary Line

To select a material for the terrain:

1. Select Settings > Document Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Document Settings dialog, click Terrain in the left pane.

3. Click in the Material area, then make your selection in the Materials dialog and click OK. A preview of
the selected texture is displayed on the Terrain settings page.
4. Click OK.

Displaying/Hiding the Terrain Boundary Line

By default, when viewing the terrain in 2D view, the outline of the terrain is displayed. You can disable the display of the
boundary line if you want.
To display or hide the terrain boundary line:

1. Select Settings > Document Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Document Settings dialog, click Terrain in the left pane.
3. In the Terrain Mesh area, check or uncheck the Show Boundary check box.
4. Click OK.

Turning the Terrain On and Off

You can hide the terrain from view and display it again whenever you want using the View Filter.
To turn the terrain on or off:

1. Select View > View Filters > View Filter or click on the View Control toolbar.
2. In the View Filter dialog, select the Elements on Terrain tab.
3. Click the eye icon next to the Terrain option. The eye closes.
4. Click OK.

Hills & Valleys

Ultimate | Professional
You can add hills to your terrain with a single mouse click. You can control the height of a hill as well as its peak shape.
Generally, the diameter of the hill base is the same as the hill height. You can insert multiple hills together to create one larger
hill. To create a valley, simply specify a negative height when using the Hills/Valleys tool.

Creating Hills and Valleys

Ultimate | Professional
You can add hills to your terrain with a single mouse click. You can control the height of a hill as well as its peak shape.
Generally, the diameter of the hill base is the same as the hill height. You can insert multiple hills together to create one larger
hill. Also, if you insert hills next to other terrain elements, like plateaus or slopes, the elements will automatically blend
together.
To insert a hill or valley:

1. Select Insert > Terrain > Hills/Valleys, or click on the Terrain toolbar.
2. In the Hills/Valleys dialog, specify the height of the hill in the Height edit box. Entering a negative value will create a
valley.
3. Using the Zenith slider control, select a peak shape for the hill.
4. Click OK.
5. Click to insert the hill. You can insert multiple hills if you like.
6. Right-click and select Finish.

- 113 -
Chapter 14: Terrain

Moving a Hill
You can move a hill by clicking and dragging it.
To move a hill:
1. Click in the center of the hill to select it.
2. Click and drag the center grip to move the hill, then release your mouse button.

Editing the Height or Shape of a Hill

To edit the height or peak shape of a hill:
1. Click in the center of the hill to select it.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. Edit the properties in the Hills/Valleys dialog.
4. Click OK.

Deleting a Hill
You can remove a hill in a couple of easy steps.
To remove a hill:
1. Click in the center of the hill to select it.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Berms and Trenches

Ultimate | Professional
A berm is a mound or bank of soil without formal sides. You often see large berms on the sides of highways, which are used
for noise control.
To insert a berm you simply select two points that define the length of the top of the berm. You can control the height and
peak shape of the berm. To create a trench, simply specify a negative height when using the Berms/Trenches tool.

Creating Berms and Trenches

Ultimate | Professional
A berm is a mound or bank of soil without formal sides. You often see large berms on the sides of highways, which are used
for noise control. On a reduced scale, a natural berm can provide some interesting benefits in a backyard landscape.
Climate control. Berms act as windbreaks, channeling air flow. Berms can create a warmer microclimate or direct cooling
breezes.
Privacy. A berm can be a "friendly fence" in the back yard or between your house and a sidewalk.
Vertical interest. You can add variety and texture to your gardens with berms, change the view from your outdoor sitting
areas, or even hide eyesores with them.
Noise control. A berm can cut down on traffic noise if you live on a busy street or near a schoolyard.
Berms may be shored with stone, bricks, or timbers, and planted with groundcovers, perennials, annuals, trees, etc.
You can control the height of a berm as well as its peak shape.
To create a berm/trench:

1. Select Insert > Terrain > Berms/Trenches, or click on the Terrain toolbar.
2. In the Berms/Trenches dialog, specify the height of the berm in the Height edit box. Entering a negative value creates
a trench.
3. Using the Zenith slider control, select a peak shape for the berm.
4. Click OK.

- 114 -
 Moving a Berm

5. Select two points to define the length of the top of the berm. The berm will be created downward and outward from
this line.

6. Right-click and select Finish.

Moving a Berm
To move a berm:
1. Click in the center of the berm to select it. A blue grip is displayed in the middle of the berm’s central line.
2. Click and drag the central blue grip to move the berm, then release your mouse button.

Rotating a Berm
To rotate a berm or trench:
1. Click in the center of the berm to select it. Grips are displayed along the berm’s central line.
2. Click and drag a grip to rotate the berm around the selected point.
3. Release your mouse button.

Stretching a Berm
To stretch a berm:
1. Click in the center of the berm to select it. Grips are displayed at either end of the berm’s central line.
2. Click and drag an end grip to stretch the berm, then release your mouse button. You can move the end point to any
position on the screen.

Editing the Height or Shape of a Berm

You can edit the height of a berm, or the depth of a trench, as well as its peak shape.
To edit a berm’s height or shape:
1. Click in the center of the berm to select it.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

Deleting a Berm
To delete a berm:
1. Click in the center of the berm to select it.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Plateaus
Ultimate | Professional
A plateau is a relatively large, flat area of land situated above the adjacent land. Adding a plateau to your terrain involves
clicking a few points to define the shape of the plateau. You can control the height of the plateau as well as its peak shape.

Creating Plateaus
Ultimate | Professional

- 115 -
Chapter 14: Terrain

A plateau is a relatively large, flat area of land situated above the adjacent land. Adding a plateau to your terrain involves
clicking a few points to define the shape of the plateau. You can control the height of the plateau as well as its peak shape.
Note that if you insert a plateau in close proximity to other terrain elements, such as hills, the elements automatically blend
together.
To create a plateau:

1. Select Insert > Terrain > Plateaus, or click on the Terrain toolbar.
2. In the Plateaus dialog, specify the height of the plateau in the Height edit box. Entering a negative value creates an
excavated area.
3. Using the Zenith slider control, select a general shape for the plateau. The pointier the shape, the steeper the sides will
be.
4. Click OK.
5. In the drawing area, select points to define the outline of the top of the plateau. Note that the last point picked always
closes back to the start point, so you don’t have to pick the start point again. The plateau will be created downward and
outward from your outline.

6. Right-click and select Finish.

Moving a Plateau
To move a plateau:
1. Click in the center of the plateau to select it.
2. Right-click and select Move, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Move.
3. Click and drag to move the plateau, then release your mouse button.

Stretching a Plateau
To stretch a plateau:
1. Click in the center of the plateau to select it.
2. Click on the edge of the central outline that you want to stretch. A blue grip is displayed on the selected edge.
3. Click and drag the edge to stretch the plateau, then release your mouse button.

Reshaping a Plateau
To reshape a plateau:
1. Click in the center of the plateau to select it. Corner grips are displayed on the central outline of the plateau.
2. Click and drag a corner grip to stretch the shape, then release your mouse button.

Editing the Height or Peak Shape of a Plateau

To edit the height or peak shape of a plateau:
1. Click in the center of the plateau to select it.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

- 116 -
 Deleting a Plateau

3. Edit the properties in the Plateaus dialog.

4. Click OK.

Deleting a Plateau
To delete a plateau:
1. Click in the center of the plateau to select it.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Slopes
A slope is an area of land with a natural incline. It is often common practice to slope the land away from the sides of a house
so that water drains away from it rather than towards it. When you create a slope, you select two points: the first point is
the starting point of the slope, and the second point determines the length and direction of the slope.

Creating Slopes
Ultimate | Professional
A slope is an area of land with a natural incline. It is often common practice to slope the land away from the sides of a house
so that water drains away from it rather than towards it. When you create a slope, you select two points: the first point is
the starting point of the slope, and the second point determines the length and direction of the slope. If the slope comes into
contact with other terrain elements, like hills and plateaus, the elements automatically blend together.
To create a slope in your terrain:

1. Select Insert > Terrain > Slopes, or click on the Terrain toolbar.
2. In the Slopes dialog, enable the Height button.
3. In the Height edit box, enter the desired height for the top of the slope. Note that slopes are built from the top surface
of the terrain up.
4. Enable the Angle button.
5. In the Angle edit box, enter an angle (in degrees) for the slope. The higher the value, the steeper the slope.
6. Click OK.
7. Select a start point for the slope. The slope will incline from this point. Note that the sides of the slope will extend to
the very edges of the terrain.
8. Move your cursor in the direction you want the slope to run. A stretchable arrow is displayed.

9. When the arrow is pointing in the right direction and is the desired length, click to insert the slope. The longer the ar-
row, the more gradual the slope will be. A shorter arrow will result in a steeper slope. Note that if the point you pick
is not on the edge of the terrain, the land will level off at the top of the slope.
10. Right-click and select Finish.

Note: If you insert another slope, and that slope comes into contact with an existing slope, the new slope will insert on top
of the existing slope.

- 117 -
Chapter 14: Terrain

Moving a Slope
To move a slope:
1. Click in the center of the slope. The central arrow is displayed.
2. Click and drag the arrow’s center blue grip to move the slope, then release your mouse button.

Stretching a Slope
To stretch a slope:
1. Click in the center of the slope. The central arrow is displayed, and grips are displayed at either end of it.
2. Click and drag an end grip to stretch the arrow, then release your mouse button. Note that you can also rotate the arrow
by selecting a different position for it while clicking and dragging. This changes the direction of the slope.

Editing the Height of a Slope

To edit the height of a slope:
1. Click in the center of the slope to select it.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Slopes dialog, enable the Height radio button.
4. Edit the height in the Height edit box.
5. Click OK.

Editing the Angle of a Slope

To edit the angle (steepness) of a slope:
1. Click in the center of the slope to select it.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Slopes dialog, enable the Angle radio button.
4. Edit the height in the Angle edit box.
5. Click OK.

Deleting a Slope
To delete a slope:
1. Click in the center of the slope to select it. The central arrow is displayed.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Paths & Driveways

Ultimate | Professional
Sidewalks, pathways and driveways add to the overall aesthetics of your landscape and provide access to different areas of
your property. Drawing them with the Paths tool is easy — just select a start point, then point and click in the direction you
want the pathway to run. Continue picking points to add segments if you want.
The catalog includes an excellent selection of pathway materials including wood, sand, gravel, concrete, brick and asphalt.
You can even create a forest path! A number of different widths are available, but you can create a custom width if you want.

Creating Paths, Sidewalks and Driveways

Ultimate | Professional
The catalog contains a wide variety of path types, including boardwalks, sand paths, gravel paths, brick paths, and
driveways. The width and thickness of a path is determined by the path’s properties in the catalog. You control the length
and direction of the path as you draw it. Dimensions are displayed as you draw each segment.

- 118 -
 Moving a Path Element

To create a path:

1. Select Insert > Terrain > Paths, or click on the Terrain toolbar.
2. In the catalog, select the path type you want to insert.
3. Select a start point for your path. Note that your insertion point is on the center line of the path.
4. Move your cursor in the direction you want the path to run, then select an endpoint for the path. You can continue se-
lecting points in any direction to add more sections to the path if you want.

Tip: To create a smooth curve in the path, click several points with a short distance between each point.
5. Double-click to finish, or right-click and select Finish.

Note: By default, all paths hug the terrain they are inserted on, but you can disable the Hug Terrain option in the path’s
properties if you want.

Moving a Path Element

You can move an entire path using the Move tool.
To move a path:
1. Click on the path to select it.
2. Right-click and select Move, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Move.
3. Click and drag the path to where you want it, then release your mouse button.

Stretching a Path Element

You can lengthen or shorten a sidewalk, pathway or driveway by clicking and dragging its end grips, or using the Stretch
tool. If you use the click-and-drag method, the path is constrained to its current direction when you stretch it. If you use the
Stretch tool you can rotate the path while stretching. You can also use the Commander when the Stretch tool is active.
To stretch a path by clicking and dragging:
1. Click on the path to select it.
2. Click and hold your mouse button over one of the path’s end grips. The Lengthen cursor is displayed .
3. Drag to stretch the path, then release your mouse button.
To stretch a path with the Stretch tool:
1. Click on the path to select it.

2. Right-click and select Stretch. Your cursor becomes the Stretch cursor .
3. Click and hold your mouse button over one of the path’s end grips, drag to stretch the path in any direction, then release
your mouse button. If you want to enter a precise stretch distance or direction, click on the end grip, specify the desired
distance and direction in the Commander, then press Enter.

- 119 -
Chapter 14: Terrain

Curving a Path Element

You can curve a path segment using the Curve tool. Once the tool is active, you can click and drag the path to curve it, or
select a point to curve to.
To curve a path by clicking and dragging:
1. Click on the path to select it. If the path has multiple segments, make sure you click on the specific segment you want
to curve.
2. Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve.
3. Click and drag the path to the desired curve.
4. Release your mouse button.
To curve a path to a selected point:
1. Click on the path to select it. If the path has multiple segments, make sure you click on the specific segment you want
to curve.
2. Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve.
3. Select the point you want to curve to. The path automatically curves to the point.
4. Click to finish.

Editing the Thickness or Width of a Path Element

You can edit the thickness of your path material or the path’s overall width.
To edit the thickness or width of a path:
1. Select the path. If the path has multiple segments, you do not have to select them all. Property changes affect the whole
path.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. To edit the thickness of the path, enter a value in the Thickness edit box.
4. To edit the width of the path, enter a value in the Width edit box.
5. Click OK.

Applying Different Materials to Path Elements

You can apply a different material to any path, sidewalk or driveway using the quick and handy Materials Paintbrush.
To apply a material to a path element:
1. Display your model in 3D, and make sure the path is visible in the view.

2. Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click on any tabbed toolbar.

3. In the catalog panel, select the material you want to apply. You may want to select the Landscape option from the Filter
drop box to display only landscaping materials.
4. Right-click and select Finish.

Deleting a Path Element

You can delete a sidewalk, pathway or driveway in a couple of easy steps.
To delete a path:
1. Click on the path to select it.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Pads
Ultimate | Professional
Creating a pad (for a patio, for example) involves clicking a few points to define the outline of the pad using the Pads tool.
You can apply a different material to the pad after it has been inserted.

- 120 -
 Creating a Pad

By default, pads hug the terrain they are inserted on. If the terrain is not flat where you are inserting the pad, you may want
to turn off the pad’s Hug Terrain option to make the pad flat and have it positioned at the Terrain Base Level specified in
your Terrain Settings.

Creating a Pad
Ultimate | Professional
You can use the Pads tool to insert a concrete or brick pad directly on your terrain. By drawing the outline of the pad, you
control its precise size and shape. You can use the Materials Paintbrush to apply a different color or material to the pad after
it has been inserted.
To create a pad:

1. Select Insert > Terrain > Pads, or click on the Terrain toolbar.
2. In the catalog, select the type of pad that you want to insert.
3. Select a start point for the pad.
4. Continue selecting points to define the outline of the pad. Note that the last point picked always closes back to the start
point, so you don’t have to pick the start point again.
5. Right-click and select Finish.

Note: By default, pads hug the terrain they are inserted on. If the terrain is not flat where you are inserting the pad, you may
want to turn off the pad’s Hug Terrain option to make the pad flat and have it positioned at the Terrain Base Level specified
in your Terrain Settings.

Disabling the Hug Terrain Option

Disabling the Hug Terrain option ensures an element remains flat regardless of any slopes in the terrain, and positions the
element at the Base Level specified in your terrain settings.
To disable the Hug Terrain option:
1. Click on the edge of the element to select it.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. On the Basic property page, uncheck the Hug Terrain? check box.
4. Click OK.

Moving a Pad
You can move a pad using the Move tool.
To move an entire pad:
1. Click on the edge of the pad to select it.
2. Right-click and select Move, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Move.
3. Click and drag the pad to move it, then release your mouse button.

Rotating a Pad
You can rotate a pad easily using the Rotate tool.
To rotate a pad:
1. Click on the edge of the pad to select it.
2. Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Rotate.
3. Position your pointer over the corner grip you want to rotate the pad around.
4. Click and drag to rotate the pad, then release your mouse button.

Resizing a Pad
You can resize a pad by stretching one of its edges.

- 121 -
Chapter 14: Terrain

To resize a pad by stretching it:

1. Click on the edge of the pad to select it.

2. Hover your pointer over the center blue grip of the edge you want to move. This displays the Move cursor. Alter-
natively you can select the Move Edge tool on the right-click menu.
3. Click and drag to stretch the pad, then release your mouse button.

Reshaping a Pad
You can change the shape of a pad by clicking and dragging its corners.
To reshape a pad:
1. Click on the edge of the pad to select it. A grab handle is displayed at each corner.
2. Click and drag a corner grip to stretch the pad.
3. Release your mouse button.

Curving a Pad
You can curve the edge of a pad using the Curve tool. Once the tool is active, you can click and drag the edge to curve it, or
select a point to curve to.
To curve a pad edge by clicking and dragging:
1. Click on the pad edge that you want to curve.
2. Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve.
3. Click and drag the edge to the desired curve.
4. Release your mouse button.
To curve a pad edge to a selected point:
1. Click on the edge you want to curve.
2. Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve.
3. Select the point you want to curve to. The edge automatically curves to the point.
4. Click to finish.

Editing the Thickness of a Pad

You can edit the thickness of a pad on the pad’s Basic property page.
To edit the thickness of a pad:
1. Click on the edge of the pad to select it.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Pads dialog, select the Basic tab.
4. Enter the desired thickness in the Thickness edit box.
5. Click OK.

Applying a Different Material to a Pad

You can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly apply a different color or material to a pad. For example, you may want to
change a patio to stone.
To apply a material to a pad:
1. Display your model in 3D view and make sure the pad is visible in the view.

2. Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click on any tabbed toolbar.

3. In the catalog panel, select the material you want to apply.
4. Click on the pad surface. The material is immediately applied.

- 122 -
 Deleting a Pad

5. Right-click and select Finish.

Deleting a Pad
You can delete a pad in a couple of easy steps.
To delete a pad:
1. Click on the edge of the pad to select it.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Retaining Walls
Ultimate | Professional
A well-built retaining wall system can preserve the natural shape of your land, reinforce hills and slopes, and protect your
home from possible landslides or soil erosion. Retaining walls can also be an attractive addition to a garden or the overall
landscaping around your home.
Drawing retaining walls is easy — just point and click. Virtual Architect home design software automatically displays
dimensions as you draw, and connects corners for you. Once inserted, any wall can be moved, rotated, lengthened,
shortened, broken, curved or deleted. This lets you create the exact wall layout that you want.
The catalog contains wood, concrete and concrete block retaining walls in a variety of sizes. You can change the properties
of walls, such as their thickness and appearance, as well as create custom walls.

Drawing Retaining Walls

Ultimate | Professional
Drawing retaining walls is easy — just point and click. Virtual Architect home design software automatically displays
dimensions as you draw, and connects corners for you.
To draw a retaining wall:

1. Select Insert > Terrain > Retaining Walls, or click on the Terrain toolbar.
2. In the catalog, select the wall type you want to insert.
3. Select a start point for the wall.
4. Move your cursor in the direction you want your wall to run. Its length is shown as you draw the wall.
5. When the wall is the length you want, click to set its endpoint.
6. Continue selecting points to add on to the wall if you want.
7. When you are done, right-click and select Finish.

Property Lines
You may want to know where your property lines are, especially if you are working in a confined or unusually-shaped area.
Lot lines and setbacks can be found on a survey plan or surveyor’s certificate.
You can use the Site Boundary tool to define your building lot. A site boundary is a closed line that shows the legal property
boundary (lot lines), and is annotated with bearing text, length text and peg numbers. You can specify setbacks as well,
which define your building envelope.
To create a site boundary you just pick points to define the outline of the lot. The Commander is displayed as you draw,
allowing you to enter each bearing precisely.
When drawing your site boundary, there are two ways of defining segment angles. The Reference Angle Method lets you
define the direction of each segment by specifying an acute angle within a given quadrant (NW, NE, SW, SE). The Angle
Bearing Method, which lets you specify a forward or back bearing measured clockwise from the North meridian.
Once you’ve drawn your site boundary you can edit each segment individually if necessary to achieve the precise size and
shape you need. You can also change the site boundary settings which include the line, text and peg styles used in the site
boundary.

Note: The site boundary appears only in 2D wireframe view.

- 123 -
Chapter 14: Terrain

Tip: You can put a fence along your lot lines to show where the lot lines are in 3D.

Creating a Site Boundary Using the Reference Angle Method

Ultimate | Professional
When creating a site boundary using the Reference Angle Method, angles are measured using compass bearings and a
reference angle. Each angle is measured within a given quadrant (NE, NW, SE or SW). The angle is the acute (less than 90°)
angle from the North or South meridian as measured to the East or West. For example, the bearing N 90d00’00” E can be
thought of as 90º east of North.
By default, the angle is specified using the degrees/minutes/seconds format, but you can choose to use decimal degrees if
you prefer.
To create a site boundary with the Reference Angle Method:
1. Make sure the Reference Angle format is selected on the Site Boundaries page in your Document Settings.

2. In 2D plan view, select View > Zoom and Navigate > Zoom to Fit, or click on the View Control toolbar. This will
bring the entire terrain into view so you can insert the boundary easily and precisely.

3. Select Insert > Terrain > Site Boundary, or click on the Terrain toolbar.
4. Select a point for the first peg (stake). The Commander becomes instantly active, displaying options for defining the
length and direction of line segments.

5. Move your mouse in the general direction you want the first site boundary line to run. This determines the quadrant
you are working in, and the compass points used in the bearing. Note that you can also select a quadrant (NE, NW, SE
or SW) from the drop box in the Commander if you prefer — just remember to Tab over to the Distance edit box when
you’re done.
6. Type a length for the boundary line. The value appears in the Commander’s Distance edit box.
7. To specify the direction of the line, either move your mouse in the desired direction (watching the resulting angle in
the Commander’s Direction edit box), or press the Tab key to move to the Direction edit box, then enter the desired
angle and press ENTER. Remember that the angle is measured from the North or South meridian, and should be be-
tween 0 and 90 degrees.

8. Continue defining the remaining segments. When you have defined all but the last segment, right-click and select Fin-
ish. A closing line segment will be created automatically between the first and last peg, forming a closed site boundary.

- 124 -
 Creating a Site Boundary Using the Angle Bearing Method

Note: Bearings coincide with the angle of the north arrow specified in your global settings.

Creating a Site Boundary Using the Angle Bearing Method

Ultimate | Professional
When using the Angle Bearing Method to draw a site boundary, each angle is calculated clockwise from the positive Y axis,
or North meridian. By default, each bearing is entered as a forward bearing, but you can choose to enter a back bearing
instead.
To create a site boundary with the Angle Bearing Method:
1. Make sure the Angle Bearing format is selected on the Site Boundaries page in your Document Settings.

2. In 2D plan view, select View > Zoom and Navigate > Zoom to Fit, or click on the View Control toolbar. This will
bring the entire terrain into view so you can insert the boundary easily and precisely.

3. Select Insert > Terrain > Site Boundary, or click on the Terrain toolbar.
4. Select a point for the first peg (stake). The Commander becomes instantly active, displaying options for defining the
length and direction of line segments.
5. If you want to enter a back bearing instead of a forward bearing, select Back bearing from the Commander’s left drop
box. Just remember to Tab over to the Distance edit box when you’re done.
6. Type a length for the first boundary line. The value appears in the Commander’s Distance edit box.
7. To specify the direction of the line, either move your mouse in the desired direction (watching the resulting angle in
the Commander’s Direction edit box), or press the Tab key to move to the Direction edit box, then type the desired
angle and press ENTER. Remember that each angle is calculated clockwise from the positive Y axis, or North meridian.

8. Continue defining the remaining segments. When you have defined all but the last segment, right-click and select Fin-
ish. A closing line segment will be created automatically between the first and last peg, forming a closed site boundary.

- 125 -
Chapter 14: Terrain

Moving a Site Boundary

You can move a site boundary using the Move tool.
To move a site boundary:
1. Click on one of your lot lines to select the entire site boundary.
2. Right-click and select Move, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Move.
3. Click and drag the site boundary to move it, then release your mouse button.

Stretching a Site Boundary

You can resize or reshape a site boundary by clicking and dragging its grips.
To stretch a site boundary:
1. Click on one of your lot lines to select the site boundary. If you want to resize the boundary, click on the specific lot line
that you want to move. Clear blue grips appear at each corner of the boundary, and a solid blue grip appears at the
center of the lot line you selected.
2. To resize the boundary, click and drag the solid blue grip. To reshape the boundary, click and drag one of the clear blue
corner grips.
3. Release your mouse button.

Note: You can also edit the length and direction of individual lot lines precisely by editing the boundary’s properties.

Editing the Length or Direction of Site Boundary Edges

You can edit the length or direction of a site boundary edge by editing site boundary properties.
To edit the length or direction of a site boundary edge:
1. Click on the lot line you want to edit.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. To edit the length of the current segment, type the desired value in the Length edit box.
4. To edit the distance of the setback line from the lot line, type the distance in the Setback edit box.
5. To edit the angle of the current segment, make the appropriate changes in the Direction area of the Site Boundary Edge
dialog. There are two methods of defining direction. The method that is available is the one that was used to draw the
site boundary initially, or whatever is current on the Units of Measure page in your Program Settings.
If the Reference Angle Method is current, you can edit the direction of the segment by editing the value in the Angle edit
box. If the Angle Bearing Method is current, you can edit the direction of the segment by editing the Forward Bearing
or Back Bearing value.
6. In the When Editing area, select the appropriate Peg No. to adjust, as editing the length or angle of a segment will cause
a peg to move.
7. Click OK.

Defining Setback Distances

By default, setback lines are not included in your site boundary, as all setback distances are set to 0. You can specify a setback
distance for each individual site boundary edge.
To define setback distances:
1. Click on the property line you want to specify a setback distance for. Note that setback distances are defined per site
boundary edge, one at a time.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

- 126 -
 Clipping the Terrain to the Site Boundary

3. In the Site Boundary Edge dialog, edit the value in the Setback edit box.
4. Click OK.

Clipping the Terrain to the Site Boundary

If you have added a site boundary to your plan, you can choose to clip the terrain to the site boundary so that when you
view the model in 3D, you see only your lot. In other words, the terrain is resized to the size of your lot in 3D.
To clip the terrain to the site boundary:
1. Click on the edge of the site boundary to select it.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Site Boundary Edge dialog, enable the Clip Terrain check box.
4. Click OK.
The terrain boundary line becomes dashed in 2D plan view, indicating that it will be clipped. The terrain will be clipped
(resized) when you view the model in 3D.

Curving a Site Boundary Edge

You can curve a site boundary edge using the Curve tool, or by editing site boundary edge properties.
To curve a site boundary edge using the Curve tool:
1. Click on the site boundary edge you want to curve.
2. Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve.
3. Click and drag the edge to the desired curve.
4. Release your mouse button.

To curve a site boundary edge by editing its properties:

1. Click on the lot line you want to edit.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. Enable the Arc Radius check box, then enter the desired arc radius in the adjacent edit box. The arc radius is the dis-
tance from the lot line (in its uncurved state) to the top of the proposed arc.
4. Select the desired direction of the arc from the Arc Direction drop box. Selecting Inside creates the arc toward the in-
side of the boundary, while selecting Outside pushes it outward.
5. Click OK.

- 127 -
Chapter 14: Terrain

Editing a Site Boundary’s Line, Text and Peg Styles

You can edit site boundary settings before or after a site boundary has been created. Settings include line styles for lot lines
and setback lines, text styles for bearings, lengths and pegs, as well as peg size and style. You can also control which textual
information you want to appear.
To edit site boundary settings:

1. Select Settings > Document Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Document Settings dialog, click Site Boundaries in the left column.
If you have already drawn a site boundary, you can also access site boundary settings by clicking the Settings button
in the Site Boundary Edge dialog.
3. To edit the line style of the outside boundary line, select Boundary line from the drop box in the Lines area, then select
the desired color, line type and line weight for the line.
4. To edit the line style of the setback line, select Setback line from the drop box in the Lines area, then select the desired
color, line type and line weight for the line.
5. To edit the line style of the pegs, select Peg from the drop box in the Lines area, then select the desired color, line type
and line weight for the line.
6. To edit the peg style, select either the Round or Square option in the Pegs area. To edit the size of the peg symbol, enter
the desired value in the Width edit box.
7. To edit the text style of bearing text, click the Bearing button, then select the desired text style from the Text Styles
dialog. If you do not want to include bearing text in the site boundary, disable the adjacent Include check box. By de-
fault, bearing text appears on the inside of the site boundary. If you want it to appear on the outside, select Outside
Line from the drop box next to the Include check box. Note that if you are including both bearing text and length text,
one must be set to the outside of the boundary, and one must be set to the inside. You cannot have both on the same
side. Otherwise, one of them will be disabled.
8. To edit the text style of length text, click the Length button, then select the desired text style from the Text Styles dia-
log. If you do not want to include length text in the site boundary, disable the adjacent Include check box. By default,
length text appears on the outside of the site boundary line. If you want it to appear on the inside, select Inside Line
from the drop box next to the Include check box.
9. To edit the text style of peg text, click the Peg button, then select the desired text style from the Text Styles dialog. If
you do not want to include peg text in the site boundary, disable the adjacent Include check box.
10. To edit the distance between text and the site boundary line, enter the desired distance in the Distance from line edit
box. This applies to all forms of text — bearing, length and peg text.
11. Click OK.

Selecting a Method of Measurement When Drawing a Site Boundary

There are two methods of angle measurement available for creating a site boundary. With the Reference Angle method, each
angle is measured from the North or South meridian within a given quadrant (NE, NW, SE, SW). With the Angle Bearing
method, each angle is measured clockwise from the positive Y axis, or North meridian.
Site units can be Imperial or Metric. You can select the unit of measure you want to use and specify the desired level of
precision.
When specifying the angle of each site boundary segment, you can use Degrees/Minutes/Seconds, or Decimal Degrees with
a specified level of precision.
To select a method of angle measurement for site boundary entry:

1. Select Settings > Document Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Document Settings dialog, click Site Boundaries in the left column.
3. Select the desired entry method from the Bearing Format drop box (Reference Angle or Angle Bearing).
4. In the Distances area, select either Imperial or Metric, then select a unit of measure from the Units drop box. Imperial
choices are Feet-Inches and Inches. Metric choices are Millimeters, Centimeters and Meters. From the Precision drop box,
select a level of precision for distance measurements.

- 128 -
 Deleting a Site Boundary

5. From the Units drop box in the Angles area, select the unit you wish to use when specifying the angle of each site bound-
ary edge. Choose either the Degrees/Minutes/Seconds, or Decimal Degrees. If your choice is Decimal Degrees, select the
desired level of precision from the adjacent Precision drop box.
6. Click OK.

Deleting a Site Boundary

To delete a site boundary that you have inserted:
1. Click on one of your lot lines to select the entire site boundary.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

- 129 -
Chapter 14: Terrain

- 130 -
Chapter 15: Landscaping

Virtual Architect home design software offers a full set of landscaping tools to help you design a complete and realistic
landscape plan. You may want to start with major structures, such as Decks, Patios, Fences, Sheds and other Exterior
Structures.
Once those are in place you can bring your plan to life with Garden Beds, Edging and Plants, and even lay out an Irrigation
system!
Enhance and personalize your plan even further by adding Furniture, Accessories and Lighting.

Plants
Nothing brings your landscape to life like trees, shrubs, plants and flowers. With thousands of plants to choose from, Virtual
Architect home design software lets you create the landscape of your dreams. Inserting plants involves nothing more than
a single mouse click, and once inserted, they can be dragged and dropped anywhere you like. You can even make them
grow!
If you need to learn more about a particular species of plant, you can view the plant’s light, water, temperature and soil
requirements in its properties. For even more detailed information you can browse through the comprehensive Plant
Encyclopedia.

Inserting Plants
Platinum | Ultimate | Professional
Inserting plants involves nothing more than a single mouse click, and once inserted, they can be dragged and dropped
anywhere you like. Before inserting plants, you may want to research different plant types in the Plant Encyclopedia, which
contains thousands of different plant species.
To insert a plant:

1. Select Insert > Landscape > Plants, or click on the Landscape toolbar.
2. In the catalog, select the plant you want to insert. If you want to view the plant’s size or requirements before inserting
it, right-click in the catalog and select Properties.
3. Position the plant where you want it, then click to insert it.
4. Right-click and select Finish.

Note: Although the Master Catalog contains a wide variety of plants for you to insert, it does not contain all the plants listed
in the Encyclopedia. You can, however, insert plants from the Encyclopedia. You can also add plants from the Encyclopedia
to the current catalog.

Moving a Plant
You can move a plant easily by just clicking and dragging it.
To move a plant:
1. Select the plant you want to move.

2. Hover your pointer over the plant’s center grip to display the Move cursor.
3. Click and drag to move the plant.
4. When the plant is where you want it, release your mouse button.

Editing the Elevation of a Plant

You can raise or lower a plant using the Elevate tool. You may want to do this for hanging plants, or plants in raised garden
boxes.

- 131 -
Chapter 15: Landscaping

To change the elevation of a plant:

1. Select the plant.
2. Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Elevate.
3. In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired elevation of the plant above the ground.
4. If you are in a 3D or elevation view and would like to see what the plant looks like at the new elevation, click Apply.
The Elevate tool remains active while the change is applied to the plant.
5. To apply the change and close the dialog, click OK.

Editing the Appearance of a Plant in 2D View

By default, plants are represented by a circular symbol in 2D plan view. You can choose from three 2D plant styles. You can
also change the diameter of the trunk in 2D, or hide the trunk altogether.
To edit the style of a plant in 2D:
1. Select the plant whose properties you want to edit.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Plants dialog, select the Size tab.
4. To change the style of the circle shown in 2D plan view, click the style you want in the Type area.
5. To change the size of the trunk in 2D plan view, edit the value in the Trunk Diameter edit box. To hide the trunk from
2D view, select No from the Show trunk in plan? drop box.
6. Click OK.

Changing the Age of a Plant

The age of a plant determines its size at planting time. You can increase or decrease the age of a plant by making a change
on the plant’s Plant Info property page.
To change the age of a plant:
1. Click on the plant whose planting age you want to change.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Plants dialog, select the Plant Info tab.
4. Move the Planting Age slider left or right until the desired planting age is displayed. Planting age is measured in years.
5. Click OK.

Deleting a Plant
You can delete a plant in a couple of easy steps.
To delete a plant:
1. Select the plant.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Seeing Plant Growth Over Time

Platinum | Ultimate | Professional
Once you have inserted plants in your landscape plan, you can see how they will look any specified number of years down
the road using the Plant Growth Over Time feature.
To see plant growth over time:
1. Select Insert > Landscape > Gardening > Plant Growth Over Time, or click the down arrow next to the Gardening

button on the Landscape toolbar and select Plant Growth Over Time.

- 132 -
 Applying Seasonal Changes to Plants

2. Enter the number of years to add to your landscape.

3. Click OK.

Applying Seasonal Changes to Plants

Platinum | Ultimate | Professional
The Plant Seasonal Change feature updates the appearance of the plants in your drawing to reflect a particular season.
Generally the change applies to flowering plants and trees that have a certain bloom time.
To apply seasonal changes to your plants:
1. Select Insert > Landscape > Gardening > Plant Seasonal Change, or click the down arrow next to the Gardening

button on the Landscape toolbar and select Plant Seasonal Change.

2. In the Program Settings dialog, change the date. Select a month by clicking the arrows on the month bar at the top of
the calendar. Select a day by clicking a number on the calendar.
3. Click OK. The plants in your drawing are updated according to the time of year you specified.

Note: Keep in mind that seasonal changes may have different results depending on the plant’s properties in the
Encyclopedia. Things to consider are the climate of the region the plant is in, and the plant’s world origin.

Inserting Plants from the Encyclopedia

Platinum | Ultimate | Professional
The Plant Encyclopedia contains more than 7500 plant species, not all of which are included in the catalog. You can insert a
plant directly from the Encyclopedia if you want.
To insert a plant from the Encyclopedia:

1. Select Insert > Landscape > Gardening > Plant Encyclopedia, or click on the Landscape toolbar.
2. In the Plant Encyclopedia, locate and select the plant you want to insert. To select a plant in the plant list, use the scroll-
bar beside the plant list to scroll through the list of plants, then click on the plant you want to view. By default, common
plant names are listed in the plant list. You can switch to Latin names by clicking the Latin button.
If you know the name of the plant you are looking for, you can locate it more quickly by typing the first few letters of
the plant’s name in the Search edit field above the plant list. The list of plants will move to the closest match as you type.

3. Click the Select button. The Encyclopedia closes, and the plant is attached to your cursor.
4. Insert the plant in your plan.
5. Right-click and select Finish.

Adding Plants to the Catalog from the Encyclopedia

Although the catalog contains a vast array of plants for you to insert, it does not contain all the plants listed in the Plant
Encyclopedia.

- 133 -
Chapter 15: Landscaping

You can add any plant from the Plant Encyclopedia to any catalog by following the steps below.
To add a plant from the encyclopedia to the current catalog:
1. Select File > Catalogs > Element Manager.
2. In the Element Manager dialog, select or create the group you want to add the plant to.
3. Select Edit > Add Element.
4. In the Plants dialog, select the Plant Info tab.
5. Click the Encyclopedia button to launch the Plant Encyclopedia.
6. On the Encyclopedia’s main page, select the desired plant in the plant list.
7. Click Select. Notice that the Plant Info page of the Plants dialog is now full with the selected plant’s information.
8. In the Name edit box, specify a name for your plant.
9. Specify the remaining properties (Size, Quantity or Behavior) if desired, then click OK in the Plants dialog. Note that
the settings on the Appearance page have no effect on the plant’s appearance. The appearance of a plant is determined
by settings in the Encyclopedia.
10. Click OK in the Element Manager dialog. The plant is added to your catalog.

Plant Encyclopedia
The Plant Encyclopedia contains comprehensive information on thousands of plants. The Encyclopedia has many uses
related to the selection and care of plants. You can view information about any plant, select plants based on certain criteria,
research potential diseases, and learn how to care for your plants.

Using the Plant Encyclopedia

Platinum | Ultimate | Professional
The Plant Encyclopedia contains comprehensive information on thousands of plants. The Encyclopedia has many uses
related to the selection and care of plants. You can:
• View information about any plant
• Select plants based on certain criteria
• Research potential diseases
• Learn how to care for your plants
To access the Plant Encyclopedia:

1. Select Insert > Landscape > Gardening > Plant Encyclopedia, or click on the Landscape toolbar.
You can also access the Plant Encyclopedia by clicking the Encyclopedia button on a plant’s Encyclopedia property
page.

Encyclopedia Main Page

The Encyclopedia’s main page contains a comprehensive plant list that you can scroll through and select plants from. The
page also displays a photo and two previews of a selected plant, as well as basic information about the plant and its
appropriate growing environment.

- 134 -
 Selecting a Plant to View

Selecting a Plant to View

By default, the plant list on the Encyclopedia’s main page contains all 7500 plant species. If you have used the Plant Filter to
filter out certain plant types, the list is smaller.
To select a plant in the plant list, use the scrollbar beside the plant list to scroll through the list of plants, then click on the
plant you want to view. By default, common plant names are listed in the plant list. You can switch to Latin names by
clicking the Latin button.
If you know the name of the plant you are looking for, you can locate it more quickly by typing the first few letters of the
plant’s name in the Search Edit field above the plant list. The list of plants will move to the closest match as you type.

Viewing Plant Information

The Encyclopedia’s main page displays images and basic information about the currently selected plant.
To view plant information:

1. Select Insert > Landscape > Gardening > Plant Encyclopedia, or click on the Landscape toolbar.
2. Select the plant you want to view information about.
3. Basic information is displayed on the main page, which is described below.
Usage. This window lists all the possible ways you can use the plant. Click one of the usage options to view a brief
description of the usage in the Plant Usage catalog.
Soil/Zone/Lifetime. The window below the Usage window indicates Soil Preference (alkaline, acidic, heavy, etc.), Zone
(ranging from 1 for Sub-Arctic to 10 for Sub-Tropical), and Lifetime (the life expectancy of the plant in years). Each of the
icons/items in this window has a tool tip. If you hover your cursor over the icon/item, a small pop-up window appears
displaying a brief description of the item. For example, if you hover your cursor over the soil preference icon, the window
will display the preferred soil type that the icon indicates.

- 135 -
Chapter 15: Landscaping

Plant Type and Needs. The window to the right of the Usage window indicates the following:

Each of the icons in this window has a tool tip. If you hover your cursor over the icon, a small pop-up window appears
displaying a brief description of the icon.
Season Color Diagram. This circle gives you an idea of what you can expect from the chosen plant throughout the year.
The outer circle shows the months in which the plant blooms, and the color of its flowers. Fruits are also indicated in this
circle, showing the period when they ripen, and the color of their fruit. The inner circle indicates when the plant has foliage
(including autumn leaves), and the color of its leaves.

Plant Views
The main page has two views: overhead and profile. The overhead view shows you a textured view of the plant from above.

The profile view gives you an idea of the plant’s height and spread, and shows you what your plant will look like in 3D.

Note: The profile view shows the plant’s total height. If the plant is a vegetable, this includes the underground part. If the
plant is a water plant, the underwater part is included. The width of bushes and flowers can be affected by how they are
pruned. The plant will reach optimum size at maturity and under favorable conditions.

Plant Care Calendar

The Encyclopedia’s Plant Care Calendar page shows the required monthly care (planting, watering, fertilizing, etc.) for the
currently selected plant.

- 136 -
 World Map Page

To see detailed information about each plant care task, click on the icon. A Care dialog appears displaying helpful
animations and tips on how to complete a given task. Click Animate to play the animation, and Stop to stop it. Clicking the
tools icon in the top right corner of the dialog opens a dialog showing the tools you will need to complete the task.

World Map Page

The Encyclopedia’s World Map page displays a world map that indicates the region of the world where the currently
selected plant originates. Right-click on a highlighted region to see details about the climate and growing conditions most
favorable for plants indigenous to the region.

Notebook Page
You can use the Encyclopedia’s Notebook page to enter and view notes about the currently selected plant. To select a plant,
scroll through the list and click on it, or use the Search Edit field above the plant list to enter the first few letters of the plant
name and find a quick match. Click in the box on the right side of the page and type your note. When you move to another
page in the Encyclopedia, your text is saved automatically.

- 137 -
Chapter 15: Landscaping

Picture Page
The Encyclopedia’s Picture page contains a collage of thumbnail images of all the available plants in the plant list. You can
browse through the images manually or by using the arrows at the top of the page.

To view a large picture of a selected plant, click the View Large button at the top of the page.

To return to the thumbnail views, click the View Thumbnail button .

Diseases Page
The Encyclopedia’s Diseases page lists the possible diseases that may affect a plant. By default, the disease list contains the
diseases that can affect the currently selected plant. If you want to view a comprehensive list of diseases for all plants, click
All in the bottom right corner of the page.

When you select a disease in the disease list, you will see a picture of the disease, details of its symptoms in the Symptoms
windows, and care information in the Control window.

- 138 -
 Filtering the Plant List

If you want to search in reverse to find all plants affected by a specific disease, click the Filter button at the bottom of the
page. This opens the main Encyclopedia page. To restore your plant list, return to the Diseases page and click the All
button.

Filtering the Plant List

The Encyclopedia’s Plant Filter lets you filter out unwanted plants from your plant list by specifying various criteria.
To use the Plant Filter:
1. Select the Plant Filter tab on the left side of the Encyclopedia window.

2. Each Encyclopedia page has different options. Click on the tabs along the top of the Encyclopedia window to select the
page you want, then select the options you want.
The main Encyclopedia page lets you select the Plant Type, Watering Needs, Lighting Preference, Soil Preference, Zone,
Color (for flower, leaf, autumn leaf, and fruit), Height and Blooming Season.
The Plant Care Calendar page lets you select the Complexity of Care required, Speed of Growth (for both height and
spread), Life Expectancy and Usage.
The World Map page lets you select the region of the world where the plants originate. For example, if you wanted to
find plants for an Asian-themed water garden, you would click on the Asian region of the map to exclude any plants
that aren’t indigenous to Asia.
The Notebook page lets you filter plants by notes that you’ve entered previously on this page. For example, you could
enter the note “Front Yard” for all plants that you want to use in your front yard. When you are ready to lay out the
front yard of your landscape plan you can go back to the Plant Filter and limit your plant list to only the plants you’ve
pre-chosen for your front yard.
The Picture page lets you limit your plant list by the part of the plant shown in its photo (leaf, bark, fruit, etc.).
The filter option available on the Diseases page is different, because it affects the disease list, not the plant list. To use
this filter, click on the image that represents the part of the plant affected or type of infestation, then select the
Encyclopedia tab on the left side of the window to switch to the regular Diseases page. For example, if you are
considering planting lilies or daffodils in your garden, and want to know what type of diseases these bulb plants may
encounter, click the Bulb image on the Diseases page (in Plant Filter mode), then go into Encyclopedia mode and
select the Diseases page.
3. Select the criteria for filtering.
When you are in Plant Filter mode, each icon and scale represents a specific plant criterion. As soon as you click on an
icon or move a slider, filtering begins. To deselect an icon, click on it again.

Note: If some of the icons disappear, it is because no such plant is selectable within the current criteria. For example, if
you select minimal water, the climber plant type icon will disappear because there are no climbing plants that will
accept minimal watering.

If you select more than one icon within a single group, then all plants with any of the checked properties will be
selected. For example, selecting maximum light and medium light will exclude all plants that flourish under minimal
light (shade) conditions. If icons/sliders of more than one type are checked/moved, then plants that satisfy all the chosen
criteria will be selected. For example, if you click on the deciduous tree icon in the Type box, the full sun icon in the

- 139 -
Chapter 15: Landscaping

Lighting Preference box, and the white square on the Color box, then only hardwood trees that flourish in full
sunlight, require minimal watering, and produce white flowers will be selected.
4. The total number of plants available — based on the filters you have applied — is indicated on the leaf in the upper
right corner of the window. If at any time you want to restore the complete list of plants, click Reset.

Inserting Plants from the Encyclopedia

Platinum | Ultimate | Professional
The Plant Encyclopedia contains more than 7500 plant species, not all of which are included in the catalog. You can insert a
plant directly from the Encyclopedia if you want.
To insert a plant from the Encyclopedia:

1. Select Insert > Landscape > Gardening > Plant Encyclopedia, or click on the Landscape toolbar.
2. In the Plant Encyclopedia, locate and select the plant you want to insert. To select a plant in the plant list, use the scroll-
bar beside the plant list to scroll through the list of plants, then click on the plant you want to view. By default, common
plant names are listed in the plant list. You can switch to Latin names by clicking the Latin button.
If you know the name of the plant you are looking for, you can locate it more quickly by typing the first few letters of
the plant’s name in the Search edit field above the plant list. The list of plants will move to the closest match as you type.

3. Click the Select button. The Encyclopedia closes, and the plant is attached to your cursor.
4. Insert the plant in your plan.
5. Right-click and select Finish.

Adding Plants to the Catalog from the Encyclopedia

Although the catalog contains a vast array of plants for you to insert, it does not contain all the plants listed in the Plant
Encyclopedia.
You can add any plant from the Plant Encyclopedia to any catalog by following the steps below.
To add a plant from the encyclopedia to the current catalog:
1. Select File > Catalogs > Element Manager.
2. In the Element Manager dialog, select or create the group you want to add the plant to.
3. Select Edit > Add Element.
4. In the Plants dialog, select the Plant Info tab.
5. Click the Encyclopedia button to launch the Plant Encyclopedia.
6. On the Encyclopedia’s main page, select the desired plant in the plant list.
7. Click Select. Notice that the Plant Info page of the Plants dialog is now full with the selected plant’s information.
8. In the Name edit box, specify a name for your plant.
9. Specify the remaining properties (Size, Quantity or Behavior) if desired, then click OK in the Plants dialog. Note that
the settings on the Appearance page have no effect on the plant’s appearance. The appearance of a plant is determined
by settings in the Encyclopedia.
10. Click OK in the Element Manager dialog. The plant is added to your catalog.

- 140 -
 Garden Beds, Ponds & Fills

Garden Beds, Ponds & Fills

In the real world, one of the first things you need to do to create a garden is to dig out a bed for your plants. In Virtual
Architect home design software, you can create a garden bed instantly by simply picking points to define the outline of the
bed. The bed is then automatically filled with a material of your choice, such as soil or bark.
The versatile Fills tool is handy for more than just garden beds. Choose the Water fill to create a pond, or the Sand fill to
create a horseshoe pit. The possibilities are endless.

Creating Fills
Platinum | Ultimate | Professional
You can use the Fills tool to define an area filled with soil, sand, gravel, concrete, bark or water. You define the area by
picking points to draw its outline. Filled areas automatically hug the terrain they are inserted on.
To create a filled area:

1. Select Insert > Landscape > Fills, or click on the Landscape toolbar.
2. In the catalog, select your fill material.
3. Select a start point for your filled area.
4. Continue selecting points to define the boundary of the filled area. Note that the last point picked always closes back
to the start point, so you don’t have to pick the start point again.
5. Right-click and select Finish.

Note: You cannot insert a fill on top of another fill.

Moving a Filled Area

You can move a filled area using the Move tool.
To move a filled area:
1. Click on the filled area to select it.
2. Right-click and select Move, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Move.
3. Click and drag the filled area to move it, then release your mouse button.

Rotating a Filled Area

You can rotate a filled area using the Rotate tool.
To rotate a filled area:
1. Click on the filled area to select it.
2. Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Rotate.
3. Hover your pointer over the corner you want to rotate around.
4. Click and drag to rotate the fill, then release your mouse button.

Resizing a Filled Area

You can resize a filled area by stretching one of its edges.
To resize a filled area by stretching it:
1. Click on the filled area to select it.
2. Click on the edge you want to stretch.

3. Hover your pointer over the solid blue grip to display the Move cursor. Alternatively you can select the Move Edge
tool on the right-click menu.
4. Click and drag to stretch the fill.
5. Release your mouse button.

- 141 -
Chapter 15: Landscaping

Reshaping a Filled Area

You can change the shape of a filled area by stretching its corners. You can do this by clicking and dragging its grips.
To reshape a filled area by stretching:
1. Click on the filled area to select it. A grab handle is displayed at each corner.

2. Click and drag a corner grip to stretch the filled area.

3. Release your mouse button.

Curving a Filled Area

You can curve the edge of a fill using the Curve tool. Once the tool is active, you can click and drag the edge to curve it, or
select a point to curve to.
To curve a fill edge by clicking and dragging:
1. Click on the fill edge that you want to curve.
2. Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve.
3. Click and drag the fill edge to the desired curve.
4. Release your mouse button.
To curve a fill edge to a selected point:
1. Click on the fill edge you want to curve.
2. Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve.
3. Select the point you want to curve to. The fill edge automatically curves to the point.
4. Click to finish.

Changing the Fill Material

You can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly change the look of a fill.
To change the fill material:
1. Display your model in 3D, and make sure the fill is visible in the view.

2. Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click on any tabbed toolbar.

3. In the catalog panel, select the material you want to apply. The Landscape Materials category contains fill materials like
water, sand and gravel.
4. Click anywhere on the surface of the fill. The material is applied immediately.
5. Right-click and select Finish.

- 142 -
 Deleting a Filled Area

Deleting a Filled Area

You can delete a filled area in a couple of easy steps.
To delete a filled area:
1. Click on the filled area to select it.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Note: Deleting a fill returns the terrain to its original state where the fill was located.

Edging
Edging can be an attractive accent around gardens, ponds, sidewalks, driveways, and other areas. It can also help retain fill
materials and keep weeds out of your garden. You can choose from PVC lawn edging, wood posts, or rails.
Drawing edging is easy — just point and click to define the start and end point of the edging, then keep clicking to add more
segments.

Inserting Edging
Platinum | Ultimate | Professional
Edging can be an attractive accent around gardens, ponds, sidewalks, driveways, and other areas. It can also help retain fill
materials and keep weeds out of your garden. You can choose from PVC lawn edging, wood posts, or rails. You insert
edging by simply picking points to define the end points and direction of the edging.
To insert edging:

1. Select Insert > Landscape > Edging, or click on the Landscape toolbar.
2. In the catalog, select your edging material.
3. Select a start point for the edging.
4. Move your cursor in the direction you want the edging to run, then select an endpoint for the edging. You can continue
selecting points in any direction to add more sections to the edging if you want.
5. Right-click and select Finish.

Tip: You can also insert decorative borders around a garden. See Inserting Exterior Accessories on page 168.

Cleaning Up the Corners of Edging

If you edged around an area with posts or rails, you’ll notice that the edging members connect on center at the corners. You
may want to lengthen the members to form completely flush intersections.

To clean up the corners of edging:

1. Click on one of the edging members. Blue grab handles are displayed at the ends of the member.
2. Hover your pointer over the end grip to display the Lengthen cursor.
3. Click and drag the edging so that it meets up with the outside of the member it is connected to, then release your mouse
button.
4. Select the other member.
5. Click and drag the end so that it meets up with the inside edge of the connecting member, then release your mouse
button.

- 143 -
Chapter 15: Landscaping

Moving Edging
You can move a piece of edging by clicking and dragging it. If the member is attached to any other edging members, the
other members move along with it.
To move edging:
1. Select the edging you want to move. If you want to move multiple members, use Shift+click to select the other members.

2. Hover your pointer over the center blue grip to display the Move cursor.
3. Click and drag to move the edging, then release your mouse button.

Rotating Edging
You can use the Rotate tool to rotate edging about a selected point.
To rotate edging:
1. Select the edging. A grip is displayed at the center and ends of the edging.
2. Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Rotate.
3. Hover your pointer over the point you want to rotate around.
4. Click and drag to rotate the edging, then release your mouse button.

Changing the Length of Edging

You can lengthen or shorten edging by clicking and dragging its end points.
To change the length of edging:
1. Select the edging you want to lengthen or shorten. Grips are displayed at the center and ends of the edging.
2. Hover your pointer over the end you want to stretch. The Lengthen cursor is displayed.
3. Click and drag to lengthen or shorten the edging, then release your mouse button.

Breaking Edging
When you create a break in edging, you can select and edit the portions on either side of the break independently.
To create a break in edging:
1. Select the edging you want to break.
2. Right-click and select Break, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Break.
3. Click where you want to break the edging.

Curving Edging
You can curve a section of edging using the Curve tool. Once the tool is active, you can click and drag the edging to curve
it, or select a point to curve to.
To curve edging by clicking and dragging:
1. Click the section of edging that you want to curve.
2. Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve.
3. Click and drag the edging to the desired curve.
4. Release your mouse button.
To curve edging to a selected point:
1. Click the section of edging that you want to curve.
2. Right-click in and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve.
3. Select the point you want to curve to. The edging automatically curves to the point.
4. Click to finish.

- 144 -
 Editing the Height and Width of Edging

Editing the Height and Width of Edging

You can edit the height or width (thickness) of edging on the edging’s Basic property page.
To edit the height or width of edging:
1. Click on the edging to select it. Use Shift+click to select multiple segments if necessary.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. To edit the height of the edging, change the value in the Edge Height edit box.
4. To edit the width (thickness) of the edging, change the value in the Edge Width edit box. Note that this variable is not
available for PVC edging.
5. If the edging is post edging, you can control the spacing between posts by editing the value in the Approx. Edge Spac-
ing edit box.
6. Click OK.

Changing the Edging Material

You can apply a different color or material to edging using the Materials Paintbrush.
To apply different materials to edging:
1. Display your model in 3D, and make sure the edging is visible in the view.

2. Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click on any tabbed toolbar.

3. In the catalog panel, select the material you want to apply.
4. Click on the edging.
5. Right-click and select Finish.

Deleting Edging
You can delete edging in a couple of easy steps.
To delete edging:
1. Select the edging to remove. You can select multiple edging segments using Shift+click.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Fences & Gates

Fences can add beauty, privacy and security to your property. Fences are drawn with ease in Virtual Architect home design
software. Just point and click to fence off a yard in seconds! The catalog contains an assortment of fences in a variety of
materials, including concrete, stone and wood. You can even add a white picket fence for that classic look.
Once you’ve drawn your fence you can easily pop a gate into it. You can choose a style that matches your fence, or choose
an entirely different style to create a stylish accent.

Inserting a Fence
Platinum | Ultimate | Professional
To insert a fence, you draw it just like a wall by selecting a start point and end point. This allows you to create a fence of any
length. You can continue selecting points in other directions to add on to the fencing (if you want to fence around your yard,
for example).
To insert a fence:

1. Select Insert > Landscape > Fences/Gates > Fences, or click on the Landscape toolbar.
2. In the catalog, select the fence type you want to insert.
3. Select a start point for the fence.
4. Move your cursor in the direction you want the fence to run. The fence stretches as you move your cursor.

- 145 -
Chapter 15: Landscaping

5. Select an end point for the fence. If you want you can continue adding sections to the fence in any direction by simply
selecting points.
6. Right-click and select Finish.

Tip: If you have inserted a site boundary in your plan, you can draw your fence on top of the lot lines for ease. The fence
then acts as a visual indicator of your property extents in 3D.

Stretching a Fence Layout

You can stretch a fence layout by clicking and dragging one of the fence segments.
To stretch a fence layout:
1. Click on the fence segment you want to move.

2. Position your pointer over the center blue grip to display the Move cursor.
3. Click and drag to stretch the layout, then release your mouse button.

Changing the Length of a Fence

You can lengthen or shorten a fence by clicking and dragging its end points.
To change the length of a fence:
1. Select the fence you want to lengthen or shorten.
2. Position your cursor over the fence end that you want to stretch. The Lengthen cursor is displayed.
3. Click and drag to lengthen or shorten the fence, then release your mouse button.

Creating a Break in a Fence

When you create a break in a fence, you can select the fence portions on either side of the break independently. You may
want to insert one or more breaks in a fence so that you can then remove certain segments of it.
To create a break in a fence:
1. Select the fence you want to break.
2. Right-click and select Break, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Break.
3. Click where you want to break the fence.

Parts of a Fence

Editing the Properties of a Fence

You can change the height of a fence, specify whether or not you want the fence to hug the terrain, edit the size and position
of fence posts, and edit the dimensions of the rails and boards.
To edit the properties of a fence:
1. Click on the fence to select it.

- 146 -
 Applying Different Materials to a Fence

2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. To change the type of fence, click on the appropriate graphic in the Type area. Choose from General, Privacy, Picket or
Ranch. The General style just inserts a plain, flat surface.
4. To change the height of the fence, edit the values in the Fence Height edit box.
5. If you want the bottom of the fence to hug the terrain, check the Hug Terrain? check box, then select either Raked or
Stepped from the Slope Type drop box.
6. To change the dimensions or position of the fence posts, edit the post parameters in the Posts area.
Secondary Post Position. Choosing Centered starts the spacing of intermediate posts from the middle of the fence to
create a balanced look. Choosing From Start starts the spacing of intermediate posts from the first main post.
Max. Post Spacing. The maximum allowable spacing between posts. If you stretch the fence, the spacing between
posts increases. More posts are added to prevent the spacing from exceeding the maximum.
Post Width. The width (and depth) of fence posts.
Post Extension. The distance the fence posts extend past the top of the fence boards.
Post Rotation. Determines the rotation of the connecting post where two fence segments connect. Choosing Half Way
rotates the connecting post half way between the angle. Choosing None leaves the connecting post aligned to the first
fence.
7. To change the dimensions of the top, middle or bottom rail, edit the rail parameters in the Rails area.
Rail Width. The width of the rail members.
Rail Depth. The thickness of the rail members.
Top Rail Height. The distance from the bottom of the fence to the top rail.
Middle Rail Height. The distance from the top rail to the middle rail.
Bottom Rail Height. The distance from the middle rail to the bottom rail.
8. To change the dimensions of the boards in a privacy or picket fence, edit the board parameters in the Boards area.
Board Style. Choose either Squared or Pointed. You would typically see pointed boards on a picket fence.
Board Width. The width of one fence board.
Board Depth. The thickness of one fence board.
Board Spacing. The distance from the center of one board to the center of the next board.
Board Offset. The offset of the bottom of the fence boards from the ground.
9. When you’re done editing properties, click OK.

Applying Different Materials to a Fence

You can apply a different color or material to the boards, posts or rails of a fence. For example, you can select a different type
of wood for a wood fence.
To apply different materials to a fence:
1. Display your model in 3D, and make sure the fence is visible in the view.

2. Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click on any tabbed toolbar.

3. In the catalog panel, select the material you want to apply.
4. Click on the fence component you want to apply the material to. Materials are applied separately to the individual parts
of the fence (fence boards, posts and rails). Clicking on one component will apply the material to all components of the
same type. For example, clicking on one post will apply the material to all posts.
5. When you are finished applying materials, right-click and select Finish.

Deleting a Fence
You can delete a fence in a couple of easy steps.

- 147 -
Chapter 15: Landscaping

To delete a fence:
1. Select the fence. You can select multiple fence segments using Shift+click.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Inserting a Gate
Platinum | Ultimate | Professional
The catalog contains a variety of gate types, including wood, picket and ranch style gates. Gates just pop themselves right
into fences. Naturally, if you are inserting a gate in a fence, you want to choose a gate size that corresponds to the fence size.
For example, if your fence is a 6’ wood privacy fence, you would likely choose the 6’ wood privacy gate. Gates are shown
slightly open so you can identify them easily in 2D and 3D views.
To insert a gate:

1. Select Insert > Landscape > Fences/Gates > Gates, or click the down arrow next to the Fences button on the
Landscape toolbar and select Gates.
2. In the catalog, select the gate you want to insert.
3. Position the gate where you want it, then click to insert it. The gate will automatically pop itself into the fence when
you position it in the fence.

4. Right-click and select Finish.

Moving a Gate
You can move a gate back and forth inside a fence by simply clicking and dragging it.
To move a gate:
1. Click on the gate to select it.

2. Hover your pointer over the center grip to display the Move cursor.
3. Click and drag to move the gate, then release your mouse button.

Flipping a Gate
You can use the Flip Opening tool to flip an entire gate around. If the gate originally opened out, it now opens in; if it was
hinged on the left, it is now hinged on the right (and vice versa).
To flip a gate:
1. Click the gate to select it.
2. Right-click in the drawing area and select Flip Opening, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Flip Opening.

Flipping a Gate’s Swing

Use the Flip Swing tool to flip only the swing of a gate. The gate will be hinged on the opposite side, but it will still open in
the same direction, either in or out.
To flip a gate swing:
1. Click the gate to select it.
2. Right-click in the drawing area and select Flip Swing, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Flip Swing.

- 148 -
 Editing the Properties of a Gate

Editing the Properties of a Gate

You can change the height and width of a gate as well as the dimensions of the rails and boards. You can also control how
far the gate is open in 2D and 3D views.
To edit the properties of a gate:
1. Click on the gate to select it.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. To change the type of gate, click on the appropriate graphic in the Type area. Choose from General, Privacy, Picket or
Ranch. The General style just inserts a plain, flat door.
4. To change the overall size of the gate, edit the values in the Gate Width and Gate Height edit boxes.
5. To change the swing type, select either Left or Right from the Swing Type drop box. This determines which side the
gate is hinged on.
6. If you want to change how far the gate is open in 3D views, edit the percentage in the 3D Percent Open edit box. To
change how far the gate is open in 2D views, change the percentage in the 2D Percent Open edit box.
7. To change the dimensions of the top, middle or bottom rail, edit the rail parameters in the Rails area.
Rail Width. The width of the rail members.
Rail Depth. The thickness of the rail members.
Top Rail Height. The distance from the bottom of the gate to the top rail.
Middle Rail Height. The distance from the top rail to the middle rail.
Bottom Rail Height. The distance from the middle rail to the bottom rail.
8. To change the dimensions of the boards in a privacy or picket fence, edit the board parameters in the Boards area.
Board Style. Choose either Squared or Pointed. You would typically see pointed boards on a picket fence.
Board Width. The width of one fence board.
Board Depth. The thickness of one fence board.
Board Spacing. The distance from the center of one board to the center of the next board.
Board Offset. The offset of the bottom of the gate boards from the ground.
9. When you’re done editing properties, click OK.

Deleting a Gate
You can delete a gate in a couple of easy steps. When you delete a gate, the fence returns to its original state.
To delete a gate:
1. Select the gate.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Sheds
The Shed Builder Wizard steps you through the creation of a custom shed, then builds it for you instantly! Simply select the
shed style you want, then enter the dimensions you would like it to have. Next, define the desired door/window
combination, and then select custom materials for the roof, walls, floor, door and window. Finally, just click to insert your
new shed where you want it!
Once inserted, you can further edit the shed’s individual components if needed.
Note: If you would like to insert a pre-made shed from the catalog, use the Exterior Structures tool. You can find sheds in
the Storage and Enclosures category of the catalog.

Building a Shed with the Shed Builder Wizard

Platinum | Ultimate | Professional

- 149 -
Chapter 15: Landscaping

The Shed Builder Wizard will create a custom shed for you in a few easy steps. All you need to do is select a shed style, enter
the desired dimensions, and specify the door and window placement. You can even select what materials you would like to
use for the roof, walls, floor, door and window.
Once you’ve inserted the shed in your plan, you can further edit its individual components to achieve the exact size and
appearance you want.
To build a shed:

1. Select Insert > Design Wizards > Shed Builder, or click the down arrow next to the Design Wizards button on
the Building toolbar and select Shed Builder.

2. On the Welcome screen, click Next.

3. On the next screen, click on the graphic that most closely resembles the style of shed you would like to build.
4. Enter the desired dimensions for the shed in the Length and Width edit boxes.
5. Click Next.

- 150 -
 Building a Shed with the Shed Builder Wizard

6. On the Door and Window Configuration screen, click on the door/window combination that you would like for the
front of the shed. If you would like a window on the left side of the shed, enable the Include Window on left side check
box. If you would like a window on the right side of the shed, enable the Include Window on right side check box.
7. Click Next.

8. On the Shed Elements screen you can select a custom materials to use for the shed’s roof, walls, floor, door and window.
Just click the desired elements button, then make a selection from the catalog. If you have defined your own shed con-
figuration in the Library Manager, you can simply select it from the Shed Configuration drop box.

- 151 -
Chapter 15: Landscaping

9. On the final screen, click Finish. The shed is attached to your cursor, ready to be inserted.
10. Position the shed where you want it, then click to insert it.

Tip: If you would like to insert a pre-made shed from the catalog, use the Exterior Structures tool. You can find sheds in the
Storage and Enclosures category of the catalog.

Moving a Shed
You can move a shed that you have created by creating a selection window around it, then using the Move tool.
To move a shed:
1. In 2D plan view, click and drag a selection window around the entire shed.

2. Right-click and select Move, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Move. The Move cursor is displayed.
3. Click and drag the shed to move it, then release your mouse button.

Rotating a Shed
Once you have inserted your shed, you may find that you need to rotate it. You can do this easily using the Rotate tool.
To rotate a shed:
1. In 2D plan view, click and drag a selection window around the entire shed.

2. Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Rotate. The Rotate cursor is displayed.
3. Select a base point for the rotation, such as a corner of the shed.
4. Without holding your mouse button down, move your mouse to rotate the element. The element will rotate in the di-
rection you move the mouse.
5. When the shed is at the desired rotation, click to anchor it in its new position.

Editing a Shed
If you have created and inserted a shed with the Shed Builder Wizard, you can edit its roof, walls, floor, door and window
individually. Just click on the element you want to edit, then edit it as you would if it were part of a house. For example, you
can stretch the walls to make the shed bigger or smaller, or select a different window size.

Launching the Shed Builder Wizard Automatically at Startup

If you want you can choose to launch the Shed Builder Wizard automatically every time you start the program or a new
project.

- 152 -
 Creating a Custom Shed Builder Wizard Configuration

To launch the Shed Builder Wizard automatically at startup:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Program Settings dialog, select General in the left column.
3. In the Startup area, check the Launch wizard when starting new project check box.
4. Select Shed Builder from the drop box.
5. Click OK.

Creating a Custom Shed Builder Wizard Configuration

A Shed Builder Wizard configuration determines what elements are used for a shed’s roof, walls, floor, door and window.
You are asked to select a configuration for your shed when you run the Shed Builder Wizard.
You can edit any of the existing configurations that are available in the Shed Builder Wizard, or create your own.
Customized configurations are saved automatically and will be available when you run the Shed Builder Wizard in the
current project, or any other project.
To access the shed configuration library:

1. Select File > Catalogs > Library Manager, or click the down arrow next to the Catalogs button on the Standard
toolbar and select Library Manager.
2. In the Library Manager dialog, select Libraries > Shed Configuration.
To add a new configuration to the list:
1. Select Edit > Add Configuration, or right-click in the Shed Configuration window and select Add Configuration. An
entry named ‘New Configuration’ is added to the list.
2. Select the new configuration in the list. If you want to rename it, select Edit > Rename Configuration, or right-click
and select Rename Configuration. Then, type the new name and press ENTER.
To edit a shed configuration:
1. Select the configuration in the list. The element selections for the configuration are listed in the center pane.
2. In the center pane, select an element type you want to specify a style for (e.g. Wall).
3. Click the Select button.
4. In the Catalog Access dialog, select the specific style you want to apply to the selected element type, then click OK.
5. Continue selecting styles for the remaining element types.
To delete a configuration from the list:
1. Select the configuration in the list.
2. Select Edit > Delete Configuration, or right-click and select Delete Configuration, or simply press the Delete key on
your keyboard.

Decks
A great way to add more living space to your home without building an addition is to build a deck. With outdoor living
spaces becoming more and more desirable, Virtual Architect home design software gives you all the tools you need to create
the exact look you want, quickly and easily.
The Deck Builder Wizard makes building a deck so simple — just select the material and shape you want, and the deck is
built for you automatically. Or if you prefer, you can create the precise size and shape you want using the Deck tool. You
can even add levels to your deck if you want for a truly customized look. Once you have the main structure up, you can
point and click to insert stairs of your choice. You can even cut an opening in the deck if you want.

Decks
There are two ways to build a deck in Virtual Architect home design software. You can let the Deck Builder Wizard do all
the work for you — just select the material and shape you want, and the deck is built automatically. If you want to be able
to specify a precise size and shape, use the Deck tool to select points that define the outline of the deck.

- 153 -
Chapter 15: Landscaping

Regardless of how a deck is created, you can edit practically every aspect of it after it has been inserted. To display a menu
of deck editing commands, select the deck and then right-click your mouse. Selecting Decks Help at the bottom of the menu
displays a list of help topics relating to decks.

Building a Deck with the Deck Builder Wizard

Platinum | Ultimate | Professional
The Deck Builder Wizard takes all the work out of building a deck because it does it all for you! Just select the decking
material and deck shape, enter the dimensions you want, then point and click to insert the deck. By default, decks include
posts, beams and railings.
After inserting a deck you can move, stretch, rotate, raise or lower it if needed, as well as edit its properties, which include
settings for posts, railings and skirting.
To build a deck using the Deck Builder Wizard:
1. In the Building Locations drop box, select the location you want to associate the deck with. The height of a deck is de-
termined by the Height above current location variable in the deck properties. You can edit this value after the deck
has been inserted if necessary.

2. Select Insert > Design Wizards > Deck Builder, or click the down arrow next to the Design Wizards button on
the Building toolbar and select Deck Builder.

3. In the Deck Wizard dialog, click Next.

- 154 -
 Building a Deck with the Deck Builder Wizard

4. Select the decking material you would like to use.

5. Click Next.

6. In the Shape area, click on the shape that most closely resembles the shape you want to create. Remember that you can
edit the shape after the deck has been inserted.
7. In the Size area, specify the desired dimensions for the deck.
8. Click Next.

- 155 -
Chapter 15: Landscaping

9. In the Deck Rotation area, select the desired rotation for your deck. This is how the deck will be oriented when it is at-
tached to your cursor.
10. In the Decking Direction area, select the direction you want the deck boards to run.
11. Click Next.

12. Click Finish. The Deck Wizard closes, and the deck is attached to your cursor, ready to be inserted.
13. Position the deck where you want it, then click to insert it.

Building a Deck with the Deck Tool

Platinum | Ultimate | Professional
You can use the Deck tool to build a deck of virtually any shape and size.
Once you’ve inserted a deck you can move, stretch, rotate, raise or lower it if needed, as well as edit its properties, which
include settings for posts, railings and skirting.

- 156 -
 Launching the Deck Builder Wizard Automatically at Startup

To create a deck:
1. In the Building Locations drop box, select the location you want to associate the deck with. The height of a deck is de-
termined by the Height above current location variable in the deck properties. You can edit this value after the deck
has been inserted if necessary.

2. Select Insert > Landscape > Decks > Decks, or click on the Landscape toolbar.
3. In the catalog, select the decking material you want to use.
4. Select a start point for the deck outline. Continue selecting points until the outline is defined. (You do not have to select
the start point again because the last point you pick is always closed back to the start point.)

5. Right-click and select Finish.

Launching the Deck Builder Wizard Automatically at Startup

If you want you can choose to launch the Deck Builder Wizard automatically every time you start the program or a new
project.
To launch the Deck Builder Wizard automatically at startup:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Program Settings dialog, select General in the left column.
3. In the Startup area, check the Launch wizard when starting new project check box.
4. Select Deck Builder from the drop box.
5. Click OK.

Moving a Deck
You can move a deck using the Move tool.
To move a deck:
1. Click on one of the deck’s edges to select the deck.
2. Right-click and select Move, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Move.
3. Click and drag the deck to move it, then release your mouse button.

Rotating a Deck
You can use the Rotate tool to rotate a deck about a selected point.
To rotate a deck:
1. Select the deck by clicking on one of its edges. A grip is displayed at each corner.
2. Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Rotate.
3. Hover your pointer over the point you want to rotate around.
4. Click and drag to rotate the deck, then release your mouse button.

Note: When you rotate a deck, the direction of the deck boards does not change. You can change the decking direction if
you want.

- 157 -
Chapter 15: Landscaping

Changing the Direction of Deck Boards

You can use the Set Decking Direction tool to change the direction of your deck boards.
To change the direction of deck boards:
1. Select the deck by clicking on one of its edges.
2. Right-click and select Set Decking Direction, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Set Decking Direction.
3. Select two points to define a line that runs in the direction you want the deck boards to run. The deck boards update to
match the direction of the line.

Stretching a Deck
You can stretch a deck in any direction by clicking and dragging one of its edges.
To stretch a deck:
1. Click on the deck edge you want to stretch.

2. Hover your pointer over the center blue grip to display the Move cursor. Alternatively you can select the Move Edge
tool on the right-click menu.
3. Click and drag to stretch the deck, then release your mouse button.
If you would like to stretch only a portion of a deck edge, you can accomplish this by adding a node to the deck edge. See
Adding a Node to a Deck.

Reshaping a Deck
You can change the shape of a deck by stretching any of its corners.
To reshape a deck:
1. Click on the deck to select it. A grip is displayed at each corner.
2. Click and drag a corner grip to stretch the deck. Alternatively you can select the Stretch tool on the right-click menu.
3. Release your mouse button.
If you would like to stretch only a portion of a deck edge, you can accomplish this by adding a node to the deck edge. See
Adding a Node to a Deck.

Curving a Deck Edge

You can curve a deck edge using the Curve tool. Once the tool is active, you can click and drag the deck edge to curve it, or
select a point to curve to.
To curve a deck edge by clicking and dragging:
1. Click on the deck edge you want to curve.
2. Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve.
3. Click and drag the deck edge to the desired curve.
4. Release your mouse button.
To curve a deck edge to a selected point:
1. Click on the deck edge you want to curve.
2. Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve.
3. Select the point you want to curve to. The deck edge automatically curves to the point.
4. Click to finish.

Changing the Height of a Deck

By default, decks are inserted at a height that is relative to the current building location.
To change the height of a deck:
1. Select the deck by clicking on one of its edges.

- 158 -
 Editing Deck Post Properties

2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. On the Support property page, edit the value in the Height above current location edit box.
4. Click OK.

Editing Deck Post Properties

You can edit a deck’s post type, post spacing and post depth. You can also disable posts altogether if you want.
To edit deck post properties:
1. Select the deck by clicking on one of its edges.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Decks dialog, select the Support tab.
4. If you want to remove posts from the deck, uncheck the Include Posts check box in the Supports area.
5. To select a different member to use for deck posts, click the Select button next to the Include Posts edit box, then make
your selection from the catalog.
6. To change the spacing between posts along beams, edit the value in the Spacing along Beam edit box.
7. To change the depth of the posts in the ground, edit the value in the Depth below ground level edit box. This effec-
tively changes the overall height of the post, but does not affect the portion shown above ground.
8. Click OK.

Editing Deck Footings

You can control the display of footings under your deck by editing deck properties. You can also choose the footing material
you want to use.
To create footings under deck posts:
1. Select the deck by clicking on one of its edges.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. On the Support property page, check the Include Footings check box in the Supports area.
4. Click the Select button next to the Include Footings edit box, then select the desired footing type from the catalog.
5. Click OK.

Editing the Deck Frame

You have complete control over the way a deck is constructed. You can specify the way you want the beams constructed in
relation to the posts. You can also select specific materials to use for deck boards, beams and joists, as well as edit the spacing
and overhang of these members.
To edit the deck frame:
1. Select the deck by clicking on one of its edges.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Decks dialog, select the Frame tab.
4. To change the way the beams are constructed, click on the desired configuration in the Construction area. Beams are the
vertical members that rest on or are attached to the posts, and that support the deck joists.
5. To select a different material for the deck boards, click the Select button in the Decking area, then make your selection
from the catalog.
6. To edit the spacing between deck boards, edit the value in the Spacing edit box in the Decking area.
7. To change the amount the deck boards hang over the deck frame, edit the value in the Overhang edit box in the Decking
area.
8. To adjust the angle of the deck boards in relation to the joists, edit the value in the Angle from Joists edit box.
9. To select a different material for the deck joists, click the Select button in the Joists area, then make your selection from
the catalog.

- 159 -
Chapter 15: Landscaping

10. To edit the spacing between joists, edit the value in the Spacing edit box in the Joists area.
11. To change the amount the joists hang over the beams, edit the value in the Overhang edit box in the Joists area. The
general rule of thumb is to limit the extension to 1/3 of their length.
12. To select a different material for the deck beams, click the Select button in the Beams area, then make your selection
from the catalog.
13. To change the amount the beams extend past each other, edit the value in the Overhang edit box in the Beams area.
14. Once you’ve specified the deck frame properties, click OK.

Controlling the Display of Deck Railings

By default, ground-level and low-level decks do not have railings turned on, while raised-level and second-story decks do.
You can control the display of railings for each side of a deck.
To control the display of deck railings:
1. Select the deck.
2. Click on the edge properties grip (red circle) on the deck edge you want to define.
3. To display a railing on the selected deck edge, enable the Railing check box. If you do not want to display a railing on
the deck edge, clear the Railing check box.
4. If you want to display railings on all deck edges, enable the Apply to all edges check box.
5. Click OK.

Note: If you add stairs to your deck, an opening will be automatically created in the railing.

Changing the Style of a Deck Railing

You can change a deck’s railing type by making a selection on the Accessories property page.
To change a deck’s railing style:
1. Select the deck by clicking on one of its edges.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Decks dialog, select the Accessories tab.
4. In the Railings area, click the Select button.
5. Select the desired railing type from the catalog.
6. Click OK.

Controlling the Display of Deck Skirting

Skirting is basically screening such as lattice along the bottom of a deck that conceals the underside of the deck frame. It can
also keep out animals and debris. Most decks do not display skirting by default. You can control the display of skirting for
each deck edge.
To control the display of skirting on your deck:
1. Select the deck by clicking on one of its edges.
2. Click on the edge properties grip (red circle) on the deck edge you want to define.
3. To display skirting on the selected deck edge, enable the Skirting check box. If you do not want to display skirting on
the deck edge, clear the Skirting check box.
4. If you want to display skirting on all deck edges, enable the Apply to all edges check box.
5. Click OK.

Changing the Skirting Material on a Deck

You can change a deck’s skirting material by making a selection on the Accessories property page.

- 160 -
 Deleting a Deck

To change a deck’s skirting material:

1. Select the deck.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Decks dialog, select the Accessories tab.
4. In the Skirting area, click the Select button.
5. Select the desired skirting material from the catalog.
6. Click OK.

Deleting a Deck
You can remove a deck completely in a couple of easy steps.
To remove a deck:
1. Click on one of the deck’s edges to select the deck.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Note: If you added stairs to your deck, you need to remove them separately.

Deck Openings
Once you have inserted a deck you can create an opening in the deck if desired using the Cut Opening tool on the right-click
menu.
Once created you can resize, reshape or curve the deck opening.

Inserting an Opening in a Deck

Once you have created a deck, you can insert a custom opening in it of virtually any shape and size using the Cut Opening
tool.
You create the opening by picking points to define its outline.
To insert an opening in a deck:
1. Select the deck by clicking on one of its edges.
2. Right-click and select Cut Opening, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Cut Opening.
3. Select a start point for the opening.
4. Continue selecting points to define the opening. As you select points, the opening is created. The last point picked is
always connected back to the start point to form a closed shape, so you don’t have to pick the start point again.
5. When you have selected your final point, right-click and select Finish.

Resizing a Deck Opening

You can resize a deck opening by clicking and dragging one of its edges.
To stretch a deck opening:
1. Select the deck.

2. Hover your pointer over the center blue grip of the edge that you want to move. This displays the Move cursor. Al-
ternatively you can select the Move Edge tool from the right-click menu.
3. Click and drag in the direction you want to stretch, then release your mouse button.

Reshaping a Deck Opening

You can change the shape of a deck opening by stretching its corners. You can do this by clicking and dragging.
To reshape a deck opening by stretching:
1. Select the deck.

- 161 -
Chapter 15: Landscaping

2. Click and drag the corners of the opening to stretch it, then release your mouse button. Alternatively you can select the
Stretch tool from the right-click menu.

Curving a Deck Opening Edge

You can curve an opening edge using the Curve tool. Once the tool is active, you can click and drag the opening edge to
curve it, or select a point to curve to.
To curve an opening edge by clicking and dragging:
1. Click on the opening edge you want to curve.
2. Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve.
3. Click and drag the opening edge to the desired curve.
4. Release your mouse button.
To curve an opening edge to a selected point:
1. Click on the opening edge you want to curve.
2. Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve.
3. Select the point you want to curve to. The opening edge automatically curves to the point.
4. Click to finish.

Removing Deck Openings

You can delete an opening from a deck using the Remove Opening tool.

Note: You cannot remove an opening using Delete.

To remove a deck opening:

1. Click on the edge of the deck or opening to select the deck.
2. Right-click and select Remove Opening, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Remove Opening.
3. Click on the edge of the opening. The opening is removed.

Deck Stairs
Once you have inserted a deck you can easily attach stairs to it using the Deck Stairs tool. Stairs automatically snap to your
deck for easy insertion, and the railings on the deck are automatically removed to allow for the stair opening.
Once inserted you can move deck stairs along a deck edge. You can also edit their size, control the display of railings, and
edit stringers, treads and risers.

Adding Stairs to a Deck

Platinum | Ultimate | Professional
You can add a staircase to your deck with a single mouse click. Stairs automatically snap to your deck for easy insertion,
and the railings on the deck are automatically removed to allow for the stair opening. By default, stairs extend from the deck
platform down to the terrain, so there’s absolutely nothing you need to calculate. Also, deck stairs have a railing on both
sides by default, but you can remove one or both of them if you want after the stairs have been inserted.
You can choose either pressure treated or cedar stairs, and edit the stair dimensions to get the exact result you want.
To add stairs to a deck:

1. Select Insert > Landscape > Decks > Deck Stairs, or click the down arrow next to the Decks button on the Land-
scape toolbar and select Deck Stairs.
2. In the catalog, select the type of stairs you would like to insert.
3. Move your pointer close to the deck edge. Position the stairs where you want them, then click to insert them.
4. Right-click and select Finish.

- 162 -
 Moving Deck Stairs

Moving Deck Stairs

You can move a deck staircase by clicking and dragging it along the deck edge. Note that you can’t move deck stairs away
from the deck, but you can move them to another deck edge. Also, the opening in the deck railing adjusts with the move of
the deck stairs.
To move a staircase by clicking and dragging:
1. Click on the staircase to select it.

2. Hover your pointer over the center grip to display the Move cursor.
3. Click and drag the staircase along the deck edge to move it.
4. Release your mouse button.

Editing the Size of Deck Stairs

You can edit the overall height and width of deck stairs, the width of the steps, and the riser height.
To edit the size of deck stairs:
1. Click on the staircase to select it.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. Edit the properties on the Basic tab.
Extend Stair. The option selected determines where the base of the stairs sit. You can either change where they extend
to, or specify an explicit height. By default, the deck stairs are inserted at deck level and run down to the terrain.
Down to terrain. Extends the stairs down to the ground.
Down to previous location. Extends the stairs to the floor level of the building location below the current one.
Down to deck location. Extends the stairs down to the floor level of the building location the deck is associated with.
You might use this if you have raised your deck above the floor level of the current location and want to extend the
stairs down.
Explicit Height. Extends the stairs down a specific distance that you define in the Overall Height edit box.
Overall Height. Available only if Explicit Height is selected in the Extend Stair drop box, this lets you define a fixed
height for the stairs.
Max. Riser Height. The maximum distance allowed between individual steps. Note that if your riser height exceeds
the width of the member you are using for your riser boards, two or more boards will be inserted for each riser.
Tread Run. The width of each step. The width of a step is measured from the nose of the step to the riser of the next
step. Note that if your tread run exceeds the width of the member you are using for your treads, two or more boards
will be inserted for each step.
Overall Width. The width of the stairs measured from one end of a step to the other end of the step.
4. Click OK.

Controlling the Display of Railings on Deck Stairs

By default, deck stairs have a railing on both sides. You can choose to have a railing on the left side only or right side only,
or remove them altogether.
To control the display of railings on deck stairs:
1. Click on the staircase to select it.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Railings area, uncheck the Include Railings check box if you don’t want any railings on your deck stairs. If you
want one or more railings on the stairs, leave this check box enabled.
4. If you want a railing on the left side of the stairs, select Railing on left side from the drop box. If you want a railing on
the right side of the stairs, select Railing on right side from the drop box. If you want a railing on both sides of the
stairs, select Railing on both sides.
5. Click OK.

- 163 -
Chapter 15: Landscaping

Editing Stringers, Treads and Risers on Deck Stairs

You can specify detailed settings for the stringers, risers and treads on your deck stairs.
To edit stringer, riser or tread details:
1. Click on the staircase to select it.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Deck Stairs dialog, select the Details tab.
4. To change the stringer style, click the appropriate graphic in the Stringer area. Choose from Notched, Under or Side.
5. Edit the remaining properties as desired.
Stringer
Spacing. The spacing between the outside stringers and intermediate stringers.
Height. The distance from the bottom of the stringer to the underside of the tread/riser intersection. Specifying a
stringer height that is the same as the overall height of the staircase creates a staircase that is completely closed on the
sides. In other words, the stringers go right to the ground.

Width. The thickness of the stringer members.

Riser
Closed Riser. Inserts riser boards under the steps. If you leave this disabled, the staircase will be open under the treads.
Select. Click this button to select a riser board to use.
Spacing. When the riser comprises two or more boards, this is the spacing between the boards.
Angle. The tilt of the riser boards. A value of 0 means the board is perpendicular to the step (straight up and down). A
value above 0 tilts the riser down toward the back of the staircase. The maximum angle allowed is 20º.

Tread
Select. Click this button to select the type of wood to use for your steps.
Spacing. When each step comprises two or more boards, this is the spacing between those boards.
Nosing. The distance the step extends past the riser.
Overhang. The distance the ends of the steps extend past the outer stringers.
6. Click OK.

Deleting Deck Stairs

You can delete a set of stairs in a couple of easy steps.
To delete deck stairs:
1. Click on the stairs.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Irrigation
Ultimate | Professional
Sprinkler systems are not only convenient, but they can also extend the life and improve the look of your lawn and plants.

- 164 -
 Inserting Irrigation

You can insert pop-up sprinklers in your landscape plan with a single mouse click. When you insert a sprinkler, the coverage
of the spray is outlined with a dashed line.

Inserting Irrigation
Ultimate | Professional
The catalog contains a wide selection of pop-up sprinklers with varying ranges of spray. You insert a sprinkler by simply
pointing and clicking with your mouse. When you insert a sprinkler, the coverage of the spray is outlined with a dashed line.
To insert pop-up sprinklers:

1. Select Insert > Landscape > Irrigation, or click on the Landscape toolbar.
2. In the catalog, select the sprinkler you want to insert.
3. Position the sprinkler where you want it, then click to insert it. You can continue inserting more sprinklers if you want.
4. Right-click and select Finish.

Moving a Sprinkler
You can move a sprinkler by simply clicking and dragging it.
To move a sprinkler:
1. Select the sprinkler.

2. Hover your pointer over the sprinkler’s square grip to display the Move cursor.
3. Click and drag to move the sprinkler.
4. When the sprinkler is where you want it, release your mouse button.

Rotating a Sprinkler
You can rotate a sprinkler (and its spray) by simply clicking and dragging its rotation handle.
To rotate a sprinkler:
1. Select the sprinkler.
2. Hover your pointer over the sprinkler’s triangular grip.
3. Click and drag to rotate the sprinkler, then release your mouse button.

Editing the Height of a Sprinkler

All sprinklers in the catalog are 3” tall. You can edit the height of a sprinkler if you want.
To edit the height of a sprinkler:
1. Select the sprinkler.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. On the Basic page, edit the value in the Height edit box.
4. Click OK.

Editing a Sprinkler’s Spray Properties

You can edit the distance covered by a sprinkler’s spray, as well as the spray pattern line style.
To edit a sprinkler’s spray properties:
1. Select the sprinkler.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. To edit the spray distance, edit the size values on the Basic property page. For most sprinklers you would edit the Width
and Depth values. The Adjustable sprinkler in the catalog lets you specify a custom radius and included angle for the
spray.

- 165 -
Chapter 15: Landscaping

4. To edit the line style of the spray pattern, select the Appearance tab, then select Spray Pattern in the left pane. Click
the Select button in the Linestyle area to select a different line style.
5. Click OK.

Deleting a Sprinkler
You can delete a sprinkler in a couple of easy steps.
To delete a sprinkler:
1. Select the sprinkler.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Exterior Structures
The catalog offers an excellent selection of exterior structures to make your outdoor living space more functional. These
include play gyms, swings, sandboxes, trampolines, tennis and volleyball courts, detached garages, sheds, gazebos, arbors,
garden boxes, greenhouses, pools and hot tubs.
If you are creating a landscape plan and do not have a model in your project, you can insert a house template to create your
landscape plan around.
All structures are inserted with a single mouse click and can be easily moved, rotated and edited.

Inserting Exterior Structures

Platinum | Ultimate | Professional
You can insert a wide variety of exterior structures to make your outdoor living space more functional. These include play
gyms, swings, sandboxes, trampolines, tennis and volleyball courts, detached garages, sheds, gazebos, arbors, garden boxes,
greenhouses, pools and hot [Link] structures are inserted with a single mouse click and can be easily moved, rotated and
edited.
To insert an exterior structure:

1. Select Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures, or click on the Landscape toolbar.
2. In the catalog, select the structure you want to insert.
3. Position the structure where you want it, then click to insert it.
4. Right-click and select Finish.

Inserting a House Template

Platinum | Ultimate | Professional
A house template is basically the exterior shell of a finished home. If you are creating a landscape plan and your project does
not contain a model, you can insert a house template to serve as the focal point of your plan.
To insert a house template:

1. Select Insert > Landscape > Exterior Structures, or click on the Landscape toolbar.
2. In the catalog, select the House Templates group, then select the desired house template.
3. Position the template where you want it, then click to insert it.
4. Right-click and select Finish.
Although a house template looks like a real house, it can’t be edited like a real model can. It is considered a single-click
element, so clicking on any part of the template selects the entire house.
It is important to note that when you select the house template, the invisible bounding box is always square or rectangular,
and does not necessarily follow the shape of the house outline. This can interfere with the selection of other elements near
the house. If you have inserted elements around the house, such as plants, and want to select them, you may want to use
the View Filter to make the house template non-selectable for ease of editing your landscape plan.

- 166 -
 Moving Exterior Structures

Another thing to note is that the house template’s exterior walls are not visible in 2D. You only see the roof line. If you want
to insert things like fills up against the exterior walls of the house, you will need to either draw them in 3D, or draw them
in 2D and then move them into place in 3D.

Moving Exterior Structures

You can move exterior structures in plan view by simply clicking and dragging them.
To move an exterior structure:
1. Select the element you want to move.

2. Hover your pointer over the element’s center grip to display the Move cursor.
3. Click and drag to move the element.
4. When the element is where you want it, release your mouse button.

Rotating Exterior Structures

You can rotate exterior structures by clicking and dragging them.
To rotate an exterior structure:
1. Select the element you want to rotate.

2. Hover your pointer over the triangular grip to display the Rotate cursor.
Tip: If the triangular grip is in close proximity to the square grab handle, you may want to zoom in on the element to
distinguish between the two grips.
3. Click and drag to rotate the element.
4. When the element is at the desired rotation, release your mouse button.

Editing the Size of an Exterior Structure

You can edit the height, width and depth of most exterior structures.
To edit the size of an exterior structure:
1. Select the structure.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. Edit the values on the Basic page. The Uniform Scale option ensures that the element scales uniformly when you
change one of its dimensions.
4. Click OK.

Applying Different Colors or Materials to Exterior Structures

You can change the look of an exterior structure by applying different colors or materials to it.
To apply different colors or materials to an exterior structure:
1. Display your model in 3D, and make sure the structure is visible in the view.

2. Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click on any tabbed toolbar.

3. In the catalog panel, select the color or material you want to apply.

- 167 -
Chapter 15: Landscaping

4. Click on the component you want to apply the material to. Some structures can have different materials applied to in-
dividual parts. For example, the roof of a shed can be different from the shed’s walls.
5. When you are finished applying materials, right-click and select Finish.

Deleting an Exterior Structure

You can delete an exterior structure in a couple of easy steps.
To delete an exterior structure:
1. Select the structure.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Exterior Furniture & Accessories

The catalog includes a great selection of exterior furniture so you can relax, eat and entertain outdoors. Furniture types
include patio tables, patio chairs, picnic tables, loungers and benches.
Personalize your design even further with accessories such as fireplaces, fountains, wind chimes, decorative columns,
corner accents, garden borders, weather vanes, door mats, patio umbrellas, trellises, bird baths, mailboxes, cars and planters.
All it takes is one click to insert furnishings and accessories.

Inserting Exterior Furniture

Platinum | Ultimate | Professional
You can insert patio tables, patio chairs, picnic tables, loungers and benches with a single mouse click. When inserting
exterior furniture, you have the option of inserting it on the terrain, or on a building location.
To insert exterior furniture:

1. Select Insert > Landscape > Exterior Furniture, or click the down arrow next to the Exterior Furniture button on
the Landscape toolbar. Then, select either Exterior Furniture on Terrain or Exterior Furniture on Location, depend-
ing on where you want to insert the element. The Exterior Furniture on Location option lets you insert the element
on a deck, or on anything that is associated with a building location.
2. In the catalog, select the element you want to insert.
3. Position the element where you want it, then click to insert it.
4. Right-click and select Finish.

Inserting Exterior Accessories

Platinum | Ultimate | Professional
Exterior accessories include everything from bird baths to weather vanes. Inserting exterior accessories is easy — just point
and click. You can insert exterior accessories on the terrain, or on a building location.
To insert an exterior accessory:
1. Select Insert > Landscape > Exterior Accessories, or click the down arrow next to the Exterior Accessories button

on the Landscape toolbar. Then, select either Exterior Accessories on Terrain or Exterior Accessories on Lo-
cation. The ’on Location’ option lets you insert the element on a deck, or on anything that is associated with a building
location.
2. In the catalog, select the accessory you want to insert.
3. Position the element where you want it, then click to insert it.
4. Right-click and select Finish.

Moving Furnishing Elements

You can move furniture, electronics and accessories by clicking and dragging them.
To move an element:
1. Select the element you want to move.

- 168 -
 Rotating Furnishing Elements

2. Hover your pointer over the element’s center grip to display the Move cursor.
3. Click and drag to move the element.
4. When the element is where you want it, release your mouse button.

Rotating Furnishing Elements

You can rotate furniture, electronics and accessories by clicking and dragging them.
To rotate an element:
1. Select the element you want to rotate.

2. Hover your pointer over the triangular grip to display the Rotate cursor.
Tip: If the triangular grip is in close proximity to the square grab handle, you may want to zoom in on the element to
distinguish between the two grips.
3. Click and drag to rotate the element.
4. When the element is at the desired rotation, release your mouse button.

Raising or Lowering Furnishing Elements

You can raise or lower furniture, electronics and accessories using the Elevate tool on the element’s right-click menu. For
example, you might want to adjust the height of a picture on the wall.
To edit the elevation of a furnishing element:
1. Select the element whose elevation you want to edit.
2. Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Elevate. The value shown in the Elevate dialog is
the current elevation of the element.
3. In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired elevation of the bottom of the element above the floor.
4. If you are in a 3D or elevation view and would like to see what the element looks like at the new elevation, click Apply.
The Elevate tool remains active while the change is applied to the element in your model.
5. To apply the change and close the dialog, click OK.

Tip: You can also change a furnishing element’s elevation by changing the Distance above current location or terrain
variable on the element’s Behavior property page.

Editing the Size of Furnishing Elements

You can edit the height, width and depth of most furnishing elements. Some elements have additional properties that define
their size and style.
To edit the size of furnishing elements:
1. Select the element whose properties you want to edit.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. To change the dimensions of the element, select the Basic tab. Size properties will vary depending on the element.
4. Once you’ve specified the properties, click OK.

Applying Different Colors, Fabrics and Finishes to Furnishing Elements

You can use the Materials Paintbrush to quickly apply a color, fabric or finish to any furnishing element.
To apply a material to a furnishing element:
1. Display your model in 3D, and make sure the furnishing element is visible in the view.

2. Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click on any tabbed toolbar.

3. In the catalog panel, select the color or material you want to apply. You may want to select Furniture from the Filter
drop box to display only furniture materials.

- 169 -
Chapter 15: Landscaping

4. Click on the component you want to apply the material to. Materials are applied separately to the individual parts of
the element. For example, you can apply a specific fabric to the bedspread on a bed.
5. When you are finished applying materials, right-click and select Finish.

Deleting Furnishing Elements

You can delete furniture, electronics or accessories in a couple of easy steps.
To delete a furnishing element:
1. Select the element.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Exterior Lighting
Outdoor lighting can beautify any landscape and offers security and visibility at night. Lighting can also play an important
part when you create exterior 3D RealView™ renderings.
The catalog offers both light posts and ground lighting to enhance the exterior design of your home. You can even turn them
on and off! Exterior lighting is inserted directly on the terrain. Just point and click!

Inserting Exterior Lighting

Platinum | Ultimate | Professional
Inserting exterior light posts and ground lighting is easy — just point and click.
To insert an exterior light fixture:

1. Select Insert > Landscape > Exterior Lighting, or click the down arrow next to the Exterior Lighting button on
the Landscape toolbar. Then, select either Exterior Lighting on Terrain or Exterior Lighting on Location, depending
on where you want to insert the element. The Exterior Lighting on Location option lets you insert the element on a
deck, or on anything that is associated with a building location.
2. In the catalog, select the light you want to insert.
3. Position the light where you want it, then click to insert it.
4. Right-click and select Finish.

Tip: If you switch to Rendered or Rendered Outline display mode, you can see instant lighting effects as you position and
insert light fixtures.

Editing Exterior Light Fixtures

You can move or delete a light fixture, as well as edit its elevation, size and appearance.
See the following topics:
Moving a Light Fixture on page 95
Editing the Size of a Light Fixture on page 96
Editing a Light Fixture’s Light Source on page 96
Turning a Light On or Off on page 97
Changing the Way a Light Fixture Looks on page 97
Deleting a Light Fixture on page 97
Changing the Quality Level of Interactive Lighting on page 376
Disabling Interactive Lighting on page 376

- 170 -
Chapter 16: Editing Elements

When you double-click after inserting an element or select Finish from the right-click menu, you automatically go into
Selection Mode, meaning you can select elements in your drawing area and edit them. Most elements can be moved, rotated,
copied, replaced and deleted. Some elements have additional editing commands available. For example, you can lengthen,
break and curve walls. All elements have a property sheet where you can change the size or appearance of the element.
To access a menu of editing commands for a selected element, just right-click in the drawing area or select Edit > Modify
Elements. Certain functions can be performed without selecting any commands at all. For example, you can move and
rotate most elements by simply clicking and dragging your mouse.
This chapter describes how to select elements, and use general editing commands like Move, Rotate, Elevate, Duplicate,
Replace and Delete. It also describes how to access and edit element properties. For information about editing a specific type
of element, see the chapter about that element.

Accessing Edit Tools

Most elements can be moved once they are selected by simply clicking and dragging them. Some can also be stretched or
rotated. You can access a full menu of edit tools by right-clicking in the drawing area, or by selecting Edit > Modify
Elements.
Menus vary depending on the element selected. Typical tools are Properties, Move, Rotate, Duplicate, and Delete. If two
types of elements are selected (such as a floor and a wall), only tools that are common to both element types are available.

Undoing the Previous Action

The Undo tool cancels your most recent action. You can undo as many actions as you have taken since your last save.
To undo an action:
• Select Edit > Undo, or

• Click on the Standard toolbar, or

• Press Ctrl+Z

Tip: You can use the Redo tool to reapply an action you have canceled using the Undo tool.

Redoing an Undo
The Redo tool reapplies a tool that you have reversed using Undo. Redo will only work directly following an Undo.
To redo a task:
• Select Edit > Redo, or

• Click on the Standard toolbar, or

• Press Ctrl+Y

Moving Elements
When you select an element, you are automatically in Drag and Drop mode. If the element is a singular, one-click object, like
a cabinet or plant, you can move the element by simply clicking and dragging it. If you want to move an area-drawn element,
such as a roof or floor, you need to select the Move tool before clicking and dragging. Otherwise, doing a straight drag-and-
drop will only stretch it. If you click and drag a wall, all walls attached to it move with it.
If you have your Commander turned on and would like to be able to enter precise values for the move, you need to select
the Move tool instead of doing a straight drag-and-drop.

Note: Elements associated with walls, such as doors and windows, can only be moved within the wall they are in. You
cannot move them to another wall.

- 171 -
Chapter 16: Editing Elements

To move an element using drag-and-drop:

1. Select the element you want to move. You are now in Drag and Drop mode.

2. Hover your pointer over the element’s center grip to display the Move cursor.
3. Click and drag to move the element.
4. When the element is where you want it, release the mouse button.
To move an element using the Move tool:
1. Select the element you want to move.
2. Right-click and select Move, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Move.
3. Select a base point for the move. The move distance and direction will be measured from this point.
4. Without holding your mouse button down, move your mouse to move the element. Select the point you want to move
the element to, or enter a distance and direction in the Commander.

Tip: You can nudge an element slightly using the arrow keys on your keyboard.

Nudging Elements
You can nudge an element or object slightly using the arrow keys on your keyboard. By default, the element is nudged 1”
(or 25mm). You can change the nudge distance in your program settings before nudging if you like.
For an additional level of control, a secondary nudge distance is also available in your program settings. By default it is set
to 1’-0" (or 300mm). This distance is used if you press and hold down the CTRL key while using the arrow keys.
To nudge an element:
1. Select the element that you want to nudge.
2. Use the arrows on your keyboard to nudge the element up, down, left or right. This uses the primary nudge distance
defined in your program settings.
To nudge an element using the CTRL key:
1. Select the element that you want to nudge.
2. Press and hold down the CTRL key on your keyboard.
3. While holding down the CTRL key, use the arrows on your keyboard to nudge the element up, down, left or right. This
uses the secondary nudge distance defined in your program settings.

Editing Nudge Distances

By default, an element is moved 1” (25mm) when you nudge it using your arrow keys. If you hold down the CTRL key while
using the arrow keys, a secondary nudge distance of 1’-0" (305mm) is used. You can edit both of these nudge distances in
your program settings.
To edit nudge distances:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Program Settings dialog, select Drawing Aids in the left column.
3. To edit the primary nudge distance (when using only your arrow keys to nudge), edit the value in the Normal edit box
in the Nudge Distance area.
4. To edit the secondary nudge distance (when using the CTRL key in conjunction with the arrow keys), edit the value in
the With CTRL key edit box.
5. Click OK.

Raising and Lowering Elements

Most elements can be raised or lowered using the Elevate tool on the element’s right-click menu. Some elements, such as
roofs, do not provide access to the Elevate tool. In the case of a roof, you can raise or lower it by changing the Support Height
variable in its properties.

- 172 -
 Rotating Elements

Many block elements (like furniture and plants) also have a Distance above current location or terrain variable in their
properties that you can use to raise or lower the element. Walls have a Drop Exterior Face variable, and columns have a Base
Offset variable in their properties that you can edit.
To raise or lower an element using the Elevate tool:
1. Select the element that you want to raise or lower.
2. Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Elevate. The value shown in the Elevate dialog is
the current elevation of the element above the floor level or terrain.
3. In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired elevation of the element above the floor. If the element is a landscaping ele-
ment, the value you specify is relative to the terrain. The distance you enter is the distance from the floor or terrain to
the insertion point of the element. For most elements, the insertion point is at the base of the element. For windows and
wall openings, however, the insertion point is at the top of the element. Therefore, if you are raising or lowering a win-
dow or wall opening, specify the desired distance from the floor to the top of the window or opening.
4. If you are in a 3D or elevation view and would like to see what the element looks like at the new elevation, click Apply.
The Elevate tool remains active while the change is applied to the element in your model.
5. To apply the change to the element, click OK.
To raise or lower a block element by editing its properties:
1. Select the element you want to raise or lower.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the properties dialog, select the Behavior tab. If there is no Behavior tab, you will need to use the Elevate tool to raise
or lower the element.
4. Edit the value in the Distance above current location or terrain edit box.
5. Click OK.

Rotating Elements
Singular, one-click elements like cabinets and furniture can be rotated on the spot by simply clicking and dragging them
while in Rotation mode. Railings can be rotated by clicking and dragging their end points. For most other elements such as
walls, floors, ceilings or roofs, you need to use the Rotate tool. You also need to use the Rotate tool if you want to be able to
enter a precise rotation angle in the Commander, or you want to rotate the element about a point other than the center point
of the element.
Doing a Simple, On-the-Spot Rotation
If you see a triangular grip on an element when it is selected, it can be rotated by simply clicking and dragging it. Using this
method, the element is rotated about its center point. If your Angle Snap is on, the element will rotate in increments of
whatever angle is set for the Angle Snap. If the Angle Snap is off, the element will rotate in increments of 1º.

To rotate an element by clicking and dragging:

1. Select the element you want to rotate.

2. Hover your pointer over the triangular grip to display the Rotate cursor.
Tip: If the triangular grip is in close proximity to the square grab handle, you may want to zoom in on the element to
distinguish between the two grips. If you do not see the triangular grip, the element can only be rotated with the Rotate
tool.

- 173 -
Chapter 16: Editing Elements

3. Click and drag to rotate the element.

4. When the element is at the desired rotation, release your mouse button.
Using the Rotate Tool
Using the Rotate tool you can rotate an element about any selected base point. You should also use the Rotate tool if you
want to be able to enter a precise rotation angle in the Commander. If your Angle Snap is on, the element will rotate in
increments of whatever angle is set for the Angle Snap. If you are using the Commander, you can override the Angle Snap
by entering the desired angle in the Commander. If the Angle Snap is off, the element will rotate in increments of 1º.
To rotate an element using the Rotate tool:
1. Select the element to rotate.
2. Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Rotate.
3. Select a base point for the rotation. The base point can be any point on the element (e.g. center point or corner point),
or any point in the drawing area. The point you pick establishes an automatic baseline that runs through the point at
180°. You can rotate full-circle around this baseline.

Tip: If you want to align an element with another element that may be lying at an odd angle, select a base point on the
other element, then line up your rotation line with that element.
4. Without holding your mouse button down, move your mouse to rotate the element. The element will rotate from the
defined base point in the direction you move the mouse. If the Commander is turned on, you can view the angle of
rotation as you rotate, or enter a precise angle. Positive angle values are read in a counter-clockwise direction, while
negative values are read in a clockwise direction.

Curving Elements
You can curve line-drawn elements such as walls, as well as area-drawn elements such as floors.
If an element has the Curve tool on its right-click menu, it can be curved. Once the Curve tool is active, you can click and
drag the edge to curve it, or select a point to curve to.
To curve an element by clicking and dragging:
1. Click on the element edge that you want to curve.
2. Right-click and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve.
3. Click and drag the edge to the desired curve.
4. Release your mouse button.

- 174 -
 Changing an Element’s Orientation

To curve an element to a selected point:

1. Click on the ceiling edge you want to curve.
2. Right-click in and select Curve, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Curve.
3. Select the point you want to curve to. The ceiling edge automatically curves to the point.
4. Click to finish.

Note: For more precise curving, see Curving Elements Using the Commander on page 289.

Changing an Element’s Orientation

Symbol elements, such as furniture and light fixtures, are oriented in a logical fashion when you insert them in your
drawing. For example, tables are inserted in a flat, upright position on the floor, and electrical outlets are inserted in a
vertical position on the face of walls. You can edit the orientation of most symbol elements. For example, you may want to
flip an air register so that you can insert it on the ceiling in your basement.
To change an element’s orientation:
1. Access the element’s properties.
2. On the Basic property page, click the appropriate arrow keys in the Orientation area to rotate the element.
X Axis: Rotates the element front to back, and vice versa.
Y Axis: Rotates the element towards its left or right side in 3D.
Z Axis: Rotates the element left or right in 2D plan view.

Note: Orientation control is only available for simple block elements like furniture and appliances. It does not apply to
elements with customizable components, such as fireplaces or cabinets.

Copying Elements on the Same Location

The Duplicate tool creates a copy of a selected element that you can then position where you like on the current location.
To duplicate an element:
1. Select the element to copy.
2. Right-click and select Duplicate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Duplicate.
3. Select a base point for the copy movement. Typically you would select one of the element’s grips, but you can click any-
where in the drawing. The base point is simply a reference point used to define the move distance.
4. Select the point you are copying the element to. You can do this by moving your mouse and then clicking to insert the
copy, or by typing a distance and direction in the Commander.

Copying Objects to Other Locations

The Duplicate to Locations tool lets you copy existing elements and objects to other locations. This is useful if the elements
you have already drawn will have the same layout on another location. For example, you can copy the exterior walls on the
Ground Floor to the Second Floor and instantly create another story. You can also use this tool to copy text, dimensions and
CAD objects to another location.
When you use the Duplicate to Locations tool you have the option of deleting the original objects. This is a great way to
move objects from one location to another if they are not on the correct location.
To copy objects to other locations:
1. Make sure the location you want to copy objects FROM is current.
2. Select the objects that you want to copy.
3. Right-click and select Duplicate to Locations.
4. In the Duplicate to Locations dialog, select the target location(s) you want to copy the objects to.
5. Click OK. You are asked if you want to delete the original object.
6. If you want to delete the original objects, click Yes. You would select this if you wanted to move the objects instead of
copying them. If you want to leave the original objects on their current location, click No. The objects are copied.

- 175 -
Chapter 16: Editing Elements

Note: The location you are copying to must exist in the Building Locations dialog.

Arraying Elements
When you array elements, you create multiple copies of an element at the same time. You can create an array in a single row
or column, or multiple rows and columns. You can also control the spacing between elements in the array, and the array’s
rotation angle.

Sample array of posts with 2 rows and 5 columns

To array an element:
1. Select the element you want to array.
2. Right-click and select Array, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Array.
3. In the Number of Rows box, type the number of horizontal rows you want or use the arrows to select a value.
4. In the Number of Columns box, type the number of vertical columns you want.
5. In the Distance Between Rows box, type the spacing you want between rows. This determines the distance between
elements appearing in columns (vertical spacing).
6. In the Distance Between Columns box, type the spacing you want between columns. This determines the distance
between elements appearing in rows (horizontal spacing).
7. In the Array Rotation Angle box, type the degree of rotation for the array.
8. Click OK. The array is created.

Note: The Array tool is only available for certain elements.

Mirroring Elements
You can create a mirror image of selected elements using the Mirror tool. You mirror the elements by specifying a mirror
line — an imaginary line about which the elements are flipped. Once the element has been mirrored, you can choose whether
or not you want to delete the original element.

Tip: You can use the Mirror tool to reverse an entire floor plan.

To mirror elements:
1. Select the elements you want to mirror.
2. Right-click and select Mirror, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Mirror.
3. Click two points to define a mirror line.

4. When prompted to choose whether or not you want to delete the original object, click Yes to delete the original object,
or click No to leave the original intact.

- 176 -
 Replacing Elements

Replacing Elements
You can use the Replace tool to replace an element in your drawing with a different item from the catalog.
To replace an element:
1. Select the element that you want to replace.
2. Right-click and select Replace, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Replace.
3. In the Replace dialog, select the replacement item.
You can use the Search feature to quickly narrow down the element list according to a specified keyword or part
number. Click the drop box in the Search area and select either Description to search by keyword, or Part No. to
search by part number. An edit box appears next to the drop box.

In the edit box, enter the keyword(s) or part number to search for, then press Enter or click . For keyword
searches, the search will display any match that contains the specified text string, even if the string is part of a word.
Note that only elements of the type that you are replacing are displayed.
Once search results are obtained they are displayed in the catalog portion of the dialog.
To return the catalog to its default state, where all elements are displayed, select Show All from the Search drop box.
Search terms that you have used are saved in the Search window for future use.
4. Once you have selected the replacement item, click OK. The element is automatically replaced.

Note: You can only replace an element with another of the same type. For example, you can replace a window with another
window, but you cannot replace a window with a door.

Editing the Size and Composition of an Element

You can edit the physical make-up of an element as well as its dimensions by accessing the element’s Basic property page.
Some elements have additional property pages that control its composition. For example, cabinets have Leaf and Details
property pages.
When you edit the properties of elements that exist in your drawing, only selected elements are changed. Other occurrences
of the element in your drawing remain unchanged. You can, however, select and edit multiple elements at the same time
provided they share the same properties.
To edit the properties of an inserted element:
1. Access the element’s properties.
2. Adjust the properties as desired. Clicking a dimension marked with an alphabetical character (a, b, c, etc.) highlights
the corresponding dimension in the element graphic, and vice versa, if one exists.
3. Click OK. The selected elements are updated in the drawing.

Note: Editing the properties of an element in your drawing has no effect on the element’s property definition in the catalog
it came from. Editing an element in a catalog affects all future insertions of that element in your drawing.

Applying Colors and Materials with the Materials Paintbrush

The Materials Paintbrush is best used in 3D view and the 2D Designer’s Plan view. It lets you select a material or color in
the catalog, then apply it to elements. When you use the Materials Paintbrush on an element, the settings on the element’s
Appearance property page update to match the selections you made with the Materials Paintbrush.
To use the Materials Paintbrush:

1. Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click on any tabbed toolbar.

2. In the catalog panel, select the material you want to apply. There is an incredible selection to choose from, including
Wood, Brick, Marble, Concrete, Steel, Carpet, Tile, Roofing, Paint, Fabric, and much more. You can filter the material
list according to specific applications by making a selection from the Filter drop box.

- 177 -
Chapter 16: Editing Elements

3. If you want to apply the material to all instances of the element you select, enable the Apply to All Similar check box.
For example, let’s say your model’s exterior walls are 2x6 Framed Masonry walls, and you want them all to have hor-
izontal siding instead. If you enable the Apply to All Similar option, all you have to do is click on one of the walls, and
all of the walls of the same type will change simultaneously.
4. In 3D view, click on the element that you want to apply the material to. The material is immediately applied.
5. Right-click and select Finish.

Note: To undo the last application, right-click in the drawing area and select Step Back.

Undoing a Material Application

If you have just used the Materials Paintbrush to apply a material to an element, you can undo the application using the Step
Back tool.
To undo a material application:
1. With the Materials Paintbrush still active, right-click in the drawing area and select Step Back, or select Edit > Modify
Elements > Step Back.
You can continue stepping back to the point when the Materials Paintbrush was first launched.

Note: You cannot undo a material application if you have left the Materials Paintbrush mode.

Sampling Materials with the Eyedropper

While the Materials Paintbrush is active you can use the Eyedropper tool to identify a material applied to an element in your
drawing. Once you’ve clicked on the element, the catalog panel updates to display the material applied to the element. This
eliminates guesswork and allows you to identify a material that you want to use again without having to search the catalog.
To sample a material with the Eyedropper:
1. Activate the Materials Paintbrush tool.

2. In the catalog panel, click . Your cursor becomes an eyedropper.

3. Click on the element whose material you want to sample. The catalog updates to display the material applied to the
element.

Note: The material will not be added to the materials history list unless you apply it to an element.

- 178 -
 Viewing Recently Used Materials

Viewing Recently Used Materials

When you use the Materials Paintbrush, a record is kept of the materials you have used. You can view a list of the most
recently used materials by selecting the History tab in the catalog panel while the Materials Paintbrush is active. If you want
to use one of the recently used materials, just select it in the history list and proceed with applying in your drawing.

Setting the Maximum Size for the Material History List

By default, when the Materials Paintbrush tool is active, the History tab in the catalog panel displays a maximum of 15
materials. You can change this setting if you wish.
To change the maximum setting for the material history list:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Program Settings dialog, enter the desired maximum number of materials in the Material history list edit box,
or use the arrows to scroll up or down through a list of values.
3. Click OK.

Editing an Element’s Material Settings

An element’s material properties are displayed in Rendered and Rendered Outline mode. If you choose to edit an element’s
material through its Appearance property page, you can select different materials for each of the element’s components.
To change an element’s material through the Appearance property page:
1. Access the element’s properties.
2. Select the Appearance tab.
3. In the Components pane, select the component whose material you want to change.
4. To select a texture for the component, which will be displayed in Rendered and Rendered outline display mode, click
the material swatch or the browse button in the Material area, then make a selection from the Materials dialog.

5. To edit the way the material is applied to the component in Rendered and Rendered Outline mode, click the Mapping
button in the Material area, then define your mapping settings. These are described below.
Auto Texture Mapping. Applies a UV map, which is a flat, 2D representation of the vertices of the 3D model. It defines
where the 2D pixels in your texture will be placed on the 3D surface. For imported elements, selecting Auto uses the
mapping already applied to the element.

- 179 -
Chapter 16: Editing Elements

Face Texture Mapping. Applies the texture to every single face of the element component. This is the most common
texture mapping option used in the program.
Box Texture Mapping. Creates a rectangular bounding box around the element, then applies a texture to each of the box’s
6 sides. This would be useful for an element such as a sofa.
Predefined texture mapping. If using a texture from an outside source, this uses the texture mapping that was assigned to
the texture originally.
Override tile size. Allows you to specify a custom tile size for the material. Tile height refers to the height of one bitmap
tile. The program uses tiled rendering to display images, meaning images are generated in pieces (tiles) vertically and
horizontally. Changing the tile height of a brick material, for example, would make the bricks look taller. Changing the
tile width would make the bricks look wider.
Note that the Override tile size option lets you customize the tile size for this instance only without creating a new
material.
Position. Allows you to shift the material on the element (left, right, up or down) by clicking the appropriate arrows.
Rotation. Specifying an angle here rotates the material on the element in a clockwise direction.
6. When you are finished defining materials, click OK.

Note: When you edit the material of an element in your drawing, the element’s material definition in the catalog does not
change. The change only applies to the selected element. Editing an element in a catalog affects all future insertions of that
element in your drawing.

Editing an Element’s Pattern Settings

An element’s pattern properties are displayed when you view a model in Patterned mode. If you choose to edit an element’s
pattern settings through its Line Work property page, you can select different patterns for each of the element’s components.
To change an element’s pattern settings:
1. Access the element’s properties.
2. Select the Line Work tab.
3. In the Components pane, select the component whose pattern you want to change.
4. To select a pattern for the component, click the pattern swatch or the browse button in the Pattern area, then make a
selection from the Patterns dialog.
5. To edit the way the pattern is applied to the element in Patterned display mode, click the Mapping button in the Pattern
area, then define your mapping settings. These are described below.
Rotation. Specifying an angle here rotates the pattern on the element in a clockwise direction.
Position. Allows you to shift the pattern on the element (left, right, up or down) by clicking the appropriate arrows.i
6. To specify a color and line weight for the pattern’s lines, select Layer below the pattern swatch which has the desired
color/line weight properties. You can override the color or line weight by clicking the Color swatch or the Line Weight
drop box.
7. When you are finished, click OK.

Deleting Elements
You can delete an element from your drawing in two quick steps.
To delete an element:
1. Select the element.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

- 180 -
Chapter 17: 2D and 3D Viewing

There are a variety of options for viewing your design in 2D and 3D. When you begin working, your design is displayed as
a 2D Plan. You can also use the 2D Designer’s Plan tool to instantly view a rendered version of your 2D plan.
When working in 2D view, you can magnify or reduce the view using the Zoom In, Zoom Out or Zoom Realtime tools. You
can also magnify a selected area using the Zoom Window tool. The Zoom to Fit tool magnifies your design so it fills the
drawing area, creating the largest view possible. The Pan tool lets you pan the view in any direction by simply clicking and
dragging.
You can instantly switch to 3D view with a couple of mouse clicks. Using the 3D QuickView tool you can instantly view
your 3D design from a number of pre-set angles. Or you can choose one of the pre-defined 3D Cameras — 3D Perspective
or 3D Overview — as well as create new views to suit your needs.
While in a 3D view you can navigate through the scene using realtime navigation tools such as Walk Around, Fly Around,
and Look Around.
Elevations are automatic — just select the one that you want to view, or create a custom one. You can create a Section by
defining a cut line through your model.
Using the Dynamic Cutaway tool you can dynamically strip away a portion of your 3D model so that you can see inside it.
In 2D plan view, your drawing is displayed in Wireframe mode by default. In 3D view, it is displayed in Rendered mode.
You can switch to other display modes such as Hidden Line and Patterned at any time.

2D Viewing
When you start a project, the view that you are in initially is a 2D Plan, which is a flat, overhead view. This is the best type
of view to be in when you are inserting elements and creating your design.
You are not limited to a wireframe 2D view, though. For an interesting perspective you can use the 2D Designer’s Plan tool
to display the 2D plan in rendered display mode, which displays element textures and colors.

Viewing the 2D Plan

When you start a drawing, the default view is a 2D plan view, which is a flat, overhead view. 2D plan view is ideal for
creating a floor plan.
To display your model in 2D plan view:
• Select View > 2D Plan, or

• Click on the View Control toolbar or on the onscreen Navigator, or

• Right-click in the drawing area and select 2D Plan, or
By default, all locations are visible at the same time. However, any locations other than the current location are dimmed.
While in 2D plan view you can zoom in and out, and pan your drawing.

Viewing a 2D Designer’s Plan

By default, your design is displayed in a wireframe 2D plan view. You can use the 2D Designer’s Plan tool to quickly display
a rendered version of the 2D plan view. In a rendered view, materials are applied to the elements and terrain, creating a
more realistic view. For example, if you have a shingled roof on your model, you will actually see the shingles in 2D
Designer’s Plan view.
To view a 2D Designer’s Plan:

1. Select View > 2D Designer’s Plan, or click on the View Control toolbar.

Note: You can use the View Filter to hide elements like the roof or ceilings so that you can see inside the model.

- 181 -
Chapter 17: 2D and 3D Viewing

3D Viewing
There are two different tools available for 3D viewing.
The 3D QuickView tool displays your design from a pre-defined view angle that you choose. 3D QuickViews are parallel
views, meaning that distance is eliminated from the view.
The 3D Camera tool displays a 3D perspective view of your design. In a perspective view, the scale of an element decreases
according to its distance from the viewer, creating a more real-world view. In a 3D Camera View, the viewing angle, viewing
height and target are determined by a virtual camera whose settings you can edit.
When you are in a 3D view, you can use the Dynamic Cutaway tool to strip a portion of your model away to create a 3D
cutaway view.
When you view in 3D, a sky image is displayed in the background. You can select a different background image to display
if you want.
For a truly virtual experience, you can enter into Presentation Mode, which is designed specifically for use with external
controllers and virtual reality headsets.

Quick 3D Viewing
Professional only
Using the 3D QuickView tool you can instantly view your design in 3D by selecting a pre-defined view angle. You can view
your design from the front left, rear left, front right or rear right corner. You can also create an orthogonal elevation view by
selecting a front, rear, left or right view angle.
Each 3D QuickView is a parallel view, which means distance is eliminated from the view. 3D views are automatically
displayed in rendered mode for optimal effect.
To create a basic 3D view:

1. Select View > 3D QuickView, or click on the View Control toolbar.

2. In the 3D QuickView dialog, click the button representing the angle you want to view from. The corner arrows repre-
sent the four available isometric views, which let you view your design from any corner at a 30º angle. Clicking the
center button creates a 2D rendered plan view.

Note: The 3D QuickView tool is designed for quick, basic 3D viewing. These views are preset and do not have cameras
associated with them. Most navigation tools are not available in a 3D QuickView, except for Fly Around. For 3D views that
you can adjust, see Displaying 3D Camera Views on page 182.

Displaying 3D Camera Views

A camera view is a 3D perspective view. In a perspective view, the scale of an element decreases according to its distance
from the viewer, creating a more real-world view.

- 182 -
 Creating a New 3D Camera View

Virtual Architect home design software offers two pre-defined camera views for your convenience: 3D Perspective and 3D
Overview. The 3D Perspective lets you view your design from a Southwest viewpoint. The 3D Overview looks at your design
from an elevated position, creating an overhead view. You can change a 3D view by editing camera properties, as well as
create new views.
To view a 3D camera view:

1. Select View > 3D Cameras, then select the camera view you want to display. Or, click on the View Control toolbar
and select the camera view to display.
You can change the view interactively by changing the settings or camera/target positions in the Camera Properties
panel on the right side of the screen.
To close the Camera Properties panel and display the Catalog panel, click the panel’s Close Properties button.

Tip: If you have your cameras turned on in 2D, you can switch to a 3D view by selecting a camera, right-clicking it, then
selecting Activate View.

Creating a New 3D Camera View

You can create a new 3D view by placing a new camera in your 2D plan view. Once you’ve inserted the camera, you specify
the camera angle and viewing field angle by rotating and clicking your mouse.
To create a new 3D camera view:

1. While in 2D plan view, select View > 3D Cameras > Place New Camera, or click on the View Control toolbar and
select Place New Camera. A camera is attached to your cursor, ready to be inserted.
2. Click to insert the camera where you want it.
3. Move your cursor in the direction you want to view. Moving the cursor back and forth changes the camera angle.
4. Once you have the desired direction and angle in place, click to select a location for the target.
5. Once you’ve defined the position and angle of your camera, the 3D view is instantly displayed.
The view will appear on your 3D Cameras menu and toolbar flyouts for easy access. (By default, the first view you
create is called Camera1).
Note: If a camera is placed in a room that has no light fixtures, the camera headlight feature will illuminate the room
when you are viewing the room in 3D. This light is only available when viewing and navigating in real time and is not
used in rendering.

Creating Dynamic Cutaway Views

The Dynamic Cutaway tool lets you strip away a portion of your 3D model so that you can see inside it. By sliding a selected
clipping plane back and forth, you essentially create a moving cross-section of your design.

- 183 -
Chapter 17: 2D and 3D Viewing

To create a dynamic cutaway view:

1. Go into 3D view.

2. Select View > Dynamic Cutaway, or click on the View Control toolbar.
3. In the Dynamic Cutaway dialog, click on the clipping plane you would like to use. For example, if you want to strip
away the front of your house, click on Front.
4. Click and drag the slider in the Dynamic Cutaway dialog to move the clipping plane back and forth. As you move the
clipping plane, your design is stripped away.
5. To change the angle of the clipping plane, click and drag inside the dialog’s clipping plane graphic to rotate the clipping
plane.

6. When you have created the desired view, click OK. Note that the 3D view will remain a cutaway view once you close
the Dynamic Cutaway dialog. If you want to return to the original view, click on None in the Dynamic Cutaway dialog
before clicking OK.

Changing a 3D Camera View

You can change a 3D camera view using the Camera Properties panel that appears when you switch to a 3D camera view.
The position of the camera determines the point you are viewing your design from while in a 3D camera view. You can
change your viewpoint by moving your camera in the Camera Properties panel. You can also change your camera height
and adjust the viewing field angle.
If you are currently in a 3D camera view, you can use navigation tools such as Walk Around and Fly Around to move the
camera dynamically.
You can also change what you’re focused on in a 3D camera view by moving the target in the Camera Properties panel. You
can also change the target height.

Displaying the Camera Properties Panel

You can change your 3D view by editing the settings or camera/target positions in the Camera Properties panel. The Camera
Properties panel appears automatically when you switch to a 3D camera view. If you have closed the panel, you can open
it again when you need it.
To display the Camera Properties panel:
1. With the 3D camera view displayed, right-click in the view window and select Camera Properties.

Zooming and Panning in the Camera Properties Panel

When the Camera Properties panel is displayed in a 3D camera view, you can zoom and pan the view inside the panel’s
interactive view map window. For example, you may need to zoom out to be able to bring the camera grip into view. Or,
you may need to zoom in to be able to place a camera in a precise position in a room. The zoom and pan tools are located
below the view map window in the Camera Properties panel.
To zoom in by increments:

1. Click below the view map window.

- 184 -
 Closing the Camera Properties Panel

To zoom out by increments:

1. Click .
To zoom in and out in real time:

1. Click .
2. To zoom in, click and drag toward the top of the screen.
3. To zoom out, click and drag toward the bottom of the screen.
4. When the view is the desired size, release your mouse button.
Tip: You can also zoom in and out using the scroll button on your mouse.
To zoom a selected area:

1. Click . Your cursor becomes a magnifying glass.

2. Click and drag a selection window around the area you want to magnify.
To zoom to the extents of the view map window:

1. Click .
To pan (shift) the view:

1. Click .
2. Click and hold your mouse button in the view map window.
3. Drag the view in the direction you want to pan.
4. Release the mouse button.
To zoom back to the previous view:

1. Click .

Closing the Camera Properties Panel

The Camera Properties panel appears automatically when you switch to a 3D camera view. You can close the panel at any
time to display the Catalog panel.
To close the Camera Properties panel:
1. In the Camera Properties panel, click the Close Properties button.

Turning Cameras On and Off

Every 3D camera view is controlled by a virtual “camera”. The Cameras On/Off tool displays a camera icon on the screen.
This gives you an idea of where you are viewing from. If you click on a camera, the target and viewing field angle become
highlighted. This lets you know what the camera is focused on, and how much of your design is included in the view.
Having cameras displayed in 2D plan view allows you to move cameras and targets in order to adjust the 3D views they are
associated with. This is an alternative to adjusting 3D views interactively with the Camera Properties panel.
To turn cameras on:
• Select View > Viewing Aids > Cameras On/Off, or

• Click on the View Control toolbar

In 2D plan view, all cameras for all 3D camera views are visible. (By default there are two: one for the 3D Perspective, and
one for the 3D Overview.) You may need to zoom out to see them.

- 185 -
Chapter 17: 2D and 3D Viewing

Changing Your Viewpoint

Moving a camera changes the angle you are viewing from in a 3D camera view. You can change the position of a camera by
clicking and dragging the camera grip in the interactive Camera Properties panel. You can also move a camera while in 2D
plan view if your cameras are turned on.
To change your viewpoint in a 3D camera view:
1. Display the 3D camera view, and make sure the Camera Properties panel is displayed. If it isn’t, right-click in the view
window and select Camera Properties.
2. In the view map window of the Camera Properties panel, click and drag the yellow camera grip, then release your
mouse button. The 3D view updates automatically.

To change your viewpoint from 2D plan view:

1. Make sure you are in 2D plan view.
2. Turn your cameras on.
3. By default, the camera for the 3D Perspective view is located to the left of the model. The camera for the 3D Overview
is located towards the right side of the model. Click on the camera you want to move.

4. Hover your pointer over the camera’s blue grip to display the Move cursor . Or, right-click in the drawing area and
select Move Camera.
5. Click and drag the camera to move it where you want it.
6. To see the resulting view, right-click and select Activate View, or simply double-click the camera.

Note: You cannot change the viewpoint of a 3D QuickView, since these views do not have cameras associated with them.

Changing the Camera Height

The height of your camera determines the height you are viewing your model from in a 3D Camera View. A positive camera
height lets you look down on your model, while a negative camera height lets you look up at your model.
To change the camera height:
1. Display the 3D camera view, and make sure the Camera Properties panel is displayed. If it isn’t, right-click in the view
window and select Camera Properties.
2. In the Camera Properties panel, type the height you want in the Camera Height edit box, or use the arrows to scroll up
or down through a list of values.

Changing the Target of a 3D Camera View

The target of a 3D camera view is the area you are focused on, or looking towards. You can change the position of a target
by clicking and dragging the target grip in the interactive Camera Properties panel. You can also move a target while in 2D
plan view.
To change the target in a 3D camera view:
1. Display the 3D camera view, and make sure the Camera Properties panel is displayed. If it isn’t, right-click in the view
window and select Camera Properties.
2.
In the view map window of the Camera Properties panel, click and drag the circular target grip, then release your
mouse button. The 3D view updates automatically.

- 186 -
 Changing the Target Height in a 3D Camera View

To change a target from 2D plan view:

1. In 2D plan view, turn your cameras on.
2. By default, the camera for the 3D Perspective view is located to the left of the model. The camera for the 3D Overview
is located towards the right side of the model. Click on the camera whose target you want to move. The target is usually
inside or near your model. It is marked with a blue grip.

3. Hover your pointer over the target’s grip to display the Move cursor . Or, right-click in the drawing area and select
Move Target.
4. Click and drag the target to move it where you want it.
5. To see the resulting view, right-click and select Activate View, or simply double-click the camera.

Changing the Target Height in a 3D Camera View

Raising or lowering your target can increase or decrease the steepness of the angle you are viewing from when looking
through the camera.
To change the target height:
1. Display the 3D camera view, and make sure the Camera Properties panel is displayed. If it isn’t, right-click in the view
window and select Camera Properties.
2. In the Camera Properties panel, type the height you want in the Target Height edit box, or use the arrows to scroll up
or down through a list of values.

Changing the Viewing Field Angle

In a 3D camera view, the viewing field refers to your field of vision. It works like a camera lens: higher values produce a
wide-angle view; lower values produce a close-up view.
Sometimes changing the viewing field angle makes it seem like you are zooming in or out. This is because for wide-angle
views, the program needs to shrink the image to provide enough screen space to contain the view. Conversely, the program
enlarges the image to fill the screen at smaller view angles, creating a close-up view.
To change the viewing field angle in a 3D camera view:
1. Display the 3D camera view, and make sure the Camera Properties panel is displayed. If it isn’t, right-click in the view
window and select Camera Properties.
2. In the Camera Properties panel, type the desired angle in the View Angle edit box, or use the slider to increase or de-
crease the angle.

60º View Angle

- 187 -
Chapter 17: 2D and 3D Viewing

100º View Angle

Viewing in Presentation/Virtual Reality Mode

In Presentation Mode, you navigate using an external controller (such as a video game controller), or the arrow keys on your
keyboard. If you have a virtual reality headset, you can create a 360° virtual reality viewing experience.
When navigating in Presentation Mode, you will not walk through walls or other objects. Instead you can walk up and down
stairs, step onto decks, and walk through open doors, just as you would in real life.
To enter into Presentation Mode, select View > Presentation Mode.
A unique toolbar is displayed below the view window.

• If you have a virtual reality headset, click to enter Virtual Reality Mode.

• To turn global illumination on or off, click . Global illumination is a process that adds more realistic lighting to a
3D scene. Reflections, refractions, and shadows are examples of global illumination. This feature becomes available af-
ter you have generated the global illumination cache (see next item).

• To generate the global illumination cache, click . This precalculates the lights, shadows and reflections for the mod-
el, so that you can navigate more smoothly while in virtual reality mode. Once the global illumination cache has been
generated, you can turn global illumination on and off (see previous item).

• To exit Presentation Mode, click .

By default, a standard 360° view is produced during virtual reality viewing. You can switch to a stereoscopic view in your
Program Settings. In a stereoscopic view, depth data is added between the foreground and background, creating a more
immersive experience. See Stereoscopic VR Viewing on page 188.
If you want to render a panoramic view that can be shared and viewed with the VR app, see Rendering a Panoramic View
for VR Viewing on page 265.

Stereoscopic VR Viewing
By default, a standard 360° view is produced during virtual reality viewing in Presentation Mode. If you switch to a
stereoscopic view, depth data is added between the foreground and background, creating a more immersive experience.
To enable or disable stereoscopic VR viewing:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Program Settings dialog, click Graphics in the left column.
3. In the VR pane, check or uncheck the Stereoscopic check box.
4. Click OK.

Scene Properties
When a view window contains a 3D scene, there are a number of properties that you can specify to control the appearance
of the scene. These properties may also come into play when creating 3D Real View renderings.

- 188 -
 Specifying the Properties of a 3D Scene

Specifying the Properties of a 3D Scene

When a view window contains a 3D scene, there are a number of properties that you can specify to control the appearance
of the scene, such as the background and amount of daylight.
To specify scene properties:
1. Display the scene, then right-click and select Scene Properties. Or, select View > View Properties and select the
Scene Properties tab.
2. In the Scene Properties panel, specify the following settings:
Use physically accurate lighting. Enabling this option causes light to be simulated in a more natural way, resulting
in optimal rendering quality. Note, however, that these advanced lighting calculations will increase rendering time.
Exposure. Determines how light or dark the image will appear. The higher the value, the lighter the image will be.
Date and Time. Determines how much daylight will be in the scene relative to your global location.
Background. If Use physically accurate lighting is enabled, a realistic sky background is automatically generated,
and the background type is set to Physical Sky.
If Use physically accurate lighting is disabled, you can select an image to use for the background. From the Type
drop box, select either 2D Image or 3D Image depending on the type of image you want to use. 2D images are
displayed directly across from the camera, and therefore move when you move. 3D images form a skybox, creating the
perception of a realistic 3D world. You can then select the image to use from the Materials library.
Sky settings. This setting helps to control the amount of light being cast onto a scene. Choices are Clear Sky, Partly
Cloudy Sky, and Overcast Sky. For example, if your rendered image looks overexposed, you can select a partly cloudy
or overcast sky to reduce the amount of light coming through.
If Use physically accurate lighting is enabled, the following settings are also available:
Sky Power. The sky multiplier. Set the value to 1.0 to create a physically accurate sky texture. Lower values can be used
to simulate the effect of clouds or environment on the sky intensity.
Sky Saturation. The intensity of color in an image. If saturation is set to 1.0, colors are as computed by the model, and
the image will have overly bright colors. If the value is lower, returned colors will look more grayish.
Sun Power. The intensity of sunlight. This applies in Realistic display mode and photo-realistic renderings, both of
which displays sun and shadows.
Enable reflections. Simulates light reflecting off of objects and surfaces.
Enable sun light. If disabled, sun light is not created, regardless of the time of day. It is recommended that you disable
sun light if you are rendering within a room that has no openings.
Enable sun shadow. Simulates the shadows cast by objects when they are illuminated by the sun.
3. Click Close.

Using Physically Accurate Lighting in a Scene

You can make a 3D scene more photorealistic by using physically accurate lighting. Enabling this option creates a realistic
sky, and causes light to be simulated in a more natural way, resulting in optimal rendering quality. Note, however, that these
advanced lighting calculations will increase rendering time.
To use physically accurate daylight for a 3D scene:
1. Display the scene, then right-click and select Scene Properties. Or, select View > View Properties and select the
Scene Properties tab.
2. In the Scene Properties panel, enable the Use physically accurate lighting check box.

Defining the Time of Day in a Scene

The time of day in a 3D scene determines how much daylight will be in the scene relative to your global location.
To define the time of day:
1. Display the view, then right-click and select Scene Properties. Or, select View > View Properties and select the Scene
Properties tab.

- 189 -
Chapter 17: 2D and 3D Viewing

2. By default, the date is set to the current date. If you would like to set the date to a different time of year, click the cal-
endar icon in the Date field, then select the desired date.
3. To set a time of day, click on the hour or minute value in the Time field, then type the desired value for the hour or
minute. To switch from AM to PM, or vice versa, select the AM or PM setting and click an adjacent arrow key.
4. To keep track of changes in time due to daylight savings, enable the DST check box.
5. Click Close.

Selecting a Background for a Scene

By default, a sky image is displayed behind your model when you are in a 3D view. You can select a different image to
display, including custom bitmaps that you have imported. If you have multiple view windows defined, you can select a
different background for each one if desired.
To select a background for a view:
1. Display the view, then right-click and select Scene Properties. Or, select View > View Properties and select the Scene
Properties tab.
2. To use a realistic sky background, enable the Use physically accurate lighting check box.
3. To use a selected image for the background, disable Use physically accurate lighting. In the Background pane, select
either 3D Image or 2D Image from the Type drop box. 2D images are displayed directly across from the camera, and
therefore move when you move. 3D images form a skybox, creating the perception of a realistic 3D world. You can then
select the image to use from the Materials library. A number of predefined backgrounds are available in the Land-
scape Backgrounds folder.
4. Click Close in the Scene Properties panel.

Changing the Sun and Sky Settings in a Scene

Changing a scene’s sky conditions can adjust the amount of light in the scene. For example, if a scene looks overexposed,
you can change the sky to partly cloudy or overcast to reduce the amount of light being cast onto the scene.
To change a scene’s sky settings:
1. Display the scene, then right-click and select Scene Properties. Or, select View > View Properties and select the
Scene Properties tab.
2. Select the desired sky condition from the Sky settings drop box. Choices are Clear Sky, Partly Cloudy Sky, and Over-
cast Sky.
3. If Use physically accurate lighting is enabled, the following settings are also available:
Sky power. The sky multiplier. Set the value to 1.0 to create a physically accurate sky texture. Lower values can be used
to simulate the effect of clouds or environment on the sky intensity.
Sky saturation. The intensity of color in an image. If saturation is set to 1.0, colors are as computed by the model, and
the image will have overly bright colors. If the value is lower, returned colors will look more grayish.
Sun power. The intensity of sunlight. This applies in Realistic display mode and photo-realistic renderings, both of
which displays sun and shadows.
Enable reflections. Simulates light reflecting off of objects and surfaces.
Enable sun light. If disabled, sun light is not created, regardless of the time of day. It is recommended that you disable
sun light if you are rendering within a room that has no openings.
Enable sun shadow. Simulates the shadows cast by objects when they are illuminated by the sun.

Enabling Reflections and Shadows in a Scene

Enabling reflections and sun shadows can create an added level of realism to a 3D scene.
To enable reflections and/or sun shadows in a scene:
1. Display the scene, then right-click and select Scene Properties. Or, select View > View Properties and select the
Scene Properties tab.
2. To simulate light reflecting off of objects and surfaces, enable the Enable Reflections check box.

- 190 -
 Specifying the Exposure in a Scene

3. To simulate the shadows cast by objects when they are illuminated by the sun, enable the Enable Sun Shadow check
box.

Specifying the Exposure in a Scene

Exposure determines how light or dark a scene will appear by controlling the amount of light collected by the camera.
To specify the exposure in a scene:
1. Display the scene, then right-click and select Scene Properties. Or, select View > View Properties and select the
Scene Properties tab.
2. Move the Exposure slider to the desired value. The higher the value, the lighter the image will be.

Navigating in 3D
Virtual Architect home design software offers a variety of tools for navigating dynamically in 3D camera views. Once a tool
is selected, just use your mouse to perform the navigation. You can return to the previous view instantly using the Reset
Camera tool.
You can also use your mouse or the arrow keys on your keyboard to perform some navigation functions without having to
select tools from the menu, toolbar or Navigator. This lets you change your view instantly for a more quick and efficient
design process.
Note: If you move into a room that has no light fixtures, the camera headlight feature will illuminate the room when you
are viewing the room in 3D. This light is only available when viewing and navigating in real time and is not used in
rendering.
Click on a tool below to learn more about it.
Walk Around
Fly Around
Look Around
Reset Camera

Walking Around in a 3D Camera View

When you are in a 3D camera view, you can use the Walk Around tool to walk around your model, or even go right inside
it. You can walk forward, backward, left or right.
To walk around in a 3D camera view:
1. Select View > Zoom and Navigate > Walk Around, or right-click in the drawing area and select Walk Around, or click

on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar.

2. Click and hold down your mouse button in the drawing area.
3. Drag in the direction you want to move.
• To move forward, drag upward.
• To move backward, drag downward.
• To walk left or right, drag left or right.
• If you drag up to the left, your path of motion will curve upward to the left, and so forth.

Tip: You can also walk around using only your mouse. Click and hold the CTRL key and your left mouse button, then drag
to walk around.

Tip: You can also use your arrow keys to walk forward and backward. Click the up arrow to walk forward, and click the
down arrow to walk backward.

Note: The Walk Around tool is not available if the view is a 3D QuickView.

- 191 -
Chapter 17: 2D and 3D Viewing

Note: By default, motion will continue when you stop dragging, until you release your mouse button. If you would prefer
that motion stop when you stop dragging, you should change your motion response setting. See Setting the Zoom and
Navigation Motion Response on page 197.

Flying Around Your 3D Model

In a 3D camera view, the Fly Around tool revolves the camera around the target, making it seem like the model is spinning.
To fly around your model in a 3D camera view:

1. Select View > Zoom and Navigate > Fly Around, or right-click in the drawing area and select Fly Around, or click
on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar.
2. Click and hold down your mouse button in the drawing area.
3. Drag in the direction that you want to rotate the model. For example, if you want to rotate the model to the right, drag
to the right.

Note: To have the model rotate in the opposite direction when you drag, enable the Invert Orbit Navigation setting in
Settings > Program Settings > Navigation.

Note: By default, motion will continue when you stop dragging, until you release your mouse button. If you would prefer
that motion stop when you stop dragging, you should change your motion response setting. See Setting the Zoom and
Navigation Motion Response on page 197.

Tip: You can also fly around by clicking and dragging your middle mouse button provided that the Fly Around tool is
assigned to the middle mouse button in your navigation settings. (By default, the Look Around tool is assigned to the
middle button.)

Looking Around in a 3D Camera View

In a 3D camera view, the Look Around tool revolves the target around the camera.
To look around:
1. Select View > Zoom and Navigate > Look Around, or right-click in the drawing area and select Look Around, or click

on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar.

2. Click and hold down your mouse button in the drawing area, then drag to look around.
• Drag right to move the target in a counterclockwise direction. Your model orbits around you in a clockwise direc-
tion.
• Drag left to move the target in a clockwise direction. Your model orbits around you in a counterclockwise direction.
• Drag up to lower the height and shorten the distance of the target. Your view becomes high-angle, and your model
moves toward the top of the screen.
• Drag down to raise the height and lengthen the distance of the target. Your view becomes low-angle, and your
model moves toward the bottom of the screen.

Note: Be careful when using the Look Around tool. It is very easy to lose sight of your model since the camera’s "eye" is
fixed in one direction only. It does not move to follow the orbiting target. Therefore, your field of vision is limited, and your
model can quickly get above, below or behind you.

Note: By default, motion will continue when you stop dragging, until you release your mouse button. If you would prefer
that motion stop when you stop dragging, you should change your motion response setting. See Setting the Zoom and
Navigation Motion Response on page 197.

Note: The Look Around tool is not available if the view is a 3D QuickView.

Tip: You can also look around by clicking and dragging your middle mouse button provided that the Look Around tool is
assigned to the middle mouse button in your navigation settings. You can also look left and right using the left and right
arrow keys on your keyboard.

- 192 -
 Resetting the Camera

Resetting the Camera

If you have moved the camera of a 3D camera view, either by dragging it in 2D plan view or using a navigation tool like
Walk Around or Pan, you can use the Reset Camera tool to move the camera back into its original position. Note that this
tool is only available when the current view is a 3D view.
To reset the camera to its original position:

1. Select View > Zoom and Navigate > Reset Camera, or click on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar.

Note: The Reset Camera tool is not available if the view is a 3D QuickView.

Zooming and Panning

While designing you will probably need to zoom in on something to be able to see it more clearly. You can use a variety of
zoom tools to magnify or de-magnify the current view or a portion of it. This gives you control over the amount of detail
displayed.
Zoom In. Magnifies the entire view in increments.
Zoom Out. De-magnifies the entire view in increments.
Zoom Realtime. Continuously magnifies or shrinks the view as you click and drag with your mouse.
Zoom Window. Magnifies a particular area of your design.
Zoom to Fit. Magnifies the entire view to the extents of the drawing area.
Zoom Previous. Returns the view to the previous zoom level.
The Pan tool lets you shift the view around in the drawing area.

Zooming In
The Zoom In tool magnifies the entire view in increments. Zooming is possible in both 2D and 3D view.
To zoom in:

1. Select View > Zoom and Navigate > Zoom In, or click on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar.
2. To zoom in more, select the Zoom In tool repeatedly until the view is sufficiently magnified.

Zooming Out
The Zoom Out tool reduces the size of the current view in increments.
To zoom out:

1. Select View > Zoom and Navigate > Zoom Out, or click on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar.
2. To zoom out more, select the Zoom Out tool repeatedly until the desired zoom level is achieved.

Zooming in Realtime
The Zoom Realtime tool continuously magnifies or shrinks the view as you click and drag with your mouse. You can zoom
in and out in 2D plan view or any 3D view.
To zoom in and out:

1. Select View > Zoom and Navigate > Zoom Realtime, or click on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar.
2. Click in the drawing area or on the Navigator’s center pad, then drag up or down to zoom in or out. To zoom in, click
and drag upward. To zoom out, click and drag downward.
3. When the view is the desired size, release your mouse button.

Note: By default, zooming will continue when you stop dragging, until you release your mouse button. If you would prefer
that zooming stop when you stop dragging, you should change your motion response setting. See Setting the Zoom and
Navigation Motion Response on page 197.

- 193 -
Chapter 17: 2D and 3D Viewing

Tip: You can also zoom in and out using the scroll wheel on your mouse, or by holding down the CTRL key and right mouse
button simultaneously.

Zooming With a Scroll Wheel Mouse

If you have a mouse with a scroll wheel, you can zoom in and out in real time by rolling the wheel. The position of your
mouse pointer determines the center of zoom.
To zoom with a scroll wheel mouse:
1. Position your pointer over the center of the area you want to zoom.
2. To zoom in, roll the wheel forward.
3. To zoom out, roll the wheel backward.

Zooming a Selected Area (Zoom Window)

Using the Zoom Window tool you can magnify a particular area of your design by drawing a selection window around it.
To zoom a selected area:

1. Select View > Zoom and Navigate > Zoom Window, or click on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar. Your cursor be-
comes a magnifying glass.
2. Click and drag a selection window around the area you want to magnify.

Note: The Zoom Window tool is not available in 3D camera views.

Zooming to Fit the Drawing Area

The Zoom to Fit tool instantly extends your drawing to the edges of the drawing area. This ensures your entire drawing is
visible at the most maximized view possible, and makes full use of the drawing area. Note that the terrain is considered part
of your drawing. If you want to zoom your model to fit the drawing area, you need to turn the terrain off before using Zoom
to Fit.
To zoom the drawing to fit the drawing area:

1. Select View > Zoom and Navigate > Zoom to Fit, or click on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar.

Note: The Zoom to Fit tool is not available in 3D camera views.

Panning
Using the Pan tool you can move the current view of your design to bring a particular part of your design into view. This is
especially useful when the area you want to view is currently not visible because you have zoomed in on your drawing.
To pan the current view:

1. Select View > Zoom and Navigate > Pan, or click on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar.
2. Click and hold your mouse in the drawing area.

- 194 -
 Zooming Back to the Previous View

3. Drag the view in the direction you want to pan.

4. Release the mouse button.

Tip: You can also pan the view using your mouse. To pan in 2D view, click and drag the middle button. To pan in 3D view,
click and hold the CTRL key while pressing the middle button.

Tip: In 2D views you can also pan the view using the arrow keys on your keyboard.

Zooming Back to the Previous View

If you have used a zoom or pan tool, you can use the Zoom Previous tool to instantly return the view to its previous state.
To zoom back to the previous view:

1. Select View > Zoom and Navigate > Zoom Previous, or click on the Zoom and Navigate toolbar.

Zoom & Navigation Settings

You can use both your mouse and arrow keys to zoom and navigate, instead of using menus and toolbars. There are also
various settings that let you precisely control the way you zoom and navigate. You can experiment with these settings to
tailor the zoom and navigation tools to the way you like to work.
Settings and functions include:
• Mouse controls ...
• Arrow key controls ...
• Zoom and navigation speed ...
• Zoom and navigation motion response ...
• Middle mouse button assignment ...

Zooming and Navigating with the Mouse

You can use the buttons on your mouse to perform many zoom and navigation functions instead of making selections from
the menu, toolbar or Navigator. This allows you to instantly change your view while designing, making the design process
more quick and efficient. For example, you can zoom in realtime by simply rolling the scroll wheel on your mouse.
In 2D view you can use the mouse to zoom and pan. In 3D view you can use the mouse to zoom, pan, walk around, look
around, or fly around.
You can view the mouse control settings at any time by displaying the Navigation page in your Program Settings.
To view mouse control settings:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Program Settings dialog, click Navigation in the left pane.

- 195 -
Chapter 17: 2D and 3D Viewing

Note: By default, the Look Around tool is assigned to the middle mouse button. You can assign the Fly Around tool to it if
you prefer by selecting the Fly Around option for the Middle Button setting.

Assigning a Navigation Action to the Middle Mouse Button

You can use your middle mouse button to either Look Around or Fly Around without having to make a selection from the
menu, toolbar or Navigator. By default, the Look Around tool is assigned to the middle mouse button. You can choose to
assign the Fly Around tool to it if you prefer.
To assign a navigation action to the middle mouse button:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Program Settings dialog, click Navigation in the left pane.
3. In the Mouse Controls area, select either the Look Around or Fly Around option next to the Middle Button setting.
4. Click OK.

Inverting the Orbit when Navigating in 3D

By default, when using the Fly Around tool, the model rotates in the direction in which you drag.
To have the model rotate in the opposite direction when you drag, follow these steps:
1. Select Settings > Program Settings > Navigation.
2. In the Zoom and Navigation Settings pane, enable Invert Orbit Navigation.

Using Arrow Keys to Pan and Navigate

You can use the arrow keys on your keyboard to pan, walk or look around instead of making selections from the menu,
toolbar or Navigator. This allows you to instantly shift your view when needed. In 2D view you can use the arrow keys to
pan the view. In 3D view you can use the arrow keys to walk and look around. You can click an arrow key to move in
increments, or click and hold an arrow key for continuous motion in the specified direction.
You can view the arrow key settings at any time by displaying the Navigation page in your Program Settings.
To view arrow key settings:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Program Settings dialog, click Navigation in the left pane.

- 196 -
 Adjusting Zoom and Navigation Speed

Adjusting Zoom and Navigation Speed

You can adjust the rate of motion for zoom and navigation tools so that your motion is faster or slower when dragging your
mouse. This applies to continuous motion tools, including Zoom Realtime, Pan, Walk Around, Fly Around, and Look
Around.
To adjust zoom and navigation speed:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Program Settings dialog, click Navigation in the left pane.
3. In the Zoom and Navigation Speed area, click and drag the slider to adjust the zoom and navigation speed. Slide left for
slower motion, or slide right for faster motion.
4. Click OK.

Setting the Zoom and Navigation Motion Response

By default, when using continuous motion tools such as Zoom Realtime, Pan, Walk Around and Fly Around, motion
continues in the current direction when you stop dragging your mouse, until you release your mouse button. If you prefer
that motion stop when you stop dragging, you can disable continuous motion in your program settings.
To select a zoom and navigation motion response:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Program Settings dialog, click Navigation in the left pane.
3. In the Zoom and Navigation Speed area, check or uncheck the Continuous Motion check box.
4. Click OK.

Elevations
Elevations are the front, back and side views of a building. The Elevations menu contains four pre-defined elevation view
tools - Front Elevation, Right Elevation, Rear Elevation, and Left Elevation. Just select one to instantly display an
elevation view. You can also create a custom elevation if you want.
You can control the display of elevation marks in your drawing, and edit a variety of elevation properties.

Viewing Elevations
Elevations are 2D images that show a particular side of your model (front, rear, left or right) as if you were looking at it face
on. While in an elevation view you can zoom in and out as well as change the display type.

- 197 -
Chapter 17: 2D and 3D Viewing

To view an elevation:

1. Select View > Elevations, or click on the View Control toolbar.

2. From the flyout, select the elevation you want to view (Front, Back, Right or Left).
When you are in elevation view, the Elevation Properties panel is displayed on the right side of the screen. You can use
this panel to interactively adjust the elevation and its settings.

Tip: If you have your elevation marks turned on in your 2D plan view, you can switch to an elevation view by selecting an
elevation mark, right-clicking it, then selecting Activate View. Or, you can simply double-click the elevation mark.

Creating a Custom Elevation

Professional only
You can create a custom elevation by inserting an elevation mark in your 2D plan view. Once you’ve inserted the mark,
which represents your viewpoint, you can rotate it using your mouse to define the view direction.
To create a custom elevation:
1. Make sure you are in 2D plan view.
2. Turn your elevation marks on. This is not necessary, but we recommend it so that you can see where other elevation
marks are located. The default elevation marks are located at the extents of the terrain, so you may need to zoom out
to see them.

3. Select View > Elevations > Create New Elevation, or click on the View Control toolbar and select Create New
Elevation. An elevation mark is attached to your cursor, ready to be inserted.
4. Click to insert the new elevation mark. This represents your viewpoint, so naturally you would select a point in front
of the model side you want to look at in your elevation.
5. Move your cursor to rotate the arrow on the elevation mark and define the view direction. Once it is pointing in the
desired direction (usually towards your model), click to finish.
Once you’ve positioned the elevation mark, the resulting elevation is instantly displayed. It is also added to the Elevations
menu and toolbar flyout for easy access. Note that elevations sections are named automatically when you create them,
starting with the name A1. The number increments each time you create a new elevation or section. You can rename
elevations and sections in their properties.

Displaying the Elevation Properties Panel

When you switch to elevation view, the Elevation Properties panel is automatically displayed on the right side of the screen.
You can use this panel to interactively adjust the elevation and its settings. If you have closed the panel, you can open it
again when you need it.
To display the Elevation Properties panel:
1. With the elevation displayed, right-click in the view window and select Elevation Properties.

Zooming and Panning in the Elevation Properties Panel

When the Elevation Properties panel is displayed in an elevation view, you can zoom and pan the view inside the panel’s
interactive view map window. For example, you may need to zoom out to be able to see the entire model or the elevation
mark icon.
To zoom in by increments:

1. Click below the view map window.

To zoom out by increments:

1. Click .
To zoom in and out in real time:

1. Click .

- 198 -
 Closing the Elevation Properties Panel

2. To zoom in, click and drag toward the top of the screen.
3. To zoom out, click and drag toward the bottom of the screen.
4. When the view is the desired size, release your mouse button.
Tip: You can also zoom in and out using the scroll button on your mouse.
To zoom a selected area:

1. Click . Your cursor becomes a magnifying glass.

2. Click and drag a selection window around the area you want to magnify.
To zoom to the extents of the view map window:

1. Click .
To pan (shift) the view:

1. Click .
2. Click and hold your mouse button in the view map window.
3. Drag the view in the direction you want to pan.
4. Release the mouse button.
To zoom back to the previous view:

1. Click .

Closing the Elevation Properties Panel

The Elevation Properties panel appears automatically when you switch to an elevation view. You can close the panel at any
time to display the Catalog panel.
To close the Elevation Properties panel:
1. In the Elevation Properties panel, click the Close Properties button.

Turning Elevation Marks On and Off

You can use the View Filter to display or hide elevation marks in your 2D plan view. An elevation mark contains the label
given to the elevation in the elevation’s properties, as well as a target arrow that identifies the view direction of the elevation.

By default, four marks are displayed, one for each of the default elevations on the Elevation View menu. If you have created
a custom elevation, a mark is displayed for that elevation as well.
To turn elevation marks on or off:

1. Select View > View Filters > View Filter, or click on the View Control toolbar.
2. In the View Filter dialog, select the Viewing Aids tab.
3. In the Elevation Mark row, click the eye icon in the Display column to toggle elevation marks on or off.
Marks are turned on

Marks are turned off

The marks are located at the extents of your drawing, so you may need to zoom out to see them.
If you select and right-click an elevation mark, you can access a menu of tools including Move, Move Target and Activate
View.

- 199 -
Chapter 17: 2D and 3D Viewing

Moving Elevation Marks

By default, elevation marks are centered with your model, which means the model is centered on the screen when you view
the resulting elevation view. If you move an elevation mark in your 2D plan view, the model may be moved left or right
when you display the elevation view.
You can move an elevation mark while in elevation view using the interactive Elevation Properties panel. Alternatively you
can move it while in 2D plan view, then display the resulting view.
To move an elevation mark while in elevation view:
1. Display the elevation view, and make sure the Elevation Properties panel is displayed. If it isn’t, right-click in the view
window and select Elevation Properties.
2.
In the view map window of the Elevation Properties panel, click and drag the elevation mark grip. The elevation view
updates instantly.

For front and rear elevations, move the mark left or right. For left or right elevations, move the mark up or down. Note
that moving a mark closer to or farther away from the model has no effect on the resulting elevation view.
To move an elevation mark while in 2D plan view:
1. Select the elevation mark in 2D plan view.

2. Hover your pointer over the mark’s blue grip to display the Move cursor. Or, right-click in the drawing area and
select Move.
3. Click and drag the mark to move it where you want it.
4. Right-click and select Activate View to see the resulting elevation, or simply double-click the elevation mark.

Changing the Target of an Elevation

By default, elevation marks point straight at your model. The result is a completely face-on view when you display the
resulting elevation view. If you rotate an elevation mark, you change the target of the elevation. This focuses the view on a
different part of your design when you display the elevation view.
To change the target of an elevation:
1. Go to 2D plan view, and make sure your elevation marks are turned on.
2. Select the mark whose target you want to change.
3. Right-click and select Move Target.
4. Click and drag to rotate the mark so it is pointing in a different direction.
5. Right-click and select Activate View to see the result, or simply double-click the elevation mark.

Editing Elevation Properties

You can edit the name of an elevation as it appears on the Elevation Views menu, as well as edit the mark text and mark text
style.
To edit elevation properties:
1. Display the elevation view and make sure the Elevation Properties panel is displayed. If it isn’t, right-click in the view
window and select Elevation Properties.
2. To edit the name of the elevation as it appears on the Elevations menu, edit the name in the Name edit box.
3. To edit the text that appears on the elevation mark, edit the text in the Mark Text edit box.

- 200 -
 Deleting an Elevation

4. To apply a different text style to the elevation mark, click the Text Style button and make a selection from the Text
Styles dialog. You can also add and edit text styles if you want.

Deleting an Elevation
You can delete an elevation from the Elevations menu by deleting its corresponding elevation mark in 2D plan view.
To delete an elevation:
1. Go to 2D plan view, and make sure your elevation marks are turned on.
2. Select the mark to delete.
3. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete.

Sections
A section is a cross-section view of your design created by cutting through the building. Section views are useful for
clarifying construction details. You can use the Create New Section tool to create a custom section at any time.
Once a section has been created you can edit its viewpoint, depth, and other properties. You can also control the display of
section marks.

Creating a Section
Professional only
You can cut through any portion of your model to create a section view, or cross-section. Section views are a great way to see
the interior features of your model that you are not able to see from the outside, and clarify construction details.

To create a section, you draw a section line through your model in 2D plan view, then click to define the view direction and
depth.
To create a section:
1. Make sure you are in 2D plan view.

2. Select View > Sections > Create New Section, or click on the View Control toolbar and select Create New Sec-
tion.
3. Select two points to draw a line that cuts through your model. This is the line you will be viewing from.
4. Move your cursor in the direction you want to view. The more you move away from the section line, the deeper your
view becomes. Once the bounding box is the desired distance and direction from the section line, click to finish.

- 201 -
Chapter 17: 2D and 3D Viewing

Once you’ve defined the section mark, the resulting section view is instantly displayed. It is also added to the Sections menu
and toolbar flyouts for easy access. Note that elevations sections are named automatically when you create them, starting
with the name A1. The number increments each time you create a new elevation or section. You can rename elevations and
sections in their properties.

Viewing Sections
Professional only
If you have created section views, you can display them at any time using the Sections menu or toolbar.
To view a section:

1. Select View > Sections, or click on the View Control toolbar and select the section name.

Tip: If you have your section marks turned on in your 2D plan view, you can switch to a section view by selecting a section
mark, right-clicking it, then selecting Activate View.

Displaying the Section Properties Panel

Professional only
When you switch to section view, the Section Properties panel is automatically displayed on the right side of the screen. You
can use this panel to interactively adjust the section and its settings. If you have closed the panel, you can open it again when
you need it.
To display the Section Properties panel:
1. With the section view displayed, right-click in the view window and select Section Properties.

Zooming and Panning in the Section Properties Panel

Professional only
When the Section Properties panel is displayed in a section view, you can zoom and pan the view inside the panel’s
interactive view map window. For example, you may need to zoom out to be able to see the entire model or the section mark
icons.
The zoom and pan tools are located below the view map window.
To zoom in by increments:

1. Click below the view map window.

To zoom out by increments:

1. Click .
To zoom in and out in real time:

1. Click .
2. To zoom in, click and drag toward the top of the screen.

- 202 -
 Closing the Section Properties Panel

3. To zoom out, click and drag toward the bottom of the screen.
4. When the view is the desired size, release your mouse button.
Tip: You can also zoom in and out using the scroll button on your mouse.
To zoom a selected area:

1. Click . Your cursor becomes a magnifying glass.

2. Click and drag a selection window around the area you want to magnify.
To zoom to the extents of the view map window:

1. Click .
To pan (shift) the view:

1. Click .
2. Click and hold your mouse button in the view map window.
3. Drag the view in the direction you want to pan.
4. Release the mouse button.
To zoom back to the previous view:

1. Click .

Closing the Section Properties Panel

Professional only
The Section Properties panel appears automatically when you switch to a section view. You can close the panel at any time
to display the Catalog panel.
To close the Section Properties panel:
1. In the Section Properties panel, click the Close Properties button.

Turning Section Marks On and Off

Professional only
When you create a section, a section mark is displayed in the 2D plan view. The section mark contains markers at each end
of the section line which indicate the direction of the section view. You can turn section marks on and off using the View
Filter.
To turn section marks on or off:

1. Select View > View Filters > View Filter, or click on the View Control toolbar.
2. In the View Filter dialog, select the Viewing Aids tab.
3. In the Section Mark row, click the eye icon in the Display column to toggle section marks on or off.
Marks are turned on

Marks are turned off

Changing Your Viewpoint in a Section

Professional only
You can change your viewpoint in a section by moving a section mark. You can use the Section Properties panel to move
the section mark interactively. Alternatively you can move the section mark in 2D plan view, then display the resulting view.
To change your viewpoint in a section:
1. Display the section, and make sure the Section Properties panel is displayed. If it isn’t, right-click in the view window
and select Section Properties.

- 203 -
Chapter 17: 2D and 3D Viewing

2.
In the view map window of the Section Properties panel, click and drag the red square grip at the center of the section
mark line, then release your mouse button. The section updates instantly.

To change your viewpoint from 2D plan view:

1. In 2D plan view, make sure your section marks are turned on.
2. Click on the section mark.

3. Hover your pointer over the blue grip on the section line to display the Move cursor . Or, right-click in the drawing
area and select Move.
4. Click and drag the mark to move it where you want it.
5. Right-click and select Activate View to see the result.

Changing the Depth of a Section

Professional only
You can change the depth of a section by stretching the section line bounding box. You can change the depth interactively
using the Section Properties panel. Alternatively you can change the depth in 2D plan view, then display the resulting view.
To change the depth of a section:
1. Display the section, and make sure the Section Properties panel is displayed. If it isn’t, right-click in the view window
and select Section Properties.
2. In the view map window of the Section Properties panel, click and drag the circular grip opposite the main section mark
line, then release your mouse button. The section updates instantly.

To change the depth from 2D plan view:

1. In 2D plan view, make sure your section marks are turned on.
2. Click on the section mark.

3. Hover your pointer over the blue grip on the bounding box line to display the Stretch cursor. Or, right-click in the
drawing area and select Stretch.
4. Click and drag to make the bounding box smaller or bigger. The bigger the box, the deeper the view.
5. Right-click and select Activate View to see the result.

Editing Section Properties

Professional only
You can edit the name of a section as it appears on the Sections menu, as well as edit the section mark text and text style.

- 204 -
 Deleting a Section

To edit section properties:

1. Display the section and make sure the Section Properties panel is displayed. If it isn’t, right-click in the view window
and select Section Properties.
2. To edit the name of the section as it appears on the Sections menu, edit the name in the Name edit box.
3. To edit the text that appears on the section mark, edit the text in the Mark Text edit box.
4. To apply a different text style to the section mark, click the Text Style button and make a selection from the Text Styles
dialog. You can also add and edit text styles.

Deleting a Section
Professional only
You can delete a section from the Sections menu by deleting its corresponding section mark in 2D plan view.
To delete a section:
1. In 2D plan view, make sure your section marks are turned on.
2. Select the mark to delete.
3. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete.

Changing the Display Mode

By default, your design is displayed in Wireframe mode when you are in 2D plan view. When you switch to a 3D view, the
default display mode is Rendered mode. There are six display modes you can choose from — Wireframe, Hidden Line,
Rendered, Rendered Outline, Patterned, and Realistic.
Note that when you change the display mode in one view and then switch to another view and change the display mode in
that view, the display mode in the first view will be retained when you go back to it.
To change the display mode:

1. Select View > Display Mode, or click the down arrow next to the Display Mode button on the View Control toolbar
to view the Display Mode menu.
2. Choose the desired display mode. These are described below.

Wireframe
Each line in your design is visible, creating a “see-through” view. It is available for both 2D and 3D views.

Hidden Line
In a hidden line view, all lines that you would normally not see are removed from the view, creating an opaque view.

Rendered
In Rendered display mode, textures and colors are applied to the elements and terrain, creating a very realistic view. Note:
The Rendered display mode should not be confused with a 3D RealView.

- 205 -
Chapter 17: 2D and 3D Viewing

Rendered Outline
In the Rendered Outline display mode, textures and colors are applied to the elements and terrain, and surface edges are
outlined in a single, dark line for increased surface definition.

Patterned
In Patterned display mode, patterns of lines (hatching) are applied to the surfaces of elements. Patterns are part of a
material’s definition. Therefore, the materials applied to your elements determine what patterns you will see.

Realistic
Shades and shadows are displayed in Realistic mode, which change in real time as you navigate. This can be particularly
noticeable when viewing interiors with light fixtures and other sources of light and reflection.

Displaying a Wireframe View

Wireframe view displays all lines in your model, creating a "see-through" view.

- 206 -
 Displaying a Hidden Line View

To change the display mode to wireframe:

• Select View > Display Mode > Wireframe, or

• Click on the View Control toolbar

Displaying a Hidden Line View

When you change your display mode to Hidden Line, lines are removed from the view that you would normally not see,
creating an opaque, non-color view.

To change your display mode to Hidden Line:

• Select View > Display Mode > Hidden Line, or

• Click the down arrow next to the Display Mode button on the View Control toolbar and select Hidden Line

Displaying a Rendered View

When you change your display mode to Rendered, materials and colors are applied to the elements and terrain for a colorful,
realistic view. Note that this does not display a 3D RealView™ rendered view.

To change your display mode to Rendered:

• Select View > Display Mode > Rendered, or

• Click the down arrow next to the Display Mode button on the View Control toolbar and select Rendered

Displaying a Rendered Outline View

When you change your display mode to Rendered Outline, materials and colors are applied to the elements and terrain, and
surface edges are outlined with a black line for high definition.

- 207 -
Chapter 17: 2D and 3D Viewing

To change your display mode to Rendered Outline:

• Select View > Display Mode > Rendered Outline, or

• Click the down arrow next to the Display Mode button on the View Control toolbar and select Rendered Outline

Displaying a Patterned View

When you change your display mode to Patterned, patterns of lines (hatching) are applied to the surfaces of elements.

To change your display mode to Patterned:

• Select View > Display Mode > Patterned, or

• Click the down arrow next to the Display Mode button on the View Control toolbar and select Patterned

Displaying a Realistic View

When you switch to a Realistic display mode, realistic shades and shadows are displayed in the view. The shades and
shadows change in real time as you navigate.

To change your display mode to Realistic:

• Select View > Display Mode > Realistic, or

• Click the down arrow next to the Display Mode button on the View Control toolbar and select Realistic

- 208 -
Chapter 18: View Filters

The unique View Filter lets you control which elements or locations are displayed at any given time. For example, you may
want to hide your roof and ceilings to be able to see inside the model. It also lets you make selected elements non-selectable,
which is sometimes necessary when trying to select a particular element in your drawing, like a floor or ceiling.
Other features allow you to “pick and choose” with your mouse precisely what you would like to filter. These include Pick
Items to Hide, Hide All Except, Pick Items to Make Non-Selectable, and Make All Non-Selectable Except.

Display Filter
You can use the View Filter to control what elements and locations are displayed in a Model View window at any time.
Filtering applies to the current view window, so you could have different filter settings for each view window if you have
more than one.
You can display or hide:
• an entire location, or multiple locations How to
• building elements on a specific location or multiple locations How to
• the terrain How to
• elements on the terrain How to
• notation elements such as text, dimensions, schedules, and drafting objects How to
• viewing aids such as elevation and section marks How to

Filtering the Display

The View Filter provides precise control over what elements and locations are displayed in a view at any given time.
You can display/hide:
• an entire location, or multiple locations
• building elements on a specific location or multiple locations
• the terrain
• elements on the terrain
• notation elements such as text, dimensions, schedules and drafting objects
• viewing aids such as elevation and section marks How to

Note: Using the View Filter does not delete elements from your drawing. It just hides them from view.

To filter the display:

1. Select View > View Filters > View Filter, or click on the View Control toolbar.
The View Filter dialog contains several tabs, including Elements on Location, Elements on Terrain, and Notation.
The Elements on Location tab lists all the elements in your model that are associated with building locations. Many elements
in the list can be expanded to display a list of sub-components for precise view control. You can display or hide elements on
all locations, or specific locations.
The Elements on Terrain tab lists the terrain and any landscaping elements in your drawing that are associated with the
terrain.
The Notation tab contains items such as text, dimensions, drafting objects, and project trace images.
The Viewing Aids tab contains items such as elevation marks and section marks.
The icons in the Display column indicate whether or not that location or element is currently displayed. Clicking an icon
toggles the icon to the opposite state (on or off).

- 209 -
Chapter 18: View Filters

Element is turned on

Element is turned off

On the Elements on Location tab, this icon indicates that some of an element’s components are turned on, and some are
turned off.
Clicking Display All turns on all elements displayed on the current tab. Clicking Display None turns off all elements
displayed on the current tab. On the Elements on Location tab, these buttons affect elements on the currently selected
location(s).
The icons in the Lock column indicate whether or not an item is locked. If an item is locked, it remains in its current state
regardless of any element filtering you do. For example, if Wall Framing is locked in a visible state, Wall Framing will remain
visible even if you turn off the Walls element, or click the Display None button.

Item is locked

Item is unlocked

Some of the item’s components are locked, and some are not

Displaying/Hiding Elements on Locations

You can use the View Filter to display or hide selected element types on all or selected building locations. This applies to
building elements such as walls and doors, as well as landscaping elements that were inserted using the “Insert on Location”
option.
To display or hide building elements:

1. Select View > View Filters > View Filter, or click on the View Control toolbar.
2. In the View Filter dialog, select the Elements on Location tab.
3. By default, elements on all locations are displayed in the element list. To control the visibility of elements on a specific
location, disable the All Locations check box, then select the location where you want to filter the view. You can
Ctrl+click to select multiple locations if you want.
4. To turn an element on or off, click the element’s eye icon in the Display column to toggle it on or off. If you want to filter
specific element components, click the element’s plus sign (+) to display a list of components. For example, the Walls
element can have components such as wall surfaces, trim, wall framing, doors and windows. Each component has its
own display icon.
Element or component is turned on

Element or component is turned off

Indicates that some of an element’s components are turned on, and some are turned off
5. To display or hide all building elements currently shown in the element list, click Display All or Display None.
6. To lock an element or component in its current display state, click the lock icon in the Lock column. When an item is
locked, any filtering you do in the dialog will have no effect on the locked item. For example, if Wall Framing is locked
in a visible state, Wall Framing will remain visible even if you turn off the Walls element, or click the Display None but-
ton.
7. Click OK.

Displaying/Hiding Building Locations

You can turn individual locations on or off. When you turn a location off, all elements on that location are hidden from view.
To display or hide entire locations:

1. Select View > View Filters > View Filter, or click on the View Control toolbar.
2. In the View Filter dialog, select the Elements on Location tab.

- 210 -
 Displaying/Hiding Elements on the Terrain

3. Disable the All Locations check box.

4. In the locations list, select the location that you want to display or hide. You can Ctrl+click to select multiple locations
if you want.
5. Click Display All or Display None to turn all the elements on the selected location on or off.
6. Click OK.

Displaying/Hiding Elements on the Terrain

You can use the View Filter to display or hide the terrain and any elements associated with the terrain, such as landscaping
elements.
To filter elements on the terrain:

1. Select View > View Filters > View Filter, or click on the View Control toolbar.
2. In the View Filter dialog, select the Elements on Terrain tab.
3. Click the eye icons in the Display column to turn elements on or off. You can also click the Display All or Display None
button to display or hide all terrain elements simultaneously.
Element is turned on

Element is turned off

4. Click OK.

Note: The visibility of decks is controlled on the Elements on Location tab. This also applies to exterior lighting, exterior
furniture or exterior accessories that were inserted using the “Insert on Location” option.

Displaying/Hiding Notation Objects

You can use the View Filter to control the visibility of notation objects such as text and dimensions.
To filter notation objects from view:

1. Select View > View Filters > View Filter, or click on the View Control toolbar.
2. In the View Filter dialog, select the Notation tab.
3. Click the eye icon in the Display column next to the notation object you want to display or hide. Clicking the icon toggles
visibility on and off. You can also click the Display All or Display None button to display or hide all notation objects
simultaneously.
Object is turned on

Object is turned off

4. Click OK.

Displaying/Hiding Text
Using the View Filter you can display or hide text in your drawing.
To filter text from view:

1. Select View > View Filters > View Filter, or click on the View Control toolbar.
2. In the View Filter dialog, select the Notation tab.
3. In the Text row, click the eye icon in the Display column to turn text on or off.
Text is turned on

Text is turned off

4. Click OK.

- 211 -
Chapter 18: View Filters

Displaying/Hiding Dimensions
Using the View Filter you can display or hide dimensions in your drawing.
To filter dimensions from view:

1. Select View > View Filters > View Filter, or click on the View Control toolbar.
2. In the View Filter dialog, select the Notation tab.
3. In the Dimensions row, click the eye icon in the Display column to turn dimensions on or off.
Dimensions are turned on

Dimensions are turned off

4. Click OK.

Displaying/Hiding Drafting Objects

Using the View Filter you can display or hide drafting objects in your drawing. Drafting objects are lines, arcs, circles and
rectangles.
To filter drafting objects from view:

1. Select View > View Filters > View Filter, or click on the View Control toolbar.
2. In the View Filter dialog, select the Notation tab.
3. In the Drafting row, click the eye icon in the Display column to turn drafting objects on or off.
Drafting objects are turned on

Drafting objects are turned off

4. Click OK.

Displaying/Hiding Electrical Wiring

Using the View Filter you can display or hide electrical wiring that you have inserted in your drawing.
To filter electrical wiring from view:

1. Select View > View Filters > View Filter, or click on the View Control toolbar.
2. In the View Filter dialog, select the Notation tab.
3. In the Electrical Wiring row, click the eye icon in the Display column to turn wiring on or off.
Wiring is turned on

Wiring is turned off

4. Click OK.

Displaying/Hiding Project Trace Images

If you have used the Project Trace Image tool to import a plan into your project, you can hide the image if you want using
the View Filter. This is an alternative to deleting the image.
To filter project trace images from view:

1. Select View > View Filters > View Filter, or click on the View Control toolbar.
2. In the View Filter dialog, select the Notation tab.
3. In the Project Trace Images row, click the eye icon in the Display column to turn project trace images on or off.
Project trace image is turned on

Project trace image is turned off

- 212 -
 Selection Filter

4. Click OK.

Selection Filter
When your model contains a number of elements, it can sometimes be difficult to select certain ones because they are too
close to each other, or overlap each other. Floors, for example, can be very difficult to select in 2D because floor edges are
typically right up against the walls. Also, small elements can be hard to select in an extreme zoomed out view, even in 2D.
You can use the View Filter to prevent specific elements from being selected. You can even prevent entire building locations
from being selected.
You can control selectability for the following:
• an entire location, or multiple locations How to
• building elements on a specific location or multiple locations How to
• elements on the terrain How to
• notation elements such as text, dimensions, schedules, and drafting objects How to
• viewing aids such as elevation marks and section marks How to

Selection Filtering
You can use the View Filter to prevent specific elements from being selected. You can even prevent entire building locations
from being selected.
To control element selectability:

1. Select View > View Filters > View Filter, or click on the View Control toolbar.
The View Filter dialog contains various tabs, including Elements on Location, Elements on Terrain, and Notation.
The Elements on Location tab lists all the elements in your model that are associated with building locations. Many elements
in the list can be expanded to display a list of sub-components for precise filtering. You can control the selectability of
elements on all locations, or specific locations.
The Elements on Terrain tab lists the terrain and any landscaping elements in your drawing that are associated with the
terrain.
The Notation tab contains items such as text and dimensions.
The Viewing Aids tab contains items such as elevation marks and section marks.
The icons in the Selection column indicate whether or not an element is currently selectable. Clicking an icon toggles the icon
to the opposite state (selectable or non-selectable).

Element is selectable

Element is not selectable

On the Elements on Location tab, this icon indicates that some of an element’s components are selectable, and some are not.
Clicking Select All makes all elements on the current tab selectable. Clicking Select None turns off selectability for all
elements displayed on the current tab. On the Elements on Location tab, these buttons affect elements on the currently selected
location(s).
The icons in the Lock column indicate whether or not an item is locked. If an item is locked, it remains in its current state
regardless of any element filtering you do. For example, if walls are currently non-selectable and you click the Select All
button to make all elements selectable, walls will remain unselectable if they are locked.

Item is locked

Item is unlocked

Some of the item’s components are locked, and some are not

- 213 -
Chapter 18: View Filters

Making Elements on Locations Selectable or Non-Selectable

You can use the View Filter to control the selectability of elements on all or selected building locations. This applies to
building elements such as walls and doors, as well as landscaping elements that were inserted using the “Insert on Location”
option.
To change the selectability of elements on locations:

1. Select View > View Filters > View Filter, or click on the View Control toolbar.
2. In the View Filter dialog, select the Elements on Location tab.
3. By default, elements on all locations are displayed in the element list. To control the selectability of elements on a spe-
cific location, disable the All Locations check box, then select the location that you want to filter. You can Ctrl+click to
select multiple locations if you want.
4. To control an element’s selectability, click the element’s filter icon in the Selection column to toggle it on or off.

Element is selectable

Element is not selectable

If you want to control the selectability of specific element components, click the element’s plus sign (+) to display a list
of element components. For example, the Walls element can have components such as wall surfaces, trim, wall framing,
doors and windows. Each component has its own filter icon.
5. To control the selectability of all building elements currently shown in the element list, click Select All or Select None.
6. To lock an element or component in its current state of selectability, click the lock icon in the Lock column. When an
item is locked, any filtering you do in the dialog will have no effect on the locked item. For example, if walls are cur-
rently non-selectable and you click the Select All button to make all elements selectable, walls will remain unselectable
if they are locked.
7. Click OK.

Making Building Locations Selectable or Non-Selectable

When you make a location non-selectable, no elements on that location can be selected in any view.
To make a location selectable or non-selectable:

1. Select View > View Filters > View Filter, or click on the View Control toolbar.
2. In the View Filter dialog, select the Elements on Location tab.
3. Disable the All Locations check box.
4. In the locations list, select the location that you want to filter. You can Ctrl+click to select multiple locations if you want.
5. Click Select All or Select None to make all elements on the selected location selectable or non-selectable.
6. Click OK.

Making Elements on the Terrain Selectable or Non-Selectable

You can use the View Filter to control the selectability of the terrain or any elements associated with the terrain, such as
landscaping elements.
To make elements on the terrain selectable or non-selectable:

1. Select View > View Filters > View Filter, or click on the View Control toolbar.
2. In the View Filter dialog, select the Elements on Terrain tab.
3. Click the filter icons in the Selection column to toggle selectability on or off.

Element is selectable

Element is not selectable

- 214 -
 Making Notation Objects Selectable or Non-Selectable

4. If you want to make all elements on the Elements on Terrain tab selectable or non-selectable, click the Select All or Select
None button.
5. Click OK.

Note: The selectability of decks is controlled on the Elements on Location tab. This also applies to exterior lighting, exterior
furniture or exterior accessories that were inserted using the “Insert on Location” option.

Making Notation Objects Selectable or Non-Selectable

You can use the View Filter to control whether or not notation objects such as text and dimensions can be selected for editing.
To make notation objects selectable or non-selectable:

1. Select View > View Filters > View Filter, or click on the View Control toolbar.
2. In the View Filter dialog, select the Notation tab.
3. Find the item that you want to control and then click its filter icon in the Selection column to toggle selectability on or
off.

Object is selectable

Object is not selectable

4. Click OK.

Making Text Selectable or Non-Selectable

Using the View Filter you can make text selectable or non-selectable.
To make text selectable or non-selectable:

1. Select View > View Filters > View Filter, or click on the View Control toolbar.
2. In the View Filter dialog, select the Notation tab.
3. In the Text row, click the filter icon in the Selection column to toggle selectability on or off.

Text is selectable

Text is not selectable

4. Click OK.

Making Dimensions Selectable or Non-Selectable

Using the View Filter you can make dimensions selectable or non-selectable.
To make dimensions selectable or non-selectable:

1. Select View > View Filters > View Filter, or click on the View Control toolbar.
2. In the View Filter dialog, select the Notation tab.
3. In the Dimensions row, click the filter icon in the Selection column to toggle selectability on or off.

Dimensions are selectable

Dimensions are not selectable

4. Click OK.

Making Drafting Objects Selectable or Non-Selectable

Using the View Filter you can make drafting objects selectable or non-selectable. Drafting objects are things like lines, arcs,
circles and rectangles.

- 215 -
Chapter 18: View Filters

To make drafting objects selectable or non-selectable:

1. Select View > View Filters > View Filter, or click on the View Control toolbar.
2. In the View Filter dialog, select the Notation tab.
3. In the Drafting row, click the filter icon in the Selection column to toggle selectability on or off.

Drafting objects are selectable

Drafting objects are not selectable

4. Click OK.

Making Electrical Wiring Selectable or Non-Selectable

Using the View Filter you can make electrical wiring selectable or non-selectable.
To make electrical wiring selectable or non-selectable:

1. Select View > View Filters > View Filter, or click on the View Control toolbar.
2. In the View Filter dialog, select the Notation tab.
3. In the Electrical Wiring row, click the filter icon in the Selection column to toggle selectability on or off.

Electrical wiring is selectable

Electrical wiring is not selectable

4. Click OK.

Making Project Trace Images Selectable or Non-Selectable

Using the View Filter you can make project trace images selectable or non-selectable.
To make project trace images selectable or non-selectable:

1. Select View > View Filters > View Filter, or click on the View Control toolbar.
2. In the View Filter dialog, select the Notation tab.
3. In the Project Trace Images row, click the filter icon in the Selection column to toggle selectability on or off.

Project trace image is selectable

Project trace image is not selectable

4. Click OK.

Point-and-Click Filters
Professional only
When you need to filter a single object in your drawing, point-and-click filters are the way to go.
These filters let you use your mouse to choose objects for display filtering or selection filtering.
Pick Items to Hide. Click on an object to hide it instantly.
Hide All Except. Quickly hides everything except a selected object.
Pick Items to Make Non-Selectable. Click on an object to prevent it from being selected when editing.
Make All Non-Selectable Except. Click on an object to make it the only selectable object in the drawing.

Hiding Items by Picking in Your Drawing

Professional only
Using the Pick Items to Hide tool you can select items directly in your drawing that you want to hide.

- 216 -
 Hiding All Except What Is Picked

To hide an item by picking:

1. Select View > View Filters > Pick Items to Hide, or click the down arrow next to the View Filters button on the
View Control toolbar and select Pick Items to Hide.
2. Click on the item that you want to hide. Note that filtering occurs per item type rather than individual item. For example,
if you pick one column, all columns will be hidden.
3. Right-click and select Finish.

Hiding All Except What Is Picked

Professional only
Using the Hide All Items Except tool you can select an item in your drawing and automatically hide everything else for quick
display control.
To hide all except what is picked:

1. Select View > View Filters > Hide All Items Except, or click the down arrow next to the View Filters button on
the View Control toolbar and select Hide All Items Except.
2. Click on the item that you want to remain displayed. Note that filtering occurs per item type rather than individual item.
For example, if you pick one column, all columns will remain displayed.
3. Right-click and select Finish.

Making Items Non-Selectable by Picking in Your Drawing

Professional only
Using the Pick Items to Make Non-Selectable tool you can select items directly in your drawing that you want to make non-
selectable.
To make an item non-selectable:
1. Select View > View Filters > Pick Items to Make Non-Selectable or click the down arrow next to the View Filters

button on the View Control toolbar and select Pick Items to Make Non-Selectable.
2. Click on the item that you want to make non-selectable. Note that filtering occurs per item type rather than individual
item. For example, if you pick one column, all columns will be made non-selectable.
3. Right-click and select Finish.

Making All Non-Selectable Except What Is Picked

Professional only
Using the Make All Non-Selectable Except tool you can pick an item in your drawing that you want to be selectable, and
automatically make everything else non-selectable.
To make all non-selectable except what you pick:
1. Select View > View Filters > Make All Non-Selectable Except or click the down arrow next to the View Filters button

on the View Control toolbar and select Make All Non-Selectable Except.
2. Click on the item(s) that you want to be selectable. Note that filtering occurs per item type rather than individual item.
For example, if you pick one column, all columns will be made selectable.
3. Right-click and select Finish.

View Filter Templates

You can create and apply filter templates in the View Filter dialog. Templates enable you to capture a group of filter settings,
and instantly apply them to your drawing. For example, if you wanted to display an electrical diagram, you could create an
’Electrical’ template in which only walls, electrical elements and electrical wiring are shown.
You can add, apply, edit and delete templates to suit your needs.

- 217 -
Chapter 18: View Filters

Creating a View Filter Template

You can create filter templates in the View Filter dialog which enable you capture a specific group of filter settings, and
instantly apply them to your drawing. For example, if you wanted to display an electrical diagram, you could create an
’Electrical’ template in which only walls, electrical elements and electrical wiring are shown.
To create a view filter template:

1. Select View > View Filters > View Filter, or click on the View Control toolbar.

2. In the View Filter dialog, click .

3. In the New View Filter Template dialog, you can select an existing template on which to base the new template if de-
sired.
4. Specify the desired display and selection settings. For more information, refer to Filtering the Display on page 209 and
Selection Filtering on page 213.
5. In the Template Name edit box, type a name for the template.
6. By default, the template will displayed on the View > View Filters menu for quick access. If you do not want it to ap-
pear there, disable the Include in menu check box. Note that the template will still be displayed in the Templates drop
box in the View Filter dialog.
7. Click Save.
8. To apply the template settings, click Apply in the View Filter dialog.

Applying a View Filter Template

If you have created a view filter template, you can apply its filter settings to the current view by selecting it from the View
> View Filters menu. This assumes that the Include in menu option is selected in the template’s properties.
You can also apply a template in the View Filter dialog:

1. Select View > View Filters > View Filter, or click on the View Control toolbar.
2. In the View Filter dialog, select the desired template from the Template drop box.
3. Click Apply.

Editing a View Filter Template

If you have created a view filter template, you can edit its filter settings if needed.
To edit a view filter template:

1. Select View > View Filters > View Filter, or click on the View Control toolbar.
2. In the View Filter dialog, select the template from the Template drop box.

3. Click .
4. In the Edit View Filter Template dialog, edit the filter settings.
5. Click Save.

Deleting a View Filter Template

If you delete a view filter template that you have created, it will be removed from the list of templates in the View Filter
dialog and the View > View Filter menu.
To delete a view filter template:

1. Select View > View Filters > View Filter, or click on the View Control toolbar.
2. In the View Filter dialog, select the template from the Template drop box.

3. Click .

- 218 -
Chapter 19: Drafting

There is a full set of drafting and layout tools available to help you annotate your drawing and create construction
documents quickly and easily. You can insert text, dimensions, lines and shapes.
To add notes and labels to your plan you can use the Text or Text with Leader tools.
There are two auto-dimension tools available: Auto Exterior Dimensions and Auto Interior Dimensions. There are also two
other versatile dimension tools: Linear Dimensions and Aligned Dimensions.
On the Layout menu you will find Lines, Arcs, Circles and Rectangles.

Text
There are two Text tools available . Use the Text tool to insert text, notes or labels in 2D plan views. Use the Text with Leader
tool to insert text, notes or labels in the form of a callout.
You can move and rotate text after it has been inserted, and edit its style or content.

Text tool
You can use the Text tool to add text to a 2D plan view. You can type the text that you want to insert, import a *.txt file, or
use one of the available pre-defined labels. While defining the text to insert you can specify the text style and justification
that you want to use.
You can move and rotate text after it has been inserted, as well as edit the content and style.

Adding Text
You can add custom text or pre-defined labels to your drawing. You can select the text style you want to use, and control
the justification of the text. Text can be moved and rotated after it has been inserted, just like most other elements.
To add custom text to your drawing:

1. Select Tools > Text > Text, or click on the Annotation toolbar.

2. In the Text dialog, type the text you want to add. If you want to import a text (*.txt) file, click Import, then select the
file to import.
3. To select a style for the text, click the Text Style button and select or create a text style in the Text Styles dialog.
4. By default, text is left justified. For multi-line text, this means that text lines will line up on the left, and be ragged on
the right. If you want to change the justification Justification refers to the way lines of text "line up" in relation to the
window that contains them. A "left" justification lines the left side of the text up with the left side of the window, leaving
the right side ragged. of the text, click the appropriate justification button above the text editing window.

Left Justify

- 219 -
Chapter 19: Drafting

Center Justify

Right Justify
5. If you want to automatically return to the Text dialog after you have inserted the current text, enable the Multiple text
insert check box. This is ideal when you want to insert different pieces of text without having to select the Text tool
again.
6. Click OK. The text is attached to your cursor.
7. Position the text where you want it, then click to insert it.
To add pre-defined labels to your drawing:

1. Select Tools > Text > Text, or click on the Annotation toolbar.
2. In the Text dialog, select the label you want in the Pre-defined Labels list on the right side of the dialog, then drag it into
the editing window. You can also double-click the label or click to add the label to the editing window.
3. If you want to add or edit a label, click the Library button to access the Labels library.
4. To select a style for the text, click the Text Style button and select or create a text style in the Text Styles dialog.
5. If you want to automatically return to the Text dialog after you have inserted the current text, enable the Multiple text
insert check box. This is ideal when you want to insert different pieces of text in your drawing without having to select
the Text tool again.
6. Click OK. The text is attached to your cursor.
7. Position the text where you want it, then click to insert it.

Customizing the Labels Library

You can add your own pre-defined text labels to the labels library as well as edit and delete the existing labels.
To customize the labels library:
1. Select a Text tool, then click the Library button below the list of pre-defined labels in the Text dialog.
You can also select File > Catalogs > Library Manager. In the Library Manager dialog, select Libraries > Labels.
2. To add a new label to the list, select Edit > Add Label, or right-click in the label window and select Add Label.
3. To edit an existing label, select it in the list, then select Edit > Edit Label, or right-click and select Edit Label. You can
also click inside the lower pane of the Labels dialog.
4. In the Label Properties dialog, type a name for the label in the Name edit box. Then, enter the label text in the Label
Text window, or click Import to load an existing text file. The name is not necessarily the same as the actual label text.
It simply identifies the label in the list of labels. For example, a label named ‘Address’ can contain your company’s full
address.
5. Click OK to return to the Labels dialog.
6. To delete a label in the list, select the label, then select Edit > Delete Label, or right-click in the label window and select
Delete Label.
7. When you are finished customizing the library, click OK.

Moving Text
You can move text by simply clicking and dragging it.
To move text:
1. Select the text you want to move.

2. Position your pointer over the blue grip to display the Move cursor.
3. Click and drag to move the text, then release your mouse button.

- 220 -
 Rotating Text

Rotating Text
You can change the angle of text using the Rotate tool.
To rotate text:
1. Select the text you want to rotate.
2. Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Rotate.
3. Hover your pointer over the point you want to rotate around — typically the blue grip.
4. Move your mouse to rotate the text in the desired direction.
5. When the text is at the desired rotation, click to set the position.

Editing Text Content

You can edit the content of a text element by accessing its properties.
To edit text:
1. Select the text you want to edit.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Text dialog, edit the text in the text window.
4. Click OK.

Changing the Style of Text

You can edit the appearance of text by applying a different text style to it.
To change the style of text:
1. Select the text whose style you want to change.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Text dialog, click Text Style.
4. In the Text Styles dialog, select a new text style. You can also create your own text style, or edit the current text style.
Note that if you edit an existing text style, your changes are permanently saved in the text styles library, and are not
project-specific.
5. Click OK in the Text Styles dialog.
6. Click OK in the Text dialog. The text is changed automatically.

Note: The Properties tool lets you change the text style of the selected text object only. If you want to globally change all text
objects that use a particular text style, see Updating a Text Style Globally on page 221.

Updating a Text Style Globally

You can use the Update Style tool to change the text style of all text objects in your drawing that use the same text style.
To update a text style globally:
1. Select a text object whose text style you want to change.
2. Right-click and select Update Style, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Update Style.
3. In the Text Style Properties dialog, make the desired text style change.
4. Click OK. All text objects using the selected text style will automatically update.

Customizing the Text Styles Library

You can add your own text styles to the text styles library as well as edit and delete the existing text styles.
To customize the text styles library:
1. If you are currently in the Text dialog, click the Text Style button. If you are not currently in the Text dialog you can
launch it by selecting a Text tool.

- 221 -
Chapter 19: Drafting

For direct access to text styles library, select File > Catalogs > Library Manager. In the Library Manager dialog, select
Libraries > Text Styles.
2. To add a new text style to the list, select Edit > Add Text Style, or right-click in the text style window and select Add
Text Style.
3. To edit an existing text style, select it in the list, then select Edit > Edit Text Style, or right-click and select Edit Text
Style. You can also click inside the lower pane of the Text Styles dialog.
4. In the Text Style Properties dialog, type a name for the text style in the Name edit box.
5. From the Font drop box, select a font to use.
6. From the Font Style drop box, select a style for the font. Choices can include Regular, Italic, Bold, and Bold Italic.
7. In the Height edit box, specify the desired text height.
8. Click the Color swatch to access the Color dialog, where you can select a color for the text.
9. Click OK to return to the Text Styles dialog.
10. To delete an existing text style, select it in the list, then select Edit > Delete Text Style, or right-click in the style window
and select Delete Text Style.
11. Click OK.

Changing the Justification of Multi-line Text

You can change the way multiple lines of text are aligned.
To change the justification of text:
1. Select the text you want to edit.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Text dialog, click the appropriate justification button below the editing window.
4. Click OK.

Finding and Replacing Text

You can use the Find and Replace tool to find a specific word or phrase in your project. You can also replace it instantly with
another word or phrase of your choice.
To find and replace text:

1. Select Tools > Text > Find and Replace, or click on the Annotation toolbar.
2. In the Find and Replace Text dialog, type the word or phrase that you want to find in the Find what edit box.
3. If you want to replace the text with something else, enter the replacement text in the Replace with edit box.
4. Select any options you want to use to control the search. These are described below.
Match case. Find text with the same capitalization as the search text. For example, if you enter the word "Bedroom" as
your search text, the word "bedroom" would not be returned as a match because the first character is not uppercase.
Match whole word. Find only whole words, not parts of words. For example, if you enter the word "day" as your search
text, the words "Monday" or "daytime" would not be returned as matches.
Search up. Search backward from the current search position.
5. Click Find Next.
If the text is found, the first instance is displayed in the lower pane of the Find and Replace Text dialog, and the text
is highlighted in the drawing area.
6. To replace the text with the text in the Replace with edit box, click Replace. To instantly replace all instances of the
search text, click Replace All.
7. To search for the next instance of the text, click Find Next again. When the search is complete, the End of Search dialog
will appear notifying you that all text has been searched.
8. When you are finished searching for text, close the Find and Replace Text dialog.

- 222 -
 Deleting Text

Note:The Find and Replace tool searches the current building location only.

Deleting Text
You can delete selected text from your drawing in a couple of easy steps.
To delete text:
1. Select the text you want to remove. You can select multiple entries using Shift+click.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Text with Leader tool

You can use the Text with Leader tool to add a callout (text with arrow) to a 2D plan view. You can type the text that you
want to insert, import a *.txt file, or use one of the available pre-defined labels. While defining the text to insert you can select
a dimension style to use for the leader.
Once you have inserted text with a leader, you can move or stretch the leader, change the style of the text, move the text, or
edit the text.

Adding Text with a Leader

Professional only
You can insert text with an arrow attached to it that points to a particular element or area in your drawing. The leader has
two segments and can be oriented in any fashion.
To add a text with leader:

1. Select Tools > Text > Text with Leader, or click on the Annotation toolbar.
2. To select a dimension style for the leader, click the Dimension Style button and make a selection from the Dimension
Styles dialog.
3. Type the desired text in the editing window. Or, to import a text (*.txt) file, click Import, then select the file to import.
4. To insert a pre-defined label, select the label you want in the Pre-defined Labels list on the right side of the dialog, then
drag it into the editing window. You can also double-click the label or click to add the label to the editing window.
To access the Labels library, where you can add and edit labels, click Library.
5. If you want to automatically return to the Leader dialog after you have inserted the current text, enable the Multiple
text insert check box. This lets you keep inserting text without having to select the Text with Leader tool again.
6. Click OK.
7. In the drawing area, select the point where you want the arrowhead to appear.
8. Select the next point of the leader. If you only want a two-point leader, right-click and select Finish at this point. Oth-
erwise, you can select a third point for the leader if you want.
9. If you are creating a three-point leader, select a third point for the leader. The text is inserted.

Moving and Stretching a Leader

You can move or stretch a leader by clicking and dragging its grips.
To move/stretch a leader:
1. Click on the text with leader to select it. Grips appear on the leader.
2. Click and drag a grip to move it, then release your mouse button.

- 223 -
Chapter 19: Drafting

Changing the Style of Text with a Leader

The text style and leader arrow style of text with a leader is determined by the current dimension style, which by default is
the Standard dimension style. You can change the style of text with a leader by selecting a dimension style with the desired
style settings.
To select a different style for text with a leader:
1. Click on the text with leader to select it.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Leader dialog, click the Dimension Style button.
4. In the Dimension Styles dialog, select the dimension style that you want to use, then click OK. For information about
editing dimension styles, including leader settings, see Customizing the Dimension Styles Library on page 345.
5. Click OK in the Leader dialog. The text with leader is updated.

Note: The Properties tool lets you change the style of the selected text object only. If you want to globally change all text
objects that use a particular text style, see Updating the Style of Text with a Leader Globally on page 224.

Updating the Style of Text with a Leader Globally

You can use the Update Style tool to change the style of all text with leader objects in your drawing that use the same
dimension style.
To globally update the style of text with a leader:
1. Select a text with leader object whose dimension style you want to change.
2. Right-click and select Update Style, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Update Style.
3. In the Dimension Style Properties dialog, make the desired dimension style change. Leader arrow properties are
specified on the Leader tab. The text style is specified on the Text tab.
4. Click OK.

Moving Leader Text

If you have inserted text with a leader, you can move the text independently of the leader.
To move leader text:
1. Click on the text with leader to select it.
2. Right-click and select Move Text, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Move Text.
3. Click and drag the text to move it, then release your mouse button.

Editing Leader Text

If you have inserted text with a leader, you can change the text to whatever you want.
To edit leader text:
1. Click on the text with leader to select it.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Leader dialog, edit the text as desired, then click OK.

Deleting Text with a Leader

You can delete text with a leader in a couple of easy steps.
To delete a leader with text:
1. Click on any part of the leader or text. The entire item is selected.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

- 224 -
 Dimensions

Dimensions
Virtual Architect home design software automatically displays on-screen dimensions as you draw, making it easy to draw
walls at correct lengths, and insert elements like doors and windows precisely where you want them. These dimensions are
drawing aids only that disappear once you have inserted the element.
The Dimensions menu offers a variety of powerful tools to help you add dimensions to your 2D plan. Dimension values are
calculated automatically so you can annotate your drawing quickly and effortlessly.
Use the Auto Exterior Dimensions tool to automatically apply dimensions to the perimeter of your model, and the Auto
Interior Dimensions tool to insert auto-calculated dimensions on the model’s interior. Another powerful tool is the Room
Dimensions tool, which instantly calculates the dimensions of a room (length x width) and inserts the measurement in the
room.
Three tools are available for inserting singular dimensions. Use the Linear Dimensions tool to insert a simple horizontal or
vertical dimension, and the Aligned Dimensions tool to insert a dimension that aligns with (takes the angle of) the object
being dimensioned. Use the Angular Dimensions tool to insert a dimension that measures an angle rather than a distance.
Use the Continuous Dimension tool to quickly add more segments to an existing linear or aligned dimension. You can use
the Baseline Dimension tool to build multiple dimensions along a common baseline, creating a series of stacked dimensions.
You can create an Overall Dimension from two or more selected dimensions.
By default dimensions use the Current Dimension Style. You can also change the style of an individual dimension after it
has been inserted, or perform a global update of a dimension style.
You can move or stretch a dimension after it has been inserted, as well as align, join and split dimensions.

Setting the Current Dimension Style

When you add dimensions to your drawing, they use the current dimension style, which by default is the Standard
dimension style. You can select a different dimension style to be the current one if you want.
To set the current dimension style:
1. Select Settings > Current Dimension Style.
2. In the Current Dimension Style dialog, click the Select button..
3. In the Dimension Styles dialog, select the style you want to set as current.
4. Click OK in the Dimension Styles dialog.
5. Click OK in the Current Dimension Style dialog.

Creating Automatic Exterior Dimensions

The Auto Exterior Dimensions tool automatically dimensions the exterior walls of your home. By default, three dimension
strings are created: one for openings, one for wall segments, and an overall dimension for each side of the model.
To create automatic exterior dimensions:

1. Select Tools > Dimensions > Auto Exterior Dimensions, or click on the Annotation toolbar.

Note: You can control which dimension strings are created, as well as how walls and wall elements are dimensioned. You
must specify these settings before the dimensions are created.

Specifying Exterior Dimension Settings

Before using the Apply Auto Exterior Dimensions tool to create automatic exterior wall dimensions, it is a good idea to
specify the settings for the exterior dimensions. These settings control how the walls and wall elements (doors, windows,
openings, etc.) are dimensioned.
To specify exterior dimension settings:

1. Select Settings > Document Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Document Settings dialog, click Dimension Auto Exterior in the left column.
3. Specify the settings described below.
Include Dimension String for:

- 225 -
Chapter 19: Drafting

Overall. The outermost dimension string that dimensions the overall length of each exterior wall.

Projections. String that dimensions all projecting points along an exterior wall. If a wall has no projections, this string
will be identical to the overall dimension string.

Openings: String that dimensions all major projections and all openings in the exterior walls, including door and
window openings. Openings can be dimensioned on center, or to the outside edges (see the Openings area of the
dialog).

Interior Walls: String that dimensions to all major projections and each interior wall that projects into the exterior wall.
(You can specify which edges you want to dimension to in the Interior Walls area of the dialog).

Angled Walls: Angled string that dimensions angled walls.

Dimension Line Distances

Dim Line Spacing: The spacing between successive dimension lines (when two or more strings are used).
Dimension Offset: The distance between the first dimension string and the walls.
Extension Lines
Extension lines extend from the dimension line toward the walls being dimensioned. In situations where dimension
points are not parallel with each other, you can specify whether you want the extension lines to extend all the way to
the dimension points, or whether you want them to line up with the shortest dimension point.
Openings
If you are including a dimension string for openings, you can specify whether you want the openings to be
dimensioned on center, or to the edges of the openings.
Add Opening Height after Width. For door, window and opening dimensions, enabling this option displays the height
of the opening in addition to the width. For example, if an opening is 5’ wide and 6’-8" high, the dimension would read
5’-0"/6’-8". You can choose a different separator if you wish.

- 226 -
 Creating Automatic Interior Dimensions

Separation. The character or format used to separate the opening width and opening height. Available choices are
shown below with examples.
/ (forward slash) 5’-0"/6’-8"
— (dash) 5’-0"— 6’-8"
X 5’-0" X 6’-8"
Multi-line 5’-0"
6’-8"

End Condition
You can choose which exterior wall faces you want to dimension to.
Core (Exterior). Dimensions to the outer edge of the core wall (e.g. stud wall).
Core (Center). Dimensions to the center of the core wall (e.g. stud wall).
Core (Interior). Dimensions to the inner edge of the core wall (e.g. stud wall).
Interior Walls
If you are including the Interior Walls dimension string, you can specify whether you want the interior walls to be
dimensioned to the center or edges of the wall core. You can select more than one option if needed.
Edges (Core). Dimensions to the edges of the core wall (e.g. stud wall).
Center (Core). Dimensions to the center of the core wall (e.g. stud wall).
4. Click OK.

Creating Automatic Interior Dimensions

The Auto Interior Dimensions tool automatically dimensions interior walls in your model. To create automatic interior wall
dimensions, you draw a base line through your model. Dimensions are created for any walls along that line (running in the
same direction as the line).
To create automatic interior dimensions:

1. Select Tools > Dimensions > Auto Interior Dimensions, or click on the Annotation toolbar.
2. Select a start point for the base line that is outside of the model.

- 227 -
Chapter 19: Drafting

3. Select an end point for the base line that is outside of the model. Dimensions are created along that line.
4. Right-click and select Finish.

Note: Before creating automatic interior dimensions, you may want to specify the interior dimension setting, which
determines exactly how the walls are dimensioned.

Specifying Interior Dimension Settings

If you are using the Auto Interior Dimensions tool to create automatic interior wall dimensions, you can specify how you
want the walls dimensioned before creating the dimensions. By default, walls are dimensioned on center. If you prefer you
can dimension to other wall edges.
To specify the auto interior dimension setting:

1. Select Settings > Document Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Document Settings dialog, click Dimension Auto Interior in the left column.
3. You can specify whether you want the interior walls to be dimensioned to the center or edges of the wall core. You can
select more than one option if needed.
Leading Edge (Surface). Dimensions to the leading edge of the interior surface (e.g. drywall or plaster). The leading edge
is the first edge of the interior surface that the dimension line encounters as it runs from its start point.
Leading Edge (Core). Dimensions to the leading edge of the core wall (e.g. stud wall). The leading edge is the first edge
of the core wall that the dimension line encounters as it runs from its start point.
Center (Core). Dimensions to the center of the core wall (e.g. stud wall).
Trailing Edge (Core). Dimensions to the trailing edge of the core wall (e.g. stud wall). The trailing edge is the second edge
of the core wall that the dimension line encounters as it runs from its start point.
4. If you do not want to include the width of intersecting walls in the dimensions, enable the Ignore Wall Dimensions
check box. The difference is shown below:

- 228 -
 Creating Linear Dimensions

5. Click OK. You can now proceed with creating auto interior dimensions.

Creating Linear Dimensions

A linear dimension is a horizontal or vertical dimension with extension lines going vertically (for a horizontal linear
dimension) or horizontally (for a vertical linear dimension) to the origins of the extension lines, which define the endpoint
of the dimension.

This tool is ideal for creating interior dimensions, or dimensions on a landscape plan.
To create linear dimensions:

1. Select Tools > Dimensions > Linear Dimensions, or click on the Annotation toolbar.
2. Click a point in your drawing to begin the dimension line.
3. Move your mouse (you do not have to hold the mouse button down) to a second point and click. A dimension line in-
cluding offsets, arrows and a numerical value is added to your drawing.
4. Move your mouse away from the dimension line to stretch your extension lines. When the extension lines are the de-
sired length, click to finish the dimension.

Creating Aligned Dimensions

An aligned dimension is similar to a linear dimension, except it tilts to the same angle as the element you are dimensioning,
making it the ideal choice for elements that are not horizontal or vertical.

To create aligned dimensions:

1. Select Tools > Dimensions > Aligned Dimensions, or click on the Annotation toolbar.
2. Click a point in your drawing to begin the dimension line.

- 229 -
Chapter 19: Drafting

3. Move your mouse (you do not have to hold the mouse button down) to a second point and click. A dimension line in-
cluding offsets, arrows and a numerical value is added to your drawing.
4. Move your mouse away from the dimension line to stretch your extension lines. When the extension lines are the de-
sired length, click to finish the dimension.

Creating Continuous Dimensions

You can easily add more segments to an existing dimension using the Continuous Dimension tool. Simply pick points where
you want each extension line to be, and the dimension line will automatically extend with each point picked. This creates a
series of dimensions that are end to end. When you select the Continuous Dimension tool, it automatically starts to continue
the last dimension created in the current session, from that dimension’s second extension line. You can choose a different
extension line from which to continue, or select a different dimension altogether.

To create continuous dimensions:

1. Select Tools > Dimensions > Continuous Dimension or click on the Annotation toolbar. Your cursor will auto-
matically snap to the second extension line of the last linear or aligned dimension created in the current session.
If you would like to continue the dimension from the other extension line, right-click and choose Select continued
dimension, then click near the end from which you want to continue.
If you would like to continue a different dimension, right-click and choose Select continued dimension, then click on
the desired dimension, clicking near the end from which you would like to continue.
2. Move your cursor in the direction in which you would like to continue the dimension. The dimension line extends as
you move your cursor.
3. Click to select the next extension line point. This creates a new dimension.
4. Continue adding more dimensions as needed.
5. When you are finished adding dimensions, right-click and select Finish.

Creating Baseline Dimensions

You can use the Baseline Dimension tool to create multiple dimensions along the same baseline. Baseline dimensions are
built from an existing linear or aligned dimension in your drawing. Simply pick points where you want each extension line
to be, and new dimensions will be created with each point picked. When you select the Baseline Dimension tool, it
automatically starts from the second extension line of the last linear or aligned dimension created. You can choose to
continue from the other extension line instead, or choose a different dimension to continue if you want. Each new dimension
is stacked next to the previous one.

- 230 -
 Creating Overall Dimensions

To create baseline dimensions:

1. Select Tools > Dimensions > Baseline Dimension or click on the Annotation toolbar. Your cursor will automat-
ically snap to the second extension line of the last linear or aligned dimension created. This will be the first extension
line of the new dimensions.
If you want to continue from the other extension line instead, right-click and choose Select continued dimension, then
click near the extension line that you want to use as your first extension line point.
If you would like to continue a different dimension altogether, right-click and choose Select continued dimension,
then click on the dimension that you would like to continue.
2. Move your cursor in the direction in which you would like to continue the dimension, then select a point for the second
extension line. A new dimension is created.
3. Continue to select extension line points to add more dimensions.
4. When you are finished adding dimensions, right-click and select Finish.

Tip: To change the spacing between baseline dimensions, edit the Baseline Offset value in your dimension style properties.
See Changing the Style of a Dimension on page 233.

Creating Overall Dimensions

You can use the Overall Dimension tool to create one overall dimension from two or more existing dimensions in your
drawing. The overall dimension extends from the first extension line of the first dimension picked to the second extension
line of the last dimension picked.

- 231 -
Chapter 19: Drafting

To create an overall dimension:

1. Select Tools > Dimensions > Overall Dimension or click on the Annotation toolbar.
2. Click where you would like the dimension line to be placed.
3. Click on the first dimension from which you would like to create an overall dimension.
4. Click on the second dimension from which you would like to create an overall dimension. An overall dimension is cre-
ated. You can select more dimensions to add if you want.
5. Right-click and select Finish.

Creating Room Dimensions

Professional only
Using the Room Dimensions tool you can quickly calculate the dimensions of a room (e.g. 8’ x 10’) and insert the dimension
on your plan.
To create room dimensions:

1. Select Tools > Dimensions > Room Dimensions, or click on the Annotation toolbar.
2. Click on a corner of the room.
3. Click an adjacent corner to indicate the width and rotation of the room. Then, click an opposite corner to indicate the
length of the room.

4. In the Room Dimensions dialog, you can edit the resulting dimensions if needed.
5. Select the format in which you want the dimensions displayed — either Width x Length, or Length x Width.
6. To select a style for the dimension, click the Dimension Style button, then make a selection from the Dimension Styles
dialog.

- 232 -
 Moving a Dimension Line

7. Click OK. The dimensions are automatically inserted at the center of the room.

Moving a Dimension Line

You can move a dimension line using the Move Dimension Line tool. When you move a dimension line, the extension lines
stretch to accommodate the move.
To move a dimension line using the Move Dimension Line tool:
1. Select the dimension.
2. Right-click and select Move Dimension Line, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Move Dimension Line.
3. Click any point to serve as the base point for the move.
4. Move your mouse in the direction you want to move the dimension line.
5. Click to finish the move.

Stretching Dimensions
You can make a dimension longer or shorter, or stretch either of its extension lines. When you stretch the length of a
dimension, the dimension value updates automatically to reflect the new length.
To adjust the length of a dimension:
1. Select the dimension.
2. Click on one of the lower extension grips, then drag the dimension to stretch it. Note that it is possible to stretch the
extension line at the same time.

3. Release your mouse button.

To adjust the length of extension lines:
1. Select the dimension.
2. Click the grip at the end of the extension line, then drag to stretch the extension line.
3. Release your mouse button.

Changing the Style of a Dimension

You can change the appearance of a dimension’s line, arrows and text by applying a different dimension style to it.
To change the style of a dimension:
1. Select the dimension. You can select multiple dimensions using Shift+click.
2. Right-click and select Change Style, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Change Style. (Note: For text with a leader,
select Properties).
3. In the Dimension Styles dialog, select the style that you want to apply to the dimension. You can also create your own
dimension style, or edit the current dimension style. Note that if you edit an existing dimension style, your changes are
permanently saved in the dimension styles library, and are not project-specific.
4. Click OK.

Note: The Change Style tool lets you change the dimension style of the selected dimension only. If you want to globally
change all dimensions that use a particular dimension style, use the Update Style tool instead.

Updating a Dimension Style Globally

You can use the Update Style tool to change the style of all dimensions in your drawing that use the same dimension style.

- 233 -
Chapter 19: Drafting

To update a dimension style globally:

1. Select a dimension whose dimension style you want to change.
2. Right-click and select Update Style, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Update Style.
3. In the Dimension Style Properties dialog, make the desired dimension style change.
4. Click OK. All dimensions using the selected dimension style will update automatically.

Dimension Style Properties

Anatomy of a Dimension

Dimension tab
Arrow Type. You can select the type of symbol you want displayed at the ends of the dimension line. Choose an arrow, dot
or tick for your arrow type.

The properties below the Arrow Type selection window (Extension Offset, Baseline Offset, etc.) vary depending on the
arrow type selected. As you make different selections, the dimension updates in the preview window.

Some of the common properties include:

Extension Offset. The distance between the end of the extension line and the object being dimensioned.
Dimension Lap. The distance the dimension line extends past the ends of the dimension. (The "ends" of the dimension are
where the dimension line and extension lines intersect.)
Extension Lap. The distance the extension lines extend past the dimension line.
Baseline Offset. The distance between dimensions when the Baseline Dimension tool is used.
Leader tab
Arrow Type. You can specify the type of symbol you want to display at the end of leaders. (Leaders are used with the Text
with Leader tool.) Choose an arrow, dot or tick for your arrow type.

The properties below the Arrow Type selection window (Arrow Length, Landing Gap, Leader Position, etc.) vary
depending on the arrow type selected. As you make different selections, the dimension updates in the preview window.

- 234 -
 Deleting a Dimension

Common properties include:

Landing Gap. The distance between the end of the leader line and the object being annotated.
Leader Position. The justification of the leader in relation to the text (choose Top, Middle or Bottom). For example, a Top
leader position aligns the leader with the top of the text.
Text tab

Click to select a style for the dimension text. A text style determines the font, font style, text height and color of
text.

Vertical Text Position

This is the vertical position of the dimension text relative to the dimension line.
Vertically Centered: Text is placed inside the dimension line.
Horizontal Text: Forces the dimension text to always be horizontal, regardless of the dimension line’s angle.
Above Dimension Line: Text is placed above the dimension line.
Distance: Distance between the text and the dimension line when placing text above the dimension line.

Horizontal Text Position

This is the position of the dimension text relative to the ends of the dimension line.
Centered: Centers the text inside the dimension line.
Distance from first end: Places the text a specific distance from the first end of the dimension. Specify the distance in the
Distance edit box.
Distance from the second end: Places the text a specific distance from the second end of the dimension. Specify the
distance in the Distance edit box.

Units
Override system units: Uses the unit of measure specified in the Dimension Style Properties dialog instead of the unit of
measure specified in the Program Settings.
Units\Distance: The units used for dimensions that measure a distance.
Type: Choose from Feet-Inches, Millimeters, Centimeters, Meters or Inches.
Precision: For Feet-Inches, the choices are whole units (0, 1/2, 1/4 and so on). For metric units, the choices are number of
decimal places you can use.
Units\Angle: The units used for angular dimensions.
Type: Choose either Decimal Degrees or Degrees/Minutes/Seconds.
Precision: Choose the number of decimal places you would like angular dimensions to have (if using Decimal Degrees).
Line Styles tab
Refers to the line styles of the dimension line, extension lines and arrows. You can select a different line style for the
dimension line, extension lines and arrows. A line style determines the pattern, color and weight of a line.
To assign a different line style to a dimension component, select the component in the left pane, then click Select in the
center pane to access the Line Styles dialog.

Deleting a Dimension
You can delete a dimension from your drawing in a couple of easy steps.

- 235 -
Chapter 19: Drafting

To delete a dimension:
1. Select the dimension you want to remove. You can select multiple dimensions using Shift+click.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Lines & Shapes

The Layout menu in Model View offers a number of different tools for adding lines and basic shapes to your 2D plan. These
include Line, Arc, Circle, Ellipse, Elliptical Arc, Rectangle and Polygon Hatch. You can also draw a Revision Cloud around
an area to call attention to it.
Lines and shapes are drawn with point-and-click simplicity. Editing them is easy — just select the object that you want to
edit and then right-click to display a full menu of editing tools.

Lines
To draw a line in 2D plan view you simply pick points to define the line’s end points. Lines can have one segment or multiple
segments depending on how many points you pick. For multi-segmented lines you can even join the last point to the start
point to form a closed shape if needed.
Once you have drawn a line you can move, rotate, stretch or break it, extend or trim the line to another object, and change
its line style.

Drawing Lines
Ultimate | Professional
You can draw a line with one or more segments by simply picking points.
To draw a line:

1. Select Tools > Layout > Line, or click on the Layout toolbar.
2. Select a start point for the line.
3. Select the end point for the line. If you want you can continue adding segments to the line. If you want to close the last
line back to the first line to create a closed shape, right-click and select Close.
4. When you are finished drawing the line, right-click and select Finish.

Note: Lines can only be drawn in 2D plan view.

Moving a Line
You can move a line by clicking and dragging its center grip.
To move a line:
1. Click on the line to select it. If the line has multiple segments and you want to move those as well, Shift+click to select
the remaining segments.

2. Hover your pointer over the center grip to display the Move cursor.
3. Click and drag the line to move it where you want it, then release your mouse button.

Note: In multi-segment lines, each segment is considered a separate line. Therefore, if you select only one segment and move
it, the other segments do not move with it.

Rotating a Line
You can rotate a line using the Rotate tool.
To rotate a line:
1. Click on the line to select it. If the line has multiple segments and you want to rotate those as well, Shift+click to select
the remaining segments.
2. Right-click and select Rotate.
3. Hover your pointer over the point you want to rotate around. Typically this is one of the line’s grips.

- 236 -
 Stretching a Line

4. Click and drag to rotate the line.

5. When the line is at the desired rotation, release your mouse button.

Note: In multi-segment lines, each segment is considered a separate line. Therefore, if you select only one segment and
rotate it, the other segments do not rotate with it.

Stretching a Line
You can stretch a line in any direction by simply clicking and dragging one of its end points. If you want to stretch a line
without changing its direction you can use the Lengthen tool.
To stretch a line by clicking and dragging:
1. Click on the line to select it.

2. Hover your pointer over the end you want to stretch to display the Stretch cursor.
3. Click and drag to stretch the line, then release your mouse button.
To lengthen or shorten a line:
1. Click on the line to select it.
2. Right-click and select Lengthen, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Lengthen.
3. Hover your pointer over the end you want to stretch. The Lengthen cursor is displayed.
4. Click and drag to lengthen or shorten the line, then release your mouse button.

Extending a Line to Another Object

You can use the Extend tool to extend a line to another drafting object in your drawing.
To extend a line to another object:
1. Select the object you want to extend to. The object must be a line, arc, circle or rectangle. It must also be in the path of
the line you want to extend.
2. Right-click and select Extend.
3. Select the line you want to extend, clicking near the end that you want to extend. The line is extended to the object you
selected.

Trimming a Line to Another Object

If a line passes through another drafting object, you can use the Trim tool to trim the line to the object it intersects.
To trim a line to another object:
1. Select the object you want to trim to. The object must be a line, arc, circle or rectangle. Also, the line must intersect the
object. In the following example, you would select the circle as the object to trim to.

2. Right-click and select Trim.

3. Select the line you want to trim, clicking near the end you want to trim.

- 237 -
Chapter 19: Drafting

The line is trimmed automatically to the nearest border.

In the above example, if you clicked on the center of the line, the portion inside the circle would be trimmed:

Breaking a Line
You can break a line into two separate lines using the Break tool.
To break a line:
1. Click on the line to select it.
2. Right-click and select Break.
3. Click the point on the line where you want to break it. The line is broken at the selected point.

Offsetting a Line
You can use the Offset tool to make multiple copies a line in a set direction.
To offset a line:
1. Select the line.
2. Right-click and select Offset, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Offset.
3. In the Offset dialog, type the distance you want to offset the line in the Offset Distance edit box.
4. In the Number of Copies edit box, type the number of copies you want to create, or use the arrow keys to increase or
decrease the number.
5. Click OK.
6. Click on the side you want to offset to. The line is offset.

Editing the Style of a Line

By default, lines are drawn using the line style specified for Drafting Objects in your default Drafting Settings. You can easily
change the line style of a line after you have inserted it.
To change the line style of a line:
1. Click on the line to select it.
2. Right-click and select Properties.
3. In the Line Style dialog, click on Color, Line Type, or Line Weight to change the individual line style properties.

- 238 -
 Deleting a Line

4. Click OK.

Deleting a Line
You can delete a line in a couple of easy steps.
To delete a line:
1. Click on the line to select it.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Arcs
An arc is a curved line. There are three ways to draw an arc:
Start, Center, End. Select the start point and center point to define the arc’s radius, and then the end point to define the arc’s
length.
3 Points. Select a start point for the arc, a second point along the arc, then drag the arc into position as you specify the end
point.
Start, End, Radius. Select the start and end point of the arc to define its length, then select a third point to define the arc’s
radius.
Once you have drawn an arc you can move, rotate or stretch it, edit the arc’s curve, extend or trim the arc to another object,
or edit its line style.

Drawing Arcs
Ultimate | Professional
There are three Arc tools available:
Start, Center, End. When you specify the start and center points, you define the arc’s radius. The end point establishes the
arc’s length.
3 Points. Select a start point for the arc, a second point along the arc, then drag the arc into position as you specify the end
point.
Start, End, Radius. Select the start and end point of the arc to define its length, then select a third point to define the arc’s
radius (curve).
To draw an arc with the Start, Center, End tool:

1. Select Tools > Layout > Arc > Arc - Start, Center, End, or click the down arrow next to the Arcs button on the
Layout toolbar and select Arc - Start, Center, End.
2. Select a start point for the arc.
3. Select the arc’s center point. The radius is now defined.
4. Select the arc’s end point to define the arc’s length.

5. Right-click and select Finish.

- 239 -
Chapter 19: Drafting

To draw an arc with the 3 Points tool:

1. Select Tools > Layout > Arc > Arc - 3 Points, or click the down arrow next to the Arcs button on the Layout toolbar
and select Arc - 3 Points.
2. Select the start point of the arc.
3. Select a second point on the arc.
4. Drag the arc to stretch it to the desired length and position, then select the end point of the arc.

5. Right-click and select Finish.

To draw an arc with the Start, End, Radius tool:

1. Select Tools > Layout > Arc > Arc - Start, End, Radius, or click the down arrow next to the Arcs button on the
Layout toolbar and select Arc - Start, End, Radius.
2. Select the start point of the arc.
3. Select the end point of the arc to define its length.
4. Move your pointer to curve the arc, then select a third point to define the arc’s radius.

5. Right-click and select Finish.

Note: Arcs can only be drawn in 2D plan view.

Moving an Arc
You can move an arc using the Move tool.
To move an arc:
1. Click on the arc to select it.
2. Right-click and select Move, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Move.
3. Click and drag to move the arc, then release your mouse button.

Rotating an Arc
You can rotate an arc about a selected base point using the Rotate tool.
To rotate an arc:
1. Click on the arc to select it.
2. Right-click and select Rotate.
3. Hover your pointer over the point you want to rotate around. Typically this is one of the arc’s grips.
4. Click and drag to rotate the arc about the selected point.
5. When the arc is at the desired rotation, release your mouse button.

- 240 -
 Stretching an Arc

Stretching an Arc
You can stretch an arc in any direction by clicking and dragging its grips.
To stretch an arc:
1. Click on the arc to select it.
2. Hover your pointer over the grip you want to move, then click and drag it into position. Moving an end grip changes
the length of the arc and can also change the curve of the arc. Moving the center grip changes the curve (radius) of the
arc.

Editing the Curve of an Arc

You can change how much an arc curves by clicking and dragging its center grip.
To edit the curve of an arc:
1. Click on the arc to select it.
2. Hover your pointer over the center grip, then click and drag the handle to change the arc’s curve.

Extending an Arc to Another Object

You can use the Extend tool to extend an arc to another drafting object in your drawing.
To extend an arc to another object:
1. Select the object you want to extend to. The object must be a line, arc, circle or rectangle. It must also be in the path of
the arc you want to extend.
2. Right-click and select Extend.
3. Select the arc you want to extend, clicking near the end that you want to extend. The arc is extended to the object you
selected.

Trimming an Arc to Another Object (Model View)

If an arc passes through another drafting object, you can use the Trim tool to trim the arc to the object it intersects.
To trim an arc to another object:
1. Select the object you want to trim to. The object must be a line, arc, circle or rectangle. Also, the arc must intersect the
object. In the following example, you would select the rectangle as the object to trim to.

2. Right-click and select Trim.

3. Select the arc you want to trim, clicking near the end you want to trim.

The arc is trimmed automatically to the nearest border.

In the above example, if you clicked on the center of the arc, the portion inside the rectangle would be trimmed:

- 241 -
Chapter 19: Drafting

Offsetting an Arc
You can use the Offset tool to make multiple copies an arc in a set direction.
To offset an arc:
1. Select the arc.
2. Right-click and select Offset, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Offset.
3. In the Offset dialog, type the distance you want to offset the arc in the Offset Distance edit box.
4. In the Number of Copies edit box, type the number of copies you want to create, or use the arrow keys to increase or
decrease the number.
5. Click OK.
6. Click on the side you want to offset to. The arc is offset.

Editing the Line Style of an Arc

By default, arcs are drawn using the line style specified for Drafting Objects in your default Drafting Settings. You can easily
change the line style of an arc after you have inserted it.
To change the line style of an arc:
1. Click on the arc to select it.
2. Right-click and select Properties.
3. In the Line Style dialog, click on Color, Line Type, or Line Weight to change the individual line style properties.
4. Click OK.

Deleting an Arc
You can delete an arc in a couple of easy steps.
To delete an arc:
1. Click on the arc to select it.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Circles
There are two ways to draw a circle.
Center, Radius. Draw the circle from the center out, by picking two points to define its radius.
2 Point. Select two points to define the circle’s diameter.
Once you have drawn a circle you can move, rotate or stretch the circle, and edit its line style.

Drawing Circles
Ultimate | Professional
There are two ways to draw a circle. With the Circle - Center, Radius tool you draw the circle from the center out, by picking
two points to define its radius. With the Circle - 2 Point tool, you draw the circle outward from a selected point, essentially
defining the circle’s diameter.
To draw a circle by specifying its radius:

1. Select Tools > Layout > Circle > Circle - Center, Radius, or click the down arrow next to the Circles button on
the Layout toolbar and select Circle - Center, Radius.

- 242 -
 Moving a Circle

2. Click the point that is to be the center of the circle.

3. Move your pointer away from the center point. The circle grows as you move farther away from the center.
4. When the circle is the desired size, click to finish.

5. Right-click and select Finish.

To draw a circle by specifying its diameter:

1. Select Tools > Layout > Circle > Circle - 2 Point, or click the down arrow next to the Circles button on the Layout
toolbar and select Circle - 2 Point.
2. Click a point in the drawing. The circle will grow from this point.
3. Move your pointer away from the selected point. The farther you move away from this point, the larger the circle be-
comes.
4. When the circle is the desired size, click to finish.

5. Right-click and select Finish.

Note: Circles can only be drawn in 2D plan view.

Moving a Circle
You can move a circle by clicking and dragging its center grip.
To move a circle:
1. Click on the edge of the circle to select it.

2. Hover your pointer over the center grip to display the Move cursor.
3. Click and drag the circle to move it where you want it, then release your mouse button.

Rotating a Circle
You can rotate a circle in the X/Y plane using the Rotate tool.
To rotate a circle:
1. Click on the edge of the circle to select it.
2. Right-click and select Rotate.
3. Hover your pointer over the point you want to rotate around. Typically this is one of the circle’s exterior grips.
4. Click and drag to rotate the circle about the selected point.

- 243 -
Chapter 19: Drafting

5. When the circle is at the desired rotation, release your mouse button.

Stretching a Circle
You can edit the size of a circle by simply clicking and dragging one of its exterior grips.
To stretch a circle:
1. Click on the edge of the circle to select it.

2. Hover your pointer over one of the grips on the circle’s circumference to display the Stretch cursor.
3. Click and drag to make the circle smaller or larger, then release your mouse button.

Note: If you want to define a specific radius using the Commander, right-click the selected circle and select Edit Radius.

Editing the Line Style of a Circle

By default, circles are drawn using the line style specified for Drafting Objects in your Drafting Settings. You can easily
change the line style of a circle after you have inserted it.
To change the line style of a circle:
1. Click on the edge of the circle to select it.
2. Right-click and select Properties.
3. In the Line Style dialog, click on Color, Line Type, or Line Weight to change the individual line style properties.
4. Click OK.

Deleting a Circle
You can delete a circle in a couple of easy steps.
To delete a circle:
1. Click on the edge of the circle to select it.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Ellipses
You can create an ellipse or an elliptical arc in Model View using tools on the Tools > Layout > Ellipse menu. Two insertion
methods are provided for each, as indicated below.
Ellipse - Axis
Ellipse - Center
Elliptical Arc - Axis
Elliptical Arc - Center

Creating Ellipses in Model View

Ultimate | Professional
To draw an ellipse, select Tools > Layout > Ellipse, then select either Ellipse - Axis or Ellipse - Center.
To use the Ellipse - Axis tool:
1. Select two points to define the major axis of the ellipse.
2. Select a third point away from the axis to define the minor radius.

- 244 -
 Creating Elliptical Arcs in Model View

3. Right-click and select Finish.

To use the Ellipse - Center tool:

1. Select the midpoint of the ellipse, then select a second point to define the major radius of the ellipse.
2. Select a third point to define the minor radius.

3. Right-click and select Finish.

Creating Elliptical Arcs in Model View

Ultimate | Professional
To draw an elliptical arc, select Tools > Layout > Ellipse, then select either Elliptical Arc - Axis or Elliptical Arc - Center.
To use the Elliptical Arc - Axis tool:
1. Select two points to define the major axis of the ellipse.
2. Select a third point away from the axis to define the minor radius.

3. Select two points to define the end points of the arc.

The section between the two points will form the arc:

- 245 -
Chapter 19: Drafting

4. Right-click and select Finish.

To use the Elliptical Arc - Center tool:

1. Select the midpoint of the ellipse, then select a second point to define the major radius of the ellipse.
2. Select a third point to define the minor radius.

3. Select two points to define the end points of the arc.

The section between the two points will form the arc:

4. Right-click and select Finish.

Moving an Elliptical Object in Model View

You can move an ellipse or elliptical arc by clicking and dragging its center grip.
To move an ellipse:
1. Click on the edge of the ellipse to select it.

2. Hover your pointer over the center grip to display the Move cursor.
3. Click and drag to move the ellipse where you want it, then release your mouse button.

Rotating an Elliptical Object in Model View

You can rotate an ellipse or elliptical arc using the Rotate tool.

- 246 -
 Stretching an Elliptical Object in Model View

To rotate an elliptical object:

1. Click on the edge of the object to select it.
2. Right-click and select Rotate.
3. Hover your pointer over the point you want to rotate around. Typically this is one of the object’s grips.
4. Click and drag to rotate the object about the selected point.
5. When the object is at the desired rotation, release your mouse button.

Stretching an Elliptical Object in Model View

You can an ellipse or elliptical arc by simply clicking and dragging one of its grips.
To stretch an elliptical object:
1. Click on the edge of the object to select it.

2. Hover your pointer over one of the object’s exterior grips to display the Stretch cursor.
3. Click and drag to stretch the object, then release your mouse button.

Editing the Line Style of an Elliptical Object

By default, ellipses and elliptical arcs are drawn using the line style specified for Drafting Objects in your Drafting Settings.
You can easily change the line style of an elliptical object after you have inserted it.
To change the line style of an elliptical object:
1. Click on the edge of the object to select it.
2. Right-click and select Properties.
3. In the Line Style dialog, click on Color, Line Type, or Line Weight to change the individual line style properties.
4. Click OK.

Deleting an Elliptical Object in Model View

You can delete an ellipse or elliptical arc in a couple of easy steps.
To delete an elliptical object:
1. Click on the edge of the object to select it.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Rectangles
You can use the Rectangle tool to draw a rectangle. Just select a point, stretch diagonally to the desired size, then click to
finish.
Once you have drawn a rectangle you can move, rotate or stretch it, or edit its line style.

Drawing Rectangles
Ultimate | Professional
You can draw a rectangle easily by just picking two points on the screen.
To draw a rectangle:

1. Select Tools > Layout > Rectangle, or click on the Layout toolbar.
2. Click a point on the screen. This will be one of the rectangle’s corners.
3. Move your pointer away from the current point. The rectangle grows as you move farther away.
4. When the rectangle is the desired size, click to finish it.

- 247 -
Chapter 19: Drafting

5. Right-click and select Finish.

Moving a Rectangle
You can move a rectangle by clicking and dragging its center grip.
To move a rectangle:
1. Click on the edge of the rectangle to select it.

2. Hover your pointer over the center grip to display the Move cursor.
3. Click and drag the rectangle to move it where you want it, then release your mouse button.

Rotating a Rectangle
You can rotate a rectangle about a selected base point using the Rotate tool.
To rotate a rectangle:
1. Click on the edge of the rectangle to select it.
2. Right-click and select Rotate.
3. Hover your pointer over the point you want to rotate around. Typically this is one of the rectangle’s grips.
4. Click and drag to rotate the rectangle about the selected point.
5. When the rectangle is at the desired rotation, release your mouse button.

Stretching a Rectangle
You can stretch a rectangle by clicking and dragging its corner grab handles.
To stretch a rectangle:
1. Click on the edge of the rectangle to select it. Grips are displayed at each corner.

2. Hover your pointer over one of the corner grips to display the Stretch cursor.
3. Click and drag to stretch the rectangle, then release your mouse button.

Editing the Line Style of a Rectangle

By default, rectangles are drawn using the line style specified for Drafting Objects in your default Drafting Settings. You can
easily change the line style of a rectangle after you have inserted it.
To change the line style of a rectangle:
1. Click on the edge of the rectangle to select it.
2. Right-click and select Properties.
3. In the Line Style dialog, click on Color, Line Type, or Line Weight to change the individual line style properties
4. Click OK.

Deleting a Rectangle
You can delete a rectangle in a couple of easy steps.
To delete a rectangle:
1. Click on the edge of the rectangle to select it.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

- 248 -
 Polygon Hatch

Polygon Hatch
Professional only
A polygon is a closed object consisting of three or more line segments. Examples include triangles, squares and hexagons.
To draw a polygon with the Polygon Hatch tool, simply pick points to define its shape. When drawing a polygon you can
select a line style for the polygon’s outline, and apply a hatch pattern to the polygon if you want.
Once you have drawn a polygon you can move, rotate or stretch the polygon, or edit its line style or hatch pattern.

Drawing Hatched Polygons

Ultimate | Professional
You can use the Polygon Hatch tool to draw a polygon of any shape with hatching of your choice instantly applied. You can
edit the shape, line style and hatch pattern of the polygon after it has been inserted.
To draw a hatched polygon:

1. Select Tools > Layout > Polygon Hatch, or click on the Layout toolbar.
2. Select a start point for the polygon, then continue selecting points to define its shape. Note that you do not have to select
the start point again, as the polygon always remains closed as you draw it. Be careful not to cross any lines, or the poly-
gon will not be created.
3. Once you’ve selected the last point of the polygon, right-click and select Finish.

Tip: If you don’t want your polygon to have hatching, you can set its hatch properties to None.

Moving a Polygon
You can move a hatched polygon using the Move tool.
To move a polygon:
1. Click on the edge of the polygon to select it.
2. Right-click and select Move.
3. Select a base point for the move, then select the point you want to move to.

Rotating a Polygon
You can rotate a polygon about a selected base point using the Rotate tool.
To rotate a polygon:
1. Click on the edge of the polygon to select it.
2. Right-click and select Rotate.
3. Hover your pointer over the point you want to rotate around. Typically this is one of the polygon’s grips.
4. Click and drag to rotate the polygon about the selected point.
5. When the polygon is at the desired rotation, release your mouse button.

Stretching a Polygon
You can resize and reshape a polygon by clicking and dragging its grab handles.
To stretch a polygon:
1. Click on the edge of the polygon to select it. Blue grips are displayed at each corner point.

2. Hover your pointer over the grab handle you want to move to display the Stretch cursor.
3. Click and drag the grip to resize or reshape the polygon, then release your mouse button.

Editing the Style of a Polygon’s Boundary Line

When you draw a polygon, the boundary line uses the default line style set for Drafting Objects in your Drafting Settings.
You can change the line style of a polygon’s boundary line after the polygon has been inserted.

- 249 -
Chapter 19: Drafting

To edit the style of a polygon’s boundary line:

1. Click on the edge of the polygon to select it.
2. Right-click and select Properties. The Polygon Hatch dialog appears.
3. Click on Color, Line Type, or Line Weight to change the individual line style properties.
4. Click OK to apply the changes.

Editing a Polygon’s Hatch Pattern

Once you have created a polygon, you can edit the properties of the hatch pattern applied, or select a different hatch pattern
to apply.
To edit a polygon’s hatch pattern:
1. Click on the edge of the polygon to select it.
2. Right-click and select Properties.
3. In the Polygon Hatch dialog, click the Select button in the Pattern area.
4. In the Patterns dialog, select the hatch pattern you want to apply, then click OK. You can add and edit patterns if you
want.
5. Click OK. The polygon is automatically updated.

Tip: If you don’t want the polygon to have hatching, select ’None’ in the pattern list.

Deleting a Polygon
You can delete a polygon in a couple of easy steps.
To delete a polygon:
1. Click on the edge of the polygon to select it.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Converting 2D to 3D
If you have drawn a line, arc, circle, rectangle or polygon in Model View, you can use the Convert To tool on an object’s
right-click menu to convert that object to an actual 3D building element such as a wall, member, footing or edging. The
resulting element will have properties and can be edited just like any other 3D building element that you insert, and will be
quantified in your project estimate.

Converting 2D Lines and Shapes to 3D Building Elements

In Model View you can convert lines, arcs, circles, rectangles and polygons to actual 3D building elements such as walls,
members, strip footings and edging.
To convert lines and shapes to 3D building elements:
1. Select the line or shape.
2. Right-click and select Convert To, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Convert To. Then, select the building element
that you want to convert the object to.
3. In the Catalog Access dialog, select the material you want to use for the element, then click OK. The object is instantly
converted.

Note: Circles and arcs cannot be converted to members.

- 250 -
Chapter 20: Estimating and
Calculating

Area/Perimeter
You can use the Area/Perimeter Calculator to display the area (e.g. square footage) and perimeter length of each location in
your model, as well as the total area and total perimeter (of all locations).

Room Measurements
You can use a Room Region tool to instantly calculate the area, perimeter and volume of a room or selected area in your
model and insert the information in your drawing.
When you use a Room Region tool, a boundary is created around the room or area. This boundary defines a room region in
your model that can be used in the Area/Perimeter Calculator.

Project Estimate
Any elements that you insert in your drawing are tracked internally, making it possible to generate a project estimate
automatically.
When you generate an estimate for your project, the estimate comprises a quantity report as well as a cut list. The quantity
report, or bill of materials, lists all of the materials used to build your house, as well as the quantity, unit price and total cost
of each material. The cut list reports all the timber and steel members in your drawing calculates the number of members
you need to buy at the store using real-world lengths of your choice.

Schedules
You can display, print and insert a door schedule and window schedule for each location in your project. By default, doors,
windows or members are tagged with schedule marks that link them to the associated schedule.
You can edit a schedule’s layout, text styles and line styles, and control the content and style of schedule marks.

Area & Perimeter

Calculating area and perimeter measurements is an important part of the design process. The Area/Perimeter Calculator
reports these measurements instantly at any given time. The Area/Perimeter Calculator displays the area (e.g. square
footage) and perimeter length of each location in your model. It also displays the total area and total perimeter (of all
locations). If your model changes, the Area/Perimeter Calculator adjusts its measurements automatically.

Calculating Area and Perimeter

Ultimate | Professional
The Area/Perimeter Calculator displays the area (e.g. square footage) and perimeter length of the building footprint on each
location in your model. It also displays the total area and total perimeter (of all locations). You can use the calculator at any
given point in time. The values in the calculator update automatically as your model increases or decreases in size.
Note that the calculations are taken from the exterior side of the building’s perimeter walls.
To measure area:

1. Select Tools > Analyze > Area/Perimeter, or click on the Analyze toolbar. Area measurements are displayed on
the Area tab of the Area/Perimeter Calculator dialog. Perimeter measurements are shown on the Perimeter tab.

- 251 -
Chapter 20: Estimating and Calculating

2. To omit a location from the calculation, select Omit from the drop box in the Include column.
3. To add a location that you have omitted back into the calculation, select Add from the drop box in the Include column.
4. To turn the grid lines off, uncheck the Show Grid check box.
5. To print the calculations, click Print.
6. When you are done viewing the area calculations, click OK.

Note: The units of measure used for the area and perimeter can be changed on the Units of Measure page in your program
settings.

Project Estimate
The Project Estimate tool automatically generates a quantity report and cut list at any time during the design process. If
you make changes to your model, the estimate will update automatically.
The quantity report, or bill of materials, lists all of the materials used to build your house, as well as the quantity, unit price
and total cost of each material.
The cut list reports all the timber and steel members in your drawing calculates the number of members you need to buy
from your supplier using realistic lengths of your choice.
When you view your project estimate, you can choose a report template to apply to the estimate. The template determines
what information is reported, how it is reported, and the file type created when you save the estimate. Some templates
generate files that are compatible with popular estimating programs.

Quantity Report
You can use the Project Estimate tool to instantly view a quantity report for your project. A quantity report, or bill of
materials, lists all of the materials used to build your house, as well as the quantity, unit price and total cost of each material.
The quantity report also lists assemblies, which are part of an element’s properties. For example, a wall may have assemblies
such as studs, drywall, insulation, vapor barrier, and drywall screws. Everything is precisely accounted for, as quantity
information is extracted directly from your 3D model. If your model changes, so does your estimate.
Material prices are set on an element’s Quantity property page. Most elements have an average price assigned to them. You
can edit material pricing to reflect prices in your area. You can also define other quantitative properties on an element’s
Quantity property page, such as the unit of measure that you would like to use to quantify the element.
While viewing a quantity report you can choose to omit selected locations from the report.
You can print and save a quantity report. The content and format of the report are determined by the report template that
you select while viewing the quantity report. Some templates produce files that are compatible with various estimating
programs so you can take your estimating to another level.

Viewing a Quantity Report

Platinum | Ultimate | Professional
The quantity report, or bill of materials, lists all of the materials used to build your house, as well as the quantity, unit price
and total cost of each material. The quantity report also lists assemblies, which are part of an element’s properties. For
example, a wall may have assemblies such as studs, drywall, insulation, vapor barrier, and drywall screws.

- 252 -
 Hiding Grid Lines in the Report Window

The quantity report is displayed on the Quantity Report page of the Generate Project Estimate dialog.

To view a quantity report:

1. To view a quantity report for the full project, select Tools > Analyze > Generate Project Estimate, or click on the
Analyze toolbar.
To view a quantity report for specific elements only, select the elements in your drawing, then right-click and select
Generate Estimate.
2. Make sure the Quantity Report tab is selected.

Hiding Grid Lines in the Report Window

When you generate a project estimate, grid lines are displayed in the Generate Project Estimate dialog. You can turn grid
lines off if you want.
To turn grid lines off:
1. In the Generate Project Estimate or View Project Estimate dialog, select View > Show Grid.

Selecting a Report Template

Platinum | Ultimate | Professional
By default, the quantity report uses the Standard Report Form template, which generates a TXT file. You can select a different
report template to use if you want. Below is a list of the available templates.
• Standard Report Form
• Microsoft® Excel XLS
• BuilderTREND Link
• CG Visions BIM Pipeline
• Estimator (CSV)

- 253 -
Chapter 20: Estimating and Calculating

If you created a custom template in an older version of the program, or would like to use a template that you have copied
to your system but don’t see in the list, you can open it using the Open Template tool.
To select a report template:
1. In the Generate Project Estimate dialog, select the template you want to use from the template drop box.

Filtering Locations from an Estimate

Platinum | Ultimate | Professional
In a project estimate, materials are grouped by location, and there is a terrain category for landscaping materials. You can
omit a location from your quantity report and/or cut list if you want.
To filter locations from the estimate:
1. In the Generate Project Estimate dialog, make sure the correct tab is selected (Quantity Report or Cut List). The location
filter applies to the current tab only.

2. Click beside the report form drop box.

3. To omit a location and its elements from the report, click the location’s filter icon. You can omit landscaping elements
from the report by filtering the terrain out.
4. Click OK. The estimate is updated.

Printing a Quantity Report

Platinum | Ultimate | Professional
You can print the quantity report directly from the Generate Project Estimate dialog. Alternatively you can open the
quantity report in its associated editor and print it there.
To print the quantity report:
1. If you are in the Generate Project Estimate dialog, select the Quantity Report tab.

2. Select File > Print, or click to the left of the report form drop box.
3. In the Print dialog, select the printer you want to use, then click Print.

Tip: You can also print a saved report by opening it in its associated editor, and printing it from there.

Saving a Quantity Report

Platinum | Ultimate | Professional
The Generate Project Estimate dialog acts like a viewer for your quantity report. If you want to save the quantity report
to a file, you need to use the Save and Close tool. By default, quantity reports are saved in the same directory where the
project is saved. The file extension depends on the currently selected report template.
To save the current quantity report:
1. In the Generate Project Estimate dialog, select File > Save and Close, or click the Save and Close button at the bottom
of the dialog.
2. In the Save As dialog, select the folder where you want to save the file, then type a name for the report in the File Name
edit box.

- 254 -
 Opening a Quantity Report in its Associated Editor

3. Click Save.

Opening a Quantity Report in its Associated Editor

Platinum | Ultimate | Professional
You can choose to open your quantity report in its associated editor. For example, if the report is using the Standard Report
Form template, which generates a TXT file, the report will open in Notepad. You can do this directly from the Generate
Project Estimate dialog, or by using the View Project Estimate tool.
To open a quantity report from the Generate Project Estimate dialog:
1. In the Generate Project Estimate dialog, select File > Open with Associated Editor.
To view a saved quantity report:

1. Select Tools > Analyze > View Project Estimate, or click on the Analyze toolbar.

2. In the View Project Estimate dialog, click , then locate the file to open.
3. Click Open. The report opens in its associated editor.

Tip: If you have already saved your quantity report, an alternative way of opening the quantity report is to double-click the
file in Windows Explorer, or to open the associated editor and use that program’s Open function.

Closing the Generate Project Estimate Dialog

When you are finished viewing the current project estimate, you can close the Generate Project Estimate dialog without
saving the estimate.
To close the Generate Project Estimate dialog:

1. Select File > Exit, or click in the top right corner of the dialog.

Note: This does not save the estimate. If you want to save before closing, click the Save and Close button in the dialog.

Editing Material Pricing

Most elements have a default unit price set for them in their properties. These prices are used in the project estimate.
You can specify prices for elements in the catalog, or elements in your drawing. If you have already created your design,
you can edit the prices of inserted elements by selecting them in the drawing, then editing their properties. Alternatively
you can generate and save a project estimate, then edit the pricing in the estimate’s associated editor, such as Excel or Notepad
(depending on the report template used).
Note: You can specify pricing for material finishes (brick, paint, wallpaper, etc.) that are applied to elements by adding an
assembly to the material. See Editing Material Properties.
To edit the price of an inserted element:
1. Select the element in your drawing. You can select multiple elements of the same type using Shift+click.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the properties dialog, select the Quantity tab.
4. Edit the value in the Price edit box. Note that prices are unit prices. For a carpet, for example, you would enter the price
per square foot, not the price of the entire carpet.
5. Click OK in the properties dialog.
If you edit the price of any element in the catalog, the price change will affect all new insertions of the element.
To edit material pricing in the catalog:
1. Select File > Catalogs > Element Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog and select Element Manager.
2. Select the element that you want to edit.
3. In the properties pane, select the Quantity tab.

- 255 -
Chapter 20: Estimating and Calculating

4. Edit the value in the Price edit box. Note that prices are unit prices. For a carpet, for example, you would enter the price
per square foot, not the price of the entire carpet.
5. Click OK.

Excluding Elements from a Quantity Report

You can prevent an element from appearing in the quantity report by changing a setting on the element’s Quantity property
page.
To prevent an element from appearing in a quantity report:
1. Select the element in your drawing.
2. Right-click and select Properties.
3. In the properties dialog, select the Quantity tab.
4. Disable the Include Element in Quantities check box.
5. Click OK.

Note: You can also apply this change to elements in the catalog. The change will affect all new insertions of the element.

Cut List
You can use the Project Estimate tool to view a detailed cut list for your project. The cut list reports all the timber and steel
members in your drawing, such as studs, rafters and joists, and calculates the number of members you need in terms of
actual lengths that you would purchase from your supplier. Note: Currently the cut list does not report deck boards — only
beams and joists. Deck boards are, however, included in the quantity report.
You can view a cut list in the Generate Project Estimate dialog, and print it if you like.

Viewing a Cut List

Platinum | Ultimate | Professional
The cut list is displayed on the Cut List page of the Generate Project Estimate dialog. The cut list reports all the timber and
steel members in your drawing, such as studs, rafters and joists. It calculates the number of members you need to buy from
your supplier using the purchased lengths specified in each member’s properties. For example, the cut list will tell you how
many 2x4s, 2x6s, 2x8s and 2x10s you will need.
To view a cut list:

1. Select Tools > Analyze > Generate Project Estimate, or click on the Analyze toolbar.
2. In the Generate Project Estimate dialog, select the Cut List tab.
3. To save the cut list to a file, click Save and Close. To close the dialog without saving, click Exit.
Note: Currently the cut list does not report deck boards — only beams and joists. Deck boards are, however, included in the
quantity report.

Printing a Cut List

Platinum | Ultimate | Professional
You can print a cut list directly from the Generate Project Estimate dialog.
To print a cut list:
1. In the Generate Project Estimate dialog, select the Cut List tab.

2. Select File > Print, or click to the left of the report form drop box.
3. In the Print dialog, select the printer you want to use, then click Print.

- 256 -
 Schedules

Schedules
You can display, print and insert complete door, window, member or room region schedules for each location in your
project. By default, doors, windows or members are tagged with schedule marks that link them to the associated schedule.
By default, doors and windows are tagged with schedule marks that link them to the associated schedule.
You can edit a schedule’s layout, text styles and line styles, and control the content and style of schedule marks.

Generating a Door Schedule

Professional only
You can instantly view a door schedule for any location in your project. The schedule displays a detailed description of each
door type on the selected location, as well as the count for each door type. You can insert the schedule in your project with
a simple mouse click. By default, the doors in your project are tagged with schedule marks when you insert the schedule.
To generate a door schedule:

1. Select Tools > Analyze > Schedules > Door Schedule, or click on the Analyze toolbar.
2. To edit the title of the schedule, edit the heading in the Schedule Title edit box.
3. To view a schedule for another building location, select the desired location from the Reference Building Location
drop box.
4. To prevent the doors in your project from being tagged with schedule marks, disable the Tag Elements with Schedule
Mark check box.
5. To edit the layout or appearance of the schedule or schedule marks, click Setup.

6. To print the schedule, click , then make the desired selections in the Print dialog.
7. To insert the schedule in your project, click OK. (Otherwise, click Cancel to exit the dialog.) The schedule is attached
to your cursor, ready to be inserted.
8. Position the schedule where you want it, then click to insert it.

Generating a Window Schedule

Professional only
You can instantly view a window schedule for any location in your project. The schedule displays a detailed description of
each window type on the selected location, as well as the count for each window type. You can insert the schedule in your
project with a simple mouse click. By default, the windows in your project are tagged with schedule marks when you insert
the schedule.
To generate a window schedule:

1. Select Tools > Analyze > Schedules > Window Schedule, or click on the Analyze toolbar.
2. To edit the title of the schedule, edit the heading in the Schedule Title edit box.
3. To view a schedule for another building location, select the desired location from the Reference Building Location
drop box.
4. To prevent the windows in your project from being tagged with schedule marks, disable the Tag Elements with
Schedule Mark check box.
5. To edit the layout or appearance of the schedule or schedule marks, click Setup.

6. To print the schedule, click , then make the desired selections in the Print dialog.
7. To insert the schedule in your project, click OK. (Otherwise, click Cancel to exit the dialog.) The schedule is attached
to your cursor, ready to be inserted.
8. Position the schedule where you want it, then click to insert it.

Moving a Schedule
Once you have inserted a schedule, you can move it by simply clicking and dragging it with your mouse.

- 257 -
Chapter 20: Estimating and Calculating

To move a schedule:
1. Click on the schedule to select it.

2. Hover your pointer over the center blue grip. The Move cursor is displayed.
3. Click and drag the schedule to where you want it, then release your mouse button.

Rotating a Schedule
You can rotate an inserted schedule using the Rotate tool.
To rotate a schedule:
1. Click on the schedule to select it.
2. Right-click and select Rotate.
3. Select a point to rotate around, such as the center grip.
4. Move your mouse to rotate the schedule.
5. When the schedule is at the desired angle, click to finish.

Printing a Schedule
You can print a door, window or member schedule directly from the Schedule dialog.
To print a schedule:
1. If you have already inserted the schedule in your project, click on it to select it, then right-click and select Properties.
If you have not inserted it yet, select Tools > Analyze > Schedules, then select the type of schedule you want to print.

2. In the Schedule dialog, click .

3. In the Print dialog, select the desired printer to use, then click Print.

Defining the Field Layout of a Schedule

Each type of schedule has a default layout of fields. You can remove any of these fields, as well as add new fields if you
want. You can also control the content and size of each field.
To define the layout of a schedule:
1. In the Schedule dialog, click Setup. Note that if you have already inserted the schedule, the inserted schedule will be
deleted, and a new one will be generated in the dialog.
In the Schedule Setup dialog, the current layout is displayed in the Layout area of the dialog.
2. To delete a field, click on it to select it, then click Remove.
3. To edit a field’s title, click on the field to select it, then edit the title in the Heading edit box.
4. To edit a field’s content, click on the field to select it, then make a selection from the Content drop box.
5. To edit the width of a field, click on the field to select it, then edit the value in the Width edit box.
6. To insert a new field, click on the field that you want to appear to the right of the new field, then click Insert. A blank
field is added to the left of the currently selected field. Define the Heading, Content and Width variables. Content op-
tions include Auto Mark, Description, Type, Height, Width, Height x Width, Width x Height, Thickness, Height Rough
Opening, Width Rough Opening, Count, Location, Division, Category, Manufacturer, Supplier, Price, Part Number,
Alternate Code, U-Factor, and Catalog Mark.
7. Click OK. The schedule is updated with your new settings.

Note: You cannot edit the layout of an inserted schedule by selecting the Properties tool. A new schedule will have to be
generated.

Defining the Text Styles in a Schedule

You can control the text styles used for a schedule’s title, headings and content, as well as the justification of text within each
field.

- 258 -
 Defining the Line Styles in a Schedule

To define the text styles in a schedule:

1. If you have already inserted the schedule in your project, click on it to select it, then right-click and select Properties.
If you have not inserted it yet, select Tools > Analyze > Schedules, then select the type of schedule you want to gen-
erate.
2. In the Schedule dialog, click Setup.
3. To edit the text style used for the schedule title, field headings or content, click the Title, Headings or Content button
in the Schedule Appearance area. In the Text Styles dialog, select the text style you want to use for the selected item, then
click OK.
4. To edit the justification of text in each column, click the desired justification button. A left justification aligns all the text
on the left side of the column. A right justification aligns the text on the right side of the column. With a centered justi-
fication, each line of text is centered in each column.
5. Click OK.

Note: Text style settings apply only to the inserted schedule, not the schedule displayed in the dialog.

Defining the Line Styles in a Schedule

You can change the line styles used for a schedule’s border and division lines.
To define the line styles in a schedule:
1. If you have already inserted the schedule in your project, click on it to select it, then right-click and select Properties.
If you have not inserted it yet, select Tools > Analyze > Schedules, then select the type of schedule you want to gen-
erate.
2. In the Schedule dialog, click Setup.
3. To select a line style for the schedule’s border, click the Border button, then make a selection from the Line Styles di-
alog.
4. To select a line style for the lines between columns and rows, click the Division button, then make a selection from the
Line Styles dialog.
5. Click OK.

Note: Line style settings apply only to the inserted schedule, not the schedule displayed in the dialog.

Defining Schedule Marks

When defining schedule marks, you can choose either a circle, square, hexagon or octagon shape. You can also control the
line style used for the mark, as well as the text style of the mark content.
To define schedule marks:
1. If you have already inserted the schedule in your project, click on it to select it, then right-click and select Properties.
If you have not inserted it yet, select Tools > Analyze > Schedules, then select the type of schedule you want to gen-
erate.
2. In the Schedule dialog, click Setup.
3. To select a shape for the schedule marks, click on the appropriate graphic in the Mark Style area of the Schedule Setup
dialog.
4. To select a text style for the schedule mark text, click the Text Style button in the Mark Style area, then select the desired
style in the Text Styles dialog.
5. To select a line style for the mark line, click the Line Style button in the Mark Style area, then select the desired line style
in the Line Styles dialog.
6. Click OK.

Removing Schedule Marks

If you do not want doors or windows to be tagged with schedule marks, you can prevent them from appearing by editing
your schedule settings.

- 259 -
Chapter 20: Estimating and Calculating

To remove schedule marks:

1. If you have already inserted the schedule in your project, click on it to select it, then right-click and select Properties.
If you have not inserted it yet, select Tools > Analyze > Schedules, then select the desired type of schedule.
2. In the Schedule dialog, disable the Tag Elements with Schedule Mark check box.
3. Click OK.

Note: You can also hide schedule marks from view using the View Filter.

Deleting a Schedule
You can delete a schedule that you have inserted in a few easy steps. When deleting a schedule, you have the option of
leaving the schedule marks on the doors or windows.
To delete a schedule:
1. Click on the schedule to select it.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.
3. If you want to delete the schedule marks on the associated elements, click Yes. If you want to leave the schedule marks
displayed, click No.

Note: You can also hide schedules from view using the View Filter.

- 260 -
Chapter 21: Rendering & Animation

3D RealView™ Rendering adds light and shadow to a textured 3D view to achieve photo-realistic images of both the interior
and exterior of your home. You can save rendered images in BMP, JPG or TGA format, or open them directly in image
editing applications where you can further edit and enhance them. Once you’ve set up your scene, creating a 3D RealView
rendering involves only a mouse click or two. In a short time you’ll have a vivid, life-like view to enjoy!
Use the Render Panoramic View tool to generate a realistic, wide-angle view that can be viewed using the VR app.
The powerful Animation tool lets you record an actual tour through your 3D model that you can play back at any time. You
can even add realistic sounds to your animation, such as a doorbell ringing. You can also choose to ray trace the animation
for a photorealistic display that includes light, shadows and reflection. To create an animation, all you need to do is draw
one or more paths for the camera to follow. Then, just sit back and watch your design come to life!
Attaching sounds to elements is a great way to add realism and excitement to your design. For example, you can attach the
sound of a doorbell to a door, or even a voice-over. Once you’ve attached a sound to an element you can play it any time
using the Play Sound tool. The catalog includes a number of pre-defined sounds for your convenience, including a creak,
knock, doorbell, phone, clock chime, horn and ignition. You can attach sounds to individual elements in your drawing, or
to elements in the catalog.

3D RealViewTM Rendering
Rendering is a process of generating an image from a 3D model. The image is like a photograph, and contains texture,
lighting and shadows. In fact, it is sometimes difficult to distinguish a 3D RealView™ rendering from an actual photograph.
3D RealView™ renderings are great to use when presenting designs to clients. Their photorealistic nature captures attention
and gives clients a true sense of the design.
Renderings are easy to create — just set up your 3D view, make sure you have lighting in place, and then use the Render
3D RealView tool to create the rendering.
Before creating a rendering you can select a quality level for the rendered image, and define various settings that affect the
image output.
The progress of the rendering is displayed in real time, and you can adjust the brightness of the image and any highlighted
areas either during rendering or after rendering. Once the image has been rendered, you can save it as a BMP, JPG or TGA
file, or open it directly in an image editing program for further enhancement.

How Rendering Works

A rendered view is a photo realistic 3D view that includes light and shadows. To render a view, two algorithms are used:
global illumination and raytracing.
Global illumination is an algorithm that simulates the many reflections of light around a scene, generally resulting in softer,
more natural shadows and reflections.
The first part of the global illumination process involves finding those element surfaces that are visible to direct light and
calculating how much light is transferred to each element. Some elements will receive more light than others depending on
their surface properties, and different surfaces will reflect different amounts of light. Still, each element will absorb some of
the light, so the total amount reflected back into the scene will be less than that emitted by the light fixtures.
Raytracing is a direct illumination algorithm that traces the path taken by a ray of light from the camera through the scene,
then calculates the reflection, refraction, or absorption of the ray when it intersects objects in the scene.
The process begins by finding the element that reflects the most light. The element is considered a secondary light source,
so we need to calculate how much of its light is transferred to other elements in the scene. Multiple passes are performed
until the amount of light remaining in the scene is negligible in comparison to the light originally emitted by the light
fixtures. When the passes have been completed, that’s when raytracing can begin.
Material properties define how light reflects off a surface. Direct light and ambient light levels define the light that is
reflected. Direct light is light that is emitted from light fixtures. It has a specific color, intensity and direction. Ambient light
can be thought of as a general level of light that is everywhere in the scene. Every light in a scene contributes to the overall
ambient light in a scene.

- 261 -
Chapter 21: Rendering & Animation

All of this may seem complicated, but Virtual Architect home design software takes care of it all in one mouse click.

Setting the Viewpoint for a Rendering

When you create a 3D RealView™ rendering, your model is captured at the angle currently shown on the screen. Some
topics you may want to look at:
Displaying 3D Camera Views on page 182
Changing Your Viewpoint on page 186
Changing the Viewing Field Angle on page 187

Setting the Lighting for a Rendering

Even though creating a 3D RealView™ rendering involves nothing more than a mouse click, there are a few things you
should consider beforehand.
Exterior Shots
If you want to do an exterior shot, the most important factor to consider is sunlight. This is determined by your global
position and time of day. By adjusting these settings, you control how much sunlight is in the scene, and from what angle
it shines.
Night Shots
To create a night shot, you need to first set your background to a night scene. Once your background is set, all you need to
do is set the time to a time of day when there is no sun. If you do want to create a night shot, you will probably want to insert
some exterior lighting in your design.
Interior Shots
When creating interior shots, light comes from light fixtures that you have inserted in the room, and can also come through
the windows if it is daytime. You can turn lights on and off as well as change their bulbs for different light intensity and
effect.

Defining Your Location

Setting your global position determines how much daylight there will be in a scene relative to the time of day in the scene’s
properties.
To define your location:

1. Select Settings > Document Settings, or click on the Settings toolbar. You can also click the Options button in the
3D RealView dialog.
2. In the left pane, select Global.
3. Select a country and city from the appropriate drop boxes. You can add or edit a city if needed. Just click the Add or
Edit button. You will need to know the longitude, latitude and time zone of the city.
4. To set the angle from true north, enter a value in the Angle edit box, or simply click and drag the arrow indicator to
rotate it.
This is the “geographic” North, as opposed to the “magnetic” North which you see on a compass. The value you specify
determines where North is on your screen, and affects the angle of the sun for daylight rendering. The number in
degrees that you enter is in relation to the 90° perpendicular orientation of your drawing. A value of 1º makes the top
of the screen North. A value of 90º makes the top of the screen East, and the left side of the screen North.
It is assumed that information regarding building orientation to True North can be taken from, or calculated from, a
surveyor’s certificate. However, True North can be calculated from a Magnetic North reading taken at your building
site. See Calculating True North from Magnetic North in the online help.
5. Click OK.

- 262 -
 Calculating True North from Magnetic North

Calculating True North from Magnetic North

What is True North?
True North is the geographic North Pole. It is located at 90° North latitude and all lines of longitude converge at the pole.
The Earth’s axis connects the north and south poles. The Earth’s axis is the line around which the Earth rotates. The North
Pole is approximately 450 miles (725 km) north of Greenland in the middle of the Arctic Ocean.

What is Magnetic North?

Magnetic North is the magnetic north pole. It is the focus of the planet’s magnetic field and is the point magnetic compasses
point toward. Unlike the geographic North Pole, the magnetic north pole moves (even daily). It moves approximately 9
miles (15 km) each year. It is presently located about 1000 miles (1600 km) south of the geographic North Pole at 78° 18’
North and 104° West (southwest of Nunavut in Northern Canada).

How do you calculate True North from Magnetic North?

The difference between Magnetic North and True North is called the variation. To convert magnetic readings to true, you
need to find the variation for your particular location. Maps such as U.S. Geological Survey maps, aviation charts and
marine charts all list the variation. Because variation changes from location to location, you need to get a map for your area.
Variation is listed in terms of degrees east or west. If it is east variation, you subtract the number of degrees from the
magnetic direction to obtain the true direction. If it is west variation, you add the number of degrees to the magnetic
direction to obtain the true direction.

Note: If you use a compass to determine Magnetic North in relation to the building line that you plan to orient at 90° to the
perpendicular in your drawing, and factor in your local variation, you should easily be able to calculate True North in
relation to your plan.

Setting the Season

Setting the season can determine how plants will look in a rendered scene, relative to your global location.
To set the season:

1. Select Settings > Document Settings, or click on the Settings toolbar. You can also click the Options button in the
3D RealView dialog.
2. In the left pane, select Global.
3. Click the Plant Season drop box and select either Summer, Winter, Fall, or Spring.

- 263 -
Chapter 21: Rendering & Animation

4. Click OK.

Creating a 3D RealViewTM Rendering

You can render any 3D view in a matter of minutes, with the click of a button. The result is an impressive, photo-like image
that incorporates light, shadows, reflections, and other realistic attributes.
The 3D RealView tool uses both global illumination and raytracing to produce an image of exceptional quality. The 3D
RealView feature begins by reading in the model’s geometry, and then proceeds with the global illumination calculation,
which occurs in multiple passes. Global illumination is an algorithm that simulates the many reflections of light around a
scene, resulting in soft, natural shadows and reflections. Once global illumination is complete, raytracing begins
automatically. Raytracing is a direct illumination algorithm that traces the path taken by a ray of light from the camera
through the scene, then calculates the reflection, refraction, or absorption of the ray when it intersects objects in the scene.
The 3D RealView dialog lets you see the progress of the rendering in real time, and lets you know how much time is
remaining in each pass. You can adjust the brightness of the image, as well as the intensity of highlighted areas. Once the
rendering is complete, you can save the image, open it in an editing application, or reset the view and render again.
To create a 3D RealView rendering:
1. Display the 3D view that you want to render.
2. Select View > Render 3D RealView.
3. In the 3D RealView dialog, make sure the scene is how you want it to appear. You can change the scene using tools
below the preview window, such as Zoom In, Zoom Out and Walk Around.

4. To define the image output size, make a selection from the Size drop box in the Image area. You can select one of the
common output sizes or select Custom Size to define a custom size. The dialog box will resize accordingly.

Note: If you select a size that is larger than your screen, the image will be rendered in pieces or tiles off-screen. The
rendered tiles will be put together behind the scenes to form a complete image that will be saved at the specified size.

5. Click the Start render button to begin.

First, the model’s geometry is analyzed. Once that is done, the global illumination calculation begins. Global
illumination determines how much light is given off by the sun or by lighting fixtures, and how much light is reflected
off the surface of elements. Global illumination occurs in two or more passes. Once global illumination is complete,
raytracing begins automatically. The view is updated in real time during these calculations, and the Remaining Time
and Elapsed time of each pass is displayed in the Progress area.
6. To adjust the overall brightness of the image, adjust the value in the Brightness edit box. Lower values darken the im-
age, while higher values make it brighter.

- 264 -
 Rendering a Panoramic View for VR Viewing

7. To adjust the intensity of highlighted areas, adjust the value in the Burn edit box. This can be a decimal value between
0 and 1. Lower burn values will decrease the intensity of the highlights to avoid “burned out” areas in the image.
8. To control the overall brightness of an image, adjust the Gamma value.
When the rendering is complete, the message Render Complete! appears in the Progress area. Now you can either save
the image, open it in an editing application, or reset the view and render again.
9. If you want to create a grayscale image, enable the Convert to grayscale check box before saving. This will produce a
monochromatic image containing varying shades of gray.
10. To save the rendered image to a file, click Save. In the Save As dialog, navigate to the location where you want to save
the image, select a file type (BMP, JPG or TGA) from the Save as type drop box, and then type a name for the file in
the File name edit box. Click Save to save the image.
11. To open the image in an image editing application, where you can edit or enhance it further, click the down arrow next
to the Save button and select Launch Viewer. The application that launches is the one that is associated with image
files in Windows Explorer. For example, a BMP file may open in Microsoft Paint, or whatever program that normally
launches when you attempt to open a BMP file from Windows Explorer.
12. If you do not want to keep the rendered image, click Reset. This resets the view to its original state, and you can render
again if you wish.
13. If you want to make changes to the actual scene, like add a light fixture or apply a different material to an element, click
Close, and then make the desired changes. When you are ready to render again, select View > Render 3D RealView.
If you want to return to the camera position and zoom level that you were at when you first rendered the scene, select
Last Camera Position from the Camera drop box at the top of the dialog.
14. When you are finished viewing the 3D RealView rendering, click Close.

Rendering a Panoramic View for VR Viewing

Use the Render Panoramic View tool to generate a rendered, wide-angle view that can be viewed using a VR app. The
resulting image incorporates light, shadows, reflections, and other realistic attributes for the ultimate virtual reality
experience.
The Render Panoramic View tool uses some of the same algorithms as the Render 3D RealView tool to produce an image of
exceptional quality. The rendering process occurs in two distinct stages, and each stage may include multiple passes.
Once the view has been generated, you will be prompted to upload it for viewing with the VR app.
To render a panoramic:
1. Display the 3D view that you want to render.
2. Select View > Render Panoramic.
3. In the Generate Panoramic View dialog, click the Step #1 Generate GI button to begin. The Global Illumination cal-
culation begins. Global illumination determines how much light is given off by the sun or by lighting fixtures, and how
much light is reflected off the surface of elements. Global illumination occurs in two or more passes. Once global illu-
mination is complete, raytracing begins automatically. The view is updated in real time during these calculations, and
the Remaining Time and Elapsed time of each pass is displayed in the Progress area.

- 265 -
Chapter 21: Rendering & Animation

4. When the first stage is complete, click the Step #1 Generate Faces button.
5. To adjust the overall brightness of the image, adjust the value in the Brightness edit box. Lower values darken the im-
age, while higher values make it brighter.
6. To adjust the intensity of highlighted areas, adjust the value in the Burn edit box. This can be a decimal value between
0 and 1. Lower burn values will decrease the intensity of the highlights to avoid “burned out” areas in the image.
7. To control the overall brightness of an image, adjust the Gamma value.
When the rendering is complete, the message Render Complete! appears in the Progress area. Now you can either save
the image, open it in an editing application, or reset the view and render again.
8. If you do not want to keep the rendered image, click Reset. This resets the view to its original state, and you can render
again if you wish.
9. If you want to make changes to the actual scene, like add a light fixture or apply a different material to an element, click
Close, and then make the desired changes. When you are ready to render again, select View > Render Panoramic
View.
10. When the panoramic rendering is complete, you will be prompted to upload it for viewing with the VR app:

- 266 -
 Setting the Rendering Quality

Setting the Rendering Quality

By default, the quality level chosen for the ray trace quality is Level 2 - Low (fast). You can select a different quality level
before rendering if you want. Note that the higher level of quality you choose, the longer the rendering process takes. You
can set the default quality level for all renderings in your Program Settings. If you want you can override the default quality
level directly within the 3D RealView dialog when creating a rendering.
To set the default rendering quality for the project:
1. Select Settings > Document Settings.
2. In the Document Settings dialog, select 3D RealView in the left column.
3. In the Ray Trace Quality area, select the quality level you want from the Level drop box.
4. Click OK.
To adjust the rendering quality for a particular rendering:
1. Select View > Render 3D RealView.
2. In the 3D RealView dialog, click the Options button.
3. In the Document Settings dialog, select 3D RealView in the left column.
4. In the Ray Trace Quality area, select the quality level you want from the Level drop box.
5. Click OK to return to the 3D RealView dialog.

Using Antialiasing in Rendering

Antialiasing blends pixels in areas where two colors or two materials meet to reduce artifacts (or “stair steps”) and produce
a more natural look to the scene. By default, antialiasing is set to 1 to increase rendering speed. You can select varying levels
of antialiasing. You can set the default antialiasing value for all renderings in your Program Settings. You can also override
the default antialiasing value for a particular rendering while the 3D RealView tool is active.
To set the default antialiasing value:
1. Select Settings > Document Settings.

- 267 -
Chapter 21: Rendering & Animation

2. In the Document Settings dialog, select 3D RealView in the left column.

3. Use the arrow keys next to the Antialiasing edit box to increase or decrease the level of antialiasing. The higher the
level, the cleaner the image, but the longer the rendering process takes.
4. Click OK.
To adjust the antialiasing for a particular rendering:
1. Select View > Render 3D RealView.
2. In the 3D RealView dialog, click the Options button.
3. In the Document Settings dialog, select 3D RealView in the left column.
4. Use the up arrows key next to the Antialiasing edit box to increase the level of antialiasing. The higher the level, the
cleaner the image, but the longer the rendering process takes.
5. Click OK to return to the 3D RealView dialog.

Adjusting the Noise Reduction Level When Rendering

Noise in a rendered image refers to areas of graininess. This can happen in interior scenes that mix sunlight and interior
lighting, or when sunlight comes through a skylight. If you see noise in a rendering, you can increase the noise reduction
level in your 3D RealView settings, and then render the view again. Note that increasing the noise reduction level may
increase the rendering time.
To set the default noise reduction level:
1. Select Settings > Document Settings.
2. In the Document Settings dialog, select 3D RealView in the left column.
3. Adjust the Electrical lights noise reduction and Skylight noise reduction values using the scroll arrows.
4. Click OK.
To change the noise reduction level for a particular rendering:
1. Select View > Render 3D RealView.
2. In the 3D RealView dialog, click the Options button.
3. In the Document Settings dialog, select 3D RealView in the left column.
4. Adjust the Electrical lights noise reduction and Skylight noise reduction values using the scroll arrows.
5. Click OK to return to the 3D RealView dialog.

Controlling the Intensity of Trees and Billboards

You can adjust the brightness and contrast of trees and billboards in a rendered scene by editing your rendering settings.
To set defaults for tree/billboard intensity:
1. Select Settings > Document Settings.
2. In the Document Settings dialog, select 3D RealView in the left column.
3. Adjust the Tree and billboard intensity value.
4. Click OK.
To specify the tree/billboard intensity for a particular rendering:
1. Select View > Render 3D RealView.
2. In the 3D RealView dialog, click the Options button.
3. In the Document Settings dialog, select 3D RealView in the left column.
4. Adjust the Tree and billboard intensity value.
5. Click OK to return to the 3D RealView dialog.

- 268 -
 Setting the Global Illumination Sample Density

Setting the Global Illumination Sample Density

Global Illumination is a group of algorithms that are designed to add more realistic lighting to 3D scenes. These algorithms
take into account not only the light that comes directly from a light source (direct illumination), but also light that is bounced
off of surfaces onto other surfaces.
The Global Illumination sample density is the number of reference points in the model used for generating the "baked"
lighting in a rendering. The higher the density, the longer the calculation time.
To set the default Global Illumination sample density:
1. Select Settings > Document Settings.
2. In the Document Settings dialog, select 3D RealView in the left column.
3. Adjust the Presentation GI Sample Density slider.
4. Click OK.
To set the Global Illumination sample density for a particular rendering:
1. Select View > Render 3D RealView.
2. In the 3D RealView dialog, click the Options button.
3. In the Document Settings dialog, select 3D RealView in the left column.
4. Adjust the Presentation GI Sample Density slider.
5. Click OK to return to the 3D RealView dialog.

Adjusting the Light Coming from Light Fixtures

To adjust the color or intensity of light coming from a light fixture, you can add light bulbs, change a light bulb to a different
type, adjust the intensity of the light, select a different color for the light, or turn a light off completely.
See the following topics:
Editing a Light Fixture’s Light Source on page 96
Turning a Light On or Off on page 97

Editing the Surface Properties of Materials

Different materials have different finishes. Surface finishes include Dull, Low Gloss, Semi Gloss, High Gloss, Liquid, Fully
Reflective, Partially Reflective, Shiny, Fully Transparent, and Partially Transparent. The finish determines how much a
material reflects, emits and absorbs light. These factors can affect the lighting in a rendered scene.
To edit the surface properties of an element’s materials:
1. Select the element in your drawing.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the properties dialog, select the Appearance tab.
4. On the Appearance page, click the Select button, or click the texture swatch to access the Materials dialog.
5. In the Materials dialog, select the material to edit, then select Edit > Edit Material, or right-click and select Edit Mate-
rial.
6. To change the surface finish of the material (dull, shiny, etc.), make a selection from the Preset Effects drop box. If you
want to specify a custom surface finish, select Custom in the list, then enable the Display settings details check box.
7. Specify the properties of the finish. These are described below.
Specular. Reflection that creates highlights on materials, making them appear shiny.
Emissive. The amount of light given off by a material. The more emissive a material is, the more self-luminous it
appears.
Color Bleed. The degree to which different colors blend where they meet.
8. Click OK in the Material Properties dialog.
9. Click OK in the Materials dialog.

- 269 -
Chapter 21: Rendering & Animation

10. Click OK in the properties dialog.

Troubleshooting a 3D RealViewTM Rendering

Problem: Rendering is too light or too dark
If you find that your rendering is too light or too dark, or that you want to create different lighting effects, consider the
following concepts:
Time of Day. Your location and time of day determine how much daylight is in a scene.
Light Fixtures. You may need to add interior light fixtures or exterior light fixtures to increase the amount of light in a scene.
This is particularly important for interior shots and night shots. Note that rooms without light fixtures will be illuminated
by the camera’s headlight when viewing and navigating in 3D, but this light is not used in rendering.
Light Sources. You can change the bulbs in your light fixtures to achieve different lighting effects. For example, you can
choose a bulb with a stronger or weaker wattage, or one that is a different color.
Turning Lights Off. If you have light fixtures in your scene and want to decrease the amount of light in the scene, you can
turn selected light fixtures off.
Gamma. Gamma correction controls the overall brightness of an image. Lower values darken the image, while higher values
make it brighter. Images that are not properly corrected can look either bleached out, or too dark.
Scene Properties. You can adjust certain options in your Scene Properties to control factors such as daylight and
brightness. For example, you can edit the sun and sky conditions.
Problem: The quality of the rendering is poor
If your rendering looks blurry, has areas of graininess, or has jagged edges, try the following:
Quality Level. There are five quality levels to choose from. By default, the Low (fast) quality level is used. Selecting a higher
quality level may improve the general appearance of your rendering.
Antialiasing. During the raytracing process, antialiasing blends pixels in areas where two colors or two materials meet to
reduce artifacts (or “stair steps”). By default, antialiasing is set to 1 to increase rendering speed. To reduce jagged edges and
create a more natural-looking scene, try increasing the antialiasing value.
Noise reduction level. Noise in a rendered image refers to areas of graininess. This can happen in interior scenes that mix
sunlight and interior lighting, or when sunlight comes through a skylight. Increasing the noise reduction value will reduce
noise in your renderings.
Problem: A wall looks black instead of textured
Sometimes when a single wall is drawn (to fill in a gable end, for example), it appears black when rendered because it is seen
as an interior wall instead of an exterior wall. You can force either side of a wall to be exterior by editing the wall’s settings.
The wall will then be rendered with the proper materials.
To force wall sides to be exterior, go into the wall’s properties (select the wall and then right-click and select Properties),
then enable the Force Surface To Be Exterior check box in either the Left Interior Surface or Right Interior Surface area. For
more information see Forcing Wall Sides to be Exterior.

Animations
Animations are like movies — series of images that, when viewed in rapid succession, create the illusion of movement
through a scene. Animations are the perfect way to walk a client through their home and give them a true feel for the design.
To create an animation, you need to draw a path through your 2D plan for the camera to follow. You can draw more than
one path if you want, and specify the order of paths for the camera to follow. You can edit a path if necessary and even add
sounds to it, such as a voiceover or doorbell ringing. You can then preview the animation and record it to a file.
When you record an animation, it is output to an AVI file. You can control the animation’s speed, video compression,
resolution and frame rate. You can also opt to ray trace the animation for optimal effect.

Drawing an Animation Path

Ultimate | Professional
The first step in creating an animation is defining a path for the camera to follow. You can specify where you want the
camera to look (along the path or at a specific target), as well as the view angle.

- 270 -
 Drawing an Animation Path

You draw the path by selecting a camera start point and subsequent control points. The path automatically curves between
points to create a smooth motion for the camera. Once you have drawn the path, you can add, remove and elevate control
points if you want.
You can draw more than one path if you want. By default, all paths will be included in the animation, and will be followed
in the order in which they were drawn. You can, however, choose which paths you want to include in the animation, as well
as the order of paths for the camera to follow.
To draw an animation path:
1. Make sure that the location on which you want to capture the animation is the current building location. Also, it is rec-
ommended that you draw the path while in 2D plan view.

2. Select Tools > Animation > Insert Path, or click on the Animation toolbar.

3. In the Path Properties dialog, specify a name for the path for identification purposes.
4. In the Behavior area, specify what you want the camera to focus on during the animation. If you select Follow Path, the
camera will focus on a different target along the path in each frame. If you select Specify Target, the camera will always
point towards a target point that you specify.
5. In the View Angle area, specify how wide you want the view angle to be by either sliding the ruler or entering a value
in the edit box. Higher values produce a wide-angle view; lower values produce a close-up view.
6. Click OK.
7. Select a start point for the camera. For example, if you want to start your animation by walking through the front door,
select a point outside the front door.
8. If you selected the Specify Target option, select the point you want to the camera to remain focused on during the an-
imation.
9. Select the next point of the path. Each point you select is called a control point. The camera will move to each control
point and capture an image of the view at that point. Basically, control points are the key to drawing and shaping your
path.

- 271 -
Chapter 21: Rendering & Animation

10. Continue selecting control points until your path is finished.

11. Right-click and select Finish. You can now preview the animation.

Drawing Separate Camera and Target Paths

Ultimate | Professional
If you want you can draw two paths for an animation: one for the camera to move along (camera path), and a separate one
for the camera to focus on (target path). This would be like watching an airplane from a moving car.
If you want your camera to focus on a target path, you need to draw the camera path using the Specify Target option. Once
you have drawn both paths, you need to snap the camera path’s target point to the target path.
Step One: Draw the Target Path

1. Select Tools > Animation > Insert Path, or click on the Animation toolbar.
2. In the Path Properties dialog, give the target path a name.
3. Click OK.
4. Pick points to define the target path, then right-click and select Finish.

5. Select Tools > Animation > Animation Properties, or click on the Animation toolbar.
6. If you do not want to include the target path in your animation, uncheck the Include check box beside the target path’s
name in the Animation Properties dialog.
7. Click OK.
Step Two: Draw the Camera Path

1. Select Tools > Animation > Insert Path, or click on the Animation toolbar.
2. In the Path Properties dialog, give the camera path a name.
3. Enable the Specify Target option.
4. Click OK.
5. Select the start point of the camera path.
6. Select a random target point. You will snap the target to the target path later.
7. Select the remaining points of the camera path, then right-click and select Finish.
Step Three: Connect the Paths
1. Click on the camera path to select it.
2. Click and drag the target point (the point at the end of the arrow) to the target path, then release your mouse button.
The target point automatically snaps to the camera of the target path. You are now ready to preview the animation.

- 272 -
 Previewing an Animation

When you preview the animation, you’ll notice that the camera moves along the camera path and focuses on points along
the target path as the animation plays.

Previewing an Animation
Ultimate | Professional
Once you have drawn one or more paths for your animation, you can preview the resulting animation. You can play the
animation automatically, or step through it frame by frame.
To preview an animation:
1. Make sure you have drawn a suitable path for your camera.

2. Select Tools > Animation > Create Animation, or click on the Animation toolbar.

3. In the Create Animation dialog, click to automatically play the animation. To pause the animation, click .

4. To play the animation manually by stepping through each frame, click . To step back to the previous frame, click

. Alternatively you can click and drag the slider to play it manually or skip to specific frames of the animation.

5. To return to the start of the animation so you can play it again, click .

Note: By default, the animation plays once during the preview. You can set it to repeat if you want.

Note: To be able to view the animation outside of Virtual Architect home design software, you need to save the animation
to a file.

Note: If you enabled the Ray Trace Animation option in your Animation Properties, the ray tracing will not appear in the
preview. It will only appear when you save the animation to a file.

- 273 -
Chapter 21: Rendering & Animation

Repeating an Animation During the Preview

Ultimate | Professional
By default, an animation is played once when you preview it. You can set the animation to repeat during the preview,
meaning it will play continuously until you close the preview window.
To repeat an animation during the preview:

1. Select Tools > Animation > Animation Properties, or click on the Animation toolbar. You can also access prop-
erties from the Create Animation dialog.
2. In the Animation Properties dialog, enable the Repeat Animation during preview check box.
3. Click OK.

Changing the Path Order in an Animation

Ultimate | Professional
If you have drawn more than one path for your animation, the paths will be followed in the order in which they were drawn.
You can change the path order if you want.
To change the path order in an animation:

1. Select Tools > Animation > Animation Properties, or click on the Animation toolbar. You can also access prop-
erties from the Create Animation dialog.
2. In the Animation Properties dialog, use the Move Up or Move Down buttons to move selected paths up or down in
the list.
3. Click OK.

Choosing the Paths to Include in an Animation

Ultimate | Professional
By default, all animation paths that are present in your drawing will be included in the resulting animation. You can choose
to prevent selected paths from being included if you want.
To choose which paths you want to include in the animation:

1. Select Tools > Animation > Animation Properties, or click on the Animation toolbar. You can also access prop-
erties from the Create Animation dialog.
2. In the Animation Properties dialog, uncheck the boxes in the Include column for any paths you do not want to in-
clude.
3. Click OK.

Moving an Animation Path’s Control Points

Ultimate | Professional
You can adjust an animation path by moving its control points. When you move a control point, the path automatically
adjusts to maintain a smooth, curved path. If the path was created using the ’Specify Target’ option, you can move the target
point also.
To move control points on a path:
1. Click on the camera or any point on the path to select the path. Blue grips appear at each control point.

2. Hover your pointer over the control point you want to move. This displays the Move cursor.
3. Click and drag the point to the desired location, then release your mouse button.

Adding Control Points to an Animation Path

Ultimate | Professional
Once you have drawn a path for your animation, you can easily add control points to the path if you want. Adding control
points can help you expand your path where needed, or provide a point to attach a sound to.

- 274 -
 Removing a Control Point from an Animation Path

To add a control point to your path:

1. Select Tools > Animation > Add Control Point, or click on the Animation toolbar.
2. Click where you want to add the control point. A control point is automatically added to the path.

Removing a Control Point from an Animation Path

Ultimate | Professional
You can easily remove a control point from an animation path using the Remove Control Point tool.
To remove a control point from a path:

1. Select Tools > Animation > Remove Control Point, or click on the Animation toolbar.
2. Click on the control point you want to remove.

Note: Removing a control point can change the shape of the path slightly depending on the location of adjacent control
points to ensure a smooth, curved path.

Editing the Elevation of a Control Point

Ultimate | Professional
By default, control points are 5’-6” above the floor level of the current building location. You can edit the elevation of a
control point on an animation path using the Elevate Control Point tool. This adjusts the path so it goes up or down
depending on the elevation you specify. For example, if your path is on the ground floor and you have a control point at
either end of a staircase, elevating the top control point will make it seem as if you’re walking up the stairs.
To edit the elevation of a control point:

1. Select Tools > Animation > Elevate Control Point, or click on the Animation toolbar.
2. Click on the control point you want to edit.
3. In the Elevate dialog, the value currently shown is the current elevation of the control point. Edit the elevation as de-
sired.
4. Click OK.

Editing the Elevation of the Target in an Animation

Ultimate | Professional
If you used the Specify Target option when defining an animation path, you can raise or lower your target point. This
essentially changes the tilt of your camera up or down. You can change the elevation of the target point using the
Commander.
To edit the elevation of the target in an animation:
1. Click on the animation path in 2D Plan view to select it. Grips appear at the path’s control points and target point.
2. Hover your cursor over the target point, then click and hold down your left mouse button. The Commander becomes
active.
3. While holding down your left mouse button, press the TAB key twice to enter the third edit box in the Commander.
This is the Z value (elevation).
4. Type the desired elevation for the target point, then press ENTER.

Adding Sounds to an Animation

Ultimate | Professional
You can add a variety of sounds to your animation, such as a doorbell ringing or the creak of a door opening. Sound is added
to an animation by inserting a sound node at a selected path control point, and choosing the sound file you want to play at
that point. The sound will be played when the camera reaches that point during the playback of the animation.

- 275 -
Chapter 21: Rendering & Animation

To add a sound to an animation:

1. With your 2D plan displayed, select Tools > Animation > Add Sound Node, or click on the Animation toolbar.
2. Click on the control point on your animation path where you want to insert the sound.
3. In the Open dialog, select the sound file you want to insert. Sound files have a *.wav extension. A number of sounds
can be found in the program’s Sounds directory. To hear the selected sound, click the Play Sound button.
4. Click Open. A small node is inserted next to the control point.

Note: Sound nodes can only be placed at control points. You can add control points to your path if necessary.

Removing Sounds from an Animation

Ultimate | Professional
You can easily remove sounds that you have inserted in your animation using the Remove Sound Node tool.
To remove a sound from an animation:

1. With your 2D plan displayed, select Tools > Animation > Remove Sound Node, or click on the Animation tool-
bar.
2. Click on the control point that the sound has been added to. The sound node is removed.

Saving an Animation to a File

Ultimate | Professional
Once you have previewed your animation and are satisfied with it, you can record it to an *.avi file which can be played
using any digital media application that supports the *.avi file format, such as Windows Media Player. When you save an
animation, the 3D view is rendered to achieve high quality results. Rendering is a process that involves the calculation of light
in a scene, resulting in natural-looking shadows and reflections. For even more photorealism you can enable ray tracing in
your Program Settings.
To save an animation to a file:

1. Select Tools > Animation > Create Animation, or click on the Animation toolbar.
2. In the Create Animation dialog, click Save.
3. In the Save As dialog, specify a file name and save location for the animation file, then click Save. The animation be-
gins recording.
The process begins by reading in the model’s geometry, and then proceeds with the global illumination calculation.
Global illumination is an algorithm that simulates the many reflections of light around a scene, resulting in soft, natural
shadows and reflections. If you have specified that you want to ray trace animations in your Program Settings, ray
tracing begins immediately after the global illumination calculations have been made. Raytracing is a direct
illumination algorithm that traces the path taken by a ray of light from the camera through the scene, then calculates
the reflection, refraction, or absorption of the ray when it intersects objects in the scene.
The Create Animation dialog displays the progress of the recording in real time, and lets you know how much time is
remaining in each pass.

- 276 -
 Editing the Default Name or Save Location of Animation Files

4. The process pauses after the first frame of the animation has been rendered, enabling you to adjust the Brightness and
Burn values (described below). When you are ready to resume recording, click Continue.
Brightness refers to the overall brightness of the scene. Lower values darken the scene, while higher values make it
brighter.
Burn is a parameter that controls the intensity of highlighted areas. Lower burn values will decrease the intensity of
the highlights to avoid “burned out” areas in the animation. This can be a decimal value between 0 and 1.
5. If you click Cancel while an animation is being rendered, the rendering will stop, and the view in the preview window
will be reset.
6. When the recording is complete, click Close.

Note: By default, the animation is saved at a size of 640 x 480 pixels. To save it at a different size, see Specifying an Output
Size for Animation Files on page 279.

Note: You can choose to save the individual frames of your animation as well. See Saving Individual Animation Frames on
page 278.

Editing the Default Name or Save Location of Animation Files

Ultimate | Professional
You can specify the default name and save location of animation files by editing your Program Settings. The name and path
you choose will automatically appear in the Save As dialog when you save animations. Note that you can still override the
default name and location when saving an animation.
To edit the default name or save location of animation output files:
1. Select Settings > Document Settings, and then select Animations in the left pane of the Document Settings dialog.

Alternatively you can select Tools > Animation > Animation Properties, or click on the Animation toolbar, and

- 277 -
Chapter 21: Rendering & Animation

then click the Animation Settings button in the Animation Properties dialog. You can also access the Animation
Properties dialog directly from the Create Animation dialog when previewing an animation.
2. In the Document Settings dialog, click the browse button next to the Filename edit box.
3. In the Save As dialog, navigate to the location where you want to save animations, then enter a default name for *.avi
files in the File name edit box.
4. Click Save.

Saving Individual Animation Frames

Ultimate | Professional
You can specify that you want to save the individual frames of your animations to individual files by editing your Program
Settings. Frame images are saved in JPG format in the same folder where your AVI file is saved.
To save individual animation frames:
1. Select Settings > Document Settings, and then select Animations in the left pane of the Document Settings dialog.

Alternatively you can select Tools > Animation > Animation Properties, or click on the Animation toolbar, and
then click the Animation Settings button in the Animation Properties dialog. You can also access the Animation
Properties dialog directly from the Create Animation dialog when previewing an animation.
2. In the Document Settings dialog, enable the Save individual frames to disc check box.
3. Click OK.

Changing the Speed of an Animation

Ultimate | Professional
By default, the speed of an animation is 80 inches per second if working in feet and inches, or 2.032 meters per second if
working in metric units. You can speed up or slow down an animation by editing either the duration or velocity setting in
a path’s properties. Note that a different speed can be set for each path in your drawing.
To change the speed of an animation:
1. Click on the path whose speed setting you want to change. The path is highlighted with blue grips.
2. Right-click and select Properties.
3. In the Path Properties dialog, edit either the Duration or Velocity value. The duration is based on the specified veloc-
ity and length of the path. Increasing the duration value will slow the animation down, and decreasing the duration
value will speed it up. The velocity determines what distance in covered in one second. Increasing the velocity value
will increase animation speed.

4. Click OK.

Note: The Speed setting affects only the output file. It does not apply to the preview.

Compressing Animation Files

Ultimate | Professional
By default, animations are uncompressed when you save them. This can result in very large files. Compressing an animation
converts the data into a format that requires fewer bits, usually so that it can be stored or transmitted more efficiently. If you
would like your animation files to be compressed when you save them, you can specify this in your Program Settings. There
is an extensive list of video compression coders that you can choose from.
To compress animation output files:
1. Select Settings > Document Settings, and then select Animations in the left pane of the Document Settings dialog.

Alternatively you can select Tools > Animation > Animation Properties, or click on the Animation toolbar, and

- 278 -
 Specifying an Output Size for Animation Files

then click the Animation Settings button in the Animation Properties dialog. You can also access the Animation
Properties dialog directly from the Create Animation dialog when previewing an animation.
2. In the Document Settings dialog, select the desired coder from the Video Compression drop box.
3. Click OK.

Specifying an Output Size for Animation Files

Ultimate | Professional
By default, animations are recorded at a size of 640 x 480 pixels. You can specify a different output size for animations in
your Program Settings.
To specify an output size for animation files:
1. Select Settings > Document Settings, and then select Animations in the left pane of the Document Settings dialog.

Alternatively you can select Tools > Animation > Animation Properties, or click on the Animation toolbar, and
then click the Animation Settings button in the Animation Properties dialog. You can also access the Animation
Properties dialog directly from the Create Animation dialog when previewing an animation.
2. In the Document Settings dialog, select the desired size from the Size drop box. Pre-defined sizes include 640 x 480,
800 x 600, and 1024 x 768. Selecting the Custom option lets you define a custom size by entering values in the Width
and Height edit boxes.
3. Click OK.

Specifying a Frame Rate for Animations

Ultimate | Professional
The frame rate is the number of images displayed per second. More simply, it is the video playback rate of the AVI
animation. The playback rate directly relates to the perceived smoothness of its playback. The higher the number of frames
playing per second, the smoother the video playback appears. Lower rates can result in a choppier playback. You can specify
the desired frame rate for animations in your Program Settings.
To specify a frame rate for animations:
1. Select Settings > Document Settings, and then select Animations in the left pane of the Document Settings dialog.

Alternatively you can select Tools > Animation > Animation Properties, or click on the Animation toolbar, and
then click the Animation Settings button in the Animation Properties dialog. You can also access the Animation
Properties dialog directly from the Create Animation dialog when previewing an animation.
2. In the Document Settings dialog, enter a value between 1 and 32 in the Frame Rate edit box. You can enter a value
manually or use the arrow buttons to scroll through a list of values.
3. Click OK.

Ray Tracing an Animation

Ultimate | Professional
Ray tracing involves the calculation and display of light, shadows and reflection for a photorealistic effect. Light comes from
lighting fixtures as well as through windows, and is bounced off of surfaces that have reflective properties.
By default, animations are not ray traced. If you want to create a ray traced animation, you need to enable ray tracing in your
Program Settings before saving the animation. Note that ray tracing can increase the recording time significantly.
Ray tracing begins automatically after the global illumination calculations.
To create ray traced animations:
1. Select Settings > Document Settings, and then select Animations in the left pane of the Document Settings dialog.

Alternatively you can select Tools > Animation > Animation Properties, or click on the Animation toolbar, and
then click the Animation Settings button in the Animation Properties dialog. You can also access the Animation
Properties dialog directly from the Create Animation dialog when previewing an animation.
2. In the Document Settings dialog, enable the Ray Trace Animation check box.
3. Click OK.

- 279 -
Chapter 21: Rendering & Animation

Note: Ray tracing occurs only when you record the animation. It is not applied when previewing the animation. The
recording pauses before ray tracing is completed so that you can review the image and make brightness adjustments if
needed.

Pausing to Review the Image When Ray Tracing an Animation

If you have enabled ray tracing in your animation settings, you can choose to have the rendering process pause after the first
frame has been rendered so that you can review the image and make brightness adjustments if needed. You can set this
option in your Program Settings.
To specify that you want a pause to occur:
1. Select Settings > Program Settings, and then select Animations in the left pane of the Program Settings dialog. Al-

ternatively you can select Tools > Animation > Animation Properties, or click on the Animation toolbar, and then
click the Animation Settings button in the Animation Properties dialog. You can also access the Animation Proper-
ties dialog directly from the Create Animation dialog when previewing an animation.
2. In the Program Settings dialog, enable the Pause to review image check box. If this check box remains disabled, the
Brightness and Burn fields will be inaccessible in the Create Animation dialog.
3. Click OK.

Turning Animation Paths On and Off

Ultimate | Professional
You can instantly hide or show all animation paths using the Animation Paths On/Off tool.
To turn animation paths on or off:

1. Select View > Viewing Aids > Animation Paths On/Off, or click the down arrow next to the Viewing Aids button
on the View Control toolbar and select Animation Paths On/Off.

Deleting an Animation Path

You can remove an animation path from your drawing in a couple of easy steps.
To delete an animation path:
1. Click on the path to select it.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Sounds
Attaching sounds to your drawing is a fun way of adding realism and excitement to your project. For example, you can
attach the sound of a doorbell ringing to your front door.
You can use the Attach Sound File tool to attach sounds to elements in your drawing, or elements in your catalog. If you
attach a sound to an element in the catalog, the sound will automatically be attached to the element when you insert it in
your drawing.
Once you have attached a sound to an element, you can play the sound with the Play Sound tool.

Note: The method of adding sounds to animations is different than the method of adding sounds to elements. In animations
you need to add a sound node to your animation path.

Attaching Sounds to Elements in Your Drawing

Ultimate | Professional
Attaching sounds to elements is a great way to add realism and excitement to your design. You can use the Attach Sound
File tool to attach
sounds to selected elements in your drawing. For example, you can add the sound of a doorbell or even a voice-over to your
front door.

- 280 -
 Attaching Sounds to Elements in the Catalog

To attach a sound to an element in your drawing:

1. Select Tools > Sounds > Attach Sound File. The Sounds cursor is displayed .
2. Click on the element you want to add the sound to. You can select multiple elements if you want using Shift+click.
3. In the Open dialog, select the *.wav file you want to attach, then click Open. Note that there are a number of pre-de-
fined sounds in the program’s Sounds directory. You can also use your own *.wav files if you want. A dialog appears
telling you that the sound was attached successfully.
4. Click OK.

Note: Only one sound can be attached to an element. If you attempt to attach a sound to an element that already has a sound
attached to it, the new sound will replace the old sound.

Attaching Sounds to Elements in the Catalog

You can use the Attach Sound File tool to attach sounds to elements in your catalog. For example, you can add the sound of
a door creak to an interior door. Each time you insert the element in your drawing, it will have the sound attached to it.
To attach a sound to an element in the catalog:
1. Select File > Catalogs > Element Manager, or right-click any element in the catalog panel and Element Manager .
2. In the Element Manager, select the element that you want to add a sound to.

3. Click below the properties pane, then select Attach Sound File.
4. In the Open dialog, select the *.wav file you want to attach, then click Open. Note that there are a number of pre-de-
fined sounds in the program’s Sounds directory. You can also use your own *.wav files if you want. A dialog appears
telling you that the sound was attached successfully.
5. Click OK. The name of the sound file is displayed next to the Sounds button.

6. To test the sound, click again and select Play Sound.

7. Click OK.

Note: Attaching a sound to an element in the catalog affects only future insertions of that element. Elements that already
exist in your drawing are not affected.

Playing Sounds
Ultimate | Professional
If you have attached a sound to an element, you can play the sound by selecting the Play Sound tool, then clicking on the
element with the attached sound.
To play a sound:

1. Select Tools > Sounds > Play Sound. The Sounds cursor is displayed.
2. Select the element with the sound attached to it. The sound plays.

Note: A notification dialog appears if the element does not have a sound attached to it.

Removing Sounds from Elements in Your Drawing

Ultimate | Professional
If you have attached a sound to an element in your drawing, you can remove it using the Remove Sound tool.
To remove a sound from an element in your drawing:

1. Select Tools > Sounds > Remove Sound. The Sounds cursor is displayed.
2. Click on the element. A dialog tells you that the sound has been successfully removed.
3. Click OK.

- 281 -
Chapter 21: Rendering & Animation

Removing Sounds from Elements in the Catalog

If you have attached a sound to an element in the catalog, you can remove it by editing the element’s properties. Note that
this does not remove the sound from elements already inserted in your drawing.
To remove a sound from an element in the catalog:
1. Select File > Catalogs > Element Manager, or right-click any element in the catalog panel and select Element Man-
ager.
2. In the Element Manager, select the element you want to remove the sound from.

3. Click below the properties pane, then select Remove Sound. A dialog tells you that the sound has been success-
fully removed.
4. Click OK.

Selecting a Default Sounds Directory

By default, the program’s Sounds folder is displayed in the Open dialog when attaching sounds to elements or animations.
You can select a different default directory to display if you want.
To select a default Sounds directory:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. On the General pane, click on the Sounds Directory in the File Paths area.
3. Click Modify.
4. In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the directory you want to use as your default temporary files directory, then
click OK.
5. Click OK in the Program Settings dialog.

- 282 -
Chapter 22: Drawing Aids

While designing you have a variety of powerful drawing aids at your fingertips that can help you insert elements easily and
precisely where you want them in your drawing. If you want you can display a drawing grid in your drawing area, as well
as set up a snap grid so that your cursor snaps to the grid when you are inserting elements. The Object Snap feature
automatically snaps your pointer to existing objects, and the Angle Snap snaps your pointer to specified angles. Snap
tracking helps you draw objects at specific angles or positions relative to other objects. The Collision Control feature
prevents you from inserting elements where they do not fit. You can set up drawing aids in your program settings, and
toggle them on and off using the buttons on the Status bar.
For very precise control when inserting or editing elements, you can use a tool called the Commander, which lets you view
or enter exact values for distance, direction and angles. It is especially handy for users with some CAD experience.

Drawing Aids
There are a variety of drawing aids at your disposal during the design process. Each tool can be toggled on or off in the
drawing aids portion of the Status Bar.

Snap Tracking. Helps you draw objects at specific angles or positions relative to other objects. When snap tracking is turned
on, temporary alignment paths appear that are based on object snap points, such as endpoints and midpoints.
Drawing Grid. A visual aid comprising a set of horizontal and vertical lines in the drawing area. You can control the spacing
between grid lines.
Grid Snap. Snaps your pointer to an invisible grid when inserting elements. You can match the grid snap to your drawing
grid if desired, or specify the desired spacing between grid snap lines.
Object Snap. Snaps elements that you are currently inserting to existing elements in your drawing.
Angle Snap. Snaps your pointer to specific angles when rotating an element. For example, if your snap angle is set to 15°,
your pointer will snap at 15°, 30°, 45°, and so on.
Ortho. Restricts your cursor movement to 90-degree angles when you are inserting elements.
Collision Control. Prevents objects from being inserted where they do not fit.

Setting Up a Drawing Grid

A drawing grid is simply a set of horizontal and vertical lines that can help you orient objects to one another. By default, the
spacing between grid lines is 4’, but you can change this if you want. You can also control the color and style of the grid.
Note that the drawing grid is a visual aid only, and will not be included in printouts.
To set up a drawing grid:

1. Select Settings > Document Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Document Settings dialog, select Drawing Aids in the left column.
3. In the Grid area, check the Enable (F7) check box.
4. Click the Color swatch, then select a color for the grid from the Color dialog.
5. From the Style drop box, select a style for the grid — Dots or Lines.
6. Specify the desired distance between vertical grid lines in the X Spacing edit box.
7. Specify the desired distance between horizontal grid lines in the Y Spacing edit box.
8. By default, the grid is 160’ x 160’, which is the default size of the terrain. To change the overall size of the grid, enter the
desired width in the X Limit edit box, and the desired height in the Y Limit edit box.
9. Click OK.

- 283 -
Chapter 22: Drawing Aids

Turning the Drawing Grid On and Off

You can toggle the drawing grid on and off in one of two ways:
• Press F7 on your keyboard
• Click the GRID button on the Status bar

Using the Grid Snap

The Grid Snap feature snaps your pointer to an invisible grid when inserting elements. By default, the spacing between the
grid lines in the invisible grid is 4’, but you can change this if you want. If you enable the Match Grid option, the invisible
snap grid becomes the same size as the drawing grid. This will make it seem like you are snapping to the drawing grid while
drawing.
To set up a snap grid:

1. Select Settings > Document Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Document Settings dialog, select Drawing Aids in the left column.
3. To turn the grid snap on, enable the Grid Snap (F4) check box.
4. If you want the snap grid to be the same size as the drawing grid, check the Match Grid check box in the Grid Snap area.
5. To specify a custom distance between vertical grid lines, enter a value in the X Spacing edit box.
6. To specify a custom distance between horizontal grid lines, enter a value in the Y Spacing edit box.
7. Click OK.

Tip: You can toggle the grid snap on and off by clicking the GRIDSNAP button on the drawing aids toolbar or pressing F4
on your keyboard.

Turning the Grid Snap On and Off

You can toggle the grid snap on and off in one of two ways:
• Press F4 on your keyboard
• Click the GRIDSNAP button on the Status bar

Using Object Snaps

When inserting an element, the Object Snap feature makes your cursor automatically snap to common points on existing
elements in your drawing. This allows you to select an insertion point or start point more easily and precisely. When the
Object Snap is turned on, the Endpoint, Midpoint, Nearest and Perpendicular snaps become active. Your cursor icon
changes when your cursor comes close to a snap point, providing a visual indicator that snapping is occurring.
Endpoint. Snaps to the endpoint of an object.
Midpoint. Snaps to the midpoint of an object.
Nearest. Snaps to a point directly on an object.
Perpendicular. Snaps to a point on an object that forms a perpendicular from the current point to the selected object.
You can set the pixel search distance for the object snap, which determines how close your pointer needs to be to an element
for it to snap to the element.
To turn the Object Snap on or off:
• Press F5 on your keyboard, or
• Click the OBJSNAP button on the Status bar, or
• Select Settings > Document Settings, then on the Drawing Aids pane, check or uncheck the Object Snap (F5) check
box in the Snap Behavior area
To set the pixel search distance:

1. Select Settings > Document Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Document Settings dialog, select Drawing Aids in the left column.

- 284 -
 Using Angle Snap

3. Below the Object Snap (F5) setting, type the desired number of pixels in the Pixel Search Distance edit box, or use the
arrows to scroll up or down through a list of values.
4. Click OK.

Using Angle Snap

When the Angle Snap feature is turned on, your cursor snaps to specific angles when rotating an element. If you set your
snap angle to 10º, for example, your cursor will snap at 10º intervals as you rotate the element.
By default, the Angle Snap is on and is set to 15º.
To turn the Angle Snap on or off:
• Press F6 on your keyboard, or
• Click the ANGLESNAP button on the Status bar, or
• Select Settings > Document Settings, then on the Drawing Aids pane, check or uncheck the Angle Snap (F6) check
box
To change the snap angle:

1. Select Settings > Document Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Document Settings dialog, select Drawing Aids in the left column.
3. In the Snap Behavior area, type the desired snap angle in the Snap Angle edit box, or use the arrows to scroll up or down
through a list of values.
4. Click OK.

Object Snap Tracking

The Snap Tracking feature helps you draw objects at specific angles or positions relative to other objects. When snap tracking
is turned on, temporary alignment paths appear that are based on object snap points, such as endpoints and midpoints. Such
points are marked with a small, solid square when you move your cursor over their drawing paths. You can acquire points
on up to five elements at one time. Alignment paths are horizontal and vertical, and can also be angled if your Angle Snap
is turned on. Snap tracking can be turned on and off as needed. In order for snap tracking to work, the Object Snap
(OBJSNAP) must be enabled.
Let’s say in the following example that we want the end of the wall being drawn to be in alignment with point A. When you
hover over point A and then stretch your wall towards the drawing path of point A, a horizontal dotted line appears
indicating the path of alignment with point A. This makes it easy to select an end point for the wall that is aligned with point
A.

To turn Snap Tracking on or off:

• Press F3 on your keyboard, or
• Click the SNAPTRACK button on the Status bar, or
• Select Settings > Document Settings > Drawing Aids, then check or uncheck the Snap Tracking check box

- 285 -
Chapter 22: Drawing Aids

Using Ortho
The Ortho feature restricts your cursor movement to 90-degree angles when you are inserting elements. This can be
especially helpful when drawing elements like walls.
By default, Ortho is enabled. You can toggle it on and off using one of three methods.
To turn Ortho on or off:
• Press F8 on your keyboard, or
• Click the ORTHO button on the Status bar, or
• Select Settings > Document Settings, then on the Drawing Aids pane, check or uncheck the Ortho (F8) check box
To temporarily disable Ortho while drawing, press and hold the Shift key. When you release the Shift key, Ortho mode will
resume.

Collision Control
The program’s intelligent Collision Control feature prevents objects from being inserted where they do not fit. By default,
Collision Control is on, but you can turn it off whenever you like using one of three methods.
To turn Collision Control on or off:
• Press F9 on your keyboard, or

• Click on the Status bar, or

• Select Settings > Document Settings, then on the Building Aids pane, check or uncheck the Enable Collision Control
(F9) check box

Note: Collision control affects building elements on the current building location only. It does not affect landscape elements.

Commander
The Commander lets you enter precise values when inserting or editing elements. Initially the Commander will look grayed
out because it is inactive. It will become active when you insert or edit elements.

Using the Commander you can:

• Specify the insertion height of an element before it is inserted
• Select a precise insertion point for an element
• Specify a precise length and direction for elements like walls and railings
• Specify a precise distance and direction when stretching or moving an element
• Specify a precise angle when rotating an element
• Specify a precise radius/included angle when curving an element
Even if you don’t want to enter precise values, you can still use the Commander to view measurements as you draw and
edit elements. The values in the Commander are linked to your cursor movement and update as you proceed through a
command.

Using the Commander

The Commander can be a very useful tool when inserting or editing elements. Using the Commander you can:
• Specify the insertion height of an element before it is inserted
• Select a precise insertion point for an element
• Specify a precise length and direction for elements like walls and railings
• Specify a precise distance and direction when stretching or moving an element
• Specify a precise angle when rotating an element
• Specify a precise radius/included angle when curving a wall, ceiling, deck or opening

- 286 -
 Turning the Commander On or Off

Even if you don’t want to enter precise values, you can still use the Commander to view measurements as you draw and
edit elements. The values in the Commander are linked to your cursor movement and update as you proceed through a
command.
The Commander becomes instantly active when inserting elements. It is most useful for things like walls and railings,
because it lets you enter a precise length for the element.
The Commander also becomes active when you are moving, stretching or rotating elements. If you have started moving,
stretching or rotating an element using your mouse, the Commander displays the move distance or rotation angle as you
move your mouse. If you want to be able the enter values in the Commander when moving, stretching or rotating an
element, you need to first select an appropriate editing tool from the right-click menu or Edit > Modify Elements menu such
as Move, Stretch, Lengthen, or Rotate.

Turning the Commander On or Off

The Commander is a multi-functional tool that lets you enter precise values when inserting or editing elements. Even if you
don’t need a high level of precision, you may want the Commander displayed so you can see lengths and angles as you draw
or edit elements.

The Commander is displayed in the lower part of the screen, just above the Status Bar. Initially the Commander will look
grayed out because it is inactive. It will become active when you insert or edit elements.
To turn the Commander on or off:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Program Settings dialog, click Workspace in the left column.
3. Check or uncheck the Commander check box.
4. Click OK.

Displaying the Coordinate Icon

The Coordinate Icon marks the current point from which an action will be performed. In other words, it identifies the current
reference point when using the Commander. By default, this icon is turned off. If you plan to use the Commander while
working, you should turn on the Coordinate Icon.

To display the Coordinate Icon:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Program Settings dialog, click Workspace in the left column.
3. In the Visual Aids area, check the Show Coordinate Icon check box.
4. Click OK.

Specifying the Insertion Height of an Element Before Inserting It

If you have the Commander turned on, it will display a Base Height edit box as soon as an insertion tool becomes active.

The value shown in the Base Height edit box is the height at which the element will insert in your drawing. You can change
the insertion height before selecting an insertion point for the element by typing a value in the Base Height edit box and
pressing ENTER. If the element is a building element, the height is measured from the floor level of the current building
location to the element’s insertion point. If the element is a landscape element, the distance is measured from the terrain to
the element’s insertion point. Most elements have their insertion point at the bottom of the element. Exceptions are windows
and wall openings, in which the insertion point is located at the top of the element. In the case of windows and wall
openings, the edit box reads “Head Height”.

- 287 -
Chapter 22: Drawing Aids

Selecting a Reference Point When Inserting and Editing Elements

To use the Commander, you must first specify a reference point, or base point, from which values can be measured. If you
are drawing a wall, for example, the first point you click on the screen is considered the reference point. The Commander
then becomes active, and you can enter a Distance and Direction (or X and Y values) for the wall.
If you want to use the Commander to edit an element (e.g. move or rotate it), you must select a point from which to measure
the move distance/direction, or rotation angle. Most often you would select one of the element’s grab handles, which are the
small blue squares that appear on the major points of an element when you select the element.

Entering Values in the Commander

The Commander is intelligent and changes depending on the tool you are using. For example, if you are drawing walls, the
Commander’s edit boxes become Distance and Direction. If you are curving walls, however, the edit boxes change to Radius
and Included Angle. You can move easily from one edit box to the next using your Tab key. Pressing Enter after typing a value
completes the current action.
When entering values in the Commander, especially when inserting or moving elements, it is important to be aware of the
current coordinate system in the Commander.
The Commander offers two coordinate systems. In the Polar system, you enter a distance and direction. In the Cartesian
system, you enter X, Y and Z coordinates.
Note that you can switch between the Polar and Cartesian coordinate system once you have selected a reference point to
draw from or move from. You do this by making a selection from the coordinate system drop box on the left side of the
Commander.

Note: If moving, stretching or rotating elements, and you want to enter values in the Commander, you need to first select
an appropriate editing tool from the right-click menu or Edit > Modify Elements menu such as Move, Stretch, Lengthen or
Rotate.

Specifying Distance and Direction in the Commander

The Polar coordinate system becomes active in the Commander once you have selected a reference point to draw from, or
start a move from. In the Polar coordinate system, you specify a distance and direction (angle) when drawing or moving an
element.

Distance. Enter a positive value to specify the length of the element, or the move distance.
Direction. Enter the direction you want the element to run, or the direction in which you want to move an element. For
information about how direction is specified, see Direction and Angle of Rotation.

Defining X, Y and Z Coordinates

While using the Commander to insert or edit elements, you may choose to work in the Cartesian coordinate system instead
of the Polar coordinate system. This lets you specify a precise reference point to draw or move from by entering X and Y
coordinate values.
To switch to the Cartesian coordinate system, select Cartesian from the Commander’s left drop box.

X. Enter an X coordinate to specify a horizontal (left/right) distance in 2D plan view.

Y. Enter a Y coordinate to specify a vertical (up/down) distance in 2D plan view.
Z. This coordinate is only available when inserting members. Enter a Z coordinate to indicate elevation, or height. The Z
value is measured from the floor level of the current building location.
Remember that the coordinates are measured from the current reference point, which is marked by the Coordinate Icon if
it is enabled.
In the Cartesian system, you can enter both positive and negative values for any of the coordinates.

- 288 -
 Direction and Angle of Rotation

Direction and Angle of Rotation

Direction in a drawing is specified in degrees of an angle. The angle is calculated counterclockwise from the positive X axis.
The Four Primary Drawing Directions

Although the four primary drawing directions are the ones you will probably be working with the most, any angle is
possible. If you disable Ortho and Angle Snap, and move an element randomly in your drawing area, there is no restriction
on angles at all. Even if Ortho and Angle Snap are enabled, you can enter any angle you want in the Commander.

Rotating Elements Using the Commander

When you select the Rotate tool from the right-click menu or Edit > Modify Elements menu, then select a base point for the
rotation, the Commander displays an Enter Rotation Angle edit box.

To specify the desired angle of rotation for the element, type the angle in the Enter Rotation Angle edit box and press
ENTER. For information on how angles are measured, see Direction and Angle of Rotation.

Curving Elements Using the Commander

When curving an element such as a wall or floor opening, you can use the Commander to specify a precise curve angle.

Radius. The distance from the element (in its uncurved state) to the center point of the curve.
Included Angle. The angle formed between two radius lines extending from the center of the circle implied by the curve
out to the endpoints of the arc. The larger the angle, the rounder and larger the curve.

It is not necessary to enter both the Radius and Included Angle values. If you enter one, the program automatically supplies
the other. Also, if you enter a value and nothing happens after you press ENTER, then the value is not valid in relation to
the dimensions of your element.

Measure
Use the Measure tool to measure the distance between any two points in a 2D view. If you keep selecting points, a running
total is kept.
If you want to measure the area or perimeter of your model, or the area of individual rooms, use the tools on the Analyze
menu (Tools > Analyze).

Measuring Distance
Use the Measure tool to measure the distance between any two points in your 2D plan.
To use the Measure tool:

1. Select Tools > Measure, or click on the Tools toolbar.

2. Click your first point on the screen.
3. Move your cursor in the direction you want to measure. A ruler is displayed that stretches as you move your cursor.

- 289 -
Chapter 22: Drawing Aids

4. Click your second point on the screen. The distance is shown on the ruler as well as on the Status bar at the bottom of
the screen.
5. Once you have measured your first distance, you can keep selecting points to measure additional distances from the
last point selected. A running total is displayed on the Status bar.

6. When you have finished measuring, right-click and select Finish.

- 290 -
Chapter 23: Project Management

Virtual Architect home design software offers the standard Open tool for opening saved projects. Save features include Save,
Save As, and Save All.
Each view in your project has its own set of Print Properties. These include settings for the printer selection, paper size,
scaling, and print quality. These settings will automatically appear in the Print dialog when you print the view. You can
print across multiple sheets of paper if needed, and print to a file.
There are a number of different items that you can import into your drawing. Use the Project Trace Image tool to import a
BMP, JPG or TGA file, such as a scanned floor plan, and then trace over it using real 3D elements. The Photo Board Wizard
lets you import digital photographs or scanned images that are then oriented vertically in 3D view.
Perhaps one of the most versatile tools is the Object Import Wizard, which lets you quickly import custom 3D objects in DXF,
SKP or 3DS format.
You can export your drawing to different 2D and 3D file formats. To export to a BMP, JPG or TGA file, use the 2D Image
export tool. To export your 2D plan to a DXF file, use the 2D Drawing export tool. To export your 3D model to a DXF file,
use the 3D Model export tool.

Opening and Saving

Once you have started and saved a project, you can work on it whenever you like. You can open a saved project by selecting
Open on the File menu. If the project is one that you have worked on recently, it will be listed at the bottom of the File menu.
You can also open saved projects from the Startup screen. Once you have opened a project, you can edit, save, print and
export it, as well as save it as a template for future projects.
You can have more than one project open at a time. If you have more than one project open, you can switch between projects
using the Window menu.
As you edit your drawing, the changes you make are stored temporarily in your computer’s memory until you save them.
The Save function saves the current project under its current name. You can use Save As to save a project under a different
name, and Save All to save all currently open projects. You can also use the Save As tool to save a drawing as a template for
use in future projects. By default, one backup of your drawing is saved along with the drawing, but you can save multiple
backups if you want.

Opening a Saved Project

You can open any saved project using the Open tool.
To open a saved project:

1. Select File > Open, or click on the Standard toolbar.

2. In the Open dialog, navigate to the location where you saved the project.
3. Select the project to open, then click Open.

Tip: If the project you want to open is one that your recently worked on, it may be listed in the recently used file list near
the bottom of the File menu, or in the Projects section on the Startup screen. Just select it to open it. You can also open a
saved project from the Startup screen by selecting Open Existing.

Changing the Number of Files on the Recently Used File List

By default, a maximum of four projects are listed in the recently used file list near the bottom of the File menu. You can
increase or decrease this number if you want.
To change the number of files in the recently used file list:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

- 291 -
Chapter 23: Project Management

2. On the General pane, type the maximum number of files to display in the Recently used file list edit box, or use the
arrows to select a number. You can list a maximum of 9 files.

Saving Projects
The program has three save functions: Save, Save As and Save All. They are located on the File menu.
By default, projects are stored in the following location:
C:\Users\*username*\Documents\Virtual Architect\Projects
To save a project:
1. To save the current project for the first time, or save changes to a project that you have already saved, select File > Save,

or click on the Standard toolbar. To save the project under a different name (and create a copy of it), select File >
Save As.
2. If you are saving for the first time, or saving under a different name, the Save As dialog appears. Type a name for the
file in the File name edit box.
3. Click Save.

To save all currently open projects:

Select File > Save All, or click on the Standard toolbar.

Setting the Automatic Save

The Auto Save option saves your project for you at regular intervals. This is a great way to make sure you save your changes
regularly and avoid any loss should a power failure or system error occur.
To set the Automatic Save:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. On the General pane, enable the Auto Save check box.
3. From the Save time (min) drop box, select the desired save interval in minutes, or use the arrows to select a value.
4. Click OK.

Note: Disabling the Auto Save applies to the current project only. It is turned on by default for all new projects.

Note: If you have not saved your project yet, the Auto Save will save the project to a temporary [Link] file.

Setting the Number of Backups

By default, one backup drawing is created when you save your drawing. You can choose to save multiple backups if you
want.
Backup files are saved in the same folder as your project files. The format of the first backup file is ProjectName_1.bkp. If you
choose to save additional backups, the number increments by one for each backup file (e.g. ProjectName_2.bkp).
The first backup file is always a copy of the drawing as it is saved currently. If the number of backups is set to 2, the second
backup drawing is a copy of your drawing as it was at the previous save. If the number of backups is set to 3, the third
backup drawing is a copy of your drawing two saves back, and so on.
To set the number of backups:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Number of Backups edit box on the General pane, type the number of backup files you would like to save, or
use the arrow keys to increase or decrease the number.
3. Click OK.

- 292 -
 Specifying a Default Save Location for Projects

Specifying a Default Save Location for Projects

By default, new (unsaved) projects are saved in the following folder unless you specify otherwise:
C:\Users\*username*\Documents\Virtual Architect\Projects
You can specify a different default save directory if you want.
To specify the default save location:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. On the General pane, click on the Projects Directory in the File Paths area.
3. Click Modify.
4. In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the directory you want to use as your default save directory, then click OK.
5. Click OK in the Program Settings dialog.

Saving a Project as a Template

By default you are prompted to select a template when starting a new project. A template determines what settings new
projects will have. These include the following:
• Building Location Settings
• Program Settings (unit of measure, drawing aids, etc.)
• View Window Setup
• Wall Framing Configurations
• Dimension Settings
• Drafting Preferences
You can create a template out of any drawing by simply saving it in your Templates directory. If you want to use the same
template for every new project, you can specify this in your startup options.
To create a template:
1. Unless you have already created the drawing you want to use as a template, start a new project (File > New).
2. Specify the settings you want to save with the template, such as your building locations and program settings. Note
that any elements in your drawing will be saved as well, so unless you want these elements to appear in new projects,
you should delete the elements from your drawing.
3. By default, the last open view is used as the thumbnail for the template. Template thumbnails are displayed in the New
dialog that appears when you start new projects. If you want to create a thumbnail image of one of the project’s views,
make sure that view is current before saving the project. (Note that you can attach an image file such as a BMP or JPG
instead.)
4. Select File > Save As.
5. In the Save As dialog, navigate to the program’s Templates folder. By default, this is in the following location:
C:\ProgramData\Nova Development\Virtual Architect\Templates
5. In the File name edit box, type a name for the template.
6. To create a thumbnail and/or a description of the template which will be displayed in the New dialog box when you

start new projects, click .

- 293 -
Chapter 23: Project Management

To create a thumbnail based on the project’s last open view, enable the Use Last Open View radio button in the
Thumbnail Preview area. To create a thumbnail based on an image file, enable the Attach Image File radio button, then

click to browse for and select the desired image. You can attach a BMP, JPG, PNG or GIF image to the template.
To create a description of the template, type the desired information in the Notes pane, pressing CTRL + Enter for each
new line of text. Click OK.
7. When you are ready to save the project as a template, click Save.

Note: If you do not save a template in the Templates folder (or the folder that is selected as the default templates folder in
your program settings), it will not be immediately available in the New dialog when starting new projects. You will have to
browse for it every time.

Setting the Path to the Templates Directory

If you have moved your Templates directory, or have chosen to store your templates in a different directory, you should
reset the path to the template directory in your Program Settings. The path you set determines which templates are
displayed in the New dialog when you start new projects as well as the default folder displayed when browsing for
templates.
By default, your templates are stored in the following directory:
C:\ProgramData\Nova Development\Virtual Architect\Templates
To set the path to your templates directory:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. On the General pane, click on the Templates Directory in the File Paths area.
3. Click Modify.
4. In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the directory containing your templates, then click OK.
5. Click OK in the Program Settings dialog.

- 294 -
 Selecting a Directory for Temporary Files

Selecting a Directory for Temporary Files

Certain functions of the program create temporary files which are stored in a directory on your computer system. By default,
the path to the temporary directory is as follows:
C:\Users\*username*\AppData\Local\Temp
You can specify a different directory to store your temporary files in if you want.
To set a different temporary files directory:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. On the General pane, click on the Temporary Directory in the File Paths area.
3. Click Modify.
4. In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the directory you want to use as your default temporary files directory, then
click OK.
5. Click OK in the Program Settings dialog.

Closing Projects
Projects remain open until you close them or exit the program. You can close the active project without exiting the program.
If you have more than one drawing open, make sure the drawing you want to close is the active one.
To close a drawing:

1. Select File > Close, or click on the Standard toolbar.

2. In the dialog, click Yes or No when you are asked to save changes.
3. If you haven’t named the project yet and you clicked Yes in the previous step, specify a name for the project in the Save
As dialog, then click Save.

Printing
Each view window in your project has its own set of print properties such as printer/plotter selection, page size, scaling, and
print quality. These are the settings that are used when you use the Print tool to print the current view.
If your drawing exceeds the selected page size, it will print across multiple sheets of paper. You can also print to a file if
needed.

Defining a View’s Print Properties

Each view window in your project has its own set of print properties. These properties include the printer/plotter selection,
paper size, print area, page setup, print scaling, print quality, and line weight printing.

- 295 -
Chapter 23: Project Management

Having view-specific print properties lets you define and save unique print properties for each view, and therefore
eliminates the need to specify print settings every time you want to print a view.
You can access a view’s print properties using the View Properties tool.
To define a view’s print properties:
1. Right-click in the view window and select View Properties.
2. Select the Print Properties tab.
3. Define the view’s print properties. The properties are described below.
Printer/Plotter
Name. Click this drop box to select the printer or plotter to use when printing this view.

Click to define various properties for the currently selected printer such as paper and output settings,
and print quality.
Paper Size. Click this drop box to select the size of paper you want to print on.
Orientation. Choose either Portrait or Landscape. The Portrait option gives the paper a vertical orientation, while the
Landscape option gives it a horizontal orientation.
Print to file. If enabled, the view is printed to a print file, such as a Postscript file, rather than a printer.
Copies. The number of copies you want to print.
Print Area
All (Extents). Prints the entire view, even if part of it is currently not visible.

- 296 -
 Printing Drawings

Window. Prints a selected area of your drawing. To select the area, click the Window button. Note that this option is
not available for 3D perspective views.
Display. Prints exactly what you see on the screen in the current view. If only part of your drawing is currently visible,
only that part will appear in the printout.

Click to temporarily access your drawing area and draw a selection window around the area you want
to print. This button is only available if the Window print area option is selected.
Page Setup
Placement. The Lower Left option prints the image in the lower left corner of the paper. The Center on Paper option
centers the image on the paper.
Print Scaling
Fit to Page. Scales the drawing to fit the selected paper size. Note that this is the default setting for 3D views, since 3D
views are not affected by changes in scale.
Print to Scale. Prints the current view according to the Scale set below, regardless of the paper size. This option does
not work with 3D views, since 3D views cannot be scaled.
View Scale. The drawing scale of the current view as set on the View Properties page in the view’s properties. This is
the ratio of units on paper to real-world units. For example, if the view scale is 1/4" = 1’-0" (or 1:48), this means that every
1’-0" of your actual model is represented by 1/4" on paper. If you are using the Print to Scale option, this gives you a
sense of how you are scaling the drawing. For example, if your view scale is set to 1/4" = 1’-0" and you set the print scale
to 1/2" = 1’-0", you know that you are scaling the drawing up in the printout. The drawing would be larger when printed
at the 1/2"= 1’-0" scale than it would at the 1/4" = 1’-0" because every 1’-0" of the model is being represented by 1/2" on
paper instead of only 1/4" on paper.
Print Scale. Click the drop box to select a print scale for the view (if using the Print to Scale option). When you change
the print scale, things like text and dimensions will be scaled in such a way that they are proportional to the rest of the
drawing.
Note that if you change the print scale, your 2D plan does not scale on the screen. It will only be scaled on paper when
you print the drawing. Changing the print scale has no effect in 3D views, neither on the screen nor in printouts, unless
it is an elevation view. This is because a model being viewed in 3D does not have concrete measurements like a flat, 2D
view has.
Line Work
Print Line Weights. Prints the lines in your drawing using the weight (thickness) assigned to them in element
properties. Otherwise, all lines print with the same thickness.
Preview
Show View Contents. Disabling this check box turns off the view inside the preview window. You may want to take
advantage of this feature if you are having issues with your graphics display (if graphics are slow to load or refresh, for
example). Your choice will also be applied in the Print dialog.

Printing Drawings
The program uses the standard Windows Print routine with a few added features, such as a print preview, print area
selection, scaling options, and paper placement. When you open the Print dialog, the print settings in the dialog reflect the
print settings defined for the current view window.
To print a drawing:

1. Select File > Print, or click on the Standard toolbar.

2. In the Print dialog, specify your print settings.
Printer/Plotter
Name. Click this drop box to select a printer or plotter to use when printing this view.

Click to define various properties for the currently selected printer such as paper and output settings,
and print quality.

- 297 -
Chapter 23: Project Management

Paper Size. Click this drop box to select the size of paper you want to print on. Note that if you are printing to scale,
and the scale of the drawing is too large for the selected paper size, the drawing will be automatically tiled across
multiple sheets of paper.
Orientation. Choose either Portrait or Landscape. The Portrait option gives the paper a vertical orientation, while the
Landscape option gives it a horizontal orientation.
Print to file. If enabled, the project is printed to a print file rather than a printer.
Copies. Select the number of copies to print.
Print Area
Print Area -All (Extents). Prints the extents of your drawing, which is the portion of your drawing that currently
contains elements. As you add new elements, the extents update automatically.
Print Area - Display. Prints exactly what you see on the screen in the current view. If only part of your drawing is
currently visible, only that part will appear in the printout.
Print Area - Window. Prints a specific area of your drawing that you define by drawing a bounding window around
it. Click the Window button, then click two points in your drawing to define the selection window. You can snap the
window to elements in your drawing if desired. The preview in the Print dialog will update automatically. Note that
the Window option is not available for 3D perspective views.
Page Setup
Placement. If you select Lower left, the image is printed in the lower left corner of the paper. If you select Center on
paper, the image is centered on the paper.
Print Scaling
Fit to Page. Scales the drawing to fit the selected paper size. Note that this is the default setting for 3D views, since 3D
views are not affected by changes in scale (unless they are elevation views).
Print to Scale. Prints the current view according to the Scale set below, regardless of the paper size. This option does
not work with 3D views, since 3D views cannot be scaled.
View Scale. The drawing scale of the current view as set on the View Properties page in the view’s properties. This is
the ratio of units on paper to real-world units. For example, if the view scale is 1/4" = 1’-0" (or 1:48), this means that every
1’-0" of your actual model is represented by 1/4" on paper. If you are using the Print to Scale option, this gives you a
sense of how you are scaling the drawing. For example, if your view scale is set to 1/4" = 1’-0" and you set the print scale
to 1/2" = 1’-0", you know that you are scaling the drawing up in the printout. The drawing would be larger when printed
at the 1/2"= 1’-0" scale than it would at the 1/4" = 1’-0" because every 1’-0" of the model is being represented by 1/2" on
paper instead of only 1/4" on paper.
Print Scale. Click the drop box to select a print scale for the view (if using the Print to Scale option). When you change
the print scale, things like text and dimensions will be scaled in such a way that they are proportional to the rest of the
drawing.
Note that if you change the print scale, your 2D plan does not scale on the screen. It will only be scaled on paper when
you print the drawing. Changing the print scale has no effect in 3D views, neither on the screen nor in printouts. This
is because a model being viewed in 3D does not have concrete measurements like a flat, 2D view has.
When you change the print scale, things like text and dimensions will be scaled in such a way that they are proportional
to the rest of the drawing.
Line Work
Print Line Weights. Prints the lines in your drawing using the weight (thickness) assigned to them in element
properties. Otherwise, all lines print with the same thickness.
Preview
The preview window on the right displays a preview of how the drawing will fit on the paper. If the drawing is too
large for the selected paper size, it will be automatically tiled across multiple sheets of paper. Separation marks will
then appear in the preview indicating where the drawing will be divided.
Show View Contents. Disabling this check box turns off the view inside the preview window. You may want to take
advantage of this feature if you are having issues with your graphics display (if graphics are slow to load or refresh, for
example). Your choice will also be applied in the View Properties dialog.
3. Click OK.

- 298 -
 Printing Across Multiple Sheets of Paper

Note: If you click Apply in the Print dialog, the dialog’s print settings will be applied to the view’s Print Properties.

Printing Across Multiple Sheets of Paper

You may want to print out your drawing at a large scale, but do not have a piece of paper big enough to fit it. In this case
you can print the drawing in sections onto smaller sheets of paper, then attach the sheets together after printing. You can
specify paper and print scale settings in the Print dialog, or in a view’s print properties.
To set print settings in the Print dialog:

1. Select File > Print, or click on the Standard toolbar.

2. In the Print dialog, click Properties to select the paper size to use.
3. From the Print Scaling drop box, select Print to Scale.
The print preview displays separation marks representing the individual sheets of paper. You can adjust the print scale
if you want.
4. Click OK. The drawing is printed onto multiple sheets of paper.
To set print settings for a specific view:
1. If the view is current, right-click in the drawing area and select View Properties.
2. Select the Print Properties tab.
3. From the Paper Size drop box, select the paper size that you want to use.
4. In the Print Scaling area, select Print to Scale from the drop box. You can adjust the print scale if you want.
5. Click OK. You can proceed with printing the view.

Editing the Print Scale of a View

The view scale of every view is 1/4" = 1’-0" (or 1:48) unless you select a different scale in the view’s properties. This means
that every 1’-0" of your actual model is represented by 1/4" on paper when the Print to Scale option is used. If you want the
view to be larger or smaller when printed, you can change the print scale of the view without having to change the original
view scale or annotation settings. To do this you need to select the Print to Scale option on your view’s Print Properties
page, then select the scale that you want to use. When you change the print scale, things like text and dimensions will be
scaled in such a way that they are proportional to the rest of the drawing when it is printed. (Note, however, that the original
size definitions of text and dimensions are retained in the drawing — text and dimensions are only scaled in the printout if
the Print to Scale option is used.)
Note that if you change the print scale, your 2D plan does not scale on the screen. It will only be scaled on paper when you
print the drawing. Also, changing the print scale has no effect in 3D views, neither on the screen nor in printouts. This is
because a model being viewed in 3D does not have concrete measurements like a flat, 2D view has.
You can edit the print scale of a view by accessing the view’s properties.
To edit a view window’s print scale when it is the current view window:
1. Select View > View Properties, or right-click in the view window and select View Properties.
2. In the View Properties dialog, select the Print Properties tab.
3. Click the top drop box in the Print Scaling area and select Print to Scale.
4. Select the desired scale from the Print Scale drop box. Note that the view scale of the current view is displayed above
the Print Scale drop box so that you can get a sense of how you are scaling the drawing. For example, if your view
scale is set to 1/4" = 1’-0" and you set the print scale to 1/2" = 1’-0", you know that you are scaling the drawing up in the
printout. The drawing would be larger when printed at the 1/2"= 1’-0" scale than it would at the 1/4" = 1’-0" because
every 1’-0" of the model is being represented by 1/2" on paper instead of only 1/4" on paper.
5. Click OK.

Printing to a File
When you print to a file, you need to first determine which printer — for example, a PostScript printer — will ultimately
print the file. This way you can specify an appropriate file type to print to (e.g. *.ps).

- 299 -
Chapter 23: Project Management

A print file allows others to print your Virtual Architect home design software drawing, even if Virtual Architect home
design software is not installed on their computer. All they need is a printer that prints the specified file type.
To print to a file:

1. Select File > Print, or click on the Standard toolbar.

2. In the Print dialog, enable the Print to file check box.
3. Click Print.
4. In the Save As dialog, navigate to the folder where you want to save the print file.
5. In the File name edit box, type a name and extension for the print file (e.g. [Link]).
6. Click Save. The project is written to the print file.

Creating a PDF File

To create a PDF file of a view you need to have a PDF writer installed on your computer. This is like a special print driver
or utility that has the capability of producing PDF files. When a PDF writer is installed on your system it will appear in the
list of printers in the Print dialog, just like any other printer.
Some PDF writers are free and can be downloaded from the Internet, and some can be purchased from companies such as
Adobe. Check out the following web sites, or do a search on the Internet: [Link], [Link], or
[Link].
To create a PDF File:
1. Display the view that you would like to print.

2. Select File > Print, or click on the Standard toolbar.

3. In the Print dialog, select the PDF print driver in the list of available printers.
4. Make sure the Print to File option is disabled.
5. Once you have defined your print settings, click Print.
6. In Save PDF File As dialog, select a save location for the PDF file, then type a name for the file in the File name edit box.
7. Click Save. The PDF file is created in the specified location.

Importing
Using the Project Trace Image tool you can import a BMP, JPG or TGA file into your drawing space. You can then trace the
image using elements from the catalog, creating a true Virtual Architect home design software model. This is the perfect tool
to use if you have sketched out ideas in a drawing program or scanned a floor plan that you have permission to use, and
want to recreate the plan in Virtual Architect home design software. You can resize the image if you need to before tracing,
and delete it once you’re done tracing. Most floor plans are copyrighted, so make sure you have permission to copy them.
You can use the Photo Board Wizard to import digital photographs or scanned images into your work space. The image is
oriented vertically in 3D view, much like a billboard. You could, for example, import a picture of your backyard, so when
you look out the window, it feels like you’re home.
Using the Object Import Wizard you can quickly import custom 3D objects in DXF, SKP or 3DS format directly into your
drawing.

Importing an Image to Trace

You can import a BMP, JPG or TGA image, such as a floor plan that you have scanned or sketched out in a drawing program,
and trace it using elements from the catalog, creating a true Virtual Architect home design software model.
To import an image to trace:
1. In 2D plan view, select File > Import > Project Trace Image.
2. In the Open dialog, select the file type you are importing from the File type drop box. You can import BMP, JPG or
TGA files.

- 300 -
 Importing an Image to Trace

3. Locate the file to import, then click Open. The image is displayed in the Import dialog. You can zoom and pan in the
preview pane using the zoom/pan controls below the pane. Note that changing the zoom level inside the preview pane
has no effect on the image when it is imported.

4. Before importing the image you will need to define the size or scale of the imported image.
If you are importing a floor plan and you know the scale at which it was drawn originally, you can enter that value in
the Scale edit boxes. For example, if the plan was drawn at a 1/4" = 1’-0" (1:48) scale, you would enter 48 in the Scale
(X) or Scale (Y) edit box. There are separate X and Y (horizontal and vertical) scale settings. By default, whatever you
enter in one edit box will automatically be displayed in the other edit box, maintaining the same scale in both directions.
If you want the X scale to be different than the Y scale, you need to click the lock icon beside the Scale (X) and Scale
(Y) edit boxes. With the lock ’unlocked’ you can enter a different value in each edit box.
Another way of specifying the scale is to draw a reference line along an existing object in the CAD image and specify

the length of that object in real-world units. To do this, click the Pick Scale button next to the Scale (X)or Scale (Y)
edit box, then pick two points along an object in the image to define a reference line. (If the X scale and Y scale will
differ, you should pick points along a horizontal object for the X scale, and pick points along a vertical object for the Y
scale.) Then in the Scale by Reference dialog, enter the length of the reference line and click OK. For example, if you
know that a particular wall in your plan is 12’ long, draw a line along that wall and then enter 12’ in the Scale by
Reference dialog.

The Scale values in the Import dialog will then adjust to reflect the scale you defined.

5. To specify the angle of the imported image, enter a value in the Angle edit box, or click the Pick Angle button next
to the Angle edit box and pick two points along an object in the image to define the angle. If you are picking points to
define the angle, the Angle by Reference dialog appears and reports the angle that you defined. You can edit the angle
here if you want.

- 301 -
Chapter 23: Project Management

6. If you want to import only a portion of the image, click next to the Crop Box item, then click two points
diagonally in the preview window to define a box around the portion that you want to import. A blue box is displayed

around the selected portion. To remove the crop box, click , then click OK to confirm that you want to clear
the crop box.
7. To dim the imported image, slide the Dimming slider to the desired dim level. The higher the percentage, the more dim
the image will be.
8. If you want the Import dialog to appear again after you insert the image so that you can insert another image, enable
the Multiple Insert check box.
9. To import the image into the current view window, click Insert. The image is attached to your cursor.
10. Position the image where you want it, then click to insert it. You can now trace the image.

Note: Most floor plans are copyrighted, so make sure you have permission to copy them.

Resizing a Project Trace Image

If you import a project trace image and it is not the right size, you can scale it up or down to match the plan’s drawing scale.
Having a correct drawing scale is important for tracing purposes so elements can be created at the correct size.
To resize a project trace image:
1. Select the trace image.
2. Right-click and select Resize, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Resize.
3. Find a wall with a known length, then select a point at each end of the wall to create a reference line. The length of the
reference line is displayed in real-world units in the Resize Block dialog.

4. In the Resize Block dialog, enter the new length that you want the reference line to represent. Entering a greater value
will make the image bigger, and entering a lesser value will make the image smaller.
5. If you want the image to be scaled in both directions, enable the Maintain Aspect Ratio radio button.
6. If you want the image to be scaled in only one direction, enable either the Horizontal Only or Vertical Only radio but-
ton.
7. Click OK. The image is resized.

Tracing the Imported Floor Plan

Tracing an imported image is easy — just use the tools on the Insert menu. Below are links to topics that may help you:
• Drawing Walls on page 7
• Inserting Doors...page 29
• Inserting Windows...page 34
• Inserting Wall Openings...page 39
• Inserting Stairs and Ramps...page 57
• Inserting Cabinets...page 86
• Inserting Appliances...page 89

- 302 -
 Displaying/Hiding Project Trace Images

Displaying/Hiding Project Trace Images

If you have used the Project Trace Image tool to import a plan into your project, you can hide the image if you want using
the View Filter. This is an alternative to deleting the image.
To filter project trace images from view:

1. Select View > View Filters > View Filter, or click on the View Control toolbar.
2. In the View Filter dialog, select the Notation tab.
3. In the Project Trace Images row, click the eye icon in the Display column to turn project trace images on or off.
Project trace image is turned on

Project trace image is turned off

4. Click OK.

Deleting a Project Trace Image

Once you’re done tracing a floor plan, you can delete the trace image from your drawing, leaving just your Virtual Architect
home design software model on the screen.
To delete a project trace image:
1. Select the trace image.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

Note: If you prefer you can just hide the project trace image from view instead of deleting it.

Importing a Photo Board

A photo board is simply a digital image that is oriented vertically in your 3D workspace. You can import any image you
want — your family, pets, neighbor’s house — the only limit is your imagination. The handy Photo Board Wizard does it
all in a few quick steps.
To import a photo board:
1. Select File > Import > Photo Board Wizard.

2. Click Next.

- 303 -
Chapter 23: Project Management

3. Type a name for your photo board.

4. Click the Select button, then select the image you want to import. You can import BMP, JPG and TGA files. The image
is displayed in the preview window.
5. Define the size of the image by entering values in the Height and Width edit boxes.
6. Click Next.

7. Specify whether you want the photo board to be stationary or active. If Stationary is selected, the board will always
remain oriented the same way, regardless of changes in your camera angle. If Billboard is selected, the photo board
will rotate toward the camera so it will always face you in 3D.
8. Click Next.

- 304 -
 Saving Imported Photo Boards to the Catalog

9. Click Finish. The photo board is attached to your cursor, ready to be inserted.
10. Position the photo board where you want it, then click to insert it.
11. Right-click and select Finish.

Saving Imported Photo Boards to the Catalog

You can save a photo board that you have imported using the Photo Board Wizard to your catalog so you can insert it again
in any project.
To save your photo board to the current catalog:

1. Select File > Catalogs > Save Element to Catalog. Your pointer changes to a catalog cursor.
2. Click on the photo board in your drawing.
3. Click Yes to save the photo board. The photo board is added to the current catalog.

Inserting a Photo Board from the Catalog

The catalog contains a collection of photo boards containing pictures of people, animals, flags, and other objects. If you have
saved your imported photo board to the catalog, it is also displayed with the existing photo boards in the catalog.
To insert a photo board from the catalog:
1. Select Insert > Photo Board.
2. In the catalog panel, select the photo board you want to insert.
3. Position the photo board where you want it, then click to insert it.
4. Right-click and select Finish.

Moving a Photo Board

You can move a photo board easily by just clicking and dragging it.
To move a photo board:
1. Select the photo board.

2. Hover your pointer over the board to display the Move cursor.
3. Click and drag to move the board.
4. When the board is where you want it, release your mouse button.

- 305 -
Chapter 23: Project Management

Rotating a Photo Board in 2D

You can use the Rotate tool to rotate a photo board about a selected point in 2D plan view.
To rotate a photo board:
1. Select the photo board.
2. Right-click and select Rotate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Rotate.
3. Hover your pointer over the point you want to rotate the photo board around.
4. Click and drag to rotate the photo board, then release your mouse button.

Changing the Elevation of a Photo Board

You can raise or lower a photo board using the Elevate tool on the right-click menu.
To raise or lower a photo board:
1. Select the photo board.
2. Right-click and select Elevate, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Elevate. The value in the Elevate dialog is the cur-
rent elevation of the photo board.
3. In the Elevate dialog, specify the desired elevation of the photo board above the terrain.
4. Click OK.

Tip: You can also change a photo board’s elevation by changing the Distance above current location or terrain variable
on the photo board’s Behavior property page.

Changing a Photo Board from Stationary to Rotating and Vice Versa

You can choose whether a photo board is stationary or rotating after it has been inserted. A stationary board keeps the same
orientation regardless of changes in the camera angle. A rotating board always rotates towards the camera.
To change a photo board’s type:
1. Select the photo board.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. In the Type area, click Stationary for a stationary photo board, or Billboard for a rotating photo board.
4. Click OK.

Editing the Size of a Photo Board

You can edit the height and width of a photo board after it has been inserted.
To edit the size of a photo board:
1. Select the photo board.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
3. Edit the Height or Width in the Properties area. If Maintain Aspect Ratio is checked, the height will automatically
change if you edit the width, and vice versa. This ensures the image doesn’t get distorted.
4. Click OK.

Deleting a Photo Board

You can delete a photo board in a couple of easy steps.
To delete a photo board:
1. Select the photo board.
2. Press the Delete key on your keyboard, or right-click and select Delete, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Delete.

- 306 -
 Creating Transparency in Photo Board Images

Creating Transparency in Photo Board Images

You may find that you want to make portions of your photo board image transparent for a more realistic effect. If the image
is of a person, for example, you may want to make the background in the image transparent so that when you insert the
photo board in your drawing, you see just the person in your 3D view.
To create transparency in your photo board image, you need to use a graphic editing program such as Microsoft® Paint to
apply a magenta color to those portions you want to make transparent.
The RGB color settings for magenta are as follows:
Red: 255
Green: 0
Blue: 255
Once you have finished editing the image in the graphic editing program, you can re-import the image into Virtual Architect
home design software using the Photo Board Wizard.

Importing Custom Objects into Your Drawing

If you have any custom 3D objects in DXF, SKP (Google™ SketchUp), 3DS or IFC format, you can import them into your
Virtual Architect home design software drawing. Many sites on the Internet offer free downloading of objects for your
convenience. Typically, these are objects such as furniture and appliances.
You can import a custom object directly into your drawing using the Object Import Wizard. Once inserted, you can edit its
properties just as you would edit any element in your drawing.
To import a custom object into your drawing:
1. Select File > Import > Object Wizard.
2. In the first edit box, type a name for the element.
3. From the element drop box, select the type of element you are importing.
4. If you selected Exterior Furniture, Exterior Accessories or Exterior Lighting, you have the option of inserting the ele-
ment on the floor of the current building location, or the terrain. Select either the Insert on location or Insert on terrain
radio button. (All other element types have one of the options pre-selected for you, with the other option disabled.)
5. Click the Select button.
6. In the Open dialog, locate and select the file that you want to import, then click Open. You can import DXF, SKP, 3DS
and IFC files.
Note: SKP files can only be imported into Virtual Architect Professional.
7. Specify how you want the components created by making a selection from the next drop box. For DXF files you can
choose from Colors or Layers. Since 3DS and IFC objects are essentially an assembly of materials, the only selection
for 3DS and IFC objects is Materials. (This step does not apply to SketchUp files.)
8. Click Next.
9. On the Orient your element screen, use the arrows to rotate the model so that it will be oriented correctly when insert-
ed in a drawing.
10. Click Next.
11. If the object is a door or window, the Position the insertion point of your element screen will appear. Specify where
along the object’s height (Z Axis) you would like to position the object’s insertion point. Use the slider to move the in-
sertion point up or down. To offset the door/window frame from the wall surface, enter an offset value in the Frame
Offset edit box.
12. Click Next.
13. For some file types, the program needs to know what units were used to create the object originally so that it can be
converted into an appropriate size.
If you know what units were used to create the object, select the units from the units drop box. Otherwise, select the
unit of measure that will result in a logical Resultant Width, Resultant Depth and Resultant Height. Selecting
Custom lets you specify a custom scale in the Custom Scale edit box.

- 307 -
Chapter 23: Project Management

The scale is the multiplication factor of the units used for objects in the block. For example, if you’re converting a file
that you assume was created in feet and inches, the scale is 25.4.
14. Click Next.
15. The next screen lists the object’s individual components. Specify which components you want to display or hide in 3D
by clicking the appropriate eye icons.

Component is displayed

Component is not displayed

Enabling the Show only selected component check box displays only the currently selected component in the object
preview. This helps you distinguish between the object’s individual components.
To rename a component, double-click it, then type the new name and press Enter.
13. Click Next.
14. The next screen lists the object’s components again, but this time you can specify which components you want to dis-
play or hide in 2D plan view.
To create a custom plan view, select either Outline or Slice below the preview window to specify how the plan view
is to be created. To create a simple outline based on the footprint of the object, select Outline. To create a slice through
the object, select Slice, and then use the slider control next to the preview window to specify the position of the slice.

To control the visibility of components within the custom plan view, click next to the drop box, then specify which
components you want to hide or show in the Display Components to Generate Plan View dialog.

Once the plan view has the desired appearance in the preview window, click to add the view to the list of
components. You can delete custom plan views from the list if desired, but you cannot delete components of the
original object.
15. Click Next.
16. Click Finish.
17. Click to insert the new element in your drawing.
18. Right-click and select Finish.

Tip: You can save the imported element in your catalog using the Save Element to Catalog tool.

Importing Custom Objects into Your Catalog

If you have any custom 3D blocks in DXF, SKP (Google™ SketchUp), 3DS or IFC format, you can import them into your
Virtual Architect home design software catalog so that they are available to be inserted in your drawing. Many sites on the
Internet offer free downloading of objects for your convenience. Typically, blocks are objects such as furniture and
appliances.
To import a custom object into your catalog:

1. Select File > Catalogs > Element Manager, or click the down arrow next to the Catalogs button on the Standard
toolbar and select Element Manager. You can also right-click an element in the catalog panel and Element Manager.
2. Open the element folder that you want to add the object to.
3. Select Edit > Add Element.
4. In the Define Element dialog, select the Custom Block option.
5. Click OK.
6. In the Open dialog, select the appropriate file type from the Files of type drop box (DXF, 3DS, SKP, IFC).
Note: SKP files can only be imported into Virtual Architect Professional.
7. Locate and select the file to import, then click Open.
8. In the Block Import Options dialog, specify what you want the components created from by making a selection in the
Create Components From drop box. For DXF files you can choose from Colors or Layers. Since 3DS and IFC objects

- 308 -
 Importing BIM Files

are essentially an assembly of materials, the only selection for 3DS objects is Materials. (This step does not apply to
SketchUp files.)
9. On the Orient your element screen, use the arrows to rotate the model so that it will be oriented correctly when insert-
ed in a drawing.
10. If the object is a door or window, the Position the insertion point of your element screen will appear. Specify where
along the object’s height (Z Axis) you would like to position the object’s insertion point. Use the slider to move the in-
sertion point up or down. To offset the door/window frame from the wall surface, enter an offset value in the Frame
Offset edit box.
11. For some file types, the program needs to know what units were used to create the object originally so that it can be
converted into an appropriate size. If you know what units were used to create the object, select the units from the Con-
vert File From drop box. Otherwise, select the unit of measure in the Convert File From drop box that will result in a
logical Resultant Width, Resultant Depth and Resultant Height. Selecting Custom lets you specify a custom scale in
the Custom Scale edit box. (This step does not apply to SketchUp files.) Once logical dimensions are displayed, click
OK.
12. The next screen lists the object’s individual components. Specify which components you want to display or hide in 3D
by clicking the appropriate eye icons.

Component is displayed

Component is not displayed

Enabling the Show only selected component check box displays only the currently selected component in the object
preview. This helps you distinguish between the object’s individual components.
To rename a component, double-click it, then type the new name and press Enter.
13. Click Next.
14. The next screen lists the object’s components again, but this time you can specify which components you want to dis-
play or hide in 2D plan view.
To create a custom plan view, select either Outline or Slice below the preview window to specify how the plan view
is to be created. To create a simple outline based on the footprint of the object, select Outline. To create a slice through
the object, select Slice, and then use the slider control next to the preview window to specify the position of the slice.

To control the visibility of components within the custom plan view, click next to the drop box, then specify which
components you want to hide or show in the Display Components to Generate Plan View dialog.

Once the plan view has the desired appearance in the preview window, click to add the view to the list of
components. You can delete custom plan views from the list if desired, but you cannot delete components of the
original object.
15. Click Next.
16. Click Finish.
17. In the Element Manager, enter a name for the element in the Name edit box.
18. Define the element’s properties. The element will already have size properties assigned to it that are taken from the
original file, but you can change these. You may need to edit the orientation of the element so that it inserts correctly in
the drawing.
19. If you want to select a different file to apply to your new element, click the Select button in the Imported Element area
of the Basic property page.
20. Click OK. The new element is added to the catalog.

Importing BIM Files

A Building Information Management file, or BIM file, contains elements or libraries from a catalog, or from a specific project.
If you have exported content from another catalog to a BIM file, you can use the Import BIM to Catalog tool to import that
content into the current catalog.

- 309 -
Chapter 23: Project Management

If you have exported content from a project to a BIM file, you can use the Import BIM to Document tool to import that
content into the current project. This tool is specifically designed to import project-specific information such as layer
definitions.

Importing Catalog Content from a BIM File

Any catalog content that has been exported to a BIM file can be imported into another catalog using the Import BIM to
Catalog tool.
To import catalog content from a BIM file:
1. Make sure that the catalog into which you want to import content is the current catalog.
2. Select File > Import > BIM to Catalog. You can also launch this feature from the Element Manager or Library Manager
by selecting File > BIM File > Import.
3. In the Open dialog, select the BIM file from which you want to import items, then click Open.
4. In the right pane of the Import Items from BIM File dialog, select the group or item that you want to transfer into the
current catalog.

5. Click Transfer.
6. When you are finished transferring items into your catalog, click OK.

Exporting
There are several different Export tools available.
The 2D Image tool lets you export the image on the screen to a BMP, JPG or TGA file, which can be opened in a variety of
graphic editing applications.
With the 2D Drawing tool you can export your 2D plan to an AutoCAD DXF file.
The 3D Model tool lets you export your 3D model to a variety of file formats, including DXF, SKP and 3DS (3D Studio).
When you open the file in the associated application, you will see an actual 3D model in that application.
You can export your 3D model to 20-20 Design software using the 20-20 Design XML export tool.
If you are using Virtual Architect Professional, the following export tools are also available: Weyerhaeuser Javelin®, CSD
iStruct™, MiTek® SAPPHIRE Structure™, Boise BC Framer, Keymark® GS Software Suite, and Simpson Component
Solutions®.

- 310 -
 Exporting the Current View to a 2D Image File

Exporting the Current View to a 2D Image File

The 2D Image export tool lets you save the current view to a BMP, JPG or TGA file, which can be opened in most graphic
editing applications.
To export a view:
1. Select File > Export > 2D Image.
2. In the Save As dialog, click on the Save as type drop box and select the file format you want to export to.
3. Locate the directory where you want to save the exported file.
4. In the File name edit box, type a file name.
5. Click Save. The Export View dialog appears.

6. From the Color drop box, select the desired color setting. Choose from Grayscale, 256 Color, High Color (16-bit), High Col-
or (24-bit) or True Color (32-bit).
7. From the Size drop box, select the desired output size. By default, Current View is selected, which saves the image at
the size currently shown on the screen. You can choose from a list of preset sizes, or select Custom and enter the desired
values in the Width and Height edit boxes.
8. Click Save. The view is exported.

Exporting the 2D Drawing to a 2D AutoCAD File

The 2D Drawing export tool saves your 2D plan in a 2D, vector drawing format that can be opened in AutoCAD or any
application that accepts DXF files.
To export your 2D drawing:
1. Select File > Export > 2D Drawing.
2. Select the directory where you want to save the exported file.
3. In the File name edit box, type a file name.
4. Click Save. A dialog appears confirming the model has been exported successfully.
5. Click OK.

Note: If you are exporting to the DWG or DXF file format, the layers assigned to elements in your model will be replicated
in AutoCAD, providing a seamless transition between the two applications.

Exporting the 3D Model

The 3D Model export tool lets you save your 3D model to the following formats:
• AutoCAD DXF (*.dxf)
• Autodesk 3D Studio (*.3ds)
• SketchUp (*.skp)
• VRML (*.wrl)
• IFC File (*.ifc)

- 311 -
Chapter 23: Project Management

When you open the file in its associated application, you will see an actual 3D model in that application.
To export your 3D model:
1. Select File > Export > 3D Model.
2. In the Save As dialog, click on the Save as type drop box and select the file format you want to export to.
3. Click Browse Folders and select the directory where you want to save the exported file.
4. In the File name edit box, type a file name.
5. Click Save. A dialog appears confirming the model has been exported successfully.
6. Click OK.

Note: If you are exporting to the DWG, DXF or SKP file format, the layers assigned to elements in your model will be
replicated in AutoCAD or Sketchup, providing a seamless transition between the two applications.

Exporting Catalog Content to a BIM File

If you would like to transfer elements or libraries in the current catalog to another catalog, you first need to export the
desired content to a BIM (Building Information Management) file. You can then use the Import BIM File tool to import the
content into the other catalog.
By exporting content to a BIM file you can also share your catalog content with other Virtual Architect home design software
users by simply giving them the BIM file.
To export catalog content to a BIM File:
1. Make sure that the catalog from which you want to export content is the current catalog.
2. Select File > Export > Catalog to BIM. You can also launch this feature from the Element Manager or Library Manager
by selecting File > BIM File > Export.

- 312 -
 Exporting Catalog Content to a BIM File

3. By default, the content will be copied to a new, blank BIM file. If you want to export the content to an existing BIM file

(i.e. add to a BIM file), click above the right pane and open the BIM file that you want to export to.
4. In the left pane of the Export Items to BIM File dialog, select the content that you want to export to a BIM file. To ex-
pand a group, click its plus sign (+). You can select an entire element group (e.g. Windows), individual groups (e.g.
Fixed Windows), or individual elements within a group (e.g. 4’ x 4’ Fixed Window). The same goes for libraries.
5. Click Transfer. The selected content is copied to the BIM file in the right pane.
6. Continue transferring content if desired.
7. When you are finished transferring content, click OK.
8. In the Save As dialog, type a name for the BIM file in the File name edit box, then click Save.

Note: When you transfer a group or item to a BIM file, other content may be copied as well. This additional content is
associated with the items you are transferring, and is necessary for the items to be properly defined. For example, if you
copy the Doors group to the BIM file, the Parts group will copy over as well, because doors have parts such as hinges and
doorknobs included as assemblies in their properties. Similarly, if you copy the Materials library to the BIM file, other
libraries such as Patterns, Line Styles and Manufacturers will copy over as well because materials have patterns, line styles
and manufacturers defined in their properties.

Note: When you copy individual groups or items to a BIM file, the structure which the group or item is part of is mimicked
in the BIM file pane. For example, if you copy the 4’ x 4’ Fixed Window to the BIM file pane, it will appear in a folder named
"Fixed", and the Fixed folder will appear under a "Windows" folder.

- 313 -
Chapter 23: Project Management

Exporting Project Content to a BIM File

If you have customized content in your project and would like to use that content in another project, you can export the
custom content to a Building Information Modeling (BIM) file for import into other projects. For example, if you have edited
layer definitions, which are project-specific, you can export those layer definitions to a BIM file and then import the BIM file
into other projects to make those layer definitions available in those projects.
To export project content to a BIM file:
1. Open the project whose content you want to export to a BIM file.
2. In Model View, select File > Export > Project to BIM. The Export Items to a BIM File dialog box appears.

3. By default, the content will be copied to a new, blank BIM file. If you want to export the content to an existing BIM file

(i.e. add to a BIM file), click above the right pane and open the BIM file that you want to export to.
4. In the left pane of the dialog, select a folder or item that you want to export. Note that the left pane will only contain
elements that exist in the current project.
5. Click Transfer to add the item to the BIM file in the right pane.
6. Continue transferring content if desired.
7. When you are finished transferring items, click OK.
8. In the Save As dialog, type a name for the BIM file in the File name edit box, then click Save.

Note: When you transfer a group or item to a BIM file, other content may be copied as well. This additional content is
associated with the items you are transferring, and is necessary for the items to be properly defined. For example, if you
copy a Layer Table to the BIM file, the Line Types and Line Weights used in the table’s layer definitions will be also be copied
to the BIM file.

- 314 -
 Exporting to Sketchfab

Exporting to Sketchfab
Sketchfab is a website where you can publish and share interactive 3D files. If you have an account on Sketchfab, you can
use the Sketchfab Export tool in Virtual Architect home design software to upload your 3D Virtual Architect home design
software model to Sketchfab. To learn more about Sketchfab, visit [Link]
To export to Sketchfab:
1. Select File > Export > Sketchfab Export.
2. In the Upload to Sketchfab dialog box, specify the settings described below. Settings with an asterisk (*) are required
settings.
Title *. The name of the model as you would like it to appear in Sketchfab.
Description. A brief description of the model.
Tags. Keywords or phrases that users can use to search for your model.
Visibility. Select Public if you want the model to be visible to everyone, or Private if you want it to be visible only to
users who have the specified Password. Note that the Private option is only available if you have a premium Sketchfab
account.
Email Address *. The email address associated with your Sketchfab account.
Password *. The password for your Sketchfab account.

Customization
One of the great things about Virtual Architect home design software is that its content and interface are totally
customizable.
Catalogs can be customized in many ways. You can edit a catalog or create a new catalog. You can edit elements in a catalog,
add new elements to a catalog, and even import custom objects into a catalog.
Elements have a complete set of properties that you can edit to suit your needs. For example, you can edit an element’s size
or appearance. You can edit an element in your drawing, or edit an element in the catalog using the Element Manager.
Libraries are part of the catalog. Library types include Materials, Material Usages, Material Filters, Patterns, Manufacturers,
Text Styles, Dimension Styles, Line Styles, Line Types, Line Weights, Light Sources, Assemblies, Framing, Usages, Phases,
Categories and Units of Measure as well as configurations for the House Builder Wizard, Kitchen Builder Wizard, Bathroom
Builder Wizard, and Shed Builder Wizard.
When it comes to the Virtual Architect home design software interface, you can move things like toolbars and panels
around, and adjust your Workspace settings to create an environment that displays the tools you need, and is suited to the
way you like to work.

- 315 -
Chapter 23: Project Management

- 316 -
Chapter 24: Catalogs

When you start the program, a catalog of elements is displayed on the right side of the screen. This is where you choose the
elements that you want to insert. A catalog also contains various libraries, such as Materials, Text Styles and Dimension
Styles libraries.
The Element Manager lets you add, edit and delete elements in a catalog to suit your needs. You can also customize the way
a catalog is organized by adding, deleting or renaming groups.
The Library Manager lets you customize any library in the catalog by adding, editing and deleting library items.
You can create new, custom catalogs that contain a specific selection of elements.
You can export the content of a catalog to a TXT file, edit the items in the TXT file, and then import the edited content back
into the catalog in Virtual Architect home design software.
You can export selected libraries and elements to a BIM file for import into other catalogs. You can also import content from
any external BIM file.
You can view or edit catalog properties such as the catalog’s name and author. You can lock a catalog to prevent others from
making unwanted edits to the catalog. While designing you can open any catalog you want to gain access to the elements
you want.

Adding a Group or Subgroup to a Catalog

Most elements and library items are organized by group. For example, walls are organized into groups such as Brick Veneer,
Interior Partition, and Poured Concrete. This helps you locate specific element types quickly. You can add groups to any
catalog or library using the Add Group tool. To create a deeper level of organization you can add a subgroup to any existing
group using the Add Subgroup tool.
To add a group or subgroup to the current catalog:
1. Open either the Element Manager or Library Manager depending on where you want to add the group.
To open the Element Manager select File > Catalogs > Element Manager, or click the down arrow next to the Catalogs

button on the Standard toolbar and select Element Manager. You can also right-click an element in the catalog
panel and select Element Manager.
To open the Library Manager select File > Catalogs > Library Manager.
2. Select the element catalog or library that you want to add a group to.
3. Select the category that you want to add a group to, then select Edit > Add Group, or right-click and select Add Group.
To add a subgroup to an existing group, select the group then select Edit > Add Group, or right-click the group and
select Add Group.
4. Type a name for the group, then press ENTER.

Moving a Subgroup to the Root

In an element catalog or library, if you have a group within a group, you can move that subgroup to the root of the tree. In
other words, you can promote the subgroup to a group.
To move a subgroup to the root:
1. Open either the Element Manager or Library Manager depending on where the group resides.
To open the Element Manager select File > Catalogs > Element Manager, or click the down arrow next to the Catalogs

button on the Standard toolbar and Element Manager. You can also right-click an element in the catalog panel and
select Element Manager.
To open the Library Manager select File > Catalogs > Library Manager.
2. Display the element catalog or library that you want to edit.

- 317 -
Chapter 24: Catalogs

3. Click and hold down your mouse button over the subgroup that you would like to move, then drag it to the root folder.

Renaming a Group in a Catalog

In an element catalog or library, you can change the name of any group using the Rename Group tool.
To rename a group:
1. Open either the Element Manager or Library Manager depending on where the group resides.
To open the Element Manager select File > Catalogs > Element Manager, or click the down arrow next to the Catalogs

button on the Standard toolbar and select Element Manager. You can also right-click an element in the catalog
panel and select Element Manager.
To open the Library Manager select File > Catalogs > Library Manager.
2. Open the element catalog or library containing the group that you want to rename.
3. Select the group that you want to rename, then select Edit > Rename Group, or right-click it and select Rename
Group.
4. Type the new name and press ENTER.

Changing the Order of Groups in a Catalog

You can change the order in which groups appear in an element catalog or library by moving groups up or down in the list.
You may, for example, want to arrange your groups alphabetically, or by popularity.
To change the order of groups in a catalog:
1. Open either the Element Manager or Library Manager depending on where you want to reorder groups.
To open the Element Manager select File > Catalogs > Element Manager, or click the down arrow next to the Catalogs

button on the Standard toolbar and select Element Manager. You can also right-click an element in the catalog
panel and select Element Manager.
To open the Library Manager select File > Catalogs > Library Manager.
2. Display the element catalog or library that you want to edit.
3. Click and hold down your mouse button over the group that you would like to move, then drag it to the desired loca-
tion in the list.

Deleting a Group from a Catalog

You can delete a group in an element catalog or library provided it contains no elements or objects.
To delete a group in a catalog:
1. Open either the Element Manager or Library Manager depending on where you want to add the group.
To open the Element Manager select File > Catalogs > Element Manager, or click the down arrow next to the Catalogs

button on the Standard toolbar and select Element Manager. You can also right-click an element in the catalog
panel and select Element Manager.
To open the Library Manager select File > Catalogs > Library Manager.
2. Display the element catalog or library that you want to edit.
3. Select the group that you want to delete. Note that the group can only be deleted if it contains no elements or objects.
4. Select Edit > Delete Group, or right-click and select Delete Group.

Saving Edited Elements in Your Drawing to a Catalog

If you have edited the properties of an inserted element, you can save that element (and its custom properties) to the current
catalog.

- 318 -
 Creating a New Catalog

To add an edited element from your drawing into the current catalog:

1. Select File > Catalogs > Save Element to Catalog, or click the down arrow next to the Catalogs button on the

Standard toolbar and select Save Element to Catalog. Your pointer changes to a catalog cursor.
2. Select the element in your drawing.
3. Click Yes to save the element. You are asked if you want to save another element to the catalog.
4. Click Yes if you want to save another element to the catalog, or No to finish.

Note: If the element that you select already exists in the catalog, you will be asked if you want to create a copy in the catalog
to work with. If you click Yes, a copy of the element is created in the catalog, with a number appended to its name to
differentiate it from the original.

Creating a New Catalog

If you plan to edit or add elements in the Master Catalog, you may want to create a new catalog instead of editing the existing
one. That way, the custom elements you create are distinguishable from the defaults and are stored in one place. When you
create a new catalog, you specify a name and where you want to store the catalog.
Once you have created a new catalog it becomes the current catalog in the catalog panel. Initially the catalog will be empty.
You can import content into it from another catalog using the BIM File Import tool. You can also add elements to it using
the Element Manager, and library items using the Library Manager.
To create a new catalog:

1. Select File > Catalogs > Element Manager, or click the down arrow next to the Catalogs button on the Standard
toolbar and select Element Manager. You can also right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Element Man-
ager.
The New Catalog tool is also available in the Library Manager (File > Catalogs > Library Manager).
2. Select File > New Catalog.
3. In the Create a new catalog dialog, type a name (without extension) in the File Name box.

4. Click next to the Location edit box and select the directory where you want to store the new catalog. The default
is the program’s Catalogs directory, which is where you should store all catalogs.
5. From the Type drop box, select the unit of measure you would like to use for elements in the catalog.
6. From the Precision drop box, select the level of precision you would like to use for measurements. For example, se-
lecting #’-# #/16” sets the level of precision to 1/16th of an inch when working in feet and inches.
7. In the Name edit box, type your name.
8. In the Company edit box, type the name of your company, if applicable.
9. If you want to prevent the catalog from being edited by unauthorized persons, enable the Lock Catalog to Editing
check box. Then, enter and re-enter a password in the Password dialog.
10. Click OK. A new, blank catalog is created.
You can now add groups and elements to the catalog, or import elements from another catalog. Remember to save the
catalog after you make changes to it.

Locking a Catalog
You can prevent a catalog from being edited by unauthorized persons by locking it. Once locked, a password must be
entered to unlock it.
To lock a catalog:

1. Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Properties, or click the down arrow next to the Catalogs button on the Standard
toolbar and select Catalog Properties. You can also access catalog properties from the Element Manager and Library
Manager by selecting File > Catalog Properties.

- 319 -
Chapter 24: Catalogs

2. In the Catalog Properties dialog, enable the Lock Catalog to Editing check box.
3. In the Password dialog, enter the password that you want to use to unlock the catalog. Then, enter the password again
in the second edit box to confirm it. For security reasons, the actual characters of your password do not appear as you
type them.
4. Click OK.

Unlocking a Catalog
If a catalog has been locked to editing, you can unlock it by entering the password that was created when the catalog was
locked.
To unlock a catalog:

1. Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Properties, or click the down arrow next to the Catalogs button on the Standard
toolbar and select Catalog Properties. You can also access catalog properties from the Element Manager and Library
Manager by select File > Catalog Properties.
2. In the Catalog Properties dialog, disable the Lock Catalog to Editing check box.
3. Enter the password needed to unlock it, then click OK.

Exporting Catalog Content to a BIM File

If you would like to transfer elements or libraries in the current catalog to another catalog, you first need to export the
desired content to a BIM (Building Information Management) file. You can then use the Import BIM File tool to import the
content into the other catalog.
By exporting content to a BIM file you can also share your catalog content with other Virtual Architect home design software
users by simply giving them the BIM file.
To export catalog content to a BIM File:
1. Make sure that the catalog from which you want to export content is the current catalog.
2. Select File > Export > Catalog to BIM. You can also launch this feature from the Element Manager or Library Manager
by selecting File > BIM File > Export.

- 320 -
 Exporting Catalog Content to a BIM File

3. By default, the content will be copied to a new, blank BIM file. If you want to export the content to an existing BIM file

(i.e. add to a BIM file), click above the right pane and open the BIM file that you want to export to.
4. In the left pane of the Export Items to BIM File dialog, select the content that you want to export to a BIM file. To ex-
pand a group, click its plus sign (+). You can select an entire element group (e.g. Windows), individual groups (e.g.
Fixed Windows), or individual elements within a group (e.g. 4’ x 4’ Fixed Window). The same goes for libraries.
5. Click Transfer. The selected content is copied to the BIM file in the right pane.
6. Continue transferring content if desired.
7. When you are finished transferring content, click OK.
8. In the Save As dialog, type a name for the BIM file in the File name edit box, then click Save.

Note: When you transfer a group or item to a BIM file, other content may be copied as well. This additional content is
associated with the items you are transferring, and is necessary for the items to be properly defined. For example, if you
copy the Doors group to the BIM file, the Parts group will copy over as well, because doors have parts such as hinges and
doorknobs included as assemblies in their properties. Similarly, if you copy the Materials library to the BIM file, other
libraries such as Patterns, Line Styles and Manufacturers will copy over as well because materials have patterns, line styles
and manufacturers defined in their properties.

Note: When you copy individual groups or items to a BIM file, the structure which the group or item is part of is mimicked
in the BIM file pane. For example, if you copy the 4’ x 4’ Fixed Window to the BIM file pane, it will appear in a folder named
"Fixed", and the Fixed folder will appear under a "Windows" folder.

- 321 -
Chapter 24: Catalogs

Importing Catalog Content from a BIM File

Any catalog content that has been exported to a BIM file can be imported into another catalog using the Import BIM to
Catalog tool.
To import catalog content from a BIM file:
1. Make sure that the catalog into which you want to import content is the current catalog.
2. Select File > Import > BIM to Catalog. You can also launch this feature from the Element Manager or Library Manager
by selecting File > BIM File > Import.
3. In the Open dialog, select the BIM file from which you want to import items, then click Open.
4. In the right pane of the Import Items from BIM File dialog, select the group or item that you want to transfer into the
current catalog.

5. Click Transfer.
6. When you are finished transferring items into your catalog, click OK.

Downloading Manufacturer Content

The Green 3D Home web site contains various BIM catalogs of manufacturer materials that you can download and import
into your Virtual Architect home design software catalog. Some examples are Anderson windows, Kohler faucets and
Maytag appliances.
To download manufacturer content:
1. Select File > Catalogs > Browse More Catalog Content or Help > Browse More Catalog Content. You can also click
on the Help toolbar, or click the Download More link in the catalog panel.
2. Locate the BIM catalog that you want to download, then click Download Catalog.
3. Download the catalog to your computer.
4. Use the Import BIM to Catalog tool to import the content of the manufacturer catalog into your Virtual Architect home
design software catalog.

Note: You must log in to be able to download catalogs. Registration on the Green 3D Home web site is quick and free.

- 322 -
 Opening a Catalog

Opening a Catalog
You can use the Open Catalog tool to open any catalog and make it the current catalog in the catalog panel. The Open
Catalog tool is also available in the Element Manager and Library Manager.
To open a catalog:

1. Select File > Catalogs > Open Catalog, or click on the Standard toolbar and select Open Catalog. You can also
open a catalog in the Element Manager or Library Manager by selecting File > Open Catalog.
2. In the Open dialog, locate the catalog that you want to open.
3. Click Open. The catalog you opened becomes the active catalog.

Selecting a Default Catalog Directory

By default, the program’s Catalogs directory is displayed in the Open dialog when opening a catalog. You can select a
different default directory to display if you want.
To select a default catalog directory:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. On the General pane, click on the Catalogs Directory in the File Paths area.
3. Click Modify.
4. In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the directory you want to use as your default catalog directory, then click OK.
5. Click OK in the Program Settings dialog.

Viewing Catalog Properties

You can view the properties of the current catalog (file name, location, etc.) using the Catalog Properties tool.
To view the properties of the catalog currently displayed in the catalog panel:

1. Select File > Catalogs > Catalog Properties, or click the down arrow next to the Catalogs button on the Standard
toolbar and select Catalog Properties. You can also access the Catalog Properties tool in the Element Manager and
Library Manager by selecting File > Catalog Properties.

Saving a Catalog
Whether you have a created a new catalog or are editing an existing one in the Element Manager or Library Manager, you
will want to save your changes. Note that when you click OK in the Element Manager or Library Manager, the current
catalog saves automatically.
To save the current catalog:
1. In the Element Manager or Library Manager dialog, select File > Save Catalog.

Creating a Copy of a Catalog

You can create a copy of a catalog using the Save Catalog As tool.
To create a copy of a catalog under a different name:
1. Make sure the catalog you want to save is the current catalog.

2. Select File > Catalogs > Element Manager, or click the down arrow next to the Catalogs button on the Standard
toolbar and select Element Manager. You can also right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Element Man-
ager.
3. In the Element Manager dialog, select File > Save Catalog As.
4. In the File name edit box, type the name you want to save under (without extension).
5. Click Save.

Note: The newly saved catalog becomes the current catalog.

- 323 -
Chapter 24: Catalogs

- 324 -
Chapter 25: Elements

The Master Catalog contains thousands of elements. You can add, edit and delete elements in the catalog using the Element
Manager.
When you want to add or edit an element in a catalog, you need to define the element’s properties, such as its size and
appearance. Some elements will have more settings than others. When you edit an element in a catalog, your changes will
be applied to any future insertions of that element.
You can also edit elements that you have inserted in your drawing. When you edit an inserted element, the changes you
make are specific to that insertion of the element, and have no effect on the catalog or future insertions of the element.
If you have edited the properties of an inserted element, you can save that element (and its custom properties) to the current
catalog using the Save Element to Catalog tool.

Using the Element Manager

The Element Manager contains a list of all the elements in the current catalog. Using the Element Manager you can add and
edit elements, import elements from another catalog, and create new catalogs.
To access the Element Manager:

1. Select File > Catalogs > Element Manager, or click the down arrow next to the Catalogs button on the Standard
toolbar and select Element Manager. You can also right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Element Man-
ager.

- 325 -
Chapter 25: Elements

All catalog elements are found in the left navigation pane. The properties of the currently selected element are
displayed on the right side of the dialog. Each set of properties has its own tab (Basic, Appearance, Quantity, etc.).
Simply select a tab to view and/or edit those properties.
You can find an element by searching through the tree in the navigation pane. Elements are grouped by type (Walls,
Doors, Windows, etc.), and each element folder may have sub-folders for additional organization. The Element
Manager includes a Search feature above the navigation pane that you can use to quickly find a specific element in the
catalog.

Viewing Element Properties

Every element has a set of properties that defines the element’s size, type and physical appearance. You can customize an
element’s properties to suit your needs. Property pages vary depending on the element type, as do the properties available
on those pages.
You can access element properties through the Element Manager or the catalog panel, or through an inserted element. You
can edit the properties of inserted elements as well as elements in the Element Manager.
To view element properties through the Element Manager:
1. Select File > Catalogs > Element Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Element Manager.
2. Select the element whose properties you want to view. The element’s properties appear on the right side of the Element
Manager.
To view element properties through the catalog panel:
1. In the catalog panel, right-click the element and select Edit Element.
To view the properties of an inserted element:
1. Select the element in your drawing.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

Adding Elements to a Catalog

You can create a new element in a catalog by defining a number of different properties that determine its size, geometry and
appearance.
To add a new element to the current catalog:

1. Select File > Catalogs > Element Manager, or click the down arrow next to the Catalogs button on the Standard
toolbar and select Element Manager. You can also right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Element Man-
ager.
2. In the Element Manager, expand the appropriate element type, then select the group that you want to add the element
to.
3. Select Edit > Add Element, or right-click and select Add Element.
4. Elements like furniture, appliances and accessories can be defined based on a set of general parameters, or by importing
a DXF, 3DS or SKP file. If this is the case, you will see the Define Element dialog.
5. To define the element by specifying size properties, select the specific element type you want to create (chair, table, etc.),
then click OK.
6. To import a 3DS, DXF or SKP block, select the Custom Block option, then click OK. Some elements, like electronics,
will prompt you directly for a file because they do not have a parametric template. For more information, see Importing
Custom Objects into Your Catalog on page 308.
7. Define the element’s properties on the right side of the dialog. (See Working with Property Pages on page 327.)
8. If you want to name the element automatically using a pre-defined naming convention, click the Autoname button.
(See Using Automatic Name Generation on page 331.)
9. Click OK. The element is added to the catalog.

- 326 -
 Editing Elements in a Catalog

Editing Elements in a Catalog

Every element has a number of different properties that determine its size, geometry and appearance. You can edit these
properties to suit your needs. The Element Manager contains a list of all elements in the current catalog. You can edit a single
element or multiple elements simultaneously.
To edit an element in a catalog:

1. Select File > Catalogs > Element Manager, or click the down arrow next to the Catalogs button on the Standard
toolbar and select Element Manager. You can also right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Element Man-
ager.
2. In the Element Manager, select the element that you want to edit. You can select multiple elements if you want by hold-
ing down the Shift key and clicking on elements.
3. If you want to name the element automatically using a pre-defined naming convention, click the Autoname button.
4. Edit the properties on the right side of the dialog. If multiple elements are selected, property values that differ are
shown in red. Values shown in black are common to all the elements selected. Values shown in red can still be edited,
but be aware that the value will be applied to all elements in your selection set.
5. Click OK.

Note: Editing elements in a catalog has no effect on elements already inserted in your drawing. It only affects future
insertions of the element.

Deleting Elements from a Catalog

You can delete any element from a catalog.
To delete an element from a catalog:

1. Select File > Catalogs > Element Manager, or click the down arrow next to the Catalogs button on the Standard
toolbar and select Element Manager. You can also right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Element Man-
ager.
2. Select the element that you want to delete.
3. Select Edit > Delete Element, or right-click and select Delete Element.

Working with Property Pages

When you access an element’s properties, the properties are displayed on various tabbed pages. The tabs and properties
vary depending on the element. The most common property pages are Basic, Appearance, Line Work, Quantity and
Behavior. The notes and hyperlinks properties are common to all property pages.
A preview of the element is shown in the preview window. By default, the image is displayed in a 3D rendered view. You
can switch between 3D and 2D as well as select different display modes by right-clicking in the preview window and
making a selection from the menu.
When the image is in a 3D view, you can rotate it around by clicking and dragging with your mouse.

Editing the Size and Composition of an Element

You can edit the physical make-up of an element as well as its dimensions by accessing the element’s Basic property page.
Some elements have additional property pages that control its composition. For example, cabinets have Leaf and Details
property pages.
When you edit the properties of elements that exist in your drawing, only selected elements are changed. Other occurrences
of the element in your drawing remain unchanged. You can, however, select and edit multiple elements at the same time
provided they share the same properties.
To edit the properties of an inserted element:
1. Access the element’s properties.
2. Adjust the properties as desired. Clicking a dimension marked with an alphabetical character (a, b, c, etc.) highlights
the corresponding dimension in the element graphic, and vice versa, if one exists.

- 327 -
Chapter 25: Elements

3. Click OK. The selected elements are updated in the drawing.

Note: Editing the properties of an element in your drawing has no effect on the element’s property definition in the catalog
it came from. Editing an element in a catalog affects all future insertions of that element in your drawing.

Changing an Element’s Orientation

Symbol elements, such as furniture and light fixtures, are oriented in a logical fashion when you insert them in your
drawing. For example, tables are inserted in a flat, upright position on the floor, and electrical outlets are inserted in a
vertical position on the face of walls. You can edit the orientation of most symbol elements. For example, you may want to
flip an air register so that you can insert it on the ceiling in your basement.
To change an element’s orientation:
1. Access the element’s properties.
2. On the Basic property page, click the appropriate arrow keys in the Orientation area to rotate the element.
X Axis: Rotates the element front to back, and vice versa.
Y Axis: Rotates the element towards its left or right side in 3D.
Z Axis: Rotates the element left or right in 2D plan view.

Note: Orientation control is only available for simple block elements like furniture and appliances. It does not apply to
elements with customizable components, such as fireplaces or cabinets.

Editing an Element’s Pattern Settings

An element’s pattern properties are displayed when you view a model in Patterned mode. If you choose to edit an element’s
pattern settings through its Line Work property page, you can select different patterns for each of the element’s components.
To change an element’s pattern settings:
1. Access the element’s properties.
2. Select the Line Work tab.
3. In the Components pane, select the component whose pattern you want to change.
4. To select a pattern for the component, click the pattern swatch or the browse button in the Pattern area, then make a
selection from the Patterns dialog.
5. To edit the way the pattern is applied to the element in Patterned display mode, click the Mapping button in the Pattern
area, then define your mapping settings. These are described below.
Rotation. Specifying an angle here rotates the pattern on the element in a clockwise direction.
Position. Allows you to shift the pattern on the element (left, right, up or down) by clicking the appropriate arrows.i
6. To specify a color and line weight for the pattern’s lines, select Layer below the pattern swatch which has the desired
color/line weight properties. You can override the color or line weight by clicking the Color swatch or the Line Weight
drop box.
7. When you are finished, click OK.

Editing an Element’s Material Settings

An element’s material properties are displayed in Rendered and Rendered Outline mode. If you choose to edit an element’s
material through its Appearance property page, you can select different materials for each of the element’s components.
To change an element’s material through the Appearance property page:
1. Access the element’s properties.
2. Select the Appearance tab.
3. In the Components pane, select the component whose material you want to change.
4. To select a texture for the component, which will be displayed in Rendered and Rendered outline display mode, click
the material swatch or the browse button in the Material area, then make a selection from the Materials dialog.

- 328 -
 Editing an Element’s Layer Assignments

5. To edit the way the material is applied to the component in Rendered and Rendered Outline mode, click the Mapping
button in the Material area, then define your mapping settings. These are described below.
Auto Texture Mapping. Applies a UV map, which is a flat, 2D representation of the vertices of the 3D model. It defines
where the 2D pixels in your texture will be placed on the 3D surface. For imported elements, selecting Auto uses the
mapping already applied to the element.
Face Texture Mapping. Applies the texture to every single face of the element component. This is the most common
texture mapping option used in the program.
Box Texture Mapping. Creates a rectangular bounding box around the element, then applies a texture to each of the box’s
6 sides. This would be useful for an element such as a sofa.
Predefined texture mapping. If using a texture from an outside source, this uses the texture mapping that was assigned to
the texture originally.
Override tile size. Allows you to specify a custom tile size for the material. Tile height refers to the height of one bitmap
tile. The program uses tiled rendering to display images, meaning images are generated in pieces (tiles) vertically and
horizontally. Changing the tile height of a brick material, for example, would make the bricks look taller. Changing the
tile width would make the bricks look wider.
Note that the Override tile size option lets you customize the tile size for this instance only without creating a new
material.
Position. Allows you to shift the material on the element (left, right, up or down) by clicking the appropriate arrows.
Rotation. Specifying an angle here rotates the material on the element in a clockwise direction.
6. When you are finished defining materials, click OK.

Note: When you edit the material of an element in your drawing, the element’s material definition in the catalog does not
change. The change only applies to the selected element. Editing an element in a catalog affects all future insertions of that
element in your drawing.

Editing an Element’s Layer Assignments

Each of an element’s components has a specific layer assigned to it. Layer definitions determine the color, line type and line
weight used to display a component’s lines in 2D plan view. You can edit an element’s layer assignments on its Line Work
property page.
To edit an element’s layer assignments:
1. Access the element’s properties.
2. Select the Line Work tab.
3. In the Components pane, select the component whose layer assignment you want to change.
4. Select the desired layer from the Layer drop box. The layer’s color, line type and line weight are displayed below the
drop box.

1. To override the layer’s Color, Line type or Line weight setting, click on the property that you want to override and
then make a selection from the drop box that appears.

- 329 -
Chapter 25: Elements

5. When you are finished editing layer assignments, click OK.

Controlling What Parts of an Element are Displayed

You can hide certain parts of a block element from view by changing its display properties.
To control what parts of an element are displayed:
1. Access the element’s properties.
2. In the property dialog, click Display.
3. To display or hide a component from view in 2D and/or 3D view, select it in the list, then click the appropriate eye icon.

Component is displayed

Component is not displayed

4. Click OK to return to the properties dialog.
5. Click OK in the properties dialog.

Note: The Display control feature is only available for simple block elements like furniture and appliances. It does not apply
to elements with customizable components, such as fireplaces or cabinets.

Simplifying an Element
If an element looks too complex in the preview window, you can simplify it by reducing the number of polygons used to
display it.
To simplify an imported element:
1. Access the element’s properties.
2. In the property dialog, click Simplify.
3. To simplify the element, slide the ruler to the left. The Number of vertices in object and Percentage of simplification
values update accordingly.
4. To put a limit on how much simplification can take place, enter a value in the Min number of vertices per component
edit box. The larger the number, the less simplified the element will become.
5. Click OK to return to the properties dialog.
6. Click OK in the properties dialog.

Note: The Simplify feature is only available for simple block elements like furniture and appliances. It does not apply to
elements with customizable components, such as fireplaces or cabinets.

Editing an Element’s Insertion Point

Some elements have a defined Insertion Point, which is the point on the element that is attached to the cursor when you are
inserting the element. For most elements, the insertion point is at the bottom of the element. For windows and wall openings,
the insertion point is at the top of the element. When changing the elevation of an element, the distance is measured from
the floor or terrain to the element’s insertion point.
To edit an element’s insertion point:
1. Access the element’s properties.
2. Select the Behavior tab.
3. Edit the values in the X Axis, Y Axis and Z Axis edit boxes, or use the sliders beside these edit boxes.
An X value moves the insertion point left or right. A Y value moves the insertion point forwards or backwards. A Z
value moves the insertion point up or down on the element.
4. Click OK.

Editing an Element’s Snap Edge

Some elements have a defined Snap Edge, which determines which edge of the element will snap to the wall if you position
it near a wall.

- 330 -
 Editing an Element’s Insertion Height

To edit an element’s snap edge:

1. Access the element’s properties.
2. Select the Behavior tab.
3. Click on the desired snap edge graphic in the Snap Edge area. Choose from None, Left, Right, Front or Back.
4. Click OK.

Editing an Element’s Insertion Height

You can change the height at which single-click elements are inserted by editing their behavior properties. The Distance
above current location or terrain option lets you control the height at which the element is inserted relative to the floor or
terrain. The value entered is the distance from the floor or terrain to the insertion point of the element. (For most elements
except windows and wall openings, the insertion point is at the bottom of the element.)
To edit an element’s insertion height:
1. Access the element’s properties.
2. Select the Behavior tab.
3. Edit the value in the Distance above current location or terrain edit box.
4. Click OK.

Using Automatic Name Generation

Names of elements are based on pre-defined formulas. The name 8" Concrete Wall is made up of three variables:

Each variable is separated by a space. These variables and spaces are defined in the name’s formula.
If you add or change an element, and select Auto Name, the element’s name updates automatically in the catalog. For
example, if you create a concrete wall, and define a width of 10", the name automatically becomes 10" Concrete Wall.
Automatic name generation:
• Saves typing a name every time you add or edit an element
• Ensures consistency in catalogs
• Prevents duplicate entries if you forget to change a name
To use automatic name generation when adding or editing an element, click the Autoname button next to the Name edit
box in the element’s properties dialog.

Note: Even if you have used the Autoname feature, you can still add to or edit the name.

Modifying the Name Generation Formula

You can modify the formula used to generate an element’s name when the Autoname feature is used in the catalog or in an
element’s properties. Formulas are made up of variables (like Element Class and Element Type) and separators (spaces,
symbols or characters).
Editing an element’s name generation formula sets the formula for any new elements you create of that type. For example,
if you edit the name generation formula for an 8” Brick Wall, any new walls you add to the catalog will use the new formula
if you use automatic name generation.
To modify the formula used for an element’s automatic name generation:
1. Select File > Catalogs > Element Manager, or right-click an element in the catalog panel and select Element Manager.
In the catalog, select the element to edit.
or
Select an element in your drawing, then right-click and select Properties.

- 331 -
Chapter 25: Elements

2. On the Basic property page, click next to the Autoname button. The Automatic Name Generation dialog for that
element type is displayed. The right pane (titled Used Variables and Separators) displays the current formula.
3. To remove a component from the formula, select it and click Remove, or press the left arrow key on your keyboard.
4. To add a component to the formula, select the desired variable or separator in the Available Variables or Available Sepa-
rators window and click Add, or press the right arrow key on your keyboard.
5. To move a component in the formula, select the component and click Move Up or Move Down.
6. When you have finished modifying the formula, click OK to close the Automatic Name Generation dialog.
7. Click OK to close the Element Manager.

Adding Notes to an Element’s Properties

The Notes function in the properties dialog lets you enter a note about the element. This additional information can be
anything you want.
To add a note to an element’s properties:
1. Access the element’s properties.

2. Below the properties pane, click .

3. Enter your note in the Notes dialog.
4. Click OK.

Adding a Hyperlink to an Element’s Properties

When defining an element’s properties, you can create a link to an external file (e.g. Word document) or Web address. You
can then open the hyperlink any time you are viewing the element’s properties. You can add multiple hyperlinks to an
element’s properties if you want.
To add a hyperlink to an element’s properties:
1. Access the element’s properties.

2. Below the properties pane, click , or click the adjacent down arrow and select Manage Hyperlinks.
3. In the Manage Hyperlinks dialog, click Add. A new entry is added to the hyperlinks window. An icon appears to the
left of the new hyperlink indicating that it is the current hyperlink.
4. Type a name for the hyperlink in the Name field (e.g. My Web Site).
5. Press the Tab key to move to the Links field, then type the web address (e.g. [Link] or path to
the file you are linking to. If you are linking to a file, you can click Browse to search through the directories on your
computer. Once you’ve located the file in the Open dialog, click Open. The path to the file is automatically displayed
in the Links field.
6. To view the link, select it in the hyperlink window, then click Open.
7. To delete a hyperlink, select it in the hyperlink window, then click Delete.
8. Click OK.

Note: You can create a link to another Virtual Architect home design software (*.bld) file. However, if that file uses the same
catalog as the current drawing, you cannot access the catalog in the linked file.

Opening an Element’s Hyperlink

If you have attached a hyperlink to an element, you can open the hyperlink when viewing the element’s properties.
To open an element’s hyperlink:
1. Access the element’s properties.

- 332 -
 Making a Hyperlink Current

2. Below the properties pane, click the arrow next to the Hyperlinks button , then select Open Current Link. The
hyperlink is opened.

Note: If you have attached multiple hyperlinks to the element, the one marked current in the Hyperlinks dialog will be
opened.

Making a Hyperlink Current

When you attach more than one hyperlink to an element’s properties, the current one is marked with an icon in the
Hyperlinks dialog.

When you use the tools in the Hyperlinks dialog (Browse, Open, Delete), they apply to the currently selected hyperlink.
Also, when you select the Open Current Link tool from the Hyperlinks flyout, it opens the currently selected hyperlink.
To make a specific hyperlink current in the Hyperlinks dialog, just click on any of its fields.

- 333 -
Chapter 25: Elements

- 334 -
Chapter 26: Libraries

Items such as materials, patterns, text styles and dimension styles are stored in customizable libraries. The Library Manager
provides access to all the libraries of items and styles used in the display of elements, text and dimensions. By accessing a
library you can add content, or edit existing content. For example, if you access the Text Styles library, you can add or edit
a text style.
Library types include Materials, Material Usages, Material Filters, Patterns, Manufacturers, Text Styles, Dimension Styles,
Line Styles, Line Types, Line Weights, Light Sources, Phases, Categories, Usages and Units of Measure, as well as
configurations for the House Builder Wizard, Kitchen Builder Wizard, Bathroom Builder Wizard, and Shed Builder Wizard.

Using the Library Manager

The Library Manager provides access to all the libraries of items and styles used in the display or creation of elements, text
and dimensions. By accessing a library you can add content, or edit existing content. For example, if you access the Text
Styles library, you can add or edit a text style.
To access the Library Manager:

1. Select File > Catalogs > Library Manager, or click the down arrow next to the Catalogs button on the Standard
toolbar and select Library Manager.

2. To display a library, select it from the Libraries menu.

To add a group:
1. Select Edit > Add Group, or right-click in the upper pane and select Add Group.
2. Type a name for the group, then press ENTER.
To rename a group:
1. Select the group in the upper pane.
2. Select Edit > Rename Group, or right-click and select Rename Group.
3. Type the new name, then press ENTER.

- 335 -
Chapter 26: Libraries

To delete a group:
1. Select the group in the upper pane.
2. Select Edit > Delete Group, or right-click and select Delete Group.
Note: A group cannot be deleted if it contains materials.
To add a new item to the library:
1. If the library contains a filter, select the appropriate filter from the Filter drop box (applies to materials and assemblies).
2. In the upper pane, select the group you want to add the item to (if applicable). Some libraries do not contain groups.
3. Select Edit > Add [item], or right-click in the upper pane and select Add [item].
4. Define the new item, then click OK.
To edit an item:
1. Select the item to edit.
2. Select Edit > Edit [item], or right-click and select Edit [item].
3. Edit the item’s properties.
To delete an item:
To delete an item:
1. Select the item to delete.
2. Select Edit > Delete [item], or right-click and select Delete [item].
Note: If the item is being used by an element, it cannot be deleted. In this case, a dialog appears telling you this. If you
want to see a list of which elements are using the item, click Yes.

Materials Library
The Materials library contains a wide variety of materials and textures that can be applied to element components. The
Materials library is displayed in the catalog panel when the Materials Paintbrush is active.
In the Materials library, materials are listed in groups (Concrete, Brick, Wood, etc.) so you can organize and find them easily.
You can add, rename and delete groups as needed. You can use the material filter to filter the materials list according to
specific usages, such as Flooring.
You can add new materials to the library, as well as edit and delete existing materials. When adding or editing materials,
you can select a color or texture file to apply to the material, and specify a number of different material properties.
The Materials library is part of the catalog. Any changes that you make to the Materials library will be available in future
projects.

Customizing the Materials Library

The materials library contains a vast array of materials that you can apply to elements. Even so, you may find that you want
to customize it at some point in time.
In the materials library, materials are listed in groups (Concrete, Brick, Wood, etc.) so you can organize and find them easily.
You can add, rename and delete groups as needed.
You can add new materials to the library, as well as edit and delete existing materials.
To access the materials library through the Library Manager:

1. Select File > Catalogs > Library Manager, or click the down arrow next to the Catalogs button on the Standard
toolbar and select Library Manager.
2. In the Library Manager, select Libraries > Materials.
To access the materials library through the Materials Paintbrush:
1. Go into a 3D view or 2D Designer’s View.

2. Select Edit > Materials Paintbrush, or click on any tabbed toolbar.

- 336 -
 Editing Material Properties

To access the materials library through an element:

1. Select an element either in your drawing or in the catalog panel.
2. Access the element’s properties.
3. In the properties dialog, select the Appearance tab.
4. Click the material swatch or the Select button in the Material pane.
To filter the material list:
1. Select a filter from the Filter drop box. This displays a particular set of material groups and types in the library. You
can customize the Material Filters library if you want.
To add a group:
1. Select Edit > Add Group, or right-click in the upper pane and select Add Group.
2. Type a name for the group, then press ENTER.
To rename a group:
1. Select the group in the upper pane.
2. Select Edit > Rename Group, or right-click and select Rename Group.
3. Type the new name, then press ENTER.
To delete a group:
1. Select the group in the upper pane.
2. Select Edit > Delete Group, or right-click and select Delete Group.
Note: A group cannot be deleted if it contains materials.
To add a new material:
1. In the upper pane, select the group you want to add the material to.
2. Select Edit > Add Material, or right-click in the material list and select Add Material.
3. In the Material Properties dialog, specify the name and properties of the material, then click OK.
To edit a material:
1. Select the material to edit.
2. Select Edit > Edit Material, or right-click and select Edit Material.
3. Edit the material properties in the Material Properties dialog.
To delete a material:
1. Select the material to delete.
2. Select Edit > Delete Material, or right-click and select Delete Material.
Note: If the material is being used by an element, it cannot be deleted. In this case, a dialog appears telling you this. If
you want to see a list of which elements are using the material, click Yes.

Editing Material Properties

When you are adding or editing a material in the materials library, you need to specify the material’s properties. These
properties determine the texture or color is used to display an element in the Rendered or Rendered Outline display mode,
and the texture characteristics (for example, how it interacts with light). Adjusting these properties can help you achieve
photorealistic results in 3D RealView renderings.
To edit the properties of a material:
1. Select the material to edit in the materials library.
2. Select Edit > Edit Material, or click the preview swatch.
3. Edit the properties in the Material Properties dialog. The properties are described below.
Properties Tab

- 337 -
Chapter 26: Libraries

Material Type. Determines the luminance or reflectance of the surface. When you choose a material type, only those
settings that apply to that type are available for editing.
Choose one of the following:
Generic. Material used to simulate most surface types. Lets you define each of the available factors (Opacity, Specular,
Reflection, etc.) without the restriction of any particular lighting model.
Diffuse. Simulates a rough or matte material that appears similarly bright from all viewing directions. Suited for
materials such as brick or matte paint.
Lambert. Simulates a matte or non-shiny surface with no specular highlights. Ideal for materials such as chalk, pottery,
matte paint, or unpolished surfaces.
Phong. Simulates a shiny surface with specular highlights. Commonly used for materials such as polished wood floors,
and metals.
Energy Preservation. Refers to the notion that the outgoing energy cannot be greater than the incoming energy. Based
on the combination of diffuse, opacity, and reflectivity components, this value will adjust automatically as you edit
these properties. For more realistic materials, this value should be equal to or less than 1.0.
Diffuse. The color or texture that you want to apply to the material, as seen in 3D rendered or rendered outline display
mode.
Enable the Color radio button to display the material in a solid color. Click the color swatch, then select the color you
want to use in the Color dialog. Use the slider to adjust the luminance of the diffuse color.
Enable the Texture radio button to apply a texture to the surface. To select a texture or specify texture mapping
properties, click the texture swatch to display the Texture Map dialog. See Editing Texture Mapping Properties.
Bump. Simulates bumps and wrinkles through small displacements on the surface. The modified surface is then used
for lighting calculations (for example, when using the Phong reflection model), giving the appearance of detail instead
of a smooth surface.
To use the texture selected in the Diffuse section as the Bump texture, ensure that the lock icon next to the Bump
texture swatch is closed. To select a different texture to use for the Bump texture, click the lock icon to unlock it, and
then make a selection the Texture Map dialog, ensuring that you set the Type to Normal Map. See Editing Texture
Mapping Properties.
To control the amount of bump mapping applied, edit the Bump Scale value. A value of 0 means no bump mapping
will be applied.
Emissive. The amount of light given off by a material. Click the Color swatch to select the color of light emitted. Use
the slider to adjust the level of emissivity. The more emissive a material is, the more self-luminous it appears.
Opacity. Determines how transparent the material is. Think of this as a mask being applied over the surface. Click the
Color swatch to select a color for the opacity mask. Use the Transparent/Opaque slider to adjust the level of
transparency. Use the Dull/Glossy slider to specify the glossiness of the opacity mask.
Specular. Reflection that creates highlights on materials, making them appear shiny. Click the Color swatch to select
a color for the specular highlights. Use the slider to adjust the intensity of the highlight color. The higher the value, the
lighter (and therefore shinier) the color. Use the Dull/Shiny slider to adjust the size of the highlights.
Reflection. Refers to the throwing back of light by a surface. Used to simulate used to reflective objects like mirrors
and shiny surfaces. Click the Color swatch to select a color for the reflected light. Use the slider to adjust the amount
of reflection. Use the Sharp/Blurred slider to determine whether the surface reflects the selected color, or its
surroundings. Note that the blurred effect may increase rendering time.
IOR. The Index of Refraction. This describes the way light bends when crossing the material surface. A value of 1.0
means the light will not change direction. Selecting a material from the drop box (e.g. Air, Water, Crystal, Glass, etc.)
populates the IOR edit box with the Index of Refraction for that material. If you would prefer to specify a custom value,
select Custom from the drop box, then specify a value in the IOR edit box.
Fresnel. When enabled, the reflection strength becomes dependent on the viewing angle of the surface. Some materials
in nature (glass, etc.) reflect light in this manner. Note that the Fresnel effect depends on the Index of Refraction as well.
Sphere/Box. Specifies the way the 2D texture is applied to a 3D object. The basis of Sphere mapping is to treat the
object as if it were a sphere. A single texture is applied to the whole object, and the texture mapping coordinates are
generated based on the angle of the surface at each point. Box mapping creates a rectangular bounding box around the
element, then applies a texture to each of the box’s 6 sides. This would be useful for an element such as a sofa.

- 338 -
 Using Textures from Outside Sources

Information Tab
From the Material Usage drop box, select a usage for the material. You can access the Material Usages library by

clicking next to this drop box. Usages can be applied to material filters, which are used for filtering the materials list.

To apply an assembly to the material, click next to the Assembly drop box, then select an assembly from the
Assembly library. Assemblies enable you to apply pricing information to a material so that it is accounted for in the
project cost. You can then see the material pricing in the project estimate, or choose to ignore it if you wish.
From the Manufacturer drop box, select the material’s manufacturer. You can access the Manufacturers library by

clicking next to this drop box.

Using Textures from Outside Sources

When changing a material’s texture assignment, you can use textures (bitmaps) from outside sources provided they are
appropriately sized and not too large. As a rule, the texture’s dimensions should be a power of 2:
2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, etc.
If the dimensions are not powers of 2, the texture will be cropped (from the top and right side) to the next smallest size. For
some textures, this will make it look like the texture is cut off.
For example, if your texture is 500 x 500, it will be cropped down to 256 x 256, since 500 is not a power of 2. If the texture
were 512 x 512, however, it would not be cropped.
Cropping is not that important if the texture is a grid pattern (such as brick), since such a texture is uniform throughout.
However, cropping can have an undesirable result if the texture is something like a tree.

Specifying the Location of the Textures Directory

By default, textures are located in the following directory:
C:\ProgramData\Nova Development\Virtual Architect\Textures
If you move your Textures directory to another location on your system, or would like to link to another Textures directory
(such as one from an older version of the program), you will need to specify the location of the Textures directory so that
textures appear properly in the program.
To specify the location of your Textures directory:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Program Settings dialog, select the General tab.
3. In the File Paths area, click on the Textures Directory to select it.
4. Click Modify.
5. In the Browse For Folder dialog, locate the folder containing your textures, then click OK.
6. Click OK in the Program Settings dialog.

Material Usages Library

Material usages are a way of defining what a material is used for. For example, Carpet is typically used for floors and
surfaces, but not for doors or walls. Most materials in the materials library have a usage assigned to them in their properties.
Usages are used to create material filters, which can be used in the materials library to filter the display of materials.
You can add, edit and delete material usages to suit your needs.
By default, you can apply any material to an element. However, if you enable the Enforce Material Usages option in your
program settings, you can prevent materials from being applied to an element for which the materials are not intended.

Enforcing Material Usages

By default, you can apply any material to an element. However, if you enable the Enforce Material Usages option in your
program settings, you can prevent materials from being applied to an element for which the materials are not intended. For
example, you would be warned if you tried to apply a brick material to a roof.

- 339 -
Chapter 26: Libraries

To enforce material usages:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click the Program Settings button on the Settings toolbar.
2. In the Program Settings dialog, select Building Aids in the left column.
3. Enable the Enforce Material Usages check box.
4. Click OK.
If the Enforce Material Usages option is enabled and you try to apply a material to an element for which it is not intended,
the Material Usage Conflict dialog appears. At this point you can click Yes to apply the material anyway, or click No to
select another material to apply.

Note: Materials are assigned usages in their properties. Usages are defined in the Material Usages Library.

Customizing the Material Usages Library

Material usages are a way of defining what a material is used for. For example, Carpet is typically used for floors and
surfaces, but not for doors or walls. Most materials in the materials library have a usage assigned to them in their properties.
Usages are used to create material filters, which can be used in the materials library to filter the display of materials.
You can add, edit and delete material usages to suit your needs.
To access the Material Usages library through the Library Manager:

1. Select File > Catalogs > Library Manager, or click the down arrow next to the Catalogs button on the Standard
toolbar and select Library Manager.
2. In the Library Manager, select Libraries > Material Usages.
To access the Material Usages library through a material:
1. Select the material in the Materials library, then right-click and select Edit Material.

2. In the Material Properties dialog, click next to the Material Usage drop box.
To add a new usage:
1. Select Edit > Add Material Usage, or right-click in the Material Usages window and select Add Material Usage.
To edit an existing usage:
1. Select it in the list, then select Edit > Edit Material Usage, or right-click in the Material Usages window and select Edit
Material Usage.
To define a usage:
1. In the Material Usage Properties dialog, specify or edit the usage name in the Name edit box.
2. To select or de-select elements to include in the usage, just click on them. Elements marked with a red ‘X’ will not be
included.
3. Click OK to return to the Material Usages library.
To delete a usage from the library:
1. Select it, then select Edit > Delete Material Usage, or right-click and select Delete Material Usage.
To view the properties of an existing usage:
1. Select the usage, then select Edit > View Material Usage, or right-click and select View Material Usage.
2. Click OK.

Material Filters Library

Material filters are used in the materials library to filter the materials list according to specific usages. For example, the
Flooring filter will list material types such as carpet, tile, concrete and wood. This can make it easier to find the material
you’re looking for when editing materials or using the Materials Paintbrush.
You can edit a material filter by selecting the usages that you want it to include. You can also add or delete material filters.

- 340 -
 Filtering the Materials Library

Filtering the Materials Library

You can use a filter in the materials library to filter the materials list according to specific usages. For example, the Flooring
filter will list material types such as carpet, tile, concrete and wood. This can make it easier to find the material you’re
looking for when editing materials or using the Materials Paintbrush.
To filter the materials library:
1. In the Materials library, make a selection from the Filter drop box.

Customizing the Material Filters Library

Material filters are used in the materials library to filter the materials list according to specific usages. For example, the
Flooring filter will list material types such as carpet, tile, concrete and wood. This can make it easier to find the material
you’re looking for when editing materials or using the Materials Paintbrush.
You can add and edit material filters in the Material Filters library to suit your needs.
To customize the Material Filters library:

1. Select File > Catalogs > Library Manager, or click the down arrow next to the Catalogs button on the Standard
toolbar and select Library Manager.
2. In the Library Manager, select Libraries > Material Filters.
3. To add a new filter, select Edit > Add Material Filter, or right-click in the Material Filters window and select Add Ma-
terial Filter.
4. To edit an existing filter, select it in the list, then select Edit > Edit Material Filter, or right-click in the Material Filters
window and select Edit Material Filter.
5. In the Material Filter Properties dialog, you can specify or edit the filter name in the Name edit box.
6. To select or de-select usages, just click on them. Usages marked with a green check mark will be included in the filter.
For more information about usages, see Customizing the Material Usages Library on page 340.
7. Click OK to return to the Material Filters library.
8. To delete a filter from the library, select it, then select Edit > Delete Material Filter, or right-click and select Delete Ma-
terial Filter.
9. To view the properties of an existing filter, select it, then select Edit > View Material Filter, or right-click and select
View Material Filter.
10. Click OK.

Patterns Library
The Patterns library contains an excellent selection of pre-defined patterns that you can apply to materials, and use when
creating hatching. Patterns are displayed when you set your display mode to Patterned.
You can create, edit and import patterns to suit your needs. Each pattern has a set of properties that determine its
appearance, such as the number of lines, line pattern definition, angle, and offset.

Customizing the Patterns Library

The patterns library contains an excellent selection of pre-defined patterns that you can apply to materials. You can create,
edit and import patterns to suit your needs.
To access the patterns library through the Library Manager:

1. Select File > Catalogs > Library Manager, or click the down arrow next to the Catalogs button on the Standard
toolbar and select Library Manager.
2. In the Library Manager, select Libraries > Patterns.
To access the patterns library through an element:
1. Access the element’s properties.
2. In the properties dialog, select the Appearance tab.

- 341 -
Chapter 26: Libraries

3. In the Pattern pane, click the pattern swatch or the Select button.
To add a pattern:
1. Select Edit > Add Pattern, or right-click in the Patterns window and select Add Pattern.
2. Define the pattern properties, then click OK.
To edit a pattern:
1. Select the pattern in the list.
2. Select Edit > Edit Pattern, or right-click in the Patterns window and select Edit Pattern.
3. Define the pattern properties, then click OK.
To delete a pattern from the patterns list:
1. Select the pattern in the list.
2. Select Edit > Delete Pattern, or right-click and select Delete Pattern, or simply click the Delete key on your keyboard.
Note: You cannot delete the pre-existing patterns that come with the program — only those that you have created or
imported.
To import a pattern (PAT file):
1. Click Load.
2. In the Open dialog, locate the PAT file you want to import, then click Open. The pattern is added to the patterns library.
Note: Some pattern files, such as those from applications like AutoCAD®, can be compound pattern files. If importing
a compound pattern file, you may see a number of patterns added to your patterns list.

Editing a Pattern
You can edit a pattern’s scale and line definition.
To edit a pattern:
1. In the Patterns library, select the pattern you want to edit.
2. To edit the scale of a pattern, enter a value in the Scale edit box. A value of 2 doubles the original scale, while a value
of .5 halves the original scale.
3. To edit the pattern’s line definition, fill out the fields in the Pattern Definition pane.
No. of Lines. The number of lines that will repeat in the pattern. Usually, this will be 1 or 2, but it could be more
depending on the complexity of the pattern.
Edit Line. The line you are currently editing.
Definition. Generally, the segment lengths and spaces in the line’s pattern.
A single value (other than 0) creates a solid line.

For dashed patterns, segments and spaces can be different lengths, but spaces must be preceded by a negative sign to
indicate they are spaces.
For example, a definition of 20,-5,10,-5 (in Metric) creates the following pattern: 20 mm dash, 5 mm space, 10 mm dash,
5 mm space.

- 342 -
 Manufacturers Library

X Origin. The point on the X axis the line passes through.

Y Origin. The point on the Y axis the line passes through.
Angle. The angle of the line in degrees.
Offset. The spacing between lines as the line is repeated (offset) parallel to the original throughout the pattern.
Shift. The distance each offset line is shifted (left or right) from the origin of the previous line. This creates a staggered
effect.

Manufacturers Library
The Manufacturers library contains several manufacturers of materials found in the materials library. You can add
manufacturers to the library, as well as edit and delete existing manufacturers. Manufacturer information includes the
manufacturer name, logo and contact information. You can then attach manufacturer information to elements and materials.
You can choose to display manufacturer logos in the catalog, on the property pages of elements, and in the Materials dialog.

Setting Up the Manufacturers Library

The manufacturers library contains several manufacturers of materials found in the materials library. You can add
manufacturers to the library, as well as edit and delete existing manufacturers. Each manufacturer has name, logo and
contact information. You can then attach manufacturer information to elements and materials.
To access the manufacturers library directly:
1. Select File > Catalogs > Manufacturers. Or, open the Library Manager and select Libraries > Manufacturers.
To access the manufacturer’s library through an element:
1. Access the element’s properties.
2. In the properties dialog, select the Quantity tab.

3. Click next to the Manuf edit box.

To access the manufacturers library through a material:
1. Select the material in the Materials library, then right-click and select Edit Material.

2. In the Material Properties dialog, click next to the Manufacturer drop box.
To add a new manufacturer to the list:
1. Select Edit > Add Manufacturer, or right-click in the list window and select Add Manufacturer.
To edit an existing manufacturer:
1. Select the manufacturer in the list, then select Edit > Edit Manufacturer, or right-click and select Edit Manufacturer.
2. In the Manufacturer Properties dialog, fill out the name and contact information fields. To select a logo if you have
one, click inside the Logo pane, then select the logo file in the Open dialog. You can use JPG, BMP and TGA files.
3. Click OK to return to the Manufacturers dialog.

- 343 -
Chapter 26: Libraries

To delete a manufacturer, select it in the list:

1. Select Edit > Delete Manufacturer, or right-click and select Delete Manufacturer.

Attaching Manufacturer Information to an Element

You can attach manufacturer information to an element in the catalog, or in the drawing. You can then view the
manufacturer information any time you are viewing the element’s properties.
To attach manufacturer information to an element:
1. Access the element’s properties.
2. In the properties dialog, select the Quantity tab.

3. Click next the Manuf: edit box.

4. In the Manufacturers dialog, select the manufacturer you want to attach to the element. You can add or edit manufac-
turers if necessary.
5. Click OK.

Note: Attaching a manufacturer to an element in your drawing applies the information to that particular instance of the
element only. Other instances or future insertions of the element are unaffected.

Attaching Manufacturer Information to a Material

You can attach manufacturer information to materials in your materials library. You can then view the manufacturer
information any time you are viewing the material’s properties.
To attach manufacturer information to a material:
1. Access the Materials library.
2. Select the material that you want to edit, then select Edit > Edit Material, or right-click and select Edit Material, or sim-
ply click on the swatch.
3. In the Material Properties dialog, click the manufacturer drop box and select the desired manufacturer from the list.
4. Click OK.

Displaying Manufacturer Logos in the Catalog and Property Pages

If you have attached manufacturer information to elements or materials, and that information includes logos, you can
choose to display the logos in the catalog, on the property pages of elements, and in the Materials dialog. The logo appears
above the preview of the element or material.
To display manufacturer logos:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Program Settings dialog, click Workspace in the left column.
3. In the Tool Display area, enable the Manufacturer Logos check box.
4. Click OK.

Text Styles Library

A text style determines the font, style, size and color of the text it is applied to. The Text Styles library is accessible from the
Text dialog whenever you are inserting text in your drawing.
You can add your own text styles to the Text Styles library as well as edit and delete the existing text styles.

Customizing the Text Styles Library

You can add your own text styles to the text styles library as well as edit and delete the existing text styles.

- 344 -
 Dimension Styles Library

To customize the text styles library:

1. If you are currently in the Text dialog, click the Text Style button. If you are not currently in the Text dialog you can
launch it by selecting a Text tool.
For direct access to text styles library, select File > Catalogs > Library Manager. In the Library Manager dialog, select
Libraries > Text Styles.
2. To add a new text style to the list, select Edit > Add Text Style, or right-click in the text style window and select Add
Text Style.
3. To edit an existing text style, select it in the list, then select Edit > Edit Text Style, or right-click and select Edit Text
Style. You can also click inside the lower pane of the Text Styles dialog.
4. In the Text Style Properties dialog, type a name for the text style in the Name edit box.
5. From the Font drop box, select a font to use.
6. From the Font Style drop box, select a style for the font. Choices can include Regular, Italic, Bold, and Bold Italic.
7. In the Height edit box, specify the desired text height.
8. Click the Color swatch to access the Color dialog, where you can select a color for the text.
9. Click OK to return to the Text Styles dialog.
10. To delete an existing text style, select it in the list, then select Edit > Delete Text Style, or right-click in the style window
and select Delete Text Style.
11. Click OK.

Dimension Styles Library

A dimension style determines the appearance of the dimension it is applied to. You can add, edit and delete dimension styles
in the Dimension Styles library to suit your needs.
Dimension styles have a variety of customizable properties that define the dimension line, extension lines, leader, and
dimension text.

Customizing the Dimension Styles Library

You can add your own dimension styles to the dimension styles library as well as edit and delete the existing dimension
styles.
To customize the dimension styles library:
1. If you have inserted dimensions in your current project, you can access the dimension styles library by selecting a di-
mension, then right-clicking and selecting Change Style. If you do not have dimensions inserted yet you can select
Tools > Dimensions > Current Dimension Style and click Select in the Current Dimension Style dialog.
For direct access to the dimension styles library, select File > Catalogs > Library Manager. In the Library Manager
dialog, select Libraries > Dimension Styles.
2. To add a new dimension style to the list, select Edit > Add Dimension Style, or right-click in the dimension style win-
dow and select Add Dimension Style.
3. To edit an existing dimension style, select it in the list, then select Edit > Edit Dimension Style, or right-click and select
Edit Dimension Style. You can also click inside the lower pane of the Dimension Styles dialog.
4. In the Dimension Style Properties dialog, type a name for the dimension style in the Name edit box.
5. Define the dimension style.
6. To delete an existing dimension style, select it in the list, then select Delete Dimension Style, or right-click in the style
window and select Delete Dimension Style.
7. Click OK.

- 345 -
Chapter 26: Libraries

Dimension Style Properties

Anatomy of a Dimension

Dimension tab
Arrow Type. You can select the type of symbol you want displayed at the ends of the dimension line. Choose an arrow, dot
or tick for your arrow type.

The properties below the Arrow Type selection window (Extension Offset, Baseline Offset, etc.) vary depending on the
arrow type selected. As you make different selections, the dimension updates in the preview window.

Some of the common properties include:

Extension Offset. The distance between the end of the extension line and the object being dimensioned.
Dimension Lap. The distance the dimension line extends past the ends of the dimension. (The "ends" of the dimension are
where the dimension line and extension lines intersect.)
Extension Lap. The distance the extension lines extend past the dimension line.
Baseline Offset. The distance between dimensions when the Baseline Dimension tool is used.
Leader tab
Arrow Type. You can specify the type of symbol you want to display at the end of leaders. (Leaders are used with the Text
with Leader tool.) Choose an arrow, dot or tick for your arrow type.

The properties below the Arrow Type selection window (Arrow Length, Landing Gap, Leader Position, etc.) vary
depending on the arrow type selected. As you make different selections, the dimension updates in the preview window.

Common properties include:

Landing Gap. The distance between the end of the leader line and the object being annotated.
Leader Position. The justification of the leader in relation to the text (choose Top, Middle or Bottom). For example, a Top
leader position aligns the leader with the top of the text.

- 346 -
 Line Styles Library

Text tab

Click to select a style for the dimension text. A text style determines the font, font style, text height and color of
text.

Vertical Text Position

This is the vertical position of the dimension text relative to the dimension line.
Vertically Centered: Text is placed inside the dimension line.
Horizontal Text: Forces the dimension text to always be horizontal, regardless of the dimension line’s angle.
Above Dimension Line: Text is placed above the dimension line.
Distance: Distance between the text and the dimension line when placing text above the dimension line.

Horizontal Text Position

This is the position of the dimension text relative to the ends of the dimension line.
Centered: Centers the text inside the dimension line.
Distance from first end: Places the text a specific distance from the first end of the dimension. Specify the distance in the
Distance edit box.
Distance from the second end: Places the text a specific distance from the second end of the dimension. Specify the
distance in the Distance edit box.

Units
Override system units: Uses the unit of measure specified in the Dimension Style Properties dialog instead of the unit of
measure specified in the Program Settings.
Units\Distance: The units used for dimensions that measure a distance.
Type: Choose from Feet-Inches, Millimeters, Centimeters, Meters or Inches.
Precision: For Feet-Inches, the choices are whole units (0, 1/2, 1/4 and so on). For metric units, the choices are number of
decimal places you can use.
Units\Angle: The units used for angular dimensions.
Type: Choose either Decimal Degrees or Degrees/Minutes/Seconds.
Precision: Choose the number of decimal places you would like angular dimensions to have (if using Decimal Degrees).
Line Styles tab
Refers to the line styles of the dimension line, extension lines and arrows. You can select a different line style for the
dimension line, extension lines and arrows. A line style determines the pattern, color and weight of a line.
To assign a different line style to a dimension component, select the component in the left pane, then click Select in the
center pane to access the Line Styles dialog.

Line Styles Library

A line style defines the pattern, color and thickness of a line. The Line Styles library contains a wide selection of line styles
that you can apply to elements, drafting objects, electrical wiring and dimension styles.
In the Line Styles library, line styles are listed in groups so you can organize and find them easily. You can add, rename and
delete groups as needed.
You can add new line styles to the library, as well as edit and delete existing line styles.

Customizing the Line Styles Library

A line style defines the pattern, color and thickness of a line. The line styles library contains a wide selection of line styles
that you can apply to elements, drafting objects, electrical wiring and dimension styles. You can access the line styles library
by editing the properties of an element, drafting object, wiring or dimension style, or through the Libraries menu in the
Library Manager.

- 347 -
Chapter 26: Libraries

In the line styles library, line styles are listed in groups so you can organize and find them easily. You can add, rename and
delete groups as needed. You can add new line styles to the library, as well as edit and delete existing line styles.
To access the line styles library through the Library Manager:

1. Select File > Catalogs > Library Manager, or click the down arrow next to the Catalogs button on the Standard
toolbar and select Library Manager.
2. In the Library Manager, select Libraries > Line Styles.
To access the line styles library through an inserted element:
1. Select the element.
2. Right-click and select Properties.
3. In the properties dialog, select the Appearance tab.
4. Click the Select button in the Linestyle area.
To access the line styles library through a drafting object:
1. Select the drafting object (line, circle, etc.).
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
To access the line styles library through inserted electrical wiring:
1. Select the wiring in your drawing.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.
To access the line styles library by editing a dimension style:
1. Select Settings > Dimension Styles. Or, select a dimension in your drawing, then right-click and select Change Style.
2. In the Dimension Styles dialog, Edit > Edit Dimension Style.
3. In the Dimension Style Properties dialog, select the Line Styles tab, then click Select.
To add a group:
1. Right-click an existing group and select Add Group, or select Edit > Add Group. An entry is added to the list.
2. Type a name for the group, then press ENTER.
To rename a group:
1. Select the group in the upper pane.
2. Right-click and select Rename Group, or select Edit > Rename Group.
3. Type the new name and press ENTER.
To delete a group:
1. Select the group to delete.
2. Right-click and select Delete Group, or select Edit > Delete Group.
Note: A group cannot be deleted if it contains line styles.
To add or edit a line style:
1. In the upper pane, select the group that you want to add the line style to, or that contains the line style to edit.
2. To add a new line style, select Edit > Add Line Style, or right-click and select Add Line Style.
3. To edit an existing line style, select it in the list, then select Edit > Edit Line Style, or right-click and select Edit Line
Style.
4. In the Line Style Properties dialog, define the line style’s properties.
Name. Type a name for the line style as you would like it to appear in the list of line styles.
Line Type. Click the browse button to select a line type (continuous, dashed, etc.) from the line type library. You can
customize the line types library if needed.
Line Weight. Click the browse button to select a line weight (light, heavy, etc.) from the line weight library. You can
also customize the line weights library.

- 348 -
 Line Types Library

Color. Click the color swatch to select a color for the line from the Color dialog.
5. Click OK.
To delete a line style:
1. Select the line style to delete.
2. Select Edit > Delete Line Style, or right-click and select Delete Line Style.
If the line style is being used by an element, a dialog appears telling you this. You can click Yes to view a list of elements
using the line style.

Line Types Library

The term "line type" refers to the style of a line — dashed, continuous, dotted, etc. Line types are one of the properties that
define a line style. Therefore, the Line Types library is accessible from the Line Styles library when you are defining a line
style. You can also access the Line Types library when defining a layer.
The Line Types library contains a list of pre-defined line types that you can apply to line styles. You can add, edit or delete
line types to suit your needs.

Customizing the Line Types Library

Line type refers to the style of a line (dashed, dotted, continuous, etc.). It is one of the properties of a line style and a layer.
The Line Types library contains a list of pre-defined line types for your convenience. You can add or edit line types to suit
your needs.
To access the line types library:
1. Select File > Catalogs > Library Manager. You can also access the line types library while defining a line style or layer.
2. In the Library Manager dialog, select Libraries > Linetypes.
To add a new line type:
1. Select Edit > Add Item, or right-click in the Line Types window and select Add Item. A new entry is added to the list.
To edit a line type:
1. Select the line type in the list.
2. In the Name edit box, type a name for the line type as you would like it to appear in the list of line types.
3. In the Definition edit box, edit the line type’s definition. Lines are defined by a series of distances separated by commas.
Each number represents the length of either a line segment or space. Positive numbers create a line segment of the spec-
ified length. Negative numbers create a space of the specified length. For example, a dashed line may have a definition
like 1/4”, -1/4”.
4. Once you’ve edited the line type, click OK.
To delete a line type from the list:
1. Select the line type in the list.
2. Right-click and select Delete Item, or select Edit > Delete Item.
Note: You cannot delete the existing, pre-defined line types because they are being used.

Line Weights Library

Line weight refers to the thickness of a line, and is one of the properties of a line style. You can access the Line Weights library
when defining a line style or a layer.
The Line Weights library contains a list of pre-defined line weights that you can apply to line styles. You can add, edit or
delete line weights to suit your needs.

Customizing the Line Weights Library

Line weight refers to the thickness of a line, and is one of the properties of a line style, as well as a layer. You can add and
edit line weights to suit your needs.

- 349 -
Chapter 26: Libraries

To access the line weights library:

1. Select File > Catalogs > Library Manager. You can also access the line weights library while defining a line style or
layer.
2. In the Library Manager dialog, select Libraries > Lineweights.
To add a new line weight:
1. Select Edit > Add Item, or right-click in the Line Weight window and select Add Item. A new entry is added to the list.
To edit a line weight:
1. Select the line weight in the list.
2. In the Name edit box, type a name for the line weight as you would like it to appear in the list of line weights.
3. In the Thickness edit box, type the desired thickness for the line.
4. Once you’ve edited the line weight, click OK.
To delete a line weight from the list:
1. Select the line weight in the list.
2. Right-click and select Delete Item, or select Edit > Delete Item.
Note: You cannot delete the existing, pre-defined line weights because they are being used.

Enabling/Disabling Line Weights

By default, line weights are not displayed. All lines are displayed using the same thickness. If you enable the Show Line
Weights option, line weights will display in your drawing area as well as in printouts.
To enable or disable the display of line weights:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Program Settings dialog, click Workspace in the left column.
3. In the Linework area, check or uncheck the Show Line Weights check box.
4. Click OK.

Layers Library
Layers control the color, style and weight of lines used to display objects in 2D plan view. Layers are assigned to components
in an element’s properties.
The Layers Library contains a wide variety of pre-defined layers for your convenience. You can add, edit, rename and delete
layers in the Layers Library. Layers defined in the Layers Library are saved to the catalog and will be available in all projects.

Customizing the Layers Library

You can add, edit, rename and delete layers in the Layers Library. When you define a layer you can specify its name, color,
line type and line weight. Layers defined in the Layers Library are saved to the catalog and will be available in all projects.
Layers can be assigned to element components on the element’s Appearance property page.
To access the layers library through the Library Manager:

1. Select File > Catalogs > Library Manager, or click the down arrow next to the Catalogs button on the Standard
toolbar and select Library Manager.
2. In the Library Manager, select Libraries > Layers.
To access the layers library through an element:
1. Double-click an element in your drawing or in the catalog panel.
2. In the properties dialog, select the Appearance tab.
3. Click the Layer drop box, and then select Other in the layer list.

- 350 -
 Light Source Library

To access the layers library through the catalog panel:

1. Right-click in the catalog panel and select Library Manager.
2. In the Library Manager select Libraries > Layers.
To add or edit a layer:

1. To create a new layer, click , or right-click in the layer list and select Add. You can also click
and select Add. A new layer called Layer 1 is added below the currently selected layer.
2. To edit an existing layer, select it in the list, then click on the properties that you want to change. These are described
below.
Name. The name of the layer as you would like it to appear in the list of layers. Double-click to edit, or select it and click

.
Color. The color of objects on the layer. Click the box to display a list of colors. Select the desired color, or select Other
to access the Color dialog.
Line Type. The style of line used to display objects on the layer. Click the box to display a list of line types. Select the
desired line type, or select Other to access the Line Types dialog.
Line Weight. The weight of the line used to display objects on the layer. Click the box to display a list of line weights.
Select the desired line weight, or select Other to access the Line Weights dialog.
To delete a layer:
1. Select the later to delete.

2. Click , or right-click and select Delete.

Light Source Library

The Light Source library contains an assortment of light sources, mainly fluorescent and incandescent light bulbs, that can
be applied to lighting fixtures.
Light sources are organized by group in the library so you can find them easily. You can add, rename or delete groups in
the Light Source library.
Each light source has an .IES photometric data file assigned to it. It also has a Scale setting that determines the light’s
intensity, and a Color setting that determines the color of the light. You can add, edit and delete light sources in the Light
Source library to suit your needs. Most manufacturers of lighting equipment provide downloadable .IES photometric data
files free of charge on their web sites for use in lighting calculations.

Customizing the Light Source Library

The light source library contains an assortment of light sources, mainly fluorescent and incandescent light bulbs, that can be
applied to lighting fixtures.
You can customize the light source library by adding and editing light sources. Most manufacturers of lighting equipment
provide downloadable .IES photometric data files free of charge on their web sites for use in lighting calculations. You can
also define a light as a Point or Spot light. Once you’ve added a light source to your library, you can edit its intensity and
color if you want.
Light sources are listed in groups so you can organize and find them easily. You can create, rename and delete groups.
To access the light source library in the Library Manager:

1. Select File > Catalogs > Library Manager, or click the down arrow next to the Catalogs button on the Standard
toolbar and select Library Manager.
2. In the Library Manager, select Libraries > Light Sources.
To access the light source library through an inserted light fixture:
1. Select the light fixture.
2. Right-click and select Properties, or select Edit > Modify Elements > Properties.

- 351 -
Chapter 26: Libraries

3. In the Lights dialog, select the Lights tab.

4. Click Add or Edit to access the light source library.
To add a group:
1. Right-click an existing group and select Add Group, or select Edit > Add Group. An entry is added to the list.
2. Type a name for the group, then press ENTER.
To rename a group:
1. Select the group to rename.
2. Right-click and select Rename Group, or select Edit > Rename Group.
3. Type the new name and press ENTER.
To delete a group:
1. Select the group to delete.
2. Right-click and select Delete Group, or select Edit > Delete Group.
Note: A group cannot be deleted if it contains light sources.
To add or edit a light source:
1. Select the group you want to add the light source to, or that contains the light source.
2. To add a new light source, select Edit > Add Light, or right-click and select Add Light.
3. To edit an existing light source, select it in the list, then select Edit > Edit Light, or right-click and select Edit Light.
4. In the Light Source Properties dialog, define the light source’s properties.
Name. Type a name for the light source as you would like it to appear in the list of light sources.
Type. Choose either IES, Point or Spot. IES files are photometric data files provided by lighting manufacturers for the
purposes of lighting calculations. A Point light spreads its light out equally in all directions. A Spot light spreads light
in one direction from its source to the target, and there is no light behind the source. The spot light sheds its light only
within a limited cone that grows wider as light moves further away from its origin. A good example of a spot light is a
flashlight.

Load. If IES is selected as the type, click Load to select an *.ies file to apply to the light source. Many *.ies files can be
found in the program’s Lights folder.
Intensity (lumens). The level of brightness, measured in lumens. Lumens measure how much light you are getting
from a bulb. More lumens means a brighter light; fewer lumens means a dimmer light. This value can be edited for
Point and Spot lights only.
Intensity scale. This is the intensity of the light expressed as a percentage. For example, if the light source is a 60 Watt
bulb, a value of 50% would make the bulb function like a 30 Watt bulb.
Spot light cone angle. Available if the light source type is set to Spot, this value determines the width of the cone in
which light is spread. A wider angle means that the light has a larger spread.

- 352 -
 Specifying the Location of the Light Source Directory

Color temperature. A measurement in degrees kelvin that indicates the hue of a light source. Color temperatures over
5,000K are called cool colors (bluish white), while lower color temperatures (2,700–3,000 K) are called warm colors
(yellowish white through red).
Choose color. To change the color of the light, click the color swatch and select a color from the Color dialog.
5. Click OK.
To delete a light source:
1. Select the light source in the list.
2. Right-click and select Delete Light, or select Edit > Delete Light, or just press the Delete key on your keyboard.

Specifying the Location of the Light Source Directory

By default, light sources are located in the following directory:
C:\ProgramData\Nova Development\Virtual Architect\Lights
If you move your Lights directory to another location on your system, you will need to specify the location of the Lights
directory so that light sources can be accessed by the program.
To specify the location of your light source directory:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. On the General pane, click on the Lights Directory in the File Paths area.
3. Click Modify.
4. In the Browse For Folder dialog, locate the folder containing your light sources, then click OK.
5. Click OK in the Program Settings dialog.

Profiles Library
The term "profile" refers to the outline of an object when viewed from the side. Profiles can be applied to members and
columns.
In the Profiles library, profiles are listed in groups so you can organize and find them easily. You can add, rename and delete
groups as needed.
You can edit profiles in the Profiles library, but it is easier to create a new profile. You create a profile by drawing a series of
lines and/or arcs, and specifying the angle of each segment.
You can delete unwanted profiles from the library if you want.

Customizing the Profiles Library

The profiles library contains a variety of custom profiles that can be applied to members and columns.
In the profiles library, profiles are listed in groups so you can organize and find them easily. You can add, rename and delete
groups as needed. You can add new profiles to the library, as well as edit and delete existing profiles.
You can access the profiles library by editing the properties of a member or column, or through the Libraries menu in the
Library Manager.
To access the profiles library through the Library Manager:

1. Select File > Catalogs > Library Manager, or click the down arrow next to the Catalogs button on the Standard
toolbar and select Library Manager.
2. In the Library Manager, select Libraries > Profiles.
To access the profiles library through an inserted member or column:
1. Select the column or member in your drawing, then right-click and select Properties.
2. In the Type area of the Basic property page, scroll over and select Custom.
3. Click the Select Profile button at the bottom of the dialog.

- 353 -
Chapter 26: Libraries

To access the profiles library through the catalog:

1. Select the column or member in the catalog panel, then right-click and select Edit Element.
2. In the Type area of the Basic property page, scroll over and select Custom.
3. Click the Select Profile button at the bottom of the dialog.
To add a group:
1. Right-click an existing group and select Add Group, or select Edit > Add Group. An entry is added to the list.
2. Type a name for the group, then press ENTER.
To rename a group:
1. Select the group to edit.
2. Right-click and select Rename Group, or select Edit > Rename Group.
3. Type the new name and press ENTER.
To delete a group:
1. Select the group to delete.
2. Right-click and select Delete Group, or select Edit > Delete Group.
Note: A group cannot be deleted if it contains profiles.
To add a new profile:
1. Select the group that you want to add the profile to.
2. Select Edit > Add Profile, or right-click and select Add Profile. See Creating Custom Profiles on page 354.
To edit a profile:
1. Select the profile that you would like to edit.
2. Select Edit > Edit Profile, or right-click and select Edit Profile. See Editing a Custom Profile on page 355.
To delete a profile:
1. Select the profile that you would like to delete.
2. Select Edit > Delete Profile, or right-click and select Delete Profile.

Creating Custom Profiles

You can create your own profiles for members, columns and strip footings. To create a custom profile you simply define the
length and angle of each of the profile’s segments. Segments can be straight or curved.
To add a profile to the profiles library:
1. Access the profiles library.
2. In the Profiles dialog, right-click in the Profiles window and select Add Profile. Or, select Edit > Add Profile.
3. In the Profile Properties dialog, enter a name for the profile in the Name edit box. You are now ready to start defining
each of the profile’s segments. Each segment is automatically joined to the previous one to help you form the shape.

4. To draw a line, click in the Properties area, then enter a length in the Distance edit box and a direction in the Angle
edit box. Click Insert to insert the line in the preview window.
Note that the segment lengths you specify are simply units (not inches or millimeters) and have no relation to the actual
member size — they determine how long one segment is in relation to another.

5. To draw an arc, click . Enter a length for the arc in the Distance edit box. This is the distance between the start point
and end point. Enter a direction in the Angle edit box. Enter the radius for the curve of the arc in the Radius edit box,
then select either Left or Right from the Arc Direction drop box to specify the direction in which you want the arc to
curve from the start point. Click Insert to insert the arc in the preview window.
6. To remove the last segment created, click Remove. Clicking Remove again continues to remove segments in reverse
sequence.

- 354 -
 Editing a Custom Profile

7. To close the shape, click Close. A line is drawn from the end point of the last segment created to the start point of the
first segment created.
8. When the profile is complete, click OK.

Editing a Custom Profile

You can edit existing profiles by removing and redrawing segments.
To edit an existing profile:
1. Access the profiles library.
2. In the Profiles dialog, select the profile that you would like to edit.
3. Right-click in the Profiles window and select Edit Profile. Or, select Edit > Edit Profile.
4. Make your changes in the Profile Properties dialog. Note that you cannot select specific segments to edit. You can re-
move segments in reverse sequence (starting with the last one drawn) and then insert new segments.
5. Click OK.

Note: Due to the nature in which profiles are created, it may be easier to create a new profile rather than edit an existing one.

Door Leafs Library

The Door Leafs library contains door leafs that can be applied to doors in the catalog or in your drawing.
You can customize the door leafs library by adding or editing groups, and adding and editing door leafs.
You add door leafs to the library by importing DWG, DXF, SKP or 3DS files.

Customizing the Door Leafs Library

The Door Leafs library contains door leafs that can be applied to doors in the catalog or in your drawing.
You can add, rename and delete door leaf groups, and add new door leafs by importing a DWG, DXF, SKP or 3DS drawing.
You can also edit and delete existing door leafs.
You can access the Door Leaf library by editing the properties of a door, or through the Libraries menu in the Library
Manager.
To access the Door Leafs library through the Library Manager:

1. Select File > Catalogs > Library Manager, or click the down arrow next to the Catalogs button on the Standard
toolbar and select Library Manager.
2. In the Library Manager, select Libraries > Door Leafs.
To access the Door Leafs library through an inserted door:
1. Select the door in your drawing, then right-click and select Properties.
2. Select the Properties tab, then in the Type area, scroll over and select Custom.
To access the Door Leafs library through the catalog:
1. Select a door in the catalog panel, then right-click and select Edit Element.
2. Select the Properties tab, then in the Type area, scroll over and select Custom.
To add a group:
1. Right-click an existing group and select Add Group, or select Edit > Add Group. An entry is added to the list.
2. Type a name for the group, then press ENTER.
To rename a group:
1. Select the group to edit.
2. Right-click and select Rename Group, or select Edit > Rename Group.
3. Type the new name and press ENTER.

- 355 -
Chapter 26: Libraries

To delete a group:
1. Select the group to delete.
2. Right-click and select Delete Group, or select Edit > Delete Group.
Note: A group cannot be deleted if it contains door leafs.
To add a new door leaf:
1. Select the group that you want to add the door leaf to.
2. Select Edit > Add Door Leaf, or right-click and select Add Door Leaf.
3. In the Door Leaf Properties dialog, click Import New Leaf.
4. Use the Door Leaf Import Wizard to import the door leaf. See Importing a Custom Door Leaf on page 356.
To edit a door leaf:
1. Select the door leaf that you would like to edit.
2. Select Edit > Edit Door Leaf, or right-click and select Edit Door Leaf. See Editing Door Leaf Properties on page 357.
To delete a door leaf:
1. Select the door leaf that you would like to delete.
2. Select Edit > Delete Door Leaf, or right-click and select Delete Door Leaf.

Importing a Custom Door Leaf

You can use the Door Leaf Import Wizard to import a door leaf in DWG, DXF, SKP or 3DS format into the Door Leafs
library. Once imported, you can apply the door leaf to any door in your drawing or catalog.
To import a custom door leaf:
1. Access the Door Leafs library.
2. Select the group that you want to add the door leaf to, then select Edit > Add Door Leaf, or right-click and select Add
Door Leaf.
3. In the Door Leaf Properties dialog, click Import New Leaf.

4. In the Door Leaf Import Wizard, enter a name for the new door leaf as you would like it to appear in the library.
5. Specify whether the door leaf is to be a Door Leaf or Cabinet Leaf. This ensures that the leaf will be properly mapped
to the object, ensuring a realistic display in your drawing.

- 356 -
 Editing Door Leaf Properties

6. Click Select. In the Open dialog, select the file type that you want to import (DWG, DXF, SKP or 3DS), then locate and
select the desired file. When you click Open, a preview of the door leaf appears in the preview pane. You can click and
drag in the preview pane to rotate the door leaf, and right-click to access various viewing options.
7. For DWG and DXF files, specify how you want the components created by making a selection from the drop box. You
can choose from Colors or Layers. For 3DS and SKP files, the only selection available is Materials.
8. Click Next.
9. On the Orient your element screen, use the arrows to rotate the door so that it will be oriented correctly when inserted
in a drawing. In most cases you want to make sure that the door is oriented vertically and sits flush with the wall.
10. Click Next.
11. The next screen lists the object’s individual components. Specify which components you want to display or hide in 3D
by clicking the appropriate eye icons.

Component is displayed

Component is not displayed

Enabling the Show only selected component check box displays only the currently selected component in the object
preview. This helps you distinguish between the object’s individual components.
To rename a component, double-click it, then type the new name and press Enter.
12. Click Finish.

Editing Door Leaf Properties

You can edit the name, type and component properties of a door leaf in the Door Leafs library.
To edit a door leaf:
1. Access the Door Leafs library.
2. In the Library Manager dialog, select the door leaf that you would like to edit.
3. Right-click in the Door Leafs window and select Edit Door Leaf. Or, select Edit > Edit Door Leaf.
4. Make your changes in the Door Leaf Properties dialog.
Name. The name of the door leaf as it appears in the library.
Leaf Type. Select either Door Leaf or Cabinet Leaf to specify how the leaf will be used. This ensures that the leaf will
be properly mapped to the object to which it will be applied.
Components. Specify which components you want to display or hide in 3D by clicking the appropriate eye icons.

Component is displayed

Component is not displayed

To rename a component, double-click it, then type the new name and press Enter.
5. Click OK.

Assembly Library
Assemblies are items or parts that are linked to an element, but do not exist in the drawing. For example, a door may have
a Lock Set assembly attached to it which includes a door lock and a set of hinges. A wall may have a Drywall assembly that
includes drywall sheets, drywall screws, and paint. If an element has an assembly assigned to it in its properties, both the
element and assembly items are reported in the project estimate by default.
Assemblies are stored in a library for your convenience. You can add, edit and delete assemblies in the library to suit your
needs.

Customizing the Assemblies Library

The assemblies library contains a variety of pre-defined assemblies that you can customize. Assemblies contain parts and
other non-graphical items that are associated with elements, but are not physically present in the drawing. For example, a
door may have a Lock Set assembly attached to it which includes a door lock and a set of hinges. A wall may have a Drywall

- 357 -
Chapter 26: Libraries

assembly that includes drywall sheets, drywall screws, and paint. If an element has an assembly attached to it in its
properties, the parts in that assembly will be reported in the project estimate.
Assemblies are organized by element in the assemblies library. You can add, rename and delete groups as needed. You can
add new assemblies to the library, as well as edit and delete existing assemblies.
To access the assemblies library through the Library Manager:
To access the assemblies library:

1. Select File > Catalogs > Library Manager, or click the down arrow next to the Catalogs button on the Standard
toolbar and select Library Manager.
2. In the Library Manager, select Libraries > Assembly.
To access the assemblies library through an element’s properties:
To add a group:
1. Right-click an existing group and select Add Group, or select Edit > Add Group. An entry is added to the list.
2. Type a name for the group, then press ENTER.
To rename a group:
1. Select the group to edit.
2. Right-click and select Rename Group, or select Edit > Rename Group.
3. Type the new name and press ENTER.
To delete a group:
1. Select the group to delete.
2. Right-click and select Delete Group, or select Edit > Delete Group.
Note: A group cannot be deleted if it contains assemblies.
To add a new assembly:
1. Select the group that you want to add the assembly to.
2. Select Edit > Add Assembly, or right-click and select Add Assembly. See Defining an Assembly on page 358.
To edit an assembly:
1. Select the assembly that you would like to edit.
2. Select Edit > Edit Assembly, or right-click and select Edit Assembly. See Defining an Assembly on page 358.
To delete an assembly:
1. Select the assembly that you would like to delete.
2. Select Edit > Delete Assembly, or right-click and select Delete Assembly.

Defining an Assembly
Assemblies are parts or non-graphical items that are linked to an element, but do not exist in the drawing. For example, a
door may have a Lock Set assembly attached to it which includes a door lock and a set of hinges. A wall may have a Drywall
assembly that includes drywall sheets, drywall screws, and paint. If an element has assemblies attached to it in its properties,
those assemblies will be reported in the project estimate.
Assemblies are stored in a customizable assemblies library. Defining an assembly involves selecting an element from the
catalog, then specifying a formula to quantify it. For example, if you wanted to add a dead bolt to a door assembly, you
would choose the Dead Bolt from the Parts category in the catalog, then specify a simple Count formula to quantify it since
it is a single item of a preset size, and there is one per door.
To define an assembly in the assemblies library:
1. Access the assemblies library. You can do this by selecting File > Catalogs > Library Manager and then Libraries >
Assembly. From the Filter drop box, select the element type for which you want to define assemblies.
2. In the Groups pane of the assemblies library, select the group that you want to add an assembly to, or that contains the
assembly that you want to edit.

- 358 -
 Specifying Formulas

3. If you want to create a new assembly, select Edit > Add Assembly, or right-click in the Assembly pane and select Add
Assembly. If you want to edit an existing assembly, select the assembly in the Assembly pane, then select Edit > Edit
Assembly or right-click and select Edit Assembly.
4. Define the assembly in the Edit Assembly dialog.

To edit the name of the assembly, type or edit the name in the Name edit box.

To add an item to the assembly, click , then make a selection from the Catalog Access dialog. For
example, if you wanted to add a dead bolt to a door assembly, you would select Parts from the filter at the top of the
Catalog Access dialog, then select Dead Bolt in the Door Hardware folder.

To remove an item from the assembly, select the item in the list, then click .

To define a formula for calculating the quantity of the item, click in the item’s Calculated Quantity field, then click .
For items with a single count, such as a dead bolt, you can simply select the ’Count’ variable in the Define Formula
dialog. For items which are quantified differently, you will need to select a different variable or build a formula that
quantifies the item correctly. For example, for wall insulation you might select the ’Exterior Wall Area’ variable so that
the quantity of insulation is reported in terms of square feet or square meters. See Specifying Formulas on page 359.
The unit of measure in the Units field is the unit of measure that will appear after the calculated quantity in the project
estimate. This is taken from the Unit of Measure field on the part’s Quantity property page.
To assign a usage to the item, click in the Usage field and make a selection from the drop box. Choices are From Part,
From Parent, and Library. If From Part is selected, the Usage assigned to part on its Quantity property page is used.
If From Parent is selected, the Usage assigned to the element to which the assembly is attached will be used. If you
select Library in the Usage field, the Usages dialog appears and you can assign any usage you want to the item.
To assign a phase to the item, click in the Phase field and make a selection from the drop box. The choices for Phase
are the same as the choices for Usage: From Part, From Parent and Library.
5. When you have finished defining the assembly, click OK to save your changes.

Note: Although you can add and edit assemblies in the Assembly Library, you cannot specify which assemblies are assigned
to elements. Assembly assignments are pre-defined.

Specifying Formulas
If you are defining an assembly, you can choose to specify a formula for calculating the quantity of that item. Formulas are
mathematical equations (e.g. Count x Price) that are used to calculate a value (e.g. Cost). You can create and edit formulas
to suit your needs. Once you have created a formula you can test it with sample values to make sure that it is working
correctly.
You can save a formula for future use. You can then load a saved formula into the Define Formula dialog if you want to
edit it or use it to create a new formula.
Below is an overview of the Define Formula dialog.

- 359 -
Chapter 26: Libraries

To create a formula:
Build your formula by typing directly in the formula window as well as clicking any of the available variables, numbers,
operators and functions displayed in the dialog. The available variables vary according to element type. For example, if you
are defining fields for a door, variables such as Count, Height and Width will be included in the list. For a wall you are likely
to see variables such as Exterior Wall Area and Interior Wall Area.
As an example, if you are creating a formula to count door hinges, and there are two hinges per door, you might specify a
formula of Count * 2 (the number of doors multiplied by 2), which would count two door hinges for every instance of the
door in your drawing. To create this formula, you would do the following:
1. Click the Count variable in the list of variables.

2. Click .

3. Click or type 2 after the multiplication symbol.

Input Units
If you are using Length, Area or Volume variables in your formula, you can specify the units in which you want to measure
those values by making the desired selections from the Length, Area and Volume drop boxes in the Input area. Initially, all
quantities are measured in millimeters regardless of the units of measure used in your project. Making selections from the
Length, Area and Volume drop boxes converts the millimeter values into the units you want. This saves you a lot of time
and effort because you do not have to specify conversion factors in your formula — the conversion is done for you.
For example, if your formula contains the Area variable and you would like the area of the item to be measured in square
feet, you would select Square Feet from the Area drop box.

- 360 -
 Specifying Formulas

Note: The Length option applies to all distance measurements including Height and Width.

Output Units
If you are defining a record in a report template, the Define Formula dialog will contain an Output area containing unit
choices for Length, Area and Volume. These are the units of measure that will be used to display the calculated quantity in
the quantity report.

Note: Output units are absent from the dialog if you are specifying a formula for an assembly because assemblies are simply
calculated values. Reports on the other hand involve both calculating values and reporting calculated values.

To test a formula:

1. Click at the top of the dialog. The formula appears in the Test Formula dialog.
2. In the Variables window, click on one of the variables that your formula contains, then type a value for that variable and
press Enter. For example, our door hinge formula contains a Count variable. If we type 4 for the Count and press Enter,
the formula will display an answer of 8, which is correct (4 x 2=8).

3. When you are finished testing the formula, click Close to return to the Define Formula dialog.

- 361 -
Chapter 26: Libraries

To save a formula:

1. Click at the top of the dialog.

2. In the Save Formula dialog, type a name or description of the formula for easy identification.

3. Click OK.
To load a saved formula:

1. Click at the top of the dialog.

2. In the Load Formula dialog, select the formula that you would like to load.

3. Click OK.

Usages Library
An element’s usage can help make it more clear what the element is to be used for. For example, one particular member
could be used for Basement Beams, while another might be used for Studs. An element’s usage is defined on its Quantity
property page and may be reported in estimates.
The usages library contains a list of usages that you can apply to elements in the catalog or in your project. You can
customize the usages library by adding, editing and deleting usages.

- 362 -
 Customizing the Usages Library

Customizing the Usages Library

An element’s usage can help make it more clear what the element is to be used for. For example, one particular member
could be used for Basement Beams, while another might be used for Studs. The usages library contains various usages that
you can assign to elements on their Quantity property page. Usages may appear in estimates and can be used as a sort key
in report templates. You can add, edit and delete groups and usages in the usages library.
You can access the usages library through an element’s Quantity property page, or through the Library Manager.
To access the usages library through the Library Manager:

1. Select File > Catalogs > Library Manager, or click the down arrow next to the Catalogs button on the Standard
toolbar and select Library Manager.
2. In the Library Manager, select Libraries > Usages.
To access the usages library through an element’s properties:
1. Select an element in your drawing, then right-click and select Properties. Or, select File > Catalogs > Element Man-
ager, then select an [Link] can also select an element in the catalog panel and then right-click and select Edit El-
ement, or simply double-click the element.
2. In the properties dialog, select the Quantity tab.

3. Click next to the Usage edit box.

To add a group:
1. Right-click an existing group and select Add Group, or select Edit > Add Group. An entry is added to the list.
2. Type a name for the group, then press ENTER.
To rename a group:
1. Select the group to edit.
2. Right-click and select Rename Group, or select Edit > Rename Group.
3. Type the new name and press ENTER.
To delete a group:
1. Select the group to delete.
2. Right-click and select Delete Group, or select Edit > Delete Group.
Note: A group cannot be deleted if it contains usages.
To add a new usage:
1. Select the group that you want to add the usage to.
2. Select Edit > Add Usage, or right-click and select Add Usage.
3. In the Usage Properties dialog specify a name and ID for the usage, then click OK.
To edit a usage:
1. Select the usage that you would like to edit.
2. Select Edit > Edit Usage, or right-click and select Edit Usage.
3. Edit the properties of the usage in the Usage Properties dialog, then click OK.
To delete a usage:
1. Select the usage that you would like to delete.
2. Select Edit > Delete Usage, or right-click and select Delete Usage.

Phases Library
Materials can be grouped into building phases, such as Foundation, Exterior Construction, and Exterior Finish. Every
element has a Phase field on its Quantity property page. Phases may appear in estimates and can be used as sort keys in
report templates.

- 363 -
Chapter 26: Libraries

The phases library contains a list of phases that you can apply to elements in the catalog or in your project. You can
customize the phases library by adding, editing and deleting phases.

Customizing the Phases Library

The phases library contains various phases that you can assign to elements on their Quantity property page. A phase refers
to a stage in the building process. Examples are Foundation, Exterior Construction, and Exterior Finish. Phases are often
reported in estimates, and can be used as sort keys in report templates.
You can access the phases library through an element’s Quantity property page, or through the Library Manager. You can
customize the phases library by adding, editing and deleting groups and phases.
To access the phases library through the Library Manager:

1. Select File > Catalogs > Library Manager, or click the down arrow next to the Catalogs button on the Standard
toolbar and select Library Manager.
2. In the Library Manager, select Libraries > Phases.
To access the phases library through an element’s properties:
1. Select an element in your drawing, then right-click and select Properties. Or, select File > Catalogs > Element Man-
ager, then select an element. You can also select an element in the catalog panel and then right-click and select Edit
Element, or simply double-click the element.
2. In the properties dialog, select the Quantity tab.

3. Click next to the Phase edit box.

To add a group:
1. Right-click an existing group and select Add Group, or select Edit > Add Group. An entry is added to the list.
2. Type a name for the group, then press ENTER.
To rename a group:
1. Select the group to edit.
2. Right-click and select Rename Group, or select Edit > Rename Group.
3. Type the new name and press ENTER.
To delete a group:
1. Select the group to delete.
2. Right-click and select Delete Group, or select Edit > Delete Group.
Note: A group cannot be deleted if it contains phases.
To add a new phase:
1. Select the group that you want to add the phase to.
2. Select Edit > Add Phase, or right-click and select Add Phase.
3. In the Phase Properties dialog specify a name and ID for the phase, then click OK.
To edit a phase:
1. Select the phase that you would like to edit.
2. Select Edit > Edit Phase, or right-click and select Edit Phase.
3. Edit the properties of the phase in the Phase Properties dialog, then click OK.
To delete a phase:
1. Select the phase that you would like to delete.
2. Select Edit > Delete Phase, or right-click and select Delete Phase.

- 364 -
 Categories Library

Categories Library
Elements can be grouped into categories according to their type, such as Sheathing or Pre-cut Lumber. You can assign a
category to an element on its Quantity property page. Categories can be reported in estimates, and can also be used as a sort
key in report templates.
The categories library contains a list of categories that you can apply to elements in the catalog or in your project. You can
customize the categories library by adding, editing and deleting categories.

Customizing the Categories Library

The categories library contains a variety of categories that you can assign to elements on their Quantity property page.
Categories are sometimes used in estimates, and can also be used as a sort key in report templates.
You can add, edit and delete groups and categories in the categories library. You can access the categories library through
an element’s Quantity property page, or through the Library Manager.
To access the categories library through the Library Manager:

1. Select File > Catalogs > Library Manager, or click the down arrow next to the Catalogs button on the Standard
toolbar and select Library Manager.
2. In the Library Manager, select Libraries > Categories.
To access the categories library through an element’s properties:
1. Select an element in your drawing, then right-click and select Properties. Or, select File > Catalogs > Element Man-
ager, then select an [Link] can also select an element in the catalog panel and then right-click and select Edit El-
ement, or simply double-click the element.
2. In the properties dialog, select the Quantity tab.

3. Click next to the Category edit box.

To add a group:
1. Right-click an existing group and select Add Group, or select Edit > Add Group. An entry is added to the list.
2. Type a name for the group, then press ENTER.
To rename a group:
1. Select the group to edit.
2. Right-click and select Rename Group, or select Edit > Rename Group.
3. Type the new name and press ENTER.
To delete a group:
1. Select the group to delete.
2. Right-click and select Delete Group, or select Edit > Delete Group.
Note: A group cannot be deleted if it contains categories.
To add a new category:
1. Select the group that you want to add the category to.
2. Select Edit > Add Category, or right-click and select Add Category.
3. Specify a name for the category, then click OK.
To edit a category:
1. Select the category that you would like to edit.
2. Select Edit > Edit Category, or right-click and select Edit Category.
3. Edit the name of the category, then click OK.
To delete a category:
1. Select the category that you would like to delete.

- 365 -
Chapter 26: Libraries

2. Select Edit > Delete Category, or right-click and select Delete Category.

Units of Measure Library

The units of measure library contains various units of measure that you can assign to elements in the Units field on their
Quantity property page. Examples of units are Each, Roll and Pckg. Units are reported for each element in estimates to
indicate how they are being quantified. For example, doors are purchased as individual items and will have the ’Each’ unit,
while something like vapor barrier is purchased in rolls.
The units of measure library contains a list of units that you can apply to elements in the catalog or in your project. You can
customize the units of measure library by adding, editing and deleting units of measure.

Customizing the Units of Measure Library

The Units of Measure library contains a variety of units that you can assign to elements on their Quantity property page.
There are units for measuring single items, area, volume and length. Units are reported for each element in estimates to
indicate how they are being quantified. For example, doors are purchased as individual items and will have the ’Each’ unit,
while something like insulation may be measured in Square Feet.
Each unit of measure has a set of properties that determine how it quantifies the material, including a Conversion Factor for
converting measurements from millimeters to the unit you want, Unit Format (Decimal, Feet & Inches, etc.) and a level of
Precision. The program will perform the necessary calculations and conversions for you when you generate the project
estimate, resulting in an accurate material take-off.
You can add, edit and delete groups and units of measure in the Units of Measure library. You can access the units of
measure library through an element’s Quantity property page, or through the Library Manager.
To access the Units of Measure library through the Library Manager:

1. Select File > Catalogs > Library Manager, or click the down arrow next to the Catalogs button on the Standard
toolbar and select Library Manager.
2. In the Library Manager, select Libraries > Units of Measure.
To access the Units of Measure library through an element’s properties:
1. Select an element in your drawing, then right-click and select Properties. Or, select File > Catalogs > Element Man-
ager, then select an element. You can also select an element in the catalog panel and then right-click and select Edit
Element, or simply double-click the element.
2. In the properties dialog, select the Quantity tab.

3. Click next to the Units edit box.

To add a group:
1. Right-click an existing group and select Add Group, or select Edit > Add Group. An entry is added to the list.
2. Type a name for the group, then press ENTER.
To rename a group:
1. Select the group to edit.
2. Right-click and select Rename Group, or select Edit > Rename Group.
3. Type the new name and press ENTER.
To delete a group:
1. Select the group to delete.
2. Right-click and select Delete Group, or select Edit > Delete Group.
Note: A group cannot be deleted if it contains units of measure.
To add a new unit of measure:
1. Select the group that you want to add the unit to.
2. Select Edit > Add Unit of Measure, or right-click in the lower pane and select Add Unit of Measure. The Unit of Mea-
sure dialog appears:

- 366 -
 Wizard Configurations

3. In the Unit of Measure dialog, define the unit’s properties.

Name. The name of the unit of measure as it will appear in the Unit of Measure library and in the Units field in the
project estimate. This is the text that appears after the numerical value (e.g. SQFT).
Quantify. Select either Count, Length, Area or Volume to specify what you are quantifying.
Unit Scale. Specify the factor that will convert millimeters to the desired unit of measurement. For example, if you
wanted to quantify a material in square inches, you would enter a conversion factor of 0.0015500031, because 1 square
millimeter = 0.0015500031 square inches.
Unit Format. Select the format in which you want the quantity measurement to appear. Select either Decimal, Inches,
Feet-Inches, or Feet-Inches-Sixteenths.

Note: Measurements are always calculated in millimeters initially, regardless of what is selected in the Unit Format
field. If you want to quantify a material using a different unit, you must specify a Conversion Factor in the unit’s
properties.

Precision. Select a level of precision for the measurement. For example, selecting a precision of #’-# #/16” sets the level
of precision to 1/16th of an inch when measuring distances in feet and inches.
4. Click OK.
To edit a unit of measure:
1. Select the unit of measure that you would like to edit.
2. Select Edit > Edit Unit of Measure, or right-click and select Edit Unit of Measure.
3. Edit the properties in the Unit of Measure dialog, then click OK. For more information about the available properties,
see the section on adding a unit of measure to the library (above).
To delete a unit of measure:
1. Select the unit of measure that you would like to delete.
2. Select Edit > Delete Unit of Measure, or right-click and select Delete Unit of Measure.

Wizard Configurations
When you use the House Builder Wizard, Kitchen Builder Wizard, Bathroom Builder Wizard, or Shed Builder Wizard, you
are prompted to select a style for the house, kitchen, bathroom, or shed. Each style has a default set of materials assigned to
it. You can edit the materials assigned to each configuration, or even create a new configuration of materials. You can also
rename and delete configurations from the library.
Select the type of configuration you would like to define:
Building Configuration
Kitchen Configuration
Shed Configuration
Bathroom Configuration

Creating a Custom House Builder Wizard Configuration

A House Builder Wizard configuration determines what elements are used for exterior walls, roofs, floors, ceilings,
foundation walls and footings. You are asked to select a configuration for your house when you run the House Builder
Wizard.

- 367 -
Chapter 26: Libraries

You can edit any of the existing configurations that are available in the House Builder Wizard, or create your own.
Customized configurations are saved automatically and will be available when you run the House Builder Wizard in the
current project, or any other project.
To access the building configuration library:

1. Select File > Catalogs > Library Manager, or click the down arrow next to the Catalogs button on the Standard
toolbar and select Library Manager.
2. In the Library Manager dialog, select Libraries > Building Configuration.
To add a new configuration to the list:
1. Select Edit > Add Configuration, or right-click in the Building Configurations window and select Add Configuration.
An entry named ‘New Configuration’ is added to the list.
2. Select the new configuration in the list. If you want to rename it, select Edit > Rename Configuration, or right-click
and select Rename Configuration. Then, type the new name and press ENTER.
To edit a building configuration:
1. Select the configuration in the list. The element selections for the configuration are listed in the center pane.
2. In the center pane, select an element type you want to specify a style for (e.g. Main Wall).
3. Click the Select button.
4. In the Catalog Access dialog, select the specific style you want to apply to the selected element type, then click OK.
5. Continue selecting styles for the remaining element types.
To delete a configuration from the list:
1. Select the configuration in the list.
2. Select Edit > Delete Configuration, or right-click and select Delete Configuration, or simply press the Delete key on
your keyboard.

Creating a Custom Kitchen Wizard Configuration

A Kitchen Builder Wizard configuration determines what types of cabinets and appliances are used in your kitchen. You
are asked to select a configuration for your kitchen when you run the Kitchen Builder Wizard.
You can edit any of the existing configurations that are available in the Kitchen Builder Wizard, or create your own.
Customized configurations are saved automatically and will be available when you run the Kitchen Builder Wizard in the
current project, or any other project.
To access the kitchen configuration library:

1. Select File > Catalogs > Library Manager, or click the down arrow next to the Catalogs button on the Standard
toolbar and select Library Manager.
2. In the Library Manager dialog, select Libraries > Kitchen Configuration.
To add a new configuration to the list:
1. Select Edit > Add Configuration, or right-click in the Kitchen Configurations window and select Add Configuration.
An entry named ‘New Configuration’ is added to the list.
2. Select the new configuration in the list. If you want to rename it, select Edit > Rename Configuration, or right-click
and select Rename Configuration. Then, type the new name and press ENTER.
To edit a kitchen configuration:
1. Select the configuration in the list. The element selections for the configuration are listed in the center pane.
2. In the center pane, select an element type you want to specify a style for (e.g. Refrigerator).
3. Click the Select button.
4. In the Catalog Access dialog, select the specific style you want to apply to the selected element type, then click OK.
5. Continue selecting styles for the remaining element types.

- 368 -
 Creating a Custom Shed Builder Wizard Configuration

To delete a configuration from the list:

1. Select the configuration in the list.
2. Select Edit > Delete Configuration, or right-click and select Delete Configuration, or simply press the Delete key on
your keyboard.

Creating a Custom Shed Builder Wizard Configuration

A Shed Builder Wizard configuration determines what elements are used for a shed’s roof, walls, floor, door and window.
You are asked to select a configuration for your shed when you run the Shed Builder Wizard.
You can edit any of the existing configurations that are available in the Shed Builder Wizard, or create your own.
Customized configurations are saved automatically and will be available when you run the Shed Builder Wizard in the
current project, or any other project.
To access the shed configuration library:

1. Select File > Catalogs > Library Manager, or click the down arrow next to the Catalogs button on the Standard
toolbar and select Library Manager.
2. In the Library Manager dialog, select Libraries > Shed Configuration.
To add a new configuration to the list:
1. Select Edit > Add Configuration, or right-click in the Shed Configuration window and select Add Configuration. An
entry named ‘New Configuration’ is added to the list.
2. Select the new configuration in the list. If you want to rename it, select Edit > Rename Configuration, or right-click
and select Rename Configuration. Then, type the new name and press ENTER.
To edit a shed configuration:
1. Select the configuration in the list. The element selections for the configuration are listed in the center pane.
2. In the center pane, select an element type you want to specify a style for (e.g. Wall).
3. Click the Select button.
4. In the Catalog Access dialog, select the specific style you want to apply to the selected element type, then click OK.
5. Continue selecting styles for the remaining element types.
To delete a configuration from the list:
1. Select the configuration in the list.
2. Select Edit > Delete Configuration, or right-click and select Delete Configuration, or simply press the Delete key on
your keyboard.

Creating a Custom Bathroom Wizard Configuration

A Bathroom Builder Wizard configuration determines what types of cabinets and plumbing fixtures are used in your
bathroom. You are asked to select a configuration for your bathroom when you run the Bathroom Builder Wizard.
You can edit any of the existing configurations that are available in the Bathroom Builder Wizard, or create your own.
Customized configurations are saved automatically and will be available when you run the Bathroom Builder Wizard in the
current project, or any other project.
To access the bathroom configuration library:

1. Select File > Catalogs > Library Manager, or click the down arrow next to the Catalogs button on the Standard
toolbar and select Library Manager.
2. In the Library Manager dialog, select Libraries > Bathroom Configuration.
To add a new configuration to the list:
1. Select Edit > Add Configuration, or right-click in the Bathroom Configurations window and select Add Configura-
tion. An entry named ‘New Configuration’ is added to the list.
2. Select the new configuration in the list. If you want to rename it, select Edit > Rename Configuration, or right-click
and select Rename Configuration. Then, type the new name and press ENTER.

- 369 -
Chapter 26: Libraries

To edit a bathroom configuration:

1. Select the configuration in the list. The element selections for the configuration are listed in the center pane.
2. In the center pane, select an element type you want to specify a style for (e.g. Vanity).
3. Click the Select button.
4. In the Catalog Access dialog, select the specific style you want to apply to the selected element type, then click OK.
5. Continue selecting styles for the remaining element types.
To delete a configuration from the list:
1. Select the configuration in the list.
2. Select Edit > Delete Configuration, or right-click and select Delete Configuration, or simply press the Delete key on
your keyboard.

- 370 -
Chapter 27: Workspace Settings

You can customize many aspects of your work environment to maximize your design experience and create a space that is
tailored to the way you like to do things. For example, you can turn toolbars on and off, move toolbars, move the information
panel, and control the toolbar area color and drawing area color.
You can also control the way the program responds graphically, by enabling or disabling Hardware Acceleration, or
adjusting Interactive Lighting settings.
If you have problems with your graphics display, see Improving Graphics Display on page 376.

Interface Settings
Many aspects of the Virtual Architect home design software interface are totally customizable, making it easy to create a
work environment that suits your personal taste and needs. For example, you can select which toolbars you want to display,
whether you want to display a toolbar as tabbed or non-tabbed, and even change their color. You can move non-tabbed
toolbars around on the screen by simply clicking and dragging them.
The Information Panel on the right side of the screen, which displays things like the catalog and camera properties, can be
hidden from view, resized or moved.
You can also hide the status bar or scroll bars if desired.
By default, the drawing area is white, but you can change the drawing area color if you want.
You can also control whether or not the Startup Screen launches every time you start the program.

Displaying/Hiding Toolbars
There are several toolbars available for display. (By default, not all of them are displayed.) You can hide or show individual
toolbars by editing your program settings. When you display a toolbar, it is displayed in one of the toolbar areas which are
located directly above and below the drawing area. Note that if you hide a toolbar that is displayed in a tab, the tab is hidden
from view as well.
To hide or show toolbars:
1. Select Settings > Toolbars.
2. Click in the Tabbed column next to the toolbar’s name.
3. To display the toolbar in tabbed format, select Tabbed from the drop box.
4. To display the toolbar in non-tabbed (floatable) format, select Normal.
5. To hide the toolbar from view, select Off.
6. Click OK.

Tip: If a toolbar is currently floating freely on the screen, you can hide it by clicking the close button on its title bar, or right-
clicking its title bar and selecting Hide.

Displaying Toolbars in a Tabbed Format

You can display any toolbar in tabbed format, meaning a tab will be added to the row of toolbar tabs below the menu bar.
To display a toolbar in a tab:
1. Select Settings > Toolbars.
2. Click in the Tabbed column next to the toolbar’s name, then select Tabbed from the drop box.
3. Click OK.

Displaying Toolbars in a Non-Tabbed Format

You can change any tabbed toolbar to be displayed as a non-tabbed, floatable toolbar.

- 371 -
Chapter 27: Workspace Settings

To display toolbars in non-tabbed format:

1. Select Settings > Toolbars.
2. Click in the Tabbed column next to the toolbar’s name, then select Normal from the drop box.
3. Click OK.

Changing the Color of Toolbar Areas

The program has two toolbar areas: one directly above the drawing area, and one directly below the drawing area. You can
change this color in your workspace Program Settings.
To change the color of toolbar areas:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Program Settings dialog, click Workspace in the left column.
3. Click the color swatch next to the Toolbar Areas option.
4. In the Color dialog, select or create the desired color for your toolbar areas, then click OK to return to the Program
Settings dialog.
5. Click OK.

Customizing Toolbar Colors and Effects

Every toolbar has a set of advanced settings that control its appearance. These settings include the background color, text
color, and whether the background color is solid or has a gradient effect. You can customize the colors and effects of each
individual toolbar.
To customize toolbar colors and effects:
1. Select Settings > Toolbars.

2. In the Program Settings dialog, click .

3. In the Toolbar Colors dialog, select the toolbar that you want to customize in the left pane.
4. To edit the color of text, click the color swatch above the Text item, and then make a selection from the Color dialog.
5. To edit the toolbar’s background color, click the color swatch above the Background item, and then make a selection
from the Color dialog.
6. To display the background color as a solid, enable the Solid radio button.
7. To create a gradient effect with the background color, enable the Gradient radio button. A gradient effect involves the
gradual transition from one shade to another.
8. Click OK.

- 372 -
 Saving a Toolbar Color Theme

Tip: You can save your toolbar color settings to a *.theme file that can be loaded at any time. See Saving a Toolbar Color
Theme on page 373.

Saving a Toolbar Color Theme

If you have customized your toolbar color settings you can save the color settings to a theme file. Once you have saved your
color settings to a theme file you can then load the theme at any time without having to set all your toolbars colors again.
To save a toolbar color theme:
1. Select Settings > Toolbars.
2. Set up your toolbar colors as desired. In addition to the background color, you can define advanced settings such as
text color and gradient color effects (see Customizing Toolbar Colors and Effects on page 372).
3. In the Program Settings dialog, click the Save Theme button.
4. In the Save As dialog, type a name for the theme in the File name edit box. You can also select an existing theme file to
overwrite.
5. Click Save.

Loading a Toolbar Color Theme

You can instantly load any saved toolbar color theme using the Load Theme tool in your toolbar settings.
To load a toolbar color theme:
1. Select Settings > Toolbars.
2. In the Program Settings dialog, click the Load Theme button.
3. In the Open dialog, select the theme you would like to load.
4. Click Open.

Moving Toolbars
You can drag any non-tabbed toolbar to any location on the screen. At window edges, the toolbar will automatically dock
itself according to the location. For example, if you drag it to the right edge of the screen, it will assume a vertical orientation.
If you drag it into the drawing window, it will float freely. You can then move it by dragging it by its title bar.
To move a toolbar:
1. Click and hold your mouse button over the left grip end of the toolbar (or its title bar if it is currently in the drawing
area).

2. Drag the toolbar to the desired location.

3. Release the mouse button.

Displaying/Hiding the Information Panel

By default, an information panel is displayed on the right side of the screen. When you are in Insertion mode, the panel
displays the catalog of elements. You can hide the information panel from view if you want.
To display or hide the information panel:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Program Settings dialog, click Workspace in the left column.
3. In the Tool Display area, check or uncheck the Info Panel check box.
4. Click OK.

- 373 -
Chapter 27: Workspace Settings

Resizing the Information Panel

When the information panel is docked at one side of your screen, you can make it narrower or wider by simply clicking and
dragging its edges. If you have moved the panel away from the edge, so it is free-floating, you can resize it by clicking and
dragging its corners.
To resize the information panel if it is docked:
1. Position your pointer over the panel’s left outside edge. (If you have moved the panel to the left side of the screen, po-
sition your pointer over the right edge.) Watch for the Resize cursor to appear.

2. Click and drag the edge of the panel to stretch it in the desired direction.
3. Release your mouse button.
To resize the information panel if it is free-floating:
1. Position your pointer over one of the panel’s corners.
2. Click and drag to stretch the panel.
3. Release your mouse button.

Moving the Information Panel

If the information panel is docked on one side of the screen, you can move it by clicking and dragging its outside edge. If
you move a panel to the side of the screen, it will automatically dock itself to the edge of the screen. Otherwise, the panel is
displayed as a free-floating window.
If the panel is free-floating, you can move it by clicking and dragging its title bar.
To move the information panel when it is docked:
1. Position your pointer over the panel’s outside edge. Watch for the Move cursor.

2. Click and drag the panel to move it.

3. Release your mouse button.
To move the information panel when it is free-floating:
1. Position your pointer over the panel’s title bar.
2. Click and drag the panel to move it.
3. Release your mouse button.

Displaying/Hiding the Status Bar

The Status bar is located at the bottom of the screen. It displays helpful prompts while you are working on your design
project. For example, if you are inserting a wall, it may display “Pick first insertion point”. The Status bar also includes a
selection of drawing aid buttons such as ORTHO and OBJSNAP. The Status bar can be toggled on and off as needed.

- 374 -
 Changing the Color of the Drawing Area

To display/hide the Status bar:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Program Settings dialog, click Workspace in the left column.
3. In the Tool Display area, select or clear the Status Bar check box.
4. Click OK.

Changing the Color of the Drawing Area

You can select a different color for your drawing area.
To change the color of the drawing window:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Program Settings dialog, click Workspace in the left column.
3. To change the color of the drawing area background in Model View, click the color swatch next to the Model View op-
tion in the Workspace Colors area.
4. In the Color dialog, select or create the desired color, then click OK to return to the Program Settings dialog.
5. Click OK.

Displaying/Hiding the Scroll Bars

There are scroll bars on the bottom and right side of the drawing area. You can toggle them on and off.
To display/hide the scroll bars:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Program Settings dialog, click Workspace in the left column.
3. In the Tool Display area, select or clear the Scroll Bars check box.
4. Click OK.

Note: Disabling the scroll bars does not disable the auto-scroll feature. The Auto Scroll control is located on the Drawing
Aids page of the Program Settings dialog.

Controlling the Launch of the Startup Screen

By default, a Startup screen appears every time you start the program. The Startup screen lets you quickly open new and
saved projects, and provides instant access to a variety of learning and support resources. If you prefer you can disable the
launch of the Startup screen.
To control the launch of the Startup screen:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. On the General page of the Program Settings dialog, check or uncheck the Launch Startup Screen check box.
3. Click OK.

Tip: If the Startup screen is currently displayed, you can disable its future launch by disabling the Display on startup check
box at the bottom of the screen. To view the Startup screen any time, select Help > Launch Startup Screen.

Graphics
The type of graphics card you have in your computer can affect the way the program’s graphics are displayed and behave
on your screen. You may find that graphics are choppy or display a lot of artifacts. There a number of different things you
can try to improve the graphics display. For example, you could try lowering your screen resolution, or lowering your
Windows color settings. To speed up performance you can disable interactive lighting, or disable tool tips. Use the System
Check utility to get a recommendation on the best driver to use for optimal graphics display.
If you view in Virtual Reality mode, you can make VR viewing stereoscopic for a more immersive experience.

- 375 -
Chapter 27: Workspace Settings

Improving Graphics Display

The type of graphics card you have in your computer can affect the way the program’s graphics are displayed on your
screen. If the display seems unstable or contains some graphic artifacts Fuzz or distortion in a graphic image or sequence
of video images. Large digital pixels (blocks) and jerkiness in the video stream are examples of artifacts., here are some tips
on how you may be able to improve the display:
1. Lower your screen resolution (to 1024 x 768, for example) in the Windows Display Properties dialog. To access this
dialog, right-click your Windows desktop and select Properties. In the Display Properties dialog, select the Settings
tab.
2. Lower the color setting in the Windows Display Properties dialog box. For example, if your colors are set to True Color
(32 bit), change the setting to High Color (16 bit).
3. Disable interactive lighting, which is the real-time lighting effect you see when you insert light fixtures in Rendered or
Rendered Outline display mode.
4. Disable tool tips. By default, tool tips are displayed as you hover over elements with your cursor.

Changing the Quality Level of Interactive Lighting

As you insert light fixtures in your design you can see real-time lighting effects if working in Rendered or Rendered Outline
display mode. By default, the quality level of interactive lighting is set to Low, which provides an adequate lighting display
for the average computer. If your computer has a powerful video card, you can select a higher level of quality for your
interactive lighting.
To change the quality of interactive lighting:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Program Settings dialog, click Graphics in the left column.
3. In the Lighting area, select either Low, Medium or High.
4. Click OK.

Note: Selecting a higher quality level can slow down your graphics display.

Disabling Interactive Lighting

By default, you can see real-time lighting effects as you insert light fixtures in Rendered or Rendered Outline display mode.
If interactive lighting slows down your graphics display, or you simply do not want to use it, you can disable it.
To disable interactive lighting:

1. Select Settings > Program Settings or click on the Settings toolbar.

2. In the Program Settings dialog, click Graphics in the left column.
3. Disable the Enable interactive lighting check box.
4. Click OK.

- 376 -
Glossary

2D Designer's Plan
A flat, overhead view with colors and textures applied. A 2D plan view in rendered display mode.
2D Plan
A flat, overhead view.

3D Overview
A predefined 3D Camera view where the camera is elevated to provide an aerial view of the model.
3D Perspective
A three-dimensional view in which the scale of an element decreases according to its distance from the viewer. This
produces the same impression of distance and relative size as that received by the human eye.
3D QuickView
A 3D view of your model from a pre-defined angle.
3D RealView
A rendered image with photorealistic properties such as textures, lighting, and shadows.
3DS File
3D Studio file. The program can convert these files for use as Furnishings elements.

Aligned Dimension
A dimension that lies at the same angle as the element it is dimensioning.
Alkaline
Having a PH of more than 7.
Alt Code
Alternate Code. An extra identification code that is used to link an element in the program's catalog to the databases
of other applications like Timberline.
Ambient Light
The available light in a scene. Ambient light comes from all directions and has no visible source.
Angle of True North
The location on the horizon directly below the North Star. In other words, it is the geographic North, as opposed to
magnetic North, which is the direction indicated on a compass.
Angle Snap
Makes elements move/rotate at specific increments (angles).
Animation
A movie. A series of images that, when viewed in rapid succession, create the illusion of movement through a scene.
Antialiasing
A method of improving image quality by smoothing out jagged edges. This is achieved by adjusting pixel positions
or setting pixel intensities so that there is a more gradual transition between the color of a line and the background
color.
Array
A method of copying an element into a pattern of rows and/or columns.
Artifacts
Fuzz or distortion in a graphic image or sequence of video images. Large digital pixels (blocks) and jerkiness in the
video stream are examples of artifacts.
Aspect Ratio
The ratio of width to height.
Assembly
Items or parts that are linked to an element, but do not exist in the drawing. For example, walls have assemblies such
as insulation, vapor barrier, and drywall screws.

- 377 -
Glossary

Auto Texture Mapping

Applies a UV map, which is a flat, 2D representation of the vertices of the 3D model. It defines where the 2D pixels in
your texture will be placed on the 3D surface. For imported elements, selecting Auto uses the mapping already ap-
plied to the element.
Automatic Save
Saves your drawing for you at specified intervals without prompting.
AVI
Audio Video Interleaved. A common video file format by Microsoft that can be used to record animations.
Awning Window
A window having a sash hinged on pins at the two top or bottom corners of the frame. It opens outward.

Back Bearing
The bearing of a back station as observed from the station next in advance.
Backsplash
The rear portion of a countertop that sits against the wall, or a splash guard that is fastened to the wall and sits above
the countertop.
Balustrade
A railing consisting of balusters (spindles) attached to a top rail. Used along stairs, landings, porches, decks, etc. Also
called a banister.
Baseboard
A board or moulding along the base of a wall. Also called skirting.
Batch Printing
A process of printing a number of selected views at once.
Batt Insulation
Pre-cut, flexible insulation that fits inside wall cavities between the studs.
Bay Window
A window made up of three sash units that project out from the wall. Usually includes a roof structure.
Beam
In a deck frame, structural member supported by posts that acts to support the decks floor joists.
Bearing
A surveying term used to designate direction. The bearing of a line is the acute horizontal angle between the North
meridian and the line.
Berm
A mound or bank of soil without formal sides. You often see large berms on the sides of highways, which are used for
noise control.
Bi-Fold Doors
Narrow doors that are hinged to fold against each other and flat against the jamb.
BIM File
Building Information Modeling file. BIM is the process of generating and managing building data.
Bird's Mouth
The notch cut in the lower end of a rafter to fit it to the top plate of a wall.
BLD File
BUILD file. The drawing file produced by the program. The extension given to the program's drawing files.
Block
A single object that is composed of many other objects.
Blocking
Members that run perpendicular to studs in order to provide reinforcement, or attachment sites for mounted hard-
ware.
BMP
Bitmap. An image file whose bits are referenced to pixels.
Board-and-Batten
A type of exterior siding or interior paneling that has alternating wide boards and narrow wooden strips, called bat-
tens.
Bottom Plate
The bottom member of a framed wall. Also called base plate or sole plate.

- 378 -
 Glossary

Boundary Hatch
A tool that lets you define an area with hatching applied to it.
Bow Window
A type of bay window made up of several window units set at slight angles to form a curve.
Box Mapping
A texture mapping method that creates a rectangular bounding box around the element, then applies a texture to each
of the box's 6 sides. This would be useful for an element such as a sofa.
Bullnose
A heavily rounded edge usually found on stair treads.

CAD File
A file created in a Computer-Aided Design program such as AutoCAD. The most common file types are DWG and
DXF.
Casement Window
A window having a sash hinged on pins at the top and bottom corners of one side. It opens outward by means of a
crank.
Catalog Directory
The directory containing the Master Catalog and other catalogs that you have created.
Catalog Panel
The window on the right side of the screen that displays the contents of the current catalog.
Category
A group, often named or numbered, to which items are assigned based on similarity or defined criteria.
Cathedral Ceiling
A high, open, usually slanting or pointed ceiling.
Ceiling Height
The height of the underside of a ceiling surface relative to the floor level.
Center Object Snap
Snaps to the center point of an arc or circle.
Chair Rail
A decorative molding applied horizontally to a wall inside a room at a height of about 3 feet. Used to prevent chairs
from marring the wall.
Collision Control
An intelligent drawing aid that prevents elements from being inserted where they won't fit.
Color Bleed
The degree to which different colors blend where they meet.
Commander
An editing window that appears when certain functions are chosen. It provides precise control over such things as
distance and direction.
Complexity
The level of detail shown when elements are displayed.
Composite Wall
A wall comprising a structural wall and veneer wall separated by an air space.
Compression
The conversion of data into a format that requires fewer bits, usually so that it can be stored or transmitted more effi-
ciently.
Coordinate Icon
A small symbol displayed in the drawing area that marks the current point from which an action will be performed
when using the Commander.
Cove Molding
A molding with a concave face used as trim.
Crawlspace
The shallow area beneath a house enclosed by the foundation walls.
Cripple
The short members used to frame under the sill or above the header in a rough opening for a window in a framed wall.
Crosshairs
Intersecting lines that represent the two coordinate axes.

- 379 -
Glossary

Crown Molding
A decorative molding along the top of a wall.
Cut Line
A standard 2D drafting symbol used to represent a break in the drawing. It indicates that the object continues in the
same manner after or between the break lines.
Cylinder Mapping
A texture mapping method that creates a cylindrical bounding box around the element. The texture is then mapped
to the cylinder. This might be an ideal option for elements such as round columns.

Daylight Saving Time

Time usually one hour ahead of standard time.
Delimeter
A character that marks the beginning or end of a unit of data.
Diffuse
The amount of color that is reflected when an element is illuminated by a light.
Display Filter
A dialog box used for displaying and hiding elements and/or locations.
Division
A construction division identification. In North America, CSI divisions are used.
Double Roof
A type of hip roof in which the slope to all four sides is broken into two slopes. Both slopes have a pitch.
DPI
Dots Per Inch. The measurement of resolution for printers.
Drag-and-Drop Mode
The default mode you are in when you select an element for editing. You can move and rotate elements with your
mouse when you are in Drag and Drop mode.
Drawing Aids
Tools that control the way your cursor works and the way elements are inserted.
Drywall
Gypsum, sometimes with additives, made into paper-covered sheets for use an interior wall or ceiling covering.
Duplicate
Copies a selected element on the same location.
Dutch Gable
A combination of a hip and gable roof. On either end, the lower segment is a hip roof and the upper segment is a gable
end. Also known as a Dutch Hip Roof or a Full Return Gable.
DWG
Standard file format for saving vector graphics in applications like AutoCAD.
DXF
Drawing Exchange Format. An ASCII or binary file format of a CAD drawing.
Dynamic Cutaway
A 3D view of your model that you can strip away by sliding a clipping plane back and forth.

Editor
A software application capable of editing text.
Element
A specific type of element, such as a door, having its own distinct properties (size, appearance, etc.).
Elevation
1. The front, back and side views of a building. 2. The height of an element above the floor or terrain.
Emissive
The amount of light given off by a material. The more emissive a material is, the more self-luminous it appears.
Estimate
A report containing a listing of materials, quantities, unit costs, and total cost.

- 380 -
 Glossary

Face Mapping
A texture mapping method that applies the texture to every single face of the element component. This is the most
common texture mapping option used in the program
Face Slider
Two or more doors that open by sliding to the side in front or behind each other. Also called bypass doors.
Fascia
A flat wood or plywood strip nailed to the overhanging ends of rafters.
Fillet
Connects two lines together at a point where they would naturally meet if both were extended.
Filter
To exclude an element or location from being displayed, quantified or selected.
Fixed Window
A window whose sash is permanently fixed in the frame.
Floor Level
The height of a floor (location) above the ground (0).
Fold-Back Stairs
Stairs that have two flights separated by a landing and that make a complete 180-degree turn. Sometimes called Scis-
sor Stairs.
Fold-Up Door
A door made up of a number of narrow panels that opens overhead by folding up like an accordian.
Forward Bearing
The direction of a line segment from the current station. Bearings are measured in degrees (360 in a full circle), clock-
wise from the North meridian.
Foundation
The supporting portion of a structure below the ground floor construction, or below grade, including the footings.
Frame Rate
The number of images displayed per second. The video playback rate of an AVI animation.
Framing Mode
A special display mode where individual walls, openings and intersections are displayed as "glass boxes" for ease of
identification and selection. In this mode you can edit the framing configurations for individual wall openings and
intersections.
Framing Rule
The direction and order in which walls are framed.

Gable Roof
A roof with two sloping sides (as opposed to a Hip Roof, with four sloping sides).
Girt Wall
A wall built up of horizontal structural members that are suspended between vertical columns. Usually found in in-
dustrial buildings.
Glass Slider
A door having a wood or aluminum frame fitted with one fixed glass panel and one sliding glass panel. Often called
a patio door.
Global Illumination
An algorithm used in 3D computer graphics rendering. Global illumination simulates the many reflections of light
around a scene, generally resulting in softer, more natural shadows and reflections.
Grayscale
An image in which colors are represented by shades of gray.
Grid
A visual aid consisting of a pattern of horizontal and vertical lines.
Grid Snap
An invisible grid whose lines you can snap to with your cursor when inserting elements.

- 381 -
Glossary

Hardware Acceleration
Takes advantage of any installed graphics card that supports hardware acceleration, increasing the speed of your
graphics display.
Hatching
A pattern of lines used to represent a material, such as wood or concrete. Hatching is only visible in Patterned display
mode.
Head
The top member of a window sash or door frame.
Head Height
The height at which the tops of openings, doors, and windows are located relative to the floor level.
Header
The structural members placed horizontally over doors, windows and wall openings.
Hidden Line
A view mode where hidden lines are removed from the view, leaving only surfaces displayed.
Highlite
A pane of glass located at the top of a window or door.
Hinged Door
Any type of door that swings open.
Hip Roof
A roof with four sloping sides (as opposed to a Gable Roof, with two sloping sides).
Hopper Window
A window in which the sash is hinged on pins at the two bottom corners, and which opens inward.
Hung Window
A window having two sashes, and whose lower sash slides up and over the fixed, upper sash on the inside.
Hyperlinks
Jumps (links) to external document files or web addresses.

IES File
Name derived from Illuminating Engineering Society. A photometric data file (Lights file) containing Luminaire def-
inition and information.
IFC
A file format deriving from the Industry Foundation Classes (IFC) data model that describes building and construc-
tion industry data.
Index of Refraction
The amount that light bends as it passes from one material to another.
Industry Foundation Classes
A data model commonly used for Building Information Modeling (BIM) which describes building and construction
data.
Infill
The framing material that fills the volume of a wall. Usually studs, top plate, bottom plate and very top plate.
Info Panel
The pane on the right side of the screen that displays the catalog in Model View, or object properties in Worksheet
View.
Insertion Object Snap
Snaps to the insertion point of text, blocks, imported model views, and imported CAD objects.
Interactive Lighting
Real-time lighting effects displayed while you are inserting light fixtures in Rendered or Rendered Outline mode.
Interface
Program components that you see on the screen and use to perform tasks.
Intersection Lookup Table
An internal library of intersection framing configurations.
Intersection Object Snap
Snaps to the point where objects cross each other.

- 382 -
 Glossary

Jack Stud
The trimmer that supports a header in a framed wall opening.
Jamb
The wood or metal pieces that form the sides and top of a door or window enclosure.
Joist
One of a parallel set of structural members used to support floor and ceiling loads. They, in turn, are supported by
beams, girders, or bearing walls.

King Stud
The stud next to a door or window opening to which the jack stud and header are nailed.

Landing
A platform between flights of stairs or at the termination of a flight of stairs.
Layers
Like overlays used in paper-based drafting, layers are used to organize the content of a drawing and group informa-
tion by function.
Line Style
Settings that determine the color, pattern and thickness of a line.
Line Type
The pattern of a line, such as dashed or solid.
Line Weight
The thickness (or heaviness) of a line.
Linear Dimension
A horiziontal or vertical dimension.
Lite
A pane of glass in a window or door.
Load-bearing
A structural member or combination of members, such as a wall, that supports a load in addition to its own weight.
Locations
Drawing layers containing definitions for wall height, floor level, head height and ceiling level.
Louvre Window
A small, slatted window placed high in a gable end. Used mostly for ventilation.
Lumen
A Lumen is equal to one foot-candle (the amount of light one candle generates one foot away) falling on one SQUARE
foot of area.
Luminaire
The international term for a piece of lighting equipment. The complete unit including lamp, fixture, and other parts.
L-Winder Stairs
Stairs that ascend in an L-shape and that use wedge-shaped treads called winders to change direction.

Magnetic North
Magnetic North is the magnetic north pole. It is the focus of the planet's magnetic field and is the point magnetic com-
passes point toward.
Mansard Roof
A type of hip roof in which the slope to all four sides is broken into two slopes. The upper slope is nearly or completely
flat, while the lower slope has a sharp pitch.
Margin
% of Retail Price that is Gross Profit.

- 383 -
Glossary

Markup
The % difference between the Cost and Retail price of an item.
Masonry
Brick, stone, concrete or concrete block.
Masonry Section
A 2D drafting symbol that indicates where masonry is used.
Material Usages
Determine which materials are suitable to be applied to specific elements.
Materials Paintbrush
A tool for instantly applying a selected material to the surface of an element.
Member
Pieces of lumber or steel used in the construction of a building, such as studs, rafters, beams and piers, or as decorative
accents, such as baseboards and crown molding.
Midpoint Object Snap
Snaps to the midpoint of a line or arc.
Model View
A view window with a 3D environment where you create and edit a 3D model.
Mono Footing
A pad of masonry, usually concrete, that is wider than the column it supports. Used to transfer the load of the column.
Mullion
A thin, non-structural bar between window and door units.
Muntin Bars
The vertical and horizontal members that divide the individual panes of glass in a window.

Nearest Object Snap

Snaps to a point on a line, circle, arc or other object that is nearest to the center of the pickbox (where the crosshairs
intersect).
Newel
The main post to which the end of a railing is attached.
Niche
A recess in a wall.
Non-load-bearing
A structural member or combination of members, such as a wall, that supports no load other than its own weight.
Nosing
The portion of a stair tread that projects over the riser.
Nudge Distance
The distance an object moves when you nudge it by pressing the arrow keys on your keyboard.

Object Snaps
Drawing aids that snap your pickbox to common points on objects, such as endpoints and midpoints.
Open GL
A 3D graphics Application Programming Interface (API) that includes routines for shading, texture mapping, texture
filtering, anti-aliasing, lighting, geometry transformations, etc.
Opening
A cutout in a wall.
Ortho
A Drawing Aid that restricts drawing to straight up, down, left, or right.
Orthogonal View
An alternate name for Parallel View in which all drawing lines are parallel and the effect of distance is eliminated.
Contrasts with Perspective View.
Overhang
The part of the roof that extends over the side wall. Also, the distance from the side wall to the fascia.

- 384 -
 Glossary

Pan
A control that allows you to move the on-screen view by dragging up, down, left, or right.
Paper Margin Lines
Displays dashed lines near the edges of the virtual paper, indicating the location of your page margins. They denote
the non-printable areas of the paper.
Paper Shadow
A virtual piece of paper in the drawing area that represents the paper size selection in the view's Print Properties.
Parallel View
A 3D view that eliminates the effect of distance from a view. In Parallel View, all drawing lines are parallel. Contrasts
with Perspective View. Parallel View is sometimes called Orthogonal View.
Parametric
Having a set of physical properties that determines the characteristics of an element.
PDF
Portable Document Format. A file format created by Adobe Systems for the purpose of sharing documents.
Perpendicular Object Snap
Snaps to a point on a line, arc or circle that forms a perpendicular from the current point to the selected object.
Perspective View
A 3D view in which the scale of an element decreases according to its distance from the viewer. Drawing lines con-
verge to a vanishing point. Perspective View represents the way an element would appear to the human eye.
Phase
A stage in the construction process, such as Foundation, Exterior Construction, or Exterior Finish.
Photo Board
A digital image that is oriented vertically in 3D view, much like a billboard.
Photometric Data File
A file that allows you to define complex light distributions based on physical lamp properties. When loading a pho-
tometric file, a photometric web is constructed that defines the intensity of light for any direction from a light source.
Pickbox
A square located at the center of the crosshairs, used for selecting objects.
Pixel
A word invented by combining the two words picture and element. The smallest unit of color on a computer display.
The number of pixels per inch depends on the display device dimensions.
Pixel Search Distance
The Pixel Search Distance determines how close your cursor (which is attached to an element you are inserting) needs
to be to an existing element before Object Snap occurs.
Plan View
A flat, 2D view from above.
Plate (top plate)
The top member of a framed wall upon which the rafters and ceiling joists rest.
Plateau
A relatively large, flat area of land situated above the adjacent land.
Pocket Door
A door that rolls on an overhead track into a frame or pocket hidden in the wall.
Polygon
A closed shape with three or more line segments.
Polygon Hatch
A tool that lets you draw a polygon (closed shape with 3 or more sides) with a hatch pattern applied to it.
Polyline
A continuous, multi-segmented line.
Portal Frame
A simple support structure comprising rafters atop a pair of columns.
Print Scale
The ratio of units on paper to units on the screen. For example, a scale of 1/4" = 1'-0" means that every foot of the model
is represented by 1/4" on paper when the drawing is printed. A wall that is 12' long would be 3" on paper.
Profile
An outline of an object seen from the side, as in a section view.
Project Directory
The location of the default directory in which projects are stored.

- 385 -
Glossary

Project Estimate
A report containing a listing of materials, quantities, unit costs, and total cost.
Project Trace Image
A BMP, JPG or TGA image that you can import into your drawing area.

Quadrant Object Snap

Snaps to the 0-, 90-, 180- and 270-degree positions on a circle or arc.
Quantity Report
A list of the type and quantity of materials in your model. Also known as a Materials List or Bill of Materials.
Quoins
Stones or blocks reinforcing or accenting the corners of a building.
Quote
A list of products with quantities, pricing and other important information. Used by building material supply retail-
ers, wholesalers, distributors and contractors to facilitate the design, sale and installation of construction projects.

Rafter
Structural members that make up the framing for a roof and roof overhang, and that support the sheathing and roof-
ing materials.
Raised Heel
The vertical distance from the support point of a truss to the point where the roof slope intersects.
Rake
To incline from the perpendicular.
Raster
A digital image, or bitmap. A data file representing a rectangular grid of pixels, or points of color, on a computer mon-
itor, paper, or other display device.
Raytracing
A method for rendering 3D computer graphic images. It traces the path taken by a ray of light from the camera
through the scene, then calculates the reflection, refraction, or absorption of the ray when it intersects objects in the
scene.
Render
To generate a photorealistic image of a 3D model using a raytracing and/or radiosity algorithm to perform lighting
calculations.
Rendered Mode
A display mode where solid textures and colors are applied to surfaces, creating a realistic 3D effect.
Rendered Outline Mode
A display mode where solid colors and textures are applied to surfaces, and the surfaces are outlined with a dark line
for high definition.
Retaining Wall
A wall constructed to contain a lateral force, such as a bank of dirt.
Revision Cloud
A cloud shape drawn around an area of your drawing to bring attention to that area.
Rigid Insulation
Non-flexible panels often used on roofs and walls to provide thermal insulation.
Riser
1. The vertical board placed between the treads of a staircase. 2. A vertical run of pipe.
Roller Door
A door made of hinged, horizontal steel or wood panels that move on rollers in overhead and side tracks.
Room Division
A tool used to split an automatic floor into multiple floor surfaces, or define an opening in the floor.
Rough Opening
The opening created in a wall to receive a door or window frame.

- 386 -
 Glossary

Saddle
A small, double-sloping roof built behind upper-story walls or the back side of a chimney to divert water around the
wall or chimney.
Sash
A frame that holds one or more panes of glass and that is set into the window frame.
Scale (print)
The ratio of units on paper to units on the screen. For example, a scale of 1/4" = 1'-0" means that every foot of the model
is represented by 1/4" on paper when the drawing is printed. A wall that is 12' long would be 3" on paper.
Schedule
An itemized report of doors or windows in your project which includes a description and count for each item.
Seat Cut
The horizontal cut that is made when cutting a bird's mouth in a rafter.
Section
A cross-section view created by cutting through the building. Useful for clarifying construction details.
Separator
Any character used to separate words, such as a blank space or punctuation mark.
Setback
The amount of space local zoning regulations require between a lot line and a building line.
Shininess
The ability of a texture to reflect light.
Sill
A member located at the lower side of a rough or finished opening, as a window sill.
Site Boundary
A closed line that shows the legal property boundary (lot lines), and is annotated with bearing text, length text and
peg numbers. You can specify setbacks as well, which define your building envelope.
Slab
Concrete pavement, i.e. driveways, garages, and basement floors.
Slope
Ground that forms an incline. Also, the incline angle of a roof surface.
SmartView
A view of your 3D model that you insert on a worksheet. It can be a 2D plan, elevation, section, 3D QuickView or 3D
Camera view. A SmartView can be instantly updated if you make changes to your model.
Snap Angle
The increment angle your cursor will snap at (if Angle Snap is enabled).
Snap Tracking
Helps you draw objects at specific angles or positions relative to other objects. When snap tracking is turned on, tem-
porary alignment paths appear that are based on object snap points, such as endpoints and midpoints.
Soffit
The area below the eave and overhang. The underside where the roof overhangs the walls.
Solid Filling
Solid shading applied between wall lines in 2D plan view.
Span Table
A list of wall opening widths (spans) with head/sill/jamb configurations for each.
Specular
Reflection that creates highlights on materials, making them appear shiny.
Split L-Shaped Stairs
Stairs that ascend in an L-shaped direction and whose landing is split on a diagonal to make the change in direction.
Spot Point
A point on a TIN terrain mesh that contains X, Y and Z coordinate data. Determines the elevation of the terrain at that
point.
Spreadsheet
A table of values arranged in rows and columns.
Status Bar
The bar below the drawing area that contains the Help message for the current state or action.
Stereo Vision
A 3D view with the added perception of depth when 3D glasses are worn.

- 387 -
Glossary

Stringer
The inclined side of a stair that supports the treads and risers.
Strip Footing
A flat, masonry section, usually concrete, that is wider than the wall it supports. Used to transfer the vertical load of
the wall.
Studs
Members inserted vertically in a wall frame.
Suspended Ceiling
A grid of T-shaped bars hung on wires from overhead support framing, into which removable panels are inserted to
form a finished ceiling that allows easy access to the area above it. Typically found in office buildings and basements.

Tangent Object Snap

Snaps to a point on an object that forms a tangent between the object and another point.
Template
A set of pre-defined properties that determines the setup and outcome of something (like a report).
Temporary Directory
The default directory in which temporary files generated by the program are saved.
Terrain
A piece of land.
Texture Mapping
The way in which a texture (e.g. bitmap image) is applied to the surfaces of an element.
Tile Height
The height of one tile in a texture pattern. The program generates large images by tiling texture bitmaps horizontally
and vertically.
Tilt Door
A door consisting of a single leaf that opens overhead by tilting up (e.g. Tilt Garage Door).
TIN Mesh
Triangulated Irregular Network mesh. A representation of the terrain's surface contours based on a set of spot level
points.
Title Block
A rectangular area in the lower right corner of a construction document which reports information about the drawing,
such as the drawing number, drawing title, and name of the person who prepared the drawing.
Toe Space
A recessed area between the bottom of a cabinet and the floor that allows you to stand close to the cabinet. Also called
a toe kick.
Top Plate
The horizontal framing member nailed to the top of the vertical studs.
Transom
A small window sash above a door that is hinged at bottom so it can be opened inward.
Transparency
The degree to which a texture can be penetrated by light.
Tray Ceiling
A ceiling constructed with the sides angling at approximately 45 degrees or curving to another flat ceiling.
Tread
The horizontal part of a stair that is stepped on.
True North
True North is the geographic North Pole. It is located at 90 degrees North latitude and all lines of longitude converge
at the pole. The Earth's axis connects the north and south poles. The Earth's axis is the line around which the Earth
rotates.
Truss
A variety of members made up into a series of triangles. Used for constructing roofs.
Twip
Abbreviation for 'twentieth of an inch point'. A unit of measure that determines the width of something in print or on
the screen. It equals 1/1440 inch or 1/567 of a centimeter.

- 388 -
 Glossary

Usage
What an element is used for. For example, a piece of wood could be used as a stud or a beam.
UV Mapping
A UV map is a flat, 2D representation of the vertices of the 3D model. It defines where the 2D pixels in your texture
will be placed on the 3D surface.
U-Winder Stairs
Stairs that ascend in a U-shaped direction.

Vector Graphic
The representation of an image through the use of geometric objects such as curves and polygons.
Vector Printing
A vector-based, resolution-independent method of printing that yields sharp, high-quality output. In vector printing,
non-objects such as the background color are not printed.
Velocity
Quickness of motion. The distance covered per second.
Veneer
A layer of stone, brick, stucco or other decorative material that is used to cover a framed wall.
Vent Window
A window made up of two or more segments with one segment acting as a vent.
Very Top Plate
The top member of a framed wall upon which the rafters and ceiling joists rest. Sits above the top plate.
Video Compression
The conversion of data into a format that requires fewer bits, usually so that it can be stored or transmitted more effi-
ciently.
View Filter
A feature that allows you to turn the display of selected objects on or off as well as control their selectability.
View Tabs
Tabs below the drawing area that provide access to open view windows.
VRML
Virtual Reality Modeling Language. The open standard for virtual reality on the Internet.

Winder
One of the wedge-shaped treads that make up a winding or spiral staircase.
Windowing
A selection method where you click and drag a rectangle, from left to right, around elements you want to select.
Wireframe
The default 3D view where all lines making up elements are displayed. It allows you to see through elements.
Wood Section
A 2D drafting symbol used to indicate the presence of wood elements such as blocking or posts.
Worksheet View
A 2D drafting mode where you can prepare working drawings for print.

X Axis
One of the three drawing axes. An X coordinate specifies a horizontal distance.

- 389 -
Glossary

Y Axis
One of the three drawing axes. A Y coordinate specifies a vertical distance.

Z Axis
One of the three drawing axes. The Z coordinate indicates either elevation or depth.
Z Buffer
A block of memory used to store the Z-axis value of a pixel on the screen. Higher depth values improve detail of 3D
display but may slow the system.
Zenith
Culminating point.
Zoom Realtime
Magnifies or shrinks the view as you click and drag with your mouse.
Zoom to Fit
Zooms the drawing to the extents of the drawing area, creating a maximized view of your entire design.
Zoom Window
Magnifies an area of your drawing that you select by windowing.

- 390 -
Index
Symbols setting Global Illumination density 269
setting global location 262
# of Horizontal Panels 32, 36–37 setting plant season 263
# of Horizontal Panes 32, 36–37 setting the lighting 262
# of Vertical Panels 32, 36–37 setting the viewpoint 262
# of Vertical Panes 32, 36–37 specifying lighting exposure 191
surface properties of materials 269
Numerics troubleshooting 270
using antialiasing 267
2D Designer's Plan 181 using physically accurate lighting 189
2D Image export 311 3D Studio export 311
2D Percent Open 149 3D Studio files, importing 308
2D Plan 3D Viewing 182
viewing 181 3D% Open (swing) 30
2D Viewing 181 3DS export 311
2D% Open (swing) 30 3DS import 307–308, 356
3D Camera Views
changing 184
A
changing target height 187
changing the camera height 186 Accessories
changing viewing field angle 187 applying materials 93, 169
changing viewpoint 186 deleting 93, 170
creating 183 editing size 92, 169
displaying 182 exterior 168
displaying camera properties panel 184 interior 91
flying around in 192 moving 92, 168
moving cameras 186 raising/lowering 92, 169
moving the target 186 rotating 92, 169
spinning the view 192 Activate View 182, 186–187, 198
walking around 191 Active with CTRL key only (Auto Scroll) 13
3D Model export 311 Add Assembly 357–358
3D Model view Add Catalog 319
navigating in 191 Add City 262
3D Overview 182 Add Control Point 274
3D Percent Open 149 Add Element 326
3D Perspective 182 Add Group 317
3D Quick View Add Opening Height after Width 226
viewing 182 Add Profile 354
3D Real View Add Sound Node 275
about 261 Add Subgroup 317
adjusting brightness 264–266 Add Text Style 222, 345
adjusting burn 265–266 Adjust Height to Door 32
adjusting intensity of trees and billboards 268 Adjust Height to Window 37
adjusting lights 269 Adjust Support Height (Move Edge) 69
adjusting noise reduction level 268 Adjust Width 32, 37, 59
creating 264 Advanced toolbar color settings 372
creating grayscale output 265 Age, plants 132
editing sky settings 190 Air conditioners, central 102
enabling reflections/shadows 190 Air returns 102
quality level 267 Aligned dimensions 229
saving 265 All (Extents), printing 296

- 391 -
 Index

Angle bearing method 125, 128 inserting with Kitchen Builder Wizard 79
Angle from Joists 159 moving 90
Angle from True North 262 raising/lowering 90
Angle measurement, site boundary 128 rotating 90
Angle of Rotation 289 Apply to All Similar (paintbrush) 178
Angle precision 6, 235, 347 Approx. Edge Spacing 145
Angle Snap 285 Arbors 166
Angle units 235, 347 Arc Direction 127
Angle, imported image 301 Arc Radius 127
Angle, roof accessory 77 Arc, elliptical 245
Angle, slope 118 Arched doors 32
Angled walls 15 Arcs
Animation controlling selectability 215
adding control points 274 converting to 3D building elements 250
adding sounds 275 copying in Model View 242
adjusting Burn value 277 deleting in Model View 242
changing path order 274 drawing in Model View 239
changing speed 278 editing curve in Model View 241
choosing paths to include 274 editing line style in Model View 242
compressing 278 extending to other objects in Model View 241
creating 270 filtering from view 212
deleting path 280 moving in Model View 240
drawing path 270 offsetting in Model View 242
drawing target paths 272 rotating in Model View 240
editing elevation of target 275 stretching in Model View 241
editing frame rate 279 trimming to other objects in Model View 241
editing resolution size 279 Area unit of measure 5
elevating control points 275 Area/Perimeter Calculator 251
moving control points 274 Arraying
permitting brightness adjustments during creation 280 arcs in Model View 242
previewing 273 elements in Model View 176
ray tracing 279 lines in Model View 238
removing path control points 275 walls by offset 17
removing sounds 276 Arrow keys, panning and navigating with 196
repeating during preview 274 Arrow style, leader 224
saving individual frames 278 Artifacts, eliminating 376
saving to file 276 Assemblies
specifying file name 277 applying to materials 339
specifying save location 277 customizing library 357
tilting the camera 275 defining 358
turning paths on/off 280 deleting from library 357
Animation Paths On/Off 280 Attach footings to all similar columns 25
Antialiasing Attach Sound File 280–281
renderings 267 Auto Break walls 18
Apexed doors 32 Auto Extend wall tops 16, 67
App, VR 265 Auto Exterior Dimensions 225
Appearance properties 179, 328 creating 225
Appliances specifying settings for 225
applying colors/materials 91 Auto Interior Dimensions
deleting 91 creating 227
editing size 90 specifying settings 228
in Kitchen Wizard configuration 82, 368 Auto Name 331
inserting 89 Auto Place Outlets 98

- 392 -
 Index

Auto Save Berms/Trenches

setting 292 creating 114
Auto Scroll deleting 115
controlling speed 13 editing height 115
setting to be active with CTRL key only 13 editing shape 115
turning on/off 13 moving 115
Auto texture mapping 179, 329 rotating 115
AutoCAD stretching 115
exporting 2D plan to 311 Bill of Materials 252
exporting 3D model to 311 Billboard 304, 306
Auto-cut terrain around building 111 BIM file
Automatic Name Generation exporting catalog content to 312, 320
modifying formula for 331 exporting project content to 314
using 331 importing 310, 322
Automatically Insert Floors 46 Bird baths 168
AVI export 276 Bitmaps, custom 339
Avoid Saddle Situations 66 Black-and-white renderings, creating 265
Blinds 91
Block Import Options 308
B
Block simplification 330
Background BMP export 311
color 375 BMP import 300, 339
scene 189–190 Board Depth 147, 149
Backsplash, showing 87 Board Offset 147, 149
Backup files 292 Board Spacing 147, 149
Baluster Depth 63 Board Width 147, 149
Baluster Spacing 63 Board-and-Batten shutters 42
Baluster Style 63 Boards, corner 21
Baluster Width 63 Bookshelves 91
Balustrades 61–62 Border lines 259
Bark 141–142 Borders, garden 168
Base Height 287 Borders, wallpaper 20
Base Level, terrain 112 Bottom Rail Depth 63
Base Offset 27, 172 Bottom Rail Height 63, 147, 149
Baseboards 20 Bottom Rail Style 63
Baseline dimensions 230 Bottom Rail Width 63
Baseline Offset (for Baseline dimensions) 234, 346 Boundary line, polygon 249
Baseline offset for walls 8 Boundary, terrain 113
Basement, creating 9 Bowls 91
Bathroom Builder Wizard Box ceilings 52
creating bathroom with 83 Box mapping, material 337
custom configuration 85, 369 Box texture mapping 180, 329
launching automatically at startup 86 Breaking
Bathroom Configuration 85, 369 edging 144
Bathrooms, designing 83 fences 146
Bathtubs 101 lines in Model View 238
Bearing format 128 roofs 70
Bearing text style 128 strip footings 24
Beds 91 walls 18
Beds, garden 141 Brightness
Behavior, light 95 in renderings 265–266
Benches 168 of animations 277

- 393 -
 Index

of rendered images 264, 266 creating 183

of trees and billboards in rendered images 268 displaying 182
permitting adjustments in animations 280 moving cameras 186
Browse More Catalog Content 322 moving the target 186
Building a house 1 Cameras
Building Configuration 4, 367 changing height 186
Building Locations displaying properties 184
adding 20 moving 186
checking which location is current 21 orbiting around model 192
defining 19 placing new 183
defining wall framing options 106 resetting 193
dimming 21 spinning 192
displaying/hiding 210 turning on/off 185
filtering from project estimate 254 Cameras On/Off 185
making a location current 21 Carpet 49
making selectable/non-selectable 214 Cars 168
Building lot 124–125 Cartesian Coordinate System 288
Bulbs, light 96 Catalog Manager 325
Bump mapping 337 Catalog Panel 9
Burn Catalog panel
in animations 277 displaying/hiding 373
in renderings 265–266 moving 374
permitting adjustments in animations 280 resizing 374
searching for elements 13
Catalog Properties 323
C
Catalogs
Cabinets accessing 325
applying finishes 88 accessing libraries 335
deleting 89 adding a group or subgroup 317
editing 2D display 87 adding elements 326
editing properties 87 adding plants from Encyclopedia 133, 140
editing solid fill colors 12 changing order of groups 318
enabling/disabling solid fill 12 copying 323
in Bathroom Wizard configuration 85, 369 creating 319
in Kitchen Wizard configuration 82, 368 deleting elements from 327
inserting 86 deleting groups 318
inserting sinks 89 editing elements 327
inserting with Kitchen Builder Wizard 79 exporting content to a BIM file 312, 320
medicine 91 importing content from other catalogs 310, 322
moving 87 importing manufacturer content 322
raising/lowering 87 importing objects 308
rotating 87 locking 319
solid filling 11 moving subgroups to the root 317
Cable service boxes 93 opening 323
Camera Properties 184, 186–187 renaming groups 318
Camera Properties panel saving 323
closing 185 saving elements in drawing to 318
Camera views searching 13
changing 184 selecting default directory 323
changing target height 187 simplifying an element 330
changing the camera height 186 unlocking 320
changing the viewing field angle 187 viewing properties 323
changing viewpoint 186 Catalogs Directory 323

- 394 -
 Index

Categories deleting 244

customizing categories library 365 deleting in Model View 244
Categories library, customizing 365 drawing in Model View 242
Cathedral ceilings 53 editing line style in Model View 244
CD stands 91 filtering from view 212
Ceiling by Perimeter 51 moving in Model View 243
Ceiling by Picking Points 52 rotating in Model View 243
Ceiling by Room 51 stretching in Model View 244
Ceiling fans 95 City 262
Ceiling Height 19 Clay tiles 73
Ceiling Openings Cleaning equipment 93
creating 55 Clip Terrain 127
curving 55 Clocks 91
removing 56 Close 295
reshaping 55 Close Properties 185, 199, 203
resizing 55 Closed Riser 164
Ceilings Closing
about 51 Camera Properties panel 185
applying colors/materials 54 Elevation Properties panel 199
by Perimeter 51 project estimate dialog 255
by Picking Points 52 projects 295
by Room 51 Section Properties panel 203
cathedral 53 Collision Control 286
curving edges 54 Color
curving openings 55 applying with paintbrush 177
cutting openings 55 background 375
defining height 19 editing for element patterns 180, 328
deleting 55 editing for elements through layers 329
framing 108 editing for layers in layers library 350
moving 53 editing solid fill for elements 12
raising/lowering 54 grid 283
removing openings from 56 loading a toolbar color theme 373
reshaping 53 material 337
reshaping openings 55 saving toolbar color settings to a theme 373
resizing 53 toolbar areas 372
resizing openings 55 toolbars 372
tray 52 Color Bleed 269
Center on wall Color Temperature (light) 353
door 29 Columns
opening 39 creating custom profiles 354
window 34 decorative 168
Center, inserting openings to 29, 34, 39 deleting 28
Central Air Units 102 editing dimensions 27
Central Vac 93 editing elevation 27
Central Vac Outlets 98 editing shape 27
Ceramic tiles 49 inserting 26
Chair Rails 20 inserting mono footings under 25
Chairs 91 moving 27
Change Style 233 Command shortcuts 8
Circles Commander
controlling selectability 215 defining X, Y, Z coordinates 288
converting to 3D building elements 250 displaying 287

- 395 -
 Index

entering values 288 Create New Elevation 198

selecting a reference point 288 Create New from Template 4–5
specifying distance/direction 288–289 Create New Project 4
specifying insertion heights 287 Create New Section 201
turning off 287 Cropped textures 339
using 286 Cropping
using to curve 289 image during import 302
using to rotate 289 Cross-sections 183, 201
Common plant names 135 Crown Molding 20
Component display 330 Cups 91
Compost boxes 93 Current building location 21
Compression, animation 278 Curtains 91
Computers 91 Curving
Concrete floor 49 ceiling edges 54
Connection, railing 62 ceiling openings 55
Context-sensitive help 7 deck edges 158
Continuous dimensions 230 deck openings 162
Continuous Motion setting 197 edging 144
Contours, terrain 112 elements 174
Control Points fills 142
adding to animation path 274 floor openings 50
elevating 275 floors 48
moving 274 pads 122
removing 275 paths 120
Convert Roof to Surfaces 73 site boundary edges 127
Convert to grayscale 265 slabs 122
Converting strip footings 24
drafting objects to 3D elements 250 using the Commander 289
hip to gable 66 walls 17
roofs to surfaces 73 Custom Block import 308, 326
Cooling units 102 Custom door leaf import 356
Coordinate Icon 287 Custom elements 326–327
Coordinates 288 Custom object import 307–308
Copies, print 296–297 Custom textures 339
Copying Customizing
arcs in Model View 242 assemblies library 357
by array in Model View 176 dimension styles library 345
catalogs 323 door leafs library 355
elements 175 labels library 220
elements to other locations 175 light source library 351
lines in Model View 238 line styles library 347
walls 8 line types library 349
walls by offset 17 line weights library 349
Corner accents 168 material filters library 341
Corner Boards 21 material usages library 340
Corner Details materials library 336
adding to walls 21 patterns library 341
deleting 22 profiles library 353
editing 21 Cut an Opening Around Next Story 66
Cost, unit 255 Cut List
Counter, showing 87 filtering locations 254
Country 262 preview 256
Cove Molding 20 printing 256

- 396 -
 Index

viewing 256 reshaping 158

Cut Opening rotating 157
ceilings 55 stretching 158
deck 161 Decorative columns 168
floors 50 Default save directory 293
roofs 73 projects 293
Cutaway view 183 Define Floors 49
Cut-off textures 339 Definition, pattern 342
Cutting terrain around building 111 Degree precision 6
Delete Assembly 357
Deleting
D
animation paths 280
Date, setting for a scene 189 appliances 91
Day Scene 190 arcs in Model View 242
Daylight 189 assemblies 357
Daylight Savings Time 189 berms/trenches 115
Deck Builder Wizard cabinets 89
launching automatically at startup 157 ceiling openings 56
using 154 ceilings 55
Deck Openings circles 244
curving edges 162 circles in Model View 244
inserting 161 columns 28
removing 162 deck openings 162
reshaping 161 deck railings 160
resizing 161 deck stairs 164
Deck Stairs decks 161
adding 162 dimensions in Model View 235
controlling railing display 163 doors 34
deleting 164 dormers 75
editing risers 164 edging 145
editing size 163 electrical elements 99
editing stringers 164 elements 180
editing treads 164 elements from catalog 327
moving 163 elevations 201
Decks equipment 94
adding stairs 162 exterior structures 168
building with Deck Builder Wizard 154 fences 147
building with Deck tool 156 fills 143
changing decking direction 158 floor openings 50–51
changing skirting material 160 floors 49
controlling display of railings 160 furnishings 93, 170
controlling display of skirting 160 gates 149
curving deck edge 158 groups from catalogs and libraries 318
deleting 161 hills 114
displaying footings 159 HVAC elements 103
editing footings 159 lights 97
editing frame 159 lines in Model View 239
editing height 158 mono footings 26
editing posts 159 pads 123
inserting openings 161 paths 120
moving 157 photo board 306
railing style 160 plants 132

- 397 -
 Index

plateaus 117 Dimension to Center 29, 34, 39

plumbing 102 Dimension to Edge 30, 35, 39
polygons in Model View 250 Dimension to stud 227
project trace image 303 Dimensions
railings 64 adding opening height after width 226
rectangles in Model View 248 aligned 229
roof accessories 77 Auto Exterior Dimensions 225
roofs 73 Auto Interior 227
schedules 260 auto interior settings 228
section views 205 baseline 230
shutters 43 changing style globally 233
site boundary 129 changing style in Model View 233
slabs 123 continuous 230
slopes 118 customizing styles 345
sprinklers 166 deleting in Model View 235
stairs 60 dimensioning to stud 227
strip footings 25 displaying/hiding 212
text 223 editing onscreen to move walls 16
text in Model View 223 editing the separator in opening dimensions 227
text styles 221, 344 element dimensions 177, 327
text with leader 224 Exterior Dimension Settings 225
wall openings 42 linear 229
walls 19 making selectable/non-selectable 215
windows 38 moving dimension line 233
wiring 100 overall 231
Density, Global Illumination 269 properties 234, 346
Depth below ground level 159 room 232
Deselect All 17 setting current style in Model View 225
Deselecting elements 17 stretching in Model View 233
Designer's Plan, 2D 181 text style 234, 346
Desks 91 units 234, 346
Detached garages 166 using tape measure 289
Details Dimming Percentage 21
corner 21 Dimming, imported image 302
deck stairs 164 Direction 288–289
doors 33 Direction of deck boards 158
stairs 59 Direction, site boundary edges 126
windows 37 Directories
Dialog help 7 light sources 353
Diffuse material properties 337 project 293
Dimension Lap 234, 346 save 293
Dimension Offset 234, 346 temporary files 295
Dimension Settings textures 339
Auto Exterior 225 Disabling Ortho temporarily 286
Auto Interior 228 Diseases, plant 138
Dimension Styles Dishwashers 89
adding 345 Display (Print) 296–297
current 225 Display All 209–210
deleting 345 Display All But Framing 106
editing 345 Display Filter 209
editing dimensions in Model View 233 filtering building elements from view 210
specifying for text with leader 224 filtering building locations from view 210
updating globally 233 filtering dimensions from view 212

- 398 -
 Index

filtering drafting objects 212 adding sills 20

filtering electrical wiring from view 212 deleting 34
filtering elements on terrain 211 displaying sidelites/highlites 32
filtering notation objects 211 editing details 33
filtering project trace images from view 212, 303 editing leaf 33
filtering text from view 211 editing shape 32
using 209 editing size 31
Display Framing 105 editing swing properties 30
Display Gable 72 editing type 31
Display Mode 205 flip entire 30
Hidden Line 207 flipping swing 30
Patterned 208 importing custom door leafs 356
Realistic 208 inserting 29
Rendered 207 inserting to center 29, 34, 39
Rendered Outline 207 inserting to edge 30, 35, 39
Wireframe 206 lowering 31
Display None 209–211 moving 30
Display of element parts 330 raising 31
Display on startup (Startup screen) 375 removing trim from openings 33
Display Properties (screen) 6 sidelites/highlites 32
Display, improving 376 Dormer
Disposals, garbage 93 deleting 75
Distance inserting 74
measuring in Model View 289 moving 75
specifying in Commander 288 stretching 75
Distance above current location or terrain 172, 331 Dormer Roof 74
Distance from line 128 Down to current location 163
Dividing rooms 47 Down to deck location 163
Division line, moving 47 Down to terrain 163
Division lines 259 Drag and Drop mode 171
Door Bells 98 Drawing Aids 9
Door Leaf Import Wizard 356 Angle Snap 285
Door leafs Collision Control 286
customizing library 355 Grid 283
editing properties 357 Grid Snap 284
importing custom 356 Object Snap 284
Door mats 168 Ortho 286
Door Schedule Snap Tracking 285
defining field layout 258 Drawing Grid 283–284
defining line styles 259 Drawing scale, project trace image 302
defining marks 259 Driveways 118
defining text styles 258 Dryers 89
deleting 260 DST 189
generating 257 Dull finish 269
moving 257 Duplicate 175
printing 258 Duplicate to Locations 8, 175
removing schedule marks 259 DVD players 91
rotating 258 DXF export 311
Door Sills 20 DXF import 307–308, 356
Door Trim 20 Dynamic Cutaway 183
Doors Dynamic Dimensions
adding height after width in dimensions 226 editing to move walls 16

- 399 -
 Index

E rotating 92, 169

Element Filter 210
Edge Height 145 Element help 7
Edge Width 145 Element import 307
Edge, inserting openings to 30, 35, 39 Element Manager 325
Edging Element Properties 255, 325–327, 330, 332
breaking 144 Elements
changing length 144 adding to catalog 326
changing materials 145 editing properties 325, 327
cleaning up corners 143 modifying 18, 171
converting drafting objects to 250 selecting 17
curving 144 Elev from 0 288
deleting 145 Elev from Current 288
editing size 145 Elev from Location 288
inserting 143 Elevate
moving 144 about 172
repeating 16 accessories 92, 169
rotating 144 appliances 90
Edit Assembly 357–358 cabinets 87
Edit City 262 ceilings 54
Edit dimension to move wall 16 doors 31
Edit Door Leaf 357 electrical elements 99
Edit Line 342 electronics 92, 169
Edit mode 16 equipment 94
Edit Profile 355 floors 48
Edit Radius 244 furniture 92, 169
Edit Text Style 221, 344 HVAC elements 103
Editing lights 96
elements in catalog 327 plants 131
elements in drawing 18, 171 plumbing 101
elements in Model View 18, 171 terrain 112
Select/Edit mode 16 wall openings 41
Editing restrictions 319 walls 15
Electrical Elements window 35
applying colors/materials 99 Elevate Control Point 275
deleting 99 Elevation Marks
editing size 99 moving 200
inserting 98 turning on/off 199
moving 98 Elevation Properties 200
raising/lowering 99 Elevation Properties panel
Electrical Junction Box 93 closing 199
Electrical lights noise reduction 268 displaying 198
Electrical Wiring zooming and panning in 198
displaying/hiding 212 Elevation, contours 112
inserting 100 Elevation, terrain 112
making selectable/non-selectable 216 Elevation, walls 15
Electronics Elevations
applying materials 93, 169 creating custom 198
deleting 93, 170 deleting 201
editing size 92, 169 displaying properties 198
inserting 91 editing properties 200
moving 92, 168 moving target 200
raising/lowering 92, 169 turning marks on/off 199

- 400 -
 Index

viewing 197 excluding elements from 256

Ellipse filtering locations from 254
deleting 247 hiding grid lines 253
drawing in Model View 244 opening quantity report in editor 255
editing line style 247 printing cut list 256
moving 246 printing quantity report 254
rotating 246 saving quantity report 254
stretching 247 selecting report template 253
Elliptical Arc viewing quantity report 252
deleting 247 Estimator template 253
drawing in Model View 245 Example projects 5
editing line style 247 Excavated areas 115
moving 246 Excel template 253
rotating 246 Exercise equipment 93
stretching 247 Explicit Height 163
Emissive 269 Exploding
Emissive property, material 337 roofs 73
Enable Screen Tips in Model Views 16 Export to BIM File 312, 320
Enable Sun Light 189–190 Exporting
Encyclopedia 2D Drawing 311
about 134 3D Model 311
accessing 134 catalog content to a BIM file 312, 320
adding plants to catalog from 133, 140 project content to BIM file 314
diseases page 138 to 3D Studio (3DS) 311
inserting plants from 133, 140 to BMP 311
main page 134 to DXF 311
notebook page 137 to IFC file 311
picture page 138 to JPG 311
plant care calendar 136 to PDF file 300
plant filter 139 to Sketchfab 315
searching for a plant 135 to SKP 311
selecting a plant to view 135 to TGA 311
viewing plant information 135 Exposure, scene 189, 191
world map page 137 Extending
End conditions arcs in Model View 241
specifying for exterior dimensions 227 fences 146
Enforce Material Usages 339 lines 237
Enter via spacebar 16 railings 64
Entering wall lengths 286, 288 walls 13
Equipment walls to gable roof 16, 67
applying colors/materials 94 Extension (cut line) 60
deleting 94 Extension Lap 234, 346
editing size 94 Extension Lines 226
inserting 93 Extension Offset 234, 346
moving 93 Extents, printing 296
raising/lowering 94 Exterior Accessories
rotating 93 inserting 168
Estimate Exterior Dimension Settings 225
controlling inclusion of ceiling frame members 108 Exterior dimensions 225
controlling inclusion of floor frame members 107 Exterior Furniture
controlling inclusion of roof frame members 109 inserting 168
editing pricing 255 Exterior Side (wall) 20

- 401 -
 Index

Exterior Structures resizing 141

applying materials 168 rotating 141
deleting 168 solid filling 11
editing size 167 Filter lock 210, 213
inserting 166 Filter, view 209
inserting house templates 166 Filtering
moving 167 building elements for selection 214
rotating 167 building locations for selection 214
Exterior Wall Tops to Roof 16, 67 building locations from view 210
Eyedropper 178 dimensions for selection 215
dimensions from view 212
display 209
F
drafting objects for selection 215
Face slider 31 drafting objects from view 212
Face texture mapping 180, 329 electrical wiring for selection 216
Fascia board 109 electrical wiring from view 212
Fascia Depth 72 element parts from display 330
Fascia Distance 72 elements on locations 210
Faucets 101 landscape elements for selection 214
Fax machines 91 landscape elements from view 211
Feet-Inches locations from project estimate 254
in site boundary 128 materials library 341
working in 5 notation objects for selection 215
Fences notation objects from view 211
breaking 146 plants 139
changing length 146 project trace images for selection 216
changing material 147 project trace images from view 212, 303
deleting 147 selectability 213
editing properties 146 text for selection 215
inserting 145 text from view 211
parts 146 Find and Replace
repeating 16 text in Model View 222
stretching 146 Finding elements in the catalog 13
File name, animation 277 Finding text in Model View 222
File Paths Finishing commands 15
Catalogs Directory 323 Fireplaces 102
Lights Directory 353 Fireplaces, outdoor 168
Projects directory 293 Fit to Page 297–298
Sounds Directory 282 Flip Opening
Temporary Files 295 doors 30
Textures Directory 339 gates 148
Files, recently used 291 wall openings 40
Fill, solid 11–12 windows 35
Filler cabinets 87 Flip Swing
Fills door 30
changing fill material 142 gate 148
creating 141 Flipping
curving 142 door swings 30
deleting 143 doors 30
editing solid fill colors 12 gate swing 148
enabling/disabling solid fill 12 gates 148
moving 141 wall openings 40
reshaping 142 windows 35

- 402 -
 Index

Floor and Foundation Builder Wizard 9 Formulas

Floor by Perimeter 46 defining 359
Floor by Picking Points 46 loading 362
Floor by Room 46 saving 362
Floor Locations testing 361
defining 19 Foundation
filtering from project estimate 254 stepped 15
filtering from view 210 Foundation Builder Wizard 9
making selectable/non-selectable 214 Fountains 168
Floor registers 102 Frame Rate, animation 279
Floor to Floor Distance 20 Frame, door 33
Floors Frame, window 37
about 45 Frames, animation 278
adding a location 20 Framing
applying materials to 49 ceilings 108
building locations 19 displaying 105
building new levels with Wizard 9 displaying all but 106
curving 48 floors 107
curving openings 50 locking visibility 209–210
deleting 49 roofs 72, 109
dimming 21 selecting wall framing member 106
disabling/enabling automatic insertion 46 walls 106
dividing 47 Framing Options
editing solid fill colors 12 defining in building locations 106
editing thickness 48 per building location 20
enabling/disabling solid fill 12 Framing rule
framing 107 selecting for building locations 106
inserting by perimeter 46 Freeze pick 216
inserting by picking points 46 Freezers 89
inserting by room 46 Fresnel 337
inserting openings in 49–50 Front Elevation 197
moving 47 Fully Reflective finish 269
moving defined edges 46 Fully Transparent finish 269
raising/lowering 48 Function (F) keys 8
removing openings 50–51 Furnaces 102
reshaping 47 Furniture
reshaping openings 50 applying materials 93, 169
resizing 47 deleting 93, 170
resizing openings 50 editing size 92, 169
solid filling 11 exterior 168
Flowers 131, 133, 140 interior 91
Fly Around 192, 195–196 moving 92, 168
Fold-up door 31 raising/lowering 92, 169
Follow Path 271 rotating 92, 169
Font 221
Font Style 221
G
Footings
converting drafting objects to 250 Gable board 109
mono 25 Gable dormer 74
strip 23 Gable end appearance 16, 67–68
under deck posts 159 Gable end display 71
Forced gables 70 Gable end walls 68

- 403 -
 Index

Gable Front 75 Handrail Style 63

Gable ladder 109 Handrail Width 63
Gable return type 72 Handrails 61–62
Gable roof 66 Hardwood flooring 49
Gables, mid-fascia 70 Hatching
Gamma correction 265–266 creating hatched polygons in Model View 249
Gap 20 editing for elements 180, 328
Garages, detached 166 editing for polygons in Model View 250
Garbage disposals 93 Head Height 19, 287
Garden Beds 141 Head/Sill/Jamb configuration
Garden borders 168 selecting in building locations 106
Garden boxes 166 Header line style, openings 41
Gas Meters 93 Headers
Gate Height 149 defining for ceiling openings 108
Gate Width 149 defining for floor openings 107
Gates defining for roof openings 109
deleting 149 Heaters 98
editing properties 149 Heating elements 102
flipping 148 Height
flipping swing 148 berm 115
inserting 148 ceiling 19
moving 148 deck 158
Gazebos 166 floor 19
Global illumination 264–265 hill 114
Global Illumination density 269 insertion height 331
Global Position 262 plateau 116
Glossary 8 roof 72
Google SketchUp import 307–308, 356 slope 118
Gradient toolbars 372 specifying before insertion 287
Graininess, preventing in renderings 268 sprinkler 165
Graphics Target 187
improving display 376 wall 19, 14
problems with 376 Height above current location 159
specifying VR view type 188 Height, opening 226
Gravel 141–142 Height, terrain 112
Grayscale renderings, creating 265 Help
Greenhouses 166 context-sensitive help 7
Grid Color 283 online help 7
Grid lines, report 253 Tutor 7
Grid Snap 284 Help string 9
Grid Style 283 Hidden Line 207
Grid, drawing 283–284 Hidden Line display mode 205
Groups Hide All Items Except 217
adding to catalogs and libraries 317 Hiding
Growing plants 132 all except picked 217
animation paths 280
building elements 210
H
building locations 210
Handicap access 57 by picking 216
Handle Style 88 catalog panel 373
Handles 88 dimensions 212
Handrail Depth 63 drafting objects 212
Handrail Height 63 elements on terrain 211

- 404 -
 Index

grid lines in report 253 Import BIM File 310, 322

information panel 373 Import geometry from file 308
notation objects 211 Importing
panel 373 3D Studio files 308
parts of elements 330 BMP files 300
project trace images 212, 303 catalog content from a BIM file 310, 322
text 211 custom objects 307
toolbars 371 door leafs 356
Hiding elements from view 209 DXF files 308
High Gloss finish 269 JPG files 300
Highlites objects 308
doors 32 patterns 341
windows 36–37 photo board 303
Hills project trace image 300
deleting 114 text files 219, 223
editing height/shape 114 TGA files 300
inserting 113 Inches
moving 114 in site boundary 128
Hip board 109 working in 5
Hip to Gable 66 Inclines 117
History, material usage 179 Include element in quantities 256
Horiz. Distance 71 Include First Post 63
Horizontal Separation 33, 37 Include Footings 159
Horizontal Text 235, 347 Include in Framing
Hot tubs 166 ceiling members 108
House Builder Wizard floor members 107
custom configuration 4, 367 roof members 109
launching automatically at startup 4 Include Last Post 63
running 1 Include Opening Trim 33, 38, 41
House Templates 166 Include Path 274
Hug Terrain 121 Include Posts 63, 159
HVAC Elements Include Railings 163
deleting 103 Include Walls 75
editing size 103 Included Angle 289
inserting 102 Infill configuration
moving 102 defining in building locations 106
raising/lowering 103 Info Panel
rotating 103 hiding 373
Hyperlinks moving 374
adding 332 resizing 374
making current 333 Inserting
opening 332 accessories 91
appliances 89
berms/trenches 114
I
cabinets 86
Icon, coordinate 287 ceilings 51–52
IFC export 311 columns 26
Ignore Next Story 66 decks 156
Ignore Wall Dimensions 228 doors 29
Images dormer 74
importing 300 edging 143
Imperial Units 5, 128 electrical elements 98

- 405 -
 Index

electronics 91 Inside Niche Back 40

elements 15 Installation 3
equipment 93 Intensity, light 352
exterior accessories 168 Intensity, tree and billboard 268
exterior furniture 168 Interactive Lighting
exterior structures 166 changing quality 376
fences 145 disabling 376
fills 141 Interface tour 9
floors 46 Interior dimensions 227
furniture 91 Interior Wall Tops to Roof 16, 67
gates 148 Interior Walls
heating elements 102 dimension setting 225
hills/valleys 113 dimension string 225
HVAC elements 102 Intersection lookup table
irrigation 165 selecting in building locations 106
kitchen 79 Interval, contour 112
lights 95, 170 Invert Orbit Navigation 196
mono footings 25 Invert Selection (layers) 350
openings in walls 39 IOR 337
outlets 98 Irrigation
pads 121 deleting 166
paths 118 editing spray range 165
patio 121 editing sprinkler height 165
photo board 305 inserting 165
plants 131 moving 165
plants from Encyclopedia 133, 140
plateaus 115
J
plumbing 101
posts 26 Jacks 98
railings 61–62 Joist Direction 107–108
ramps 57 Joist Member 107–108
retaining walls 123 Joist Spacing 107–108
roofs 65 JPG export 311
sinks 89 JPG import 300
slopes 117 Justification of leader 235, 346
sprinklers 165 Justification of text 219, 222, 258
stairs 57
strip footings 23
switches 98 K
walls 7–9
Keyboard Shortcuts
windows 34
standard 8
wiring 100
using 8–9
Insertion height 331
Kitchen Builder Wizard
Insertion method
custom configuration 82, 368
line-drawn elements 15
launching automatically at startup 83
single-click elements 16
using 79
Insertion offset
Kitchen Configuration 82, 368
doors 29
openings 39
windows 34 L
Insertion point 330
Inside arc direction 127 Labels
Inside Line 128 customizing library 220

- 406 -
 Index

inserting 219 Left Elevation 197

Ladder framing, gable 109 Left Interior Side 20
Lambert model, material properties 337 Left Interior Side (wall) 20
Lamps 95 Length text style 128
Landing Gap (leader) 235, 346 Length, measuring 289
Landing segments 58 Length, site boundary edges 126
Landing Thickness 60 Lengthening
Landscape Lighting 170 fences 146
Landscape orientation 296, 298 lines in Model View 237
Landscaping railings 64
decks 156 strip footings 24
displaying/hiding elements 211 walls 13
edging 143 Lengths, wall 286, 288
exterior accessories 168 Leveling walls 16
exterior furniture 168 Levels, adding 8–9
exterior structures 166 Libraries
fences 145 adding a group or subgroup 317
fills 141 assembly 357
filtering elements for selection 214 categories 365
gates 148 changing order of groups 318
inserting a house template 166 customizing 335
lighting 170 deleting groups 318
paths 118 dimension styles 345
plants 131, 133, 140 door leafs 355
sprinklers 165 exporting to a BIM file 312, 320
Latin plant names 135 labels 220
Lattice, deck 160 light source 351
Launch Startup Screen 375 line styles 347
Launch wizard when starting new project 4, 83, 86, 152, 157 line weights 349
Lawn edging 143 linetypes 349
Layers material filters 341
controlling ability to select objects 350 material usages 340
controlling visibility 350 materials 336
controlling whether plotted 350 moving subgroups to the root 317
deleting in layers library 350 pattern 341
editing for elements 329 phases 364
editing properties in layers library 350 profiles 353
exporting from project to BIM file 314 renaming groups 318
renaming in layers library 350 text styles 221, 344
Layout units of measure 366
stairs 58 usages 363
Leader Library Manager 335
changing style in Model View 224 Lifetime (plants) 135
updating dimension style globally 224 Light posts 170
Leader gap 235, 346 Light Sources
Leader justification 235, 346 customizing library 351
Leader position 235, 346 editing in light fixtures 96
Leader text 224 specifying path to directory 353
Leader with text 223 turning on/off 97
Leaf Depth 33 Light switches 98
Leaf, cabinet 87 Lighting conditions 190–191, 262, 270
Leaf, door 33, 355–357 Lights

- 407 -
 Index

adjusting for 3D Real View 269 trimming 237

changing appearance 97 Lines, grid 253
changing quality of interactive lighting 376 Links 332
deleting 97 Linoleum 49
disabling interactive lighting 376 Liquid finish 269
editing light source 96 Lites
editing size 96 doors 32
inserting 95, 170 windows 37
moving 95 Load pattern 341
raising/lowering 96 Load Theme 373
rotating 96 Loading a formula 362
snap options 95 Location, global 262
turning on/off 97 Locations
Lights directory 353 adding 20
Line Styles allowing a different current location per view window 21
2D headers 41 checking the current location 21
customizing library 347 defining 19
defining in schedules 259 defining wall framing options 106
editing for arc in Model View 242 dimming 21
editing for circles in Model View 244 filtering from project estimate 254
editing for elliptical object 247 filtering from view 210
editing for lines 238 making one current 21
editing for polygons in Model View 249 making selectable/non-selectable 214
editing for rectangles in Model View 248 Lock Catalog to Editing 319–320
editing in site boundary 128 Locking items from filtering 210, 213
editing wiring 100 Logos, manufacturer 343–344
Line types Look Around 192, 195–196
customizing library 349 Look Through 185
editing for elements 329 Lot, building 124–125, 127
editing for layers in layers library 350 Loungers 168
editing in line styles 347 Loveseats 91
Line weights Low Gloss finish 269
customizing 349 Lowering elements 172
editing for elements 329 Lowering the terrain 112
editing for layers in layers library 350 Lowlites 36
editing in line styles 347 Lumens (light intensity) 352
enabling/disabling 350
printing 297–298
M
Line Work properties 180, 328–329
Linear dimensions 229 Magnetic North 263
Lines Mailboxes 168
breaking in Model View 238 Maintain Aspect Ratio 300, 306
controlling selectability 215 Maintain Current Location Per View 21
converting to 3D building elements 250 Maintain Support Height (Move Edge) 69
deleting in Model View 239 Make All Non-Selectable Except 217
drawing in Model View 236 Make Continuous 63
editing style 238 Manufacturer content, importing 322
extending to other objects 237 Manufacturer Logos 344
filtering from view 212 Manufacturers
moving in Model View 236 adding to library 343
offsetting in Model View 238 assigning to materials 337
rotating in Model View 236 attaching to elements 344
stretching in Model View 237 attaching to materials 344

- 408 -
 Index

deleting from library 343 furnishings 93, 169

displaying logos on property pages 344 light fixtures 97
editing in library 343 pads 122
Mapping, pattern 180, 328 paths 120
Mapping, texture 179, 328 plumbing 102
Mark Text sampling materials with eyedropper 178
elevations 200 setting maximum size for material history list 179
sections 204 undoing an application 178
Marks using 177
defining for schedules 259 viewing recently used materials 179
removing from schedules 259 walls 19–20
Match case (Find and Replace) 222 Max Stringer Spacing 59
Match Grid 284 Max. Post Spacing 147
Match whole word (Find and Replace) 222 Max. Riser Height 163
Material Filters Maximized view 194
customizing library 341 Measure, unit 5
using in materials library 341 Measuring
Material history list 179 distances in Model View 289
Material Usages Medicine cabinets 91
assigning to materials 337 Member Schedule
customizing library 340 defining field layout 258
enforcing during material application 339 defining line styles 259
Materials defining schedule marks 259
applying assemblies to 339 defining text styles 258
applying with Materials Paintbrush 177 deleting 260
attaching manufacturers 344 moving 257
changing an element's appearance 179, 328 printing 258
customizing filters 341 removing schedule marks 259
customizing library 336 rotating 258
editing pricing 255, 339 Members
editing properties 337 converting drafting objects to 250
filtering in library 341 creating custom profiles 354
selecting for terrain 112 editing solid fill colors 12
setting maximum size for history list 179 repeating 16
surface properties 269 selecting for wall framing 106
viewing quantity report 252 solid filling 11
viewing recently used 179 Menu shortcuts 8
Materials Library Merging catalogs 310, 312, 320, 322
customizing 336 Mesh Spacing, terrain 112
filtering 341 Meters
Materials List 252 in site boundary 128
Materials Paintbrush utility 93
appliances 91 working in 5
cabinets 88 Metric unit suppression 6
ceilings 54 Metric Units 5, 128
edging 145 Microwaves 89
electrical elements 99 Middle mouse button assignment 196
equipment 94 Middle Rail Height 147, 149
exterior structures 167 Millimeters
fences 147 in site boundary 128
fills 142 working in 5
floors 49 Min number of vertices per component 330

- 409 -
 Index

Mirroring circles in Model View 243

elements in Model View 176 columns 27
Mirrors 91 deck stairs 163
Model View decks 157
background color 375 dimension line 233
Modify Elements 18, 171 doors 30
Modify toolbars 372 dormer roof 75
Moldings 20 edging 144
Mono Footings electrical elements 98
attaching to columns 25 electronics 92, 168
attaching to multiple columns simultaneously 25 elements 171
deleting 26 elements to other locations 175
editing size 26 elevation marks 200
editing type 25 equipment 93
inserting 25 exterior structures 167
moving 26 fills 141
rotating 26 floor division line 47
Monochromatic renderings, creating 265 floor edges 46
Monolithic foundation 9 floors 47
Motion response, zoom and navigation 197 furniture 92, 168
Mouse Controls gates 148
assigning action to middle button 196 hills 114
zooming and navigating 195 HVAC elements 102
Mouse response when zooming and navigating 197 info panel 374
Mouse scroll zooming 194 irrigation 165
Move Camera 186 leader 223
Move Dimension Line 233 leader text 224
Move Edge lights 95
ceiling 53 lines in Model View 236
deck 158 mono footings 26
deck opening 161 paths 119
dormer roof 75 photo board 305
fill 141 plants 131
floor 47 plateaus 116
pad 121 plumbing 101
roof 69 polygons in Model View 249
Move Group to Root 317 ramps 57
Move Group Up/Down 318 rectangles in Model View 248
Move Target 187, 200 roof accessories 76
Move Text roofs 69
text with leader 224 schedules 257
Movies 270 section marks 203
Moving sheds 152
accessories 92, 168 site boundary 126
animation control points 274 slabs 121
appliances 90 slopes 118
arcs in Model View 240 sprinklers 165
berms/trenches 115 stairs 57
by nudging 172 strip footings 24
cabinets 87 target of 3D view 186
cameras 186 text in Model View 220
catalog panel 374 toolbars 373
ceilings 53 wall openings 40

- 410 -
 Index

walls 16 O
windows 35
Mulch 141 Object Import Wizard 307
Mullions Object Properties
door 33 hiding panel 373
window 37 moving 374
Multiple Insert 302 resizing panel 374
Multiple text insert 219, 223 Object Snap Tracking 285
Object Snaps
using 284–285
N using snap tracking 285
Offset 20
Name generation
Offset below roof surface 16, 67
about 331
Offset from wall 20
modifying formula for 331
Offsetting
using 331
arcs in Model View 242
Navigating with the arrow keys 196
lines in Model View 238
Navigating with the mouse 195–196
walls 17
Navigation Speed, adjusting 197
walls from baseline 8
Navigation tools 191
Omitting locations/regions from area/perimeter calculations 251
New Catalog 319
Online Help 7
New elements 326
Opacity, material 337
New Project 4
Open 291
New Project from Template 4–5
Open a Saved Project 291
Newel Depth 63
Open Catalog 323
Newel Spacing 63
Open Current Link 332
Newel Style 63
Open Samples 5
Newel Width 63
Open Template 253
Niche 40
Open with Associated Editor 255
Niche Back Side 40
Opening
Night Scene 190
Catalogs 323
Noise reduction, adjusting for renderings 268
drawings 291
Normal toolbar setting 371
quantity report 255
North (True) 263
report templates 253
Nosing Depth 59
sample projects 5
Nosing, counter 87
Opening dimension separator 227
Nosing, stairs 164
Opening dimensions 226
Notation
Opening header, ceilings 108
controlling selectability 215
Opening header, floors 107
controlling selectability of text 215
Opening header, roofs 109
filtering from view 211
Opening height, adding to dimensions 226
Notation filter 211–212
Opening symbols, window 38
Notebook page (plants) 137
Openings
Notes
2D appearance 41
adding to drawing 219
adding height after width in dimensions 226
adding to element properties 332
adding sills 20
Nudge Distance 172
creating a niche 40
Nudging elements 172
curving in ceilings 55
Number of Backups 292
curving in floors 50
Number of Courses 21
dimension string 225
Number of vertices in object 330
editing shape 41
editing size 41
flipping in walls 40

- 411 -
 Index

inserting 39 rotating 121

inserting in ceilings 55 solid filling 11
inserting in decks 161 stretching 121
inserting in floors 49–50 Page Orientation in printing 298
inserting in roofs 73 Page size 296, 298
inserting to center 29, 34, 39 Paint 20
inserting to edge 30, 35, 39 Paintbrush, materials 177–178
moving in walls 40 Pan tool 184, 194, 198, 202
raising/lowering 41 Panel
removing from ceilings 56 hiding 373
removing from decks 162 moving 374
removing from floors 50–51 resizing 374
removing from roofs 74 Paneled shutters 42
removing from walls 42 Paneling, wood 20
removing trim from doors 33 Panels
removing trim from wall openings 41 editing panel length 18
removing trim from windows 38 moving breaks 18
resizing/reshaping in ceilings 55 Panning the view 194–196
resizing/reshaping in floors 50 Panoramic View, rendering 265
Orbiting 192 Paper Size 296, 298
Orientation 77, 175, 328 Part Number
Orientation (paper) 296, 298 searching by 13
Ortho 286 Partially Reflective 269
Outlets Parts, as assemblies 358
inserting automatically 98 Path lights 170
inserting manually 98 Path Order, animation 274
Outline, terrain 113 Paths
Outside arc direction 127 applying materials 120
Outside Line 128 changing order in animation 274
Ovens 89 choosing for animations 274
Overall Dimension 231 curving 120
Overall dimension string 225 deleting 120
Overall Height 58 deleting for animations 280
Overhang 71, 159, 164 drawing for animations 270
Overhang Drop 71 editing size 120
Override tile size 180, 329 editing solid fill colors 12
Overview, 3D 182 enabling/disabling solid fill 12
inserting 118
moving 119
P
solid filling 11
Pad footings 25 stretching 119
Pads Patio chairs 168
applying materials 122 Patio tables 168
curving 122 Patio umbrellas 168
deleting 123 Patios 121
disabling Hug Terrain option 121 Patterned display mode 180, 205, 208, 328
editing solid fill colors 12 Patterns
editing thickness 122 customizing library 341
enabling/disabling solid fill 12 editing 342
inserting 121 editing for polygons in Model View 250
moving 121 importing 341
reshaping 122 resetting 342
resizing 121 selecting for elements 180, 328

- 412 -
 Index

Pause to review image (animation) 280 diseases page 138

PDF inserting plants from 133, 140
printing to 300 main page 134
Peg style 128 notebook page 137
Peg text style 128 picture page 138
Percentage of simplification 330 plant filter 139
Perimeter, building 251 searching for a plant 135
Perspective view 182 selecting a plant to view 135
Phase Library, customizing 364 viewing plant information 135
Phases world map page 137
assigning to ceiling framing members 109 Plant Filter (encyclopedia) 139
assigning to floor framing members 108 Plant Growth Over Time 132
assigning to roof framing members 110 Plant Season 263
customizing phases library 364 Plant Seasonal Change 133
Phong model, material properties 337 Planters 168
Photo Board Planting Age 132
changing to rotating 306 Plants
changing to stationary 306 adding to catalog from Encyclopedia 133, 140
deleting 306 care calendar 136
editing size 306 changing age 132
importing 303 deleting 132
inserting from catalog 305 diseases 138
making portions transparent 307 editing 2D appearance 132
moving 305 editing elevation 131
raising/lowering 306 Encyclopedia 134
rotating 306 growth over time 132
saving to catalog 305 height and spread 136
Photo copiers 91 inserting 131
Pick and drag 15 inserting from Encyclopedia 133, 140
Pick Items to Hide 216 life expectancy 135
Pick Items to Make Non-Selectable 217 lighting preference 135
Pick Points 16 moving 131
Picnic tables 168 pictures 138
Picture import 300, 303 places of origin 137
Pictures 91 season change 133
Pier footings 25 season color diagram 136
Piers 26 soil preference 135
Pivot door 31 temperature preference 135
Pixel Search Distance 284 type and needs 136
Place New Camera 183 usages 135
Placement on Paper 297 viewing information about 135
Plan import 300 views in Encyclopedia 135
Plan trace 302 water requirements 135
Plan View zone requirements 135
viewing 2D Designer's View 181 Plateaus
viewing 2D Plan 181 deleting 117
Plant Care Calendar 136 editing the height 116
Plant Encyclopedia editing the peak shape 116
about 134 inserting 115
accessing 134 moving 116
adding plants to catalog from 133, 140 reshaping 116
care calendar 136 stretching 116

- 413 -
 Index

Plates 91 Pre-defined labels 219

Play gyms 166 Predefined texture mapping 180, 329
Play Sound 281 Presentation GI Sample Density 269
Plotter selection 296–297 Presentation Mode 188
Plotting 297 Preview cut list 256
Plumb fascia 72 Preview, element 327
Plumb soffit 72 Preview, print 297
Plumbing Preview, turning off in Print dialog 297–298
applying colors/materials 102 Previewing
deleting 102 animations 273
editing size 102 Prices
in Bathroom Wizard configuration 85, 369 applying to finish materials 339
inserting 101 setting for elements 255
moving 101 Print All 297
raising/lowering 101 Print Area 297
rotating 101 Print Display 297
Pocket door 31 Print Line Weights 298
Point light 352 Print Preview 297
Pointer Tool 16 Print Scale 297–298
Polar Coordinate System 288 Print scale 299
Polygon Hatch Print Tiling 299
drawing in Model View 249 Print to File 296, 300
editing hatch pattern in Model View 250 Print to Scale 297–299
Polygons Print Window 297
converting to 3D building elements 250 Printer selection 296–297
deleting in Model View 250 Printing
drawing in Model View 249 across multiple sheets 299
editing hatch pattern in Model View 250 cut list 256
editing style of boundary line in Model View 249 defining a view's print properties 295
moving in Model View 249 drawings 297
rotating in Model View 249 line weights 297
stretching in Model View 249 quantity report 254
Ponds 141 schedules 258
Pools, swimming 166 to a file 299
Portable catalog content 312, 320 to a PDF file 300
Portrait orientation 296, 298 Profiles
Position Offset 58 applying to trim 21
Post Depth 63 creating custom 354
Post edging 143 customizing library 353
Post Extension 147 deleting from library 353
Post Height 63 editing 355
Post Offset 63 selecting for columns 27
Post Position 63 Project Estimate
Post Rotation 63, 147 closing 255
Post Spacing 63 excluding elements from 256
Post Style 63 filtering locations from 254
Post Width 63, 147 hiding grid lines 253
Posts 26, 159 opening quantity report 255
Postscript file, printing to 296 pricing 255
Power mills 168 printing 254
Power, sky settings 189–190 printing cut list 256
Precision of angles 6, 235, 347 saving quantity report 254
Precision of measure 5 selecting report templates 253

- 414 -
 Index

viewing quantity report 252 photo board 306

Project Trace Image plants 132
deleting 303 plumbing 102
displaying/hiding 212, 303 railings 62
importing 300 rectangle 248
making selectable/non-selectable 216 roofs 66, 68, 71–72
resizing 302 section 202, 204
tracing 302 shutters 42
Projections dimension string 225 site boundary 126
Projects slabs 122
closing 295 snap edge 330
exporting content to BIM file 314 stairs 58–60
opening 291 strip footings 23–24
saving 292 text 221
starting new 4 text with leader 224
starting new from specific template 4 wall openings 41
starting new from templates 5 walls 14, 20
starting without using templates 4 windows 36–37
viewing samples 5 working with Property pages 327
Projects Directory 293 Property lines 124–125
Prompt for Template 5 PVC lawn edging 143
Properties
adding notes 332
Q
appliances 90
arc 242 Quality (print) 297
cabinets 87 Quality Level, render 267
camera 184 Quantity 255
catalogs 323 Quantity report
circles 244 editing pricing 255
columns 27 excluding elements from 256
corner details 21 filtering locations 254
deck stairs 163–164 hiding grid lines 253
decks 159–160 opening in associated editor 255
doors 31–33 printing 254
edging 145 saving 254
electrical elements 99 selecting template 253
elements 177, 325–327, 330 viewing 252
elevation 198, 200 Quick keys 8
equipment 94 Quoins 21
exterior structures 167
fences 146
floors 48 R
furnishings 92, 169
Radios 91
gates 149
Radius 289
HVAC elements 103
Radius, arc 241
insertion point 330
Radius, editing 244
irrigation 165
Rafters 72, 109
lights 96
Rail Depth 147, 149
line 238
Rail edging 143
mono footings 25–26
Railing on both sides 163
pads 122
Railing on left side 163
paths 120
Railing on right side 163

- 415 -
 Index

Railing on Stair Center 61 filtering from view 212

Railing on Stair Left 61 moving in Model View 248
Railing on Stair Right 61 rotating in Model View 248
Railings stretching in Model View 248
controlling on deck stairs 163 Rectangular Array 176
deck 160 Recycling boxes 93
deleting 64 Redo 171
displaying on decks 160 Reference angle method 124, 128
editing properties 62 Reference Point 288
horizontal 62 Reflection settings, material 337
lengthening 64 Reflections, enabling 189–190
on both sides of stairs 61 Refrigerators 89
on stair center 61 Registering the software 3
on stair left 61 Remove Control Point 275
on stair right 61 Remove Opening
on stairs automatically 61 ceiling 56
parts 62 deck 162
removing from deck stairs 163 floor 51
repeating 16 roof 74
rotating 64 Remove Sound 281–282
shortening 64 Remove Sound Node 276
stretching 64 Removing
Railings by Picking Points 62 elements 180
Railings on Stairs Automatically 61 Rename layer 350
Raising elements 172 Renaming
Raising the terrain 112 groups in catalogs and libraries 318
Raked fascia 72 Render Panoramic View 265
Raked soffit 72 Render Quality 267
Ramps Rendered display mode 205, 207
inserting 57 Rendered Outline display mode 205, 207
moving 57 Rendering
rotating 57 3D RealView 264
Ranges 89 about 261
Raytracing adjusting brightness 264–266
3D RealView 264 adjusting burn 265–266
animation 279 adjusting intensity of trees and billboards 268
Realistic display mode 208 adjusting lighting 270
Realistic Representation mode 205 adjusting lights 269
Realtime zoom 193 adjusting noise reduction level 268
Rear Elevation 197 creating grayscale output 265
Recently used file list 291 editing sky settings 190
Recently used materials list 179 editing surface properties of materials 269
Recess, wall 40 enabling reflections/shadows 190
Recessed lighting 95 Panoramic View 265
Recording animation 276 saving 265
Records selecting quality level 267
defining formulas 359 setting Global Illumination density 269
Rectangles setting global location 262
controlling selectability 215 setting plant season 263
converting to 3D building elements 250 setting the lighting 262
deleting in Model View 248 setting viewpoint 262
drawing in Model View 247 specifying lighting exposure 191
editing line style in Model View 248 troubleshooting 270

- 416 -
 Index

using antialiasing 267 drawing 123

using physically accurate lighting 189 editing width 14
Repeat 16 Returns, air 102
Repeat Animation During Preview 274 Reverse Starter Course 21
Repeat Insertion 16 Ridge board 109
Replace tool 177 Right angles 286
Replacing Right Elevation 197
elements 177 Right Interior Side 20
text in Model View 222 Right Interior Side (wall) 20
Report Templates Right-click menus 18, 171
opening 253 Rim Joist 107–108
selecting 253 Riser Angle 59
Reports Riser Height 58, 163
cut list 256 Riser Maximum 58
quantity report 252 Risers 164
Requirements, system 1 Roller door 31
Reset Camera 193 Roof Accessories
Reset pattern 342 deleting 77
Reshaping inserting 76
ceiling openings 55 moving 76
ceilings 53 rotating 76
deck openings 161 Roof by Perimeter 65
decks 158 Roof by Picking Points 65
fills 142 Roof vents 76
floor openings 50 Roofs
floors 47 applying materials 73
plateaus 116 breaking 70
polygons in Model View 249 changing way lower-story roof is created 66
rectangles in Model View 248 converting hip to gable 66
roofs 70 converting to surfaces 73
slabs 122 creating gables mid-fascia 70
wiring 100 defining material at gable ends 68
Resize Image 302 deleting 73
Resizing displaying walls beneath gable ends 68
catalog panel 374 editing frame details 72
ceiling openings 55 editing height 72
ceilings 53 editing shape 71
deck openings 161 editing size properties 71
fills 141 extending walls beneath gable ends 16, 67
floor openings 50 framing 109
floors 47 inserting accessories 76
information panel 374 inserting by picking points 65
polygons in Model View 249 inserting openings in 73
project trace images 302 inserting over perimeter walls 65
rectangles in Model View 248 moving 69
slabs 121 removing dormer holes 75
wall layout 13 removing openings from 74
Resolution, animation 279 reshaping 70
Restarting line-drawn elements 16 rotating 69
Retaining Walls selecting for editing 66
applying materials 19 stretching 69–70
converting drafting objects to 250 Room dimensions 232

- 417 -
 Index

Room Division 47 Save indivdual frames to disc 278

Rotating Save location, projects 293
accessories 92, 169 Save Theme 373
appliances 90 Save time (min) 292
arcs in Model View 240 Saving
berms/trenches 115 3D RealView renderings 265
cabinets 87 animation frames individually 278
circles in Model View 243 animations 276–277
decks 157 automatically 292
edging 144 backups 292
electronics 92, 169 catalog content to a BIM file 312, 320
elements 173, 175, 328 catalogs 323
equipment 93 default save location for projects 293
exterior structures 167 elements in drawing to catalog 318
fills 141 formulas 362
furniture 92, 169 photo board to catalog 305
HVAC elements 103 project content to BIM file 314
lights 96 project estimate 254
lines in Model View 236 projects 292
mono footings 26 projects as templates 293
pads 121 quantity report 254
photo board 306 renderings 265
plumbing 101 to 3DS (3D Studio) file 311
polygons in Model View 249 to BMP file 311
railings 64 to DXF file 311
ramps 57 to JPG file 311
rectangles in Model View 248 to TGA file 311
roof accessories 76 to WRL (VRML) file 311
roofs 69 toolbar color themes 373
schedules 258 Scale, pattern 342
sheds 152 Scale, print 297–299
slabs 121 Scale, project trace image 301
sprinklers 165 Scale, view 297, 299
stairs 57 Scaling
text in Model View 221 project trace image 302
using the Commander 289 Scanned plan import 300
walls 17 Scene Properties 189
setting time of day 189
Schedule Marks
S
defining 259
Saddle situations 66 removing 259
Sample projects 5 Schedules
Sampling materials with eyedropper 178 defining field layout 258
Sand 142 defining line styles 259
Sandboxes 166 defining marks 259
Sash, door 33 defining text styles 258
Sash, window 37 deleting 260
Satellite dishes 93 door 257
Saturation, sky settings 189–190 moving 257
Save as grayscale 265 printing 258
Save Catalog 323 removing schedule marks 259
Save Catalog As 323 rotating 258
Save Element to Catalog 305, 318 window 257

- 418 -
 Index

Screen tip display 16 elements on terrain 214

Scroll bars 9, 375 filtering drafting objects 215
Scroll wheel mouse, zooming with 194 Make All Non-Selectable Except 217
Scroll wheel, assigning action to 196 notation objects 215
Scrolling in drawing area 13 Pick Items to Make Non-Selectable 217
Search up (Find and Replace) 222 project trace images 216
Searching text 215
in catalog panel 13 Selection mode 16
in Replace dialog 177 Selection preview 16
Season Change 133 Semi Gloss finish 269
Season Color Diagram 136 Sensors 98
Season, setting 263 Separator, opening dimensions 227
Seasonal Change, plants 133 Set Color 350
Seat (roof) 72 Set Decking Direction 158
Section Marks Set Line Type 350
moving 203 Set Line Weight 350
turning on and off 203 Setbacks 126
Section Properties 204 Shadows, enabling 190
Section Properties panel 202 Shape, column 27
closing 203 Shape, door 32
displaying 202 Shape, sidelite/highlite 32
zooming and panning in 202 Sharing
Section View catalog content 312, 320
changing depth 204 project content 314
changing viewpoint 203 Shed Builder Wizard
creating 201 custom configuration 153, 369
deleting 205 launching at startup 152
displaying 202 using 149
displaying properties 202 Shed Configuration 153, 369
editing properties 204 Shed dormer 74
Select All 17, 213–215 Sheds
Select All Similar 17 building 149
Select elements on current location only while in plan view 18 editing 152
Select None 213–215 inserting pre-made 166
Select Previous 17 moving 152
Select Profile rotating 152
column 27 Sheet size 296, 298
Select/Edit 16 Shelves, book 91
Selecting Shelves, in cabinets 87
deselecting elements 17 Shift key to disable Ortho 286
elements 17 Shingles 73
elements on all locations in 2D 18 Shiny finish 269
floors 17 Shortcut keys 8
Make All Non-Selectable Except 217 Shortcut menus 18, 171
Pick Items to Make Non-Selectable 217 Shortcuts for commands 8–9
roofs 66 Shortening
Selection Filter 209 lines in Model View 237
about 213 railings 64
building locations 214 strip footings 24
dimensions 215 walls 13
electrical wiring 216 Show Backsplash 88
elements on locations 214 Show Boundary (terrain) 113

- 419 -
 Index

Show Contours (terrain) 112 SketchUp export 311

Show Coordinate Icon 287 SketchUp import 307–308, 356
Show Counter 88 Skirting
Show Cut Lines 60 changing material 160
Show Grid 253 controlling display 160
Show Handle 88 SKP export 311
Show Line Weights 350 SKP import 307–308, 356
Show Nosing 88 Sky settings 189–190
Show Riser 58 Skylight noise reduction 268
Show Shelves 88 Slab on Grade 9
Show Toe Space 88 Slabs
Show Trunk in Plan 132 applying materials 122
Show View Contents 297–298 curving 122
Shower curtains 91 deleting 123
Showers 101 editing thickness 122
Shrubs 131, 133, 140 inserting 121
Shutters moving 121
deleting 43 reshaping 122
editing 42 resizing 121
inserting 42 rotating 121
Side Offset 63 stretching 121
Sidelites Sliding door 31
doors 32 Slope Type 71
window 37 Slope Value 71
windows 36 Slopes
Sidewalks 118 creating 117
Sills 20 deleting 118
Simplify 330 editing angle 118
Single Insertion Only 16 editing height 118
Sinks moving 118
inserting 101 stretching 118
inserting into cabinets 89 Sloping walls 15
Site Boundary Smoke detectors 98
bearing method 128 Snap Angle 285
clipping terrain to 127 Snap Edge 330
creating with Angle Bearing Method 125 Snap grid 284
creating with Reference Angle Method 124 Snap light to 95
curving edges 127 Snap tracking 285
defining setback distances 126 Snapping to objects 284–285
deleting 129 Snaps, object 284–285
editing angles 126 Sofas 91
editing edge lengths 126 Soil 142
editing line styles 128 Soil beds 141
editing peg style 128 Soil preference 135
editing text styles 128 Solar panels 76
moving 126 Solar tubes 76
stretching 126 Solid Fill
units of measure 128 disabling for individual elements 12
Size of animation 279 editing colors 12
Size of elements 177, 327 turning on 11
Size of terrain 111 Solid view 207
Size, door 31 Solution Type 66
Sketchfab Export 315 Sounds

- 420 -
 Index

adding to animation 275 Standard Report Form 253

attaching to catalog elements 281 Start a New Project 4
attaching to elements in drawing 280 Starting elevation, contours 112
playing 281 Starting the program 3
removing from animation 276 Startup screen
removing from catalog elements 282 disabling 375
removing from elements 281 enabling 375
selecting default directory 282 Stationary photo board 303, 306
Sounds Directory 282 Status Bar 374
Spacebar as Enter key 16 Step Back
Spacer for filler cabinets 87 Materials Paintbrush 178
Spacing along Beam 159 walls by baseline 8
Span tables Stepped footings 23
defining in building locations 106 Stepping walls 15
Specify Framing Stereos 91
ceilings 108 Stereoscopic VR viewing 188
floors 107 Stories
roofs 72, 109 adding 8–9
Specify Target 271 creating locations for 20
Specular 269 Stoves 89
Specular settings, material 337 Stretching
Speed improvement 16 arcs in Model View 241
Speed, animation 278 berms/trenches 115
Speed, navigation 197 ceiling openings 55
Speed, zoom 197 ceilings 53
Sphere mapping, material 337 circles in Model View 244
Spinning 192, 196 decks 158
Splitting floors 47 dimensions in Model View 233
Spot light 352 dormer roof 75
Spot light cone angle 352 edging 144
Spray, sprinkler 165 fences 146
Sprinklers fills 141–142
deleting 166 floor edges 46
editing height 165 floor openings 50
editing spray range 165 floors 47
inserting 165 leader 223
moving 165 lines in Model View 237
rotating 165 path elements 119
Square Footage, building 251 plateaus 116
Stairs polygons in Model View 249
adding to deck 162 railings 64
deleting 60 rectangles in Model View 248
editing cut line 60 roofs 69–70
editing details 59 site boundary 126
editing layout 58 slabs 121
editing size 58 slopes 118
inserting 57 strip footings 24
landing segments 58 walls 13
moving 57 wiring 100
parts 58 Stringer Side Offset 59
rotating 57 Stringer Thickness 59
segments 58 Stringer Width 60

- 421 -
 Index

Stringers 164 Target

Strip Footings changing height 187
breaking 24 moving 186
converting drafting objects to 250 spinning around camera 192
curving 24 Target paths 272
deleting 25 Telephone service boxes 93
editing size 24 Telephones 91
editing type 23 Televisions 91
inserting 23 Temperature, color 353
lengthening/shortening 24 Template houses 166
moving/stretching 24 Templates
repeating 16 creating 293
Strip Footings Attached to Walls 23 creating thumbnails for 293
Structures, exterior 166 disabling use of on project startup 4
Studs prompting for at project startup 5
dimensioning to 227 setting directory 294
selecting member type 106 specifying descriptions for 293
Subgroups starting new projects from a specific template 4
adding to catalogs and libraries 317 starting new projects from templates 4–5
moving to root 317 Templates (report)
Subtracting locations/regions from area/perimeter opening 253
calculations 251 selecting for estimate 253
Sun light, enabling/disabling 189 Templates (view filter)
Sun Power 189–190 applying 218
Sun Shadows, enabling 189–190 creating 218
Support height above main roof 74 deleting 218
Support Height, roof surface 72 editing 218
Suppress display of metric units 6 Temporary Files Directory 295
Suppress trailing zeros 6 Tennis Courts 166
Surface Properties 269, 337 Terrain
Surfaces clipping to site boundary 127
converting roofs to 73 cutting around the building 111
editing solid fill colors 12 defining base level 112
Survey 124–125 defining mesh spacing 112
Suspended ceilings 54 defining size 111
Swing displaying/hiding 211
editing door swing properties 30 displaying/hiding boundary 113
flipping door swing 30 selecting a material 112
flipping gate swing 148 turning on/off 113
window symbols 38 Testing a formula 361
Swing Type 30, 149 Text
Swings 166 adding in Model View 219
Switches 98 adding text with a leader in Model View 223
Symbols, window opening 38 changing the style in Model View 221
System requirements 1 customizing labels library 220
customizing text style library 221, 344
deleting in Model View 223
T
displaying/hiding 211
Tabbed toolbars 371 editing content 221
Tables 91 editing justification 222
Tag Elements with Schedule Mark 257, 259 editing leader text 224
Tags, schedule 259 finding and replacing in Model View 222
Tape Measure 289 globally updating styles 221

- 422 -
 Index

moving in Model View 220 Tile Height/Width 180, 329

moving leader text in Model View 224 Tile, floor 49
rotating in Model View 221 Tiled printing 299
selection filtering 215 Tilt door 31
Text Color 221, 372 Tilt, light source 97
Text Height 221 Tilting camera in animation 275
Text Styles Time of day, setting for a scene 189
adding 221, 344 Toasters 89
defining in schedules 258 Toe Depth 88
deleting 221, 344 Toe Height 88
editing 221, 344 Toilets 101
editing in drawing 221 Tool help 7
editing in site boundary 128 Toolbar Areas 372
elevation marks 200 Toolbars 9
section marks 204 color of toolbar areas 372
specifying for text with leader 224 customizing colors and effects 372
updating globally 221 displaying 371
Text with Leader 235, 346 displaying in non-tabbed format 371
adding in Model View 223 displaying in tabbed format 371
deleting 224 free-floating 371
editing text in Model View 224 hiding 371
editing text style in Model View 224 loading a color theme 373
moving text in Model View 224 moving 373
updating style globally 224 saving color settings to a theme 373
Texture Mapping 179, 329 Tooltip display 16
Textured display mode 207 Top Rail Height 147, 149
Textures Total Steps 58
applying to elements 177 Towel racks 91
applying to material 337 Trace image 300
appropriate sizing for 339 Tracing a plan 302
cropped/cut-off 339 Trailing zeros, suppressing 6
custom 339 Trampolines 166
from outside sources 339 Transferring content between catalogs 310, 312, 320, 322
selecting for terrain 112 Transformer Box 93
Textures Directory 339 Translate X 288
TGA export 311 Translate Y 288
TGA import 300 Transom
Themes door 33
loading toolbar color themes 373 window 37
saving toolbar color themes 373 Transparency, in photo board 307
Thermostats 98 Transparency, of material 269, 337
Thickness Trash cans 93
backsplash 88 Trash Compactors 89
counter 87 Tray ceilings 52
door leaf 33 Tread Run 58, 163
floor 48 Treads 164
line 349 Tree and billboard intensity 268
pads 122 Trees 131, 133, 140
paths 120 Trellises 168
roof 71 Trenches, creating 114
Three-dimensional viewing 182 Trim
Thumbnail, creating for template 293 adding to walls 20

- 423 -
 Index

applying profiles to 21 V
removing from doors 33
removing from wall openings 41 Valley board 109
removing from window openings 38 Vanities
Trim basepoint 21 in Bathroom configuration 85, 369
Trimming inserting 86
arcs 241 Varnished 269
lines 237 Vaulted ceilings 53
True North, calculating 263 VCRs 91
Trunk Diameter 132 Vents 102
Trusses 72 Vents, roof 76
Tubs 101 Vert. Distance 71
Turbines 168 Vertical Separation 33, 37
Tutor 7 Video Compression, animation 278
TXT report template 253 Videos 270
View Angle, 3D camera view 186–187
View Angle, animation 270
U View Elevation 197, 199–200
View Filter 209
U-Factor
controlling selectability of building locations 214
adding to schedules 258
controlling selectability of dimensions 215
Underlining in menus 8
controlling selectability of drafting objects 215
Undo 171
controlling selectability of electrical wiring 216
Undo material application 178
controlling selectability of notation objects 215
Uniform Scale 167
controlling selectability of project trace images 216
Uninstalling the program 2
controlling selectability of text 215
Units of Measure
controlling selection of elements on locations 214
changing 5
controlling selection of landscape elements 214
customizing library 366
creating a template 218
in dimensions 234–235, 346–347
filtering building elements from view 210
in site boundary 128
filtering building locations from view 210
suppressing metric units 6
filtering dimensions from view 212
suppressing trailing zeros 6
filtering drafting objects 212
Unlocking a catalog 320
filtering electrical wiring from view 212
Update Roof 75
filtering landscape elements from view 211
Update Style
filtering notation objects 211
dimension 233
filtering project trace images from view 212, 303
text 221
filtering the display 209
text with leader 224
selection filtering 213
Usage (plants) 135
View Filter Templates
Usages
applying 218
assigning to ceiling framing members 109
creating 218
assigning to floor framing members 108
deleting 218
assigning to roof framing members 110
editing 218
customizing material usages library 340
View Manager
customizing usages library 363
defining a view's print properties 295
Usages library, customizing 363
View Project Estimate 255
Use encyclopedia object 133, 140
View Properties 326
Use No Template 4
View Scale 297, 299
Use physically accurate lighting 189
View Section 202
Use Space as Enter 16
View Windows
Use Specific Template 4
allowing a different current location per window 21
Utility meters 93
defining print properties 295

- 424 -
 Index

editing print scale 299 breaking 18

Viewing breaking into specific lengths 18
2D Designer's Plan 181 converting drafting objects to 250
2D Plan 181 copying by offset 17
3D Camera Views 182 creating a niche 40
3D QuickView 182 creating with Floor and Foundation Builder 9
changing the display mode 205 creating with House Builder Wizard 1
cut list 256 curving 17
different locations per view window 21 deleting 19
dynamic cutaway views 183 disabling solid fill per wall 12
in 2D 181 displaying at gable ends 68
in 3D 182–184 dividing rooms without using walls 47
presentation mode 188 drawing 7
quantity report 255 editing height 14
virtual reality 188 editing opening shape 41
Viewing field angle 187 editing opening size 41
Viewpoint 186 editing solid fill colors 12
Virtual Reality editing width 14
specifying view type 188 entering precise lengths 286, 288
viewing in 188 extending beneath gable ends 16, 67
Volleyball courts 166 flipping a niche 40
Volume unit of measure 5 inserting 8
VR app, generating panoramic views 265 inserting openings in 39
VRML export 311 lengthening 13
lowering 15
making level 16
W
moving 16
Wainscoting 20 moving breaks 18
Walk Around 191, 195–196 moving openings 40
Walkthroughs 270 offsetting 17
Walkways 118 offsetting from baseline 8
Wall Framing raising 15
about 106 raising/lowering openings 41
selecting framing member 106 removing openings from 42
Wall Height 19, 14 removing trim from door openings 33
Wall infill removing trim from wall openings 41
selecting in building locations 106 removing trim from window openings 38
Wall Panels repeating 16
editing panel length 18 resizing wall layout 13
moving breaks 18 retaining 123
Wallpaper 20 rotating 17
Wallpaper borders 20 selecting framing member 106
Walls shortening 13
adding corner details 21 sloping 15
adding trim 20 solid filling 11
applying materials to 19 stepping 15
applying paint 20 stretching 13
applying paneling 20 Walls by Baseline 8
applying profiles to trim 21 Washers 89
applying wallpaper 20 Washrooms, designing 83
arraying 17 Waste, stringer 59
attaching strip footings 23 Water 141–142

- 425 -
 Index

Water Heaters 102 Deck Builder 154

Weather vanes 168 Door Leaf Import 356
Weight, line 349 Floor and Foundation Builder 9
Wheelchair access 57 House Builder 1
Width, wall 14 Kitchen Builder 79
Wind chimes 168 Object Import 307
Window (Print) 296 Photo Board 303
Window Height 36 Shed Builder 149
Window Opening Symbols 38 Wood edging 143
Window Schedule Wood flooring 49
defining field layout 258 Wood paneling 20
defining line styles 259 Wood stoves 102
defining marks 259 Workspace colors 375
defining text styles 258 World Map page (plants) 137
deleting 260 WRL export 311
generating 257
moving 257
X
printing 258
removing schedule marks 259 X Limit 283
rotating 258 X Origin 343
Window Trim 20 X Spacing 283–284
Window Width 36 X, Y and Z coordinates 288
Windowing selection method 17 XLS template 253
Windows
adding height after width in dimensions 226
adding sills 20 Y
attaching shutters 42
Y Limit 283
controlling opening symbols 38
Y Origin 343
deleting 38
Y Spacing 283–284
displaying lites 36
editing details 37
editing lites 37 Z
editing size properties 36
editing type 36 Zenith 113
flipping 35 Zeros, suppressing in measurements 6
inserting 34 Zones of plants 135
inserting to center 29, 34, 39 Zoom In 184, 193
inserting to edge 30, 35, 39 Zoom Out 184, 193, 198, 202
moving 35 Zoom Previous 195
raising/lowering 35 Zoom Realtime 193, 195
removing trim from openings 38 Zoom Speed, adjusting 197
Wireframe 206 Zoom to Fit 194
Wireframe display mode 205 Zoom Window 194
Wiring Zooming with mouse buttons 195
deleting 100 Zooming with scroll wheel mouse 194
displaying/hiding 212
editing line style 100
inserting 100
making selectable/non-selectable 216
reshaping 100
stretching 100
Wizards
Bathroom Builder 83

- 426 -
Copyright
© 1996-2018 Cadsoft Corporation. No part of this guide or the accompanying software may be reproduced or transmitted,
electronically or mechanically, without written permission from Cadsoft Corporation. Reproduction and transmission
includes, but is not limited to, photocopying, recording, and copying onto any storage and information retrieval system.
Windows is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.